B30 Bus Differential System: Grid Solutions

GE
Grid Solutions Addendum
B30 Bus Differential System

UR Series Instruction Manual
B30 revision: 7.2x
Manual P/N: 1601-0109-AA5 (GEK-119551D)
E83849
GE Grid Solutions
LISTED
650 Markland Street
IND.CONT. EQ.
Markham, Ontario 52TL
GE Multilin's Quality Management
Canada L6C 0M1 System is registered to ISO
9001:2008
Tel: +1 905 927 7070 Fax: +1 905 927 5098 QMI # 005094
UL # A3775
Internet: http://www.GEGridSolutions.com
*1601-0109-AA5*
Copyright © 2017 GE Multilin Inc. All rights reserved.
B30 Bus Differential System UR Series Instruction Manual revision 7.2x.
FlexLogic, FlexElement, FlexCurve, FlexAnalog, FlexInteger, FlexState, EnerVista,
CyberSentry, HardFiber, Multilin, and GE Multilin are trademarks or registered
trademarks of GE Multilin Inc.
The contents of this manual are the property of GE Multilin Inc. This
documentation is furnished on license and may not be reproduced in whole or
in part without the permission of GE Multilin. The content of this manual is for
informational use only and is subject to change without notice.
Part number: 1601-0109-AA5 (August 2017)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. GETTING STARTED 1.1 IMPORTANT PROCEDURES

1.1.1 CAUTIONS AND WARNINGS ........................................................................... 1-1
1.1.2 INSPECTION PROCEDURE ............................................................................. 1-2
1.2 UR OVERVIEW
1.2.1 INTRODUCTION TO THE UR ........................................................................... 1-3
1.2.2 HARDWARE ARCHITECTURE ......................................................................... 1-3
1.2.3 SOFTWARE ARCHITECTURE.......................................................................... 1-4
1.3 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE
1.3.1 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS .............................................................................. 1-5
1.3.2 SOFTWARE INSTALLATION ............................................................................ 1-5
1.3.3 CONFIGURING THE B30 FOR SOFTWARE ACCESS .................................... 1-7
1.3.4 USING THE QUICK CONNECT FEATURE....................................................... 1-9
1.3.5 CONNECTING TO THE B30 RELAY............................................................... 1-14
1.3.6 SETTING UP CYBERSENTRY AND CHANGING DEFAULT PASSWORD ... 1-16
1.4 UR HARDWARE
1.4.1 MOUNTING AND WIRING............................................................................... 1-17
1.4.2 COMMUNICATIONS........................................................................................ 1-17
1.4.3 FACEPLATE DISPLAY .................................................................................... 1-17
1.5 USING THE RELAY
1.5.1 FACEPLATE KEYPAD..................................................................................... 1-18
1.5.2 MENU NAVIGATION ....................................................................................... 1-18
1.5.3 MENU HIERARCHY ........................................................................................ 1-18
1.5.4 RELAY ACTIVATION....................................................................................... 1-19
1.5.5 RELAY PASSWORDS ..................................................................................... 1-19
1.5.6 FLEXLOGIC CUSTOMIZATION ...................................................................... 1-19
1.5.7 COMMISSIONING ........................................................................................... 1-19
2. PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.1 INTRODUCTION

2.1.1 OVERVIEW........................................................................................................ 2-1
2.1.2 SECURITY ......................................................................................................... 2-3
2.1.3 IEC 870-5-103 PROTOCOL............................................................................... 2-7
2.2 ORDER CODES
2.2.1 OVERVIEW........................................................................................................ 2-8
2.2.2 ORDER CODES WITH ENHANCED CT/VT MODULES ................................... 2-8
2.2.3 ORDER CODES WITH PROCESS BUS MODULES ...................................... 2-11
2.2.4 REPLACEMENT MODULES ........................................................................... 2-14
2.3 SIGNAL PROCESSING
2.3.1 UR SIGNAL PROCESSING ............................................................................. 2-17
2.4 SPECIFICATIONS
2.4.1 PROTECTION ELEMENTS ............................................................................. 2-19
2.4.2 USER-PROGRAMMABLE ELEMENTS ........................................................... 2-20
2.4.3 MONITORING .................................................................................................. 2-21
2.4.4 METERING ...................................................................................................... 2-21
2.4.5 INPUTS ............................................................................................................ 2-22
2.4.6 POWER SUPPLY ............................................................................................ 2-23
2.4.7 OUTPUTS ........................................................................................................ 2-23
2.4.8 COMMUNICATION PROTOCOLS .................................................................. 2-24
2.4.9 INTER-RELAY COMMUNICATIONS ............................................................... 2-25
2.4.10 ENVIRONMENTAL .......................................................................................... 2-26
2.4.11 TYPE TESTS ................................................................................................... 2-27
2.4.12 PRODUCTION TESTS .................................................................................... 2-27
2.4.13 APPROVALS ................................................................................................... 2-28
2.4.14 MAINTENANCE ............................................................................................... 2-28
3. HARDWARE 3.1 DESCRIPTION

3.1.1 PANEL CUTOUT ............................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.2 REAR TERMINAL LAYOUT............................................................................... 3-7
GE Multilin B30 Bus Differential System iii

TABLE OF CONTENTS
3.2 WIRING
3.2.1 TYPICAL WIRING ..............................................................................................3-9
3.2.2 DIELECTRIC STRENGTH................................................................................3-10
3.2.3 CONTROL POWER..........................................................................................3-10
3.2.4 CT/VT MODULES.............................................................................................3-11
3.2.5 PROCESS BUS MODULES .............................................................................3-13
3.2.6 CONTACT INPUTS AND OUTPUTS................................................................3-13
3.2.7 TRANSDUCER INPUTS AND OUTPUTS ........................................................3-25
3.2.8 RS232 FACEPLATE PORT ..............................................................................3-28
3.2.9 CPU COMMUNICATION PORTS.....................................................................3-28
3.2.10 IRIG-B ...............................................................................................................3-31
3.3 DIRECT INPUT AND OUTPUT COMMUNICATIONS
3.3.1 DESCRIPTION .................................................................................................3-32
3.3.2 FIBER: LED AND ELED TRANSMITTERS ......................................................3-34
3.3.3 FIBER-LASER TRANSMITTERS .....................................................................3-34
3.3.4 G.703 INTERFACE...........................................................................................3-36
3.3.5 RS422 INTERFACE .........................................................................................3-39
3.3.6 RS422 AND FIBER INTERFACE .....................................................................3-41
3.3.7 G.703 AND FIBER INTERFACE ......................................................................3-41
3.3.8 IEEE C37.94 INTERFACE................................................................................3-42
3.3.9 C37.94SM INTERFACE ...................................................................................3-45
4. HUMAN INTERFACES 4.1 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE INTERFACE

4.1.1 INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................4-1
4.1.2 CREATING A SITE LIST ....................................................................................4-1
4.1.3 ENERVISTA UR SETUP OVERVIEW ................................................................4-1
4.1.4 ENERVISTA UR SETUP MAIN WINDOW..........................................................4-3
4.2 EXTENDED ENERVISTA UR SETUP FEATURES
4.2.1 SETTINGS TEMPLATES ...................................................................................4-4
4.2.2 SECURING AND LOCKING FLEXLOGIC EQUATIONS....................................4-8
4.2.3 SETTINGS FILE TRACEABILITY.....................................................................4-10
4.3 FACEPLATE INTERFACE
4.3.1 FACEPLATE .....................................................................................................4-13
4.3.2 LED INDICATORS............................................................................................4-14
4.3.3 CUSTOM LABELING OF LEDS .......................................................................4-17
4.3.4 DISPLAY...........................................................................................................4-22
4.3.5 KEYPAD ...........................................................................................................4-22
4.3.6 BREAKER CONTROL ......................................................................................4-22
4.3.7 MENUS .............................................................................................................4-23
4.3.8 CHANGING SETTINGS ...................................................................................4-25
5. SETTINGS 5.1 OVERVIEW

5.1.1 SETTINGS MENU ..............................................................................................5-1
5.1.2 INTRODUCTION TO ELEMENTS ......................................................................5-4
5.1.3 INTRODUCTION TO AC SOURCES..................................................................5-5
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5.2.1 SECURITY..........................................................................................................5-8
5.2.2 DISPLAY PROPERTIES ..................................................................................5-24
5.2.3 CLEAR RELAY RECORDS ..............................................................................5-25
5.2.4 COMMUNICATIONS ........................................................................................5-26
5.2.5 MODBUS USER MAP ......................................................................................5-64
5.2.6 REAL TIME CLOCK .........................................................................................5-64
5.2.7 USER-PROGRAMMABLE FAULT REPORT....................................................5-69
5.2.8 OSCILLOGRAPHY ...........................................................................................5-70
5.2.9 USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS .....................................................................5-72
5.2.10 USER-PROGRAMMABLE SELF TESTS .........................................................5-76
5.2.11 CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS ............................................................................5-76
5.2.12 USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS....................................................5-79
5.2.13 FLEX STATE PARAMETERS ..........................................................................5-83
5.2.14 USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS ........................................................................5-84
iv B30 Bus Differential System GE Multilin

TABLE OF CONTENTS
5.2.15 DIRECT INPUTS AND OUTPUTS ................................................................... 5-86

5.2.16 TELEPROTECTION......................................................................................... 5-94
5.2.17 INSTALLATION................................................................................................ 5-95
5.3 REMOTE RESOURCES
5.3.1 REMOTE RESOURCES CONFIGURATION ................................................... 5-96
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP
5.4.1 AC INPUTS ...................................................................................................... 5-97
5.4.2 POWER SYSTEM............................................................................................ 5-98
5.4.3 SIGNAL SOURCES ......................................................................................... 5-99
5.4.4 BREAKERS.................................................................................................... 5-102
5.4.5 DISCONNECT SWITCHES ........................................................................... 5-106
5.4.6 FLEXCURVES ............................................................................................... 5-109
5.4.7 BUS................................................................................................................ 5-116
5.5 FLEXLOGIC
5.5.1 INTRODUCTION TO FLEXLOGIC ................................................................ 5-117
5.5.2 FLEXLOGIC RULES ...................................................................................... 5-125
5.5.3 FLEXLOGIC EVALUATION ........................................................................... 5-126
5.5.4 FLEXLOGIC EXAMPLE ................................................................................. 5-126
5.5.5 FLEXLOGIC EQUATION EDITOR................................................................. 5-131
5.5.6 FLEXLOGIC TIMERS .................................................................................... 5-131
5.5.7 FLEXELEMENTS........................................................................................... 5-132
5.5.8 NON-VOLATILE LATCHES ........................................................................... 5-137
5.6 GROUPED ELEMENTS
5.6.1 OVERVIEW.................................................................................................... 5-138
5.6.2 SETTING GROUP ......................................................................................... 5-138
5.6.3 BUS DIFFERENTIAL ..................................................................................... 5-139
5.6.4 PHASE CURRENT ........................................................................................ 5-143
5.6.5 NEUTRAL CURRENT.................................................................................... 5-152
5.6.6 GROUND CURRENT..................................................................................... 5-154
5.6.7 BREAKER FAILURE (ANSI 50BF) ................................................................ 5-157
5.6.8 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS .................................................................................. 5-165
5.7 CONTROL ELEMENTS
5.7.1 OVERVIEW.................................................................................................... 5-170
5.7.2 TRIP BUS....................................................................................................... 5-170
5.7.3 SETTING GROUPS ....................................................................................... 5-172
5.7.4 SELECTOR SWITCH..................................................................................... 5-174
5.7.5 DIGITAL ELEMENTS..................................................................................... 5-180
5.7.6 DIGITAL COUNTERS .................................................................................... 5-183
5.7.7 MONITORING ELEMENTS ........................................................................... 5-185
5.8 INPUTS AND OUTPUTS
5.8.1 CONTACT INPUTS........................................................................................ 5-195
5.8.2 VIRTUAL INPUTS.......................................................................................... 5-197
5.8.3 CONTACT OUTPUTS.................................................................................... 5-198
5.8.4 VIRTUAL OUTPUTS ...................................................................................... 5-201
5.8.5 REMOTE DEVICES ....................................................................................... 5-201
5.8.6 REMOTE INPUTS.......................................................................................... 5-202
5.8.7 REMOTE DOUBLE-POINT STATUS INPUTS .............................................. 5-203
5.8.8 REMOTE OUTPUTS...................................................................................... 5-204
5.8.9 RESETTING................................................................................................... 5-204
5.8.10 DIRECT INPUTS AND OUTPUTS ................................................................. 5-205
5.8.11 TELEPROTECTION INPUTS AND OUTPUTS.............................................. 5-209
5.8.12 IEC 61850 GOOSE ANALOGS...................................................................... 5-211
5.8.13 IEC 61850 GOOSE INTEGERS..................................................................... 5-212
5.9 TRANSDUCER INPUTS AND OUTPUTS
5.9.1 DCMA INPUTS .............................................................................................. 5-213
5.9.2 RTD INPUTS.................................................................................................. 5-214
5.9.3 DCMA OUTPUTS .......................................................................................... 5-216
5.10 TESTING
5.10.1 TEST MODE .................................................................................................. 5-219
5.10.2 FORCE CONTACT INPUTS .......................................................................... 5-220
5.10.3 FORCE CONTACT OUTPUTS ...................................................................... 5-221
GE Multilin B30 Bus Differential System v

TABLE OF CONTENTS
6. ACTUAL VALUES 6.1 OVERVIEW

6.1.1 ACTUAL VALUES MENU ...................................................................................6-1
6.2 STATUS
6.2.1 CONTACT INPUTS ............................................................................................6-3
6.2.2 VIRTUAL INPUTS ..............................................................................................6-3
6.2.3 REMOTE INPUTS ..............................................................................................6-3
6.2.4 REMOTE DOUBLE-POINT STATUS INPUTS ...................................................6-4
6.2.5 TELEPROTECTION INPUTS .............................................................................6-4
6.2.6 CONTACT OUTPUTS ........................................................................................6-4
6.2.7 VIRTUAL OUTPUTS ..........................................................................................6-5
6.2.8 REMOTE DEVICES............................................................................................6-5
6.2.9 DIGITAL COUNTERS.........................................................................................6-6
6.2.10 SELECTOR SWITCHES ....................................................................................6-6
6.2.11 FLEX STATES ....................................................................................................6-6
6.2.12 ETHERNET ........................................................................................................6-6
6.2.13 REAL TIME CLOCK SYNCHRONIZING ............................................................6-7
6.2.14 DIRECT INPUTS ................................................................................................6-8
6.2.15 DIRECT DEVICES STATUS ..............................................................................6-8
6.2.16 IEC 61850 GOOSE INTEGERS .........................................................................6-9
6.2.17 EGD PROTOCOL STATUS................................................................................6-9
6.2.18 TELEPROTECTION CHANNEL TESTS...........................................................6-10
6.2.19 REMAINING CONNECTION STATUS .............................................................6-10
6.3 METERING
6.3.1 PARALLEL REDUNDANCY PROTOCOL (PRP) .............................................6-11
6.3.2 METERING CONVENTIONS ...........................................................................6-11
6.3.3 BUS ZONE .......................................................................................................6-14
6.3.4 SOURCES ........................................................................................................6-14
6.3.5 TRACKING FREQUENCY................................................................................6-17
6.3.6 FLEXELEMENTS .............................................................................................6-17
6.3.7 IEC 61580 GOOSE ANALOG VALUES ...........................................................6-18
6.3.8 TRANSDUCER INPUTS AND OUTPUTS ........................................................6-18
6.4 RECORDS
6.4.1 USER-PROGRAMMABLE FAULT REPORTS .................................................6-19
6.4.2 EVENT RECORDS ...........................................................................................6-19
6.4.3 OSCILLOGRAPHY ...........................................................................................6-19
6.5 PRODUCT INFORMATION
6.5.1 MODEL INFORMATION ...................................................................................6-21
6.5.2 FIRMWARE REVISIONS..................................................................................6-21
7. COMMANDS AND 7.1 COMMANDS

TARGETS 7.1.1 COMMANDS MENU ...........................................................................................7-1
7.1.2 VIRTUAL INPUTS ..............................................................................................7-1
7.1.3 CLEAR RECORDS .............................................................................................7-2
7.1.4 SET DATE AND TIME ........................................................................................7-2
7.1.5 RELAY MAINTENANCE .....................................................................................7-2
7.1.6 SECURITY..........................................................................................................7-3
7.2 TARGETS
7.2.1 TARGETS MENU ...............................................................................................7-4
7.2.2 TARGET MESSAGES ........................................................................................7-4
7.2.3 RELAY SELF-TESTS .........................................................................................7-4
8. THEORY OF OPERATION 8.1 INTRODUCTION

8.1.1 BUS DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION .................................................................8-1
8.2 DYNAMIC BUS REPLICA
8.2.1 DYNAMIC BUS REPLICA MECHANISM............................................................8-2
8.2.2 CT RATIO MATCHING .......................................................................................8-3
vi B30 Bus Differential System GE Multilin

TABLE OF CONTENTS
8.3 DIFFERENTIAL PRINCIPLE

8.3.1 BIASED DIFFERENTIAL CHARACTERISTIC ................................................... 8-4
8.3.2 DIFFERENTIAL AND RESTRAINING CURRENTS .......................................... 8-5
8.3.3 ENHANCED SECURITY .................................................................................... 8-6
8.4 DIRECTIONAL PRINCIPLE
8.4.1 CURRENT DIRECTIONAL PROTECTION ........................................................ 8-7
8.5 SATURATION DETECTOR
8.5.1 CT SATURATION DETECTION ........................................................................ 8-8
8.6 OUTPUT LOGIC AND EXAMPLES
8.6.1 OUTPUT LOGIC .............................................................................................. 8-10
8.6.2 INTERNAL AND EXTERNAL FAULT EXAMPLE ............................................ 8-10
9. APPLICATION OF 9.1 OVERVIEW

SETTINGS 9.1.1 INTRODUCTION................................................................................................ 9-1
9.1.2 SAMPLE BUSBAR AND DATA.......................................................................... 9-1
9.2 ZONING AND DYNAMIC BUS REPLICA
9.2.1 DESCRIPTION................................................................................................... 9-3
9.2.2 NORTH BUS ZONE ........................................................................................... 9-3
9.2.3 SOUTH BUS ZONE ........................................................................................... 9-4
9.3 BIASED CHARACTERISTIC BREAKPOINTS
9.3.1 DESCRIPTION................................................................................................... 9-5
9.3.2 HIGH BREAKPOINT .......................................................................................... 9-5
9.3.3 LOW BREAKPOINT........................................................................................... 9-6
9.4 SLOPES AND HIGH SET THRESHOLD
9.4.1 DESCRIPTION................................................................................................... 9-7
9.4.2 EXTERNAL FAULTS ON C-1 ............................................................................ 9-7
9.4.5 EXTERNAL FAULTS ON C-4 .......................................................................... 9-10
9.4.6 EXTERNAL FAULTS ON C-5 .......................................................................... 9-10
9.5 BUS DIFFERENTIAL SETTINGS
9.5.1 DESCRIPTION................................................................................................. 9-11
9.6 ENHANCING RELAY PERFORMANCE
9.6.1 USING SETTING GROUPS............................................................................. 9-12
10. MAINTENANCE 10.1 MODULES

10.1.1 REPLACE A MODULE..................................................................................... 10-1
10.2 BATTERIES
10.2.1 REPLACE BATTERY....................................................................................... 10-3
10.2.2 DISPOSE OF BATTERY.................................................................................. 10-5
10.3 UNINSTALL AND CLEAR FILES AND DATA
10.3.1 UNINSTALL AND CLEAR FILES AND DATA.................................................. 10-8
10.4 REPAIRS
10.4.1 REPAIRS ......................................................................................................... 10-9
10.5 STORAGE
10.5.1 STORAGE...................................................................................................... 10-10
10.6 DISPOSAL
10.6.1 DISPOSAL ..................................................................................................... 10-11
GE Multilin B30 Bus Differential System vii

TABLE OF CONTENTS
A. FLEXANALOG AND A.1 PARAMETER LISTS

FLEXINTEGER A.1.1 FLEXANALOG ITEMS ....................................................................................... A-1
A.1.2 FLEXINTEGER ITEMS .................................................................................... A-14
PARAMETERS
B. MODBUS B.1 MODBUS RTU PROTOCOL

COMMUNICATIONS B.1.1 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................... B-1
B.1.2 PHYSICAL LAYER ............................................................................................ B-1
B.1.3 DATA LINK LAYER ........................................................................................... B-1
B.1.4 MODBUS RTU CRC-16 ALGORITHM .............................................................. B-2
B.2 MODBUS FUNCTION CODES
B.2.1 SUPPORTED FUNCTION CODES ................................................................... B-4
B.2.2 READ ACTUAL VALUES OR SETTINGS (FUNCTION CODE 03/04H) ........... B-4
B.2.3 EXECUTE OPERATION (FUNCTION CODE 05H)........................................... B-5
B.2.4 STORE SINGLE SETTING (FUNCTION CODE 06H)....................................... B-5
B.2.5 STORE MULTIPLE SETTINGS (FUNCTION CODE 10H) ................................ B-6
B.2.6 EXCEPTION RESPONSES............................................................................... B-6
B.3 FILE TRANSFERS
B.3.1 OBTAINING RELAY FILES VIA MODBUS........................................................ B-7
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
B.4.1 MODBUS MEMORY MAP ................................................................................. B-9
B.4.2 DATA FORMATS............................................................................................. B-73
C. IEC 61850 C.1 OVERVIEW

COMMUNICATIONS C.1.1 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................... C-1
C.1.2 COMMUNICATION PROFILES ......................................................................... C-1
C.1.3 FILE TRANSFER BY IEC 61850 ....................................................................... C-2
C.2 SERVER DATA ORGANIZATION
C.2.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................................... C-3
C.2.2 GGIO1: DIGITAL STATUS VALUES ................................................................. C-3
C.2.3 GGIO2: DIGITAL CONTROL VALUES.............................................................. C-3
C.2.4 GGIO3: DIGITAL STATUS AND ANALOG VALUES FROM GOOSE DATA .... C-3
C.2.5 GGIO4: GENERIC ANALOG MEASURED VALUES......................................... C-3
C.2.6 MMXU: ANALOG MEASURED VALUES .......................................................... C-4
C.2.7 PROTECTION AND OTHER LOGICAL NODES............................................... C-4
C.3 SERVER FEATURES AND CONFIGURATION
C.3.1 BUFFERED/UNBUFFERED REPORTING........................................................ C-6
C.3.2 FILE TRANSFER ............................................................................................... C-6
C.3.3 TIMESTAMPS AND SCANNING ....................................................................... C-6
C.3.4 LOGICAL DEVICE NAME ................................................................................. C-6
C.3.5 LOCATION ........................................................................................................ C-6
C.3.6 LOGICAL NODE NAME PREFIXES.................................................................. C-7
C.3.7 CONNECTION TIMING ..................................................................................... C-7
C.3.8 NON-IEC 61850 DATA ...................................................................................... C-7
C.3.9 COMMUNICATION SOFTWARE UTILITIES..................................................... C-7
C.4 GENERIC SUBSTATION EVENT SERVICES: GSSE AND GOOSE
C.4.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................................... C-8
C.4.2 GSSE CONFIGURATION.................................................................................. C-8
C.4.3 FIXED GOOSE .................................................................................................. C-8
C.4.4 CONFIGURABLE GOOSE ................................................................................ C-8
C.4.5 ETHERNET MAC ADDRESS FOR GSSE/GOOSE ........................................ C-11
C.4.6 GSSE ID AND GOOSE ID SETTINGS ............................................................ C-11
C.5 IEC 61850 IMPLEMENTATION VIA ENERVISTA UR SETUP
C.5.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................................... C-12
C.5.2 CONFIGURING IEC 61850 SETTINGS .......................................................... C-13
C.5.3 ABOUT ICD FILES .......................................................................................... C-14
C.5.4 CREATING AN ICD FILE WITH ENERVISTA UR SETUP.............................. C-18
viii B30 Bus Differential System GE Multilin

TABLE OF CONTENTS
C.5.5 ABOUT SCD FILES .........................................................................................C-18

C.5.6 IMPORTING AN SCD FILE WITH ENERVISTA UR SETUP ...........................C-21
C.6 ACSI CONFORMANCE
C.6.1 ACSI BASIC CONFORMANCE STATEMENT.................................................C-23
C.6.2 ACSI MODELS CONFORMANCE STATEMENT ............................................C-23
C.6.3 ACSI SERVICES CONFORMANCE STATEMENT .........................................C-24
C.7 LOGICAL NODES
C.7.1 LOGICAL NODES TABLE ...............................................................................C-27
D. IEC 60870-5-103 D.1 IEC 60870-5-103

COMMUNICATIONS D.1.1 OVERVIEW........................................................................................................D-1
D.1.2 FACTOR AND OFFSET CALCULATION TO TRANSMIT MEASURAND .........D-1
D.1.3 INTEROPERABILITY DOCUMENT ...................................................................D-2
E. IEC 60870-5-104 E.1 IEC 60870-5-104

COMMUNICATIONS E.1.1 INTEROPERABILITY DOCUMENT ...................................................................E-1
E.1.2 IEC 60870-5-104 POINTS .................................................................................E-9
F. DNP COMMUNICATIONS F.1 DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT

F.1.1 DNP V3.00 DEVICE PROFILE .......................................................................... F-1
F.1.2 IMPLEMENTATION TABLE ............................................................................... F-4
F.2 DNP POINT LISTS
F.2.1 BINARY INPUT POINTS.................................................................................... F-8
F.2.2 BINARY AND CONTROL RELAY OUTPUT ...................................................... F-9
F.2.3 COUNTERS ..................................................................................................... F-10
F.2.4 ANALOG INPUTS ............................................................................................ F-11
G. RADIUS SERVER G.1 RADIUS SERVER CONFIGURATION

G.1.1 RADIUS SERVER CONFIGURATION.............................................................. G-1
H. MISCELLANEOUS H.1 CHANGE NOTES

H.1.1 REVISION HISTORY .........................................................................................H-1
H.1.2 CHANGES TO THE B30 MANUAL....................................................................H-2
H.2 ABBREVIATIONS
H.2.1 STANDARD ABBREVIATIONS .........................................................................H-6
H.3 WARRANTY
H.3.1 GE MULTILIN WARRANTY ...............................................................................H-9
INDEX
GE Multilin B30 Bus Differential System ix

TABLE OF CONTENTS
x B30 Bus Differential System GE Multilin

1 GETTING STARTED 1.1 IMPORTANT PROCEDURES
1 GETTING STARTED 1.1IMPORTANT PROCEDURES

Use this chapter for initial setup of your new B30 Bus Differential System. 1
1.1.1 CAUTIONS AND WARNINGS
Before attempting to install or use the device, review all safety indicators in this document to help prevent injury, equipment
damage, or downtime.
The following safety and equipment symbols are used in this document.
Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
DANGER
Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.
WARNING
Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate
CAUTION injury.
Indicates practices not related to personal injury.
NOTICE
A) GENERAL CAUTIONS AND WARNINGS
The following general safety precautions and warnings apply.
Ensure that all connections to the product are correct so as to avoid accidental risk of shock
DANGER and/or fire, for example such as can arise from high voltage connected to low voltage termi-
nals.
Follow the requirements of this manual, including adequate wiring size and type, terminal torque settings, voltage,
current magnitudes applied, and adequate isolation/clearance in external wiring from high to low voltage circuits.
Use the device only for its intended purpose and application.
Ensure that all ground paths are uncompromised for safety purposes during device operation and service.
Ensure that the control power applied to the device, the AC current, and voltage input match the ratings specified
on the relay nameplate. Do not apply current or voltage in excess of the specified limits.
Only qualified personnel are to operate the device. Such personnel must be thoroughly familiar with all safety cau-
tions and warnings in this manual and with applicable country, regional, utility, and plant safety regulations.
Hazardous voltages can exist in the power supply and at the device connection to current transformers, voltage
transformers, control, and test circuit terminals. Make sure all sources of such voltages are isolated prior to
attempting work on the device.
Hazardous voltages can exist when opening the secondary circuits of live current transformers. Make sure that
current transformer secondary circuits are shorted out before making or removing any connection to the current
transformer (CT) input terminals of the device.
For tests with secondary test equipment, ensure that no other sources of voltages or currents are connected to
such equipment and that trip and close commands to the circuit breakers or other switching apparatus are iso-
lated, unless this is required by the test procedure and is specified by appropriate utility/plant procedure.
When the device is used to control primary equipment, such as circuit breakers, isolators, and other switching
apparatus, all control circuits from the device to the primary equipment must be isolated while personnel are
working on or around this primary equipment to prevent any inadvertent command from this device.
Use an external disconnect to isolate the mains voltage supply.
Personal safety can be affected if the product is physically modified by the end user. Modifications to the product
outside of recommended wiring configuration, hardware, or programming boundaries is not recommended end-
use practice. Product disassembly and repairs are not permitted. All service needs to be conducted by the factory.
LED transmitters are classified as IEC 60825-1 Accessible Emission Limit (AEL) Class 1M.
CAUTION Class 1M devices are considered safe to the unaided eye. Do not view directly with optical
instruments.
GE Multilin B30 Bus Differential System 1-1

1.1 IMPORTANT PROCEDURES 1 GETTING STARTED
This product is rated to Class A emissions levels and is to be used in Utility, Substation Industrial
1 environments. Not to be used near electronic devices rated for Class B levels.
1.1.2 INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1. Open the relay packaging and inspect the unit for physical damage.
2. View the rear nameplate and verify that the correct model has been ordered and delivered. The model number is at the
top right.
Model: B30H00HCHF8HH6HM8AP6AU8AW6H
B30
RATINGS:
Mods: 000
Control Power: 88-300V DC @ 35W / 77-265V AC @ 35VA
Bus Differential Relay Contact Inputs: 300V DC Max 10mA
Wiring Diagram:
Inst. Manual:
See manual
1601-0109
Contact Outputs: Refer to Instruction Manual Serial Number: MAZB98000029
E83849 Firmware: D
GE Multilin Mfg. Date: 2012/01/05
PO Num: 600001234.56
- M A A
®
B 9 7 0 0 0 0 9 9 -
Item Num:
® LISTED
IND.CONT. EQ.
52TL - M A A B 9 7 0 0 0 0 9 9 -
836781A3.CDR
FIGURE 1–1: REAR NAMEPLATE (EXAMPLE)

3. Ensure that the following items are included:
• Instruction manual (if ordered)
• GE EnerVista™ DVD (includes the EnerVista UR Setup software and manuals in PDF format)
• Mounting screws
4. If there is any noticeable physical damage, or any of the contents listed are missing, contact GE Grid Solutions as fol-
lows.
GE GRID SOLUTIONS CONTACT INFORMATION AND CALL CENTER FOR PRODUCT SUPPORT:
GE Grid Solutions
650 Markland Street
Markham, Ontario
Canada L6C 0M1
TELEPHONE: Worldwide +1 905 927 7070
Europe/Middle East/Africa +34 94 485 88 54
North America toll-free 1 800 547 8629
FAX: +1 905 927 5098
E-MAIL: Worldwide multilin.tech@ge.com
Europe multilin.tech.euro@ge.com
HOME PAGE: http://www.gegridsolutions.com/multilin
For updates to the instruction manual, firmware, and software, visit the GE Grid Solutions website.
1-2 B30 Bus Differential System GE Multilin

1 GETTING STARTED 1.2 UR OVERVIEW
1.2UR OVERVIEW 1.2.1 INTRODUCTION TO THE UR
The GE Universal Relay (UR) series is a new generation of digital, modular, and multifunction equipment that is easily
1
incorporated into automation systems, at both the station and enterprise levels.
1.2.2 HARDWARE ARCHITECTURE
A) UR BASIC DESIGN
The UR is a digital-based device containing a central processing unit (CPU) that handles multiple types of input and output
signals. The UR device can communicate over a local area network (LAN) with an operator interface, a programming
device, or another UR device.
Input elements CPU module Output elements

Contact inputs Protective elements Contact outputs
Pickup
Virtual inputs Virtual outputs
Dropout
Analog inputs Operate Analog outputs
Input Output
CT inputs status status Remote outputs
VT inputs table Logic Gates table - IEC 61850
Remote inputs
Direct inputs Direct outputs
LAN
Programming Operator
device interface
827822A3.CDR
FIGURE 1–2: UR BLOCK DIAGRAM

The CPU module contains firmware that provides protection elements in the form of logic algorithms, as well as program-
mable logic gates, timers, and latches for control features.
Input elements accept a variety of analog or digital signals from the field. The UR isolates and converts these signals into
logic signals used by the relay.
Output elements convert and isolate the logic signals generated by the relay into digital or analog signals that are used to
control field devices.
The unit and software are backwards-compatible with UR devices.
B) UR SIGNAL TYPES
The contact inputs and outputs are digital signals associated with connections to hard-wired contacts. Both ‘wet’ and ‘dry’
contacts are supported.
The virtual inputs and outputs are digital signals associated with UR-series internal logic signals. Virtual inputs include
signals generated by the local user interface. The virtual outputs are outputs of FlexLogic™ equations used to customize
the device. Virtual outputs can also serve as virtual inputs to FlexLogic equations.
The analog inputs and outputs are signals that are associated with transducers, such as Resistance Temperature Detec-
tors (RTDs).
The CT and VT inputs are analog current transformer and voltage transformer signals used to monitor AC power lines.
The UR-series relays support 1 A and 5 A CTs.
The remote inputs and outputs provide a means of sharing digital point state information between remote UR-series
devices. The remote outputs interface to the remote inputs of other UR-series devices. Remote outputs are FlexLogic oper-
ands inserted into IEC 61850 GSSE and GOOSE messages.

1.2 UR OVERVIEW 1 GETTING STARTED
The direct inputs and outputs provide a means of sharing digital point states between a number of UR-series intelligent
1 electronic devices (IEDs) over dedicated fiber, RS422, or G.703 interface. No switching equipment is required as the IEDs
are connected directly in a ring or redundant (dual) ring configuration. This feature is optimized for speed and intended for
pilot-aided schemes, distributed logic applications, or the extension of the input/output capabilities of a single relay chassis.
1.2.3 SOFTWARE ARCHITECTURE
Firmware is the software embedded in the relay in functional modules that can be installed in any relay as required. This is
achieved with object-oriented design and programming (OOD/OOP) techniques.
Object-oriented techniques involve the use of objects and classes. An object is defined as “a logical entity that contains
both data and code that manipulates data.” A class is the generalized form of similar objects. By using this approach, one
can create a protection class with the protection elements as objects of the class, such as time overcurrent, instantaneous
overcurrent, current differential, undervoltage, overvoltage, underfrequency, and distance. These objects represent com-
pletely self-contained software modules. The same object-class concept can be used for metering, input/output control,
software interface, communications, or any functional entity in the system.
Employing OOD/OOP in the software architecture of the B30 achieves the same features as the hardware architecture:
modularity, scalability, and flexibility. The application software for any UR-series device (for example, feeder protection,
transformer protection, distance protection) is constructed by combining objects from the various functional classes. This
results in a common interface across the UR series.

1 GETTING STARTED 1.3 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE
1.3ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE 1.3.1 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
The relay front panel or the EnerVista UR Setup software can be used to communicate with the relay. The software inter-
1
face is the preferred method to edit settings and view actual values because the computer monitor can display more infor-
mation.
The minimum system requirements for the EnerVista UR Setup software are as follows:
• Pentium 4 (Core Duo recommended)
• Windows XP with Service Pack 2 (Service Pack 3 recommended), Windows 7, or Windows Server 2008 Release 2
64-bit
• 1 GB of RAM (2 GB recommended)
• 500 MB free hard drive space (1 GB recommended)
• 1024 x 768 display (1280 x 800 recommended)
• Serial port
• Ethernet port of the same type as one of the UR CPU ports or a LAN connection to the UR
• Internet access or a DVD drive
The following qualified modems have been tested to be compatible with the B30 and the EnerVista UR Setup software:
• US Robotics external 56K FaxModem 5686
• US Robotics external Sportster 56K X2
• PCTEL 2304WT V.92 MDC internal modem
1.3.2 SOFTWARE INSTALLATION
After ensuring that the requirements for using EnerVista UR Setup software are met, install the software from the GE
EnerVista DVD. Or download the UR EnerVista software from http://www.gegridsolutions.com/multilin and install it.
To install the UR EnerVista software from the DVD:
1. Insert the GE EnerVista DVD into the DVD drive of your computer.
2. Click the Install Now button and follow the instructions.
3. When installation is complete, start the EnerVista Launchpad application.
4. Click the IED Setup section of the Launch Pad window.
FIGURE 1–3: ADDING A UR DEVICE IN LAUNCHPAD WINDOW

5. In the EnerVista Launch Pad window, click the Add Product button and select the appropriate product as follows.
Select the Web option to ensure the most recent software release, or select CD if you do not have an Internet connec-

1.3 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE 1 GETTING STARTED
tion, then click the Add Now button to list software items for the product. EnerVista Launchpad obtains the software
1 from the Internet or DVD and automatically starts the installation program.
FIGURE 1–4: IDENTIFYING THE UR DEVICE TYPE

6. Select the complete path, including the new directory name, where the EnerVista UR Setup software is to be installed.
7. Click the Next button to begin the installation. The files are installed in the directory indicated, and the installation pro-
gram automatically creates icons and adds an entry to the Windows start menu.
8. Click Finish to complete the installation. The UR device is added to the list of installed intelligent electronic devices
(IEDs) in the EnerVista Launchpad window, as shown.
FIGURE 1–5: UR DEVICE ADDED TO LAUNCHPAD WINDOW

1.3.3 CONFIGURING THE B30 FOR SOFTWARE ACCESS
A) OVERVIEW 1
You connect remotely to the B30 through the rear RS485 or Ethernet port with a computer running the EnerVista UR Setup
software. The B30 can also be accessed locally with a computer through the front panel RS232 port or the rear Ethernet
port using the Quick Connect feature.
• To configure the B30 for remote access via the rear RS485 port, see the Configuring Serial Communications section.
• To configure the B30 for remote access via the rear Ethernet port, see the Configuring Ethernet Communications sec-
tion.
• To configure the B30 for local access with a computer through either the front RS232 port or rear Ethernet port, see the
Using the Quick Connect Feature section.
B) CONFIGURING SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS

A computer with an RS232 port and a serial cable is required. To use the RS485 port at the back of the relay, a GE Multilin
F485 converter (or compatible RS232-to-RS485 converter) is required. See the F485 instruction manual for details.
1. Connect the computer to the F485 and the F485 to the RS485 terminal on the back of the UR device, or connect the
computer to the RS232 port on the front of the relay.
2. In the EnerVista Launchpad software on the computer, select the UR device to start the software.
3. Click the Device Setup button to open the Device Setup window, and click the Add Site button to define a new site.
4. Enter a site name in the Site Name field. Optionally add a short description of the site along with the display order of
devices defined for the site. This example uses “Location 1” as the site name. When done, click the OK button. The
new site appears in the upper-left list in the EnerVista UR Setup window.
5. Click the Device Setup button, then select the new site to re-open the Device Setup window.
6. Click the Add Device button to define the new device.
7. Enter a name in the "Device Name” field and a description (optional) of the site.
8. Select “Serial” from the Interface drop-down list. This displays a number of interface parameters that must be entered
for serial communications.
FIGURE 1–6: CONFIGURING SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS

9. Enter the COM port used by the computer, the baud rate, and parity settings from the front panel SETTINGS  PRODUCT
1 SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  SERIAL PORTS menu, and the relay slave address setting from the front panel SETTINGS
 PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  MODBUS PROTOCOL  MODBUS SLAVE ADDRESS menu in their respective
fields.
10. Click the Read Order Code button to connect to the B30 device and upload the order code. If a communications error
occurs, ensure that the EnerVista UR Setup serial communications values entered in the previous step correspond to
the relay setting values.
11. Click the OK button when the relay order code has been received. The new device is added to the Site List window (or
Online window) located in the top left corner of the main EnerVista UR Setup window.
The device has now been configured for RS232 communications. Proceed to the Connecting to the B30 section to begin
communication.
C) CONFIGURING ETHERNET COMMUNICATIONS

Before starting, verify that the Ethernet network cable is properly connected to the Ethernet port on the back of the relay. To
setup the relay for Ethernet communications, you define a Site, then add the relay as a Device at that site.The computer
and UR device must be on the same subnet.
12. Select the “UR” device from the EnerVista Launchpad to start EnerVista UR Setup.
13. Click the Device Setup button to open the Device Setup window, then click the Add Site button to define a new site.
14. Enter the desired site name in the “Site Name” field. If desired, a short description of site can also be entered along
with the display order of devices defined for the site. In this example, we use “Location 2” as the site name. Click the
OK button when complete.
15. The new site appears in the upper-left list in the EnerVista UR Setup window. Click the Device Setup button then
select the new site to re-open the Device Setup window.
16. Click the Add Device button to define the new device.
17. Enter the desired name in the “Device Name” field and a description (optional) of the site.
18. Select “Ethernet” from the Interface drop-down list. This displays a number of interface parameters that must be
entered for proper Ethernet functionality.
FIGURE 1–7: CONFIGURING ETHERNET COMMUNICATIONS

19. Enter the relay IP address specified in the front panel SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  NET-
WORK  IP ADDRESS in the “IP Address” field.
20. Enter the relay slave address and Modbus port address values from the respective settings in the front panel SETTINGS
1
 PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  MODBUS PROTOCOL menu.
21. Click the Read Order Code button to connect to the B30 device and upload the order code. If an communications
error occurs, ensure that the three EnerVista UR Setup values entered in the previous steps correspond to the relay
setting values.
22. Click OK when the relay order code has been received. The new device is added to the Site List window (or Online
window) located in the top left corner of the main EnerVista UR Setup window.
The Site Device has now been configured for Ethernet communications. Proceed to the Connecting to the B30 section to
begin communications.
1.3.4 USING THE QUICK CONNECT FEATURE
A) USING QUICK CONNECT VIA THE FRONT PANEL RS232 PORT

Before starting, verify that the serial cable is properly connected from the computer to the front panel RS232 port with a
straight-through 9-pin to 9-pin RS232 cable.
1. Verify that the latest version of the EnerVista UR Setup software is installed (available from the GE EnerVista CD or
online from http://www.gegridsolutions.com/multilin). See the Software Installation section if not already installed.
3. Click the Quick Connect button to open the Quick Connect dialog box.
4. Select the Serial interface and the correct COM Port, then click Connect.
5. The EnerVista UR Setup software creates a site named “Quick Connect” with a corresponding device also named
“Quick Connect” and displays them at the upper-left of the screen. Expand the sections to view data directly from the
B30 device.
Each time that the EnerVista UR Setup software is initialized, click the Quick Connect button to establish direct communi-
cations to the B30 device. This ensures that configuration of the EnerVista UR Setup software matches the B30 model
number.
B) USING QUICK CONNECT VIA THE REAR ETHERNET PORTS

To use the Quick Connect feature to access the B30 from a computer through Ethernet, first assign an IP address to the
relay from the front panel keyboard.
1. Press the MENU key until the SETTINGS menu displays.
2. Navigate to the SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  NETWORK  IP ADDRESS setting.
3. Enter an IP address, for example “1.1.1.1,” and select the ENTER key to save the value.
4. In the same menu, select the SUBNET IP MASK setting.
5. Enter a subnet IP address, for example “255.0.0.0,” and press the ENTER key to save the value.

Next, use an Ethernet cross-over cable to connect the computer to the rear Ethernet port. In case you need it, the figure
1 shows the pinout for an Ethernet cross-over cable.

4 5 6
3 END 1 END 2
2 7 Pin Wire color Diagram Pin Wire color Diagram
1 8 1 White/orange 1 White/green
2 Orange 2 Green
3 White/green 3 White/orange
4 Blue 4 Blue
5 White/blue 5 White/blue
6 Green 6 Orange
7 White/brown 7 White/brown
8 Brown 8 Brown
842799A1.CDR
FIGURE 1–8: ETHERNET CROSS-OVER CABLE PIN LAYOUT

Now, assign the computer an IP address compatible with the relay’s IP address.
1. From the Windows desktop, right-click the My Network Places icon and select Properties to open the network con-
nections window.
2. Right-click the Local Area Connection icon and select Properties.

3. Select the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) item from the list, and click the Properties button.
4. Click the “Use the following IP address” box.

5. Enter an IP address with the first three numbers the same as the IP address of the B30 relay and the last number dif-
ferent (in this example, 1.1.1.2).
6. Enter a subnet mask equal to the one set in the B30 (in this example, 255.0.0.0).
7. Click the OK button to save the values.
Before continuing, test the Ethernet connection.
1. Open a Windows console window by selecting Start > Run from the Windows Start menu and typing “cmd”.
2. Type the following command, substituting the IP address of 1.1.1.1 with yours:
C:\WINNT>ping 1.1.1.1
3. If the connection is successful, the system returns four replies similar to the following:
Pinging 1.1.1.1 with 32 bytes of data:
Reply from 1.1.1.1: bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=255
Ping statistics for 1.1.1.1:
Packets: Sent = 4, Received = 4, Lost = 0 (0% loss),
Approximate round trip time in milliseconds:
Minimum = 0ms, Maximum = 0ms, Average = 0 ms
4. Note that the values for time and TTL vary depending on local network configuration.
5. If the following sequence of messages appears when entering the C:\WINNT>ping 1.1.1.1 command:

1 Request
Request
timed
timed
out.
out.
Request timed out.
Request timed out.
verify the physical connection between the B30 and the computer, and double-check the programmed IP address in
the PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  NETWORK  IP ADDRESS setting, then repeat step 2.
Hardware error.
Hardware error.
Hardware error.
Hardware error.
verify the physical connection between the B30 and the computer, and double-check the programmed IP address in
the PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  NETWORK  IP ADDRESS setting, then repeat step 2.
Destination host unreachable.
verify the IP address is programmed in the local computer by entering the ipconfig command in the command window.

C:\WINNT>ipconfig
Windows IP Configuration
1
Ethernet adapter <F4FE223E-5EB6-4BFB-9E34-1BD7BE7F59FF>:
Connection-specific DNS suffix. . :
IP Address. . . . . . . . . . . . : 0.0.0.0
Subnet Mask . . . . . . . . . . . : 0.0.0.0
Default Gateway . . . . . . . . . :
Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection:
Connection-specific DNS suffix . :
IP Address. . . . . . . . . . . . : 1.1.1.2
Subnet Mask . . . . . . . . . . . : 255.0.0.0
Default Gateway . . . . . . . . . :
C:\WINNT>
Before using the Quick Connect feature through the Ethernet port, disable any configured proxy settings in Internet
Explorer.
1. Start the Internet Explorer software.
2. Select the Tools > Internet Options menu item and click the Connections tab.
3. Click on the LAN Settings button to open the following window.
4. Ensure that the “Use a proxy server for your LAN” box is not checked.
If this computer is used to connect to the Internet, re-enable any proxy server settings after the computer has been discon-
nected from the B30 relay.
1. Start the Internet Explorer software.
3. Click the Quick Connect button to open the Quick Connect dialog box.
4. Select the Ethernet interface and enter the IP address assigned to the B30, then click the Connect button. The
EnerVista UR Setup software creates a site named “Quick Connect” with a corresponding device also named “Quick
Connect” and displays them at the upper-left of the screen.

5. Expand the sections to view data directly from the B30 device.
1 Each time the EnerVista UR Setup software is initialized, click the Quick Connect button to establish direct communica-
tions to the B30. This ensures that configuration of the EnerVista UR Setup software matches the B30 model number.
When direct communications with the B30 via Ethernet is complete, make the following changes:
1. From the Windows desktop, right-click the My Network Places icon and select Properties to open the network con-
nections window.
2. Right-click the Local Area Connection icon and select the Properties item.
3. Select the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) item from the list provided and click the Properties button.
4. Set the computer to “Obtain a relay address automatically” as shown.
If this computer is used to connect to the Internet, re-enable any proxy server settings after the computer has been discon-
nected from the B30 relay.
AUTOMATIC DISCOVERY OF ETHERNET DEVICES
The EnerVista UR Setup software can automatically discover and communicate to all UR-series IEDs located on an Ether-
net network.
Using the Quick Connect feature, a single click of the mouse triggers the software to automatically detect any UR-series
relays located on the network. The EnerVista UR Setup software then proceeds to configure all settings and order code
options in the Device Setup menu. This feature allows the user to identify and interrogate all UR-series devices at a loca-
tion.
1.3.5 CONNECTING TO THE B30 RELAY
When unable to connect because of an "ACCESS VIOLATION," access Device Setup and refresh the order code for the
device.

1. Open the Display Properties window through the Site List tree as shown. The Display Properties window opens with a
status indicator on the lower left of the EnerVista UR Setup window.
1
Quick action hot links
Expand the site list by double-clicking

or selecting the +/– box.
Communications status indicators:

Green = OK
Red = No communications
UR icon = report is open
842743A3.CDR
2. If the status indicator is red, verify that the Ethernet network cable is properly connected to the Ethernet port on the
back of the relay and that the relay has been properly setup for communications (steps A and B earlier).
If a relay icon appears in place of the status indicator, than a report (such as an oscillography or event record) is open.
Close the report to re-display the green status indicator.
3. The Display Properties settings can now be edited, printed, or changed.
See chapter 4 in this manual or the EnerVista UR Setup Help File for information about the using the EnerVista UR
Setup software interface.
NOTE
QUICK ACTION HOT LINKS

The EnerVista UR Setup software has several quick action buttons to provide instant access to several functions that are
often performed when using B30 relays. From the online window, users can select the relay to interrogate from a pull-down
window, then click the button for the action they want to perform. The following quick action functions are available:
• View the B30 event record
• View the last recorded oscillography record
• View the status of all B30 inputs and outputs
• View all of the B30 metering values
• View the B30 protection summary
• Generate a service report

1.3.6 SETTING UP CYBERSENTRY AND CHANGING DEFAULT PASSWORD
1 If and when first using CyberSentry security, use the following procedure for set up.
1. Log in to the relay as Administrator by using the Value keys on the front panel or through EnerVista connected serially
(so that no IP address is required). If logging in through EnerVista choose Device authentication. Enter the default
password "ChangeMe1#". Note that the "Lock relay" setting needs to be disabled in the Security > Supervisory
menu. When this setting is disabled, configuration and firmware upgrade are possible. By default, this setting is dis-
abled.
2. Enable the Supervisor role if you have a need for it.
3. Make any required changes in configuration, such as setting a valid IP address for communication over Ethernet.
4. Log out of the Administrator account by choosing None.
Next, device or server authentication can be chosen on the login screen, but the choice is available only in EnerVista. Use
device authentication to log in using the five pre-configured roles (Administrator, Supervisor, Engineer, Operator, Observer,
or Administrator and Supervisor when device authentication is disabled). When using a serial connection, only device
authentication is supported. When server authentication is required, characteristics for communication with a RADIUS
server must be configured on the UR. This is possible only through the EnerVista software. The RADIUS server itself also
must be configured. The appendix called RADIUS Server gives an example of how to setup a simple RADIUS server. Once
both the RADIUS server and the parameters for connecting UR to the server have been configured, you can choose server
authentication on the login screen of EnerVista.
FIGURE 1–9: LOGIN SCREEN FOR CYBERSENTRY
During the commissioning phase, you have the option to bypass the use of passwords. Do so by enabling the BYPASS
ACCESS setting under SETTINGS > PRODUCT SETUP > SECURITY > SUPERVISORY. Be sure to disable this bypass setting after
commissioning the device.
You can change the password for any role either from the front panel or through EnerVista.
If using EnerVista, navigate to Settings > Product Setup > Security. Change the Local Administrator Password, for
example. It is strongly recommended that the password for the Administrator be changed from the default. Changing the
passwords for the other three roles is optional.

1 GETTING STARTED 1.4 UR HARDWARE
1.4UR HARDWARE 1.4.1 MOUNTING AND WIRING
See Chapter 3: Hardware for mounting and wiring instructions.

1
1.4.2 COMMUNICATIONS
The EnerVista UR Setup software communicates to the relay via the faceplate RS232 port or the rear panel RS485 / Ether-
net ports. To communicate via the faceplate RS232 port, a standard straight-through serial cable is used. The DB-9 male
end is connected to the relay and the DB-9 or DB-25 female end is connected to the computer COM2 port as described in
the CPU Communication Ports section of chapter 3.
Regional
control
center
Ethernet Remote
10/100 Mbps communications link
Local
control
UR-series IED
EnerVista Engineer
Modem
GE Multilin F485
communications converter
RS485 115 kbps
RS232
EnerVista
Reports
EnerVista
Troubleshooting
Commissioning
Setting changes
842759A2.CDR
FIGURE 1–10: RELAY COMMUNICATION OPTIONS

To communicate through the B30 rear RS485 port from a computer RS232 port, the GE Multilin RS232/RS485 converter
box is required. This device (catalog number F485) connects to the computer using a straight-through serial cable. A
shielded twisted-pair (20, 22, or 24 AWG) connects the F485 converter to the B30 rear communications port. The converter
terminals (+, –, GND) are connected to the B30 communication module (+, –, COM) terminals. See the CPU Communica-
tion Ports section in chapter 3 for details. The line is terminated with an R-C network (that is, 120 Ω, 1 nF) as described in
the chapter 3.
1.4.3 FACEPLATE DISPLAY
All messages are displayed on a backlit liquid crystal display (LCD) to make them visible under poor lighting conditions.
While the keypad and display are not actively being used, the display defaults to user-defined messages. Any high-priority
event-driven message automatically overrides the default message and appears on the display.
Settings files conversion from previous firmware versions is supported.

1.5 USING THE RELAY 1 GETTING STARTED
1.5USING THE RELAY 1.5.1 FACEPLATE KEYPAD
1 Display messages are organized into pages under the following headings: actual values, settings, commands, and targets.
The MENU key navigates through these pages. Each heading page is divided further into logical subgroups.
The MESSAGE keys navigate through the subgroups. The VALUE keys increment or decrement numerical setting values
when in programming mode. These keys also scroll through alphanumeric values in the text edit mode. Alternatively, val-
ues can be entered with the numeric keypad.
The decimal key initiates and advances to the next character in text edit mode or enters a decimal point.
The HELP key can be pressed at any time for context-sensitive help messages.
The ENTER key stores altered setting values.
When entering an IP address on the front panel, key in the first sequence of the number, then press the • key for the deci-
mal place. For example, for 127.0.0.1, press 127, then •, then 0, then •, then 0, then •, then 1. To save the address, press
the ENTER key.
1.5.2 MENU NAVIGATION
Press the MENU key to select a header display page (top-level menu). The header title appears momentarily followed by a
header display page menu item. Each press of the MENU key advances through the following main heading pages:
• Actual values
• Settings
• Commands
• Targets
• User displays (when enabled)
1.5.3 MENU HIERARCHY
The setting and actual value messages are arranged hierarchically. The header display pages are indicated by double
scroll bar characters (), while sub-header pages are indicated by single scroll bar characters (). The header display
pages represent the highest level of the hierarchy and the sub-header display pages fall below this level. The MESSAGE
UP and DOWN keys move within a group of headers, sub-headers, setting values, or actual values. Continually pressing
the MESSAGE RIGHT key from a header display displays specific information for the header category. Conversely, contin-
ually pressing the MESSAGE LEFT key from a setting value or actual value display returns to the header display.
HIGHEST LEVEL LOWEST LEVEL (SETTING

VALUE)
 SETTINGS  SECURITY ACCESS LEVEL:

 PRODUCT SETUP  Restricted
 SETTINGS
 SYSTEM SETUP

1 GETTING STARTED 1.5 USING THE RELAY
1.5.4 RELAY ACTIVATION
The relay is in the default “Not Programmed” state when it leaves the factory. When powered up successfully, the Trouble
1
LED is on and the In Service LED off. The relay in the “Not Programmed” state blocks signaling of any output relay. These
conditions remain until the relay is explicitly put in the “Programmed” state.
Select the menu message SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  INSTALLATION  RELAY SETTINGS
RELAY SETTINGS:
Not Programmed
1. To put the relay in the “Programmed” state, press either of the VALUE keys once and then press ENTER. The face-
plate Trouble LED turns off and the In Service LED turns on.
The settings for the relay can be programmed manually (see Chapter 5) via the faceplate keypad or remotely via the
EnerVista UR Setup software (see the EnerVista UR Setup help file).
1.5.5 RELAY PASSWORDS
A) PASSWORD SECURITY
It is recommended that passwords be set for each security level and assigned to specific personnel. There are two user
security access levels, COMMAND and SETTING.
1. COMMAND
The COMMAND access level restricts the user from making any settings changes, but allows the user to perform the fol-
lowing operations:
• Change state of virtual inputs
• Clear event records
• Clear oscillography records
• Operate user-programmable pushbuttons
2. SETTING
The SETTING access level allows the user to make any changes to any of the setting values.
See the Changing Settings section in Chapter 4 for complete instructions on setting security-level passwords.
NOTE
B) CYBERSENTRY
When the CyberSentry option is purchased, advanced security services are available, using either device authentication or
server authentication using RADIUS. When this option is purchased, the basic password security is disabled automatically.
For more information, see the CyberSentry content in the Security section of the next chapter.
1.5.6 FLEXLOGIC CUSTOMIZATION
FlexLogic equation editing is required for setting user-defined logic for customizing the relay operations. See the FlexLogic
section in Chapter 5.
1.5.7 COMMISSIONING
The B30 requires minimal maintenance after it is commissioned into service. Since the B30 is a microprocessor-based
relay, its characteristics do not change over time. As such, no further functional tests are required. Expected service life is
20 years for UR devices manufactured June 2014 or later when applied in a controlled indoors environment and electrical
conditions within specification.
The B30 performs a number of continual self-tests and takes the necessary action in case of any major errors (see the
Relay Self-tests section in chapter 7). However, it is recommended that B30 maintenance be scheduled with other system
maintenance. This maintenance can involve in-service, out-of-service, or unscheduled maintenance.

1.5 USING THE RELAY 1 GETTING STARTED
In-service maintenance:
1 1. Visual verification of the analog values integrity, such as voltage and current (in comparison to other devices on the
corresponding system).
2. Visual verification of active alarms, relay display messages, and LED indications.
3. LED test.
4. Visual inspection for any damage, corrosion, dust, or loose wires.
5. Event recorder file download with further events analysis.
Out-of-service maintenance:
1. Check wiring connections for firmness.
2. Analog values (currents, voltages, RTDs, analog inputs) injection test and metering accuracy verification. Calibrated
test equipment is required.
3. Protection elements setting verification (analog values injection or visual verification of setting file entries against relay
settings schedule).
4. Contact inputs and outputs verification. This test can be conducted by direct change of state forcing or as part of the
system functional testing.
5. Visual inspection for any damage, corrosion, or dust.
6. Event recorder file download with further events analysis.
7. LED Test and pushbutton continuity check.
Unscheduled maintenance, such as a disturbance causing system interruption:
1. View the event recorder and oscillography or fault report for correct operation of inputs, outputs, and elements.
If it is concluded that the relay or one of its modules is of concern, contact GE Multilin for service.

2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.1 INTRODUCTION
2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.1INTRODUCTION 2.1.1 OVERVIEW
The B30 Bus Differential System is a microprocessor-based relay that provides protection and metering for a busbar with
up to six feeders. Protection is provided by a low impedance percent differential element with features that make it immune
to current transformer (CT) saturation. Both biased (restrained) and unbiased (unrestrained) differential protection functions
are provided.
A dynamic busbar replica mechanism is provided by associating the breaker and switch status signals with the differential
zone currents. 2
The biased bus differential function operates using both the differential and current directional comparison protection princi-
ples. The differential element uses a dual-slope dual-breakpoint characteristic with the restraining current formed as a max-
imum of the input currents for better stability during through-fault conditions and faster operation on internal faults. The
current directional comparison principle checks the angular relationship between the currents.
The biased bus differential protection operates in the two-out-of-two mode for low differential currents. This improves stabil-
ity during CT saturation conditions caused by comparatively low currents combined with unfavorable phenomena, such as
multiple auto-reclose actions. For high differential currents, the bus differential element operates using the differential char-
acteristic alone if CT saturation is not detected. Upon CT saturation detection, the relay switches to the two-out-of-two
operating mode for better through fault stability.
The B30 typical operating time is about 12 ms for fast form-C output contacts and internal usage by user-programmable
logic, and about 15 ms for trip-rated form-A output contacts.
A CT failure alarm function that monitors the level of the differential current is provided. A situation when the differential cur-
rent stays above a pre-defined level for a pre-defined period of time is declared as a CT trouble event, and an alarm is
raised. To prevent false tripping due to CT trouble, undervoltage supervision or an external check zone can be used.
Voltage and current metering is built into the relay as a standard feature. Current parameters are available as total wave-
form root mean square (RMS) magnitude, or as fundamental frequency only RMS magnitude and angle (phasor).
Diagnostic features include an event recorder capable of storing 1024 time-tagged events and oscillography capable of
storing up to 64 records with programmable trigger, content, and sampling rate. The internal clock used for time-tagging
can be synchronized with an IRIG-B signal, using the Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) over the Ethernet port, or
using the Precision Time Protocol (PTP). This precise time stamping allows the sequence of events to be determined
throughout the system. Events can also be programmed (via FlexLogic equations) to trigger oscillography data capture that
can be set to record the measured parameters before and after the event for viewing on a computer. These tools signifi-
cantly reduce troubleshooting time and simplify report generation in the event of a system fault.
Several options are available for communication. A faceplate RS232 port can be used to connect to a computer to program
settings and monitor actual values. The RS232 port has a fixed baud rate of 19.2 kbps. The rear RS485 port allows inde-
pendent access by operating and engineering staff. It can be connected to system computers with baud rates up to
115.2 kbps. All serial ports use the Modbus RTU protocol. The IEC 60870-5-103 protocol is supported on the RS485 inter-
face. Also only one of the DNP, IEC 60870-5-103, and IEC 60870-5-104 protocols can be enabled at any time on the relay.
When the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol is chosen, the RS485 port has a fixed even parity and the baud rate can be either 9.6
kbps or 19.2 kbps. The 100Base-FX or 100Base-T Ethernet interface provides fast, reliable communications in noisy envi-
ronments. The Ethernet port supports IEC 61850, Modbus/TCP, TFTP protocols, PTP (according to IEEE Std. 1588-2008
or IEC 61588), and allows access to the relay via any standard web browser (B30 web pages). The IEC 60870-5-104 pro-
tocol is supported on the Ethernet port. The Ethernet port also supports the Parallel Redundancy Protocol (PRP) of IEC
62439-3 (clause 4, 2012) when purchased as an option.
Settings and actual values can be accessed from the front panel or EnerVista software.
The B30 uses flash memory technology that allows field upgrading as new features are added. The following Single line
diagram illustrates the relay functionality using American National Standards Institute (ANSI) device numbers.

2.1 INTRODUCTION 2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Table 2–1: ANSI DEVICE NUMBERS AND FUNCTIONS

DEVICE FUNCTION DEVICE FUNCTION
NUMBER NUMBER
27P Phase undervoltage 50/87 Unrestrained bus differential
49 Thermal overload protection 51G Ground time overcurrent
50BF Breaker failure 51N Neutral time overcurrent
2 50G Ground instantaneous overcurrent 51P Phase time overcurrent
50N Neutral instantaneous overcurrent 59N Neutral overvoltage
50P Phase instantaneous overcurrent 59X Auxiliary overvoltage
50/74 CT trouble 87B Restrained bus differential
Breaker position and trip
50P 27 50P 50P 27 50P
voltage, and frequency

Metering: current,
51P 51P 51P 51P
50N 50N 50N 50N
51N 51N 51N 51N
50G 50G 50G 50G
51G 51G 51G 51G
50BF 50BF 50BF 50BF
Zone 1
49
87B 50/87 50/74
50_2
59N
Zone 2
87B 50/87 50/74 51_2
59X
B30 Bus Differential Protection System

836719AG.CDR
Figure 2–1: SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM

Table 2–2: OTHER DEVICE FUNCTIONS

FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION
Breaker control Event recorder Teleprotection inputs and outputs
Breaker flashover FlexElements™ (8) Time synchronization over IRIG-B or
IEEE 1588
Contact inputs (up to 96) FlexLogic equations Transducer inputs and outputs
Contact outputs (up to 64) IEC 61850 communications (optional) User-definable displays 2
Control pushbuttons Metering: current, voltage, frequency User-programmable fault reports
CyberSentry™ security Modbus communications User-programmable LEDs
Digital counters (8) Modbus user map User-programmable pushbuttons
Digital elements (48) Non-volatile latches User-programmable self-tests
Direct inputs and outputs (32) Non-volatile selector switch Virtual inputs (64)
Disconnect switches Oscillography Virtual outputs (96)
DNP 3.0 or IEC 60870-5-104 protocol Selector switch
Ethernet Global Data protocol (optional) Setting groups (6)
IEC 60870-5-103 communications Time synchronization over SNTP
(optional)
2.1.2 SECURITY
The following security features are available:

• Password security — Basic security present in the default offering of the product
• EnerVista security — Role-based access to various EnerVista software screens and configuration elements. The fea-
ture is available in the default offering of the product and only in the EnerVista software.
• CyberSentry security — Advanced security options available as a software option. When purchased, the options are
automatically enabled, and the default Password security and EnerVista security are disabled.
Changing the password, or any other setting, does not take the relay out of service. The relay is taken out of service when
a settings file is written to it.
a) ENERVISTA SECURITY
The EnerVista security management system is a role-based access control (RBAC) system that allows an administrator to
manage the privileges of multiple users. This allows for access control of UR devices by multiple personnel within a substa-
tion and conforms to the principles of RBAC as defined in ANSI INCITS 359-2004. The EnerVista security management
system is disabled by default to allow the administrator direct access to the EnerVista software after installation. It is recom-
mended that security be enabled before placing the device in service.
Basic password or enhanced CyberSentry security applies, depending on purchase.
b) PASSWORD SECURITY
Password security is a basic security feature present in the default offering of the product.
Two levels of password security are provided: command and setting.
The following operations are under command password supervision:
• Changing the state of virtual inputs
• Clearing the event records
• Clearing the oscillography records
• Changing the date and time
• Clearing the data logger
• Clearing the user-programmable pushbutton states
The following operations are under setting password supervision:

• Changing any setting

• Test mode operation
The B30 supports password entry from a local or remote connection. Local access is defined as any access to settings or
commands via the faceplate interface. This includes both keypad entry and the through the faceplate RS232 port. Remote
access is defined as any access to settings or commands via any rear communications port. This includes both Ethernet
and RS485 connections. Any changes to the local or remote passwords enables this functionality.
2 When entering a settings or command password via EnerVista or any serial interface, the user must enter the correspond-
ing connection password. If the connection is to the back of the B30, the remote password must be used. If the connection
is to the RS232 port of the faceplate, the local password applies.
Password access events are logged in the Event Recorder.
c) CYBERSENTRY SECURITY
CyberSentry Embedded Security is a software option that provides advanced security services. When this option is pur-
chased, the basic password security is disabled automatically.
CyberSentry provides security through the following features:
• An Authentication, Authorization, Accounting (AAA) Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service (RADIUS) client that
is centrally managed, enables user attribution, provides accounting of all user activities, and uses secure standards-
based strong cryptography for authentication and credential protection.
• A Role-Based Access Control (RBAC) system that provides a permission model that allows access to UR device oper-
ations and configurations based on specific roles and individual user accounts configured on the AAA server (that is,
Administrator, Supervisor, Engineer, Operator, Observer).
• Security event reporting through the Syslog protocol for supporting Security Information Event Management (SIEM)
systems for centralized cybersecurity monitoring.
• Strong encryption of all access and configuration network messages between the EnerVista software and UR devices
using the Secure Shell (SSH) protocol, the Advanced Encryption Standard (AES), and 128-bit keys in Galois Counter
Mode (GCM) as specified in the U.S. National Security Agency Suite B extension for SSH and approved by the
National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) FIPS-140-2 standards for cryptographic systems.
CYBERSENTRY USER ROLES
CyberSentry user roles (Administrator, Engineer, Operator, Supervisor, Observer) limit the levels of access to various UR
device functions. This means that the EnerVista software allows for access to functionality based on the user’s logged in
role.
Example: Administrative functions can be segmented away from common operator functions, or engineering type access,
all of which are defined by separate roles, as shown in the following figure, so that access of UR devices by multiple per-
sonnel within a substation is allowed.
Figure 2–2: CYBERSENTRY USER ROLES
Administrator
Engineer
Operator
Observer Supervisor
842838A2.CDR
The table lists the roles that are supported and their corresponding capabilities.

Table 2–3: PERMISSIONS BY USER ROLE FOR CYBERSENTRY
Roles Administrator Engineer Operator Supervisor Observer

Complete access Complete access Command Authorizes Default role
except for menu writing
CyberSentry
Security
Device Definition R R R R R
Settings 2
|------------ Product Setup
|--------------- Security (CyberSentry) RW R R R R
|--------------- Supervisory see table notes R R see table notes R
|--------------- Display Properties RW RW R R R
Clear relay records
|--------------- (settings) RW RW R R R
|--------------- Communications RW RW R R R
|--------------- Modbus user map RW RW R R R
|--------------- Real Time Clock RW RW R R R
|--------------- Oscillography RW RW R R R
|--------------- Data Logger RW RW R R R
|--------------- Demand RW RW R R R
User Programmable
|--------------- LEDs RW RW R R R
User Programmable
|--------------- self test RW RW R R R
|--------------- Control Pushbuttons RW RW R R R
User programmable
|--------------- Pushbuttons RW RW R R R
|--------------- Flex states RW RW R R R
User definable dis-
|--------------- plays RW RW R R R
|--------------- Direct I/O RW RW R R R
|--------------- Tele-protection RW RW R R R
|--------------- Installation RW RW R R R
|------------ System Setup RW RW R R R
|------------ FlexLogic RW RW R R R
|------------ Grouped Elements RW RW R R R
|------------ Control Elements RW RW R R R
|------------ Inputs / Outputs RW RW R R R
|--------------- Contact Input RW RW R R R
Contact Input thresh-
|--------------- old RW RW R R R
|--------------- Virtual Inputs RW RW R R R
|--------------- Contact Output RW RW R R R
|--------------- Virtual Output RW RW R R R
|--------------- Remote Devices RW RW R R R
|--------------- Remote Inputs RW RW R R R
|--------------- Remote DPS input RW RW R R R
Remote Output DNA
|--------------- Bit Pair RW RW R R R
Remote Output user
|--------------- Bit Pair RW RW R R R
|--------------- Resetting RW RW R R R

Roles Administrator Engineer Operator Supervisor Observer

|--------------- Direct Inputs RW RW R R R
|--------------- Direct Outputs RW RW R R R
|--------------- Teleprotection RW RW R R R
|--------------- Direct Analogs RW RW R R R
|--------------- Direct Integers RW RW R R R
2 IEC61850 GOOSE
|--------------- Analogs RW RW R R R
IEC61850 GOOSE
|--------------- Integers RW RW R R R
|------------ Transducer I/O RW RW R R R
|------------ Testing RW RW R R R
|------------ Front Panel Labels Designer NA NA NA NA NA
|------------ Protection Summary NA NA NA NA NA
Commands RW RW RW R R
|------------ Virtual Inputs RW RW RW R R
|------------ Clear Records RW RW RW R R
|------------ Set date and time RW RW RW R R
User Displays R R R R R
Targets R R R R R
Actual Values R R R R R
|------------ Front Panel Labels Designer R R R R R
|------------ Status R R R R R
|------------ Metereing R R R R R
|------------ Transducer I/O R R R R R
|------------ Records R R R R R
|------------ Product Info R R R R R
Maintenance RW RW R R R
|------------ Modbus Analyzer NA NA NA NA NA
|------------ Change Front Panel RW RW RW R R
|------------ Update Firmware Yes No No No No
|------------ Retrieve File Yes No No No No
Table Notes:
1. RW = read and write access
2. R = read access
3. Supervisor = RW (default), Administrator = R (default), Administrator = RW (only if Supervisor role is disabled)
4. NA = the permission is not enforced by CyberSentry Security
CYBERSENTRY USER AUTHENTICATION
There are two types of authentication supported by CyberSentry that can be used to access the UR device:
• Device Authentication (local UR device authenticates)
• Server Authentication (RADIUS server authenticates)
The EnerVista software allows access to functionality that is determined by the user role, which comes either from the local
UR device or RADIUS server.

The EnerVista software has a device authentication option on the login screen for accessing the UR device. When the
"Device" button is selected, the UR uses its local authentication database and not the RADIUS server to authenticate the
user. In this case, it uses its built-in roles (Administrator, Engineer, Supervisor, Observer, Operator, or Administrator and
Supervisor when Device Authentication is disabled) as login names and the associated passwords are stored on the UR
device. As such, when using the local accounts, access is not user-attributable.
In cases where user attributable access is required especially to facilitate auditable processes for compliance reasons, use
RADIUS authentication only.
When the "Server" Authentication Type option is selected, the UR uses the RADIUS server and not its local authentication 2
database to authenticate the user.
No password or security information are displayed in plain text by the EnerVista software or UR device, nor are they ever
transmitted without cryptographic protection.
CyberSentry Server Authentication
The UR has been designed to automatically direct authentication requests based on user names. In this respect, local
account names on the UR are considered as reserved, and not used on a RADIUS server.
The UR automatically detects whether an authentication request is to be handled remotely or locally. As there are only five
local accounts possible on the UR, if the user ID credential does not match one of the five local accounts, the UR automat-
ically forwards the request to a RADIUS server when one is provided.
If a RADIUS server is provided, but is unreachable over the network, server authentication requests are denied. In this situ-
ation, use local UR accounts to gain access to the UR system.
2.1.3 IEC 870-5-103 PROTOCOL
IEC 870-5-103 is a companion standard to IEC 870-5 suit of standards for transmission protocols. It defines messages and
procedures for interoperability between protection equipment and devices of a control system in a substation for communi-
cating on a serial line.
The IEC 60870-5-103 is an unbalanced (master-slave) protocol for coded-bit serial communication, exchanging information
with a control system. In the context of this protocol, the protection equipment is the slave and the control system is the
master. The communication is based on a point to point principle. The master must be able to interpret the IEC 60870-5-
103 communication messages.
The UR implementation of IEC 60870-5-103 consists of the following functions:
• Report binary inputs
• Report analog values (measurands)
• Commands
• Time synchronization
The RS485 port supports IEC 60870-5-103.

2.2 ORDER CODES 2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
2.2ORDER CODES 2.2.1 OVERVIEW
The B30 is available as a 19-inch rack horizontal mount or reduced-size (¾) vertical unit and consists of the following mod-
ules: power supply, CPU, CT/VT, contact input and output, transducer input and output, and inter-relay communications.
Each of these modules can be supplied in a number of configurations specified at the time of ordering. The information
required to completely specify the relay is provided in the following tables (see chapter 3 for full details of relay modules).
Order codes are subject to change without notice. See the ordering page at
2 NOTE
http://www.gegridsolutions.com/multilin/order.htm for the latest options.
The order code structure is dependent on the mounting option (horizontal or vertical) and the type of CT/VT modules
(enhanced diagnostic CT/VT modules or HardFiberTM process bus modules). The order code options are described in the
following sub-sections.
2.2.2 ORDER CODES WITH ENHANCED CT/VT MODULES
The order codes for the horizontal mount units are shown below.
Table 2–4: B30 ORDER CODES FOR HORIZONTAL UNITS

B30 - * ** - * * * - F ** - H ** - L ** - N ** - S ** - U ** - W/X ** Full Size Horizontal Mount
BASE UNIT B30 | | | | | | | | | | | | Base Unit
CPU T | | | | | | | | | | | RS485 with 3 100Base-FX Ethernet, multimode, SFP with LC
U | | | | | | | | | | | RS485 with 1 100Base-T Ethernet, SFP RJ-45 + 2 100Base-FX Ethernet, multimode, SFP with LC
V | | | | | | | | | | | RS485 with 3 100Base-T Ethernet, SFP with RJ-45
SOFTWARE 00 | | | | | | | | | | No software options
01 | | | | | | | | | | Ethernet Global Data (EGD) protocol
03 | | | | | | | | | | IEC 61850 protocol
04 | | | | | | | | | | IEC 61850 and Ethernet Global Data (EGD) protocols
A0 | | | | | | | | | | CyberSentry Lvl 1
A1 | | | | | | | | | | CyberSentry Lvl 1 and Ethernet Global Data
A3 | | | | | | | | | | CyberSentry Lvl 1 and IEC 61850
A4 | | | | | | | | | | CyberSentry Lvl 1, Ethernet Global Data, and IEC 61850
B0 | | | | | | | | | | IEEE 1588
B1 | | | | | | | | | | IEEE 1588 and Ethernet Global Data
B3 | | | | | | | | | | IEEE 1588 and IEC 61850
B4 | | | | | | | | | | IEEE 1588, Ethernet Global Data, and IEC 61850
C0 | | | | | | | | | | Parallel Redundancy Protocol (PRP)
C1 | | | | | | | | | | PRP and Ethernet Global Data
C3 | | | | | | | | | | PRP and IEC 61850
C4 | | | | | | | | | | PRP, Ethernet Global Data, and IEC 61850
D0 | | | | | | | | | | IEEE 1588 and CyberSentry Lvl 1
D1 | | | | | | | | | | IEEE 1588, CyberSentry Lvl 1, and Ethernet Global Data
D3 | | | | | | | | | | IEEE 1588, CyberSentry Lvl 1, and IEC 61850
D4 | | | | | | | | | | IEEE 1588, CyberSentry Lvl 1, Ethernet Global Data, and IEC 61850
E0 | | | | | | | | | | IEEE 1588 and PRP
E1 | | | | | | | | | | IEEE 1588, PRP, and Ethernet Global Dada
E3 | | | | | | | | | | IEEE 1588, PRP, and IEC 61850
E4 | | | | | | | | | | IEEE 1588, PRP, Ethernet Global Data, and IEC 61850
F0 | | | | | | | | | | PRP and CyberSentry Lvl1
F1 | | | | | | | | | | PRP, CyberSentry Lvl1, and Ethernet Global Data
F3 | | | | | | | | | | PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, and IEC 61850
F4 | | | | | | | | | | PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, Ethernet Global Data, and IEC 61850
G0 | | | | | | | | | | IEEE 1588, PRP, and CyberSentry Lvl 1
G1 | | | | | | | | | | IEEE 1588, PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, Ethernet Global Data
G3 | | | | | | | | | | IEEE 1588, PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, and IEC 61850
G4 | | | | | | | | | | IEEE 1588, PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, Ethernet Global Data, and IEC 61850
J0 | | | | | | | | | | IEC 60870-5-103
J1 | | | | | | | | | | IEC 60870-5-103 + EGD
J3 | | | | | | | | | | IEC 60870-5-103 + IEC 61850
J4 | | | | | | | | | | IEC 60870-5-103 + EGD + IEC 61850
K0 | | | | | | | | | | IEEE 1588 + PRP + IEC 60870-5-103
K1 | | | | | | | | | | IEEE 1588 + PRP + IEC 60870-5-103 + EGD
K3 | | | | | | | | | | IEEE 1588 + PRP + IEC 60870-5-103 + IEC 61850
K4 | | | | | | | | | | IEEE 1588 + PRP + IEC 60870-5-103 + EGD + IEC 61850
L0 | | | | | | | | | | IEC 60870-5-103 + IEEE 1588 + PRP + CyberSentry Lvl 1
L1 | | | | | | | | | | IEC 60870-5-103 + IEEE 1588 + PRP + CyberSentry Lvl 1 + EGD
L3 | | | | | | | | | | IEC 60870-5-103 + IEEE 1588 + PRP + CyberSentry Lvl 1 + IEC 61850
L4 | | | | | | | | | | IEC 60870-5-103 + IEEE 1588 + PRP + CyberSentry Lvl 1 + EGD + IEC 61850
MOUNT/COATING H | | | | | | | | | Horizontal (19” rack)
A | | | | | | | | | Horizontal (19” rack) with harsh-environmental coating
FACEPLATE/ DISPLAY C | | | | | | | | English display
D | | | | | | | | French display
R | | | | | | | | Russian display
A | | | | | | | | Chinese display
P | | | | | | | | English display with 4 small and 12 large programmable pushbuttons
G | | | | | | | | French display with 4 small and 12 large programmable pushbuttons
S | | | | | | | | Russian display with 4 small and 12 large programmable pushbuttons
B | | | | | | | | Chinese display with 4 small and 12 large programmable pushbuttons
K | | | | | | | | Enhanced front panel with English display
M | | | | | | | | Enhanced front panel with French display
Q | | | | | | | | Enhanced front panel with Russian display
U | | | | | | | | Enhanced front panel with Chinese display
L | | | | | | | | Enhanced front panel with English display and user-programmable pushbuttons
N | | | | | | | | Enhanced front panel with French display and user-programmable pushbuttons
T | | | | | | | | Enhanced front panel with Russian display and user-programmable pushbuttons
V | | | | | | | | Enhanced front panel with Chinese display and user-programmable pushbuttons
W | | | | | | | | Enhanced front panel with Turkish display
Y | | | | | | | | Enhanced front panel with Turkish display and user-programmable pushbuttons
I | | | | | | | | Enhanced front panel with German display
J | | | | | | | | Enhanced front panel with German display and user-programmable pushbuttons

2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.2 ORDER CODES
Table 2–4: B30 ORDER CODES FOR HORIZONTAL UNITS

B30 - * ** - * * * - F ** - H ** - L ** - N ** - S ** - U ** - W/X ** Full Size Horizontal Mount
BASE UNIT B30 | | | | | | | | | | | | Base Unit
POWER SUPPLY H | | | | | | | 125 / 250 V AC/DC power supply
(redundant supply must H | | | | | | SH 125 / 250 V AC/DC with redundant 125 / 250 V AC/DC power supply
be same type as main supply) L | | | | | | | 24 to 48 V (DC only) power supply
L | | | | | | SL 24 to 48 V (DC only) with redundant 24 to 48 V DC power supply
ENHANCED DIAGNOSTICS CT/VT DSP | | XX | XX | | None (slots L and S only)
(requires all DSP to be enhanced diagnostic) 8L | 8L | 8L | | Standard 4CT/4VT with enhanced diagnostics
8M | 8M | 8M | | Sensitive ground 4CT/4VT with enhanced diagnostics
8N | 8N | 8N | | Standard 8CT with enhanced diagnostics
8R | 8R | 8R | | Sensitive ground 8CT with enhanced diagnostics
CONTACT INPUTS/OUTPUTS XX XX XX XX XX | No Module
4A 4A 4A 4A 4A | 4 Solid-State (no monitoring) MOSFET outputs
4B 4B 4B 4B 4B | 4 Solid-State (voltage with optional current) MOSFET outputs
4C
4D
4L
67
4C
4D
4L
67
4C
4D
4L
67
4C
4D
4L
67
4C
4D
4L
67
|
|
|
|
4 Solid-State (current with optional voltage) MOSFET outputs
16 contact inputs with Auto-Burnishing (maximum of three modules within a case)
14 Form-A (no monitoring) Latching outputs
8 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs
2
6A 6A 6A 6A 6A | 2 Form-A (voltage with optional current) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 contact inputs
6B 6B 6B 6B 6B | 2 Form-A (voltage with optional current) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 contact inputs
6C 6C 6C 6C 6C | 8 Form-C outputs
6D 6D 6D 6D 6D | 16 contact inputs
6E 6E 6E 6E 6E | 4 Form-C outputs, 8 contact inputs
6F 6F 6F 6F 6F | 8 Fast Form-C outputs
6G 6G 6G 6G 6G | 4 Form-A (voltage with optional current) outputs, 8 contact inputs
6H 6H 6H 6H 6H | 6 Form-A (voltage with optional current) outputs, 4 contact inputs
6K 6K 6K 6K 6K | 4 Form-C and 4 Fast Form-C outputs
6L 6L 6L 6L 6L | 2 Form-A (current with optional voltage) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 contact inputs
6M 6M 6M 6M 6M | 2 Form-A (current with optional voltage) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 contact inputs
6N 6N 6N 6N 6N | 4 Form-A (current with optional voltage) outputs, 8 contact inputs
6P 6P 6P 6P 6P | 6 Form-A (current with optional voltage) outputs, 4 contact inputs
6R 6R 6R 6R 6R | 2 Form-A (no monitoring) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 contact inputs
6S 6S 6S 6S 6S | 2 Form-A (no monitoring) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 contact inputs
6T 6T 6T 6T 6T | 4 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs, 8 contact inputs
6U 6U 6U 6U 6U | 6 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs, 4 contact inputs
6V 6V 6V 6V 6V | 2 Form-A outputs, 1 Form-C output, 1 Form-A latching output, 8 contact inputs
TRANSDUCER 5A 5A 5A 5A 5A | 4 DCmA inputs, 4 DCmA outputs (only one 5A module is allowed)
INPUTS/OUTPUTS 5C 5C 5C 5C 5C | 8 RTD inputs
(select a maximum of 3 per unit) 5D 5D 5D 5D 5D | 4 RTD inputs, 4 DCmA outputs (only one 5D module is allowed)
5E 5E 5E 5E 5E | 4 RTD inputs, 4 DCmA inputs
5F 5F 5F 5F 5F | 8 DCmA inputs
INTER-RELAY 2A C37.94SM, 1300 nm single-mode, ELED, 1 channel single-mode
COMMUNICATIONS 2B C37.94SM, 1300 nm single-mode, ELED, 2 channel single-mode
(select a maximum of 1 per unit) 2E Bi-phase, single channel
2F Bi-phase, dual channel
2G IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 128 kbps, multimode, LED, 1 Channel
2H IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 128 kbps, multimode, LED, 2 Channels
2I Channel 1 - IEEE C37.94, MM, 64/128 kbps; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, Laser
2J Channel 1 - IEEE C37.94, MM, 64/128 kbps; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, single-mode, Laser
72 1550 nm, single-mode, Laser, 1 Channel
74 Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, single-mode, Laser
75 Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, single-mode Laser
76 IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 64 kbps, multimode, LED, 1 Channel
77 IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 64 kbps, multimode, LED, 2 Channels
7A 820 nm, multimode, LED, 1 Channel
7B 1300 nm, multimode, LED, 1 Channel
7C 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 1 Channel
7D 1300 nm, single-mode, Laser, 1 Channel
7E Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 820 nm, multimode
7F Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, multimode
7G Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode ELED
7H 820 nm, multimode, LED, 2 Channels
7I 1300 nm, multimode, LED, 2 Channels
7J 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 2 Channels
7K 1300 nm, single-mode, Laser, 2 Channels
7L Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 820 nm, multimode, LED
7M Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, multimode, LED
7N Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED
7P Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, Laser
7Q Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode Laser
7R G.703, 1 Channel
7S G.703, 2 Channels
7T RS422, 1 Channel
7W RS422, 2 Channels

The order codes for the reduced size vertical mount units are shown below.
Table 2–5: B30 ORDER CODES (REDUCED SIZE VERTICAL UNITS)

B30 - * ** - * * * - F ** - H ** - L ** - N ** - R ** Reduced Size Vertical Mount
BASE UNIT B30 | | | | | | | | | | Base Unit
CPU T | | | | | | | | | RS485 with 3 100Base-FX Ethernet, multimode, SFP with LC
U | | | | | | | | | RS485 with 1 100Base-T Ethernet, SFP RJ-45 + 2 100Base-FX Ethernet, multimode, SFP with LC
V | | | | | | | | | RS485 with 3 100Base-T Ethernet, SFP with RJ-45
SOFTWARE 00 | | | | | | | | No software options
01 | | | | | | | | Ethernet Global Data (EGD) protocol
03 | | | | | | | | IEC 61850 protocol
2
04 | | | | | | | | IEC 61850 and Ethernet Global Data (EGD) protocols
A0 | | | | | | | | CyberSentry Lvl 1
A1 | | | | | | | | CyberSentry Lvl 1 and Ethernet Global Data
A3 | | | | | | | | CyberSentry Lvl 1 and IEC 61850
A4 | | | | | | | | CyberSentry Lvl 1, Ethernet Global Data, and IEC 61850
B0 | | | | | | | | IEEE 1588
B1 | | | | | | | | IEEE 1588 and Ethernet Global Data
B3 | | | | | | | | IEEE 1588 and IEC 61850
B4 | | | | | | | | IEEE 1588, Ethernet Global Data, and IEC 61850
C0 | | | | | | | | Parallel Redundancy Protocol (PRP)
C1 | | | | | | | | PRP and Ethernet Global Data
C3 | | | | | | | | PRP and IEC 61850
C4 | | | | | | | | PRP, Ethernet Global Data, and IEC 61850
D0 | | | | | | | | IEEE 1588 and CyberSentry Lvl 1
D1 | | | | | | | | IEEE 1588, CyberSentry Lvl 1, and Ethernet Global Data
D3 | | | | | | | | IEEE 1588, CyberSentry Lvl 1, and IEC 61850
D4 | | | | | | | | IEEE 1588, CyberSentry Lvl 1, Ethernet Global Data, and IEC 61850
E0 | | | | | | | | IEEE 1588 and PRP
E1 | | | | | | | | IEEE 1588, PRP, and Ethernet Global Dada
E3 | | | | | | | | IEEE 1588, PRP, and IEC 61850
E4 | | | | | | | | IEEE 1588, PRP, Ethernet Global Data, and IEC 61850
F0 | | | | | | | | PRP and CyberSentry Lvl1
F1 | | | | | | | | PRP, CyberSentry Lvl1, and Ethernet Global Data
F3 | | | | | | | | PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, and IEC 61850
F4 | | | | | | | | PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, Ethernet Global Data, and IEC 61850
G0 | | | | | | | | IEEE 1588, PRP, and CyberSentry Lvl 1
G1 | | | | | | | | IEEE 1588, PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, Ethernet Global Data
G3 | | | | | | | | IEEE 1588, PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, and IEC 61850
G4 | | | | | | | | IEEE 1588, PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, Ethernet Global Data, and IEC 61850
J0 | | | | | | | | IEC 60870-5-103
J1 | | | | | | | | IEC 60870-5-103 + EGD
J3 | | | | | | | | IEC 60870-5-103 + IEC 61850
J4 | | | | | | | | IEC 60870-5-103 + EGD + IEC 61850
K0 | | | | | | | | IEEE 1588 + PRP + IEC 60870-5-103
K1 | | | | | | | | IEEE 1588 + PRP + IEC 60870-5-103 + EGD
K3 | | | | | | | | IEEE 1588 + PRP + IEC 60870-5-103 + IEC 61850
K4 | | | | | | | | IEEE 1588 + PRP + IEC 60870-5-103 + EGD + IEC 61850
L0 | | | | | | | | IEC 60870-5-103 + IEEE 1588 + PRP + CyberSentry Lvl 1
L1 | | | | | | | | IEC 60870-5-103 + IEEE 1588 + PRP + CyberSentry Lvl 1 + EGD
L3 | | | | | | | | IEC 60870-5-103 + IEEE 1588 + PRP + CyberSentry Lvl 1 + IEC 61850
L4 | | | | | | | | IEC 60870-5-103 + IEEE 1588 + PRP + CyberSentry Lvl 1 + EGD + IEC 61850
MOUNT/COATING V | | | | | | | Vertical (3/4 rack)
B | | | | | | | Vertical (3/4 rack) with harsh-environmental coating
FACEPLATE/ DISPLAY F | | | | | | English display
K | | | | | | Enhanced front panel with English display
M | | | | | | Enhanced front panel with French display
Q | | | | | | Enhanced front panel with Russian display
U | | | | | | Enhanced front panel with Chinese display
L | | | | | | Enhanced front panel with English display and user-programmable pushbuttons
N | | | | | | Enhanced front panel with French display and user-programmable pushbuttons
T | | | | | | Enhanced front panel with Russian display and user-programmable pushbuttons
V | | | | | | Enhanced front panel with Chinese display and user-programmable pushbuttons
W | | | | | | Enhanced front panel with Turkish display
Y | | | | | | Enhanced front panel with Turkish display and user-programmable pushbuttons
I | | | | | | Enhanced front panel with German display
J | | | | | | Enhanced front panel with German display and user-programmable pushbuttons
POWER SUPPLY H | | | | | 125 / 250 V AC/DC power supply
L | | | | | 24 to 48 V (DC only) power supply
ENHANCED DIAGNOSTICS CT/VT DSP XX | XX | | None (slots L and S only)
(requires all DSP to be enhanced diagnostic) 8L | 8L | | Standard 4CT/4VT with enhanced diagnostics
8M | 8M | | Sensitive ground 4CT/4VT with enhanced diagnostics
8N | 8N | | Standard 8CT with enhanced diagnostics
8R | 8R | | Sensitive ground 8CT with enhanced diagnostics
CONTACT INPUTS/OUTPUTS XX XX XX | No Module
4A 4A 4A | 4 Solid-State (no monitoring) MOSFET outputs
4B 4B 4B | 4 Solid-State (voltage with optional current) MOSFET outputs
4C 4C 4C | 4 Solid-State (current with optional voltage) MOSFET outputs
4D 4D 4D | 16 contact inputs with Auto-Burnishing (maximum of three modules within a case)
4L 4L 4L | 14 Form-A (no monitoring) Latching outputs
67 67 67 | 8 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs
6A 6A 6A | 2 Form-A (voltage with optional current) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 contact inputs
6B 6B 6B | 2 Form-A (voltage with optional current) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 contact inputs
6C 6C 6C | 8 Form-C outputs
6D 6D 6D | 16 contact inputs
6E 6E 6E | 4 Form-C outputs, 8 contact inputs
6F 6F 6F | 8 Fast Form-C outputs
6G 6G 6G | 4 Form-A (voltage with optional current) outputs, 8 contact inputs
6H 6H 6H | 6 Form-A (voltage with optional current) outputs, 4 contact inputs
6K 6K 6K | 4 Form-C and 4 Fast Form-C outputs
6L 6L 6L | 2 Form-A (current with optional voltage) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 contact inputs
6M 6M 6M | 2 Form-A (current with optional voltage) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 contact inputs
6N 6N 6N | 4 Form-A (current with optional voltage) outputs, 8 contact inputs
6P 6P 6P | 6 Form-A (current with optional voltage) outputs, 4 contact inputs
6R 6R 6R | 2 Form-A (no monitoring) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 contact inputs
6S 6S 6S | 2 Form-A (no monitoring) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 contact inputs
6T 6T 6T | 4 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs, 8 contact inputs
6U 6U 6U | 6 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs, 4 contact inputs
6V 6V 6V | 2 Form-A outputs, 1 Form-C output, 1 Form-A latching output, 8 contact inputs

Table 2–5: B30 ORDER CODES (REDUCED SIZE VERTICAL UNITS)

TRANSDUCER 5A 5A 5A | 4 DCmA inputs, 4 DCmA outputs (only one 5A module is allowed)
INPUTS/OUTPUTS 5C 5C 5C | 8 RTD inputs
(select a maximum of 3 per unit) 5D 5D 5D | 4 RTD inputs, 4 DCmA outputs (only one 5D module is allowed)
5E 5E 5E | 4 RTD inputs, 4 DCmA inputs
5F 5F 5F | 8 DCmA inputs
72
73
74
75
1550 nm, single-mode, Laser, 1 Channel
1550 nm, single-mode, Laser, 2 Channel
Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, single-mode, Laser
Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, single-mode Laser
2
7R G.703, 1 Channel
7T RS422, 1 Channel
2.2.3 ORDER CODES WITH PROCESS BUS MODULES
The order codes for the horizontal mount units with the process bus module are shown below.
Table 2–6: B30 ORDER CODES (HORIZONTAL UNITS WITH PROCESS BUS)
B30 - * ** - * * * - F ** - H ** - L ** - N ** - S ** - W/X ** Full Size Horizontal Mount
BASE UNIT B30 | | | | | | | | | | | Base Unit
CPU T | | | | | | | | | | RS485 with 3 100Base-FX Ethernet, multimode, SFP with LC
U | | | | | | | | | | RS485 with 1 100Base-T Ethernet, SFP RJ-45 + 2 100Base-FX Ethernet, multimode, SFP with LC
V | | | | | | | | | | RS485 with 3 100Base-T Ethernet, SFP with RJ-45
SOFTWARE 00 | | | | | | | | | No software options
01 | | | | | | | | | Ethernet Global Data (EGD) protocol
03 | | | | | | | | | IEC 61850 protocol
04 | | | | | | | | | IEC 61850 and Ethernet Global Data (EGD) protocols
A0 | | | | | | | | | CyberSentry Lvl 1
A1 | | | | | | | | | CyberSentry Lvl 1 and Ethernet Global Data
A3 | | | | | | | | | CyberSentry Lvl 1 and IEC 61850
A4 | | | | | | | | | CyberSentry Lvl 1, Ethernet Global Data, and IEC 61850
B0 | | | | | | | | | IEEE 1588
B1 | | | | | | | | | IEEE 1588 and Ethernet Global Data
B3 | | | | | | | | | IEEE 1588 and IEC 61850
B4 | | | | | | | | | IEEE 1588, Ethernet Global Data, and IEC 61850
C0 | | | | | | | | | Parallel Redundancy Protocol (PRP)
C1 | | | | | | | | | PRP and Ethernet Global Data
C3 | | | | | | | | | PRP and IEC 61850
C4 | | | | | | | | | PRP, Ethernet Global Data, and IEC 61850
D0 | | | | | | | | | IEEE 1588 and CyberSentry Lvl 1
D1 | | | | | | | | | IEEE 1588, CyberSentry Lvl 1, and Ethernet Global Data
D3 | | | | | | | | | IEEE 1588, CyberSentry Lvl 1, and IEC 61850
D4 | | | | | | | | | IEEE 1588, CyberSentry Lvl 1, Ethernet Global Data, and IEC 61850
E0 | | | | | | | | | IEEE 1588 and PRP
E1 | | | | | | | | | IEEE 1588, PRP, and Ethernet Global Dada
E3 | | | | | | | | | IEEE 1588, PRP, and IEC 61850
E4 | | | | | | | | | IEEE 1588, PRP, Ethernet Global Data, and IEC 61850
F0 | | | | | | | | | PRP and CyberSentry Lvl1
F1 | | | | | | | | | PRP, CyberSentry Lvl1, and Ethernet Global Data
F3 | | | | | | | | | PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, and IEC 61850
F4 | | | | | | | | | PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, Ethernet Global Data, and IEC 61850
G0 | | | | | | | | | IEEE 1588, PRP, and CyberSentry Lvl 1
G1 | | | | | | | | | IEEE 1588, PRP CyberSentry Lvl 1, Ethernet Global Data
G3 | | | | | | | | | IEEE 1588, PRP CyberSentry Lvl 1, and IEC 61850
G4 | | | | | | | | | IEEE 1588 PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, Ethernet Global Data, and IEC 61850
J0 | | | | | | | | | IEC 60870-5-103
J1 | | | | | | | | | IEC 60870-5-103 + EGD
J3 | | | | | | | | | IEC 60870-5-103 + IEC 61850
J4 | | | | | | | | | IEC 60870-5-103 + EGD + IEC 61850
K0 | | | | | | | | | IEEE1588 + PRP + IEC 60870-5-103
K1 | | | | | | | | | IEEE1588 + PRP + IEC 60870-5-103 + EGD
K3 | | | | | | | | | IEEE1588 + PRP + IEC 60870-5-103 + IEC 61850
K4 | | | | | | | | | IEEE1588 + PRP + IEC 60870-5-103 + EGD + IEC 61850
L0 | | | | | | | | | IEC 60870-5-103 + IEEE1588 + PRP + CyberSentry Lvl 1
L1 | | | | | | | | | IEC 60870-5-103 + IEEE1588 + PRP + CyberSentry Lvl 1 + EGD
L3 | | | | | | | | | IEC 60870-5-103 + IEEE1588 + PRP + CyberSentry Lvl 1 + IEC 61850
L4 | | | | | | | | | IEC 60870-5-103 + IEEE1588 + PRP + CyberSentry Lvl 1 + EGD + IEC 61850
MOUNT/COATING H | | | | | | | | Horizontal (19” rack)
A | | | | | | | | Horizontal (19” rack) with harsh-environmental coating
FACEPLATE/ DISPLAY C | | | | | | | English display
D | | | | | | | French display
R | | | | | | | Russian display
A | | | | | | | Chinese display
P | | | | | | | English display with 4 small and 12 large programmable pushbuttons
G | | | | | | | French display with 4 small and 12 large programmable pushbuttons
S | | | | | | | Russian display with 4 small and 12 large programmable pushbuttons
B | | | | | | | Chinese display with 4 small and 12 large programmable pushbuttons
K | | | | | | | Enhanced front panel with English display
M | | | | | | | Enhanced front panel with French display
Q | | | | | | | Enhanced front panel with Russian display
U | | | | | | | Enhanced front panel with Chinese display
L | | | | | | | Enhanced front panel with English display and user-programmable pushbuttons
N | | | | | | | Enhanced front panel with French display and user-programmable pushbuttons
T | | | | | | | Enhanced front panel with Russian display and user-programmable pushbuttons
V | | | | | | | Enhanced front panel with Chinese display and user-programmable pushbuttons
W | | | | | | | Enhanced front panel with Turkish display
Y | | | | | | | Enhanced front panel with Turkish display and user-programmable pushbuttons
I | | | | | | | Enhanced front panel with German display
J | | | | | | | Enhanced front panel with German display and user-programmable pushbuttons

Table 2–6: B30 ORDER CODES (HORIZONTAL UNITS WITH PROCESS BUS)
B30 - * ** - * * * - F ** - H ** - L ** - N ** - S ** - W/X ** Full Size Horizontal Mount
BASE UNIT B30 | | | | | | | | | | | Base Unit
POWER SUPPLY H | | | | | | 125 / 250 V AC/DC power supply
(redundant supply must H | | | | | SH 125 / 250 V AC/DC with redundant 125 / 250 V AC/DC power supply
be same type as main supply) L | | | | | | 24 to 48 V (DC only) power supply
L | | | | | SL 24 to 48 V (DC only) with redundant 24 to 48 V DC power supply
PROCESS BUS MODULE | 81 | | | | Eight-port digital process bus module
CONTACT INPUTS/OUTPUTS XX XX XX XX XX No Module
4A 4A | 4 Solid-State (no monitoring) MOSFET outputs
4B 4B | 4 Solid-State (voltage with optional current) MOSFET outputs
4C 4C | 4 Solid-State (current with optional voltage) MOSFET outputs
4D 4D | 16 contact inputs with Auto-Burnishing (maximum of three modules within a case)
4L 4L | 14 Form-A (no monitoring) Latching outputs
67 67 | 8 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs
2 6A
6B
6C
6D
6A
6B
6C
6D
|
|
|
|
2 Form-A (voltage with optional current) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 contact inputs
2 Form-A (voltage with optional current) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 contact inputs
8 Form-C outputs
16 contact inputs
6E 6E | 4 Form-C outputs, 8 contact inputs
6F 6F | 8 Fast Form-C outputs
6G 6G | 4 Form-A (voltage with optional current) outputs, 8 contact inputs
6H 6H | 6 Form-A (voltage with optional current) outputs, 4 contact inputs
6K 6K | 4 Form-C and 4 Fast Form-C outputs
6L 6L | 2 Form-A (current with optional voltage) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 contact inputs
6M 6M | 2 Form-A (current with optional voltage) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 contact inputs
6N 6N | 4 Form-A (current with optional voltage) outputs, 8 contact inputs
6P 6P | 6 Form-A (current with optional voltage) outputs, 4 contact inputs
6R 6R | 2 Form-A (no monitoring) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 contact inputs
6S 6S | 2 Form-A (no monitoring) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 contact inputs
6T 6T | 4 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs, 8 contact inputs
6U 6U | 6 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs, 4 contact inputs
6V 6V | 2 Form-A outputs, 1 Form-C output, 1 Form-A latching output, 8 contact inputs
7R G.703, 1 Channel
7T RS422, 1 Channel

The order codes for the reduced size vertical mount units with the process bus module are shown below.
Table 2–7: B30 ORDER CODES (REDUCED SIZE VERTICAL UNITS WITH PROCESS BUS)
BASE UNIT B30 | | | | | | | | | | Base Unit
CPU T | | | | | | | | | RS485 with 3 100Base-FX Ethernet, multimode, SFP with LC
U | | | | | | | | | RS485 with 1 100Base-T Ethernet, SFP RJ-45 + 2 100Base-FX Ethernet, multimode, SFP with LC
V | | | | | | | | | RS485 with 3 100Base-T Ethernet, SFP with RJ-45
SOFTWARE 00 | | | | | | | | No software options
01 | | | | | | | | Ethernet Global Data (EGD) protocol
03 | | | | | | | | IEC 61850 protocol
04 | | | | | | | | IEC 61850 and Ethernet Global Data (EGD) protocols
A0
A1
A3
A4
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CyberSentry Lvl 1
CyberSentry Lvl 1 and Ethernet Global Data
CyberSentry Lvl 1 and IEC 61850
CyberSentry Lvl 1, Ethernet Global Data, and IEC 61850
2
B0 | | | | | | | | IEEE 1588
B1 | | | | | | | | IEEE 1588 and Ethernet Global Data
B3 | | | | | | | | IEEE 1588 and IEC 61850
B4 | | | | | | | | IEEE 1588, Ethernet Global Data, and IEC 61850
C0 | | | | | | | | Parallel Redundancy Protocol (PRP)
C1 | | | | | | | | PRP and Ethernet Global Data
C3 | | | | | | | | PRP and IEC 61850
C4 | | | | | | | | PRP, Ethernet Global Data, and IEC 61850
D0 | | | | | | | | IEEE 1588 and CyberSentry Lvl 1
D1 | | | | | | | | IEEE 1588, CyberSentry Lvl 1, and Ethernet Global Data
D3 | | | | | | | | IEEE 1588, CyberSentry Lvl 1, and IEC 61850
D4 | | | | | | | | IEEE 1588, CyberSentry Lvl 1, Ethernet Global Data, and IEC 61850
E0 | | | | | | | | IEEE 1588 and PRP
E1 | | | | | | | | IEEE 1588, PRP, and Ethernet Global Dada
E3 | | | | | | | | IEEE 1588, PRP, and IEC 61850
E4 | | | | | | | | IEEE 1588, PRP, Ethernet Global Data, and IEC 61850
F0 | | | | | | | | PRP and CyberSentry Lvl1
F1 | | | | | | | | PRP, CyberSentry Lvl1, and Ethernet Global Data
F3 | | | | | | | | PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, and IEC 61850
F4 | | | | | | | | PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, Ethernet Global Data, and IEC 61850
G0 | | | | | | | | IEEE 1588, PRP, and CyberSentry Lvl 1
G1 | | | | | | | | IEEE 1588, PRP CyberSentry Lvl 1, Ethernet Global Data
G3 | | | | | | | | IEEE 1588, PRP CyberSentry Lvl 1, and IEC 61850
G4 | | | | | | | | IEEE 1588 PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, Ethernet Global Data, and IEC 61850
J0 | | | | | | | | IEC 60870-5-103
J1 | | | | | | | | IEC 60870-5-103 + EGD
J3 | | | | | | | | IEC 60870-5-103 + IEC 61850
J4 | | | | | | | | IEC 60870-5-103 + EGD + IEC 61850
K0 | | | | | | | | IEEE1588 + PRP + IEC 60870-5-103
K1 | | | | | | | | IEEE1588 + PRP + IEC 60870-5-103 + EGD
K3 | | | | | | | | IEEE1588 + PRP + IEC 60870-5-103 + IEC 61850
K4 | | | | | | | | IEEE1588 + PRP + IEC 60870-5-103 + EGD + IEC 61850
L0 | | | | | | | | IEC 60870-5-103 + IEEE1588 + PRP + CyberSentry Lvl 1
L1 | | | | | | | | IEC 60870-5-103 + IEEE1588 + PRP + CyberSentry Lvl 1 + EGD
L3 | | | | | | | | IEC 60870-5-103 + IEEE1588 + PRP + CyberSentry Lvl 1 + IEC 61850
L4 | | | | | | | | IEC 60870-5-103 + IEEE1588 + PRP + CyberSentry Lvl 1 + EGD + IEC 61850
MOUNT/COATING V | | | | | | | Vertical (3/4 rack)
B | | | | | | | Vertical (3/4 rack) with harsh environmental coating
FACEPLATE/ DISPLAY F | | | | | | English display
K | | | | | | Enhanced front panel with English display
M | | | | | | Enhanced front panel with French display
Q | | | | | | Enhanced front panel with Russian display
U | | | | | | Enhanced front panel with Chinese display
L | | | | | | Enhanced front panel with English display and user-programmable pushbuttons
N | | | | | | Enhanced front panel with French display and user-programmable pushbuttons
T | | | | | | Enhanced front panel with Russian display and user-programmable pushbuttons
V | | | | | | Enhanced front panel with Chinese display and user-programmable pushbuttons
W | | | | | | Enhanced front panel with Turkish display
Y | | | | | | Enhanced front panel with Turkish display and user-programmable pushbuttons
I | | | | | | Enhanced front panel with German display
J | | | | | | Enhanced front panel with German display and user-programmable pushbuttons
POWER SUPPLY H | | | | | 125 / 250 V AC/DC power supply
L | | | | | 24 to 48 V (DC only) power supply
CT/VT MODULES | 81 | | | Eight-port contact process bus module
CONTACT INPUTS/OUTPUTS XX XX XX | No Module
4A | 4 Solid-State (no monitoring) MOSFET outputs
4B | 4 Solid-State (voltage with optional current) MOSFET outputs
4C | 4 Solid-State (current with optional voltage) MOSFET outputs
4D | 16 contact inputs with Auto-Burnishing
4L | 14 Form-A (no monitoring) Latching outputs
67 | 8 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs
6A | 2 Form-A (voltage with optional current) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 contact inputs
6B | 2 Form-A (voltage with optional current) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 contact inputs
6C | 8 Form-C outputs
6D | 16 contact inputs
6E | 4 Form-C outputs, 8 contact inputs
6F | 8 Fast Form-C outputs
6G | 4 Form-A (voltage with optional current) outputs, 8 contact inputs
6H | 6 Form-A (voltage with optional current) outputs, 4 contact inputs
6K | 4 Form-C and 4 Fast Form-C outputs
6L | 2 Form-A (current with optional voltage) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 contact inputs
6M | 2 Form-A (current with optional voltage) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 contact inputs
6N | 4 Form-A (current with optional voltage) outputs, 8 contact inputs
6P | 6 Form-A (current with optional voltage) outputs, 4 contact inputs
6R | 2 Form-A (no monitoring) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 contact inputs
6S | 2 Form-A (no monitoring) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 contact inputs
6T | 4 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs, 8 contact inputs
6U | 6 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs, 4 contact inputs
6V | 2 Form-A outputs, 1 Form-C output, 1 Form-A latching output, 8 contact inputs

Table 2–7: B30 ORDER CODES (REDUCED SIZE VERTICAL UNITS WITH PROCESS BUS)
2 77
7A
7B
7C
IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 64 kbps, multimode, LED, 2 Channels
820 nm, multimode, LED, 1 Channel
1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 1 Channel
7R G.703, 1 Channel
7T RS422, 1 Channel
2.2.4 REPLACEMENT MODULES
Replacement modules can be ordered separately. When ordering a replacement CPU module or faceplate, provide the
serial number of your existing unit.
Not all replacement modules may be applicable to the B30 relay. Only the modules specified in the order codes are
available as replacement modules.
NOTE
Replacement module codes are subject to change without notice. See the ordering page at
http://www.gegridsolutions.com/multilin/order.htm for the latest options.
NOTE
The replacement module order codes for the horizontal mount units are shown below.
Table 2–8: ORDER CODES FOR REPLACEMENT MODULES, HORIZONTAL UNITS

UR - ** - *
POWER SUPPLY | SH A | 125 / 300 V AC/DC
redundant supply only available in horizontal units
and must be same type as main supply, for example
| SL H | 24 to 48 V (DC only)
must swap both power supplies when switching from
RH to SH
CPU | T | RS485 with 3 100Base-FX Ethernet, multimode, SFP with LC
| U | RS485 with 1 100Base-T Ethernet, SFP RJ-45 + 2 100Base-FX Ethernet, multimode, SFP with LC
| V | RS485 with 3 100Base-T Ethernet, SFP with RJ-45
FACEPLATE/DISPLAY | 3C | Horizontal faceplate with keypad and English display
| 3D | Horizontal faceplate with keypad and French display
| 3R | Horizontal faceplate with keypad and Russian display
| 3A | Horizontal faceplate with keypad and Chinese display
| 3P | Horizontal faceplate with keypad, user-programmable pushbuttons, and English display
| 3G | Horizontal faceplate with keypad, user-programmable pushbuttons, and French display
| 3S | Horizontal faceplate with keypad, user-programmable pushbuttons, and Russian display
| 3B | Horizontal faceplate with keypad, user-programmable pushbuttons, and Chinese display
| 3K | Enhanced front panel with English display
| 3M | Enhanced front panel with French display
| 3Q | Enhanced front panel with Russian display
| 3U | Enhanced front panel with Chinese display
| 3L | Enhanced front panel with English display and user-programmable pushbuttons
| 3N | Enhanced front panel with French display and user-programmable pushbuttons
| 3T | Enhanced front panel with Russian display and user-programmable pushbuttons
| 3V | Enhanced front panel with Chinese display and user-programmable pushbuttons
| 3I | Enhanced front panel with German display
| 3J | Enhanced front panel with German display and user-programmable pushbuttons
CONTACT INPUTS AND OUTPUTS | 4A | 4 Solid-State (no monitoring) MOSFET outputs
| 4B | 4 Solid-State (voltage with optional current) MOSFET outputs
| 4C | 4 Solid-State (current with optional voltage) MOSFET outputs
| 4D | 16 contact inputs with Auto-Burnishing
| 4L | 14 Form-A (no monitoring) Latching outputs
| 67 | 8 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs
| 6A | 2 Form-A (voltage with optional current) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 contact inputs
| 6B | 2 Form-A (voltage with optional current) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 contact inputs
| 6C | 8 Form-C outputs
| 6D | 16 contact inputs
| 6E | 4 Form-C outputs, 8 contact inputs
| 6F | 8 Fast Form-C outputs
| 6G | 4 Form-A (voltage with optional current) outputs, 8 contact inputs
| 6H | 6 Form-A (voltage with optional current) outputs, 4 contact inputs
| 6K | 4 Form-C and 4 Fast Form-C outputs
| 6L | 2 Form-A (current with optional voltage) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 contact inputs
| 6M | 2 Form-A (current with optional voltage) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 contact inputs
| 6N | 4 Form-A (current with optional voltage) outputs, 8 contact inputs
| 6P | 6 Form-A (current with optional voltage) outputs, 4 contact inputs
| 6R | 2 Form-A (no monitoring) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 contact inputs
| 6S | 2 Form-A (no monitoring) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 contact inputs
| 6T | 4 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs, 8 contact inputs
| 6U | 6 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs, 4 contact inputs
| 6V | 2 Form-A outputs, 1 Form-C output, 2 Form-A (no monitoring) latching outputs, 8 contact inputs
CT/VT MODULES | 8L | Standard 4CT/4VT with enhanced diagnostics
(NOT AVAILABLE FOR THE C30) | 8N | Standard 8CT with enhanced diagnostics
| 8M | Sensitive Ground 4CT/4VT with enhanced diagnostics

Table 2–8: ORDER CODES FOR REPLACEMENT MODULES, HORIZONTAL UNITS

UR - ** - *
| 8R | Sensitive Ground 8CT with enhanced diagnostics
INTER-RELAY COMMUNICATIONS | 2A | C37.94SM, 1300 nm single-mode, ELED, 1 channel single-mode
| 2B | C37.94SM, 1300 nm single-mode, ELED, 2 channel single-mode
| 2E | Bi-phase, single channel
| 2F | Bi-phase, dual channel
| 2G | IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 128 kbps, multimode, LED, 1 Channel
| 2H | IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 128 kbps, multimode, LED, 2 Channels
| 2I | Channel 1 - IEEE C37.94, multimode, 64/128 kbps; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, Laser
| 2J | Channel 1 - IEEE C37.94, multimode, 64/128 kbps; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, single-mode, Laser
| 72 | 1550 nm, single-mode, Laser, 1 Channel
| 74 | Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, single-mode, Laser
| 75 | Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, single-mode Laser
|
|
|
|
76
77
7A
7B
|
|
|
|
IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, multimode, LED, 1 Channel
IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, multimode, LED, 2 Channels
2
| 7C | 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 1 Channel
| 7D | 1300 nm, single-mode, Laser, 1 Channel
| 7E | Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 820 nm, multimode
| 7F | Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, multimode
| 7G | Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode ELED
| 7H | 820 nm, multimode, LED, 2 Channels
| 7I | 1300 nm, multimode, LED, 2 Channels
| 7J | 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 2 Channels
| 7K | 1300 nm, single-mode, Laser, 2 Channels
| 7L | Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 820 nm, multimode, LED
| 7M | Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, multimode, LED
| 7N | Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED
| 7P | Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, Laser
| 7Q | Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode Laser
| 7R | G.703, 1 Channel
| 7S | G.703, 2 Channels
| 7T | RS422, 1 Channel
| 7W | RS422, 2 Channels
TRANSDUCER | 5A | 4 DCmA inputs, 4 DCmA outputs (only one 5A module is allowed)
INPUTS/OUTPUTS | 5C | 8 RTD inputs
| 5D | 4 RTD inputs, 4 DCmA outputs (only one 5D module is allowed)
| 5E | 4 DCmA inputs, 4 RTD inputs
| 5F | 8 DCmA inputs
The replacement module order codes for the reduced-size vertical mount units are shown below.
Table 2–9: ORDER CODES FOR REPLACEMENT MODULES, VERTICAL UNITS

UR - ** - *
POWER SUPPLY | SH B | 125 / 300 V AC/DC
| SL V | 24 to 48 V (DC only)
CPU | T | RS485 with 3 100Base-FX Ethernet, multimode, SFP with LC
| U | RS485 with 1 100Base-T Ethernet, SFP RJ-45 + 2 100Base-FX Ethernet, multimode, SFP with LC
| V | RS485 with 3 100Base-T Ethernet, SFP with RJ-45
FACEPLATE/DISPLAY | 3F | Vertical faceplate with keypad and English display
| 3D | Vertical faceplate with keypad and French display
| 3R | Vertical faceplate with keypad and Russian display
| 3A | Vertical faceplate with keypad and Chinese display
| 3K | Enhanced front panel with English display
| 3M | Enhanced front panel with French display
| 3Q | Enhanced front panel with Russian display
| 3U | Enhanced front panel with Chinese display
| 3L | Enhanced front panel with English display and user-programmable pushbuttons
| 3N | Enhanced front panel with French display and user-programmable pushbuttons
| 3T | Enhanced front panel with Russian display and user-programmable pushbuttons
| 3V | Enhanced front panel with Chinese display and user-programmable pushbuttons
| 3I | Enhanced front panel with German display
| 3J | Enhanced front panel with German display and user-programmable pushbuttons
CONTACT INPUTS/OUTPUTS | 4A | 4 Solid-State (no monitoring) MOSFET outputs
| 4B | 4 Solid-State (voltage with optional current) MOSFET outputs
| 4C | 4 Solid-State (current with optional voltage) MOSFET outputs
| 4D | 16 contact inputs with Auto-Burnishing
| 4L | 14 Form-A (no monitoring) Latching outputs
| 67 | 8 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs
| 6A | 2 Form-A (voltage with optional current) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 contact inputs
| 6B | 2 Form-A (voltage with optional current) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 contact inputs
| 6C | 8 Form-C outputs
| 6D | 16 contact inputs
| 6E | 4 Form-C outputs, 8 contact inputs
| 6F | 8 Fast Form-C outputs
| 6G | 4 Form-A (voltage with optional current) outputs, 8 contact inputs
| 6H | 6 Form-A (voltage with optional current) outputs, 4 contact inputs
| 6K | 4 Form-C and 4 Fast Form-C outputs
| 6L | 2 Form-A (current with optional voltage) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 contact inputs
| 6M | 2 Form-A (current with optional voltage) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 contact inputs
| 6N | 4 Form-A (current with optional voltage) outputs, 8 contact inputs
| 6P | 6 Form-A (current with optional voltage) outputs, 4 contact inputs
| 6R | 2 Form-A (no monitoring) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 contact inputs
| 6S | 2 Form-A (no monitoring) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 contact inputs
| 6T | 4 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs, 8 contact inputs
| 6U | 6 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs, 4 contact inputs
| 6V | 2 Form-A outputs, 1 Form-C output, 2 Form-A (no monitoring) latching outputs, 8 contact inputs
CT/VT MODULES | 8L | Standard 4CT/4VT with enhanced diagnostics
(NOT AVAILABLE FOR THE C30) | 8N | Standard 8CT with enhanced diagnostics
| 8R | Sensitive Ground 8CT with enhanced diagnostics
INTER-RELAY COMMUNICATIONS | 2A | C37.94SM, 1300 nm single-mode, ELED, 1 channel single-mode
| 2B | C37.94SM, 1300 nm single-mode, ELED, 2 channel single-mode
| 2E | Bi-phase, single channel
| 2F | Bi-phase, dual channel
| 2G | IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 128 kbps, multimode, LED, 1 Channel
| 2H | IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 128 kbps, multimode, LED, 2 Channels
| 2I | Channel 1 - IEEE C37.94, multimode, 64/128 kbps; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, Laser
| 2J | Channel 1 - IEEE C37.94, multimode, 64/128 kbps; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, single-mode, Laser
| 74 | Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, single-mode, Laser
| 75 | Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, single-mode Laser
| 76 | IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 64 kbps, multimode, LED, 1 Channel
| 77 | IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 64 kbps, multimode, LED, 2 Channels
| 7A | 820 nm, multimode, LED, 1 Channel
| 7B | 1300 nm, multimode, LED, 1 Channel
| 7C | 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 1 Channel
| 7D | 1300 nm, single-mode, Laser, 1 Channel
| 7E | Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 820 nm, multimode
| 7F | Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, multimode
| 7G | Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode ELED
| 7H | 820 nm, multimode, LED, 2 Channels
| 7I | 1300 nm, multimode, LED, 2 Channels
| 7J | 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 2 Channels
| 7K | 1300 nm, single-mode, Laser, 2 Channels
| 7L | Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 820 nm, multimode, LED
| 7M | Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, multimode, LED
| 7N | Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED
| 7P | Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, Laser
| 7Q | Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode Laser
| 7R | G.703, 1 Channel
| 7S | G.703, 2 Channels

Table 2–9: ORDER CODES FOR REPLACEMENT MODULES, VERTICAL UNITS

UR - ** - *
| 7T | RS422, 1 Channel
| 7W | RS422, 2 Channels
TRANSDUCER | 5A | 4 DCmA inputs, 4 DCmA outputs (only one 5A module is allowed)
INPUTS/OUTPUTS | 5C | 8 RTD inputs
| 5D | 4 RTD inputs, 4 DCmA outputs (only one 5D module is allowed)
| 5E | 4 DCmA inputs, 4 RTD inputs
| 5F | 8 DCmA inputs

2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.3 SIGNAL PROCESSING
2.3SIGNAL PROCESSING 2.3.1 UR SIGNAL PROCESSING
The UR series relays are microprocessor-based protective relays that are designed to measure power system conditions
directly via CT and PT inputs and via other sources of information, such as analog inputs, communications inputs and con-
tact inputs. The following figure shows the overall signal processing in URs.
An analog low pass anti-aliasing filter with a 3 dB corner frequency is set at 2.4 kHz and is used for current and voltage
analog filtering as well as signal conditioning. The same filtering is applied for phase, ground currents, phase-to-phase
(when applicable), and auxiliary voltages. The 2.4 kHz cut-off frequency applies to both 50 Hz and 60 Hz applications and 2
fixed in the hardware, and thus is not dependent on the system nominal frequency setting.
Analog low- Analog-to- Digital band- Phasor

Analog Inputs Digital estimation
pass filter pass filter
Converter
½ cycle Fundamen
U A Fourier tal freq.
Phasors,
From 1 cycle Seq. com-
CT/VT Fourier ponents
I Frequency
D
T
RMS
values
Synchro-
Sampling phasors Analog Outputs
DSP module frequency filtering
module
Tracking
HMI frequency Events
Protection
Ethernet selection,
algorithms Control
ports estimation Comtrade, data
I> elements,
Communi- logger
Serial cation Z< monitoring
Serial
ports protocols U< elements,
FlexLogic, DNP, Modbus,
IEC60870
IRIG-B
Accurate
IEEE Real-Time Time stamping PMU (IEEE C37.118,
Ethernet
1588 clock Synchrophasors Aggregation, IEC 61850-90-5)
SNTP calculations post-filtering IEC 61850 (GOOSE,
CPU module MMS Server)
Contact Inputs
Analog Inputs
Inter-relay
Inter-relay
comms
module
module
module
comms
module
Channel A
Ddebounce monitoring
filtering CRC check D Contact Outputs
module
G.703, RS-422,
Optoisolated C37.94, direct fiber DCmA, RTD
859740A1.vsd
Figure 2–3: UR SIGNAL PROCESSING

The UR samples its AC signals at 64 samples per cycle, that is, at 3840 Hz in 60 Hz systems, and 3200 Hz in 50 Hz sys-
tems. The sampling rate is dynamically adjusted to the actual system frequency by an accurate and fast frequency tracking
system.
The A/D converter has the following ranges of AC signals:
Voltages:
± 2 ⋅ 260 ( V ) (EQ 2.1)
Currents:

2.3 SIGNAL PROCESSING 2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
± 2 ⋅ 46rated ( A ) (EQ 2.2)
Current harmonics are estimated based on raw samples with the use of the full-cycle Fourier filter. Harmonics 2nd through
25th are estimated.
True RMS value for the current is calculated on a per-phase basis. The true RMS can be used for demand recording or as
an input signal to Time Overcurrent function, if the latter is intended for thermal protection. The true RMS is calculated as
per the widely accepted definition:
2 t
I RMS ( t ) = --1- 
2
i ( t ) dt (EQ 2.3)
T
(t – T)
RMS values include harmonics, inter-harmonics, DC components, and so on, along with fundamental frequency values.
The true RMS value reflects thermal effects of the current and is used for the thermal related monitoring and protection
functions.
Protection and control functions respond to phasors of the fundamental and/or harmonic frequency components (magni-
tudes and angles), with an exception for some functions that have an option for RMS or fundamental measurements, or
some function responding to RMS only. This type of response is explained typically in each element's section in the instruc-
tion manual.
Currents are pre-filtered using a Finite Impulse Response (FIR) digital filter. The filter is designed to reject DC components
and low-frequency distortions, without amplifying high-frequency noise. This filter is referred to as a modified MIMIC filter,
which provides excellent filtering and overall balance between speed and accuracy of filtering. The filter is cascaded with
the full-cycle Fourier filter for the current phasor estimation.
Voltages are pre-filtered using a patented Finite Impulse Response (FIR) digital filter. The filter has been optimized to reject
voltage transformers specific distortions, such as Capacitive Voltage Transformer (CVT) noise and high-frequency oscilla-
tory components. The filter is cascaded with the half-cycle Fourier filter for the voltage phasor estimation.
The URs measure power system frequency using the Clarke transformation by estimating the period of the waveform from
two consecutive zero-crossings in the same direction (negative-to-positive). Voltage or current samples are pre-filtered
using a Finite Impulse Response (FIR) digital filter to remove high frequency noise contained in the signal. The period is
used after several security conditions are met, such as true RMS signal must be above 6% nominal for a certain time and
others. If these security conditions are not met, the last valid measurement is used for a specific time after which the UR
reverts to nominal system frequency.
Synchrophasors are calculated using a patented convolution integral algorithm. This algorithm allows use of the same time
stamped samples, which are used for protection and taken at the same sampling frequency. This allows URs to use one
sampling clock for both protection algorithms and synchrophasors.
Synchrophasors on firmware versions 7.23 and up have been tested and certified to meet IEEE C.37.118-2011 and
C.37.118.1a-2014 standards for both metering and protection classes with outputs available up to 60 synchrophasors per
second for the metering class and 120 synchrophasors per second for the protection class. Synchrophasors measurement
are also available via IEC 61850-90-5 protocol.
Contact inputs threshold is settable in the firmware with 17, 33, 84, 166 VDC settings available. Inputs are scanned every
0.5 ms and can be conditioned for the critical applications, using debounce time timer, settable from 0.0 ms to 16.0 ms.
Contact inputs with auto-burnishing are available as well, when external contacts are exposed to the contamination in a
harsh industrial environment.
All measured values are available in the UR metering section on the front panel and via communications protocols. Mea-
sured analog values and binary signals can be captured in COMTRADE format with sampling rates from 8 to 64 samples
per power cycle. Analog values can be captured with Data Logger, allowing much slower rates extended over long period of
time.
Other advanced UR order code options are available to support IEC 61850 Ed2.0 (including fast GOOSE, MMS server,
61850 services, ICD/CID/IID files, and so on), IEEE 1588 (IEEE C37.238 power profile) based time synchronization, Cyber-
Sentry (advanced cyber security), the Parallel Redundancy Protocol (PRP), IEC 60870-5-103, and so on.

2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.4 SPECIFICATIONS
2.4SPECIFICATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE
2.4.1 PROTECTION ELEMENTS
The operating times include the activation time of a trip rated form-A output contact unless otherwise indicated.
FlexLogic operands of a given element are 4 ms faster. Take this into account when using FlexLogic to interconnect
NOTE with other protection or control elements of the relay, building FlexLogic equations, or interfacing with other IEDs or 2
power system devices via communications or different output contacts. If not specified, the operate times given
here are for a 60 Hz system at nominal system frequency. Operate times for a 50 Hz system are 1.2 times longer.
BUS DIFFERENTIAL (87B) PHASE/NEUTRAL/GROUND IOC
Pickup level: 0.050 to 6.000 pu in steps of 0.001 Current: Phasor only
Low slope: 15 to 100% in steps of 1 Pickup level: 0.000 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
High slope: 50 to 100% in steps of 1 Dropout level: 97 to 98% of pickup
Low breakpoint: 1.00 to 30.00 pu in steps of 0.01 Level accuracy:
High breakpoint: 1.00 to 30.00 pu in steps of 0.01 0.1 to 2.0 × CT rating: ±0.5% of reading or ±0.4% of rated
High set level: 0.10 to 99.99 pu in steps of 0.01 (whichever is greater)
Dropout level: 97 to 98% of pickup > 2.0 × CT rating ±1.5% of reading
Level accuracy: Overreach: <2%
0.1 to 2.0 × CT rating: ±0.5% of reading or ±1% of rated (which- Pickup delay: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
ever is greater) for six circuits or less in Reset delay: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
the zone Operate time: <16 ms at 3 × pickup at 60 Hz
>2.0 × CT rating ±1.5% of reading of the maximum circuit (Phase/Ground IOC)
current <20 ms at 3 × pickup at 60 Hz
Operating time: one power system cycle (typical) (Neutral IOC)
Number of zones: 2 Timer accuracy: ±3% of operate time or ±1/4 cycle
(whichever is greater)
CT TROUBLE
Responding to: Differential current PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE
Pickup level: 0.020 to 2.000 pu in steps of 0.001 Pickup level: 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001
Pickup delay: 1.0 to 60.0 sec. in steps of 0.1 Dropout level: 102 to 103% of pickup
Level accuracy: ±0.5% of reading from 10 to 208 V
PHASE/NEUTRAL/GROUND TOC Curve shapes: GE IAV Inverse;
Current: Phasor or RMS Definite Time (0.1s base curve)
Pickup level: 0.000 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001 Curve multiplier: Time dial = 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of
Dropout level: 97% to 98% of pickup 0.01
Level accuracy: Curve timing accuracy
0.1 to 2.0 × CT: ±0.5% of reading or ±0.4% of rated at <0.90 x pickup: ±3.5% of operate time or ±1/2 cycle
(whichever is greater) (whichever is greater) from pickup to
> 2.0 × CT: ±1.5% of reading > 2.0 × CT rating operate
Curve shapes: IEEE Moderately/Very/Extremely Operate time: <30 ms at 0.9 pickup at 60 Hz for Defi-
Inverse; IEC (and BS) A/B/C and Short nite Time mode
Inverse; GE IAC Inverse, Short/Very/
Extremely Inverse; I2t; FlexCurves™
NEUTRAL OVERVOLTAGE
Pickup level: 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001
(programmable); Definite Time (0.01 s
base curve) Dropout level: 97 to 98% of pickup
Curve multiplier: Time Dial = 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of Level accuracy: ±0.5% of reading from 10 to 208 V
0.01 Pickup delay: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 (definite
Reset type: Instantaneous/Timed (per IEEE) time) or user-defined curve
Curve timing accuracy Reset delay: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
at 1.03 to 20 x pickup: ±3.5% of operate time or ±½ cycle Curve timing accuracy
(whichever is greater) from pickup to at >1.1 x pickup: ±3.5% of operate time or ±1 cycle
operate (whichever is greater) from pickup to
Voltage restraint: modifies pickup current for voltage in the operate
range of 0.1<V<0.9 VT Nominal in a Operate time: <30 ms at 1.10 × pickup at 60 Hz
fixed linear relationship

2.4 SPECIFICATIONS 2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
AUXILIARY OVERVOLTAGE BREAKER FLASHOVER

Pickup level: 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001 Operating quantity: phase current, voltage and voltage differ-
Dropout level: 97 to 98% of pickup ence
Level accuracy: ±0.5% of reading from 10 to 208 V Pickup level voltage: 0 to 1.500 pu in steps of 0.001
Pickup delay: 0 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 Dropout level voltage: 97 to 98% of pickup
Reset delay: 0 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 Pickup level current: 0 to 1.500 pu in steps of 0.001
Timer accuracy: ±3% of operate time or ±1/4 cycle Dropout level current: 97 to 98% of pickup
2 Operate time:
(whichever is greater)
<30 ms at 1.10 × pickup at 60 Hz
Level accuracy: ±0.5% or ±0.1% of rated, whichever is
greater
Pickup delay: 0 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
BREAKER FAILURE
Timer accuracy: ±3% of operate time or ±42 ms, which-
Mode: 1-pole, 3-pole
ever is greater
Current supervision: phase, neutral current
Operate time: <42 ms at 1.10 × pickup at 60 Hz
Current supv. pickup: 0.001 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
Current supv. dropout: 97 to 98% of pickup THERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION
Thermal overload curves: IEC 255-8 curve
Current supv. accuracy:
Base current: 0.20 to 3.00 pu in steps of 0.01
0.1 to 2.0 × CT rating: ±0.75% of reading or ±2% of rated
(whichever is greater) Overload (k) factor: 1.00 to 1.20 pu in steps of 0.05
above 2 × CT rating: ±2.5% of reading Trip time constant: 0 to 1000 min. in steps of 1
Reset time constant: 0 to 1000 min. in steps of 1
Minimum reset time: 0 to 1000 min. in steps of 1
Timer accuracy (cold curve): ±100 ms or 2%, whichever is greater
Timer accuracy (hot curve): ±500 ms or 2%, whichever is greater
for Ip < 0.9 × k × Ib and I / (k × Ib) > 1.1
TRIP BUS (TRIP WITHOUT FLEXLOGIC)
Number of elements: 6
Number of inputs: 16
Operate time: <2 ms at 60 Hz
Timer accuracy: ±3% or 10 ms, whichever is greater
2.4.2 USER-PROGRAMMABLE ELEMENTS
FLEXLOGIC FLEXELEMENTS™
Programming language: Reverse Polish Notation with graphical Number of elements: 8
visualization (keypad programmable) Operating signal: any analog actual value, or two values in
Lines of code: 512 differential mode
Internal variables: 64 Operating signal mode: signed or absolute value
Supported operations: NOT, XOR, OR (2 to 16 inputs), AND (2 Operating mode: level, delta
to 16 inputs), NOR (2 to 16 inputs), Comparator direction: over, under
NAND (2 to 16 inputs), latch (reset-domi-
Pickup Level: –90.000 to 90.000 pu in steps of 0.001
nant), edge detectors, timers
Hysteresis: 0.1 to 50.0% in steps of 0.1
Inputs: any logical variable, contact, or virtual
Delta dt: 20 ms to 60 days
input
Pickup & dropout delay: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
Number of timers: 32
Pickup delay: 0 to 60000 (ms, sec., min.) in steps of 1 NON-VOLATILE LATCHES
Dropout delay: 0 to 60000 (ms, sec., min.) in steps of 1 Type: set-dominant or reset-dominant
Number: 16 (individually programmed)
FLEXCURVES™
Output: stored in non-volatile memory
Number: 4 (A through D)
Execution sequence: as input prior to protection, control, and
Reset points: 40 (0 through 1 of pickup)
FlexLogic
Operate points: 80 (1 through 20 of pickup)
Time delay: 0 to 65535 ms in steps of 1 USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDs
Number: 48 plus trip and alarm
FLEX STATES Programmability: from any logical variable, contact, or vir-
Number: up to 256 logical variables grouped
tual input
under 16 Modbus addresses
Reset mode: self-reset or latched
Programmability: any logical variable, contact, or virtual
input

LED TEST USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS (OPTIONAL)

Initiation: from any contact input or user-program- Number of pushbuttons: 12 on standard front panel
mable condition 16 on enhanced horizontal front panel
Number of tests: 3, interruptible at any time 6 on enhanced vertical front panel
Duration of full test: approximately 3 minutes Mode: self-reset, latched
Test sequence 1: all LEDs on Display message: 2 lines of 20 characters each
Test sequence 2: all LEDs off, one LED at a time on for 1 s Drop-out timer: 0.00 to 60.00 s in steps of 0.05
Test sequence 3: all LEDs on, one LED at a time off for 1 s Autoreset timer:
Hold timer:
0.2 to 600.0 s in steps of 0.1
0.0 to 10.0 s in steps of 0.1
2
USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS
Number of displays: 16 SELECTOR SWITCH
Lines of display: 2 × 20 alphanumeric characters Number of elements: 2
Parameters: up to 5, any Modbus register addresses Upper position limit: 1 to 7 in steps of 1
Invoking and scrolling: keypad, or any user-programmable con- Selecting mode: time-out or acknowledge
dition, including pushbuttons Time-out timer: 3.0 to 60.0 s in steps of 0.1
CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS Control inputs: step-up and 3-bit
Number of pushbuttons: 7 Power-up mode: restore from non-volatile memory or syn-
chronize to a 3-bit control input or synch/
Operation: drive FlexLogic operands
restore mode
DIGITAL ELEMENTS
Operating signal: any FlexLogic operand
Pickup delay: 0.000 to 999999.999 s in steps of 0.001
Dropout delay: 0.000 to 999999.999 s in steps of 0.001
Timing accuracy: ±3% or ±4 ms, whichever is greater
2.4.3 MONITORING
OSCILLOGRAPHY EVENT RECORDER

Maximum records: 64 Capacity: 1024 events
Sampling rate: 64 samples per power cycle Time-tag: to 1 microsecond
Triggers: any element pickup, dropout, or operate; Triggers: any element pickup, dropout, or operate;
contact input change of state; contact contact input change of state; contact
output change of state; FlexLogic equa- output change of state; self-test events
tion Data storage: in non-volatile memory
Data: AC input channels; element state; con-
tact input state; contact output state
USER-PROGRAMMABLE FAULT REPORT
Data storage: in non-volatile memory
Pre-fault trigger: any FlexLogic operand
Fault trigger: any FlexLogic operand
Recorder quantities: 32 (any FlexAnalogTM value)
2.4.4 METERING
RMS CURRENT: PHASE, NEUTRAL, AND GROUND FREQUENCY

Accuracy at Accuracy at
0.1 to 2.0 × CT rating: ±0.25% of reading or ±0.1% of rated V = 0.8 to 1.2 pu: ±0.001 Hz (when voltage signal is used
(whichever is greater) for frequency measurement)
> 2.0 × CT rating: ±1.0% of reading I = 0.1 to 0.25 pu: ±0.005 Hz
I > 0.25 pu: ±0.02 Hz (when current signal is used for
RMS VOLTAGE frequency measurement)
Accuracy: ±0.5% of reading from 10 to 208 V

2.4.5 INPUTS
AC CURRENT DCMA INPUTS

CT rated primary: 1 to 50000 A Current input (mA DC): 0 to –1, 0 to +1, –1 to +1, 0 to 5, 0 to 10,
CT rated secondary: 1 A or 5 A by connection 0 to 20, 4 to 20 (programmable)
Relay burden: < 0.2 VA at rated secondary Input impedance: 379 Ω ±10%
Conversion range: Conversion range: –1 to + 20 mA DC
2 Standard CT: 0.02 to 46 × CT rating RMS symmetrical
Sensitive Ground CT module:
Accuracy:
Type:
±0.2% of full scale
Passive
0.002 to 4.6 × CT rating RMS symmetrical
Current withstand: 20 ms at 250 times rated
RTD INPUTS
Types (3-wire): 100 Ω Platinum, 100 & 120 Ω Nickel, 10
1 sec at 100 times rated
Ω Copper
continuous 4xInom
URs equipped with 24 CT inputs have a Sensing current: 5 mA
maximum operating temperature of 50°C Range: –50 to +250°C
Short circuit rating: 150000 RMS symmetrical amperes, 250 Accuracy: ±2°C
V maximum (primary current to external Isolation: 36 V pk-pk
CT)
IRIG-B INPUT
AC VOLTAGE IRIG formats accepted: B000…B007, B120…B127
VT rated secondary: 50.0 to 240.0 V IRIG control bits: IEEE Std C37.118.1-2011
VT ratio: 1.00 to 24000.00 Amplitude modulation: 1 to 10 V pk-pk
Relay burden: < 0.25 VA at 120 V DC shift: TTL–Compatible
Conversion range: 1 to 275 V
Input impedance: 50 kΩ
Voltage withstand: continuous at 260 V to neutral
Isolation: 2 kV
1 min/hr at 420 V to neutral
REMOTE INPUTS (IEC 61850 GSSE/GOOSE)
FREQUENCY Input points: 32, configured from 64 incoming bit pairs
Nominal frequency setting:25 to 60 Hz
Remote devices: 16
Sampling frequency: 64 samples per power cycle
Default states on loss of comms.: On, Off, Latest/Off, Latest/On
Tracking frequency range:20 to 70 Hz
Remote DPS inputs: 5
CONTACT INPUTS
Dry contacts: 1000 Ω maximum
DIRECT INPUTS
Input points: 32
Wet contacts: 300 V DC maximum
Remote devices: 16
Selectable thresholds: 17 V, 33 V, 84 V, 166 V
Default states on loss of comms.: On, Off, Latest/Off, Latest/On
Tolerance: ±10%
Ring configuration: Yes, No
Contacts per common return: 4
Data rate: 64 or 128 kbps
Recognition time: < 1 ms
CRC: 32-bit
Debounce time: 0.0 to 16.0 ms in steps of 0.5
CRC alarm:
Continuous current draw:4 mA (when energized)
Responding to: Rate of messages failing the CRC
CONTACT INPUTS WITH AUTO-BURNISHING Monitoring message count: 10 to 10000 in steps of 1
Dry contacts: 1000 Ω maximum Alarm threshold: 1 to 1000 in steps of 1
Wet contacts: 300 V DC maximum Unreturned message alarm:
Responding to: Rate of unreturned messages in the ring
Selectable thresholds: 17 V, 33 V, 84 V, 166 V
configuration
Tolerance: ±10% Monitoring message count: 10 to 10000 in steps of 1
Contacts per common return: 2 Alarm threshold: 1 to 1000 in steps of 1
Recognition time: < 1 ms
TELEPROTECTION
Debounce time: 0.0 to 16.0 ms in steps of 0.5 Input points: 16
Continuous current draw:4 mA (when energized) Remote devices: 3
Auto-burnish impulse current: 50 to 70 mA Default states on loss of comms.: On, Off, Latest/Off, Latest/On
Duration of auto-burnish impulse: 25 to 50 ms Ring configuration: No
Data rate: 64 or 128 kbps
CRC: 32-bit

2.4.6 POWER SUPPLY
LOW RANGE ALL RANGES

Nominal DC voltage: 24 to 48 V Volt withstand: 2 × Highest Nominal Voltage for 10 ms
Minimum DC voltage: 20 V Power consumption: typical = 15 to 20 W/VA
Maximum DC voltage: 60 V for RL power supply module (obso- maximum = 45 W/VA
lete), 75 V for SL power supply module contact factory for exact order code con-
Voltage loss hold-up: 200 ms duration at maximum load
NOTE: Low range is DC only. INTERNAL FUSE
sumption
2
RATINGS
HIGH RANGE
Low range power supply: 8 A / 250 V
Nominal DC voltage: 125 to 250 V
High range power supply: 4 A / 250 V
Minimum DC voltage: 88 V
INTERRUPTING CAPACITY
Maximum DC voltage: 300 V
AC: 100 000 A RMS symmetrical
Nominal AC voltage: 100 to 240 V at 50/60 Hz DC: 10 000 A
Minimum AC voltage: 88 V at 25 to 100 Hz
Maximum AC voltage: 265 V at 25 to 100 Hz
Voltage loss hold-up: 200 ms duration at maximum load
2.4.7 OUTPUTS
FORM-A RELAY FORM-A CURRENT MONITOR

Threshold current: approx. 80 to 100 mA
Make and carry for 0.2 s: 30 A as per ANSI C37.90
Carry continuous: 6A FORM-C AND CRITICAL FAILURE RELAY
Break (DC inductive, L/R = 40 ms): Make and carry for 0.2 s: 30 A as per ANSI C37.90
VOLTAGE CURRENT Carry continuous: 8A
24 V 1A Break (DC inductive, L/R = 40 ms):
48 V 0.5 A VOLTAGE CURRENT
125 V 0.3 A 24 V 1A
250 V 0.2 A 48 V 0.5 A

125 V 0.3 A
Operate time: < 4 ms
250 V 0.2 A
Contact material: silver alloy
Operate time: < 8 ms
LATCHING RELAY
Contact material: silver alloy
Make and carry for 0.2 s: 30 A as per ANSI C37.90
Carry continuous: 6 A as per IEEE C37.90 FAST FORM-C RELAY
Break (DC resistive as per IEC61810-1): Make and carry: 0.1 A max. (resistive load)
VOLTAGE CURRENT Minimum load impedance:
24 V 6A INPUT IMPEDANCE
VOLTAGE
48 V 1.6 A 2 W RESISTOR 1 W RESISTOR
125 V 0.4 A 250 V DC 20 KΩ 50 KΩ
250 V 0.2 A 120 V DC 5 KΩ 2 KΩ
Operate time: < 4 ms 48 V DC 2 KΩ 2 KΩ
Contact material: silver alloy 24 V DC 2 KΩ 2 KΩ
Control: separate operate and reset inputs Note: values for 24 V and 48 V are the same due to a
required 95% voltage drop across the load impedance.
Control mode: operate-dominant or reset-dominant
Operate time: < 0.6 ms
FORM-A VOLTAGE MONITOR
Internal Limiting Resistor: 100 Ω, 2 W
Applicable voltage: approx. 15 to 250 V DC
Trickle current: approx. 1 to 2.5 mA

SOLID-STATE OUTPUT RELAY CONTROL POWER EXTERNAL OUTPUT

Operate and release time: <100 µs (FOR DRY CONTACT INPUT)
Maximum voltage: 265 V DC Capacity: 100 mA DC at 48 V DC
Maximum leakage current in off state Isolation: ±300 Vpk
(excluding voltage monitor circuit current): 100 µA REMOTE OUTPUTS (IEC 61850 GSSE/GOOSE)
Maximum continuous current: 5 A at 45°C; 4 A at 65°C Standard output points: 32
Make and carry: User output points: 32
2 for 0.2 s:
for 0.03 s
30 A as per ANSI C37.90
300 A DIRECT OUTPUTS
Output points: 32
Breaking capacity:
UL508 Utility Industrial DCMA OUTPUTS
application application Range: –1 to 1 mA, 0 to 1 mA, 4 to 20 mA
(autoreclose
scheme) Max. load resistance: 12 kΩ for –1 to 1 mA range
12 kΩ for 0 to 1 mA range
Operations/ 5000 ops / 5 ops /
interval 0.2 s-On, 10000 ops / 600 Ω for 4 to 20 mA range
1 s-On, 9 s-Off
0.2 s-Off 0.2 s-On, Accuracy: ±0.75% of full-scale for 0 to 1 mA range
1000 ops / within 1 30 s-Off
minute ±0.5% of full-scale for –1 to 1 mA range
0.5 s-On, 0.5 s-Off
±0.75% of full-scale for 0 to 20 mA range
Break 3.2 A
capability L/R = 10 ms 99% Settling time to a step change: 100 ms
(0 to 250 V Isolation: 1.5 kV
DC) 1.6 A 10 A 10 A
L/R = 20 ms L/R = 40 ms L/R = 40 ms Driving signal: any FlexAnalog quantity
0.8 A Upper and lower limit for the driving signal: –90 to 90 pu in steps of
L/R = 40 ms
0.001
2.4.8 COMMUNICATION PROTOCOLS
RS232 PRECISION TIME PROTOCOL (PTP)

Front port: 19.2 kbps, Modbus RTU PTP IEEE Std 1588 2008 (version 2)
RS485 Power Profile (PP) per IEEE Standard PC37.238TM2011
1 rear port: Up to 115 kbps, Modbus RTU, DNP 3, Slave-only ordinary clock
IEC 60870-5-103 Peer delay measurement mechanism
Typical distance: 1200 m PARALLEL REDUNDANCY PROTOCOL (PRP)
Isolation: 2 kV, isolated together at 36 Vpk (IEC 62439-3 CLAUSE 4, 2012)
FIBER ETHERNET PORT Ethernet ports used: 2 and 3
Networks supported: 10/100 MB Ethernet
PARAMETER FIBER TYPE
100 MB MULTI-
OTHER
MODE TFTP, HTTP, IEC 60870-5-104, Ethernet Global Data (EGD)
Wavelength 1310 nm
Connector LC
Transmit power –20 dBm
Receiver sensitivity –30 dBm
Power budget 10 dB
Maximum input –14 dBm
power
Typical distance 2 km
Full duplex yes
Redundancy yes
ETHERNET (10/100 MB TWISTED PAIR)

Modes: 10 MB, 10/100 MB (auto-detect)
Connector: RJ45
SIMPLE NETWORK TIME PROTOCOL (SNTP)
clock synchronization error: <10 ms (typical)

2.4.9 INTER-RELAY COMMUNICATIONS
SHIELDED TWISTED-PAIR INTERFACE OPTIONS

INTERFACE TYPE TYPICAL DISTANCE
RS422 1200 m
G.703 100 m
RS422 distance is based on transmitter power and 2

NOTE does not take into consideration the clock source
provided by the user.
LINK POWER BUDGET AND MAXIMUM OPTICAL INPUT POWER
The following specifications apply to filter interface modules implemented from January 2012.
EMITTER, FIBER CABLE TRANSMIT RECEIVED POWER MAXIMUM
TYPE TYPE POWER SENSITIVITY BUDGET OPTICAL
INPUT
POWER
820 nm, Multimode 62.5/125 μm -16 dBm -32 dBm 16 dBm -8 dBm
50/125 μm -20 dBm 12 dBm
1300 nm, 62.5/125 μm -16 dBm -32 dBm 16 dBm -8 dBm
Multimode
50/125 μm -20 dBm 12 dBm
1300 nm, Single 9/125 μm -15 dBm -32 dBm 17 dBm -8 dBm
mode
1300 nm Laser, 9/125 μm 0 dBm -34 dBm 34 dBm -8 dBm
Single mode
1550 nm Laser, 9/125 μm 5 dBm -34 dBm 39 dBm -10 dBm
Single mode
The following specifications apply to filter interface modules implemented before January 2012.
EMITTER, FIBER TRANSMIT RECEIVED POWER MAX. OPTICAL
TYPE POWER SENSITIVITY BUDGET INPUT POWER
820 nm LED, –20 dBm –30 dBm 10 dB –7.6 dBm
Multimode
1300 nm LED, –21 dBm –30 dBm 9 dB –11 dBm
Multimode
1300 nm ELED, –23 dBm –32 dBm 9 dB –14 dBm
Single mode
1300 nm Laser, –1 dBm –30 dBm 29 dB –14 dBm
Single mode
1550 nm Laser, +5 dBm –30 dBm 35 dB –14 dBm
Single mode
These power budgets are calculated from the manu- extreme temperatures these values deviate based on com-
NOTE facturer’s worst-case transmitter power and worst ponent tolerance. On average, the output power decreases
case receiver sensitivity. as the temperature is increased by a factor 1dB / 5°C.
The power budgets for the 1300 nm ELED are calcu- TYPICAL LINK DISTANCE
NOTE lated from the manufacturer's transmitter power and
receiver sensitivity at ambient temperature. At
EMITTER TYPE CABLE CONNECTOR TYPICAL DISTANCE
TYPE TYPE
BEFORE FROM
JANUARY JANUARY
2012 2012
820 nm LED, 62.5/125 μm ST 1.65 km 2 km
multimode
50/125 μm ST 1.65 km 2 km

EMITTER TYPE CABLE CONNECTOR TYPICAL DISTANCE

TYPE TYPE
BEFORE FROM
JANUARY JANUARY
2012 2012
1300 nm LED, 62.5/125 μm ST 4 km 5 km
multimode
50/125 μm ST 4 km 5 km
1300 nm ELED, 9/125 μm ST 11.4 km 20 km
2 single mode
1300 nm Laser, 9/125 μm ST 64 km 65 km
single mode
1550 nm Laser, 9/125 μm ST 105 km 125 km
single mode
Typical distances listed are based on the follow- Compensated difference in transmitting and receiving (channel
asymmetry) channel delays using GPS satellite clock: 10 ms
ing assumptions for system loss. As actual losses
NOTE vary from one installation to another, the distance
covered by your system may vary.
CONNECTOR LOSSES (TOTAL OF BOTH ENDS)
ST connector 0.7 dB (each)
FIBER LOSSES
820 nm multimode 3 dB/km
1300 nm multimode 1 dB/km
1300 nm single mode 0.35 dB/km
1550 nm single mode 0.25 dB/km
Splice losses: One splice every 2 km,
at 0.05 dB loss per splice.
SYSTEM MARGIN
3 dB additional loss added to calculations to compensate for
all other losses.
2.4.10 ENVIRONMENTAL
AMBIENT TEMPERATURES OTHER

Storage temperature: –40 to 85°C Altitude: 2000 m (maximum)
Operating temperature: –40 to 60°C; the LCD contrast can be Pollution degree: II
impaired at temperatures less than – Overvoltage category: II
20°C Ingress protection: IP20 front, IP10 back
HUMIDITY Noise: 0 dB
Humidity: operating up to 95% (non-condensing) at
55°C (as per IEC60068-2-30 variant 1, 6
days).

2.4.11 TYPE TESTS
B30 TYPE TESTS

TEST REFERENCE STANDARD TEST LEVEL
Dielectric voltage withstand EN 60255-5 2.2 kV
Impulse voltage withstand EN 60255-5 5 kV
Damped oscillatory
Electrostatic discharge
IEC 61000-4-18 / IEC 60255-22-1
EN 61000-4-2 / IEC 60255-22-2
2.5 kV CM, 1 kV DM
Level 3
2
RF immunity EN 61000-4-3 / IEC 60255-22-3 Level 3
Fast transient disturbance EN 61000-4-4 / IEC 60255-22-4 Class A and B
Surge immunity EN 61000-4-5 / IEC 60255-22-5 Level 3 and 4
Conducted RF immunity EN 61000-4-6 / IEC 60255-22-6 Level 3
Power frequency immunity EN 61000-4-7 / IEC 60255-22-7 Class A and B
Voltage interruption and ripple DC IEC 60255-11 12% ripple, 200 ms interrupts
Radiated and conducted emissions CISPR11 / CISPR22 / IEC 60255-25 Class A
Sinusoidal vibration IEC 60255-21-1 Class 1
Shock and bump IEC 60255-21-2 Class 1
Seismic IEC 60255-21-3 Class 1
Power magnetic immunity IEC 61000-4-8 Level 5
Pulse magnetic immunity IEC 61000-4-9 Level 4
Damped magnetic immunity IEC 61000-4-10 Level 4
Voltage dip and interruption IEC 61000-4-11 0, 40, 70, 80% dips; 250 / 300 cycle interrupts
Damped oscillatory IEC 61000-4-12 2.5 kV CM, 1 kV DM
Conducted RF immunity, 0 to 150 kHz IEC 61000-4-16 Level 4
Voltage ripple IEC 61000-4-17 15% ripple
Ingress protection IEC 60529 IP20 front, IP10 back
Cold IEC 60068-2-1 –40°C for 16 hours
Hot IEC 60068-2-2 85°C for 16 hours
Humidity IEC 60068-2-30 6 days, variant 1
Damped oscillatory IEEE/ANSI C37.90.1 2.5 kV, 1 MHz
RF immunity IEEE/ANSI C37.90.2 20 V/m, 80 MHz to 1 GHz
Safety UL 508 e83849 NKCR
Safety UL C22.2-14 e83849 NKCR7
Safety UL 1053 e83849 NKCR
Safety IEC 60255-27 Insulation: class 1, Pollution degree: 2, Over
voltage cat II
2.4.12 PRODUCTION TESTS
THERMAL
Products go through an environmental test based upon an
Accepted Quality Level (AQL) sampling process.

2.4.13 APPROVALS
APPROVALS
COMPLIANCE APPLICABLE COUNCIL ACCORDING TO
DIRECTIVE
CE Low voltage directive EN 60255-5
EMC directive EN 60255-26 / EN 50263
2 EN 61000-6-5
C-UL-US --- UL 508
UL 1053
C22.2 No. 14
2.4.14 MAINTENANCE
MOUNTING
Attach mounting brackets using 20 inch-pounds (±2 inch-pounds) of torque.
CLEANING
Normally, cleaning is not required; but for situations where dust has accumulated on the faceplate display, a dry cloth can be used.
To avoid deterioration of electrolytic capacitors, power up units that are stored in a de-energized state once per
NOTICE year, for one hour continuously.

3 HARDWARE 3.1 DESCRIPTION
3 HARDWARE 3.1DESCRIPTION 3.1.1 PANEL CUTOUT
a) HORIZONTAL UNITS
The B30 Bus Differential System is available as a 19-inch rack horizontal mount unit with a removable faceplate. The face-
plate can be specified as either standard or enhanced at the time of ordering. The enhanced faceplate contains additional
user-programmable pushbuttons and LED indicators.
The modular design allows the relay to be easily upgraded or repaired by a qualified service person. The faceplate is
hinged to allow easy access to the removable modules, and is itself removable to allow mounting on doors with limited rear
depth.
The case dimensions are shown below, along with panel cutout details for panel mounting. When planning the location of
your panel cutout, ensure that provision is made for the faceplate to swing open without interference to or from adjacent
equipment.
The relay must be mounted such that the faceplate sits semi-flush with the panel or switchgear door, allowing the operator
access to the keypad and the RS232 communications port. The relay is secured to the panel with the use of four screws
3
supplied with the relay.
11.016”
[279,81 mm]
9.687”
[246,05 mm]
17.56”
[446,02 mm]
7.460
[189,48 mm
6.995” 6.960”
[177,67 mm] [176,78 mm]
19.040”
[483,62 mm] 842807A1.CDR
Figure 3–1: B30 HORIZONTAL DIMENSIONS (ENHANCED PANEL)

3.1 DESCRIPTION 3 HARDWARE
18.370”
[466,60 mm]
0.280”
[7,11 mm]
Typ. x 4
CUT-OUT
4.000”
[101,60 mm]
17.750”
3
[450,85 mm] 842808A1.CDR
Figure 3–2: B30 HORIZONTAL MOUNTING (ENHANCED PANEL)
0.375” (9.5)
Horizontal top view (19”, 4 RU) Remote mounting, view from the rear of the panel
8 × 0.156 Ø
1.875”
(47.6)
(176.8 mm)
8.97” 10.90”
6.96”
(276.8 mm)
(121.5 mm)
(227.8 mm)
0.375” (9.5)
4.875”
9.80”
(248.9 mm)
Bezel
outline 0.375”
(9.5 mm)
5.00” 0.375”
(127.0 mm) (9.5 mm)
9.52”
(241.8 mm)
Brackets 14.52”
17.52” (368.8 mm)
repositioned for
(445.0 mm)
switchgear 17.72”
mounting (450.1 mm)
18.37” 4 × 0.28”
Horizontal front view (466.6 mm) (7.1 mm)
diameter
7.13” 4.00”
Cutout
(181.1 mm) (101.6 mm)
7.00”
(177.8 mm)
1.57”
(39.8 mm)
19.00” 17.75”
(482.6 mm) (450.8 mm)
827704B4.CDR
Figure 3–3: B30 HORIZONTAL MOUNTING AND DIMENSIONS (STANDARD PANEL)
b) VERTICAL UNITS
The B30 Bus Differential System is available as a reduced size (¾) vertical mount unit, with a removable faceplate. The
faceplate can be specified as either standard or enhanced at the time of ordering. The enhanced faceplate contains addi-
tional user-programmable pushbuttons and LED indicators.
The modular design allows the relay to be easily upgraded or repaired by a qualified service person. The faceplate is
hinged to allow easy access to the removable modules, and is itself removable to allow mounting on doors with limited rear
depth.
The case dimensions are shown below, along with panel cutout details for panel mounting. When planning the location of
your panel cutout, ensure that provision is made for the faceplate to swing open without interference to or from adjacent
equipment.
The relay must be mounted such that the faceplate sits semi-flush with the panel or switchgear door, allowing the operator
access to the keypad and the RS232 communications port. The relay is secured to the panel with the use of four screws
supplied with the relay.

Mounting Bracket Front of Panel

7.48”
(190.0 mm)
Front
Bezel
13.56”
15.00” (344.4 mm)
(381.0 mm)
Vertical Enhanced Side View

Front of Panel
Vertical Enhanced Front View 7.10”
(180.2 mm)
1.55” 4.00”
(39.3 mm) (101.6 mm) 0.20”
7.00” (5.1 mm)
(177.7 mm)
Terminal Blocks
14.03”
9.58” (356.2 mm) CUTOUT
(243.4 mm)
Front of Panel
Reference only 13.66”
(347.0 mm)
1.38”
(35.2 mm)
Mounting Bracket
Vertical Enhanced Top View
0.213” (5.41 mm)

4 Places Vertical Enhanced Mounting Panel
843809A2.cdr
Figure 3–4: B30 VERTICAL DIMENSIONS (ENHANCED PANEL)

7.00"
Front of (177.8 mm)
panel Panel
Mounting bracket
Front
bezel
13.72" 13.50"
(348.5 mm) (342.9 mm)
Vertical side view

Vertical front view
7.13”
(181.1 mm)
1.85" 4.00
(47.0 mm) (101.6)
1.57” 0.46”
(39.9 mm) (11.7 mm)
Panel shown for

reference only
9.00"
(228.6 mm) Mounting bracket
(365.8 mm)
(346.7 mm)
14.40”
13.65”
Terminal blocks
7.00"
(177.8 mm)
Vertical bottom view
0.213" (5.4 mm),

4 places
843755A4.CDR Vertical panel mounting
Figure 3–5: B30 VERTICAL MOUNTING AND DIMENSIONS (STANDARD PANEL)

For side mounting B30 devices with the enhanced front panel, see the following documents available on the UR DVD and
the GE Grid Solutions website:
• GEK-113180: UR-Series UR-V Side-Mounting Front Panel Assembly Instructions
• GEK-113181: Connecting a Remote UR-V Enhanced Front Panel to a Vertical UR Device Instruction Sheet
• GEK-113182: Connecting a Remote UR-V Enhanced Front Panel to a Vertically-Mounted Horizontal UR Device
Instruction Sheet
For side mounting B30 devices with the standard front panel, use the following figures.

GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE
STEP 1 - CREATE THE HOLES AND CUT-OUT INTO THE PANEL

AS PER DRAWING 843753. PLUG THE DISPLAY CABLE INTO
THE FRONT BEZEL
#8-3/8" PAN PHILIPS HEAD
BEFORE MOUNTING THE
BLACK OXIDE SCREW
UNIT ON THE PANEL
P/N: 1408-0306
#8-3/8" 8 PLACES TO MOUNT THE UNIT
PAN PHILIPS HEAD
BLACK OXIDE
#8 LOCKWASHER
SCREW
EXTERNAL TOOTH
UR 19" P/N: 1435-0002
MOUNTING #6x1/2" PAN PHILIPS 8 PLACES TO MOUNT
BRACKET HEAD
BLACK OXIDE
PLASTITE SCREW
DISPLAY CABLE
GROUND CABLE
ATTACH CABLE TO
FRONT BEZEL
BEFORE MOUNTING
FRONT BEZEL ON
THE
PANEL

#10-32 NYLOCK
NUT
P/N: 1422-1032
4 PLACES SIDE MOUNT COVER
#10-3/8" PAN PHILIPS HEAD P/N: 1004-0018
ZINC
P/N: 1410-0006 UR-V FRONT BEZEL
4 PLACES TO MOUNT THE ASSEMBLY UR-V UNIT
BRACKETS PANEL
STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4

MOUNT BRACKETS TO MOUNT FRONT BEZEL TO ASSEMBLE UR-V UNIT
PANEL PANEL TO MOUNTING BRACKETS
843757A2.cdr
Figure 3–6: B30 VERTICAL SIDE MOUNTING INSTALLATION (STANDARD PANEL)

3.1 DESCRIPTION
3-5
3
6.66"
(169.2)
5.33"
(135.4)
INCHES
(MILLIMETERS) 2.83"
1.00"
(71.9)
(25.4)
PANEL SHOWN FOR
0.68" 0.04" 1.33" REFERENCE ONLY
(17.3) (1.0) (33.9) (VIEWED FROM FRONT)
'X' 'X'
1.00"
(25.4)
T
OU
T-
CU
3
5.27"
(133.8)
0.159" DIA. (6 PLACES)

(4.0)
10.05"
(255.3)
12.20"
(309.9)
'X' 'X'
0.213" DIA. (5.4) 843753A3.cdr

(4 PLACES)
SEE HOLES MARKED 'X'
Figure 3–7: B30 VERTICAL SIDE MOUNTING REAR DIMENSIONS (STANDARD PANEL)

3.1.2 REAR TERMINAL LAYOUT
Model: B30H00HCHF8HH6HM8AP6AU8AW6H
B30
RATINGS:
Mods: 000
Control Power: 88-300V DC @ 35W / 77-265V AC @ 35VA
Bus Differential Relay Contact Inputs: 300V DC Max 10mA
Wiring Diagram:
Inst. Manual:
See manual
1601-0109
Contact Outputs: Refer to Instruction Manual Serial Number: MAZB98000029
E83849 Firmware: D
GE Multilin Mfg. Date: 2012/01/05
PO Num: 600001234.56
- M A A
®
B 9 7 0 0 0 0 9 9 -
Item Num:
® LISTED
IND.CONT. EQ.
52TL - M A A B 9 7 0 0 0 0 9 9 -
X W V U T S R P N M L K J H G F D B
c b a c b a c b a c b a c b a c b a
b a
LK1
Tx1 1
1
2
Rx1
ACT1
2
3
LK2
3
Tx1
4
4
3
5
Tx2 b a
ACT2 5
1
1 6
2 LK3
2 6
3
Rx2 3 7
4
4 7
8
Tx2 ACT3 8
IN
Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional CT/VT CPU module Power
direct contact CT/VT or contact CT/VT or contact module (T module shown) supply
input/output input/output contact input/output contact input/output module
module module input/output module input/output module
module module
836789A1.CDR
Figure 3–8: REAR TERMINAL VIEW

Do not touch any rear terminals while the relay is energized.
WARNING
The small form-factor pluggable ports (SFPs) are pluggable transceivers. Do not use non-validated
NOTICE transceivers or install validated transceivers in the wrong Ethernet slot, else damage can occur.
The relay follows a convention with respect to terminal number assignments which are three characters long assigned in
order by module slot position, row number, and column letter. Two-slot wide modules take their slot designation from the
first slot position (nearest to CPU module) which is indicated by an arrow marker on the terminal block. See the following
figure for an example of rear terminal assignments.
Figure 3–9: EXAMPLE OF MODULES IN F AND H SLOTS

The torque used to connect the terminal blocks to the back of the relay chassis (screws a, b, c shown) is 9 inch-pounds. For
the connections to the terminal blocks (rows 1 to 8), use a minimum of 17 inch-pounds. During manufacturing, the power
supply and CPU modules are installed in slots B and D of the chassis with 13 inch-pounds of torque on the screws at the
top and bottom of the modules.

3 HARDWARE 3.2 WIRING
3.2WIRING 3.2.1 TYPICAL WIRING
VX F8c
VX F8a
VOLTAGE INPUTS
VC F7c
VC F7a
NOTE: This diagram is based on the following order code:
B30-T00-HCL-F8F-H6H-L8H-N6A-S8H-U6H VB F6c
This diagram provides an example of how the device VB F6a
is wired, not specifically how to wire the device. Please
refer to the Instruction Manual for additional details on VA F5c
wiring based on various configurations. VA F5a
VT CONNECTION (ABC)
VC F7c
VOLTAGE INPUTS
VC F7a
VB F6c
OPEN DELTA
VB F6a
VA F5c
H1a I
VA F5a
6H
H1b H1
V
H1c
H2a I
3
H2b H2
V F1a
H2c IA5
H3a I
IA F1b
H3b H3
V
H3c IA1 F1c F1
H4a I
H4b H4 IB5 F2a
V
H4c
IB F2b
H5a I
H5b H5 F2c
V IB1
H5c
H6a I IC5 F3a
H6b H6
DIGITAL INPUTS/OUTPUTS
V IC F3b
CURRENT INPUTS
H6c
H7a CONTACT INPUT H7a
8H / 8J
IC1 F3c
H7c CONTACT INPUT H7c
H8a CONTACT INPUT H8a IA5 F5a
H8c CONTACT INPUT H8c
COMMON H7b IA F5b
H7b
H8b SURGE IA1 F5c
F2
U1a I
IB5 F6a
6H
U1b U1
U1c
V
B30 BUS DIFFERENTIAL RELAY IB F6b
U2a I
U2b U2 IB1 F6c
V
U2c IC5 F7a
U3a I
U3b U3 IC F7b
V
U3c
U4a I IC1 F7c
U4b U4
V
U4c
U5a I IA5 L1a
U5b U5
V
U5c IA L1b
U6a I
U6 IA1 L1c F3
U6b
V
Wet U6c IB5 L2a
U7a CONTACT INPUT U7a
U7c CONTACT INPUT U7c IB L2b
U8a CONTACT INPUT U8a
IB1 L2c
U8c CONTACT INPUT U8c
U7b COMMON U7b IC5 L3a
U8b SURGE
IC L3b
CURRENT INPUTS
N1a I
6A
N1b N1 L3c
8H/ 8J
IC1
V
N1c
N2a I IA5 L5a
N2b N2
IA L5b
V
N2c
N3a IA1 L5c
N3b N3 F4
N3c IB5 L6a
N4a
IB L6b
N4b N4
Dry N4c L6c
IB1
N5a CONTACT INPUT N5a
N5c CONTACT INPUT N5c IC5 L7a
L7b
( DC ONLY )
IC
N6c CONTACT INPUT N6c
N5b COMMON N5b IC1 L7c

N8a CONTACT INPUT N8a IA5 S 1a
N7b COMMON N7b IA S 1b
N8b SURGE IA1 S 1c F5

* Optic
Fibre Tx1 100BaseFX
PORT 1 IB5 S 2a
T
Rx1
Tx2 100BaseFX IB S 2b
Rx2
PORT 2
IB1 S 2c
Shielded Tx3 100BaseFX
Ground at Rx3
PORT 3
twisted pairs IC5 S 3a
Remote
Device D1a
RS485
D2a IC S 3b
CURRENT INPUTS
COM 2
D3a com
IC1 S 3c
8H/ 8J
D4b
D4a IRIG-B
Input IA5 S 5a
CPU
Co-axial BNC
IA S 5b
IA1 S 5c
F6
B1b IB5 S 6a
CRITICAL
1
B1a FAILURE
B2b IB S 6b
DC B3a 48 VDC
OUTPUT IB1 S 6c
B3b
POWER SUPPLY
B5b HI IC5 S 7a
AC or DC CONTROL
B6b LO
POWER
B6a IC S 7b
B8a SURGE
B8b FILTER IC1 S 7c
No. 10AWG
Minimum
GROUND BUS MODULE ARRANGEMENT
836784A2.CDR A B C
MODULES MUST BE X W V U T S R P N M L K J H G F D B
GROUNDED IF 1
6 8 6 8 6 8 9
TERMINAL IS
PROVIDED Inputs/ CT Inputs/ CT Power
Inputs/ CT CPU
outputs * outputs * outputs Supply
* *
* Optional
Figure 3–10: TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM (T MODULE SHOWN FOR CPU)

3.2 WIRING 3 HARDWARE
3.2.2 DIELECTRIC STRENGTH
The dielectric strength of the UR-series module hardware is shown in the following table:
Table 3–1: DIELECTRIC STRENGTH OF UR-SERIES MODULE HARDWARE
MODULE MODULE FUNCTION TERMINALS DIELECTRIC STRENGTH
TYPE (AC)
FROM TO
1 Power supply High (+); Low (+); (–) Chassis 2000 V AC for 1 minute
1 Power supply 48 V DC (+) and (–) Chassis 2000 V AC for 1 minute
1 Power supply Relay terminals Chassis 2000 V AC for 1 minute
2 Reserved N/A N/A N/A
3 Reserved N/A N/A N/A
3
4 Digital contact inputs/ All Chassis 2000 V AC for 1 minute
outputs
5 Analog inputs/outputs All except 8b Chassis < 50 V DC
6 Digital contact inputs/ All Chassis 2000 V AC for 1 minute
outputs
G.703 All except 2b, 3a, 7b, 8a Chassis 2000 V AC for 1 minute
7
RS422 All except 6a, 7b, 8a Chassis < 50 V DC
8 CT/VT All Chassis 2000 V AC for 1 minute
9 CPU All Chassis 2000 V AC for 1 minute
Filter networks and transient protection clamps are used in the hardware to prevent damage caused
NOTICE by high peak voltage transients, radio frequency interference (RFI), and electromagnetic interference
(EMI). These protective components can be damaged by application of the ANSI/IEEE C37.90 spec-
ified test voltage for a period longer than the specified one minute.
3.2.3 CONTROL POWER
Control power supplied to the relay must be connected to the matching power supply range of the
NOTICE relay. If voltage is applied to the wrong terminals, damage can occur.
The B30 relay, like almost all electronic relays, contains electrolytic capacitors. These capacitors are
well-known to deteriorate over time if voltage is not applied periodically. Deterioration can be avoided
by powering up the relay at least once a year.
The power supply module can be ordered for two possible voltage ranges, and the UR can be ordered with or without a
redundant power supply module option. Each range has a dedicated input connection for proper operation. The ranges are
as shown below (see the Specifications section of chapter 2 for details):
• Low (LO) range: 24 to 48 V (DC only) nominal.
• High (HI) range: 125 to 250 V nominal.
The power supply module provides power to the relay and supplies power for dry contact input connections.
The power supply module provides 48 V DC power for dry contact input connections and a critical failure relay (see the
Typical wiring diagram earlier). The critical failure relay is a form-C device that is energized once control power is applied
and the relay has successfully booted up with no critical self-test failures. If on-going self-test diagnostic checks detect a
critical failure (see the Self-test Errors section in chapter 7) or control power is lost, the relay is de-energize.
For high reliability systems, the B30 has a redundant option in which two B30 power supplies are placed in parallel on the
bus. If one of the power supplies become faulted, the second power supply assumes the full load of the relay without any
interruptions. Each power supply has a green LED on the front of the module to indicate it is functional. The critical fail relay
of the module also indicates a faulted power supply.

An LED on the front of the control power module shows the status of the power supply:
LED INDICATION POWER SUPPLY
CONTINUOUS ON OK
ON / OFF CYCLING Failure
OFF Failure
NOTE:
AC or DC 14 gauge stranded
wire with suitable
disconnect devices
is recommended.
Heavy copper conductor
or braided wire
3
B8b B8a B6a B6b B5b

+ +
– LOW HIGH
FILTER SURGE
CONTROL
POWER
Switchgear UR-series
ground bus protection system
827247A1.CDR
Figure 3–11: CONTROL POWER CONNECTION
3.2.4 CT/VT MODULES
A CT/VT module can have voltage or current inputs on channels 1 through 4 inclusive, or channels 5 through 8 inclusive.
Channels 1 and 5 are intended for connection to phase A, and are labeled as such in the relay. Likewise, channels 2 and 6
are intended for connection to phase B, and channels 3 and 7 are intended for connection to phase C.
Channels 4 and 8 are intended for connection to a single-phase source. For voltage inputs, these channel are labelled as
auxiliary voltage (VX). For current inputs, these channels are intended for connection to a CT between system neutral and
ground, and are labelled as ground current (IG).
Verify that the connection made to the relay terminals for nominal current of 1 A or 5 A matches the
NOTICE secondary rating of the connected CTs. Unmatched CTs can result in equipment damage or inade-
quate protection.
To connect the module, size 12 American Wire Gauge (AWG) is commonly used; the maximum size is 10 AWG.
CT/VT modules can be ordered with a standard ground current input that is the same as the phase current input. Each AC
current input has an isolating transformer and an automatic shorting mechanism that shorts the input when the module is
withdrawn from the chassis. There are no internal ground connections on the current inputs. Current transformers with 1 to
50000 A primaries and 1 A or 5 A secondaries can be used.
CT/VT modules with a sensitive ground input are also available. The ground CT input of the sensitive ground modules is 10
times more sensitive than the ground CT input of standard CT/VT modules. However, the phase CT inputs and phase VT
inputs are the same as those of regular CT/VT modules.
The above modules have enhanced diagnostics that can automatically detect CT/VT hardware failure and take the relay
out of service.
CT connections for both ABC and ACB phase rotations are identical as shown in the Typical wiring diagram.
The exact placement of a zero-sequence core balance CT to detect ground fault current is shown as follows. Twisted-pair
cabling on the zero-sequence CT is recommended.

UNSHIELDED CABLE SHIELDED CABLE

Ground connection to neutral
Stress cone
Source must be on the source side Source shields
A B C N G A B C
Ground
outside CT
3
To ground;
LOAD must be on
load side
LOAD 996630A6.CDR
Figure 3–12: ZERO-SEQUENCE CORE BALANCE CT INSTALLATION

The phase voltage channels are used for most metering and protection purposes. The auxiliary voltage channel is used as
input for the synchrocheck and volts-per-hertz features.
Substitute the tilde “~” symbol with the slot position of the module in the following figure.
NOTE
~ 1a
~ 1b
~ 2a
~ 2b
~ 3a
~ 3b
~ 4a
~ 4b
~ 5a
~ 6a
~ 7a
~ 8a
~ 1c
~ 2c
~ 3c
~ 4c
~ 5c
~ 6c
~ 7c
~ 8c
VC
VB
VA
VX
IG
IG1
IA
IC
IA1
IC1
IB
IB1
IG5
VC
VB
VA
VX
IA5
IC5
IB5
Current inputs Voltage inputs

8F, 8G, 8L, and 8M modules (4 CTs and 4 VTs)
~ 1a
~ 1b
~ 2a
~ 2b
~ 3a
~ 3b
~ 4a
~ 4b
~ 5a
~ 5b
~ 6a
~ 6b
~ 7a
~ 7b
~ 8a
~ 8b
~ 1c
~ 2c
~ 3c
~ 4c
~ 5c
~ 6c
~ 7c
~ 8c
IG
IG
IG1
IG1
IA
IC
IA
IC
IA1
IC1
IA1
IC1
IB
IB
IB1
IB1
IG5
IG5
IA5
IC5
IA5
IC5
IB5
IB5
Current inputs
8H, 8J, 8N, and 8R modules (8 CTs)
842766A3.CDR
Figure 3–13: CT/VT MODULE WIRING

3.2.5 PROCESS BUS MODULES
The B30 can be ordered with a process bus interface module. This module is designed to interface with the GE Multilin
HardFiber system, allowing bidirectional IEC 61850 fiber optic communications with up to eight HardFiber merging units,
known as Bricks. The HardFiber system has been designed to integrate seamlessly with the existing UR-series applica-
tions, including protection functions, FlexLogic, metering, and communications.
The IEC 61850 process bus system offers the following benefits:
• Reduces labor associated with design, installation, and testing of protection and control applications using the B30 by
reducing the number of individual copper terminations
• Integrates seamlessly with existing B30 applications, since the IEC 61850 process bus interface module replaces the
traditional CT/VT modules
• Communicates using open standard IEC 61850 messaging
For additional details on the HardFiber system, see GE publication GEK-113658: HardFiber Process Bus System Instruc-
3
tion Manual.
3.2.6 CONTACT INPUTS AND OUTPUTS
Every contact input/output module has 24 terminal connections. They are arranged as three terminals per row, with eight
rows in total. A given row of three terminals can be used for the outputs of one relay. For example, for form-C relay outputs,
the terminals connect to the normally open (NO), normally closed (NC), and common contacts of the relay. For a form-A
output, there are options of using current or voltage detection for feature supervision, depending on the module ordered.
The terminal configuration for contact inputs is different for the two applications.
The contact inputs are grouped with a common return. The input/output modules have two versions of grouping: four inputs
per common return and two inputs per common return. When a contact input/output module is ordered, four inputs per com-
mon is used. If the inputs must be isolated per row, then two inputs per common return should be selected (4D module).
The tables and diagrams on the following pages illustrate the module types (6A, etc.) and contact arrangements that can be
ordered for the relay. Since an entire row is used for a single contact output, the name is assigned using the module slot
position and row number. However, since there are two contact inputs per row, these names are assigned by module slot
position, row number, and column position.
Some form-A / solid-state relay outputs include circuits to monitor the DC voltage across the output contact when it is open,
and the DC current through the output contact when it is closed. Each of the monitors contains a level detector whose out-
put is set to logic “On” when the current in the circuit is above the threshold setting. The voltage monitor is set to “On” when
there is a voltage across open contact (the detector allows a current of about 1 to 2.5 mA), and the current monitor is set to
“On” when the current flowing through the closed contact exceeds about 80 to 100 mA. The voltage monitor is intended to
check the health of the overall trip circuit, and the current monitor can be used to seal-in the output contact until an external
contact has interrupted current flow. If enabled, the current monitoring can be used as a seal-in signal to ensure that the
form-A contact does not attempt to break the energized inductive coil circuit and weld the output contacts.
Block diagrams are shown as follows for form-A and solid-state relay outputs with optional voltage monitor, optional current
monitor, and with no monitoring. The actual values shown for contact output 1 are the same for all contact outputs. Form-A
contact output with or without a current or voltage monitoring option is not polarity sensitive. The polarity shown in the figure
is required for solid-state contact output connection.

~#a ~#a
I I
~#b ~#b Load
V Load V
~#c + ~#c +
a) Voltage with optional
Voltage monitoring only Both voltage and current monitoring
current monitoring
~#a ~#a
V V
3 I ~#b
Load
I ~#b Load
~#c + ~#c +
b) Current with optional
Current monitoring only Both voltage and current monitoring
voltage monitoring
(external jumper a-b is required)
~#a
~#b
Load
~#c +
c) No monitoring 827862A4.CDR
Figure 3–14: FORM-A AND SOLID-STATE CONTACT OUTPUTS WITH VOLTAGE AND CURRENT MONITORING
The operation of voltage and current monitors is reflected with the corresponding FlexLogic operands (CONT OP # VON,
CONT OP # VOFF, and CONT OP # ION) which can be used in protection, control, and alarm logic. The typical application of
the voltage monitor is breaker trip circuit integrity monitoring; a typical application of the current monitor is seal-in of the
control command.
See the Digital Elements section of chapter 5 for an example of how form-A and solid-state relay contacts can be applied
for breaker trip circuit integrity monitoring.
Consider relay contacts unsafe to touch when the unit is energized.
WARNING
USE OF FORM-A AND SOLID-STATE RELAY OUTPUTS IN HIGH IMPEDANCE CIRCUITS
NOTE For form-A and solid-state relay output contacts internally equipped with a voltage measuring circuit across the con-
tact, the circuit has an impedance that can cause a problem when used in conjunction with external high input
impedance monitoring equipment such as modern relay test set trigger circuits. These monitoring circuits may con-
tinue to read the form-A contact as being closed after it has closed and subsequently opened, when measured as
an impedance.
The solution is to use the voltage measuring trigger input of the relay test set, and connect the form-A contact
through a voltage-dropping resistor to a DC voltage source. If the 48 V DC output of the power supply is used as a
source, a 500 Ω, 10 W resistor is appropriate. In this configuration, the voltage across either the form-A contact or
the resistor can be used to monitor the state of the output.
Wherever a tilde “~” symbol appears, substitute with the slot position of the module; wherever a number sign “#”
appears, substitute the contact number
NOTE
When current monitoring is used to seal-in the form-A and solid-state relay contact outputs, the Flex-
NOTICE Logic operand driving the contact output should be given a reset delay of 10 ms to prevent damage
of the output contact (in situations when the element initiating the contact output is bouncing, at val-
ues in the region of the pickup value).

Table 3–2: CONTACT INPUT AND OUTPUT MODULE ASSIGNMENTS

~6A MODULE ~6B MODULE ~6C MODULE ~6D MODULE
TERMINAL OUTPUT OR TERMINAL OUTPUT OR TERMINAL OUTPUT TERMINAL OUTPUT
ASSIGNMENT INPUT ASSIGNMENT INPUT ASSIGNMENT ASSIGNMENT
~1 Form-A ~1 Form-A ~1 Form-C ~1a, ~1c 2 Inputs
~2 Form-A ~2 Form-A ~2 Form-C ~2a, ~2c 2 Inputs
~3 Form-C ~3 Form-C ~3 Form-C ~3a, ~3c 2 Inputs
~4 Form-C ~4 Form-C ~4 Form-C ~4a, ~4c 2 Inputs
~5a, ~5c 2 Inputs ~5 Form-C ~5 Form-C ~5a, ~5c 2 Inputs
~6a, ~6c 2 Inputs ~6 Form-C ~6 Form-C ~6a, ~6c 2 Inputs
~7a, ~7c 2 Inputs ~7a, ~7c 2 Inputs ~7 Form-C ~7a, ~7c 2 Inputs
~8a, ~8c 2 Inputs ~8a, ~8c 2 Inputs ~8 Form-C ~8a, ~8c 2 Inputs
3
~6E MODULE ~6F MODULE ~6G MODULE ~6H MODULE
TERMINAL OUTPUT OR TERMINAL OUTPUT TERMINAL OUTPUT OR TERMINAL OUTPUT OR
ASSIGNMENT INPUT ASSIGNMENT ASSIGNMENT INPUT ASSIGNMENT INPUT
~1 Form-C ~1 Fast Form-C ~1 Form-A ~1 Form-A
~5a, ~5c 2 Inputs ~5 Fast Form-C ~5a, ~5c 2 Inputs ~5 Form-A
~6a, ~6c 2 Inputs ~6 Fast Form-C ~6a, ~6c 2 Inputs ~6 Form-A
~7a, ~7c 2 Inputs ~7 Fast Form-C ~7a, ~7c 2 Inputs ~7a, ~7c 2 Inputs
~8a, ~8c 2 Inputs ~8 Fast Form-C ~8a, ~8c 2 Inputs ~8a, ~8c 2 Inputs
~6K MODULE ~6L MODULE ~6M MODULE ~6N MODULE

TERMINAL OUTPUT TERMINAL OUTPUT OR TERMINAL OUTPUT OR TERMINAL OUTPUT OR
ASSIGNMENT ASSIGNMENT INPUT ASSIGNMENT INPUT ASSIGNMENT INPUT
~1 Form-C ~1 Form-A ~1 Form-A ~1 Form-A
~2 Form-C ~2 Form-A ~2 Form-A ~2 Form-A
~3 Form-C ~3 Form-C ~3 Form-C ~3 Form-A
~4 Form-C ~4 Form-C ~4 Form-C ~4 Form-A
~5 Fast Form-C ~5a, ~5c 2 Inputs ~5 Form-C ~5a, ~5c 2 Inputs
~6 Fast Form-C ~6a, ~6c 2 Inputs ~6 Form-C ~6a, ~6c 2 Inputs
~7 Fast Form-C ~7a, ~7c 2 Inputs ~7a, ~7c 2 Inputs ~7a, ~7c 2 Inputs
~8 Fast Form-C ~8a, ~8c 2 Inputs ~8a, ~8c 2 Inputs ~8a, ~8c 2 Inputs
~6P MODULE ~6R MODULE ~6S MODULE ~6T MODULE

TERMINAL OUTPUT OR TERMINAL OUTPUT OR TERMINAL OUTPUT OR TERMINAL OUTPUT OR
ASSIGNMENT INPUT ASSIGNMENT INPUT ASSIGNMENT INPUT ASSIGNMENT INPUT
~1 Form-A ~1 Form-A ~1 Form-A ~1 Form-A
~2 Form-A ~2 Form-A ~2 Form-A ~2 Form-A
~3 Form-A ~3 Form-C ~3 Form-C ~3 Form-A
~4 Form-A ~4 Form-C ~4 Form-C ~4 Form-A
~5 Form-A ~5a, ~5c 2 Inputs ~5 Form-C ~5a, ~5c 2 Inputs
~6 Form-A ~6a, ~6c 2 Inputs ~6 Form-C ~6a, ~6c 2 Inputs
~7a, ~7c 2 Inputs ~7a, ~7c 2 Inputs ~7a, ~7c 2 Inputs ~7a, ~7c 2 Inputs
~8a, ~8c 2 Inputs ~8a, ~8c 2 Inputs ~8a, ~8c 2 Inputs ~8a, ~8c 2 Inputs

~6U MODULE ~6V MODULE ~67 MODULE ~4A MODULE

TERMINAL OUTPUT OR TERMINAL OUTPUT OR TERMINAL OUTPUT TERMINAL OUTPUT
ASSIGNMENT INPUT ASSIGNMENT INPUT ASSIGNMENT ASSIGNMENT
~1 Form-A ~1 Form-A ~1 Form-A ~1 Not Used
~2 Form-A ~2 Form-A ~2 Form-A ~2 Solid-State
~3 Form-A ~3 Form-C ~3 Form-A ~3 Not Used
~4 Form-A ~4 2 Outputs ~4 Form-A ~4 Solid-State
~5 Form-A ~5a, ~5c 2 Inputs ~5 Form-A ~5 Not Used
~6 Form-A ~6a, ~6c 2 Inputs ~6 Form-A ~6 Solid-State
~7a, ~7c 2 Inputs ~7a, ~7c 2 Inputs ~7 Form-A ~7 Not Used
~8a, ~8c 2 Inputs ~8a, ~8c 2 Inputs ~8 Form-A ~8 Solid-State
3 ~4B MODULE ~4C MODULE ~4D MODULE ~4L MODULE

TERMINAL OUTPUT TERMINAL OUTPUT TERMINAL OUTPUT TERMINAL OUTPUT
ASSIGNMENT ASSIGNMENT ASSIGNMENT ASSIGNMENT
~1 Not Used ~1 Not Used ~1a, ~1c 2 Inputs ~1 2 Outputs
~2 Solid-State ~2 Solid-State ~2a, ~2c 2 Inputs ~2 2 Outputs
~8 Solid-State ~8 Solid-State ~8a, ~8c 2 Inputs ~8 Not Used

842762A3.CDR
Figure 3–15: CONTACT INPUT AND OUTPUT MODULE WIRING (1 of 2)

~ 1a ~ 5a CONTACT IN ~ 5a DIGITAL I/O 6L V ~ 1a ~ 7a CONTACT IN ~ 7a DIGITAL I/O 6M V ~ 1a
6K
I I
~ 1b ~1 ~ 5c CONTACT IN ~ 5c ~1 ~ 1b ~ 7c CONTACT IN ~ 7c ~1 ~ 1b
~ 1c ~ 6a CONTACT IN ~ 6a ~ 1c ~ 8a CONTACT IN ~ 8a ~ 1c
~ 2a ~ 6c CONTACT IN ~ 6c V ~ 2a ~ 8c CONTACT IN ~ 8c V ~ 2a
I I
~ 2b ~2 ~ 5b COMMON ~ 5b ~2 ~ 2b ~ 7b COMMON ~ 7b ~2 ~ 2b
~ 2c ~ 2c ~ 2c
~ 7a CONTACT IN ~ 7a ~ 8b SURGE
~ 3a ~ 3a ~ 3a
~ 7c CONTACT IN ~ 7c
~ 3b ~3 ~3 ~ 3b ~3 ~ 3b
~ 8a CONTACT IN ~ 8a
~ 3c ~ 3c ~ 3c
~ 4a ~ 4a ~ 4a
~ 7b COMMON ~ 7b
~ 4b ~4 ~4 ~ 4b ~4 ~ 4b
~ 4c ~ 8b SURGE ~ 4c ~ 4c
~ 5a ~ 5a
~ 5b ~5 ~5 ~ 5b
~ 5c ~ 5c
~ 6a ~ 6a
~ 6b ~6 ~6 ~ 6b
~ 6c ~ 6c
3
~ 7a
DIGITAL I/O
~ 7b ~7
~ 7c
~ 8a
~ 8b ~8
~ 8c
~ 5a CONTACT IN ~ 5a DIGITAL I/O 6N V ~ 1a ~ 7a CONTACT IN ~ 7a DIGITAL I/O 6P V ~ 1a

I I
~ 5c CONTACT IN ~ 5c ~1 ~ 1b ~ 7c CONTACT IN ~ 7c ~1 ~ 1b
~ 6a CONTACT IN ~ 6a ~ 1c ~ 8a CONTACT IN ~ 8a ~ 1c
~ 6c CONTACT IN ~ 6c V ~ 2a ~ 8c CONTACT IN ~ 8c V ~ 2a
I I
~ 5b COMMON ~ 5b ~2 ~ 2b ~ 7b COMMON ~ 7b ~2 ~ 2b
~ 2c ~ 2c
~ 7a CONTACT IN ~ 7a ~ 8b SURGE
V ~ 3a V ~ 3a
~ 7c CONTACT IN ~ 7c I I
~3 ~ 3b ~3 ~ 3b
~ 3c ~ 3c
V ~ 4a V ~ 4a
~ 7b COMMON ~ 7b I I
~4 ~ 4b ~4 ~ 4b
~ 8b SURGE ~ 4c ~ 4c
V ~ 5a
I
~5 ~ 5b
~ 5c
~ 5a CONTACT IN ~ 5a DIGITAL I/O 6R ~ 1a V ~ 6a
I
~ 5c CONTACT IN ~ 5c ~1 ~ 1b ~6 ~ 6b
~ 6a CONTACT IN ~ 6a ~ 1c ~ 6c
~ 6c CONTACT IN ~ 6c ~ 2a
~ 5b COMMON ~ 5b ~2 ~ 2b
~ 2c
~ 3a ~ 7a CONTACT IN ~ 7a DIGITAL I/O 6S ~ 1a
~3 ~ 3b ~ 7c CONTACT IN ~ 7c ~1 ~ 1b
~ 3c ~ 8a CONTACT IN ~ 8a ~ 1c
~ 4a ~ 8c CONTACT IN ~ 8c ~ 2a
~ 7b COMMON ~ 7b
~4 ~ 4b ~ 7b COMMON ~ 7b ~2 ~ 2b
~ 8b SURGE ~ 4c ~ 2c
~ 8b SURGE
~ 3a
~3 ~ 3b
~ 3c
~ 5a CONTACT IN ~ 5a DIGITAL I/O 6T ~ 1a ~ 4a
~ 5c CONTACT IN ~ 5c ~1 ~ 1b ~4 ~ 4b
~ 6a CONTACT IN ~ 6a ~ 1c ~ 4c
~ 6c CONTACT IN ~ 6c ~ 2a ~ 5a
~ 5b COMMON ~ 5b ~2 ~ 2b ~5 ~ 5b
~ 2c ~ 5c
~ 3a ~ 6a
~3 ~ 3b ~6 ~ 6b
~ 3c ~ 6c
~ 4a
~ 7b COMMON ~ 7b
~4 ~ 4b
~ 8b SURGE ~ 4c
~ 7a CONTACT IN ~ 7a DIGITAL I/O 6U ~ 1a
~ 7c CONTACT IN ~ 7c ~1 ~ 1b
~ 8a CONTACT IN ~ 8a ~ 1c
~ 5a CONTACT IN ~ 5a DIGITAL I/O 6V V ~ 1a
I ~ 8c CONTACT IN ~ 8c ~ 2a
~ 5c CONTACT IN ~ 5c ~1 ~ 1b
~ 7b COMMON ~ 7b ~2 ~ 2b
~ 2c
~ 6c CONTACT IN ~ 6c V ~ 2a ~ 8b SURGE
I ~ 3a
~ 5b COMMON ~ 5b ~2 ~ 2b
~3 ~ 3b
~ 2c
~ 3a
~ 7c CONTACT IN ~ 7c ~ 4a
~3 ~ 3b
~ 8a CONTACT IN ~ 8a ~4 ~ 4b
~ 3c
~ 8c CONTACT IN ~ 8c ~ 4c
~ 4a
~ 7b COMMON ~ 7b ~ 4a ~ 5a
~ 4b
~ 4c ~5 ~ 5b
~ 8b SURGE ~ 4c
~ 5c
~ 6a
~6 ~ 6b
~ 6c
842763A2.CDR
Figure 3–16: CONTACT INPUT AND OUTPUT MODULE WIRING (2 of 2)

For proper functionality, observe the polarity shown in the figures for all contact input and output con-
NOTICE nections.

CONTACT INPUTS
A dry contact has one side connected to terminal B3b. This is the positive 48 V DC voltage rail supplied by the power sup-
ply module. The other side of the dry contact is connected to the required contact input terminal. Each contact input group
has its own common (negative) terminal which must be connected to the DC negative terminal (B3a) of the power supply
module. When a dry contact closes, a current of 1 to 3 mA flows through the associated circuit.
A wet contact has one side connected to the positive terminal of an external DC power supply. The other side of this contact
is connected to the required contact input terminal. If a wet contact is used, then the negative side of the external source
must be connected to the relay common (negative) terminal of each contact group. The maximum external source voltage
for this arrangement is 300 V DC.
The voltage threshold at which each group of four contact inputs detects a closed contact input is programmable as
17 V DC for 24 V sources, 33 V DC for 48 V sources, 84 V DC for 110 to 125 V sources, and 166 V DC for 250 V sources.
(Dry)
Terminals from type 6B
contact input/output module (Wet)
Terminals from type 6B
contact input/output module
3
~7a Contact input 1 ~7a Contact input 1
~7c Contact input 2 ~7c Contact input 2
~8a Contact input 3 24 to 250 V ~8a Contact input 3
~8c Contact input 4 ~8c Contact input 4
~7b Common ~7b Common
~8b Surge ~8b Surge
B1b
B1a Critical failure
B2b
Power supply module
B3a
48 V DC output
B3b
B5b HI+
B6b LO+ Control power
B6a
B8a Surge
B8b Filter
827741A5.CDR
Figure 3–17: DRY AND WET CONTACT INPUT CONNECTIONS

Wherever a tilde “~” symbol appears, substitute with the slot position of the module.
NOTE
There is no provision in the relay to detect a DC ground fault on 48 V DC control power external output. We recommend
using an external DC supply.
GENERAL APPLICATION CONSIDERATIONS
Contacts outputs of protective relays, auxiliary contacts from breakers, disconnectors and other devices, are generally con-
nected to contacts inputs of protective relays. In some situations, the contact outputs of some protective relays can have
high impedance connected across it. When such a contact output is connected across a B30 contact input, it can spuriously
operate the B30 input even when the output is open, if there is a substantial distributed capacitance (represented by C1)
present in the wiring between the output and the B30 input and the debounce time setting in the B30 relay is low enough.
This false assertion of the contact input, when there is inadvertent ground present at the DC positive terminal, can be pre-
vented by inserting a resistor across the B30 input.
The following figure shows a typical DC circuit, with battery ground detection, of contact input. The contact output has par-
allel impedance across it (represented by R1).

Figure 3–18: TYPICAL CONTACT INPUT DC CIRCUIT

The presence of the impedance path (R1) across the contact output allows the stray (distributed) capacitance C1 to charge
as shown, thus developing a voltage across the contact input enough to momentarily operate the input while the capaci-
tance discharges in the presence of DC ground on the positive terminal of the battery.
The duration of the discharge depends on the value of the distributed capacitance, the initial voltage of the distributed
capacitance, and the input impedance of the contact input. If the duration is greater than the debounce time setting, then
the contact input operates.
The application example that follows describes how to mitigate this problem by connecting a resistor across the contact
input, as shown in the next figure, or by adjusting the debounce time setting to a value greater than the discharge time to
prevent spurious operation of the contact input only if the voltage (with output open) across the contact input due to trickle
current is less than the threshold voltage. This operation of contact inputs also can be prevented by using the Auto-Burnish
contact inputs or contact inputs with active impedance.
Figure 3–19: CONTACT INPUT CONNECTED TO A CONTACT OUTPUT WITH RESISTOR (R2) ACROSS THE INPUT

APPLICATION EXAMPLE
This example is for illustrative purposes only and the calculations present the worst-case scenario. In practice, the value of
debounce time can be lower.
Contact input ON state impedance used in the calculation of the discharge period is based on the following table.
Table 3–3: DISCHARGE PERIOD
BATTERY VOLTAGE (V) INPUT IMPEDANCE (KΩ)
130 50
250 97
Debounce time setting = 2 ms

Assume a stray capacitance of 0.1 μF.
Assume an initial voltage across the stray capacitance "Vinitial" = 19 V (Vthreshold - 65 V), where Vthreshold = 84 V. The
initial voltage Vinitial depends on values of impedance of R1 and contact inputs when the contact input is OFF (non-acti-
3
vated state).
Therefore, discharge time constant (τ) =50 kΩ *0.1 μF = 5 ms.
Discharge period t is calculated from the following equation:
Vthreshold = (Vbatt - VInitial) *e^ (-t/τ)
84 = -149 *e^ (t/0.005) (EQ 3.1)
T = -0.005 * ln (84/149) = 0.0029 s
Therefore, in this example the contact inputs operate.
To prevent this operation, the debounce time must be increased to 4 ms (set debounce time as per the following table) or
insert a resistor less than or equal to "R" as calculated later.
Table 3–4: TYPICAL DEBOUNCE TIME SETTING
STRAY CAPACITANCE (μF) BATTERY VOLTAGE (V) DEBOUNCE TIME (MS)
0.05 130 2
0.1 130 4
0.2 130 6
0.05 250 3
0.1 250 6
0.2 250 11
The value of this resistor "R" is calculated as follows:

1. Determine the minimum voltage (V threshold) required to turn on the input. This is determined by direct measurement
or referenced in the input specifications.
2. Calculate the resistance necessary to limit the voltage to 1/3 V threshold (when the contact is OFF, the non-activated
state) as follows:
R = (Vthreshold / 3) / (2 mA) (EQ 3.2)
The 2 mA current is used in case the contact input is connected across the GE Form A contact output with voltage
monitoring. Otherwise use the amperage of the active circuit connected to the contact input when its contact output is
open and the voltage across the contact input is third trigger threshold to calculate the resistor value.
3. When the contact is ON (operate state), the battery voltage appears across the resistor. The wattage rating of the
resistor is then:
PR = 1.3 * (Vbatt) ^2 / R Watts (EQ 3.3)
4. Applying the following equation to our example:
R = 84 V / 3*(1 / 2 mA) = 14 kΩ
PR = 1.57 Watts (EQ 3.4)
5. Calculating the voltage across the contact input with the Burden Resistor, Voltage across the contact Input:

Vresistor = 2 mA * 14 Kohm = 28 V
Vresistor < contact input threshold (84 V) (EQ 3.5)
In conclusion, in this example, the contact input does NOT operate falsely with the Burden Resistor across its input AND
when a battery ground is present.

USE OF CONTACT INPUTS WITH AUTO-BURNISHING

The contact inputs sense a change of the state of the external device contact based on the measured current. When exter-
nal devices are located in a harsh industrial environment (either outdoor or indoor), their contacts can be exposed to vari-
ous types of contamination. Normally, there is a thin film of insulating sulfidation, oxidation, or contaminates on the surface
of the contacts, sometimes making it difficult or impossible to detect a change of the state. This film must be removed to
establish circuit continuity – an impulse of higher than normal current can accomplish this.
The contact inputs with auto-burnish create a high current impulse when the threshold is reached to burn off this oxidation
layer as a maintenance to the contacts. Afterwards the contact input current is reduced to a steady-state current. The
impulse has a 5 second delay after a contact input changes state.
current
50 to 70 mA
3 mA
time
25 to 50 ms 842749A1.CDR
Figure 3–20: CURRENT THROUGH CONTACT INPUTS WITH AUTO-BURNISHING

Regular contact inputs limit current to less than 3 mA to reduce station battery burden. In contrast, contact inputs with auto-
burnishing allow currents up to 50 to 70 mA at the first instance when the change of state was sensed. Then, within 25 to
50 ms, this current is slowly reduced to 3 mA as indicated above. The 50 to 70 mA peak current burns any film on the con-
tacts, allowing for proper sensing of state changes. If the external device contact is bouncing, the auto-burnishing starts
when external device contact bouncing is over.
Another important difference between the auto-burnishing input module and the regular input modules is that only two con-
tact inputs have common ground, as opposed to four contact inputs sharing one common ground (refer to the Contact Input
and Output Module Wiring diagrams). This is beneficial when connecting contact inputs to separate voltage sources. Con-
sequently, the threshold voltage setting is also defined per group of two contact inputs.
The auto-burnish feature can be disabled or enabled using the DIP switches found on each daughter card. There is a DIP
switch for each contact, for a total of 16 inputs.
CONTACT INPUT 1 AUTO-BURNISH = OFF

CONTACT INPUT 1 AUTO-BURNISH = ON



842751A1.CDR
Figure 3–21: AUTO-BURNISH DIP SWITCHES

The auto-burnish circuitry has an internal fuse for safety purposes. During regular maintenance, check the auto-
burnish functionality using an oscilloscope.
NOTE
USE OF CONTACT INPUTS WITH ACTIVE IMPEDANCE

Contact inputs susceptible to parasitic capacitance caused by long cable runs affected by switching surges from external
circuits can result in inadvertent activation of contact inputs with the external contact open. In this case, GE recommends
using the digital I/O module with active impedance circuit.
Active impedance contact input can tolerate external cable capacitance of up to 0.2 µF, without entering the ON state for
more than 2 ms. The contact input debounce time can still be set above 2 ms for added security to prevent contact input
activations cause by external transient ON states.
An active impedance contact input is normally in Low impedance mode during OFF contact state (non-activated condition).
During Low impedance state contact input impedance is maintained at 10 K Ohms impedance to allow fast discharge of the
3 stray capacitance of the long cables.
When the contact input voltage exceeds the set threshold, active impedance maintains 10 K Ohms impedance value. If
voltage starts rapidly decreasing, this indicates that stray capacitance is being discharged through the contact input. If,
however, voltage stabilizes above the set threshold, the input impedance is switched to High impedance mode of 100 K
Ohms. This value reduces the input current to <3 mA, and contact input switched to the ON state (operated state).
The figure shows the active impedance contact input V-I characteristic. Different thresholds with their corresponding char-
acteristics are shown by color. The contact input is in the ON (operated) state if the input voltage is to the right of the col-
ored threshold band (+/-10% tolerance), and the contact input is in the OFF (non-activated) state when input voltage is to
the left of the band. A contact input is in LOW state during non-operated system condition, and actively switches to HIGH
state upon detection of input voltage above the settable threshold.

Figure 3–22: ACTIVE IMPEDANCE CONTACT INPUT V-I CHARACTERISTIC
3.2.7 TRANSDUCER INPUTS AND OUTPUTS
Transducer input modules can receive input signals from external DCmA output transducers (DCmA In) or resistance tem-
perature detectors (RTDs). Hardware and software are provided to receive signals from these external transducers and
convert these signals into a digital format for use as required.
Transducer output modules provide DC current outputs in several standard DCmA ranges. Software is provided to config-
ure virtually any analog quantity used in the relay to drive the analog outputs.
Every transducer input/output module has a total of 24 terminal connections. These connections are arranged as three ter-
minals per row with a total of eight rows. A given row can be used for either inputs or outputs, with terminals in column "a"
having positive polarity and terminals in column "c" having negative polarity. Since an entire row is used for a single input/
output channel, the name of the channel is assigned using the module slot position and row number.
Each module also requires that a connection from an external ground bus be made to terminal 8b. The current outputs
require a twisted-pair shielded cable, where the shield is grounded at one end only. The following figure illustrates the trans-
ducer module types (5A, 5C, 5D, 5E, and 5F) and channel arrangements that can be ordered for the relay.
Wherever a tilde “~” symbol appears, substitute with the slot position of the module.
NOTE

842764A1.CDR
Figure 3–23: TRANSDUCER INPUT/OUTPUT MODULE WIRING

The following figure show how to connect RTDs.

Three-wire shielded cable

Route cable in separate conduit from
current carrying conductors
RTD terminals
SURGE ~8b RTD
Hot ~1a
RTD ~1
Comp ~1c
For RTD ~1 & ~2 Return ~1b RTD terminals
RTD ~2
Hot ~2a
Comp ~2c
3
RTD
Maximum total lead resistance:

25 ohms for Platinum RTDs
859736A1.CDR
Figure 3–24: RTD CONNECTION

3.2.8 RS232 FACEPLATE PORT
A 9-pin RS232C serial port is located on the B30 faceplate for programming with a computer. All that is required to use this
interface is a computer running the EnerVista UR Setup software provided with the relay. Cabling for the RS232 port is
shown in the following figure for both 9-pin and 25-pin connectors.
The baud rate for this port is fixed at 19200 bps.
NOTE
Figure 3–25: RS232 FACEPLATE PORT CONNECTION
3.2.9 CPU COMMUNICATION PORTS
a) OVERVIEW
In addition to the faceplate RS232 port, the B30 provides a rear RS485 communication port.
The CPU modules do not require a surge ground connection.
NOTE

MM fiber-
Port 1
T
optic cable Tx1 Rx1 100Base-FX
Tx2 Rx2 100Base-FX Port 2
Shielded Tx3 Rx3 100Base-FX Port 3
twisted-pairs
D1a +
RS485
D2a —
COM2
Ground at D3a COMMON
remote D4b +
device
D4a — IRIG-B
input
CPU
BNC
Co-axial cable
U
100Base-T Port 1
Tx1 Rx1 100Base-FX Port 2
Shielded Tx1 Rx1 100Base-FX Port 3
twisted-pairs
D1a +
RS485
D2a —
COM2
remote D4b +
device
D4a — IRIG-B
input
CPU
BNC
Co-axial cable
Port 1
V
100Base-T
100Base-T Port 2
Shielded 100Base-T
twisted-pairs Port 3
D1a +
RS485
D2a —
COM2
remote D4b +
device
D4a — IRIG-B
input
CPU
BNC
Co-axial cable
842722A3.CDR
Figure 3–26: CPU MODULE COMMUNICATIONS WIRING
b) RS485 PORT
RS485 data transmission and reception are accomplished over a single twisted pair with transmit and receive data alternat-
ing over the same two wires. Through the use of the port, continuous monitoring and control from a remote computer,
SCADA system, or PLC is possible.
To minimize errors from noise, the use of shielded twisted pair wire is recommended. Correct polarity must also be
observed. For instance, the relays must be connected with all RS485 “+” terminals connected together, and all RS485 “–”
terminals connected together. Though data is transmitted over a two-wire twisted pair, all RS485 devices require a shared
reference, or common voltage. This common voltage is implied to be a power supply common. Some systems allow the
shield (drain wire) to be used as common wire and to connect directly to the B30 COM terminal (#3); others function cor-
rectly only if the common wire is connected to the B30 COM terminal, but insulated from the shield.
To avoid loop currents, ground the shield at only one point. If other system considerations require the shield to be grounded
at more than one point, install resistors (typically 100 ohms) between the shield and ground at each grounding point. Each
relay needs to be daisy-chained to the next one in the link. A maximum of 32 relays can be connected in this manner with-
out exceeding driver capability. For larger systems, additional serial channels must be added. It is also possible to use com-
mercially available repeaters to have more than 32 relays on a single channel. Avoid star or stub connections entirely.

Lightning strikes and ground surge currents can cause large momentary voltage differences between remote ends of the
communication link. For this reason, surge protection devices are internally provided at both communication ports. An iso-
lated power supply with an optocoupled data interface also acts to reduce noise coupling. To ensure maximum reliability, all
equipment should have similar transient protection devices installed.
Terminate both ends of the RS485 circuit with an impedance as shown below.
SCADA / PLC / computer UR-series device

Shield Twisted pair
ZT (*) RS485 +
Data Optocoupler Optocoupler Data
RS485 –
COM
3 COMP 485COM
Ground shield at SCADA / PLC /

computer only or at
UR-series device only Relay
RS485 +
ZT (*) Terminating impedance at
RS485 –
each end (typically 120 Ω and 1 nF)
COMP 485COM
Up to 32 devices,
maximum 4000 feet
(1200 m)
Relay
ZT (*)
RS485 +
RS485 –
COMP 485COM Last device

827757AA.CDR
Figure 3–27: RS485 SERIAL CONNECTION
c) 100BASE-FX FIBER OPTIC PORTS

Ensure that the dust covers are installed when the fiber is not in use. Dirty or scratched connectors can lead to high losses
on a fiber link.
The fiber optic communication ports allow for fast and efficient communications between relays at 100 Mbps. Optical fiber
can be connected to the relay supporting a wavelength of 1310 nm in multi-mode.

3.2.10 IRIG-B
IRIG-B is a standard time code format that allows stamping of events to be synchronized among connected devices. The
IRIG-B code allows time accuracies of up to 100 ns. Using the IRIG-B input, the B30 operates an internal oscillator with 1
µs resolution and accuracy. The IRIG time code formats are serial, pulse width-modulated codes that can be either DC
level shifted or amplitude modulated (AM). The GE MultiSync 100 1588 GPS Clock as well as third-party equipment are
available for generating the IRIG-B signal; this equipment can use a global positioning system (GPS) satellite system to
obtain the time reference so that devices at different geographic locations can be synchronized.
GPS connection GPS satellite system
UR-series device 3
4B IRIG-B (+)
IRIG-B
4A IRIG-B (–)
time code generator
RG58/59 coaxial cable Receiver
(DC-shift or + BNC (in)
amplitude modulated
signal can be used)
GPS connection GPS satellite system
IRIG-B
time code generator
UR-series device
Twisted-pair cable
(DC-shift or +
4B IRIG-B (+)
amplitude modulated
4A IRIG-B (–)
signal can be used)
Receiver
BNC (in)
827756A8.CDR
Figure 3–28: OPTIONS FOR THE IRIG-B CONNECTION

Using an amplitude modulated receiver causes errors up to 1 ms in event time-stamping.
NOTE
The B30 is intended for use with external clocks that set the IRIG-B control bits according to IEEE Std C37.118.1-
2011. When used with a source that sets the IRIG-B control bits according to IEEE Std 1344-1995, the source must
have the sign of its local time offset setting reversed, and if daylight savings time (DST) is used, the source's DST
start and DST stop date settings must be interchanged.

3.3 DIRECT INPUT AND OUTPUT COMMUNICATIONS 3 HARDWARE
3.3DIRECT INPUT AND OUTPUT COMMUNICATIONS 3.3.1 DESCRIPTION
The direct inputs and outputs feature makes use of the type 7 series of communications modules, which allow direct mes-
saging between UR devices. These communications modules are outlined in the table later in this section.
The communications channels are normally connected in a ring configuration as shown in the following figure. The trans-
mitter of one module is connected to the receiver of the next module. The transmitter of this second module is then con-
nected to the receiver of the next module in the ring. This is continued to form a communications ring. The figure illustrates
a ring of four UR-series relays with the following connections: UR1-Tx to UR2-Rx, UR2-Tx to UR3-Rx, UR3-Tx to UR4-Rx,
and UR4-Tx to UR1-Rx. A maximum of 16 URs can be connected in a single ring
Tx
UR 1
Rx
3 UR 2
Tx
Rx
Tx
UR 3
Rx
Tx
UR 4
Rx
842006A2.CDR
Figure 3–29: DIRECT INPUT AND OUTPUT SINGLE CHANNEL CONNECTION

IRC modules with protocol C37.94 and G.703 are designed for back-to-back communication connections, so the ring con-
figuration shown in the previous figure does not apply. To establish inter-relay communication in more than two URs, you
need to have two channel IRC module and enable DIRECT I/O CHANNEL CROSSOVER function in all relays, as shown in
the next figure. This configuration can be expanded to 16 URs, and this configuration does not provide redundancy ring
since both channels are made into single ring by the channel crossover function. As per the figure Typical Pin Interconnec-
tion between Two G.703 Interfaces later in this chapter, the clock is supplied typically by multiplexer (MUX) and all URs are
in Loop Timing Mode. If there is no MUX, then UR1 and UR3 can be in Internal Timing Mode and UR2 and UR4 can be in
Loop Timing Mode. That is, connected channels must have opposite timing modes.
Figure 3–30: RING CONFIGURATION FOR C37.94 MODULE (CONCEPT ALSO APPLIES TO G.703)

3 HARDWARE 3.3 DIRECT INPUT AND OUTPUT COMMUNICATIONS
The interconnection for dual-channel type 7 communications modules is shown as follows. Two channel modules allow for
a redundant ring configuration. That is, two rings can be created to provide an additional independent data path. The
required connections are: UR1-Tx1 to UR2-Rx1, UR2-Tx1 to UR3-Rx1, UR3-Tx1 to UR4-Rx1, and UR4-Tx1 to UR1-Rx1
for the first ring; and UR1-Tx2 to UR4-Rx2, UR4-Tx2 to UR3-Rx2, UR3-Tx2 to UR2-Rx2, and UR2-Tx2 to UR1-Rx2 for the
second ring.
Tx1
Rx1
UR 1
Tx2
Rx2
Tx1
Rx1
UR 2
Tx2
Rx2
3
Tx1
Rx1
UR 3
Tx2
Rx2
Tx1
Rx1
UR 4
Tx2
Rx2
842007A3.CDR
Figure 3–31: DIRECT INPUT AND OUTPUT DUAL CHANNEL CONNECTION

The following diagram shows the connection for three UR-series relays using two independent communication channels.
UR1 and UR3 have single type 7 communication modules; UR2 has a dual-channel module. The two communication chan-
nels can be of different types, depending on the Type 7 modules used. To allow the direct input and output data to cross-
over from channel 1 to channel 2 on UR2, the DIRECT I/O CHANNEL CROSSOVER setting should be “Enabled” on UR2. This
forces UR2 to forward messages received on Rx1 out Tx2, and messages received on Rx2 out Tx1.
Tx
UR 1
Rx
Channel 1
Tx1
Rx1
UR 2
Tx2
Rx2
Channel 2
Tx
UR 3
Rx
842013A2.CDR
Figure 3–32: DIRECT INPUT AND OUTPUT SINGLE/DUAL CHANNEL COMBINATION CONNECTION
The inter-relay communications modules are available with several interfaces and some are outlined here in more detail.
Those that apply depend on options purchased. The options are outlined in the Inter-Relay Communications section of the
Order Code tables in Chapter 2. All of the fiber modules use ST type connectors.

3.3.2 FIBER: LED AND ELED TRANSMITTERS
The following figure shows the configuration for the 7A, 7B, 7C, 7H, 7I, and 7J fiber-only modules.
7A, 7B, and 7H, 7I, and
7C modules 7J modules
Rx1 Rx1
Tx1 Tx1
3 Rx2
Tx2
1 channel 2 channels
831719A3.CDR
Figure 3–33: LED AND ELED FIBER MODULES
3.3.3 FIBER-LASER TRANSMITTERS
The following figure shows the configuration for the 72, 73, 7D, and 7K fiber-laser modules.
72 and 7D 73 and 7K
modules modules
Tx1 Tx1
Rx1 Rx1
Tx2
Rx2
1 channel 2 channels
831720A5.CDR
Figure 3–34: 7X LASER FIBER MODULES

The following figure shows configuration for the 2I and 2J fiber-laser module.
2I and 2J
modules
Rx1
Tx1
Rx2
Tx2
3
2 channels
831827A1.CDR
Figure 3–35: 2I AND 2J LASER FIBER MODULE

Observing any fiber transmitter output can injure the eye.
CAUTION
When using a laser Interface, attenuators can be necessary to ensure that you do not exceed the
NOTICE maximum optical input power to the receiver.

3.3.4 G.703 INTERFACE
a) DESCRIPTION
The following figure shows the 64K ITU G.703 co-directional interface configuration.
The G.703 module is fixed at 64 kbps. The SETTINGS > PRODUCT SETUP > DIRECT I/O > DIRECT I/O DATA
RATE setting is not applicable to this module.
NOTE
AWG 24 twisted shielded pair is recommended for external connections, with the shield grounded only at one end. Con-
necting the shield to pin X1a or X6a grounds the shield since these pins are internally connected to ground. Thus, if pin X1a
or X6a is used to ground the shield at one end, do not ground the shield at the other end. This interface module is protected
by surge suppression devices.
3 Shield ~1a
7S
Tx – ~1b
G.703 Rx – ~2a
channel 1
Tx + ~2b
Rx + ~3a
G.703 communications
Surge ~3b
Shield ~6a
Tx – ~6b
G.703 Rx – ~7a
channel 2
Tx + ~7b
Rx + ~8a
Surge ~8b
842773A3.CDR
Figure 3–36: G.703 INTERFACE CONFIGURATION

The following figure shows the typical pin interconnection between two G.703 interfaces. For the actual physical arrange-
ment of these pins, see the Rear Terminal Layout section earlier in this chapter. All pin interconnections are to be main-
tained for a connection to a multiplexer.
Shield X1a X1a Shield
7S
Tx – X1b X1b Tx – 7S
G.703 Rx – X2a X2a Rx – G.703
channel 1 channel 1
Tx + X2b X2b Tx +
Rx + X3a X3a Rx +
Surge X3b X3b Surge

Shield X6a X6a Shield
Tx – X6b X6b Tx –
G.703 Rx – X7a X7a Rx – G.703
channel 2 channel 2
Tx + X7b X7b Tx +
Rx + X8a X8a Rx +
Surge X8b X8b Surge
831727A5.CDR
Figure 3–37: TYPICAL PIN INTERCONNECTION BETWEEN TWO G.703 INTERFACES

Pin nomenclature can differ from one manufacturer to another. Therefore, it is not uncommon to see pinouts num-
bered TxA, TxB, RxA and RxB. In such cases, it can be assumed that “A” is equivalent to “+” and “B” is equivalent
NOTE
to “–”.
b) G.703 SELECTION SWITCH PROCEDURES

1. With the power to the relay off, remove the G.703 module (7R or 7S) as follows. Record the original location of the
module to help ensure that the same or replacement module is inserted into the correct slot.
2. Simultaneously pull the ejector/inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module in order to release the
module for removal.
3. Remove the module cover screw.
4. Remove the top cover by sliding it towards the rear and then lift it upwards.
5. Set the timing selection switches (channel 1, channel 2) to the desired timing modes.

6. Replace the top cover and the cover screw.

7. Re-insert the G.703 module. Take care to ensure that the correct module type is inserted into the correct slot position.
The ejector/inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module must be in the disengaged position as
the module is smoothly inserted into the slot. Once the clips have cleared the raised edge of the chassis, engage the
clips simultaneously. When the clips have locked into position, the module is fully inserted.
Bottom cover
Ejector/inserter clip
FRONT
Channel 1 3
Timing selection
switches
Top cover
Channel 2
Cover screw
REAR
831774A3.CDR
Figure 3–38: G.703 TIMING SELECTION SWITCH SETTING
Table 3–5: G.703 TIMING SELECTIONS

SWITCHES FUNCTION
S1 OFF → octet timing disabled
ON → octet timing 8 kHz
S5 and S6 S5 = OFF and S6 = OFF → loop timing mode
S5 = ON and S6 = OFF → internal timing mode
S5 = OFF and S6 = ON → minimum remote loopback mode
S5 = ON and S6 = ON → dual loopback mode
c) G.703 OCTET TIMING

If octet timing is enabled (ON), this 8 kHz signal is asserted during the violation of bit 8 (LSB) necessary for connecting to
higher order systems. When B30s are connected back-to-back, octet timing is disabled (OFF).
d) G.703 TIMING MODES

There are two timing modes for the G.703 module: internal timing mode and loop timing mode (default).
• Internal Timing Mode: The system clock is generated internally. Therefore, the G.703 timing selection should be in
the internal timing mode for back-to-back (UR-to-UR) connections. For back-to-back connections, set for octet timing
(S1 = OFF) and timing mode to internal timing (S5 = ON and S6 = OFF).
• Loop Timing Mode: The system clock is derived from the received line signal. Therefore, the G.703 timing selection
should be in loop timing mode for connections to higher order systems. For connection to a higher order system (UR-

to-multiplexer, factory defaults), set to octet timing (S1 = ON) and set timing mode to loop timing (S5 = OFF and S6 =
OFF).
The switch settings for the internal and loop timing modes are shown below:
Loop timing mode
Internal timing mode (factory default)
842752A2.CDR
3 e) G.703 TEST MODES

In minimum remote loopback mode, the multiplexer is enabled to return the data from the external interface without any
processing to assist in diagnosing G.703 line-side problems irrespective of clock rate. Data enters from the G.703 inputs,
passes through the data stabilization latch which also restores the proper signal polarity, passes through the multiplexer
and then returns to the transmitter. The differential received data is processed and passed to the G.703 transmitter module
after which point the data is discarded. The G.703 receiver module is fully functional and continues to process data and
passes it to the differential Manchester transmitter module. Since timing is returned as it is received, the timing source is
expected to be from the G.703 line side of the interface.
DMR = Differential Manchester Receiver

DMR G7X DMX = Differential Manchester Transmitter
G7X = G.703 Transmitter
G7R = G.703 Receiver
DMX G7R
842774A1.CDR
Figure 3–39: G.703 MINIMUM REMOTE LOOPBACK MODE

In dual loopback mode, the multiplexers are active and the functions of the circuit are divided into two with each receiver/
transmitter pair linked together to deconstruct and then reconstruct their respective signals. Differential Manchester data
enters the Differential Manchester receiver module and then is returned to the differential Manchester transmitter module.
Likewise, G.703 data enters the G.703 receiver module and is passed through to the G.703 transmitter module to be
returned as G.703 data. Because of the complete split in the communications path and because, in each case, the clocks
are extracted and reconstructed with the outgoing data, in this mode there must be two independent sources of timing. One
source lies on the G.703 line side of the interface while the other lies on the differential Manchester side of the interface.
DMR = Differential Manchester Receiver

DMR G7X DMX = Differential Manchester Transmitter
G7X = G.703 Transmitter
G7R = G.703 Receiver
DMX G7R
842775A1.CDR
Figure 3–40: G.703 DUAL LOOPBACK MODE

3.3.5 RS422 INTERFACE
a) DESCRIPTION
There are two RS422 inter-relay communications modules available: single-channel RS422 (module 7T) and dual-channel
RS422 (module 7W). The modules can be configured to run at 64 kbps or 128 kbps. AWG 20-24 twisted shielded pair cable
is recommended for external connections. These modules are protected by optically-isolated surge suppression devices.
The shield pins (6a and 7b) are internally connected to the ground pin (8a). Proper shield termination is as follows:
• Site 1: Terminate shield to pins 6a or 7b or both.
• Site 2: Terminate shield to COM pin 2b.
Match the clock terminating impedance with the impedance of the line.
Single-channel RS422 module Dual-channel RS422 module
~ 3b ~ 3b 3
7W
Tx – Tx –
7T
~ 3a Rx – ~ 3a Rx –
RS422
~ 2a Tx + RS422 ~ 2a Tx +
channel 1
Inter-relay comms.
~ 4b Rx + ~ 4b Rx +
~ 6a Shield ~ 6a Shield
Inter-relay communications
~ 7a ~ 5b Tx –
Clock
~ 8b ~ 5a Rx –
RS422
~ 2b COM ~ 4a Tx +
channel 2
~ 8a Surge ~ 6b Rx +
~ 7b Shield
~ 7a
Clock
~ 8b
~ 2b COM
~ indicates the slot position ~ 8a Surge

842776A3.CDR
Figure 3–41: RS422 INTERFACE CONNECTIONS

The following figure shows the typical pin interconnection between two single-channel RS422 interfaces installed in slot W.
All pin interconnections are to be maintained for a connection to a multiplexer.
Tx – W3b W3b Tx –
RS422 communications 7T
RS422 communications 7T
Rx – W3a W3a Rx –
RS422 Tx + W2a W2a Tx + RS422
channel 1 channel 1
Rx + W4b W4b Rx +
Shield W6a W6a Shield
+ W7a W7a +
Clock Clock
– W8b W8b –
Common COM W2b W2b COM Common
Surge W8a W8a Surge
+ –
64 or 128 kbps 831728A5.CDR
Figure 3–42: TYPICAL PIN INTERCONNECTION BETWEEN TWO RS422 INTERFACES
b) TWO-CHANNEL APPLICATION VIA MULTIPLEXERS

The RS422 interface can be used for single channel or two channel applications over SONET/SDH or multiplexed systems.
When used in single-channel applications, the RS422 interface links to higher order systems in a typical fashion observing
transmit (Tx), receive (Rx), and send timing (ST) connections. However, when used in two-channel applications, certain cri-
teria must be followed since there is one clock input for the two RS422 channels. The system functions correctly when the
following connections are observed and your data module has a terminal timing feature. Terminal timing is a common fea-
ture to most synchronous data units that allows the module to accept timing from an external source. Using the terminal
timing feature, two channel applications can be achieved if these connections are followed: The send timing outputs from
the multiplexer (data module 1), connects to the clock inputs of the UR–RS422 interface in the usual fashion. In addition,
the send timing outputs of data module 1 is also paralleled to the terminal timing inputs of data module 2. By using this con-
figuration, the timing for both data modules and both UR–RS422 channels are derived from a single clock source. As a
result, data sampling for both of the UR–RS422 channels is synchronized via the send timing leads on data module 1 as
shown below. If the terminal timing feature is not available or this type of connection is not desired, the G.703 interface is a
viable option that does not impose timing restrictions.

Data module 1
Signal name
Tx1(+) W 2a SD(A) - Send data
7W
Tx1(-) W 3b SD(B) - Send data
RS422
CHANNEL 1
Rx1(+) W 4b RD(A) - Received data
Rx1(-) W 3a RD(B) - Received data
Shld. W 6a RS(A) - Request to send (RTS)
INTER-RELAY COMMUNICATIONS
+ W 7a RS(B) - Request to send (RTS)
CLOCK
– W 8b RT(A) - Receive timing
Tx2(+) W 4a RT(B) - Receive timing
Tx2(-) W 5b CS(A) - Clear To send
RS422
CHANNEL 2
Rx2(+) W 6b CS(B) - Clear To send
Rx2(-) W 5a Local loopback
Shld. W 7b Remote loopback
com W 2b Signal ground
SURGE W 8a ST(A) - Send timing
ST(B) - Send timing
3 Data module 2
Signal name
TT(A) - Terminal timing
TT(B) - Terminal timing
SD(A) - Send data
SD(B) - Send data
RD(A) - Received data
RD(B) - Received data
RS(A) - Request to send (RTS)
RS(B) - Request to send (RTS)
CS(A) - Clear To send
CS(B) - Clear To send
Local loopback
Remote loopback
Signal ground
ST(A) - Send timing
ST(B) - Send timing
831022A3.CDR
Figure 3–43: TIMING CONFIGURATION FOR RS422 TWO-CHANNEL, THREE-TERMINAL APPLICATION

Data module 1 provides timing to the B30 RS422 interface via the ST(A) and ST(B) outputs. Data module 1 also provides
timing to data module 2 TT(A) and TT(B) inputs via the ST(A) and AT(B) outputs. The data module pin numbers have been
omitted in the figure above since they vary by manufacturer.
c) TRANSMIT TIMING
The RS422 interface accepts one clock input for transmit timing. It is important that the rising edge of the 64 kHz transmit
timing clock of the multiplexer interface is sampling the data in the center of the transmit data window. Therefore, it is impor-
tant to confirm clock and data transitions to ensure proper system operation. For example, the following figure shows the
positive edge of the Tx clock in the center of the Tx data bit.
Tx Clock
Tx Data
831733A1.CDR
Figure 3–44: CLOCK AND DATA TRANSITIONS

d) RECEIVE TIMING
The RS422 interface utilizes NRZI-MARK modulation code and; therefore, does not rely on an Rx clock to recapture data.
NRZI-MARK is an edge-type, invertible, self-clocking code.
To recover the Rx clock from the data-stream, an integrated DPLL (digital phase lock loop) circuit is utilized. The DPLL is
driven by an internal clock, which is 16-times over-sampled, and uses this clock along with the data-stream to generate a
data clock that can be used as the SCC (serial communication controller) receive clock.
3.3.6 RS422 AND FIBER INTERFACE
The following figure shows the combined RS422 plus fiberoptic interface configuration at 64K baud. The 7L, 7M, 7N, 7P,
and 74 modules are used in two-terminal with a redundant channel or three-terminal configurations where channel 1 is
employed via the RS422 interface (possibly with a multiplexer) and channel 2 via direct fiber.
AWG 20-24 twisted shielded pair is recommended for external RS422 connections and ground the shield only at one end.
For the direct fiber channel, address power budget issues properly.
3
When using a LASER Interface, attenuators can be necessary to ensure that you do not exceed
+ ~1a
7L, 7M, 7N,
7P, and 74
Clock
channel 1 – ~1b
Common COM ~2b
Tx – ~3b
Rx – ~3a
RS422 Tx + ~2a
channel 1
communications
Rx + ~4b
Shield ~6a
Fiber Tx2 Rx2
RS422
channel 2
Surge ~8a
842777A3.CDR
Figure 3–45: RS422 AND FIBER INTERFACE CONNECTION

Connections shown above are for multiplexers configured as DCE (data communications equipment) units.
3.3.7 G.703 AND FIBER INTERFACE
The figure below shows the combined G.703 plus fiberoptic interface configuration at 64 kbps. The 7E, 7F, 7G, 7Q, and 75
modules are used in configurations where channel 1 is employed via the G.703 interface (possibly with a multiplexer) and
channel 2 via direct fiber. AWG 24 twisted shielded pair is recommended for external G.703 connections connecting the
shield to pin 1a at one end only. For the direct fiber channel, address power budget issues properly. See previous sections
for additional details on the G.703 and fiber interfaces.
When using a laser Interface, attenuators can be necessary to ensure that you do not exceed the
Shield ~1a
75, 7E, 7F, 7G,
and 7Q
Tx – ~1b
G.703 Rx – ~2a
channel 1
Tx + ~2b
communications
Rx + ~3a
Surge ~3b
Fiber Tx2
G.703
channel 2 Rx2
842778A2.CDR
Figure 3–46: G.703 AND FIBER INTERFACE CONNECTION

3.3.8 IEEE C37.94 INTERFACE
The UR-series IEEE C37.94 communication modules (modules types 2G, 2H, 2I, 2J, 76, and 77) are designed to interface
with IEEE C37.94 compliant digital multiplexers or an IEEE C37.94 compliant interface converter for use with direct input
and output applications. The IEEE C37.94 standard defines a point-to-point optical link for synchronous data between a
multiplexer and a teleprotection device. This data is typically 64 kbps, but the standard provides for speeds up to 64n kbps,
where n = 1, 2,…, 12. The UR-series C37.94 communication modules are either 64 kbps (with n fixed at 1) or 128 kbps
(with n fixed at 2). The frame is a valid International Telecommunications Union (ITU-T) recommended G.704 pattern from
the standpoint of framing and data rate. The frame is 256 bits and is repeated at a frame rate of 8000 Hz, with a resultant bit
rate of 2048 kbps.
The specifications for the module are as follows:.
• IEEE standard: C37.94 for 1 × 128 kbps optical fiber interface (for 2G and 2H modules) or C37.94 for 2 × 64 kbps opti-
cal fiber interface (for 76 and 77 modules)
3 • Fiber optic cable type: 50 nm or 62.5 µm core diameter optical fiber
• Fiber optic mode: multimode
• Fiber optic cable length: up to 2 km
• Fiber optic connector: type ST
• Wavelength: 820 ±40 nm
• Connection: as per all fiber optic connections, a Tx-to-Rx connection is required
The UR-series C37.94 communication module can be connected directly to any compliant digital multiplexer that supports
the IEEE C37.94 standard shown as follows.
IEEE C37.94
fiber interface
Digital
UR-series multiplexer,
device IEEE C37.94
compliant
up to 2 km
842755A2.CDR
The UR-series C37.94 communication module can be connected to the electrical interface (G.703, RS422, or X.21) of a
non-compliant digital multiplexer via an optical-to-electrical interface converter that supports the IEEE C37.94 standard,
shown as follows.
IEEE C37.94 RS422

fiber interface interface
Digital
UR-series IEEE C37.94 multiplexer
device converter with EIA-422
interface
up to 2 km
842756A2.CDR
In 2008, GE Grid Solutions released revised modules 76 and 77 for C37.94 communication to enable multi-ended fault
location functionality with firmware 5.60 release and higher. All modules 76 and 77 shipped the change support this feature
and are fully backward compatible with firmware releases below 5.60. For customers using firmware release 5.60 and
higher, the module can be identified with "Rev D" printed on the module and is to be used on all ends of B30 communica-
tion for two and three terminal applications. Failure to use it at all ends results in intermittent communication alarms. For
customers using firmware revisions below 5.60, it is not required to match the revision of the modules installed.

The UR-series C37.94 communication module has six switches to set the clock configuration. The following figure shows
the functions of these control switches.
Loop timing mode
842753A2.CDR
For the internal timing mode, the system clock is generated internally. Therefore, the timing switch selection should be
internal timing for relay 1 and loop timed for relay 2. There must be only one timing source configured.
3
For the looped timing mode, the system clock is derived from the received line signal. Therefore, the timing selection
should be in loop timing mode for connections to higher order systems.
The IEEE C37.94 communications module cover removal procedure is as follows:
1. With power to the relay off, remove the IEEE C37.94 module (type 2G, 2H, 2I, 2J, 76 or 77 module) as follows. Record
the original location of the module to help ensure that the same or replacement module is inserted into the correct slot.
module for removal.
5. Set the timing selection switches (channel 1, channel 2) to the desired timing modes (see description above).
7. Re-insert the IEEE C37.94 module. Take care to ensure that the correct module type is inserted into the correct slot
position. The ejector/inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module must be in the disengaged posi-
tion as the module is smoothly inserted into the slot. Once the clips have cleared the raised edge of the chassis,
engage the clips simultaneously. When the clips have locked into position, the module is fully inserted.

Bottom cover
FRONT
Channel 1
Timing selection
switches
Top cover
3
Channel 2
Cover screw
REAR
831774A3.CDR
Figure 3–47: IEEE C37.94 TIMING SELECTION SWITCH SETTING

Modules shipped since January 2012 have status LEDs that indicate the status of the DIP switches, as shown in the follow-
ing figure.
Tx1
CH1 Link/Activity LED
COMMS
Rx1
2B
C37.94SM
1300nm single-mode
ELED
2 channel
Tx1
Tx2
REV. D CH2 Link/Activity LED
Technical support:
Tel: (905)294-6222
Fax: (905)201-2098
Rx2
(NORTH AMERICA)
1 800 547-8629
GE Multilin
Made in Canada Tx2
CH1 Clock Configuration LED

FRONT VIEW REAR VIEW 842837A1.cdr
Figure 3–48: STATUS LEDS

The clock configuration LED status is as follows:
• Flashing green — loop timing mode while receiving a valid data packet

• Flashing yellow — internal mode while receiving a valid data packet

• Solid red — (switch to) internal timing mode while not receiving a valid data packet
The link/activity LED status is as follows:
• Flashing green — FPGA is receiving a valid data packet
• Solid yellow — FPGA is receiving a "yellow bit" and remains yellow for each "yellow bit"
• Solid red — FPGA is not receiving a valid packet or the packet received is invalid
3.3.9 C37.94SM INTERFACE
The UR-series C37.94SM communication modules (2A and 2B) are designed to interface with modified IEEE C37.94 com-
pliant digital multiplexers or IEEE C37.94 compliant interface converters that have been converted from 820 nm multi-mode
fiber optics to 1300 nm ELED single-mode fiber optics. The IEEE C37.94 standard defines a point-to-point optical link for
synchronous data between a multiplexer and a teleprotection device. This data is typically 64 kbps, but the standard pro-
3
vides for speeds up to 64n kbps, where n = 1, 2,…, 12. The UR-series C37.94SM communication module is 64 kbps only
with n fixed at 1. The frame is a valid International Telecommunications Union (ITU-T) recommended G.704 pattern from
the standpoint of framing and data rate. The frame is 256 bits and is repeated at a frame rate of 8000 Hz, with a resultant bit
rate of 2048 kbps.
The specifications for the module are as follows:
• Emulated IEEE standard: emulates C37.94 for 1 × 64 kbps optical fiber interface (modules set to n = 1 or 64 kbps)
• Fiber optic cable type: 9/125 μm core diameter optical fiber
• Fiber optic mode: single-mode, ELED compatible with HP HFBR-1315T transmitter and HP HFBR-2316T receiver
• Fiber optic cable length: up to 11.4 km
• Fiber optic connector: type ST
• Wavelength: 1300 ±40 nm
• Connection: as per all fiber optic connections, a Tx-to-Rx connection is required
The UR-series C37.94SM communication module can be connected directly to any compliant digital multiplexer that sup-
ports C37.94SM as shown below.
C37.94SM
fiber interface
Digital
UR-series
multiplexer
device
C97.94SM
up to 10 km
842757A2.CDR
It can also can be connected directly to any other UR-series relay with a C37.94SM module as shown below.
C37.94SM
fiber interface
UR-series UR-series
device with device with
C37.94SM C37.94SM
module module
up to 10 km
842758A2.CDR
In 2008, GE Grid Solutions released revised modules 2A and 2B for C37.94SM communication to enable multi-ended fault
location functionality with firmware 5.60 release and higher. All modules 2A and 2B shipped since the change support this
feature and are fully backward compatible with firmware releases below 5.60. For customers using firmware release 5.60

and higher, the module can be identified with "Rev D" printed on the module and is to be used on all ends of B30 communi-
cation for two and three terminal applications. Failure to use it at all ends results in intermittent communication alarms. For
customers using firmware revisions below 5.60, it is not required to match the revision of the modules installed.
The UR-series C37.94SM communication module has six switches that are used to set the clock configuration. The func-
tions of these control switches are shown below.
Loop timing mode
3 842753A2.CDR
For the internal timing mode, the system clock is generated internally. Therefore, the timing switch selection should be
internal timing for relay 1 and loop timed for relay 2. There must be only one timing source configured.
For the looped timing mode, the system clock is derived from the received line signal. Therefore, the timing selection
should be in loop timing mode for connections to higher order systems.
The C37.94SM communications module cover removal procedure is as follows:
1. With power to the relay off, remove the C37.94SM module (modules 2A or 2B) as follows. Record the original location
of the module to help ensure that the same or replacement module is inserted into the correct slot.
module for removal.
5. Set the timing selection switches (channel 1, channel 2) to the desired timing modes (see description above).
7. Re-insert the C37.94SM module. Take care to ensure that the correct module type is inserted into the correct slot
position. The ejector/inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module must be in the disengaged posi-
tion as the module is smoothly inserted into the slot. Once the clips have cleared the raised edge of the chassis,
engage the clips simultaneously. When the clips have locked into position, the module is fully inserted.

Bottom cover
FRONT
Channel 1
Timing selection
switches
Top cover
3
Channel 2
Cover screw
REAR
831774A3.CDR
Figure 3–49: C37.94SM TIMING SELECTION SWITCH SETTING

Modules shipped since January 2012 have status LEDs that indicate the status of the DIP switches, as shown in the follow-
ing figure.
Tx1
CH1 Link/Activity LED
COMMS
Rx1
2B
C37.94SM
1300nm single-mode
ELED
2 channel
Tx1
Tx2
REV. D CH2 Link/Activity LED
Technical support:
Tel: (905)294-6222
Fax: (905)201-2098
Rx2
(NORTH AMERICA)
1 800 547-8629
GE Multilin
Made in Canada Tx2

FRONT VIEW REAR VIEW 842837A1.cdr
Figure 3–50: STATUS LEDS

The clock configuration LED status is as follows:
• Flashing green — loop timing mode while receiving a valid data packet

• Flashing yellow — internal mode while receiving a valid data packet

• Solid red — (switch to) internal timing mode while not receiving a valid data packet
The link/activity LED status is as follows:
• Flashing green — FPGA is receiving a valid data packet
• Solid yellow — FPGA is receiving a "yellow bit" and remains yellow for each "yellow bit"
• Solid red — FPGA is not receiving a valid packet or the packet received is invalid

4 HUMAN INTERFACES 4.1 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE INTERFACE
4 HUMAN INTERFACES 4.1ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE INTERFACE 4.1.1 INTRODUCTION
The EnerVista UR Setup software provides a graphical user interface (GUI) as one of two human interfaces to a UR device.
The alternate human interface is implemented via the device’s faceplate keypad and display (see the Faceplate Interface
section in this chapter).
The EnerVista UR Setup software provides a single facility to configure, monitor, maintain, and troubleshoot the operation
of relay functions, connected over local or wide-area networks. It can be used while disconnected (offline) or connected
(online) to a UR device. In offline mode, settings files can be created for eventual downloading to the device. In online
mode, communication with the device is real-time.
The EnerVista UR Setup software is provided with every B30 relay and runs on Microsoft Windows XP, 7, and Server 2008.
This chapter provides a summary of the basic EnerVista UR Setup software interface features. The EnerVista UR Setup
Help File provides details for getting started and using the EnerVista UR Setup software interface.
4.1.2 CREATING A SITE LIST
To start using the EnerVista UR Setup software, site and device definition are required. See the EnerVista UR Setup Help
File or refer to the EnerVista UR Setup Software section in Chapter 1 for details.
4.1.3 ENERVISTA UR SETUP OVERVIEW 4

a) ENGAGING A DEVICE
The EnerVista UR Setup software can be used in online mode (relay connected) to directly communicate with the B30
relay. Communicating relays are organized and grouped by communication interfaces and into sites. Sites can contain any
number of relays selected from the UR-series of relays.
b) USING SETTINGS FILES

The EnerVista UR Setup software interface supports three ways of handling changes to relay settings:
• In offline mode (relay disconnected) to create or edit relay settings files for later download to communicating relays
• While connected to a relay to modify relay settings, and then save the settings to the relay
• You can create/edit settings files and then write them to the relay while the interface is connected to the relay
Settings files are organized on the basis of file names assigned by the user. A settings file contains data pertaining to the
following types of relay settings:
• Device definition
• Product setup
• System setup
• FlexLogic
• Grouped elements
• Control elements
• Inputs/outputs
• Remote resources
• Testing
Factory default values are supplied and can be restored after any changes.
The following communications settings are not transferred to the B30 with settings files:
Modbus Slave Address
Modbus TCP Port Number
RS485 COM2 Baud Rate
RS485 COM2 Parity
COM2 Minimum Response Time

4.1 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE INTERFACE 4 HUMAN INTERFACES
COM2 Selection
RRTD Slave Address
RRTD Baud Rate
IP Address
IP Subnet Mask
IP Routing
When a settings file is loaded to a B30 that is in-service, the following sequence occurs:
1. The B30 takes itself out of service.
2. The B30 issues a UNIT NOT PROGRAMMED major self-test error.
3. The B30 closes the critical fail contact.
c) CREATING AND EDITING FLEXLOGIC

You create or edit a FlexLogic equation in order to customize the relay. You can subsequently view the automatically gener-
ated logic diagram.
d) VIEWING ACTUAL VALUES
4 You can view real-time relay data such as input/output status and measured parameters.
e) VIEWING TRIGGERED EVENTS

While the interface is in either online or offline mode, you can view and analyze data generated by triggered specified
parameters, via one of the following:
• Event recorder
The event recorder captures contextual data associated with the last 1024 events, listed in chronological order from
most recent to oldest.
• Oscillography
The oscillography waveform traces and digital states are used to provide a visual display of power system and relay
operation data captured during specific triggered events.
f) FILE SUPPORT
• Execution: Any EnerVista UR Setup file that is opened launches the application or provides focus to the already
opened application. If the file was a settings file (has a URS extension) that had been removed from the Settings List
tree menu, it is added back to the Settings List tree menu.
• Drag and Drop: The Site List and Settings List control bar windows are each mutually a drag source and a drop target
for device-order-code-compatible files or individual menu items. Also, the Settings List control bar window and any
Windows Explorer directory folder are each mutually a file drag source and drop target.
New files that are dropped into the Settings List window are added to the tree, which is automatically sorted alphabeti-
cally with respect to settings file names. Files or individual menu items that are dropped in the selected device menu in
the Site List window are automatically sent to the online communicating device.
g) FIRMWARE UPGRADES
The firmware of a B30 device can be upgraded, locally or remotely, via the EnerVista UR Setup software. The correspond-
ing instructions are provided by the EnerVista UR Setup Help file under the topic “Upgrading Firmware”.
If you are upgrading from version 7.0 or 7.1 to 7.2 or later, some CPU modules require a new boot version. Update this first
in EnerVista under Maintenance > Update Firmware.
Before backing up settings and upgrading, set the Settings > Product Setup > Security > Dual Permission Security
Access > Remote Setting Authorized and Local Setting Authorized settings to "ON." Otherwise, the upgrade is blocked
and results in an "Unable to put relay in flash mode" message.
If using CyberSentry security, also ensure that the relay and firmware are not locked under the Settings > Product Setup
> Security > Supervisory settings. A Supervisor role is required for these settings.

4 HUMAN INTERFACES 4.1 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE INTERFACE
Modbus addresses assigned to firmware modules, features, settings, and corresponding data items (that is, default
values, minimum/maximum values, data type, and item size) can change slightly from version to version of firm-
NOTE
ware. The addresses are rearranged when new features are added or existing features are enhanced or modified.
The EEPROM DATA ERROR message displayed after upgrading/downgrading the firmware is a resettable, self-test
message intended to inform users that the Modbus addresses have changed with the upgraded firmware. This
message does not signal any problems when appearing after firmware upgrades.
4.1.4 ENERVISTA UR SETUP MAIN WINDOW
The EnerVista UR Setup software main window supports the following primary display components:
1. Title bar that shows the pathname of the active data view
2. Main window menu bar
3. Main window tool bar
4. Site list control bar window
5. Settings list control bar window
6. Device data view windows, with common tool bar
7. Settings file data view windows, with common tool bar 4
8. Workspace area with data view tabs
9. Status bar
10. Quick action hot links
2 1 6 7
10
4
9 8 842786A2.CDR
Figure 4–1: ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE MAIN WINDOW

4.2 EXTENDED ENERVISTA UR SETUP FEATURES 4 HUMAN INTERFACES
4.2EXTENDED ENERVISTA UR SETUP FEATURES 4.2.1 SETTINGS TEMPLATES
Setting file templates simplify the configuration and commissioning of multiple relays that protect similar assets. An exam-
ple of this is a substation that has 10 similar feeders protected by 10 UR-series F60 relays.
In these situations, typically 90% or greater of the settings are identical between all devices. The templates feature allows
engineers to configure and test these common settings, then lock them so that they are not available to users. For exam-
ple, these locked down settings can be hidden from view for field engineers, allowing them to quickly identify and concen-
trate on the specific settings.
The remaining settings (typically 10% or less) can be specified as editable and be made available to field engineers install-
ing the devices. These are settings such as protection element pickup values and CT and VT ratios.
The settings template mode allows the user to define which settings are visible in EnerVista UR Setup. Settings templates
can be applied to both settings files (settings file templates) and online devices (online settings templates). The functionality
is identical for both purposes.
a) ENABLING THE SETTINGS TEMPLATE

The settings file template feature is disabled by default. The following procedure describes how to enable the settings tem-
4 plate for UR-series settings files.
1. Select a settings file from the offline window of the EnerVista UR Setup main screen.
2. Right-click the selected device or settings file and select the Template Mode > Create Template option.
The settings file template is now enabled and the file tree displayed in light blue. The settings file is now in template editing
mode.
Alternatively, the settings template can also be applied to online settings. The following procedure describes this process.
1. Select an installed device from the online window of the EnerVista UR Setup main screen.
2. Right-click the selected device and select the Template Mode > Create Template option.
The software prompts for a template password. This password is required to use the template feature and must be at
least four characters in length.
3. Enter and re-enter the new password, then click OK to continue.
The online settings template is now enabled. The device is now in template editing mode.
b) EDITING THE SETTINGS TEMPLATE

The settings template editing feature allows the user to specify which settings are available for viewing and modification in
EnerVista UR Setup. By default, all settings except the FlexLogic equation editor settings are locked.
1. With the template already enabled, locate the device or settings file in the Online or Offline Window area in the soft-
ware.
2. Right-click the device or file and select the Template Mode > Edit Template option to place the device in template
editing mode. If prompted, enter the template password then click OK.
3. Open the relevant settings window that contains settings to be specified as viewable.

4 HUMAN INTERFACES 4.2 EXTENDED ENERVISTA UR SETUP FEATURES
By default, all settings are specified as locked and displayed against a grey background. The icon on the upper right of
the settings window also indicates that the EnerVista software is in EDIT mode. The following example shows the
phase time overcurrent settings window in edit mode.
Figure 4–2: SETTINGS TEMPLATE VIEW, ALL SETTINGS SPECIFIED AS LOCKED

4. Specify the settings to make viewable by clicking them. 4
The setting available to view is displayed against a yellow background as shown below.
Figure 4–3: SETTINGS TEMPLATE VIEW, TWO SETTINGS SPECIFIED AS EDITABLE

5. Click on Save to save changes to the settings template.
6. Proceed through the settings tree to specify all viewable settings.
The next time that the device/settings are accessed, only those specified as viewable/editable display in the menu
hierarchy.
c) ADDING PASSWORD PROTECTION TO A TEMPLATE

GE recommends that templates be saved with password protection to maximize security.
When templates are created for online settings, the password is added during the initial template creation step. It
does not need to be added after the template is created.
NOTE
To add password protection to a settings file template:

1. In the Offline Window area, right-click the device and select the Template Mode > Password Protect Template
option.

The software prompts for a template password. This password must be at least four characters in length.
2. Enter and re-enter the new password, then click OK to continue.

The settings file template is now secured with password protection.
d) VIEWING THE SETTINGS TEMPLATE

Once all necessary settings are specified for viewing, users are able to view the settings template on the online device or
settings file. There are two ways to specify the settings view with the settings template feature:
• Display only those settings available for editing
4 • Display all settings, with settings not available for editing greyed-out
Use the following procedure to only display settings available for editing:
3. Right-click the device in the Online or Offline Window area and apply the template by selecting the Template Mode >
View In Template Mode option.
4. Enter the template password then click OK to apply the template.
Once the template has been applied, users are limited to view and edit the settings specified by the template. The effect of
applying the template to the phase time overcurrent settings is shown below.
Phase time overcurrent window with template applied via

the Template Mode > View In Template Mode command.
The template specifies that only the Pickup and Curve
Phase time overcurrent settings window without template applied.
settings be available.
842858A1.CDR
Figure 4–4: APPLYING TEMPLATES VIA THE VIEW IN TEMPLATE MODE COMMAND

Viewing the settings in template mode also modifies the settings tree, showing only the settings categories that contain
editable settings. The effect of applying the template to a typical settings tree view is shown below.
Typical settings tree view without template applied. Typical settings tree view with template applied via
the Template Mode > View In Template Mode
command.
842860A1.CDR
Figure 4–5: APPLYING TEMPLATES VIA THE VIEW IN TEMPLATE MODE SETTINGS COMMAND
Use the following procedure to display settings available for editing and settings locked by the template. 4
1. Right-click the device in the Online or Offline Window area and apply the template by selecting the Template Mode >
View All Settings option.
2. Enter the template password then click OK to apply the template.
Once the template has been applied, users are limited to edit the settings specified by the template, but all settings are
shown. The effect of applying the template to the phase time overcurrent settings is shown below.
Phase time overcurrent settings window without template applied. Phase time overcurrent window with template applied via
the Template Mode > View All Settings command.
The template specifies that only the Pickup and Curve
settings be available.
842859A1.CDR
Figure 4–6: APPLYING TEMPLATES VIA THE VIEW ALL SETTINGS COMMAND
e) REMOVING THE SETTINGS TEMPLATE

Once a settings template is removed, it cannot be reapplied and a new settings template needs to be defined before use.
3. Right-click the device in the Online or Offline Window area and select the Template Mode > Remove Template
option.
4. Enter the template password and click OK to continue.

5. Verify one more time that you want to remove the template by clicking Yes.
The EnerVista software removes all template information and all settings are available.
4.2.2 SECURING AND LOCKING FLEXLOGIC EQUATIONS
The UR allows users to secure parts or all of a FlexLogic equation, preventing unauthorized viewing or modification of criti-
cal FlexLogic applications. This is accomplished using the settings template feature to lock individual entries within Flex-
Logic equations.
Secured FlexLogic equations remain secure when files are sent to and retrieved from any UR-series device.
a) LOCKING FLEXLOGIC EQUATION ENTRIES
4 To lock individual entries of a FlexLogic™ equation:

1. Right-click the settings file or online device and select the Template Mode > Create Template item to enable the set-
tings template feature.
2. If prompted, enter the template password.
3. Select the FlexLogic > FlexLogic Equation Editor settings menu item.
By default, all FlexLogic™ entries are specified as viewable and displayed against a yellow background. The icon on
the upper right of the window also indicates that EnerVista UR Setup is in EDIT mode.
4. Specify the entries to lock by clicking on them.
The locked entries display against a grey background as shown in the example.
Figure 4–7: LOCKING FLEXLOGIC ENTRIES IN EDIT MODE

5. Click the Save button to save and apply changes to the settings template.
6. Select the Template Mode > View In Template Mode option to view the template.
7. Optionally apply a password to the template by right-clicking the device and selecting the Template Mode > Pass-
word Protect Template option.

Once the template has been applied, users are limited to view and edit the FlexLogic entries not locked by the template.
The effect of applying the template to the FlexLogic entries in the above procedure is shown below.
Typical FlexLogic™ entries without template applied. Typical FlexLogic™ entries locked with template via
the Template Mode > View In Template Mode command.
842861A1.CDR
Figure 4–8: LOCKING FLEXLOGIC ENTRIES THROUGH SETTING TEMPLATES 4

The FlexLogic entries are also shown as locked in the graphical view (as shown below) and on the front panel display.
Figure 4–9: SECURED FLEXLOGIC IN GRAPHICAL VIEW
b) LOCKING FLEXLOGIC EQUATIONS TO A SERIAL NUMBER

A settings file and associated FlexLogic equations also can be locked to a UR serial number. Once FlexLogic entries in a
settings file have been secured, use the following procedure to lock the settings file to a serial number. A serial number is
viewable under Actual Values > Product Info > Model Information, the inside front panel, and the rear of the device.

8. Right-click the setting file in the Offline Window area and select the Edit Settings File Properties option. The window
opens.
Figure 4–10: TYPICAL SETTINGS FILE PROPERTIES WINDOW

4 9. Enter the serial number of the B30 device to lock to the settings file in the Serial # Lock field.
10. Click the OK button to apply the change. The serial number is not validated.
The settings file and corresponding secure FlexLogic equations are now locked to the B30 device specified by the serial
number.
4.2.3 SETTINGS FILE TRACEABILITY
A traceability feature for settings files allows the user to quickly determine if the settings in a B30 device have been
changed since the time of installation from a settings file. When a settings file is transferred to a B30 device, the date, time,
and serial number of the B30 are sent back to EnerVista UR Setup and added to the settings file on the local PC. This infor-
mation can be compared with the B30 actual values at any later date to determine if security has been compromised.
The traceability information is only included in the settings file if a complete settings file is either transferred to the B30
device or obtained from the B30 device. Any partial settings transfers by way of drag and drop do not add the traceability
information to the settings file.
1 SETTING FILE TRANSFERRED

TO UR-SERIES DEVICE
The serial number and last setting change date

are stored in the UR-series device.
The serial number of the UR-series device and the file transfer
date are added to the setting file when setting files
are transferred to the device.
Compare transfer dates in the setting file and the

UR-series device to determine if security SERIAL NUMBER AND TRANSFER DATE
has been compromised. 2 SENT BACK TO ENERVISTA AND
ADDED TO SETTING FILE. 842864A2.CDR
Figure 4–11: SETTINGS FILE TRACEABILITY MECHANISM

With respect to the above diagram, the traceability feature is used as follows.
1. The transfer date of a setting file written to a B30 is logged in the relay and can be viewed via EnerVista UR Setup or
the front panel display. Likewise, the transfer date of a setting file saved to a local PC is logged in EnerVista UR Setup.
2. Comparing the dates stored in the relay and on the settings file at any time in the future indicates if any changes have
been made to the relay configuration since the settings file was saved.
a) SETTINGS FILE TRACEABILITY INFORMATION

The serial number and file transfer date are saved in the settings files when they are sent to a B30 device.
The B30 serial number and file transfer date are included in the settings file device definition within the EnerVista UR Setup
offline window as shown in the example below.
Traceability data in settings

file device definition
842863A1.CDR
Figure 4–12: DEVICE DEFINITION SHOWING TRACEABILITY DATA

This information is also available in printed settings file reports as shown in the example below.
Traceability data
in settings report
842862A1.CDR
Figure 4–13: SETTINGS FILE REPORT SHOWING TRACEABILITY DATA

b) ONLINE DEVICE TRACEABILITY INFORMATION

The B30 serial number and file transfer date are available for an online device through the actual values. Select the Actual
Values > Product Info > Model Information menu item within the EnerVista UR Setup online window as shown in the
example below.
Traceability data in online

device actual values page
842865A1.CDR
Figure 4–14: TRACEABILITY DATA IN ACTUAL VALUES WINDOW

This information is also available from the front panel display through the following actual values:
ACTUAL VALUES  PRODUCT INFO  MODEL INFORMATION  SERIAL NUMBER
ACTUAL VALUES  PRODUCT INFO  MODEL INFORMATION  LAST SETTING CHANGE
c) ADDITIONAL TRACEABILITY RULES
4 The following additional rules apply for the traceability feature

• If the user changes any settings within the settings file in the offline window, then the traceability information is
removed from the settings file.
• If the user creates a new settings file, then no traceability information is included in the settings file.
• If the user converts an existing settings file to another revision, then any existing traceability information is removed
from the settings file.
• If the user duplicates an existing settings file, then any traceability information is transferred to the duplicate settings
file.

4 HUMAN INTERFACES 4.3 FACEPLATE INTERFACE
4.3FACEPLATE INTERFACE 4.3.1 FACEPLATE
a) ENHANCED FACEPLATE
The front panel interface is one of two supported interfaces, the other interface being EnerVista UR Setup software. The
front panel interface consists of LED panels, an RS232 port, keypad, LCD display, control pushbuttons, and optional user-
programmable pushbuttons.
The faceplate is hinged to allow easy access to the removable modules.
Five column LED indicator panel
Display
Keypad
4
Control
pushbuttons (3)
Front panel
RS232 port
User-programmable pushbuttons 1 to 16 842810A2.CDR
Figure 4–15: UR-SERIES ENHANCED FACEPLATE
b) STANDARD FACEPLATE
There are two interfaces: the front panel and the EnerVista UR Setup software. The front panel interface consists of LED
panels, an RS232 port, keypad, LCD display, control pushbuttons, and optional user-programmable pushbuttons.
The faceplate is hinged to allow easy access to the removable modules. There is also a removable dust cover that fits over
the faceplate that must be removed in order to access the keypad panel. The following figure shows the horizontal arrange-
ment of the faceplate panels.
LED panel 1 LED panel 2 LED panel 3
Display
Front panel
RS232 port
Small user-programmable
User-programmable Keypad
(control) pushbuttons 1 to 7
pushbuttons 1 to 12
827801A9.CDR
Figure 4–16: UR-SERIES STANDARD HORIZONTAL FACEPLATE PANELS

4.3 FACEPLATE INTERFACE 4 HUMAN INTERFACES
The following figure shows the vertical arrangement of the faceplate panels for relays ordered with the vertical option.
GE Multilin
Display
MENU 7 8 9
HELP MESSAGE 4 5 6
ESCAPE 1 2 3
Keypad
ENTER VALUE 0 . +/-
1 3 5
USER LABEL USER LABEL USER LABEL
User-programmable
2 4 6
pushbuttons 1 to 6
USER LABEL USER LABEL USER LABEL
4 LED panel 2
STATUS EVENT CAUSE

IN SERVICE VOLTAGE
TROUBLE CURRENT RESET
TEST MODE FREQUENCY
TRIP OTHER USER 1
ALARM
PICKUP
PHASE A
PHASE B USER 2 LED panel 1
Front panel PHASE C
NEUTRAL/GROUND USER 3
RS232 port
827830A3.CDR
Figure 4–17: UR-SERIES STANDARD VERTICAL FACEPLATE PANELS
4.3.2 LED INDICATORS
The enhanced front panel display provides five columns of LED indicators. The first column contains 14 status and event
cause LEDs, and the next four columns contain the 48 user-programmable LEDs.
The RESET key is used to reset any latched LED indicator or target message, once the condition has been cleared (these
latched conditions can also be reset via the SETTINGS  INPUT/OUTPUTS  RESETTING menu). The RS232 port is
intended for connection to a portable PC.
The USER keys are used by the breaker control feature.
842811A1.CDR
Figure 4–18: TYPICAL LED INDICATOR PANEL FOR ENHANCED FACEPLATE

The status indicators in the first column are described below.
• IN SERVICE: This LED indicates that control power is applied, all monitored inputs, outputs, and internal systems are
OK, and that the device has been programmed.

• TROUBLE: This LED indicates that the relay has detected an internal problem.
• TEST MODE: This LED indicates that the relay is in test mode. For more information, see the Test Mode section in the
Settings chapter.
• TRIP: This LED indicates that the FlexLogic operand serving as a trip switch has operated. This indicator always
latches; as such, a reset command must be initiated to allow the latch to be reset.
• ALARM: This LED indicates that the FlexLogic operand serving as an alarm switch has operated. This indicator is
never latched.
• PICKUP: This LED indicates that an element is picked up. This indicator is never latched.
The event cause indicators in the first column are described below.
Events cause LEDs are turned on or off by protection elements that have their respective target setting selected as either
“Enabled” or “Latched”. If a protection element target setting is “Enabled”, then the corresponding event cause LEDs
remain on as long as operate operand associated with the element remains asserted. If a protection element target setting
is “Latched”, then the corresponding event cause LEDs turn on when the operate operand associated with the element is
asserted and remain on until the RESET button on the front panel is pressed after the operand is reset.
All elements that are able to discriminate faulted phases can independently turn off or on the phase A, B, or C LEDs. This
includes phase instantaneous overcurrent, phase undervoltage, etc. This means that the phase A, B, and C operate oper-
ands for individual protection elements are ORed to turn on or off the phase A, B, or C LEDs.
• VOLTAGE: This LED indicates voltage was involved.
4
• CURRENT: This LED indicates current was involved.
• FREQUENCY: This LED indicates frequency was involved.
• OTHER: This LED indicates a composite function was involved.
• PHASE A: This LED indicates phase A was involved.
• PHASE B: This LED indicates phase B was involved.
• PHASE C: This LED indicates phase C was involved.
• NEUTRAL/GROUND: This LED indicates that neutral or ground was involved.
The user-programmable LEDs consist of 48 amber LED indicators in four columns. The operation of these LEDs is user-
defined. Support for applying a customized label beside every LED is provided. Default labels are shipped in the label pack-
age of every B30, together with custom templates. The default labels can be replaced by user-printed labels.
User customization of LED operation is of maximum benefit in installations where languages other than English are used to
communicate with operators. Refer to the User-programmable LEDs section in chapter 5 for the settings used to program
the operation of the LEDs on these panels.
b) STANDARD FACEPLATE
The standard faceplate consists of three panels with LED indicators, keys, and a communications port. The RESET key is
used to reset any latched LED indicator or target message, once the condition has been cleared (these latched conditions
can also be reset via the SETTINGS  INPUT/OUTPUTS  RESETTING menu). The RS232 port is for connection to a com-
puter.
The USER keys are used by the breaker control feature.

STATUS EVENT CAUSE

IN SERVICE VOLTAGE
TEST MODE FREQUENCY
TRIP OTHER USER 1
ALARM PHASE A
PICKUP PHASE B USER 2
PHASE C
NEUTRAL/GROUND USER 3
842781A1.CDR
Figure 4–19: LED PANEL 1

STATUS INDICATORS:
• IN SERVICE: Indicates that control power is applied; all monitored inputs/outputs and internal systems are OK; the
relay has been programmed.
• TROUBLE: Indicates that the relay has detected an internal problem.
• TEST MODE: Indicates that the relay is in test mode. For more information, see the Test Mode section in the Settings
4 chapter.
• TRIP: Indicates that the selected FlexLogic operand serving as a Trip switch has operated. This indicator always
latches; the reset command must be initiated to allow the latch to be reset.
• ALARM: Indicates that the selected FlexLogic operand serving as an Alarm switch has operated. This indicator is
never latched.
• PICKUP: Indicates that an element is picked up. This indicator is never latched.
EVENT CAUSE INDICATORS:
Events cause LEDs are turned on or off by protection elements that have their respective target setting selected as either
“Enabled” or “Latched”. If a protection element target setting is “Enabled”, then the corresponding event cause LEDs
remain on as long as operate operand associated with the element remains asserted. If a protection element target setting
is “Latched”, then the corresponding event cause LEDs turn on when the operate operand associated with the element is
asserted and remain on until the RESET button on the front panel is pressed after the operand is reset.
All elements that are able to discriminate faulted phases can independently turn off or on the phase A, B, or C LEDs. This
includes phase instantaneous overcurrent, phase undervoltage, etc. This means that the phase A, B, and C operate oper-
ands for individual protection elements are ORed to turn on or off the phase A, B, or C LEDs.
• VOLTAGE: Indicates voltage was involved.
• CURRENT: Indicates current was involved.
• FREQUENCY: Indicates frequency was involved.
• OTHER: Indicates a composite function was involved.
• PHASE A: Indicates phase A was involved.
• PHASE B: Indicates phase B was involved.
• PHASE C: Indicates phase C was involved.
• NEUTRAL/GROUND: Indicates that neutral or ground was involved.
USER-PROGRAMMABLE INDICATORS:
The second and third provide 48 amber LED indicators whose operation is controlled by the user. Support for applying a
customized label beside every LED is provided.
User customization of LED operation is of maximum benefit in installations where languages other than English are used to
communicate with operators. Refer to the User-programmable LEDs section in chapter 5 for the settings used to program
the operation of the LEDs on these panels.

USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS
842782A1.CDR
Figure 4–20: LED PANELS 2 AND 3 (INDEX TEMPLATE)

DEFAULT LABELS FOR LED PANEL 2:
The default labels are intended to represent:
• GROUP 1...6: The illuminated GROUP is the active settings group.
Firmware revisions 2.9x and earlier support eight user setting groups; revisions 3.0x and higher support six setting
groups. For convenience of users using earlier firmware revisions, the relay panel shows eight setting groups.
NOTE
Please note that the LEDs, despite their default labels, are fully user-programmable.
4
The relay is shipped with the default label for the LED panel 2. The LEDs, however, are not pre-programmed. To match the
pre-printed label, the LED settings must be entered as shown in the User-programmable LEDs section of chapter 5. The
LEDs are fully user-programmable. The default labels can be replaced by user-printed labels for both panels as explained
in the following section.
SETTINGS IN USE
842783A1.CDR
Figure 4–21: LED PANEL 2 (DEFAULT LABELS)
4.3.3 CUSTOM LABELING OF LEDS
The following procedure requires these pre-requisites:
• EnerVista UR Setup software is installed and operational
• The B30 settings have been saved to a settings file
• The B30 front panel label cutout sheet (GE Multilin part number 1006-0047) has been downloaded from
http://www.gegridsolutions.com/products/support/ur/URLEDenhanced.doc and printed
• Small-bladed knife
To create custom LED labels for the enhanced front panel display:
1. Start the EnerVista UR Setup software.

2. Select the Front Panel Report item at the bottom of the menu tree for the settings file. The front panel report window
displays.
4
Figure 4–22: FRONT PANEL REPORT WINDOW
3. Enter the text to appear next to each LED and above each user-programmable pushbuttons in the fields provided.
4. Feed the B30 front panel label cutout sheet into a printer and press the Print button in the front panel report window.
5. When printing is complete, fold the sheet along the perforated lines and punch out the labels.
6. Remove the B30 label insert tool from the package and bend the tabs as described in the following procedures. These
tabs are used for removal of the default and custom LED labels.
It is important that the tool be used EXACTLY as shown below, with the printed side containing the GE part number
facing the user.
NOTE
The label package shipped with every B30 contains the three default labels shown below, the custom label template sheet,
and the label removal tool.
If the default labels are suitable for your application, insert them in the appropriate slots and program the LEDs to match
them. If you require custom labels, follow the procedures below to remove the original labels and insert the new ones.
The following procedure describes how to setup and use the label removal tool.
1. Bend the tabs at the left end of the tool upwards as shown below.

2. Bend the tab at the center of the tool tail as shown below.
The following procedure describes how to remove the LED labels from the B30 enhanced front panel and insert the custom
labels.
1. Use the knife to lift the LED label and slide the label tool underneath. Make sure the bent tabs are pointing away from
the relay.
4
2. Slide the label tool under the LED label until the tabs snap out as shown below. This attaches the label tool to the LED
label.

3. Remove the tool and attached LED label as shown below.
4. Slide the new LED label inside the pocket until the text is properly aligned with the LEDs, as shown below.
The following procedure describes how to remove the user-programmable pushbutton labels from the B30 enhanced front
panel and insert the custom labels.
1. Use the knife to lift the pushbutton label and slide the tail of the label tool underneath, as shown below. Make sure the
bent tab is pointing away from the relay.

2. Slide the label tool under the user-programmable pushbutton label until the tabs snap out as shown below. This
attaches the label tool to the user-programmable pushbutton label.
3. Remove the tool and attached user-programmable pushbutton label as shown below.
4

4. Slide the new user-programmable pushbutton label inside the pocket until the text is properly aligned with the buttons,
as shown below.
4.3.4 DISPLAY
All messages are displayed on a backlit liquid crystal display (LCD) to make them visible under poor lighting conditions.
While the keypad and display are not actively being used, the display defaults to user-defined messages. Any high-priority
event-driven message automatically overrides the default message and appears on the display.
4.3.5 KEYPAD
Display messages are organized into pages under the following headings: actual values, settings, commands, and targets.
The MENU key navigates through these pages. Each heading page is divided further into logical subgroups.
The MESSAGE keys navigate through the subgroups. The VALUE keys increment or decrement numerical setting values
when in programming mode. These keys also scroll through alphanumeric values in the text edit mode. Alternatively, val-
ues can be entered with the numeric keypad.
The decimal key initiates and advances to the next character in text edit mode or enters a decimal point.
The HELP key can be pressed at any time for context-sensitive help messages.
The ENTER key stores altered setting values.
When entering an IP address on the front panel, key in the first sequence of the number, then press the • key for the deci-
mal place. For example, for 127.0.0.1, press 127, then •, then 0, then •, then 0, then •, then 1. To save the address, press
the ENTER key.
4.3.6 BREAKER CONTROL
a) INTRODUCTION
The B30 can interface with associated circuit breakers. In many cases the application monitors the state of the breaker, that
can be presented on faceplate LEDs, along with a breaker trouble indication. Breaker operations can be manually initiated
from faceplate keypad or automatically initiated from a FlexLogic operand. A setting is provided to assign names to each
breaker; this user-assigned name is used for the display of related flash messages. These features are provided for two
breakers; the user can use only those portions of the design relevant to a single breaker, which must be breaker 1.
For the following discussion it is assumed the SETTINGS  SYSTEM SETUP  BREAKERS  BREAKER 1(2)  BREAKER
FUNCTION setting is "Enabled" for each breaker.

b) CONTROL MODE SELECTION AND MONITORING

Installations can require that a breaker is operated in the three-pole only mode (3-pole), or in the one and three-pole (1-
pole) mode, selected by setting. If the mode is selected as three-pole, a single input tracks the breaker open or closed posi-
tion. If the mode is selected as one-pole, all three breaker pole states must be input to the relay. These inputs must be in
agreement to indicate the position of the breaker.
For the following discussion it is assumed the SETTINGS  SYSTEM SETUP  BREAKERS  BREAKER 1(2)  BREAKER
1(2) PUSH BUTTON CONTROL setting is “Enabled” for each breaker.
c) FACEPLATE (USER KEY) CONTROL

After the 30 minute interval during which command functions are permitted after a correct command password, the user
cannot open or close a breaker via the keypad. The following discussions begin from the not-permitted state.
d) CONTROL OF TWO BREAKERS

For the following example setup, the (Name) field represents the user-programmed variable name.
For this application (setup shown below), the relay is connected and programmed for both breaker 1 and breaker 2. The
USER 1 key performs the selection of which breaker is to be operated by the USER 2 and USER 3 keys. The USER 2 key
is used to manually close the breaker and the USER 3 key is used to manually open the breaker.
4
ENTER COMMAND This message appears when the USER 1, USER 2, or USER 3 key is pressed and a
PASSWORD COMMAND PASSWORD is required; i.e. if COMMAND PASSWORD is enabled and no com-
mands have been issued within the last 30 minutes.
Press USER 1 This message appears if the correct password is entered or if none is required. This mes-
To Select Breaker sage displays for 30 seconds or until the USER 1 key is pressed again.
BKR1-(Name) SELECTED This message is displayed after the USER 1 key is pressed for the second time. Three
USER 2=CLS/USER 3=OP possible actions can be performed from this state within 30 seconds as per items (1), (2)
and (3) below:
(1)
USER 2 OFF/ON If the USER 2 key is pressed, this message appears for 20 seconds. If the USER 2 key is
To Close BKR1-(Name) pressed again within that time, a signal is created that can be programmed to operate an
output relay to close breaker 1.
(2)
USER 3 OFF/ON If the USER 3 key is pressed, this message appears for 20 seconds. If the USER 3 key is
To Open BKR1-(Name) pressed again within that time, a signal is created that can be programmed to operate an
output relay to open breaker 1.
(3)
BKR2-(Name) SELECTED If the USER 1 key is pressed at this step, this message appears showing that a different
USER 2=CLS/USER 3=OP breaker is selected. Three possible actions can be performed from this state as per (1),
(2) and (3). Repeatedly pressing the USER 1 key alternates between available breakers.
Pressing keys other than USER 1, 2, or 3 at any time aborts the breaker control function.
e) CONTROL OF ONE BREAKER

For this application the relay is connected and programmed for breaker 1 only. Operation for this application is identical to
that described above for two breakers.
4.3.7 MENUS
a) NAVIGATION
Press the MENU key to select a header display page (top-level menu). The header title appears momentarily followed by a
header display page menu item. Each press of the MENU key advances through the following main heading pages:
• Actual values
• Settings

• Commands
• Targets
• User displays (when enabled)
b) HIERARCHY
The setting and actual value messages are arranged hierarchically. The header display pages are indicated by double
scroll bar characters (), while sub-header pages are indicated by single scroll bar characters (). The header display
pages represent the highest level of the hierarchy and the sub-header display pages fall below this level. The MESSAGE
UP and DOWN keys move within a group of headers, sub-headers, setting values, or actual values. Continually pressing
the MESSAGE RIGHT key from a header display displays specific information for the header category. Conversely, contin-
ually pressing the MESSAGE LEFT key from a setting value or actual value display returns to the header display.
HIGHEST LEVEL LOWEST LEVEL (SETTING

VALUE)
 SETTINGS  SECURITY ACCESS LEVEL:

 PRODUCT SETUP  Restricted
4
 SETTINGS
 SYSTEM SETUP
c) EXAMPLE MENU NAVIGATION
 ACTUAL VALUES Press the MENU key until the header for the first Actual Values page appears. This
 STATUS page contains system and relay status information. Repeatedly press the MESSAGE
keys to display the other actual value headers.

 SETTINGS Press the MENU key until the header for the first page of Settings appears. This page
 PRODUCT SETUP contains settings to configure the relay.

 SETTINGS Press the MESSAGE DOWN key to move to the next Settings page. This page con-
 SYSTEM SETUP tains settings for System Setup. Repeatedly press the MESSAGE UP and DOWN
keys to display the other setting headers and then back to the first Settings page
header.

 SECURITY From the Settings page one header (Product Setup), press the MESSAGE RIGHT
 key once to display the first sub-header (Security).

ACCESS LEVEL: Press the MESSAGE RIGHT key once more and this will display the first setting for
Restricted Security. Pressing the MESSAGE DOWN key repeatedly will display the remaining
 setting messages for this sub-header.
 SECURITY Press the MESSAGE LEFT key once to move back to the first sub-header message.


 DISPLAY Pressing the MESSAGE DOWN key displays the second setting sub-header associ-
 PROPERTIES ated with the Product Setup header.

FLASH MESSAGE Press the MESSAGE RIGHT key once more to display the first setting for Display
TIME: 1.0 s Properties.

4.3.8 CHANGING SETTINGS
a) ENTERING NUMERICAL DATA

Each numerical setting has its own minimum, maximum, and increment value associated with it. These parameters define
what values are acceptable for a setting.
FLASH MESSAGE For example, select the SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  DISPLAY PROPERTIES  FLASH
TIME: 1.0 s MESSAGE TIME setting.

MINIMUM: 0.5 Press the HELP key to view the minimum and maximum values. Press the HELP key
MAXIMUM: 10.0 again to view the next context sensitive help message.
Two methods of editing and storing a numerical setting value are available.
• 0 to 9 and decimal point: The relay numeric keypad works the same as that of any electronic calculator. A number is
entered one digit at a time. The leftmost digit is entered first and the rightmost digit is entered last. Pressing the MES-
SAGE LEFT key or pressing the ESCAPE key, returns the original value to the display.
• VALUE keys: The VALUE UP key increments the displayed value by the step value, up to the maximum value allowed.
While at the maximum value, pressing the VALUE UP key again allows the setting selection to continue upward from
the minimum value. The VALUE DOWN key decrements the displayed value by the step value, down to the minimum
4
value. While at the minimum value, pressing the VALUE DOWN key again allows the setting selection to continue
downward from the maximum value.
FLASH MESSAGE As an example, set the flash message time setting to 2.5 seconds. Press the appropriate
TIME: 2.5 s numeric keys in the sequence “2 . 5". The display message changes as the digits are
 being entered.
NEW SETTING Until ENTER is pressed, editing changes are not registered by the relay. Therefore, press
HAS BEEN STORED ENTER to store the new value in memory. This flash message momentarily appears as
confirmation of the storing process. Numerical values which contain decimal places are
rounded-off if more decimal place digits are entered than specified by the step value.
b) ENTERING ENUMERATION DATA

Enumeration settings have data values which are part of a set, whose members are explicitly defined by a name. A set is
comprised of two or more members.
ACCESS LEVEL: For example, the selections available for ACCESS LEVEL are "Restricted", "Command",
Restricted "Setting", and "Factory Service".
Enumeration type values are changed using the VALUE keys. The VALUE UP key displays the next selection while the
VALUE DOWN key displays the previous selection.
ACCESS LEVEL: If the ACCESS LEVEL needs to be "Setting", press the VALUE keys until the proper selec-
Setting tion is displayed. Press HELP at any time for the context sensitive help messages.

NEW SETTING Changes are not registered by the relay until the ENTER key is pressed. Pressing
HAS BEEN STORED ENTER stores the new value in memory. This flash message momentarily appears as
confirmation of the storing process.
c) ENTERING ALPHANUMERIC TEXT

Text settings have data values which are fixed in length, but user-defined in character. They can be upper case letters,
lower case letters, numerals, and a selection of special characters.

There are several places where text messages can be programmed to allow the relay to be customized for specific applica-
tions. One example is the Message Scratchpad. Use the following procedure to enter alphanumeric text messages.
For example: to enter the text, “Breaker #1”.
1. Press the decimal point to enter text edit mode.
2. Press the VALUE keys until the character 'B' appears; press the decimal key to advance the cursor to the next position.
3. Repeat step 2 for the remaining characters: r,e,a,k,e,r, ,#,1.
4. Press ENTER to store the text.
5. If you have any problem, press HELP to view context sensitive help. Flash messages appear sequentially for several
seconds each. For the case of a text setting message, pressing HELP displays how to edit and store new values.
d) ACTIVATING THE RELAY
RELAY SETTINGS: When the relay is powered up, the Trouble LED is on, the In Service LED off, and this
Not Programmed message displayed, indicating the relay is in the "Not Programmed" state and is safe-
guarding (output relays blocked) against the installation of a relay whose settings have
not been entered. This message remains until the relay is explicitly put in the "Pro-
4 grammed" state.
To change the RELAY SETTINGS: "Not Programmed" mode to "Programmed", proceed as follows:
1. Press the MENU key until the SETTINGS header flashes momentarily and the PRODUCT SETUP message appears on the
display.
2. Press the MESSAGE RIGHT key until the SECURITY message appears on the display.
3. Press the MESSAGE DOWN key until the INSTALLATION message appears on the display.
4. Press the MESSAGE RIGHT key until the RELAY SETTINGS: Not Programmed message is displayed.
SETTINGS

 SETTINGS  SECURITY
 PRODUCT SETUP 
 DISPLAY
 PROPERTIES
↓
 INSTALLATION RELAY SETTINGS:

 Not Programmed
5. After the RELAY SETTINGS: Not Programmed message appears on the display, press the VALUE keys change the
selection to "Programmed".
6. Press the ENTER key.
RELAY SETTINGS: RELAY SETTINGS: NEW SETTING

Not Programmed Programmed HAS BEEN STORED
7. When the "NEW SETTING HAS BEEN STORED" message appears, the relay is in "Programmed" state and the In
Service LED turns on.
e) ENTERING INITIAL PASSWORDS

The information in this section refers to password security. For information on how to set or change CyberSentry pass-
words, see the Settings > Product Setup > Security > CyberSentry section in the next chapter.

The B30 supports password entry from a local or remote connection.

Local access is defined as any access to settings or commands via the faceplate interface. This includes both keypad entry
and the faceplate RS232 connection. Remote access is defined as any access to settings or commands via any rear com-
munications port. This includes both Ethernet and RS485 connections. Any changes to the local or remote passwords
enables this functionality.
To enter the initial setting (or command) password, proceed as follows:
1. Press the MENU key until the SETTINGS header flashes momentarily and the PRODUCT SETUP message appears on the
display.
2. Press the MESSAGE RIGHT key until the ACCESS LEVEL message appears on the display.
3. Press the MESSAGE DOWN key until the CHANGE LOCAL PASSWORDS message appears on the display.
4. Press the MESSAGE RIGHT key until the CHANGE SETTING PASSWORD or CHANGE COMMAND PASSWORD message
appears on the display.
 SECURITY ACCESS LEVEL:
 Restricted
 CHANGE LOCAL CHANGE COMMAND
 PASSWORDS PASSWORD: No
CHANGE SETTING
4
PASSWORD: No
5. After the CHANGE...PASSWORD message appears on the display, press the VALUE UP or DOWN key to change the
selection to “Yes”.
6. Press the ENTER key and the display prompts you to ENTER NEW PASSWORD.
7. Type in a password and press the ENTER key.
8. When the VERIFY NEW PASSWORD is displayed, re-type in the same password and press ENTER.
CHANGE SETTING
PASSWORD: No
CHANGE SETTING ENTER NEW VERIFY NEW

PASSWORD: Yes PASSWORD: ########## PASSWORD: ##########
NEW PASSWORD
HAS BEEN STORED
9. When the NEW PASSWORD HAS BEEN STORED message appears, your new Setting (or Command) Password will be
active.
f) CHANGING EXISTING PASSWORD

To change an existing password, follow the instructions in the previous section with the following exception. A message
prompts you to type in the existing password (for each security level) before a new password can be entered.
g) INVALID PASSWORD ENTRY

By default, when an incorrect Command or Setting password has been entered via the faceplate interface three times
within three minutes, the LOCAL ACCESS DENIED FlexLogic operand is set to “On” and the B30 does not allow settings or
command level access via the faceplate interface for the next five minutes.
By default, when an incorrect Command or Setting password has been entered via any external communications interface
three times within three minutes, the REMOTE ACCESS DENIED FlexLogic operand is set to “On” and the B30 does not allow
settings or command access via the any external communications interface for five minutes. The REMOTE ACCESS DENIED
FlexLogic operand is set to “Off” after five minutes for a Command password or 30 minutes for a Settings password.
These default settings can be changed in EnerVista under Settings > Product Setup > Security.


5 SETTINGS 5.1 OVERVIEW
5 SETTINGS 5.1OVERVIEW 5.1.1 SETTINGS MENU
 SETTINGS  SECURITY
See page 5-8.
 PRODUCT SETUP 
 SUPERVISORY
See page 5-24.

 DISPLAY
See page 5-24.
 PROPERTIES
 CLEAR RELAY
See page 5-25.
 RECORDS
 COMMUNICATIONS
See page 5-26.

 MODBUS USER MAP
See page 5-64.

 REAL TIME
See page 5-64.
 CLOCK
 USER-PROGRAMMABLE
See page 5-69.
 FAULT REPORT
 OSCILLOGRAPHY
See page 5-70.

5
See page 5-72.
 LEDS
See page 5-76.
 SELF TESTS
 CONTROL
See page 5-76.
 PUSHBUTTONS
See page 5-79.
 PUSHBUTTONS
 FLEX STATE
See page 5-83.
 PARAMETERS
 USER-DEFINABLE
See page 5-84.
 DISPLAYS
 DIRECT I/O
See page 5-86.

 TELEPROTECTION
See page 5-94.

 INSTALLATION
See page 5-95.

 SETTINGS  AC INPUTS
See page 5-97.
 SYSTEM SETUP 
 POWER SYSTEM
See page 5-98.

 SIGNAL SOURCES
See page 5-99.


5.1 OVERVIEW 5 SETTINGS
 BREAKERS
See page 5-102.

 SWITCHES
See page 5-106.

 FLEXCURVES
See page 5-109.

 BUS
See page 5-116.

 SETTINGS  FLEXLOGIC
See page 5-131.
 FLEXLOGIC  EQUATION EDITOR
 FLEXLOGIC
See page 5-131.
 TIMERS
 FLEXELEMENTS
See page 5-132.

 NON-VOLATILE
See page 5-137.
 LATCHES
 SETTINGS  SETTING GROUP 1

See page 5-138.
 GROUPED ELEMENTS 
5  SETTING GROUP 2

 SETTING GROUP 3

 SETTING GROUP 4

 SETTING GROUP 5

 SETTING GROUP 6

 SETTINGS  TRIP BUS

See page 5-170.
 CONTROL ELEMENTS 
 SETTING GROUPS
See page 5-172.

 SELECTOR SWITCH
See page 5-174.

 DIGITAL ELEMENTS
See page 5-180.

 DIGITAL COUNTERS
See page 5-183.

 MONITORING
See page 5-185.
 ELEMENTS
 SETTINGS  CONTACT INPUTS

See page 5-195.
 INPUTS / OUTPUTS 

 VIRTUAL INPUTS
See page 5-197.

 CONTACT OUTPUTS
See page 5-198.

 VIRTUAL OUTPUTS
See page 5-201.

 REMOTE DEVICES
See page 5-201.

 REMOTE INPUTS
See page 5-202.

 REMOTE DPS INPUTS
See page 5-203.

 REMOTE OUTPUTS
See page 5-204.
 DNA BIT PAIRS
 REMOTE OUTPUTS
See page 5-204.
 UserSt BIT PAIRS
 RESETTING
See page 5-204.

 DIRECT INPUTS
See page 5-205.

 DIRECT OUTPUTS
5
See page 5-205.

 TELEPROTECTION
See page 5-209.

 IEC 61850
See page 5-211.
 GOOSE ANALOGS
 IEC 61850
See page 5-212.
 GOOSE UINTEGERS
 SETTINGS  DCMA INPUTS

See page 5-213.
 TRANSDUCER I/O 
 RTD INPUTS
See page 5-214.

 DCMA OUTPUTS
See page 5-216.

 SETTINGS TEST MODE

See page 5-219.
 TESTING FUNCTION: Disabled
TEST MODE FORCING:
See page 5-219.
On
 FORCE CONTACT
See page 5-220.
 INPUTS
 FORCE CONTACT
See page 5-221.
 OUTPUTS

5.1.2 INTRODUCTION TO ELEMENTS
In the design of UR relays, the term element is used to describe a feature that is based around a comparator. The compar-
ator is provided with an input (or set of inputs) that is tested against a programmed setting (or group of settings) to deter-
mine if the input is within the defined range that will set the output to logic 1, also referred to as setting the flag. A single
comparator may make multiple tests and provide multiple outputs; for example, the time overcurrent comparator sets a
pickup flag when the current input is above the setting and sets an operate flag when the input current has been at a level
above the pickup setting for the time specified by the time-current curve settings. All comparators use analog actual values
as the input.
An exception to this rule is digital elements, which use logic states as inputs.
NOTE
Elements are arranged into two classes, grouped and control. Each element classed as a grouped element is provided with
six alternate sets of settings, in setting groups numbered 1 through 6. The performance of a grouped element is defined by
the setting group that is active at a given time. The performance of a control element is independent of the selected active
setting group.
The main characteristics of an element are shown on the element logic diagram. This includes the inputs, settings, fixed
logic, and the output operands generated (abbreviations used on scheme logic diagrams are defined in Appendix F).
Some settings are specified in per-unit (pu) calculated quantities:
pu quantity = (actual quantity) / (base quantity)
Where the current source is from a single CT, the base quantity is the nominal secondary or primary current of the CT. Use
the secondary current base to convert per-unit current settings to/from a secondary current value, and use the primary cur-
5 rent base to convert to/from a primary current value.

Where the current source is the sum of two or more CTs with different nominal primary current, the primary base quantity is
the largest nominal primary current. For example, if CT1 = 300 / 5 A and CT2 = 100 / 1 A, then in order to sum these, CT2
is scaled to the CT1 ratio. In this case, the base quantity is 300 A primary, 5 A secondary for CT1, and 300/(100/1) = 3 A
secondary for CT2.
For voltage elements the primary base quantity is the nominal phase-to-phase primary voltage of the protected system pro-
vided that the VT ratio setting is set to the nominal ratio of the VTs and the secondary voltage setting is set to the phase-to-
phase voltage seen by the relay when the voltage of the protected system in nominal. The UR uses the convention that
nominal voltages in a three-phase system are phase-to-phase voltages.
For example, on a system with a 13.8 kV nominal primary voltage, the base quantity is 13800 V. With 14400:120 V delta-
connected VTs, the secondary base quantity and secondary voltage setting is:
13800
---------------- × 120 = 115 V (EQ 5.1)
14400
For wye-connected VTs, the primary and secondary bases quanitities are as before, but the secondary voltage (here a
phase-to-phase ground value) is:
13800
---------------- × 120
---------- = 66.4 V (EQ 5.2)
14400 3
Many settings are common to most elements and are discussed below:
• FUNCTION setting: This setting programs the element to be operational when selected as “Enabled”. The factory
default is “Disabled”. Once programmed to “Enabled”, any element associated with the function becomes active and all
options become available.
• NAME setting: This setting is used to uniquely identify the element.
• SOURCE setting: This setting is used to select the AC source to be monitored. See the Introduction to AC Sources
section later.
• PICKUP setting: For simple elements, this setting is used to program the level of the measured parameter above or
below which the pickup state is established. In more complex elements, a set of settings may be provided to define the
range of the measured parameters which will cause the element to pickup.

• PICKUP DELAY setting: This setting sets a time-delay-on-pickup, or on-delay, for the duration between the pickup
and operate output states.
• RESET DELAY setting: This setting is used to set a time-delay-on-dropout, or off-delay, for the duration between the
Operate output state and the return to logic 0 after the input transits outside the defined pickup range.
• BLOCK setting: The default output operand state of all comparators is a logic 0 or “flag not set”. The comparator
remains in this default state until a logic 1 is asserted at the RUN input, allowing the test to be performed. If the RUN
input changes to logic 0 at any time, the comparator returns to the default state. The RUN input is used to supervise
the comparator. The BLOCK input is used as one of the inputs to RUN control.
• TARGET setting: This setting is used to define the operation of an element target message. When set to “Disabled”,
no target message or illumination of a faceplate LED indicator is issued upon operation of the element. When set to
“Self-Reset”, the target message and LED indication follow the operate state of the element, and self-resets once the
operate element condition clears. When set to “Latched”, the target message and LED indication will remain visible
after the element output returns to logic 0 until a RESET command is received by the relay.
• EVENTS setting: This setting is used to control whether the pickup, dropout or operate states are recorded by the
event recorder. When set to “Disabled”, element pickup, dropout or operate are not recorded as events. When set to
“Enabled”, events are created for:
(Element) PKP (pickup)
(Element) DPO (dropout)
(Element) OP (operate)
The DPO event is created when the measure and decide comparator output transits from the pickup state (logic 1) to
the dropout state (logic 0). This could happen when the element is in the operate state if the reset delay time is not 0.
Not every operand of a given element in a UR relay generates events, only the major output operands. Elements,
asserting output per phase, log operating phase output only, without asserting the common three-phase operand
event. 5
5.1.3 INTRODUCTION TO AC SOURCES
a) BACKGROUND
A mechanism called a source configures the routing of CT and VT input channels to measurement sub-systems. Sources,
in the context of UR series relays, refer to the logical grouping of current and voltage signals such that one source contains
all the signals required to measure the load or fault in a particular power apparatus. A given source may contain all or some
of the following signals: three-phase currents, single-phase ground current, three-phase voltages and an auxiliary voltage
from a single VT for checking for synchronism.
The basic idea of an AC source is to select a point on the power system where the voltages and currents are of interest. To
illustrate the concept of sources, as applied to current inputs only, consider the breaker-and-a-half scheme below. (The
breaker-and-a-half scheme is used for illustrative purposes and is available on select UR products.) In this application, the
current flows as shown by the arrows. Some current flows through the upper bus bar to some other location or power
equipment, and some current flows into transformer winding 1. The current into winding 1 is the phasor sum (or difference)
of the currents in CT1 and CT2 (whether the sum or difference is used depends on the relative polarity of the CT connec-
tions). The same considerations apply to transformer winding 2. The protection elements require access to the net current
for transformer protection, but some elements may need access to the individual currents from CT1 and CT2.

CT1 through current CT2
Winding 1
current
Winding 1
UR-series
relay Power
transformer
Winding 2
CT3 CT4
827791A3.CDR
Figure 5–1: BREAKER-AND-A-HALF SCHEME

In conventional analog or electronic relays, the sum of the currents is obtained from an appropriate external connection of
all CTs through which any portion of the current for the element being protected could flow. Auxiliary CTs are required to
perform ratio matching if the ratios of the primary CTs to be summed are not identical. In the UR series of relays, provisions
have been included for all the current signals to be brought to the UR device where grouping, ratio correction and summa-
tion are applied internally via configuration settings.
A major advantage of using internal summation is that the individual currents are available to the protection device; for
example, as additional information to calculate a restraint current, or to allow the provision of additional protection features
5 that operate on the individual currents such as breaker failure.
Given the flexibility of this approach, it becomes necessary to add configuration settings to the platform to allow the user to
select which sets of CT inputs will be added to form the net current into the protected device.
The internal grouping of current and voltage signals forms an AC source. This source can be given a specific name through
the settings, and becomes available to protection and metering elements in the UR platform. Individual names can be given
to each source to help identify them more clearly for later use. For example, in the scheme shown in the above diagram,
the user configures one source to be the sum of CT1 and CT2 and can name this source as “Wdg1 I”.
Once the sources have been configured, the user has them available as selections for the choice of input signal for the pro-
tection elements and as metered quantities.
b) CT/VT MODULE CONFIGURATION

CT and VT input channels are contained in CT/VT modules. The type of input channel can be phase/neutral/other voltage,
phase/ground current, or sensitive ground current. The CT/VT modules calculate total waveform RMS levels, fundamental
frequency phasors, symmetrical components and harmonics for voltage or current, as allowed by the hardware in each
channel. These modules may calculate other parameters as directed by the CPU module.
A CT/VT module contains up to eight input channels, numbered 1 through 8. The channel numbering corresponds to the
module terminal numbering 1 through 8 and is arranged as follows: Channels 1, 2, 3, and 4 are always provided as a
group, hereafter called a “bank,” and all four are either current or voltage, as are channels 5, 6, 7, and 8. Channels 1, 2, 3
and 5, 6, 7 are arranged as phase A, B and C respectively. Channels 4 and 8 are either another current or voltage.
Banks are ordered sequentially from the block of lower-numbered channels to the block of higher-numbered channels, and
from the CT/VT module with the lowest slot position letter to the module with the highest slot position letter, as follows:
INCREASING SLOT POSITION LETTER -->
CT/VT MODULE 1 CT/VT MODULE 2 CT/VT MODULE 3
< bank 1 > < bank 3 > < bank 5 >
< bank 2 > < bank 4 > < bank 6 >

The UR platform allows for a maximum of six sets of three-phase voltages and six sets of three-phase currents. The result
of these restrictions leads to the maximum number of CT/VT modules in a chassis to three. The maximum number of
sources is six. A summary of CT/VT module configurations is shown below.
ITEM MAXIMUM NUMBER
CT/VT Module 3
CT Bank (3 phase channels, 1 ground channel) 6
VT Bank (3 phase channels, 1 auxiliary channel) 3
c) CT/VT INPUT CHANNEL CONFIGURATION

Upon relay startup, configuration settings for every bank of current or voltage input channels in the relay are automatically
generated from the order code. Within each bank, a channel identification label is automatically assigned to each bank of
channels in a given product. The bank naming convention is based on the physical location of the channels, required by the
user to know how to connect the relay to external circuits. Bank identification consists of the letter designation of the slot in
which the CT/VT module is mounted as the first character, followed by numbers indicating the channel, either 1 or 5. See
the HardFiber instruction manual for designations of HardFiber voltage and current banks.
For three-phase channel sets, the number of the lowest numbered channel identifies the set. For example, F1 represents
the three-phase channel set of F1/F2/F3, where F is the slot letter and 1 is the first channel of the set of three channels.
Upon startup, the CPU configures the settings required to characterize the current and voltage inputs, and will display them
in the appropriate section in the sequence of the banks (as described above) as follows for a maximum configuration: F1,
F5, M1, M5, U1, and U5.

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP 5 SETTINGS
5.2PRODUCT SETUP 5.2.1 SECURITY
a) SECURITY OVERVIEW
The following security features are available:
• Password security — Basic security present in the default offering of the product
• EnerVista security — Role-based access to various EnerVista software screens and configuration elements. The fea-
ture is available in the default offering of the product and only in the EnerVista software.
• CyberSentry security — Advanced security options available as a software option. When purchased, the options are
automatically enabled, and the default Password security and EnerVista security are disabled.
Changing the password, or any other setting, does not take the relay out of service. The relay is taken out of service when
a settings file is written to it.
LOST PASSWORD
If all passwords are lost, recovery is possible by resetting the unit to default values. Note that the relay is reset to default
values, not just the passwords.
To reset the unit after a lost password:
1. Email GE customer service at multilin.tech@ge.com with the serial number and using a recognizable corporate email
account. Customer service provides a code to reset the relay to the factory defaults.
2. Enter the reset code on the front panel, under COMMANDS  RELAY MAINTENANCE  SERVICE COMMAND.
3. Change the default password of ChangeMe1# as outlined in the Setting Up CyberSentry and Changing Default Pass-
word section in the first chapter.
5 PASSWORD REQUIREMENTS
A user account requires an alpha-numeric password that meets the following requirements:
• Password is case-sensitive
• Password cannot contain the user account name or parts of the user account that exceed two consecutive characters
• Password must be 6 to 20 characters in length
• Password must contain characters from three of the following four categories:
- English uppercase characters (A through Z)
- English lowercase characters (a through z)
- Base 10 digits (0 through 9)
- Non-alphabetic characters (for example, ~, !, @, #, $,%, &)
b) PASSWORD SECURITY
PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  SECURITY
 SECURITY ACCESS LEVEL: Range: Restricted, Command, Setting,

 Restricted Factory Service (for factory use only)
 CHANGE LOCAL
MESSAGE See page 5–9.
 PASSWORDS
 ACCESS
 SUPERVISION
 DUAL PERMISSION
 SECURITY ACCESS
PASSWORD ACCESS Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
The B30 supports password entry from a local or remote connection.

5 SETTINGS 5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
Local access is defined as any access to settings or commands via the faceplate interface. This includes both keypad entry
and the through the faceplate RS232 port. Remote access is defined as any access to settings or commands via any rear
communications port. This includes both Ethernet and RS485 connections. Any changes to the local or remote passwords
enables this functionality.
When entering a settings or command password via EnerVista or any serial interface, the user must enter the correspond-
ing connection password. If the connection is to the back of the B30, the remote password must be used. If the connection
is to the RS232 port of the faceplate, the local password must be used.
For the ACCESS LEVEL, the "Restricted" option means both settings and commands can be accessed, but there is no
access to factory configuration. The "Factory Service" level is not available and intended for factory use only. In addition,
there are two user security access levels, setting and command, for which you set a password for each. Use of a password
for each level controls whether users can enter commands or change settings. Another option is to specify setting and/or
command access for individual user accounts.
The PASSWORD ACCESS EVENTS settings allows recording of password access events in the event recorder.
The local setting and command sessions are initiated by the user through the front panel display and are disabled either by
the user or by timeout (via the setting and command level access timeout settings). The remote setting and command ses-
sions are initiated by the user through the EnerVista UR Setup software and are disabled either by the user or by timeout.
The state of the session (local or remote, setting or command) determines the state of the following FlexLogic operands.
• ACCESS LOC SETG OFF: Asserted when local setting access is disabled
• ACCESS LOC SETG ON: Asserted when local setting access is enabled
• ACCESS LOC CMND OFF: Asserted when local command access is disabled
• ACCESS LOC CMND ON: Asserted when local command access is enabled
• ACCESS REM SETG OFF: Asserted when remote setting access is disabled 5
• ACCESS REM SETG ON: Asserted when remote setting access is enabled
• ACCESS REM CMND OFF: Asserted when remote command access is disabled
• ACCESS REM CMND ON: Asserted when remote command access is enabled
A command or setting write operation is required to update the state of the remote and local security operands
listed.
NOTE
LOCAL PASSWORDS
PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  SECURITY  CHANGE LOCAL PASSWORDS
 CHANGE LOCAL CHANGE COMMAND Range: No, Yes

 PASSWORDS PASSWORD: No
CHANGE SETTING Range: No, Yes
MESSAGE
PASSWORD: No
Proper password codes are required to enable each access level. When a CHANGE COMMAND PASSWORD or CHANGE SET-
TING PASSWORD setting is programmed to “Yes” via the front panel interface, the following message sequence is invoked:
1. ENTER NEW PASSWORD: ____________.

2. VERIFY NEW PASSWORD: ____________.
3. NEW PASSWORD HAS BEEN STORED.
To gain write access to a “Restricted” setting, program the ACCESS LEVEL setting in the main security menu to “Setting” and
then change the setting, or attempt to change the setting and follow the prompt to enter the programmed password. If the
password is correctly entered, access is allowed. Access automatically reverts to the “Restricted” level according to the
access level timeout setting values.
If the setting and command passwords are identical, then this one password allows access to both commands and
settings.
NOTE

If a remote connection is established, local passcodes are not visible.
NOTE
REMOTE PASSWORDS
The remote password settings are visible only from a remote connection via the EnerVista UR Setup software.
Proper passwords are required to enable each command or setting level access.
To set the command or setting password:
1. In the EnerVista software, navigate to Settings > Product Setup > Security menu item to open the remote password
settings window.
2. Click the command or setting password Change button.
3. Enter the new password in the New Password field. Requirements are outlined in the Password Requirements section
at the beginning of the chapter. When an original password has already been used, enter it in the Enter Password
field and click the Send Password to Device button.
4. Re-enter the password in the Confirm Password field.
5. Click the OK button. The password is checked to ensure that is meets requirements.
If you establish a local connection to the relay (serial), you cannot view remote passcodes.
NOTE
ACCESS SUPERVISION
PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  SECURITY  ACCESS SUPERVISION
 ACCESS  ACCESS LEVEL

 SUPERVISION  TIMEOUTS
INVALID ATTEMPTS Range: 2 to 5 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
BEFORE LOCKOUT: 3
PASSWORD LOCKOUT Range: 5 to 60 minutes in steps of 1
MESSAGE
DURATION: 5 min
The following access supervision settings are available.

• INVALID ATTEMPTS BEFORE LOCKOUT: This setting specifies the number of times an incorrect password can be
entered within a three-minute time span before lockout occurs. When lockout occurs, the LOCAL ACCESS DENIED or
REMOTE ACCESS DENIED FlexLogic operands are set to “On”. These operands are returned to the “Off” state upon
expiration of the lockout.
• PASSWORD LOCKOUT DURATION: This setting specifies the time that the B30 will lockout password access after
the number of invalid password entries specified by the INVALID ATTEMPTS BEFORE LOCKOUT setting has occurred.
The B30 provides a means to raise an alarm upon failed password entry. Should password verification fail while accessing
a password-protected level of the relay (either settings or commands), the UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS FlexLogic operand is
asserted. The operand can be programmed to raise an alarm via contact outputs or communications. This feature can be
used to protect against both unauthorized and accidental access attempts.

The UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS operand is reset with the COMMANDS  CLEAR RECORDS  RESET UNAUTHORIZED
ALARMS command. Therefore, to apply this feature with security, the command level should be password-protected. The
operand does not generate events or targets.
If events or targets are required, the UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS operand can be assigned to a digital element programmed
with event logs or targets enabled.
The access level timeout settings are shown below.
PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  SECURITY  ACCESS SUPERVISION  ACCESS LEVEL TIMEOUTS
 ACCESS LEVEL COMMAND LEVEL ACCESS Range: 5 to 480 minutes in steps of 1

 TIMEOUTS TIMEOUT: 5 min
SETTING LEVEL ACCESS Range: 5 to 480 minutes in steps of 1
MESSAGE
TIMEOUT: 30 min
These settings allow the user to specify the length of inactivity required before returning to the restricted access level. Note
that the access level will set as restricted if control power is cycled.
• COMMAND LEVEL ACCESS TIMEOUT: This setting specifies the length of inactivity (no local or remote access)
required to return to restricted access from the command password level.
• SETTING LEVEL ACCESS TIMEOUT: This setting specifies the length of inactivity (no local or remote access)
required to return to restricted access from the command password level.
DUAL PERMISSION SECURITY ACCESS
PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  SECURITY  DUAL PERMISSION SECURITY ACCESS
 DUAL PERMISSION LOCAL SETTING AUTH: Range: selected FlexLogic operands (see below)
 SECURITY ACCESS On 5
REMOTE SETTING AUTH: Range: FlexLogic operand
MESSAGE
On
ACCESS AUTH Range: 5 to 480 minutes in steps of 1
MESSAGE
TIMEOUT: 30 min.
The dual permission security access feature provides a mechanism for customers to prevent unauthorized or unintended
upload of settings to a relay through the local or remote interfaces interface.
The following settings are available through the local (front panel) interface only.
• LOCAL SETTING AUTH: This setting is used for local (front panel or RS232 interface) setting access supervision.
Valid values for the FlexLogic operands are either “On” (default) or any physical “Contact Input ~~ On” value.
If this setting is “On“, then local setting access functions as normal; that is, a local setting password is required. If this
setting is any contact input on FlexLogic operand, then the operand must be asserted (set as on) prior to providing the
local setting password to gain setting access.
If setting access is not authorized for local operation (front panel or RS232 interface) and the user attempts to obtain
setting access, then the UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS message is displayed on the front panel.
If this setting is "Off," firmware upgrades are blocked. If this setting is "On," firmware upgrades are allowed.
• REMOTE SETTING AUTH: This setting is used for remote (Ethernet or RS485 interfaces) setting access supervision.
If this setting is “On” (the default setting), then remote setting access functions as normal; that is, a remote password is
required). If this setting is “Off”, then remote setting access is blocked even if the correct remote setting password is
provided. If this setting is any other FlexLogic operand, then the operand must be asserted (set as on) prior to provid-
ing the remote setting password to gain setting access.
If this setting is "Off," firmware upgrades are blocked. If this setting is "On," firmware upgrades are allowed.
• ACCESS AUTH TIMEOUT: This setting represents the timeout delay for local setting access. This setting is applicable
when the LOCAL SETTING AUTH setting is programmed to any operand except “On”. The state of the FlexLogic operand
is continuously monitored for an off-to-on transition. When this occurs, local access is permitted and the timer pro-
grammed with the ACCESS AUTH TIMEOUT setting value is started. When this timer expires, local setting access is

immediately denied. If access is permitted and an off-to-on transition of the FlexLogic operand is detected, the timeout
is restarted. The status of this timer is updated every 5 seconds.
The following settings are available through the remote (EnerVista UR Setup) interface only. Select the Settings > Product
Setup > Security menu item to display the security settings window.
The Remote Settings Authorized setting is used for remote (Ethernet or RS485 interfaces) setting access supervision. If
this setting is “On” (the default setting), then remote setting access functions as normal; that is, a remote password is
5 required. If this setting is “Off”, then remote setting access is blocked even if the correct remote setting password is pro-
vided. If this setting is any other FlexLogic operand, then the operand must be asserted (set as on) prior to providing the
remote setting password to gain setting access.
The Access Authorized Timeout setting represents the timeout delay remote setting access. This setting is applicable
when the Remote Settings Authorized setting is programmed to any operand except “On” or “Off”. The state of the Flex-
Logic operand is continuously monitored for an off-to-on transition. When this occurs, remote setting access is permitted
and the timer programmed with the Access Authorized Timeout setting value is started. When this timer expires, remote
setting access is immediately denied. If access is permitted and an off-to-on transition of the FlexLogic operand is detected,
the timeout is restarted. The status of this timer is updated every 5 seconds.
c) ENERVISTA SECURITY
ENABLING THE SECURITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
The EnerVista security system allows an administrator to manage access privileges of multiple users to the EnerVista appli-
cation.
It is disabled by default to allow the administrator direct access to the EnerVista software immediately after installation.
When security is disabled, all users have administrator access. GE recommends enabling the EnerVista security before
placing the device in service.
To enable the security system and require password use:

1. Select the Security > User Management menu item to open the user management window.
2. Check the Enable Security box in the lower-left corner to enable the security management system.
Security is now enabled for the EnerVista UR Setup software. Upon starting the software, users are now required to enter a
username and password.
ADDING A NEW USER
The following pre-requisites are required to add user accounts to the EnerVista security management system: 5
• The user adding the account must have administrator rights
• The EnerVista security management system must be enabled (previous section)
To add user accounts:
1. Select the Security > User Management menu item to open the user management window.
2. Enter a username in the User field. The username must be 4 to 20 characters in length.
3. Select the user access rights by enabling the check box of one or more of the fields.

The table outlines access rights.

Table 5–1: ACCESS RIGHTS SUMMARY
FIELD DESCRIPTION
Delete Entry Deletes the user account when exiting the user management window
Actual Values Allows the user to read actual values
Settings Allows the user to read setting values
Commands Allows the user to execute commands
Event Recorder Allows the user to use the digital fault recorder
FlexLogic Allows the user to read FlexLogic values
Update Info Allows the user to write to any function to which they have read privileges. When any of the Settings, Event
Recorder, and FlexLogic check boxes are enabled by themselves, the user is granted read access. When
any of them are enabled in conjunction with the Update Info box, they are granted read and write access.
The user is not granted write access to functions that are not checked, even if the Update Info field is
checked.
Admin The user is an EnerVista UR Setup administrator, therefore receiving all of the administrative rights.
Exercise caution when granting administrator rights.
4. Click OK to add the user account to the security management system.

MODIFYING USER PRIVILEGES
The following pre-requisites are required to modify user privileges in the EnerVista security management system:
• The user modifying the privileges must have administrator rights
• The EnerVista security management system must be enabled
To modify user privileges:
5 1. Select the Security > User Management menu item to open the user management window.
2. Locate the username in the User field.
3. Modify the user access rights by enabling or disabling one or more of the check boxes.
The table outlines access rights.

FIELD DESCRIPTION
Delete Entry Deletes the user account when exiting the user management window
Actual Values Allows the user to read actual values
Settings Allows the user to read setting values
Commands Allows the user to execute commands


FIELD DESCRIPTION
Event Recorder Allows the user to use the digital fault recorder
FlexLogic Allows the user to read FlexLogic values
Update Info Allows the user to write to any function to which they have read privileges. When any of the Settings, Event
Recorder, and FlexLogic check boxes are enabled by themselves, the user is granted read access. When
any of them are enabled in conjunction with the Update Info box, they are granted read and write access.
The user is not granted write access to functions that are not checked, even if the Update Info field is
checked.
Admin The user is an EnerVista UR Setup administrator, therefore receiving all of the administrative rights.
Exercise caution when granting administrator rights.
4. Click OK to save the changes.
d) CYBERSENTRY SECURITY
The EnerVista software provides the means to configure and authenticate UR using either server or device or authentica-
tion. Access to various functionality depends on user role.
The login screen of EnerVista has two options for access to the UR, server and device authentication.
Figure 5–2: LOGIN SCREEN FOR CYBERSENTRY
When the "Server" Authentication Type option is selected, the UR uses the RADIUS server and not its local authentication
database to authenticate the user.
When the "Device" button is selected, the UR uses its local authentication database and not the RADIUS server to authen-
ticate the user. In this case, it uses built-in roles (Administrator, Engineer, Supervisor, Operator, Observer, or Administrator
and Supervisor when Device Authentication is disabled) as login accounts and the associated passwords are stored on the
UR device. In this case, access is not user-attributable. In cases where user-attributable access is required, especially for
auditable processes for compliance reasons, use server authentication (RADIUS) only.
No password or security information is displayed in plain text by the EnerVista software or UR device, nor are they ever
transmitted without cryptographic protection.
Only (TCP/UDP) ports and services that are needed for device configuration and for customer enabled features are
open. All the other ports are closed. For example, Modbus is on by default, so its TCP port number, 502, is open.
NOTE But if Modbus is disabled, port 502 is closed. This function has been tested and no unused ports have been found
open.
When CyberSentry is enabled, Modbus communications over Ethernet is encrypted, which is not always tolerated by
SCADA systems. The UR has a bypass access feature for such situations, which allows unencrypted Modbus over Ether-
net. The BYPASS ACCESS setting is available on the SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  SECURITY  SUPERVISORY screen.
Note that other protocols (DNP, 101, 103, 104, EGD) are not encrypted, and they are good communications options for
SCADA systems when CyberSentry is enabled.
CYBERSENTRY SETTINGS THROUGH ENERVISTA
CyberSentry security settings are configured under Device > Settings > Product Setup > Security.

For the Device > Settings > Product Setup > Supervisory option, the panel looks like the following.
5
Figure 5–3: SUPERVISORY PANEL
For the Security panel, the following settings are available.
RADIUS Server Settings
SETTING NAME DESCRIPTION MIN MAX DEFAULT UNITS MINIMUM
PERMISSION
Primary RADIUS IP IP address of the main RADIUS server. 0.0.0.0 223.255.255.254 0.0.0.0 - Administrator
Address Default value indicates no Primary
RADIUS server is configured, and hence
RADIUS is disabled.
Restart the relay for any change to take
effect.
Primary RADIUS authentication port 1 65535 1812 - Administrator
Authentication Port
Primary Accounting RADIUS accounting port 1 65535 1813 - Administrator
Port
Vendor ID An identifier that specifies RADIUS Value that Administrator
vendor-specific attributes used with the represents
protocol General
Electric
RADIUS Shared secret used in authentication. It See the See the following N/A - Administrator
Authentication displays as asterisks. This setting must Password password section
(Shared) Secret meet the CyberSentry password Requirement for requirements
requirements. s section
RADIUS Authentication method used by RADIUS EAP-TTLS EAP-TTLS EAP-TTLS - Administrator
Authentication server. Currently fixed to EAP-TTLS.
Method
Timeout Timeout in seconds between re- 0 9999 10 sec Administrator
transmission requests
Retries Number of retries before giving up 0 9999 3 - Administrator

Confirm RADIUS Confirmation of the shared secret. The See the 245 characters N/A - Administrator
Authentication entry displays as asterisks. Password
(Shared) Secret Requirement
s section
General Security Settings

SETTING NAME DESCRIPTION MIN MAX DEFAULT UNITS MINIMUM
PERMISSION
Session Lockout Number of failed authentications before the 0 (lockout 99 3 - Administrator
device blocks subsequent authentication disabled)
attempts for the lockout period
Session Lockout The period in minutes that a user is prevented 0 (no period) 9999 3 min Administrator
Period from logging in after being locked out
Syslog Server IP The IP address of the target Syslog server to 0.0.0.0 223.255. 0.0.0.0 - Administrator
Address which all security events are transmitted 255.254
Syslog Server Port The UDP port number of the target syslog server 1 65535 514 - Administrator
Number to which all security events are transmitted
Device When enabled, local device authentication with Disabled Enabled Enabled - Administrator
Authentication roles is allowed. When disabled, the UR only
authenticates to the AAA server (RADIUS).
NOTE: Administrator and Supervisor (if still
enabled) remain active even after device
authentication is disabled. The only permission
for local Administrator is to re-enable device
authentication when device authentication is
disabled. To re-enable device authentication, the
Supervisor unlocks the device for setting
changes, and then the Administrator can re-
enable device authentication.
Firmware Locked Indicates if the device receives firmware
upgrades. If Yes and the firmware upgrade
No Yes Yes - Administrator
5
attempt is made, the device denies the upgrade
and displays an error message that the lock is
set. On each firmware upgrade, this setting goes
back to the default.
Factory Service When enabled (checkbox selected), the device Disabled Enabled Disabled - Supervisor
Mode can go into factory service mode. To enable, (Administrator
Supervisor authentication is necessary. when Supervisor
is disabled)
Restore to Defaults Sets the device to factory defaults No Yes No - Administrator
Supervisor role When enabled (checkbox selected), the Disabled Enabled Enabled - Administrator to
Supervisor role is active. To enable, enable and
Administrator authentication is necessary. When Supervisor to
disabled, the Supervisor role is inactive. To disable
disable, Supervisor authentication is necessary.
RADIUS user Ensure that RADIUS user names are not the See RADIUS See - Administrator
names same as local/device role names server RADIUS
documents server
documents
Password Local/device roles except for Observer are See the See the Change Text The specified role
password-protected. All RADIUS users are Password following Me1# and Administrator,
password-protected. Requirement password except for
s section section for Supervisor, where
requireme it is only itself
nts

Security Alarm Settings

SETTING NAME DESCRIPTION / DETAILS MIN MAX DEFAULT UNITS MINIMUM
PERMISSIONS
Failed A threshold number indicating when an alarm is 0 99 3 - Administrator
Authentications set off to indicate too many failed authentication (disabled)
attempts
Firmware lock A Boolean value indicating if the device can No Yes Yes - Administrator
receive a firmware upgrade. If Yes and a
firmware upgrade attempt is made, the device
alarm activates. If No the device alarm does not
activate. On each firmware upgrade this setting
goes back to the default.
Settings lock A Boolean value indicating if the device can No Yes Yes - Supervisor
accept any settings changes. If Yes and a (Administrator if
settings change attempt is made, the device Supervisor has
alarm activates. If No, the device alarm does not been disabled)
activate.
CYBERSENTRY SETTINGS THROUGH THE FRONT PANEL

PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  SECURITY
 SECURITY LOGIN: Range: Administrator, Engineer, Supervisor,

 None Operator, Factory (for factory use only), None
 CHANGE LOCAL
MESSAGE See below.
 PASSWORDS
 SESSION
 SETTINGS
5 MESSAGE
 RESTORE DEFAULTS
See page 5–19.

 SUPERVISORY

SYSLOG IP ADDRESS: Range: 0.0.0.0, 255.255.255.255
MESSAGE
0.0.0.0
SYSLOG PORT NUMBER: Range: 1 to 65535
MESSAGE
514
LOGIN: This setting is applicable for Device Authentication only. This setting allows a user to login with a specific role, see
descriptions below. For the Supervisor role, the “Supervisor Role” setting should be enabled.
Whenever a new role is logged in, the user is prompted with a display to enter a password. Passwords must obey the
requirements specified at the beginning of the chapter in the Password Requirements section.The UR device supports five
roles. All roles have their corresponding passwords. The Observer role is the only role that does not require a password.
The roles are defined as follows:
• Administrator: Complete read and write access to all settings and commands. This role does not allow concurrent
access. This role has an operand to indicate when it is logged on.
• Engineer: Complete read and write access to all settings and commands with the exception of configuring Security set-
tings and Firmware upgrades. This role does not allow concurrent access.
• Operator: The Operator has read/write access to all settings under the command menu/section. This role does not
exist offline.
• Supervisor: This is only an approving role. This role’s authentication commits setting changes submitted by Administra-
tor or Engineer. The Supervisor role authenticates to unlock the UR relay for setting changes and not approve changes
after the fact. Only Supervisor can set the Settings and Firmware Lock in the Security Settings. This role also has the
ability to forcefully logoff any other role and clear the security event log. This role can also be disabled, but only
through a Supervisor authentication. When this role is disabled its permissions are assigned to the Administrator role.

• Observer: This role has read only access to all UR settings. This role allows unlimited concurrent access but it has no
download access to any files on the device. Observer is the default role if no authentication has been done to the
device. This role displays as "None" on the front panel.
The Factory service role is not available and is intended for factory use only.
NOTE
Local Passwords
PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  SECURITY  CHANGE LOCAL PASSWORDS
 CHANGE LOCAL LOGIN: Range: 20 Alphanumeric Characters

 PASSWORDS None
NEW PASSWORD: Range: 20 Alphanumeric Characters
MESSAGE
CONFIRM PASSWORD: Range: 20 Alphanumeric Characters

MESSAGE
The Change Local Passwords menu is shown on the front panel and Enervista on a successful login of Administrator role.
The “login setting” in this menu is similar to the login setting described in PATH: SETTINGS > PRODUCT SETUP > SECU-
RITY except for the factory role.
Passwords are stored in text format. No encryption is applied.
Notes:
NOTE
• In Device Authentication mode, the Observer role does not have a password associated with it. In Server Authentica- 5
tion mode the Observer role requires a password.
• The default password is “ChangeMe1#”.
• Once the passwords are set, the Administrator with Supervisor approval can change the role associated password.
• In CyberSentry, password encryption is not supported.
Session Settings
PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  SECURITY  SESSION SETTINGS
 SESSION SESSION LOCKOUT: Range: 0 to 99

 SETTINGS 3
SESSION LOCKOUT Range: 0 to 9999 minutes
MESSAGE
PERIOD: 3 min
The following session settings are available.

• SESSION LOCKOUT: This setting specifies the number of failed authentications (the default is three and the maxi-
mum is 99) before the device blocks subsequent authentication attempts for the lockout period. A value of zero means
lockout is disabled.
• SESSION LOCKOUT PERIOD: This setting specifies the period of time in minutes of a lockout period (the default is
three and the maximum is 9999). A value of 0 means that there is no lockout period.
Restore Defaults
PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  SECURITY  RESTORE DEFAULTS
 RESTORE DEFAULTS LOAD FACTORY Range: Yes, No

 DEFAULTS: No
• LOAD FACTORY DEFAULTS: This setting is used to reset all the settings, communication and security passwords. An
Administrator role is used to change this setting and a Supervisor role (if not disabled) approves it.

Supervisory
PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  SECURITY SUPERVISORY
 SUPERVISORY DEVICE Range: Yes, No

 AUTHENTICATION:Yes
BYPASS ACCESS: Range: Local, Remote, Local and Remote, Disabled
MESSAGE
Disabled
LOCK RELAY: Range: Enabled, Disabled
MESSAGE
Disabled
FACTORY SERVICE: Range: Enabled, Disabled
MESSAGE
MODE: Disabled
 SELF TESTS
MESSAGE See below

SUPERVISOR ROLE: Range: Enabled, Disabled
MESSAGE
Disabled
SERIAL INACTIVITY Range: 1 to 9999 minutes
MESSAGE
TIMEOUT: 1 min
The Supervisory menu settings are available for Supervisor role only or if the Supervisor role is disabled then for the
Administrator role only.
DEVICE AUTHENTICATION: This setting is enabled by default, meaning "Yes" is selected. When enabled, Device Authen-
5 tication with roles is enabled. When this setting is disabled, the UR only authenticates to the AAA server (Radius). How-
ever, the Administrator and Supervisor (when enabled) remain active even after device authentication is disabled and their
only permission is to re-enable device authentication. To re-enable device authentication, the Supervisor unlocks the
device for setting changes, then the Administrator re-enables device authentication.
BYPASS ACCESS: The bypass security feature provides an easier access, with no authentication and encryption for those
special situations when this is considered safe. Only the Supervisor, or the Administrator when the Supervisor role is dis-
abled, can enable this feature.
MODE FRONT PANEL OR SERIAL (RS232, RS485) ETHERNET
Normal mode Authentication — Role Based Access Control (RBAC) Authentication — RBAC and passwords encrypted
and passwords in clear SSH tunneling
Bypass access mode No passwords for allowed RBAC levels No passwords for allowed RBAC levels
No SSH tunneling
The bypass options are as follows:

• Local — Bypasses authentication for push buttons, keypad, RS232, and RS485
• Remote — Bypasses authentication for Ethernet
• Local and Remote — Bypasses authentication for push buttons, keypad, RS232, RS485, and Ethernet
When CyberSentry is enabled, Modbus communications over Ethernet is encrypted, which is not always tolerated by
SCADA systems. The UR has the Bypass Access feature for such situations, which allows unencrypted Modbus over
Ethernet. Setting it to "Remote" ensures no authentication is required over Ethernet and Modbus communication is unen-
crypted. Only a Supervisor or Administrator (if Supervisor role is disabled) can enable this feature. Note that other protocols
(DNP, 101, 103, 104, EGD) are not encrypted, and they are good communications options for SCADA systems when
CyberSentry is enabled.
LOCK RELAY: This setting uses a Boolean value (Enable/Disable) to indicate if the device accepts setting changes and
whether the device can receive a firmware upgrade. This setting can be changed only by the Supervisor role, if it is enabled
or by the Administrator if the Supervisor role is disabled. The Supervisor role enables this setting for the relay to start
accepting setting changes or command changes or firmware upgrade. After all the setting changes are applied or com-
mands executed, the Supervisor disables to lock setting changes.

Example: If this setting is "Yes" and an attempt is made to change settings or upgrade the firmware, the UR device denies
the setting changes and denies upgrading the firmware. If this setting is "No", the UR device accepts setting changes and
firmware upgrade.
This role is disabled by default.
FACTORY SERVICE MODE: When enabled (meaning "Yes" is selected) the device can go into factory service mode. For
this setting to become enabled a Supervisor authentication is necessary. The default value is Disabled.
SUPERVISOR ROLE: When enabled (meaning "Yes" is selected) the Supervisor role is active. When "No" is selected this
role is disabled. To disabled this setting a Supervisor authentication is necessary. If disabled, the Supervisor role is not
allowed to log on. In this case the Administrator can change the settings under the Supervisory menu.
If enabled, Supervisor authentication is required to change the settings in the Supervisory menu. If the Supervisor disables
his role after authentication, the Supervisor session remains valid until he switches to another role using MMI or until he
ends the current Supervisor session if using communications.
This role is disabled by default.
SERIAL INACTIVITY TIMEOUT: The role logged via a serial port is auto logged off after the Serial Inactivity timer times
out. A separate timer is maintained for RS232 and RS485 connections. The default value is 1 minute.
a) SELF TESTS
PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  SECURITY SUPERVISORY SELF TESTS
 SELF TESTS  FAILED

See below
  AUTHENTICATE
FIRMWARE LOCK: Range: Enabled, Disabled
MESSAGE
Enabled
SETTINGS LOCK: Range: Enabled, Disabled 5
MESSAGE
Enabled
FAILED AUTHENTICATE — When Enabled, the number of failed authentications is compared with the Session Lockout
threshold. When the Session Lockout threshold is exceeded, a minor alarm indication comes up. Operand is AUTHENTICA-
TION FAIL.
FIRMWARE LOCK — When Enabled, any firmware upgrade attempt brings up a minor self-test alarm. Operand is UNAUTH
FW ATTEMPT.
SETTINGS LOCK — When Enabled, an unauthorized write attempt to a setting for a given role activates a minor self test
alarm. Operand is UNAUTH SETTING WRITE.
PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  SECURITY SUPERVISORY SELF TESTS FAILED AUTHENTICATE
 FAILED FAILED AUTHENTICATE: Range: Enabled, Disabled

 AUTHENTICATE Enabled
CYBERSENTRY SETUP
When first using CyberSentry security, use the following procedure for set up.
1. Log in to the relay as Administrator by using the Value keys on the front panel to enter the default password
"ChangeMe1#". Note that the "Lock relay" setting needs to be disabled in the Security > Supervisory menu. When
this setting is disabled, configuration and firmware upgrade are possible. By default, this setting is disabled.
2. Enable the Supervisor role if you have a need for it.
3. Make any required changes in configuration, such as setting a valid IP address for communication over Ethernet.
4. Log out of the Administrator account by choosing None.
Next, device or server authentication can be chosen on the login screen, but the choice is available only in EnerVista. Use
device authentication to log in using the five pre-configured roles (Administrator, Supervisor, Engineer, Operator,
Observer). When using a serial connection, only device authentication is supported. When server authentication is
required, characteristics for communication with a RADIUS server must be configured. This is possible only in the EnerV-

ista software. The RADIUS server itself also must be configured. The appendix called RADIUS Server gives an example of
how to setup a simple RADIUS server. Once both the RADIUS server and the parameters for connecting UR to the server
have been configured, you can choose server authentication on the login screen of EnerVista.
The use of CyberSentry for devices communicating through an Ethernet-to-RS485 gateway is not
NOTICE supported. Because these gateways do not support the secure protocols necessary to communicate
with such devices, the connection cannot be established. Use the device as a non-CyberSentry
device.
Users logged in through the front panel are not timed out and cannot be forcefully logged out by a
NOTICE supervisor. Roles logged in through the front panel that do no allow multiple instances (Administrator,
Supervisor, Engineer, Operator) must switch to None (equivalent to a logout) when they are done in
order to log out.
For all user roles except Observer, only one instance can be logged in at one time, for both login by
NOTICE front panel and software.
To configure server authentication:

1. In the EnerVista software, choose device authentication and log in as Administrator.
2. Configure the following RADIUS server parameters: IP address, authentication port, shared secret, and vendor ID.
3. On the RADIUS server, configure the user accounts. Do not use the five pre-defined roles as user names (Administra-
tor, Supervisor, Engineer, Operator, Observer) in the RADIUS server. If you do, the UR relay automatically provides the
authentication from the device.
4. In the EnerVista software, choose server authentication and log in using the user name and password configured on
5 5.
the RADIUS server for server authentication login.
After making any required changes, log out.
When changing settings offline, ensure that only settings permitted by the role that performs the set-
NOTICE tings download are changed because only those changes are applied.
Pushbuttons (both user-control buttons and user-programmable buttons) located on the front panel can be pressed by an
Administrator or Engineer role. This also applies to the reset button, which resets targets, where targets are errors dis-
played on the front panel or the Targets panel of the EnerVista software. The reset button has special behavior in that it
allows these two roles to press it even when they are logged in through the RS232 port and not through the front panel.
To reset the security event log and self-test operands:
1. Log in as Supervisor (if the role is enabled) or Administrator (if the Supervisor role is disabled) and execute a clear
security command under Commands > Security > Clear Security.
b) SYSLOG FORMAT
System logs are produced with the CyberSentry option. The format is as follows.
Security log Event Number Date & Username IP address Role Activity Value
Timestamp
Event Number — Event identification number (index)

Date & Timestamp — UTC date and time
Username — 255 chars maximum, but in the security log it is truncated to 20 characters
IP address — Device IP address

Role — 16 bit unsigned, of type format F617

ENUMERATION ROLE
0 None
1 Administrator
2 Supervisor
3 Engineer
4 Operator
5 Factory
Activity Value — 16 bit unsigned

ENUMERATION DESCRIPTION
1 Authentication Failed
2 User Lockout
3 FW Upgrade
4 FW Lock
5 Settings Lock
6 Settings Change. Because this can fill the entire event log, it is supported by the
already existing Settings_Change.log file. This event is not required.
7 Clear Oscillography command
8 Clear Data Logger command (not applicable to all UR products)
9 Clear Demand Records command (not applicable to all UR products)
10 Clear Energy command (not applicable to all UR products)
11 Clear Unauthorized Access command 5
12 Clear Teleprotection Counters command (not applicable to all UR products)
13 Clear All Relay Records command
14 Role Log in
15 Role Log off
The following events are recorded in the syslog.

Table 5–3: SYSTEM EVENTS RECORDED
EVENT SEVERITY DESCRIPTION
FAILED_AUTH, ORIGIN, Warning (4) A failed authentication with origin information (username and IP:MAC
TIMESTAMP address), a time stamp in UTC time when it occurred
AUTH_LOCKOUT, ORIGIN, Error (3) An authentication lockout has occurred because of too many failed
TIMESTAMP authentication attempts
FIRMWARE_UPGD, ORIGIN, Warning (4) Indicates that a change of firmware has occurred
TIMESTAMP
FIRMWARE_LOCK, ORIGIN, Critical (1) An attempt was made to change firmware while the firmware lock was
TIMESTAMP enabled
SETTING_CHG, ORIGIN, Notice (5) Indicates setting change(s)
TIMESTAMP
SETTING_LOCK, ORIGIN, Critical (1) An attempt was made to change settings while the settings lock was enabled
TIMESTAMP
LOGIN, ORIGIN, TIMESTAMP Warning (4) Indicates when a certain role logged in
LOGOUT, ORIGIN, TIMESTAMP Notice (5) Indicates when a certain role logged out or timed out
CLEAR_OSCILLOGRAPHY Notice (5) Clear oscillography command was issued
CLEAR_DATA_LOGGER Notice (5) Clear data logger command was issued
CLEAR_DEMAND_RECS Notice (5) Clear demand records command was issued
CLEAR_ENERGY Notice (5) Clear energy command was issued
RESET_UNAUTH_ACCESS Warning (4) Reset Unauthorized access command was issued
CLEAR_TELEPROTECTION_CNT Notice (5) Clear teleprotection counters command was issued
CLEAR_ALL_RECS Warning (4) Clear all records command was issued

5.2.2 DISPLAY PROPERTIES
PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  DISPLAY PROPERTIES
 DISPLAY LANGUAGE: Range: English; English, French; English, Russian;

 PROPERTIES English English, Chinese; English, German
(range dependent on order code)
FLASH MESSAGE Range: 0.5 to 10.0 s in steps of 0.1
MESSAGE
TIME: 1.0 s
DEFAULT MESSAGE Range: 10 to 900 s in steps of 1
MESSAGE
TIMEOUT: 300 s
DEFAULT MESSAGE Range: 25%, 50%, 75%, 100%
MESSAGE Visible when a VFD is installed
INTENSITY: 25 %
SCREEN SAVER Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE Visible when an LCD is installed
FEATURE: Disabled
SCREEN SAVER WAIT Range: 1 to 65535 min. in steps of 1
MESSAGE Visible when an LCD is installed
TIME: 30 min
CURRENT CUT-OFF Range: 0.002 to 0.020 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
LEVEL: 0.020 pu
VOLTAGE CUT-OFF Range: 0.1 to 1.0 V secondary in steps of 0.1
MESSAGE
LEVEL: 1.0 V
5 Some relay messaging characteristics can be modified to suit different situations using the display properties settings.
• LANGUAGE: This setting selects the language used to display settings, actual values, and targets. The setting dis-
plays when a language other than English was purchased, and the range depends on the order code of the relay.
• FLASH MESSAGE TIME: Flash messages are status, warning, error, or information messages displayed for several
seconds in response to certain key presses during setting programming. These messages override any normal mes-
sages. The duration of a flash message on the display can be changed to accommodate different reading rates.
• DEFAULT MESSAGE TIMEOUT: If the keypad is inactive for a period of time, the relay automatically reverts to a
default message. The inactivity time is modified via this setting to ensure messages remain on the screen long enough
during programming or reading of actual values.
• DEFAULT MESSAGE INTENSITY: To extend phosphor life in the vacuum fluorescent display, the brightness can be
attenuated during default message display. During keypad interrogation, the display always operates at full brightness.
• SCREEN SAVER FEATURE and SCREEN SAVER WAIT TIME: These settings are only visible if the B30 has a liquid
crystal display (LCD) and control its backlighting. When the SCREEN SAVER FEATURE is “Enabled”, the LCD backlighting
is turned off after the DEFAULT MESSAGE TIMEOUT followed by the SCREEN SAVER WAIT TIME, providing that no keys
have been pressed and no target messages are active. When a keypress occurs or a target becomes active, the LCD
backlighting is turned on.
• CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL: This setting modifies the current cut-off threshold. Very low currents (1 to 2% of the
rated value) are very susceptible to noise. Some customers prefer very low currents to display as zero, while others
prefer the current be displayed even when the value reflects noise rather than the actual signal. The B30 applies a cut-
off value to the magnitudes and angles of the measured currents. If the magnitude is below the cut-off level, it is substi-
tuted with zero. This applies to phase and ground current phasors as well as true RMS values and symmetrical compo-
nents. The cut-off operation applies to quantities used for metering, protection, and control, as well as those used by
communications protocols. Note that the cut-off level for the sensitive ground input is 10 times lower that the CURRENT
CUT-OFF LEVEL setting value. Raw current samples available via oscillography are not subject to cut-off.
• VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL: This setting modifies the voltage cut-off threshold. Very low secondary voltage measure-
ments (at the fractional volt level) can be affected by noise. Some customers prefer these low voltages to be displayed
as zero, while others prefer the voltage to be displayed even when the value reflects noise rather than the actual sig-
nal. The B30 applies a cut-off value to the magnitudes and angles of the measured voltages. If the magnitude is below
the cut-off level, it is substituted with zero. This operation applies to phase and auxiliary voltages, and symmetrical

components. The cut-off operation applies to quantities used for metering, protection, and control, as well as those
used by communications protocols. Raw samples of the voltages available via oscillography are not subject cut-off.
Lower the VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL and CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL with care as the relay accepts lower sig-
nals as valid measurements. Unless dictated otherwise by a specific application, the default settings of “0.02 pu” for
NOTE
CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL and “1.0 V” for VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL are recommended.
5.2.3 CLEAR RELAY RECORDS
PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  CLEAR RELAY RECORDS
 CLEAR RELAY CLEAR USER REPORTS: Range: FlexLogic operand

 RECORDS Off
CLEAR EVENT RECORDS: Range: FlexLogic operand
MESSAGE
Off
CLEAR OSCILLOGRAPHY? Range: FlexLogic operand
MESSAGE
No
RESET UNAUTH ACCESS: Range: FlexLogic operand
MESSAGE
Off
CLEAR DIR I/O STATS: Range: FlexLogic operand.
MESSAGE Valid only for units with Direct I/O module.
Off
Selected records can be cleared from user-programmable conditions with FlexLogic operands. Assigning user-programma-
ble pushbuttons to clear specific records are typical applications for these commands. Since the B30 responds to rising
edges of the configured FlexLogic operands, they must be asserted for at least 50 ms to take effect. 5
Clearing records with user-programmable operands is not protected by the command password. However, user-program-
mable pushbuttons are protected by the command password. Thus, if they are used to clear records, the user-programma-
ble pushbuttons can provide extra security if required.
For example, to assign user-programmable pushbutton 1 to clear demand records, the following settings should be applied.
1. Assign the clear demand function to pushbutton 1 by making the following change in the SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP
 CLEAR RELAY RECORDS menu:
CLEAR DEMAND: “PUSHBUTTON 1 ON”
2. Set the properties for user-programmable pushbutton 1 by making the following changes in the SETTINGS  PRODUCT
SETUP  USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS  USER PUSHBUTTON 1 menu:
PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION: “Self-reset”
PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT TIME: “0.20 s”

5.2.4 COMMUNICATIONS
a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS
 COMMUNICATIONS  SERIAL PORTS

See page 5–35.
 
 NETWORK

 ROUTING

 MODBUS PROTOCOL

PROTOCOL:
MESSAGE Range: DNP 3.0, IEC 60870-5-104, IEC 60870-5-103
DNP 3.0
 DNP PROTOCOL

8
 DNP / IEC104
 POINT LISTS
 IEC 61850 PROTOCOL

5 MESSAGE
 WEB SERVER
 HTTP PROTOCOL
See page 5–55.
 TFTP PROTOCOL

 IEC 60870-5-104
 PROTOCOL
 EGD PROTOCOL

 IEC103
 PROTOCOL
b) SERIAL PORTS
PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  SERIAL PORTS
 SERIAL PORTS RS485 COM2 BAUD RATE: Range: 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 14400, 19200,
 19200 28800, 33600, 38400, 57600, 115200 bit/s
RS485 COM2 PARITY: Range: None, Odd, Even

MESSAGE
Even
RS485 COM2 RESPONSE Range: 0 to 1000 ms in steps of 10
MESSAGE
MIN TIME: 0 ms
RS485 COM2 BAUD RATE and PARITY: The B30 is equipped with two independent serial communication ports. The faceplate
RS232 port is intended for local use and is fixed at 19200 bit/s baud and even parity. The rear COM2 port is RS485 and has
settings for baud rate and parity. It is important that these parameters agree with the settings used on the computer or other
equipment that is connected to these ports. Any of these ports can be connected to a computer running EnerVista UR
Setup. This software can download and upload setting files, view measured parameters, and upgrade the relay firmware. A
maximum of 32 relays can be daisy-chained and connected to a DCS, PLC, or computer using the RS485 ports. If IEC
60870-103 is chosen as the protocol, valid baud rates are 9600 and 19200 bit/s, and valid parity is Even.

RS485 COM2 RESPONSE MIN TIME: This setting specifies the minimum time before the rear RS485 port transmits after receiv-
ing data from a host. This feature allows operation with hosts that hold the RS485 transmitter active for some time after
each transmission.
c) ETHERNET NETWORK TOPOLOGY

The B30 has three Ethernet ports. Each Ethernet port must belong to a different network or subnetwork. Configure the IP
address and subnet to ensure that each port meets this requirement. Two subnets are different when the bitwise AND oper-
ation performed between their respective IP address and mask produces a different result. Communication becomes
unpredictable when more than one port is configured to the same subnet.
Example 1
IP1/Mask1: 10.1.1.2/255.255.255.0 (where LAN 1 is 10.1.1.x/255.255.255.0)
IP2/Mask2: 10.2.1.2/255.255.255.0 (where LAN2 is 10.2.1.x/255.255.255.0)
IP3/Mask3: 10.3.1.2/255.255.255.0 (where LAN3 is 10.3.1.x/255.255.255.0)
Example 2
IP1/Mask1: 10.1.1.2/255.0.0.0 (where LAN1 is 10.x.x.x/255.0.0.0)
Example 3 — Incorrect
IP1/Mask1: 10.1.1.2/255.0.0.0
IP2/Mask2: 10.2.1.2/255.0.0.0
IP3/Mask3: 10.3.1.2/255.0.0.0 5
This example is incorrect because the mask of 255.0.0.0 used for the three IP addresses makes them belong to the same
network of 10.x.x.x.
Single LAN, No Redundancy
The topology shown in the following figure allows communications to SCADA, local configuration/monitoring through
EnerVista, and access to the public network shared on the same LAN. No redundancy is provided.
Figure 5–4: NETWORK CONFIGURATION FOR SINGLE LAN
Public Network
SCADA
EnerVista Software
LAN1
ML3000
P1
IP1/ P2 P3
MAC1
UR
859708A2.vsd

Multiple LANS, with Redundancy

The topology in the following figure provides local configuration/monitoring through EnerVista software and access to the
public network shared on LAN1, to which port 1 (P1) is connected. There is no redundancy provided on LAN1. Communica-
tions to SCADA is provided through LAN2. P2 and P3 are connected to LAN2, where P2 is the primary channel and P3 is
the redundant channel. In this configuration, P3 uses the IP and MAC address of P2.
Figure 5–5: MULTIPLE LANS, WITH REDUNDANCY
Public Network
SCADA
EnerVista Software
LAN1 LAN2
LAN2
ML3000
ML3000 ML3000
P1 P2 P3
IP1/ IP2/ IP2/
5 MAC1 MAC2
Redundancy mode
MAC2
UR
859709A4.vsd
Multiple LANS, No Redundancy

The following topology provides local configuration/monitoring through EnerVista software on LAN1, to which port 1 (P1) is
connected, access to the public network on LAN2, to which port 2 (P2) is connected and communications with SCADA on
LAN3, to which port 3 (P3) is connected. There is no redundancy.
Figure 5–6: MULTIPLE LANS, NO REDUNDANCY
Public Network
SCADA
EnerVista Software
LAN1 LAN2
LAN3
ML3000
ML3000 ML3000
P1 P2 P3
IP1/ IP2/ IP3/
MAC1 MAC2 MAC3
UR
859710A2.vsd

d) NETWORK
As outlined in the previous section, when using more than one Ethernet port, configure each to belong to a different net-
work or subnet using the IP addresses and mask. Configure the network IP and subnet settings before configuring the rout-
ing settings.
To obtain a list of all port numbers used, for example for audit purposes, contact GE technical support with substantiating
information, such as the serial number and order code of your device.
PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  NETWORK 1(3)
 NETWORK PORT 1 PRT1 IP ADDRESS: Range: Standard IPV4 address format

 127.0.0.1
PRT1 SUBNET IP MASK: Range: Standard IPV4 address format
MESSAGE
255.0.0.0
PRT1 GOOSE ENABLED: Range: Enabled, Disabled
MESSAGE
Enabled

 127.0.0.1
MESSAGE
255.0.0.0
PRT2 REDUNDANCY: Range: None, Failover, PRP

MESSAGE None, Failover (if no PRP license)
None
5
PRT2 PRP MCST ADDR: Range: 01-15-4E-00-01-00 to 01-15-4E-00-01-FF
MESSAGE
01-15-4E-00-01-00
MESSAGE
Enabled

 127.0.0.1
MESSAGE
255.0.0.0
MESSAGE
Enabled
The IP addresses are used with the DNP, Modbus/TCP, IEC 61580, IEC 60870-5-104, TFTP, HTTP, and PRP protocols.
PRP is explained in its own section later.
PRT1 (2 OR 3) IP ADDRESS: This setting sets the ports IPv4 address in standard IPV4 format. This setting is valid on port 3 if
port 2 REDUNDANCY is set to None.
PRT1 (2 OR 3) SUBNET MASK: This setting sets the ports IPv4 subnet mask in standard IPV4 format. This setting is valid on
port 3 if port 2 REDUNDANCY is set to None.
PRT1 (2 OR 3) GOOSE ENABLED: This setting enables/disables Goose on the respective port. By default Goose is enabled.
PRT2 REDUNDANCY determines if ports 2 and 3 operate in redundant or independent mode. If a license for PRP was pur-
chased, the options are None, Failover, and PRP. If a license for PRP was not purchased, the available options are None
and Failover. In non-redundant mode (REDUNDANCY set to None), ports 2 and 3 operate independently with their own MAC,
IP, and mask addresses. If REDUNDANCY is set to Failover, the operation of ports 2 and 3 is as follows:
• Ports 2 and 3 use the port 2 MAC address, IP address, and mask
• The configuration fields for IP address and mask on port 3 are hidden

• Port 3 is in standby mode and does not actively communicate on the Ethernet network but monitors its link to the Mul-
tilink switch. If port 2 detects a problem with the link, communications is switched to Port 3. Port 3 is, in effect, acting as
a redundant or backup link to the network for port 2. Once port 2 detects that the link between itself and the switch is
good and that communication is healthy for five minutes, then switching back to port 2 is performed. The delay in
switching back ensures that rebooted switching devices connected to the B30, which signal their ports as active prior
to being completely functional, have time to completely initialize themselves and become active. Once port 2 is active
again, port 3 returns to standby mode.
If REDUNDANCY is set to PRP, the operation of ports 2 and 3 is as follows:
• Ports 2 and 3 use the port 2 MAC address, IP address, and mask
• The configuration fields for IP address and mask on port 3 are overwritten with those from port 2. This is visible on the
front panel but not displayed in the EnerVista software.
• Port 2 MCST ADDRESS field is visible
• The port 2 PTP function still uses only port 2 and the port 3 PTP function still uses only port 3. The relay still synchro-
nizes to whichever port has the best master. When ports 2 and 3 see the same master, as is typically the case for PRP
networks, the port with the better connectivity is used.
The two ports must be connected to completely independent LANS with no single point of failure, such as common
power supplies that feed switches on both LANS.
NOTE
For this setting change to take effect, restart the unit.

PRT2 PRP MCST ADDR: This setting allows the user to change the multicast address used by the PRP supervision frames.
This setting is available if REDUNDANCY is set to PRP. All devices in the same PRP network need to have the same multi-
cast address. Choose an address that does not conflict with another multicast protocol.
5 e) FAR-END FAULT INDICATION (FEFI)
Since 100BASE-FX does not support Auto-Negotiation, a Far-End Fault Indication (FEFI) feature is included in UR 7 that
allows for detection of link failures.
The purpose of the Far-End Fault feature is to allow the stations on both ends of a pair of fibers to be informed when there
is a problem with one of the fibers. Without the Far-End Fault feature, it is impossible for a fiber interface to detect a prob-
lem that affects only its transmit fiber.
When the Far-End Fault feature is supported, a loss of receive signal (link) causes the transmitter to generate a Far-End
Fault pattern in order to inform the device at the far end of the fiber pair that a fault has occurred.
When the local receiver again detects a signal, the local transmitter automatically returns to normal operation.
If a Far-End Fault pattern is received by a fiber interface that supports the Far-End Fault feature and it is enabled, it reacts
by dropping the link as if there were no signal at all.
If the receiving interface does not support the Far-End Fault feature or has it disabled, an incoming Far-End Fault pattern is
ignored.
It is strongly recommended to have switches used at substation automation support the Far-End Fault feature, especially
when UR 7 redundancy Failover is selected for redundancy purpose.
f) PARALLEL REDUNDANCY PROTOCOL (PRP)

The Parallel Redundancy Protocol (PRP) defines a redundancy protocol for high availability in substation automation net-
works. It applies to networks based on Ethernet technology (ISO/IEC 8802-3) and is based on the second edition (July
2012) of the IEC 62439-3, clause 4.
PRP is designed to provide seamless recovery in case of a single failure in the network, by using a combination of LAN
duplication and frame duplication technique. Identical frames are sent on two completely independent networks that con-
nect source and destination. Under normal circumstances both frames reach the destination and one of them is sent up the
OSI stack to the destination application, while the second one is discarded. If an error occurs in one of the networks and

traffic is prevented from flowing on that path, connectivity is still provided through the other network to ensure continuous
communication. Take care when designing the two LANs, so that no single point of failure (such as a common power sup-
ply) is encountered, as such scenarios can bring down both LANs simultaneously.
Figure 5–7: EXAMPLE OF PARALLEL REDUNDANT NETWORK
PRP uses specialized nodes called doubly attached nodes (DANPs) for handling the duplicated frames. DANPs devices
have an additional module, called Link Redundancy Entity (LRE). LRE is responsible for duplicating frames and adding the
specific PRP trailer when sending the frames out on the LAN, as well as making decisions on received frames as to which
one is sent up the OSI stack to the application layer and which one is discarded. LRE is responsible for making PRP trans-
parent to the higher layers of the stack. There is a second type of specialized device used in PRP networks, called RedBox,
with the role of connecting Single Attached Nodes (SANs) to a redundant network.
UR relays implement only the DANP functionality. The RedBox functionality is not implemented.
The original standard IEC 62439-3 (2010) was amended to align PRP with the High-availability Seamless Redundancy
(HSR) protocol. To achieve this, the original PRP was modified at the cost of losing compatibility with the PRP 2010 ver-
sion. The revised standard IEC 62439-3 (2012) is commonly referred to as PRP-1, while the original standard is PRP-0. 5
The UR relays support only PRP-1.
The relay implements PRP on two of its Ethernet ports, specifically Port 2 and 3 of the CPU module. Use the previous sec-
tion (network port configuration) to configure PRP.
PRP is purchased as a separate option. If purchased (valid order code), PRP can be enabled in configuration through a
setting available on the network configuration menu, REDUNDANCY, which already has the capability of enabling failover
redundancy. The options on this setting must be changed to accommodate two types of redundancy: failover and PRP.
When REDUNDANCY is set to either failover or PRP, the ports dedicated for PRP (Port 2 and 3) operate in redundant
mode. In this mode, Port 3 uses the Mac, IP address, and mask of Port 2.
g) ROUTING
PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  ROUTING 1(6)
 IPV4 ROUTING  IPV4 DEFAULT ROUTE

 TABLE 
 IPV4 STATIC
MESSAGE
 NETWORK ROUTE 1
↓
 IPV4 STATIC
MESSAGE
 NETWORK ROUTE 6
A default route and a maximum number of six static routes can be configured.
The default route is used as the last choice when no other route towards a given destination is found.
 IPV4 DEFAULT ROUTE GATEWAY ADDRESS Range: Standard IPV4 unicast address format
 127.0.0.1

 IPV4 STATIC RT1 DESTINATION: Range: Standard IPV4 address format

 NETWORK ROUTE 1 127.0.0.1
RT1 NET MASK: Range: Standard IPV4 subnet mask format
MESSAGE
255.0.0.0
RT1 GATEWAY: Range: Standard IPV4 unicast address format
MESSAGE
127.0.0.1
Configure the network IP and subnet settings before configuring the routing settings.
ADDING AND DELETING STATIC ROUTES
Host routes are not supported at present.
The routing table configuration is available on the serial port and front panel. This is a deliberate decision, to avoid loss of
connectivity when remotely configuring the UR.
By default the value of the destination field is 127.0.0.1 for all static routes (1 to 6). This is equivalent to saying that the
static routes are not configured. When the destination address is 127.0.0.1, the mask and gateway must be also kept on
default values.
By default, the value of the route gateway address is 127.0.0.1. This means the default route is not configured.
To add a route:
1. Use any of the static network route entries numbered 1 to 6 to configure a static network route. Once a route destina-
tion is configured for any of the entries 1 to 6, that entry becomes a static route and it must meet all the rules listed in
the next section, General Conditions to be Satisfied by Static Routes.
5 2. To configure the default route, enter a default gateway address. Once a default gateway address is configured, it must
be validated against condition 2 of the General Conditions to be Satisfied by Static Routes.
To delete a route:
1. Replace the route destination with the default loopback address (127.0.0.1). When deleting a route, the mask and
gateway must be also brought back to default values.
2. Delete the default route by replacing the default gateway with the default value 127.0.0.1.
GENERAL CONDITIONS TO BE SATISFIED BY STATIC ROUTES
The following rules are validated internally:
• The route mask has IP mask format. In binary this needs to be a set of contiguous bits of 1 from left to right, followed
by one or more contiguous bits of 0.
• The route destination and mask must match. This can be verified by checking that
RtDestination and RtMask = RtDestination
Example of good configuration: RtDestination = 10.1.1.0; Rt Mask = 255.255.255.0
Example of bad configuration: RtDestination = 10.1.1.1; Rt Mask = 255.255.255.0
The following rules must be observed when you configure static routes:
• The route destination must not be a connected network
• The route gateway must be on a connected network. This rule applies to the gateway address of the default route as
well. This can be verified by checking that:
(RtGwy & Prt1Mask) == (Prt1IP & Prt1Mask) || (RtGwy & Prt2Mask) == (Prt2IP & Prt2Mask) || (RtGwy & Prt3Mask) ==
(Prt3IP & Prt3Mask)
where
& is the bitwise-AND operator
== is the equality operator
|| is the logical OR operator

ROUTING BEHAVIOR COMPARED TO PREVIOUS RELEASES

Prior to release 7.10, the UR did not have an explicit manner of configuring routes. The only available route was the default
route configured as part of the network settings (port gateway IP address). This limited the ability to route to specific desti-
nations, particularly if these destinations were reachable through a different interface than the one on which the default
gateway was.
Starting with UR 7.10, up to six static network routes can be configured in addition to a default route. The default route con-
figuration was also moved from the network settings into the routing section.
The figure shows an example of topology that benefits from the addition of static routes.
Figure 5–8: USING STATIC ROUTES
Router1
Public network
.1
Router2
10.1.2.0/24 10.1.3.0/24
10.1.1.0/24
ML3000 ML3000 .1
EnerVista Software
P1 P2 P3
IP1/ IP2/ IP3/
.2 .2 MAC2 MAC3
MAC1
UR 5
859714A1.vsd
In the figure, the UR connects through the following two Ethernet ports:
• Port 1 (IP address 10.1.1.2) connects the UR to LAN 10.1.1.0/24 and to the Internet through Router1. Router 1 has an
interface on 10.1.1.0/24 and the IP address of this interface is 10.1.1.1.
• Port 2 (IP address 10.1.2.2) connects the UR to LAN 10.1.2.0/24 and to the EnerVista software through Router 2.
Router 2 has an interface on 10.1.2.0/24 and the IP address of this interface is 10.1.2.1.
The configuration before release 7.10 was as follows:
• PRT1 IP ADDRESS = 10.1.1.2
PRT1 SUBNET IP MASK = 255.255.255.0
PRT1 GWY IP ADDRESS = 10.1.1.1
PRT2 IP ADDRESS = 10.1.2.2
The behavior before release 7.10 was as follows. When sending packets to EnerVista, the UR noticed that the destination
was not on a connected network and it tried to find a route to destination. Since the default route was the only route it knew,
it used it. Yet EnerVista was on a private network, which was not reachable through Router 1. Hence a destination unreach-
able message was received from the router.
The configuration starting release 7.10 is as follows:
• PRT1 IP ADDRESS = 10.1.1.2
PRT2 IP ADDRESS = 10.1.2.2
IPV4 DEFAULT ROUTE: GATEWAY ADDRESS = 10.1.1.1
STATIC NETWORK ROUTE 1: RT1 DESTINATION = 10.1.3.0/24; RT1 NET MASK = 255.255.255.0; and RT1 GATE-
WAY = 10.1.2.1

The behavior since release 7.10 is as follows. There is one added static network route to the destination 10.1.3.0/24, where
a computer running EnerVista is located. This static route uses a different gateway (10.1.2.1) than the default route. This
gateway is the address of Router 2, which has knowledge about 10.1.3.0 and is able to route packets coming from UR and
destined to EnerVista.
SHOW ROUTES AND ARP TABLES
This feature is available on the Web interface, where the main menu contains an additional Communications menu and two
submenus:
• Routing Table
• ARP Table
The tables outline the information displayed when the two submenus are selected.
Table 5–4: ROUTING TABLE INFORMATION
FIELD DESCRIPTION
Destination The IP address of the remote network to which this route points
Mask The network mask for the destination
Gateway The IP address of the next router to the remote network
Interface Interface through which the specified network can be reached
Table 5–5: IP ARP INFORMATION

FIELD DESCRIPTION
IP Address The network address that corresponds to Hardware Address
Age (min) Age, in minutes, of the cache entry. A hyphen (-) means the address is local.
5 Hardware Address
Type
LAN hardware address, a MAC address that corresponds to network address
Dynamic or Static
Interface Interface to which this address mapping has been assigned
h) MODBUS PROTOCOL
PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  MODBUS PROTOCOL
 MODBUS PROTOCOL MODBUS SLAVE Range: 0 to 254 in steps of 1

 ADDRESS: 254
MODBUS TCP PORT Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
NUMBER: 502
The serial communication ports utilize the Modbus protocol, unless the port is configured for DNP or IEC 60870-5-103
operation. This allows the EnerVista UR Setup software to be used on the port. The UR operates as a Modbus slave device
only.
When using Modbus protocol on the RS232 port, the B30 responds regardless of the MODBUS SLAVE ADDRESS pro-
grammed. For the RS485 port, each device on the serial bus must have a unique slave address from 1 to 254. Address 0
and addresses from 248 and up are reserved by the Modbus protocol specification, and so their use here is not recom-
mended. Address 0 is the broadcast address that all Modbus slave devices listen to. When MODBUS SLAVE ADDRESS is set
to 0, the UR accepts broadcast messages, but in compliance with protocol specifications for broadcast messages, never
replies. Addresses do not have to be sequential, but no two devices can have the same address or conflicts resulting in
errors occur. Generally, each device added to the link should use the next higher address starting at 1. When using Modbus
TCP/IP, the client must use the programmed MODBUS SLAVE ADDRESS value in the Unit Identifier field. See Appendix B for
more information on the Modbus protocol.
Modbus over TCP/IP can also be used on any of the Ethernet ports. The listening TCP port 502 is reserved for Modbus
communications, and only in exceptional cases when MODBUS TCP PORT NUMBER is set to any other port. The MODBUS TCP
PORT NUMBER setting sets the TCP port used by Modbus on Ethernet. A MODBUS TCP PORT NUMBER of 0 disables Modbus
over TCP/IP, meaning closes the Modbus TCP port. When it is set to 0, use the front panel or serial port to communicate
with the relay.

When a 0 value is involved in a change, the changes to the MODBUS TCP PORT NUMBER setting take effect when the
B30 is restarted.
NOTE
Do not set more than one protocol to the same TCP/UDP port number, as this results in unreliable operation of
those protocols.
i) PROTOCOL
The Protocol menu setting allows selection of one of the following protocols: DNP 3.0, IEC60870-104, or IEC60870-103.
For any change to take effect, restart the unit.
The table shows which of DNP 3.0, IEC 60870-5-104, IEC 60870-5-103, and IEC 61850 protocols are operational on the
RS232, RS485, and Ethernet ports. It shows all possible combinations of the PROTOCOL and DNP CHANNEL 1(2) PORT set-
tings.
Table 5–6: PORT AND PROTOCOL COMBINATIONS
PROTOCOL DNP CHANNEL 1(2) PORT RS232 RS485 ETHERNET
SETTING SETTINGS
DNP Channel 1: Eth TCP Modbus Modbus DNP, Modbus, IEC 61850
Channel 2: Eth TCP
Channel 1: Eth TCP Modbus Modbus DNP, Modbus, IEC 61850
Channel 2: none
Channel 1: none Modbus Modbus DNP, Modbus, IEC 61850
Channel 2: Eth TCP
Channel 1: Eth UDP Modbus Modbus DNP, Modbus, IEC 61850
Channel 2: none
Channel 1: Eth TCP Modbus DNP DNP, Modbus, IEC 61850
Channel 2: RS485
Channel 1: Eth TCP
Channel 2: RS232
DNP Modbus DNP, Modbus, IEC 61850
5
Channel 1: Eth UDP Modbus DNP DNP, Modbus, IEC 61850
Channel 2: RS485
Channel 1: Eth UDP DNP Modbus DNP, Modbus, IEC 61850
Channel 2: RS232
Channel 1: RS485 Modbus DNP DNP, Modbus, IEC 61850
Channel 2: Eth TCP
Channel 1: RS232 DNP Modbus DNP, Modbus, IEC 61850
Channel 2: Eth TCP
Channel 1: RS485 DNP DNP Modbus, IEC 61850
Channel 2: RS232
Channel 1: RS232 DNP DNP Modbus, IEC 61850
Channel 2: RS485
Channel 1: RS485 Modbus DNP Modbus, IEC 61850
Channel 2: none
IEC 104 Modbus Modbus IEC 104, Modbus, IEC 61850
IEC 103 Modbus IEC 103 Modbus, IEC 61850

j) DNP PROTOCOL
PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  DNP PROTOCOL
 DNP PROTOCOL  DNP CHANNELS Range: see sub-menu below

 
DNP ADDRESS: Range: 0 to 65519 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
1
 DNP NETWORK Range: see sub-menu below
MESSAGE
 CLIENT ADDRESSES
DNP TCP/UDP PORT Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
NUMBER: 20000
DNP UNSOL RESPONSE Range: Enabled, Disabled
MESSAGE
FUNCTION: Disabled
DNP UNSOL RESPONSE Range: 0 to 60 s in steps of 1
MESSAGE
TIMEOUT: 5 s
DNP UNSOL RESPONSE Range: 1 to 255 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
MAX RETRIES: 10
DNP UNSOL RESPONSE Range: 0 to 65519 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
DEST ADDRESS: 1
DNP CURRENT SCALE Range: 0.001, 0.01. 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000, 10000,
MESSAGE 100000
5
FACTOR: 1
DNP VOLTAGE SCALE Range: 0.001, 0.01. 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000, 10000,
MESSAGE 100000
FACTOR: 1
DNP POWER SCALE Range: 0.001, 0.01. 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000, 10000,
MESSAGE 100000
FACTOR: 1
DNP ENERGY SCALE Range: 0.001, 0.01. 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000, 10000,
MESSAGE 100000
FACTOR: 1
DNP PF SCALE Range: 0.001, 0.01. 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000, 10000,
MESSAGE 100000
FACTOR: 1
DNP OTHER SCALE Range: 0.001, 0.01. 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000, 10000,
MESSAGE 100000
FACTOR: 1
DNP CURRENT DEFAULT Range: 0 to 100000000 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
DEADBAND: 30000
DNP VOLTAGE DEFAULT Range: 0 to 100000000 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
DEADBAND: 30000
DNP POWER DEFAULT Range: 0 to 100000000 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
DEADBAND: 30000
DNP ENERGY DEFAULT Range: 0 to 100000000 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
DEADBAND: 30000
DNP PF DEFAULT Range: 0 to 100000000 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
DEADBAND: 30000
DNP OTHER DEFAULT Range: 0 to 100000000 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
DEADBAND: 30000
DNP TIME SYNC IIN Range: 1 to 10080 min. in steps of 1
MESSAGE
PERIOD: 1440 min

DNP MESSAGE FRAGMENT Range: 30 to 2048 in steps of 1

MESSAGE
SIZE: 240
DNP OBJECT 1 Range: 1, 2
MESSAGE
DEFAULT VARIATION: 2
DNP OBJECT 2 Range: 1, 2, 3
MESSAGE
DNP OBJECT 20 Range: 1, 2, 5, 6
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
DNP OBJECT 30 Range: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
MESSAGE
DNP OBJECT 32 Range: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 7
MESSAGE
DNP NUMBER OF PAIRED Range: 0 to 32 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
CONTROL POINTS: 0
DNP TCP CONNECTION Range: 10 to 7200 s in steps of 1 5
MESSAGE
TIMEOUT: 120 s
The B30 supports the Distributed Network Protocol (DNP) version 3.0. DNP is enabled when the SETTINGS  PRODUCT
SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  PROTOCOL setting is set to DNP 3.0. The B30 can be used as a DNP slave device con-
nected to multiple DNP masters (usually an RTU or a SCADA master station). Since the B30 maintains two sets of DNP
data change buffers and connection information, two DNP masters can actively communicate with the B30 at one time.
The DNP Channels sub-menu is shown below.
PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  DNP PROTOCOL  DNP CHANNELS
 DNP CHANNELS DNP CHANNEL 1 PORT: Range: NONE, COM2 - RS485,

 NETWORK FRONT PANEL - RS232, NETWORK - TCP,
NETWORK - UDP
DNP CHANNEL 2 PORT: Range: NONE, COM2 - RS485,
MESSAGE FRONT PANEL - RS232, NETWORK - TCP
COM2 - RS485
The DNP CHANNEL 1 PORT and DNP CHANNEL 2 PORT settings select the communications port assigned to the DNP protocol
for each channel. Once DNP is assigned to a serial port, DNP is the only protocol running on that port; Modbus or IEC
60870-5-103 are disabled. If DNP is assigned to RS485, the protocol must be set to DNP on the serial port configuration as
well, for the change to take effect. When the DNP CHANNEL 1(2) PORT setting is set to “Network - TCP,” the channel 1(2)
DNP protocol can be used over TCP/IP on the Ethernet ports. When the DNP CHANNEL 1 PORT setting is set to “Network -
UDP,” the channel 1 DNP protocol can be used over UDP/IP on the Ethernet ports. See the DNP appendix for information
on the DNP protocol.
Changes to these settings take effect when power has been cycled to the relay.
NOTE
those protocols.
The DNP ADDRESS setting is the DNP slave address. This number identifies the B30 on a DNP communications link. Each
DNP slave should be assigned a unique address.

The B30 can specify a maximum of five clients for its DNP connections. These are IP addresses for the controllers to which
the B30 can connect. The settings in this sub-menu are shown below.
PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  DNP PROTOCOL  DNP NETWORK CLIENT ADDRESSES
 DNP NETWORK CLIENT ADDRESS 1: Range: standard IP address

 CLIENT ADDRESSES 0.0.0.0
CLIENT ADDRESS 2: Range: standard IP address
MESSAGE
0.0.0.0
MESSAGE
0.0.0.0
MESSAGE
0.0.0.0
MESSAGE
0.0.0.0
The DNP TCP/UDP PORT NUMBER is for normal DNP operation. To close the port, set the port number to 0. The change takes
effect when the B30 is restarted.
The DNP UNSOL RESPONSE FUNCTION should be “Disabled” for RS485 applications since there is no collision avoidance
mechanism. The DNP UNSOL RESPONSE TIMEOUT sets the time the B30 waits for a DNP master to confirm an unsolicited
response. The DNP UNSOL RESPONSE MAX RETRIES setting determines the number of times the B30 retransmits an unsolic-
ited response without receiving confirmation from the master; a value of “255” allows infinite re-tries. The DNP UNSOL
5 RESPONSE DEST ADDRESS is the DNP address to which all unsolicited responses are sent. The IP address to which solicited
responses are sent is determined by the B30 from the current TCP connection or the most recent UDP message.
The DNP scale factor settings are numbers used to scale analog input point values. These settings group the B30 analog
input data into the following types: current, voltage, power, energy, power factor, and other. Each setting represents the
scale factor for all analog input points of that type. For example, if the DNP VOLTAGE SCALE FACTOR setting is set to “1000”,
all DNP analog input points that are voltages will be returned with values 1000 times smaller (for example, a value of 72000
V on the B30 will be returned as 72). These settings are useful when analog input values must be adjusted to fit within cer-
tain ranges in DNP masters. Note that a scale factor of 0.1 is equivalent to a multiplier of 10 (that is, the value will be 10
times larger).
The DNP DEFAULT DEADBAND settings determine when to trigger unsolicited responses containing analog input data. These
settings group the B30 analog input data into the following types: current, voltage, power, energy, power factor, and other.
Each setting represents the default deadband value for all analog input points of that type. For example, to trigger unsolic-
ited responses from the B30 when any current values change by 15 A, the DNP CURRENT DEFAULT DEADBAND setting
should be set to “15”. Note that these settings are the deadband default values. DNP object 34 points can be used to
change deadband values, from the default, for each individual DNP analog input point. For any change to take effect,
restart the relay. Whenever power is removed and re-applied to the B30, the default deadbands will be in effect.
The B30 relay does not support power metering. As such, the DNP POWER SCALE FACTOR and DNP POWER DEFAULT
DEADBAND settings are not applicable.
NOTE
The B30 relay does not support energy metering. As such, the DNP ENERGY SCALE FACTOR and DNP ENERGY
DEFAULT DEADBAND settings are not applicable.
NOTE
The DNP TIME SYNC IIN PERIOD setting determines how often the Need Time Internal Indication (IIN) bit is set by the B30.
Changing this time allows the DNP master to send time synchronization commands more or less often, as required.
The DNP MESSAGE FRAGMENT SIZE setting determines the size, in bytes, at which message fragmentation occurs. Large
fragment sizes allow for more efficient throughput; smaller fragment sizes cause more application layer confirmations to be
necessary which can provide for more robust data transfer over noisy communication channels.
Check the “DNP Points Lists” B30 web page to view the analog inputs and/or binary inputs points lists. This page
can be viewed with a web browser by entering the IP address of the UR Ethernet port employed to access the B30
NOTE
“Main Menu”, then by selecting the “Device Information Menu” > “DNP Points Lists” menu item.

The DNP OBJECT 1 DEFAULT VARIATION to DNP OBJECT 32 DEFAULT VARIATION settings allow the user to select the DNP
default variation number for object types 1, 2, 20, 21, 22, 23, 30, and 32. The default variation refers to the variation
response when variation 0 is requested and/or in class 0, 1, 2, or 3 scans. See the DNP Implementation section in the DNP
appendix.
The DNP binary outputs typically map one-to-one to IED data points. That is, each DNP binary output controls a single
physical or virtual control point in an IED. In the B30 relay, DNP binary outputs are mapped to virtual inputs. However, some
legacy DNP implementations use a mapping of one DNP binary output to two physical or virtual control points to support
the concept of trip/close (for circuit breakers) or raise/lower (for tap changers) using a single control point. That is, the DNP
master can operate a single point for both trip and close, or raise and lower, operations. The B30 can be configured to sup-
port paired control points, with each paired control point operating two virtual inputs. The DNP NUMBER OF PAIRED CONTROL
POINTS setting allows configuration of from 0 to 32 binary output paired controls. Points not configured as paired operate on
a one-to-one basis.
The DNP TCP CONNECTION TIMEOUT setting specifies a time delay for the detection of dead network TCP connections. If
there is no data traffic on a DNP TCP connection for greater than the time specified by this setting, the connection will be
aborted by the B30. This frees up the connection to be re-used by a client.
Relay power must be re-cycled after changing the DNP TCP CONNECTION TIMEOUT setting for the changes to take
effect.
NOTE
k) DNP / IEC 60870-5-104 POINT LISTS

PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  DNP / IEC104 POINT LISTS
 DNP / IEC104  BINARY INPUT / MSP Range: see sub-menu below

 POINT LISTS  POINTS
 ANALOG INPUT / MME Range: see sub-menu below
MESSAGE
 POINTS 5
Up to 256 binary and up to 256 analog input points for the DNP protocol, or the MSP and MME points for IEC 60870-5-104
protocol, can be configured. The value for each point is user-programmable and can be configured by assigning FlexLogic
operands for binary inputs / MSP points or FlexAnalog parameters for analog inputs / MME points.
The menu for the binary input points (DNP) or MSP points (IEC 60870-5-104) is shown below.
PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  DNP / IEC104 POINT LISTS  BINARY INPUT / MSP POINTS
 BINARY INPUT / MSP Point: 0 Range: FlexLogic operand

 POINTS Off
Point: 1 Range: FlexLogic operand
MESSAGE
Off
↓
Point: 255 Range: FlexLogic operand

MESSAGE
Off
Up to 256 binary input points can be configured for the DNP or IEC 60870-5-104 protocols. The points are configured by
assigning an appropriate FlexLogic operand. See the Introduction to FlexLogic section in this chapter for the full range of
assignable operands.
The menu for the analog input points (DNP) or MME points (IEC 60870-5-104) is shown below.

PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  DNP / IEC104 POINT LISTS  ANALOG INPUT / MME POINTS
 ANALOG INPUT / MME Point: 0 Range: any FlexAnalog parameter

 POINTS Off
Point: 1 Range: any FlexAnalog parameter
MESSAGE
Off
↓
Point: 255 Range: any FlexAnalog parameter

MESSAGE
Off
Up to 256 analog input points can be configured for the DNP or IEC 60870-5-104 protocols. The analog point list is config-
ured by assigning an appropriate FlexAnalog parameter to each point. Refer to Appendix A: FlexAnalog Parameters for the
full range of assignable parameters.
The DNP / IEC 60870-5-104 point lists always begin with point 0 and end at the first “Off” value. Since DNP / IEC
60870-5-104 point lists must be in one continuous block, any points assigned after the first “Off” point are ignored.
NOTE
Changes to the DNP / IEC 60870-5-104 point lists will not take effect until the B30 is restarted.
NOTE
l) IEC 61850 PROTOCOL

PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  IEC 61850 PROTOCOL
 IEC 61850 PROTOCOL  GSSE / GOOSE
5   CONFIGURATION
 SERVER
MESSAGE
 CONFIGURATION
 IEC 61850 LOGICAL
MESSAGE
 NODE NAME PREFIXES
 MMXU DEADBANDS
MESSAGE

 GGIO1 STATUS
MESSAGE
 CONFIGURATION
 GGIO2 CONTROL
MESSAGE
 CONFIGURATION
 GGIO4 ANALOG
MESSAGE
 CONFIGURATION
 GGIO5 UINTEGER
MESSAGE
 CONFIGURATION
 REPORT CONTROL
MESSAGE
 CONFIGURATION
 XCBR
MESSAGE
 CONFIGURATION
 XSWI
MESSAGE
 CONFIGURATION
The B30 Bus Differential System is provided with optional IEC 61850 communications capability. This fea-
ture is specified as a software option at the time of ordering. See the Order Codes section in chapter 2 for
details.

IEC 61850 messaging can form part of protection schemes. Consider 61850 settings with the same criticality as
protection element settings. To ensure reliable performance of protection schemes utilizing 61850 messaging, it
NOTE can be desirable to route 61850 traffic on a separate port from SCADA communications, or to use redundant, inde-
pendent ports, and a high speed network recovery method, such as PRP.
The B30 supports the Manufacturing Message Specification (MMS) protocol as specified by IEC 61850. MMS is supported
over two protocol stacks: TCP/IP over Ethernet. The B30 operates as an IEC 61850 server. The Remote Inputs and Out-
puts section in this chapter describe the peer-to-peer GSSE/GOOSE message scheme.
The EnerVista software includes an interface that is compatible with firmware versions 5.0 to 7.2 to configure subscribers.
Use the Simplified GOOSE Configurator in the Offline Window area.
The GSSE/GOOSE configuration main menu is divided into two areas: transmission and reception.
PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  IEC 61850 PROTOCOL  GSSE/GOOSE CONFIGURATION
 GSSE / GOOSE  TRANSMISSION

 CONFIGURATION 
 RECEPTION
MESSAGE

The main transmission menu is shown below:

 TRANSMISSION
 TRANSMISSION  GENERAL
 
MESSAGE
 GSSE

5
 FIXED GOOSE
MESSAGE

 CONFIGURABLE
MESSAGE
 GOOSE
The general transmission settings are shown below:

 TRANSMISSION  GENERAL
 GENERAL DEFAULT GSSE/GOOSE Range: 1 to 60 s in steps of 1
 UPDATE TIME: 60 s
The DEFAULT GSSE/GOOSE UPDATE TIME sets the time between GSSE or GOOSE messages when there are no remote out-
put state changes to be sent. When remote output data changes, GSSE or GOOSE messages are sent immediately. This
setting controls the steady-state heartbeat time interval.
The DEFAULT GSSE/GOOSE UPDATE TIME setting is applicable to GSSE, fixed B30 GOOSE, and configurable GOOSE.
The GSSE settings are shown below:
 TRANSMISSION  GSEE
 GSSE GSSE FUNCTION: Range: Enabled, Disabled
 Enabled
GSSE ID: Range: 65-character ASCII string
MESSAGE
GSSEOut
DESTINATION MAC: Range: standard MAC address
MESSAGE
000000000000
These settings are applicable to GSSE only. If the fixed GOOSE function is enabled, GSSE messages are not transmitted.

The GSSE ID setting represents the IEC 61850 GSSE application ID name string sent as part of each GSSE message. This
string identifies the GSSE message to the receiving device. In B30 releases previous to 5.0x, this name string was repre-
sented by the RELAY NAME setting.
The fixed GOOSE settings are shown below:
 TRANSMISSION  FIXED GOOSE
 FIXED GOOSE GOOSE FUNCTION: Range: Enabled, Disabled
 Disabled
GOOSE ID: Range: 65-character ASCII string
MESSAGE
GOOSEOut
DESTINATION MAC: Range: standard MAC address
MESSAGE
000000000000
GOOSE VLAN PRIORITY: Range: 0 to 7 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
4
GOOSE VLAN ID: Range: 0 to 4095 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
0
GOOSE ETYPE APPID: Range: 0 to 16383 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
0
These settings are applicable to fixed (DNA/UserSt) GOOSE only.

The GOOSE ID setting represents the IEC 61850 GOOSE application ID (GoID) name string sent as part of each GOOSE
5 message. This string identifies the GOOSE message to the receiving device. In revisions previous to 5.0x, this name string
was represented by the RELAY NAME setting.
The DESTINATION MAC setting allows the destination Ethernet MAC address to be set. This address must be a multicast
address; the least significant bit of the first byte must be set. In B30 releases previous to 5.0x, the destination Ethernet
MAC address was determined automatically by taking the sending MAC address (that is, the unique, local MAC address of
the B30) and setting the multicast bit.
The GOOSE VLAN PRIORITY setting indicates the Ethernet priority of GOOSE messages. This allows GOOSE messages to
have higher priority than other Ethernet data. The GOOSE ETYPE APPID setting allows the selection of a specific application
ID for each GOOSE sending device. This value can be left at its default if the feature is not required. Both the GOOSE VLAN
PRIORITY and GOOSE ETYPE APPID settings are required by IEC 61850.

The configurable GOOSE settings are shown below.

 TRANSMISSION  CONFIGURABLE GOOSE  CONFIGURABLE GOOSE 1(8)
 CONFIGURABLE CONFIG GSE 1 Range: Enabled, Disabled
 GOOSE 1 FUNCTION: Enabled
CONFIG GSE 1 ID: Range: 65-character ASCII string
MESSAGE
GOOSEOut_1
CONFIG GSE 1 DST MAC: Range: standard MAC address
MESSAGE
000000000000
CONFIG GSE 1 Range: 0 to 7 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
VLAN PRIORITY: 4
MESSAGE
VLAN ID: 0
MESSAGE
ETYPE APPID: 0
MESSAGE
CONFREV: 1
CONFIG GSE 1 RESTRANS Range: Aggressive, Medium, Relaxed, Heartbeat
MESSAGE
CURVE: Relaxed
 CONFIG GSE 1 Range: 64 data items; each can be set to all valid MMS
MESSAGE
 DATASET ITEMS data item references for transmitted data
5
The configurable GOOSE settings allow the B30 to be configured to transmit a number of different datasets within IEC
61850 GOOSE messages. Up to eight different configurable datasets can be configured and transmitted. This is useful for
intercommunication between B30 IEDs and devices from other manufacturers that support IEC 61850.
The configurable GOOSE feature allows for the configuration of the datasets to be transmitted or received from the B30.
The B30 supports the configuration of eight (8) transmission and reception datasets, allowing for the optimization of data
transfer between devices.
Items programmed for dataset 1 and 2 will have changes in their status transmitted as soon as the change is detected.
Datasets 1 and 2 should be used for high-speed transmission of data that is required for applications such as transfer trip-
ping, blocking, and breaker fail initiate. At least one digital status value needs to be configured in the required dataset to
enable transmission of configured data. Configuring analog data only to dataset 1 or 2 will not activate transmission.
Items programmed for datasets 3 through 8 will have changes in their status transmitted at a maximum rate of every
100 ms. Datasets 3 through 8 will regularly analyze each data item configured within them every 100 ms to identify if any
changes have been made. If any changes in the data items are detected, these changes will be transmitted through a
GOOSE message. If there are no changes detected during this 100 ms period, no GOOSE message will be sent.
For all datasets 1 through 8, the integrity GOOSE message will still continue to be sent at the pre-configured rate even if no
changes in the data items are detected.
The GOOSE functionality was enhanced to prevent the relay from flooding a communications network with GOOSE mes-
sages due to an oscillation being created that is triggering a message.
The B30 has the ability of detecting if a data item in one of the GOOSE datasets is erroneously oscillating. This can be
caused by events such as errors in logic programming, inputs improperly being asserted and de-asserted, or failed station
components. If erroneously oscillation is detected, the B30 will stop sending GOOSE messages from the dataset for a min-
imum period of one second. Should the oscillation persist after the one second time-out period, the B30 will continue to
block transmission of the dataset. The B30 will assert the MAINTENANCE ALERT: GGIO Ind XXX oscill self-test error mes-
sage on the front panel display, where XXX denotes the data item detected as oscillating.
For versions 5.70 and higher, the B30 supports four retransmission schemes: aggressive, medium, relaxed, and heartbeat.
The aggressive scheme is only supported in fast type 1A GOOSE messages (GOOSEOut 1 and GOOSEOut 2). For slow
GOOSE messages (GOOSEOut 3 to GOOSEOut 8) the aggressive scheme is the same as the medium scheme.

The table shows details about each scheme. Times are maximum values. Retransmitted messages can occur faster than
the times listed.
Table 5–7: GOOSE RETRANSMISSION SCHEMES

SCHEME SQ NUM TIME FROM THE TIME BETWEEN COMMENT TIME ALLOWED TO LIVE
EVENT MESSAGES IN MESSAGE
Aggressive 0 0 ms 0 ms Event 2000 ms
1 4 ms 4 ms T1 2000 ms
2 8 ms 4 ms T1 2000 ms
3 16 ms 8 ms T2 Heartbeat * 4.5
4 Heartbeat Heartbeat T0 Heartbeat * 4.5
Medium 0 0 ms 0 ms Event 2000 ms
1 16 ms 16 ms T1 2000 ms
2 32 ms 16 ms T1 2000 ms
Relaxed 0 0 ms 0 ms Event 2000 ms
1 100 ms 100 ms T1 2000 ms
2 200 ms 100 ms T1 2000 ms
5 4
5
Heartbeat
Heartbeat
Heartbeat
Heartbeat
T0
T0
Heartbeat * 4.5
Heartbeat * 4.5
Heartbeat 0 0 ms 0 ms Event 2000 ms
1 Heartbeat Heartbeat T1 2000 ms
2 Heartbeat Heartbeat T1 2000 ms
The configurable GOOSE feature is recommended for applications that require GOOSE data transfer between UR-series
IEDs and devices from other manufacturers. Fixed GOOSE is recommended for applications that require GOOSE data
transfer between UR-series IEDs.
IEC 61850 GOOSE messaging contains a number of configurable parameters, all of which must be correct to achieve the
successful transfer of data. It is critical that the configured datasets at the transmission and reception devices are an exact
match in terms of data structure, and that the GOOSE addresses and name strings match exactly. Manual configuration is
possible, but third-party substation configuration software may be used to automate the process. The EnerVista UR Setup
software can produce IEC 61850 ICD files and import IEC 61850 SCD files produced by a substation configurator (as out-
lined in the IEC 61850 appendix).
The following example illustrates the configuration required to transfer IEC 61850 data items between two devices. The
general steps required for transmission configuration are:
1. Configure the transmission dataset.
2. Configure the GOOSE service settings.
3. Configure the data.
The general steps required for reception configuration are:
1. Configure the reception dataset.

This example shows how to configure the transmission and reception of three IEC 61850 data items: a single point status
value, its associated quality flags, and a floating point analog value.
The following procedure illustrates the transmission configuration.
1. Configure the transmission dataset by making the following changes in the PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATION 
IEC 61850 PROTOCOL  GSSE/GOOSE CONFIGURATION  TRANSMISSION  CONFIGURABLE GOOSE  CONFIGURABLE
GOOSE 1  CONFIG GSE 1 DATASET ITEMS settings menu:
– Set ITEM 1 to “GGIO1.ST.Ind1.q” to indicate quality flags for GGIO1 status indication 1.
– Set ITEM 2 to “GGIO1.ST.Ind1.stVal” to indicate the status value for GGIO1 status indication 1.
– Set ITEM 3 to “MMXU1.MX.Hz.mag.f” to indicate the analog frequency magnitude for MMXU1 (the metered fre-
quency for SRC1).
The transmission dataset now contains a quality flag, a single point status Boolean value, and a floating point analog
value. The reception dataset on the receiving device must exactly match this structure.
2. Configure the GOOSE service settings by making the following changes in the PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATION
 IEC 61850 PROTOCOL  GSSE/GOOSE CONFIGURATION  TRANSMISSION  CONFIGURABLE GOOSE  CONFIGU-
RABLE GOOSE 1 settings menu:
– Set CONFIG GSE 1 FUNCTION to “Enabled”.

– Set CONFIG GSE 1 ID to an appropriate descriptive string (the default value is “GOOSEOut_1”).
– Set CONFIG GSE 1 DST MAC to a multicast address (for example, 01 00 00 12 34 56).
– Set the CONFIG GSE 1 VLAN PRIORITY; the default value of “4” is OK for this example.
– Set the CONFIG GSE 1 VLAN ID value; the default value is “0”, but some switches may require this value to be “1”.
– Set the CONFIG GSE 1 ETYPE APPID value. This setting represents the ETHERTYPE application ID and must match 5
the configuration on the receiver (the default value is “0”).
– Set the CONFIG GSE 1 CONFREV value. This value changes automatically as described in IEC 61850 part 7-2. For
this example it can be left at its default value.
3. Configure the data by making the following changes in the PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATION  IEC 61850 PROTO-
COL  GGIO1 STATUS CONFIGURATION settings menu:
– Set GGIO1 INDICATION 1 to a FlexLogic operand used to provide the status of GGIO1.ST.Ind1.stVal (for example, a
contact input, virtual input, a protection element status, etc.).
4. Configure the MMXU1 Hz Deadband by making the following changes in the PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATION 
IEC 61850 PROTOCOL  MMXU DEADBANDS MMXU1 DEADBANDS settings menu:
– Set MMXU1 HZ DEADBAND to “0.050%”. This will result in an update to the MMXU1.MX.mag.f analog value with a
change greater than 45 mHz, from the previous MMXU1.MX.mag.f value, in the source frequency.
The B30 must be rebooted (control power removed and re-applied) before these settings take effect.
The following procedure illustrates the reception configuration.
1. Configure the reception dataset by making the following changes in the PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATION  IEC
61850 PROTOCOL  GSSE/GOOSE CONFIGURATION  RECEPTION  CONFIGURABLE GOOSE  CONFIGURABLE GOOSE
1  CONFIG GSE 1 DATASET ITEMS settings menu:
– Set ITEM 3 to “GGIO3.MX.AnIn1.mag.f” to indicate the analog magnitude for GGIO3 analog input 1.
The reception dataset now contains a quality flag, a single point status Boolean value, and a floating point analog
value. This matches the transmission dataset configuration above.
2. Configure the GOOSE service settings by making the following changes in the INPUTS/OUTPUTS  REMOTE DEVICES
 REMOTE DEVICE 1 settings menu:
– Set REMOTE DEVICE 1 ID to match the GOOSE ID string for the transmitting device. Enter “GOOSEOut_1”.

– Set REMOTE DEVICE 1 ETYPE APPID to match the ETHERTYPE application ID from the transmitting device. This is
“0” in the example above.
– Set the REMOTE DEVICE 1 DATASET value. This value represents the dataset number in use. Since we are using
configurable GOOSE 1 in this example, program this value as “GOOSEIn 1”.
3. Configure the Boolean data by making the following changes in the INPUTS/OUTPUTS  REMOTE INPUTS  REMOTE
INPUT 1settings menu:
– Set REMOTE IN 1 DEVICE to “GOOSEOut_1”.
– Set REMOTE IN 1 ITEM to “Dataset Item 2”. This assigns the value of the GGIO3.ST.Ind1.stVal single point status
item to remote input 1.
4. Configure the analog data by making the following changes in the INPUTS/OUTPUTS  IEC 61850 GOOSE ANALOG
INPUTS settings menu:
– Set the IEC61850 GOOSE ANALOG INPUT 1 DEFAULT VALUE to “60.000”.
– Enter “Hz” for the IEC61850 GOOSE ANALOG INPUT 1 UNITS setting.
The GOOSE analog input 1 can now be used as a FlexAnalog value in a FlexElement or in other settings. The B30 must be
rebooted (control power removed and re-applied) before these settings take effect.
The value of GOOSE analog input 1 in the receiving device will be determined by the MMXU1.MX.Hz.mag.f value in the
sending device. This MMXU value is determined by the source 1 frequency value and the MMXU Hz deadband setting of
the sending device.
Remote input 1 can now be used in FlexLogic equations or other settings. The B30 must be rebooted (control power
removed and re-applied) before these settings take effect.
The value of remote input 1 (Boolean on or off) in the receiving device will be determined by the GGIO1.ST.Ind1.stVal value
5 in the sending device. The above settings will be automatically populated by the EnerVista UR Setup software when a com-
plete SCD file is created by third party substation configurator software.
For intercommunication between B30 IEDs, the fixed (DNA/UserSt) dataset can be used. The DNA/UserSt dataset contains
the same DNA and UserSt bit pairs that are included in GSSE messages. All GOOSE messages transmitted by the B30
(DNA/UserSt dataset and configurable datasets) use the IEC 61850 GOOSE messaging services (for example, VLAN sup-
port).
Set the CONFIG GSE 1 FUNCTION function to “Disabled” when configuration changes are required. Once changes are
entered, return the CONFIG GSE 1 FUNCTION to “Enabled” and restart the unit for changes to take effect.
NOTE
 TRANSMISSION  CONFIGURABLE GOOSE  CONFIGURABLE GOOSE 1(8)  CONFIG GSE 1(64) DATA ITEMS
 CONFIG GSE 1 ITEM 1: Range: all valid MMS data item references for
 DATASET ITEMS GGIO1.ST.Ind1.stVal transmitted data
ITEM 2: Range: all valid MMS data item references for

MESSAGE transmitted data
GGIO1.ST.IndPos1.stV
None
↓
None
To create a configurable GOOSE dataset that contains an IEC 61850 Single Point Status indication and its associated qual-
ity flags, the following dataset items can be selected: “GGIO1.ST.Ind1.stVal” and “GGIO1.ST.Ind1.q”. The B30 will then cre-
ate a dataset containing these two data items. The status value for GGIO1.ST.Ind1.stVal is determined by the FlexLogic
operand assigned to GGIO1 indication 1. Changes to this operand will result in the transmission of GOOSE messages con-
taining the defined dataset.

The main reception menu is applicable to configurable GOOSE only and contains the configurable GOOSE dataset items
for reception:
 RECEPTION  CONFIGURABLE GOOSE  CONFIGURABLE GOOSE 1(16)  CONFIG GSE 1(32) DATA ITEMS
 CONFIG GSE 1 ITEM 1: Range: all valid MMS data item references for
 DATASET ITEMS GGIO3.ST.Ind1.stVal transmitted data

GGIO3.ST.IndPos1.stV
None
↓
None
The configurable GOOSE settings allow the B30 to be configured to receive a number of different datasets within IEC
61850 GOOSE messages. Up to sixteen different configurable datasets can be configured for reception. This is useful for
intercommunication between B30 IEDs and devices from other manufacturers that support IEC 61850.
For intercommunication between B30 IEDs, the fixed (DNA/UserSt) dataset can be used. The DNA/UserSt dataset contains
the same DNA and UserSt bit pairs that are included in GSSE messages.
To set up a B30 to receive a configurable GOOSE dataset that contains two IEC 61850 single point status indications, the
following dataset items can be selected (for example, for configurable GOOSE dataset 1): “GGIO3.ST.Ind1.stVal” and
“GGIO3.ST.Ind2.stVal”. The B30 will then create a dataset containing these two data items. The Boolean status values from
these data items can be utilized as remote input FlexLogic operands. First, the REMOTE DEVICE 1(16) DATASET setting must 5
be set to contain dataset “GOOSEIn 1” (that is, the first configurable dataset). Then REMOTE IN 1(16) ITEM settings must be
set to “Dataset Item 1” and “Dataset Item 2”. These remote input FlexLogic operands will then change state in accordance
with the status values of the data items in the configured dataset.
Double-point status values may be included in the GOOSE dataset. Received values are populated in the
GGIO3.ST.IndPos1.stVal and higher items.
Floating point analog values originating from MMXU logical nodes may be included in GOOSE datasets. Deadband (non-
instantaneous) values can be transmitted. Received values are used to populate the GGIO3.MX.AnIn1 and higher items.
Received values are also available as FlexAnalog parameters (GOOSE analog In1 and up).
GGIO3.MX.AnIn1 to GGIO3.MX.AnIn32 can only be used once for all sixteen reception datasets.
NOTE

The main menu for the IEC 61850 server configuration is shown below.
PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  IEC 61850 PROTOCOL  SERVER CONFIGURATION
 SERVER IED NAME: IECDevice Range: up to 32 alphanumeric characters

 CONFIGURATION
LD INST: LDInst Range: up to 32 alphanumeric characters

MESSAGE
IEC/MMS TCP PORT Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1

MESSAGE
NUMBER: 102
INCLUDE NON-IEC Range: Disabled, Enabled

MESSAGE
DATA: Enabled
SERVER SCANNING: Range: Disabled, Enabled

MESSAGE
Disabled
LOCATION: LPHD DC PHV- Range: up to 80 alphanumeric characters

MESSAGE
Nam Location
LATITUDE: Range: -90.000 to 90.000 deg in steps of 0.001 deg

MESSAGE
LONGITUDE: Range: -180.000 to 180.000 deg in steps of 0.001 deg

MESSAGE
ALTITUDE: Range: 0 to 10,0000 m in steps of 1 m
5
MESSAGE
The IED NAME and LD INST settings represent the MMS domain name (IEC 61850 logical device) where all IEC/MMS logical
nodes are located. Valid characters for these values are upper and lowercase letters, numbers, and the underscore (_)
character, and the first character in the string must be a letter. This conforms to the IEC 61850 standard. The LOCATION is a
variable string and can be composed of ASCII characters. This string appears within the PhyName of the LPHD node.
The IEC/MMS TCP PORT NUMBER setting allows the user to change the TCP port number for MMS connections. The INCLUDE
NON-IEC DATA setting determines whether or not the “UR” MMS domain will be available. This domain contains a large num-
ber of UR-series specific data items that are not available in the IEC 61850 logical nodes. This data does not follow the IEC
61850 naming conventions. For communications schemes that strictly follow the IEC 61850 standard, this setting should be
“Disabled”.
When a 0 value is involved in a change, the changes to the IEC/MMS TCP PORT NUMBER setting take effect when the
B30 is restarted.
NOTE
those protocols.
The SERVER SCANNING feature should be set to “Disabled” when IEC 61850 client/server functionality is not required. IEC
61850 has two modes of functionality: GOOSE/GSSE inter-device communication and client/server communication. If the
GOOSE/GSSE functionality is required without the IEC 61850 client server feature, then server scanning can be disabled
to increase CPU resources. When server scanning is disabled, there is no updating of the IEC 61850 logical node status
values in the B30. Clients are still able to connect to the server (B30 relay), but most data values are not updated. This set-
ting does not affect GOOSE/GSSE operation.
Changes to the IED NAME setting, LD INST setting, and GOOSE dataset take effect when the B30 is restarted.
NOTE

The main menu for the IEC 61850 logical node name prefixes is shown below.
PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  IEC 61850 PROTOCOL
 IEC 61850 LOGICAL NODE NAME PREFIXES
 IEC 61850 LOGICAL  PIOC LOGICAL NODE
 NODE NAME PREFIXES  NAME PREFIXES
 PTOC LOGICAL NODE

MESSAGE
 NAME PREFIXES
↓
 PTRC LOGICAL NODE

MESSAGE
 NAME PREFIXES
The IEC 61850 logical node name prefix settings are used to create name prefixes to uniquely identify each logical node.
For example, the logical node “PTOC1” may have the name prefix “abc”. The full logical node name will then be
“abcMMXU1”. Valid characters for the logical node name prefixes are upper and lowercase letters, numbers, and the
underscore (_) character, and the first character in the prefix must be a letter. This conforms to the IEC 61850 standard.
Changes to the logical node prefixes will not take effect until the B30 is restarted.
The main menu for the IEC 61850 MMXU deadbands is shown below.
PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  IEC 61850 PROTOCOL  MMXU DEADBANDS
 MMXU DEADBANDS  MMXU1 DEADBANDS

 
MESSAGE
 MMXU2 DEADBANDS

5
 MMXU3 DEADBANDS
MESSAGE

 MMXU4 DEADBANDS
MESSAGE

The MMXU deadband settings represent the deadband values used to determine when the update the MMXU “mag” and
“cVal” values from the associated “instmag” and “instcVal” values. The “mag” and “cVal” values are used for the IEC 61850
buffered and unbuffered reports. These settings correspond to the associated “db” data items in the CF functional con-
straint of the MMXU logical node, as per the IEC 61850 standard. According to IEC 61850-7-3, the db value “shall repre-
sent the percentage of difference between the maximum and minimum in units of 0.001%”. Thus, it is important to know the
maximum value for each MMXU measured quantity, since this represents the 100.00% value for the deadband.
The minimum value for all quantities is 0; the maximum values are as follows:
• phase current: 46 × phase CT primary setting
• neutral current: 46 × ground CT primary setting
• voltage: 275 × VT ratio setting
• power (real, reactive, and apparent): 46 × phase CT primary setting × 275 × VT ratio setting
• frequency: 90 Hz
• power factor: 2

The GGIO1 status configuration points are shown below:

PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  IEC 61850 PROTOCOL  GGIO1 STATUS CONFIGURATION
 GGIO1 STATUS NUMBER OF STATUS Range: 8 to 128 in steps of 8

 CONFIGURATION POINTS IN GGIO1: 8
GGIO1 INDICATION 1 Range: FlexLogic operand

MESSAGE
Off

MESSAGE
Off

MESSAGE
Off
↓

MESSAGE
Off
The NUMBER OF STATUS POINTS IN GGIO1 setting specifies the number of “Ind” (single point status indications) that are
instantiated in the GGIO1 logical node. Changes to the NUMBER OF STATUS POINTS IN GGIO1 setting will not take effect until
the B30 is restarted.
The GGIO2 control configuration points are shown below:
PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  IEC 61850 PROTOCOL  GGIO2 CONTROL CONFIGURATION
 GGIO2 CF SPSCO 1(64)
5  GGIO2 CF SPCSO 1

GGIO2 CF SPCSO 1
CTLMODEL: 1
Range: 0, 1, or 2
The GGIO2 control configuration settings are used to set the control model for each input. The available choices are “0”
(status only), “1” (direct control), and “2” (SBO with normal security). The GGIO2 control points are used to control the B30
virtual inputs.
The GGIO4 analog configuration points are shown below:
PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  IEC 61850 PROTOCOL  GGIO4 ANALOG CONFIGURATION
 GGIO4 ANALOG NUMBER OF ANALOG Range: 4 to 32 in steps of 4

 CONFIGURATION POINTS IN GGIO4: 8
 GGIO4 ANALOG 1
MESSAGE
 MEASURED VALUE
 GGIO4 ANALOG 2
MESSAGE
 MEASURED VALUE
 GGIO4 ANALOG 3
MESSAGE
 MEASURED VALUE
↓
 GGIO4 ANALOG 32
MESSAGE
 MEASURED VALUE
The NUMBER OF ANALOG POINTS setting determines how many analog data points will exist in GGIO4. When this value is
changed, the B30 must be rebooted in order to allow the GGIO4 logical node to be re-instantiated and contain the newly
configured number of analog points.

The measured value settings for each of the 32 analog values are shown below.
PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT...  COMMUNICATIONS  IEC 61850 PROTOCOL  GGIO4 ANALOG CONFIGURATION
 GGIO4 ANALOG 1(32) MEASURED VALUE
 GGIO4 ANALOG 1 ANALOG IN 1 VALUE: Range: any FlexAnalog value
 MEASURED VALUE Off
ANALOG IN 1 DB: Range: 0.000 to 100.000 in steps of 0.001

MESSAGE
0.000
ANALOG IN 1 MIN: Range: –1000000000.000 to 1000000000.000 in steps

MESSAGE of 0.001
0.000
ANALOG IN 1 MAX: Range: –1000000000.000 to 1000000000.000 in steps

MESSAGE of 0.001
0.000
These settings are configured as follows.

• ANALOG IN 1 VALUE: This setting selects the FlexAnalog value to drive the instantaneous value of each GGIO4 ana-
log status value (GGIO4.MX.AnIn1.instMag.f).
• ANALOG IN 1 DB: This setting specifies the deadband for each analog value. Refer to IEC 61850-7-1 and 61850-7-3
for details. The deadband is used to determine when to update the deadbanded magnitude from the instantaneous
magnitude. The deadband is a percentage of the difference between the maximum and minimum values.
• ANALOG IN 1 MIN: This setting specifies the minimum value for each analog value. Refer to IEC 61850-7-1 and
61850-7-3 for details. This minimum value is used to determine the deadband. The deadband is used in the determina-
tion of the deadbanded magnitude from the instantaneous magnitude.
• ANALOG IN 1 MAX: This setting defines the maximum value for each analog value. Refer to IEC 61850-7-1 and 5
61850-7-3 for details. This maximum value is used to determine the deadband. The deadband is used in the determi-
nation of the deadbanded magnitude from the instantaneous magnitude.
Note that the ANALOG IN 1 MIN and ANALOG IN 1 MAX settings are stored as IEEE 754 / IEC 60559 floating point
numbers. Because of the large range of these settings, not all values can be stored. Some values may be rounded
NOTE to the closest possible floating point number.
The GGIO5 integer configuration points are shown below:
PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  IEC 61850 PROTOCOL  GGIO5 ANALOG CONFIGURATION
 GGIO5 UINTEGER GGIO5 UINT In 1: Range: Off, any FlexInteger™ parameter

 CONFIGURATION Off
GGIO5 UINT In 2: Range: Off, any FlexInteger parameter

MESSAGE
Off
GGIO5 UINT In 3: Range: Off, any FlexInteger parameter

MESSAGE
Off
↓
GGIO5 UINT 1n 16: Range: Off, any FlexInteger parameter

MESSAGE
Off
The GGIO5 logical node allows IEC 61850 client access to integer data values. This allows access to as many as 16
unsigned integer value points, associated timestamps, and quality flags. The method of configuration is similar to that of
GGIO1 (binary status values). The settings allow the selection of FlexInteger values for each GGIO5 integer value point.
It is intended that clients use GGIO5 to access generic integer values from the B30. Additional settings are provided to
allow the selection of the number of integer values available in GGIO5 (1 to 16), and to assign FlexInteger values to the
GGIO5 integer inputs. The following setting is available for all GGIO5 configuration points.
• GGIO5 UINT IN 1 VALUE: This setting selects the FlexInteger value to drive each GGIO5 integer status value
(GGIO5.ST.UIntIn1). This setting is stored as an 32-bit unsigned integer value.

The report control configuration settings are shown below:

PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  IEC 61850 PROTOCOL  REPORT CONTROL CONFIGURATION
 CONFIGURABLE REPORT 1  REPORT 1 DATASET ITEMS
 REPORT 1 ITEM 1: Range: all valid MMS data item references
 DATASET ITEMS
ITEM 2: Range: as shown above

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE
To create the dataset for logical node LN, program the ITEM 1 to ITEM 64 settings to a value from the list of IEC 61850 data
attributes supported by the B30. Changes to the dataset will only take effect when the B30 is restarted. It is recommended
to use reporting service from logical node LLN0 if a user needs some (but not all) data from already existing GGIO1,
GGIO4, and MMXU4 points and their quantity is not greater than 64 minus the number items in this dataset.

The breaker configuration settings are shown below. Changes to these values take effect when the UR is restarted:
PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  IEC 61850 PROTOCOL  XCBR CONFIGURATION
 XCBR XCBR1 ST.LOC OPERAND Range: FlexLogic operand

 CONFIGURATION Off
↓
XCBR6 ST.LOC OPERAND Range: FlexLogic operand

MESSAGE
Off
CLEAR XCBR1 OpCnt: Range: No, Yes

MESSAGE
No
↓
CLEAR XCBR6 OpCnt: Range: No, Yes

MESSAGE
No
XCBR1 SYNCCHECK CLS: Range: FlexLogic operand

MESSAGE
Off
↓
XCBR6 SYNCCHECK CLS: Range: FlexLogic operand

MESSAGE
Off
XCBR1 INTERLOCK OPN: Range: FlexLogic operand

MESSAGE
Off
↓
5
XCBR6 INTERLOCK OPN: Range: FlexLogic operand
MESSAGE
Off
XCBR1 INTERLOCK CLS: Range: FlexLogic operand

MESSAGE
Off
↓
XCBR6 INTERLOCK CLS: Range: FlexLogic operand

MESSAGE
Off
XCBR1 Pos ctlModel: Range: 0 to 4 (as per IEC 61850-7-3, ctlModel)

MESSAGE
2
↓
XCBR6 Pos ctlModel: Range: 0 to 4 (as per IEC 61850-7-3, ctlModel)

MESSAGE
2
XCBR1 Pos Range: 2 to 60 seconds

MESSAGE
sboTimeout: 30 s
↓
XCBR6 Pos Range: 2 to 60 seconds

MESSAGE
sboTimeout: 30 s
The XCBR1 ST.LOC OPERAND setting is used to inhibit 61850 control commands to close or open breaker through UR
Breaker Control element. See the Breaker Control element logic diagram for more information.
The CLEAR XCBR1 OpCnt setting allows clearing the breaker operating counter. As breakers operate by opening and
closing, the XCBR operating counter status attribute (OpCnt) increments with every operation. Frequent breaker operation
can result in very large OpCnt values over time. This setting allows the OpCnt to be reset to “0” for XCBR1.

The XCBR1 SYNCCHECK CLS setting is used to supervise a close command with a synchrocheck condition within XCBR
logical node. If a Close with SynchroCheck is requested (through a SelectWithValue service) and the SynchroCheck condi-
tion is not satisfied, a Negative Response (-Rsp) is issued with the REASON CODE of Blocked-by-synchrocheck.
The XCBR1 INTERLOCK OPN/CLS settings are used to assign an operand, which is linked into the EnaOpn or EnaCls
INTERLOCKED inputs respectively of the XCBR. When this operand is asserted, XCBR logical node inhibits execution of
the open and close commands respectively. If select before operate (SBO) with Extended Security is requested and Inter-
lock condition exists, the UR responds with a Negative response (-Rsp) with the Reason Code Blocked-by-interlocking.
The XCBR1 Pos ctlModel setting is used to select control model per IEC 61850-7-3. The following control models are sup-
ported by URs:
0 — Status only
1 — Direct control with normal security (direct-operate)
2 — SBO control with normal security (operate-once)
3 — Direct control with enhanced security (direct-operate)
4 — SBO control with enhanced security (operate-once)
See IEC 61850-7-2 for complete details on these control models.
The XCBR1 Pos sboTimeout setting is used to select SBO timeout value. To be successful, the IEC 61850 "operate" com-
mand must be executed after the "select" command within the XCBR1 Pos sboTimeout setting value.
The disconnect switch configuration settings are shown below. Changes to these values will not take effect until the UR is
restarted:
PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  IEC 61850 PROTOCOL  XSWI CONFIGURATION
5  XSWI
 CONFIGURATION
XSWI1 ST.LOC OPERAND
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand
XSWI2 ST.LOC OPERAND Range: FlexLogic operand

MESSAGE
Off

MESSAGE
Off
↓

MESSAGE
Off
CLEAR XSWI1 OpCnt: Range: No, Yes

MESSAGE
No

MESSAGE
No

MESSAGE
No
↓

MESSAGE
No
The CLEAR XSWI1 OpCnt setting represents the disconnect switch operating counter. As disconnect switches operate by
opening and closing, the XSWI operating counter status attribute (OpCnt) increments with every operation. Frequent switch
operation may result in very large OpCnt values over time. This setting allows the OpCnt to be reset to “0” for XSWI1.
Since GSSE/GOOSE messages are multicast Ethernet by specification, they are not usually be forwarded by net-
work routers. However, GOOSE messages may be forwarded by routers if the router has been configured for VLAN
NOTE functionality.

m) WEB SERVER HTTP PROTOCOL

PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  WEB SERVER HTTP PROTOCOL
 WEB SERVER HTTP TCP PORT Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1

 HTTP PROTOCOL NUMBER: 80
The B30 contains an embedded web server and is capable of transferring web pages to a web browser such as Internet
Explorer or Firefox. The web pages are organized as a series of menus that can be accessed starting at the B30 “Main
Menu”. Web pages are available showing DNP and IEC 60870-5-104 points lists, Modbus registers, event records, fault
reports, and so on. First connect the UR and a computer to an Ethernet network, then enter the IP address of the B30
Ethernet port employed into the “Address” box of the web browser.
When the port is set to 0, the change takes effect when the B30 is restarted.
NOTE
those protocols.
n) TFTP PROTOCOL
PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  TFTP PROTOCOL
 TFTP PROTOCOL TFTP MAIN UDP PORT Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1

 NUMBER: 69
TFTP DATA UDP PORT 1 Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
NUMBER: 0
TFTP DATA UDP PORT 2 Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
5
NUMBER: 0
The Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) can be used to transfer files from the B30 over a network. The B30 operates as a
TFTP server. TFTP client software is available from various sources, including Microsoft Windows NT. The dir.txt file
obtained from the B30 contains a list and description of all available files (event records, oscillography, etc.).
When the TFTP MAIN UDP PORT NUMBER is set to 0, the change takes effect when the B30 is restarted.
NOTE
those protocols.

o) IEC 60870-5-104 PROTOCOL

PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  IEC 60870-5-104 PROTOCOL
 IEC 60870-5-104 IEC TCP PORT Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1

 PROTOCOL NUMBER: 2404
 IEC NETWORK Range: see sub-menu below
MESSAGE
 CLIENT ADDRESSES
IEC COMMON ADDRESS Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
OF ASDU: 0
IEC CYCLIC DATA Range: 1 to 65535 s in steps of 1
MESSAGE
PERIOD: 60 s
IEC CURRENT DEFAULT Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
THRESHOLD: 30000
IEC VOLTAGE DEFAULT Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
THRESHOLD: 30000
IEC POWER DEFAULT Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
THRESHOLD: 30000
IEC ENERGY DEFAULT Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
THRESHOLD: 30000
IEC PF DEFAULT Range: 0.00 to 1.00
MESSAGE
5
THRESHOLD: 1.00
IEC OTHER DEFAULT Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
THRESHOLD: 30000
IEC REDUNDANCY Range: No, Yes
MESSAGE
ENABLED: No
The B30 supports the IEC 60870-5-104 protocol. This protocol is enabled when the SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COM-
MUNICATIONS  PROTOCOL setting is set to IEC 60870-5-104. The B30 can be used as an IEC 60870-5-104 slave device
connected to a maximum of two masters (usually either an RTU or a SCADA master station). Since the B30 maintains two
sets of IEC 60870-5-104 data change buffers, no more than two masters should actively communicate with the B30 at one
time.
The IEC ------- DEFAULT THRESHOLD settings are used to determine when to trigger spontaneous responses containing
M_ME_NC_1 analog data. These settings group the B30 analog data into types: current, voltage, power, energy, and other.
Each setting represents the default threshold value for all M_ME_NC_1 analog points of that type. For example, to trigger
spontaneous responses from the B30 when any current values change by 15 A, the IEC CURRENT DEFAULT THRESHOLD set-
ting should be set to 15. Note that these settings are the default values of the deadbands. P_ME_NC_1 (parameter of mea-
sured value, short floating point value) points can be used to change threshold values, from the default, for each individual
M_ME_NC_1 analog point. Whenever power is removed and re-applied to the B30, the default thresholds are in effect.
The IEC REDUNDANCY setting decides whether multiple client connections are accepted or not. If redundancy is set to Yes,
two simultaneous connections can be active at any given time.
IEC TCP PORT NUMBER: When set to 0, the change takes effect when the B30 is restarted.
IEC COMMON ADDRESS OF ASDU: The change takes effect when the B30 is restarted.
IEC CYCLIC DATA PERIOD: The change takes effect when the B30 is restarted.
those protocols.
NOTE
The B30 relay does not support power metering. As such, the IEC POWER DEFAULT THRESHOLD setting is not appli-
cable.
NOTE

The B30 relay does not support energy metering. As such, the IEC ENERGY DEFAULT THRESHOLD setting is not appli-
cable.
NOTE
PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  IEC 60870-5-104 PROTOCOL  IEC NETWORK CLIENT
ADDRESSES
 IEC NETWORK CLIENT ADDRESS 1: Range: Standard IPV4 address format

 CLIENT ADDRESSES 0.0.0.0
CLIENT ADDRESS 2: Range: Standard IPV4 address format
MESSAGE
0.0.0.0
MESSAGE
0.0.0.0
MESSAGE
0.0.0.0
MESSAGE
0.0.0.0
The B30 can specify a maximum of five clients for its IEC 104 connections. These are IP addresses for the controllers to
which the B30 can connect.
A maximum of two simultaneous connections are supported at any given time.
p) EGD PROTOCOL
PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  EGD PROTOCOL
5
 EGD PROTOCOL  FAST PROD EXCH 1
  CONFIGURATION
 SLOW PROD EXCH 1
MESSAGE
 CONFIGURATION
 SLOW PROD EXCH 2
MESSAGE
 CONFIGURATION
The B30 Bus Differential System is provided with optional Ethernet Global Data (EGD) communications
capability. This feature is specified as a software option at the time of ordering. See the Order Codes sec-
tion in chapter 2 for details.
The relay supports one fast Ethernet Global Data (EGD) exchange and two slow EGD exchanges. There are 20 data items
in the fast-produced EGD exchange and 50 data items in each slow-produced exchange.
Ethernet Global Data (EGD) is a suite of protocols used for the real-time transfer of data for display and control purposes.
The relay can be configured to ‘produce’ EGD data exchanges, and other devices can be configured to ‘consume’ EGD
data exchanges. The number of produced exchanges (up to three), the data items in each exchange (up to 50), and the
exchange production rate can be configured.
EGD cannot be used to transfer data between UR-series relays. The relay supports EGD production only. An EGD
exchange will not be transmitted unless the destination address is non-zero, and at least the first data item address is set to
a valid Modbus register address. Note that the default setting value of “0” is considered invalid.

The settings menu for the fast EGD exchange is shown below:
PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  EGD PROTOCOL  FAST PROD EXCH 1 CONFIGURATION
 FAST PROD EXCH 1 EXCH 1 FUNCTION: Range: Disable, Enable

 CONFIGURATION Disable
EXCH 1 DESTINATION: Range: standard IP address
MESSAGE
0.0.0.0
EXCH 1 DATA RATE: Range: 50 to 1000 ms in steps of 1
MESSAGE
1000 ms
EXCH 1 DATA ITEM 1: Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
MESSAGE (Modbus register address range)
0
0
0
↓

0
Fast exchanges (50 to 1000 ms) are generally used in control schemes. The B30 has one fast exchange (exchange 1) and
two slow exchanges (exchange 2 and 3).
5 The settings menu for the slow EGD exchanges is shown below:
PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  EGD PROTOCOL  SLOW PROD EXCH 1(2) CONFIGURATION
 SLOW PROD EXCH 1 EXCH 1 FUNCTION: Range: Disable, Enable

 CONFIGURATION Disable
EXCH 1 DESTINATION: Range: standard IP address
MESSAGE
0.0.0.0
EXCH 1 DATA RATE: Range: 500 to 1000 ms in steps of 1
MESSAGE
1000 ms
MESSAGE (Modbus register address range in decimal)
0
0
0
↓

0
Slow EGD exchanges (500 to 1000 ms) are generally used for the transfer and display of data items. The settings for the
fast and slow exchanges are described below:
• EXCH 1 DESTINATION: This setting specifies the destination IP address of the produced EGD exchange. This is usu-
ally unicast or broadcast.
• EXCH 1 DATA RATE: This setting specifies the rate at which this EGD exchange is transmitted. If the setting is 50 ms,
the exchange data will be updated and sent once every 50 ms. If the setting is 1000 ms, the exchange data will be
updated and sent once per second. EGD exchange 1 has a setting range of 50 to 1000 ms. Exchanges 2 and 3 have a
setting range of 500 to 1000 ms.

• EXCH 1 DATA ITEM 1 to 20/50: These settings specify the data items that are part of this EGD exchange. Almost any
data from the B30 memory map can be configured to be included in an EGD exchange. The settings are the starting
Modbus register address for the data item in decimal format. Refer to Appendix B for the complete Modbus memory
map. Note that the Modbus memory map displays shows addresses in hexadecimal format. as such, it will be neces-
sary to convert these values to decimal format before entering them as values for these setpoints.
To select a data item to be part of an exchange, it is only necessary to choose the starting Modbus address of the item.
That is, for items occupying more than one Modbus register (for example, 32 bit integers and floating point values),
only the first Modbus address is required. The EGD exchange configured with these settings contains the data items
up to the first setting that contains a Modbus address with no data, or 0. That is, if the first three settings contain valid
Modbus addresses and the fourth is 0, the produced EGD exchange will contain three data items.
q) IEC 60870-5-103 PROTOCOL

PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  IEC 60870-5-103
 IEC103 IEC103 COMMON Range: 0 to 254 in steps of 1

 PROTOCOL ADDRESS OF ASDU: 0
IEC103 SYNC TIMEOUT: Range: 1 to 1440 min in steps of 1
MESSAGE
1
 IEC103 INPUTS Range: see sub-menu below
MESSAGE
 BINARY
 IEC103 INPUTS Range: see sub-menu below
MESSAGE
 MEASURANDS
 IEC103 COMMANDS Range: see sub-menu below
MESSAGE
 5
The B30 is provided with optional IEC 60870-5-103 communications capability. This feature is specified as
a software option at the time of ordering. See the Order Codes section in chapter 2 for details.
The IEC 60870-5-103 protocol is enabled when the SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  PROTOCOL set-
ting is set to IEC 60870-5-103.
IEC103 COMMON ADDRESS OF ASDU: This setting uniquely defines this B30 on the serial line. Select an ID between 0 and
254. This ID does not need to be in sequential order for all stations that communicate with a controller, but it is recom-
mended. Note that RS485 only allows a maximum of 32 slave stations on a communication line, so the entire range of 254
addresses is never exhausted.
IEC103 SYNC TIMEOUT: This setting defines the time that the B30 waits for a synchronization message. The B30 synchro-
nizes its clock using all available sources, with the source synching more frequently overwriting the time of the other
sources. Since the synchronization message received from the IEC 60870-5-103 master is less frequent than IRIG-B, PTP,
or SNTP, its time is overwritten by these three sources, if any of them is active. If the synchronization timeout occurs and
none of IRIG-B, PTP, or SNTP is active, the B30 sets the invalid bit in the time stamp of a time-tagged message.
The settings for the remaining menus are outlined as follows.
PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  IEC60870-5-103  IEC103 INPUTS BINARY
 IEC103 INPUTS  POINT 0 Range: see sub-menu below

 BINARY 
 POINT 1 Range: see sub-menu below

MESSAGE

 POINT 95 Range: see sub-menu below

MESSAGE


 POINT 0 POINT 0 FUN Range: 0 to 255 in steps of 1

 0
POINT 0 INF Range: 0 to 255 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
0
POINT 0 Input Range: FlexLogic operand
MESSAGE
Off
↓
 POINT 95 POINT 95 FUN Range: 0 to 255 in steps of 1

 0
POINT 95 INF Range: 0 to 255 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
0
POINT 95 Input Range: FlexLogic operand
MESSAGE
Off
The binary input points are mapped using elements from a list of possible FlexLogic operands. A maximum of 96 binary
inputs (points) can be mapped this way.
The IEC60870-5-103 point list always starts with point 0 and ends at the first "Off" value. Since the IEC 60870-5-103 point
list must be in a continuous block, any points assigned after the first "Off" point are ignored.
5 For each defined point, set appropriate values for the Function Type (FUN) and Information Number (INF), which form the
Information Object Identifier field of the ASDU, as defined in IEC60870-5-103.
The binary input points are sent as Class 1 data. They are sent either as a response to a general interrogation received
from the controller or reported spontaneously. Spontaneous transmission occurs as a response to cyclic Class 2 requests.
If the B30 wants to transmit Class 1 data at that time, it demands access for Class 1 data transmission (ACD=1 in the con-
trol field of the response).
For any change to take effect, restart the relay.
PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  IEC60870-5-103  IEC103 INPUTS MEASURANDS
 IEC103 INPUTS  ASDU 1 Range: see sub-menu below

 MEASURANDS 
 ASDU 2 Range: see sub-menu below

MESSAGE


MESSAGE


MESSAGE


 ASDU 1 ASDU 1 TYP: Range: 3 or 9

 9
ASDU 1 FUN: Range: 0 to 255 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
0
ASDU 1 INF: Range: 0 to 255 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
0
ASDU 1 SCAN TOUT: Range: 0 to 1000 s in steps of 1
MESSAGE
0
ASDU 1 ANALOG 1 Range: FlexAnalog parameter
MESSAGE
Off
ASDU 1 ANALOG 1 Range: 0.000 to 65.535 in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
FACTOR: 1.000
ASDU 1 ANALOG 1 Range: -32768 to 32767 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
OFFSET: 0
↓

MESSAGE
Off
MESSAGE
FACTOR: 1.000
5
MESSAGE
OFFSET: 0
↓
 ASDU 4 ASDU 4 TYP: Range: 3 or 9
 9
ASDU 4 FUN: Range: 0 to 255 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
0
ASDU 4 INF: Range: 0 to 255 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
0
ASDU 4 SCAN TOUT: Range: 0 to 1000 s in steps of 1
MESSAGE
0
MESSAGE
Off
MESSAGE
FACTOR: 1.000
MESSAGE
OFFSET: 0
↓

MESSAGE
Off
MESSAGE
FACTOR: 1.000
MESSAGE
OFFSET: 0

The configuration menu allows a maximum of four ASDUs containing measurands.

Measurands are sent as a response to Class 2 requests, which are cyclic requests coming from the master.
TYPE IDENTIFICATION (TYP): The configuration field TYP indicates how many measurands are present in the corresponding
ASDU. Each ASDU can take either 4 or 9 measurands maximum, depending on the type identification (3 respectively 9).
FUNCTION TYPE (FUN) AND INFORMATION NUMBER (INF): These two fields form the Information Object Identifier of the ASDU
as defined in IEC60870-103. For any change to take effect, restart the relay.
SCAN TIMEOUT (SCAN TOUT): This is the cyclic period used by the B30 to decide when a measurand ASDU is included in a
response. The measurand is sent as response to a Class 2 request when the corresponding timeout expires. The default
value 0 means 500 ms.
ANALOG #: This field contains the actual measurand to be sent in the response to the master. The measurands can be
mapped using elements from a list of FlexAnalog operands. The measurands sent are voltage, current, power, power fac-
tor, and frequency. If any other FlexAnalog is chosen, the B30 sends 0 instead of its value. Note that the power is transmit-
ted in KW, not W. Measurands are transmitted as ASDU 3 or ASDU 9 (type identification value set to measurands I,
respectively measurands II).
Each IEC60870-5-103 measurands list ends at the first unconfigured ("Off") value. Any measurand assigned after the first
"Off" value is ignored.
At least one measurand per ASDU must be configured in order to configure the following ASDU. For example, the user can
configure only one measurand for each ASDU, but the user is not allowed to skip ASDU2 and configure measurands in
ASDU3.
5 ANALOG # FACTOR AND OFFSET: For each measurand included in the ASDU, a factor and offset can also be configured. The
factor and offset allow for scaling to be performed on measurands. The final measurement sent to the IEC60870-103 mas-
ter is then "a*x + b", where x is the measurand, a is the multiplying factor and b is the offset. The master has to perform the
reversed operation in order to retrieve the actual value if such scaling is done. By default a = 1 and b = 0, so no scaling is
done if these values are left at their defaults. Examples of when scaling is appropriate are as follows:
• If the measured value contains decimals and it is important to preserve the resolution. Since the format for transmitting
the measurand does not permit decimals, a factor a>1 can be applied before transmission. For example, a frequency
F=59.9Hz can be transmitted as Ft = 10 * F = 10 * 59.9 = 599. In this case a = 10, b = 0. The master receives 599 and
has to divide by 10 to retrieve the real value 59.9.
• If the measured value is larger than what fits in the format defined in IEC103. The format defined in the standard allows
for signed integers up to 4095. By offsetting, unsigned integers up to 4096 + 4095 = 8191 are supported. Scaling using
factors <1 can be required in such cases. The calculation is outlined in the IEC60870-5-103 appendix. Two examples
follow, where you decide factors a and b.
Example 1: Nominal power Pn = 100MW = 100000KW (power is transmitted in KW)
Since P can be both positive and negative:
Transmitted power Pt = (4095/(Pn*2.4)) * P = (4095/(100000 * 2.4) ) * P
= 0.017 * P
a = 0.017
b=0
Pt = 0.017 * P
For a max power 100000KW * 2.4 = 240000KW, we transmit
Pt = 0.017 * 240000 = 4080
A value above 240 MW is indicated by overflow.
Example 2: Nominal voltage Vn = 500000V

Since RMS voltage V can be only positive:

Transmitted voltage Vt = (8191/(Vn*2.4)) * V - 4096 =

= (8191/(500000 * 2.4) ) * V - 4096 = 0.0068 * V - 4096
a = 0.0068
Since the step is in increments of 0.001, we round it at:
a = 0.006
b = -4096
Vt = 0.006 * V - 4096
For max voltage 500000V * 2.4 = 1200000V, we transmit
Vt = 0.006 * 1200000 - 4096 = 7200 - 4096 = 3104
PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  IEC60870-5-103  IEC103 COMMANDS
 IEC103 COMMANDS  COMMAND 0 Range: see sub-menu below

 
 COMMAND 1 Range: see sub-menu below
MESSAGE

↓
 COMMAND 31 Range: see sub-menu below

MESSAGE

5
 COMMAND 0 COMMAND 0 FUN: Range: 0 to 255 in steps of 1
 0
COMMAND 0 INF: Range: 0 to 255 in steps of 1

MESSAGE
0
COMMAND 0 ON: Range: Virtual input

MESSAGE
Off
COMMAND 0 OFF: Range: Virtual input

MESSAGE
Off
 COMMAND 31 COMMAND 31 FUN: Range: 0 to 255 in steps of 1

 0
COMMAND 31 INF: Range: 0 to 255 in steps of 1

MESSAGE
0
COMMAND 31 ON: Range: Virtual input

MESSAGE
Off
COMMAND 31 OFF: Range: Virtual input

MESSAGE
Off
Commands are received as General Command (Type Identification 20). The user can configure which action to perform
when an ASDU command comes.
A list of available mappings is provided on the B30. This includes 64 virtual inputs (see the following table). The ON and
OFF for the same ASDU command can be mapped to different virtual inputs.
Each command is identified by the unique combination made by the function type (FUN), and information number (INF). If
the master sends an ASDU command that does not have the FUN and INF of any configured command, the relay rejects it.

Table 5–8: COMMANDS MAPPING TABLE

DESCRIPTION VALUE
Off 0
Virtual Input 1 1
Virtual Input 2 2
...
Virtual Input 64 64
5.2.5 MODBUS USER MAP
PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  MODBUS USER MAP
 MODBUS USER MAP ADDRESS 1: 0 Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1

 VALUE: 0
ADDRESS 2: 0 Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
VALUE: 0
MESSAGE
VALUE: 0
↓

MESSAGE
VALUE: 0
5 The Modbus user map provides read-only access for up to 256 registers. To obtain a memory map value, enter the desired
address in the ADDRESS line (converted from hex to decimal format). The corresponding value displays in the VALUE line. A
value of “0” in subsequent register ADDRESS lines automatically returns values for the previous ADDRESS lines incremented
by “1”. An address value of “0” in the initial register means “none” and values of “0” display for all registers. Different
ADDRESS values can be entered as required in any of the register positions.
5.2.6 REAL TIME CLOCK
a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  REAL TIME CLOCK
 REAL TIME SYNCRONIZING SOURCE: Range: None, PP/IRIG-B/PTP/SNTP, IRIG-B/PP/PTP/

 CLOCK None SNTP, PP/PTP/IRIG-B/SNTP
REAL TIME CLOCK

MESSAGE Range:Enabled, Disabled
EVENTS: Disabled
IRIG-B SIGNAL TYPE:
MESSAGE Range:None, DC Shift, Amplitude Modulated
None
 PRECISION TIME
MESSAGE See below
 PROTOCOL (1588)
 SNTP PROTOCOL
MESSAGE See below

 LOCAL TIME
MESSAGE See below

The relay contains a real time clock (RTC) to create timestamps for communications protocols as well as for historical data,
such as event records and oscillography. When the relay restarts, the RTC initializes from an onboard battery-backed
clock, which has the same accuracy as an electronic watch, approximately ±1 minute per month (~23 ppm). Once the RTC
is synchronized with the Precision Time Protocol (PTP), IRIG-B, or SNTP, its accuracy approaches that of the synchroniz-
ing time delivered to the relay. While the RTC is not synchronized via PTP or IRIG-B, or the relay determines than it has an

offset possibly greater than 10 µs from the international time standard, the CLOCK UNSYNCHRONIZED FlexLogic oper-
and is activated.
The SYNCHRONIZING SOURCE setting displays when the relay includes the IEEE 1588 software option. The setting config-
ures the priority sequence of the time synchronization source, to determine which of the available external time sources to
use for time synchronization. A setting of None causes the RTC and the synchrophasor clock to free-run until the clock is
changed from the front panel or from communications protocols. A setting of PP/IRIG-B/PTP/SNTP, IRIG-B/PP/PTP/SNTP,
or PP/PTP/IRIG-B/SNTP causes the relay to track the first source named that is enabled and operational, or free-run if
none of these are available. Here, PP means a time source that is strictly compliant with PP, and PTP means a time source
that is not strictly compliant with PP. When a time source fails or recovers, the relay automatically transfers synchronization
as required by this setting.
When the relay does not have the IEEE 1588 software option and this setting does not display, it uses IRIG-B when
enabled and operational, then failing that SNTP when configured and operational, and otherwise it free-runs unless the
clock is changed from the front panel or from communications protocols.
Whenever a time synchronization message is received through any of the active protocols, the UR clock updates. However,
given that IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 60870-5-104, Modbus, and DNP are low accuracy time synchronization methods, avoid
their use for synchronization when better accuracy time protocols, such as IRIG-B and PTP, are active in the system.
See the COMMANDS SET DATE AND TIME menu section of this manual to manually set the RTC.
The REAL TIME CLOCK EVENTS setting allows changes to the date and/or time to be captured in the event record. The event
records the RTC time before the adjustment. A Date/Time Changed event is generated when:
• The real time clock changed from SNTP/PTP/IRIG-B and the time difference is more than one second
• The real time clock changed from the front panel or via Modbus register. The relay always generates this event regard-
less of the time difference.
• The Daylight Saving Time (DST) setting gets enabled and the current relay time is already in the DST zone 5
• The real time clock enters or leaves DST
To enable IRIG-B synchronization, the input IRIG-B SIGNAL TYPE must be set to DC Shift or Amplitude Modulated. IRIG-B
synchronization can be disabled by making this setting None.
To configure and enable PTP and/or SNTP, or to set local time parameters (for example time zone, daylight savings), use
the following sections.
b) PRECISION TIME PROTOCOL (1588)

PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  REAL TIME CLOCK  PRECISION TIME PROTOCOL (1588)
 PRECISION TIME STRICT POWER PROFILE: Range: Enabled, Disabled

 PROTOCOL (1588) Disabled
PTP DOMAIN NUMBER Range: 0 to 255
MESSAGE
0
PTP VLAN PRIORITY Range: 0 to 7
MESSAGE
4
PTP VLAN ID Range: 0 to 4095
MESSAGE
0
 PTP PORT 1
MESSAGE


PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  REAL TIME CLOCK  PRECISION TIME PROTOCOL (1588)  PTP PORT 1(3)
PORT 1 PTP FUNCTION: Range: Enabled, Disabled

MESSAGE
Disabled
PORT 1 PATH DELAY Range: 0 to 60 000 ns in steps of 1
MESSAGE
ADDER: 00000 ns
PORT 1 PATH DELAY Range: –1 000 to +1 000 ns in steps of 1
MESSAGE
ASYMMETRY: 0000 ns
The UR supports the Precision Time Protocol (PTP) specified in IEEE Std 1588 2008 using the Power Profile (PP) specified
in IEEE Std C37.238 2011. This enables the relay to synchronize to the international time standard over an Ethernet net-
work that implements PP.
The relay can be configured to operate on some PTP networks that are not strictly PP. Time accuracy can be less than
specified for a PP network. Tolerated deviations from strict PP include 1) missing declaration of PP compliance in the mes-
sages, 2) connection to a network device that does not support the PTP peer delay mechanism, 3) jitter substantially
greater than 1 µs in received event messages, and 4) certain non-compliant announce and sync message update rates.
The relay implements PTP according to IEEE Std 1588 2008 and the equivalent IEC 61588:2009(E), sometimes
referred to as version 2 PTP. It does not support the previous version of the standard (version 1).
NOTE
PTP is a protocol that allows multiple clocks in a network to synchronize with one another. It permits synchronization accu-
racies better than 1 ns, but this requires each and every component in the network achieve very high levels of accuracy and
a very high baud rate, faster than normally used for relay communications. When operating over a generic Ethernet net-
work, time error may amount to 1 ms or more. PP is a profile of PTP which specifies a limited subset of PTP suitable for use
5 in power system protection, control, automation and data communication applications, and thereby facilitates interoperabil-
ity between different vendor’s clocks and switches. PP specifies a worst-case delivered time error of less than 1 µs over a
16-hop network.
In a PTP system and in a PP system, the clocks automatically organize themselves into a master-slave synchronization
hierarchy with the “best” clock available making itself the "grandmaster" at the top of the hierarchy; all others make them-
selves “slaves” and track the grandmaster. Typically the grandmaster clock receives its time from GPS satellites or some
other link to the international time standard. If the grandmaster fails, the next “best” clock available in the domain assumes
the grandmaster role. Should a clock on starting up discover it is “better” that the present grandmaster, it assumes the
grandmaster role and the previous grandmaster reverts to slave. The B30 qualification mechanism accepts a potential
master clock as a new grandmaster, when in a four-second interval it has received three announce messages from it, all
better than the present grandmaster clock and better than any other announce in this interval.
Time messages issued by the grandmaster are delayed as they pass through the network both due to the finite speed of
the signal in the interconnecting fiber or wire, and due to processing delays in the Ethernet switches. Each clock and switch
implementing PP measures the propagation delay to each of its PP neighbors, and compensates for these delays in the
time received. Each network device implementing PP measures the processing delay it introduces in each time message
and compensates for this delay in the time it transmits. As a result, the time delivered to end-devices such as the UR are
virtually identical to the grandmaster time. Should one of the network devices in the hierarchy not fully implement PP, the
associated propagation delay and/or latency may not be compensated for, and the time received at the end-device could be
in error by more than 100 µs.
See the Settings > Product Setup > Real Time Clock section of this manual for a description of when time values
received via PTP are used to update the relay’s real time clock.
The following settings are available for configuring the relay for PTP.
STRICT POWER PROFILE
• Power profile (IEEE Std C37.238 2011) requires that the relay only select as a grandmaster power profile compliant
clocks, that the delivered time have worst-case error of ±1 µs, and that the peer delay mechanism be implemented.
With the strict power profile setting enabled, the relay will only select as master clocks displaying the IEEE_C37_238
identification codes. It will use a port only when the peer delay mechanism is operational. With the strict power profile
setting disabled, the relay will use clocks without the power profile identification when no power profile clocks are pres-
ent, and will use ports even if the peer delay mechanism is non-operational.
• This setting applies to all of the relay’s PTP capable ports.

PTP DOMAIN NUMBER

• This setting should be set to the domain number of the grandmaster-capable clock(s) to be synchronized to. A net-
work may support multiple time distribution domains, each distinguished with a unique domain number. More com-
monly, there is a single domain using the default domain number zero.
PTP VLAN PRIORITY
• This setting selects the value of the priority field in the 802.1Q VLAN tag in request messages issued by the relay’s
peer delay mechanism. In compliance with PP the default VLAN priority is 4, but it is recommended that in accordance
with PTP it be set to 7.
• Depending on the characteristics of the device to which the relay is directly linked, VLAN Priority may have no effect.
PTP VLAN ID
• This setting selects the value of the ID field in the 802.1Q VLAN tag in request messages issued by the relay’s peer
delay mechanism. It is provided in compliance with PP. As these messages have a destination address that indicates
they are not to be bridged, their VLAN ID serves no function, and so may be left at its default value.
• Depending on the characteristics of the device to which the relay is directly linked, VLAN ID may have no effect.
PORT 1 ... 3 FUNCTION
• While this port setting is selected to disabled, PTP is disabled on this port. The relay does not generate or listen to
PTP messages on this port.
PORT 1 ... 3 PATH DELAY ADDER 5
• The time delivered by PTP is advanced by the time value in this setting prior to the time being used to synchronize the
relay’s real time clock. This is to compensate to the extent practical for time delivery delays not compensated for in the
network. In a fully compliant PP network, the peer delay and the processing delay mechanisms compensate for all the
delays between the grandmaster and the relay. In such networks, this setting should be zero.
• In networks containing one or more switches and/or clocks that do not implement both of these mechanisms, not all
delays are compensated, so the time of message arrival at the relay will be later than the time indicated in the mes-
sage. This setting can be used to approximately compensate for this delay. However, as the relay is not aware of net-
work switching that dynamically changes the amount of uncompensated delay, there is no setting that will always
completely correct for uncompensated delay. A setting can be chosen that will reduce worst-case error to half of the
range between minimum and maximum uncompensated delay, if these values are known.
PORT 1 ... 3 PATH DELAY ASYMMETRY
• This setting corresponds to “delayAsymmetry” in PTP, which is used by the peer delay mechanism to compensate for
any difference in the propagation delay between the two directions of a link. Except in unusual cases, the two fibers are
of essentially identical length and composition, so this setting should be set to zero.
• In unusual cases where the length of the link is different in different directions, this setting should be set to the number
of nanoseconds the Ethernet propagation delay to the relay is longer than the mean of path propagation delays to and
from the relay. For instance, if it is known say from the physical length of the fibers and the propagation speed in the
fibers that the delay from the relay to the Ethernet switch it is connected to is 9 000 ns and the that the delay from the
switch to the relay is 11 000 ns, then the mean delay is 10 000 ns, and the path delay asymmetry is 11000 - 10000 =
+1000 ns.

c) SNTP PROTOCOL
PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  REAL TIME CLOCK  SNTP PROTOCOL
 SNTP PROTOCOL SNTP FUNCTION: Range: Enabled, Disabled

 Disabled
SNTP SERVER IP ADDR: Range: Standard IP address format
MESSAGE
0.0.0.0
SNTP UDP PORT Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
NUMBER: 123
The B30 supports the Simple Network Time Protocol specified in RFC-2030. With SNTP, the B30 can obtain clock time
over an Ethernet network. The B30 acts as an SNTP client to receive time values from an SNTP/NTP server, usually a ded-
icated product using a GPS receiver to provide an accurate time. UR series relays support unicast, broadcast, multicast,
and anycast SNTP functionality.
The SNTP FUNCTION setting enables or disabled the SNTP feature on the B30.
To use SNTP in unicast mode, SNTP SERVER IP ADDR must be set to the SNTP/NTP server IP address. Once this address is
set and SNTP FUNCTION is “Enabled,” the B30 attempts to obtain time values from the SNTP/NTP server. Since many time
values are obtained and averaged, it generally takes three to four minutes until the B30 clock is closely synchronized with
the SNTP/NTP server. It takes up to two minutes for the B30 to signal an SNTP self-test error if the server is offline.
To use SNTP in broadcast mode, set the SNTP SERVER IP ADDR setting to “0.0.0.0” and SNTP FUNCTION to “Enabled.” The
B30 then listens to SNTP messages sent to the “all ones” broadcast address for the subnet. The B30 waits up to 18 min-
utes (>1024 seconds) without receiving an SNTP broadcast message before signaling an SNTP self-test error.
The SNTP UDP PORT NUMBER is 123 for normal SNTP operation. If SNTP is not required, close the port by setting it to 0.
5 When the SNTP UDP PORT NUMBER is set to 0, the change takes effect when the B30 is restarted.
NOTE
d) LOCAL TIME
PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  REAL TIME CLOCK  LOCAL TIME
 LOCAL TIME LOCAL TIME OFFSET Range: –24.0 to 24.0 hrs in steps of 0.5
 FROM UTC: 0.0 hrs
DAYLIGHT SAVINGS Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
TIME: Disabled
DST START MONTH: Range: January to December (all months)
MESSAGE
January
DST START DAY: Range: Sunday to Saturday (all days of the week)
MESSAGE
Sunday
DST START DAY Range: First, Second, Third, Fourth, Last
MESSAGE
INSTANCE: First
DST START HOUR: Range: 0 to 23
MESSAGE
2
DST STOP MONTH: Range: January to December (all months)
MESSAGE
January
DST STOP DAY: Range: Sunday to Saturday (all days of the week)
MESSAGE
Sunday
DST STOP DAY Range: First, Second, Third, Fourth, Last
MESSAGE
INSTANCE: First
DST STOP HOUR: Range: 0 to 23
MESSAGE
2

The UR device maintains two times: local time and Universal Coordinated Time (UTC). Local time can be provided by IRIG-
B signals. UTC time is provided by SNTP servers.
The real-time clock (RTC) and time stamps reported in historical records and communication protocols can be incorrect if
the Local Time settings are not configured properly.
See the IRIG-B section in the Installation chapter for guidance on these settings when using an IRIG-B source that sets the
IRIG-B control bits according to IEEE Std 1344-1995.
The LOCAL TIME OFFSET FROM UTC setting is used to specify the local time zone offset from UTC (Greenwich Mean Time) in
hours. Time zones in the eastern hemisphere have positive values; time zones in the western hemisphere have negative
values. A value of zero causes the relay to use UTC for local time. This setting has two uses. When the system RTC is syn-
chronized with a communications protocol providing only local time or it is free-running, the offset setting is used to calcu-
late UTC from the local time these provide. When the RTC is synchronized with a communications protocol providing only
UTC (such as PTP or SNTP), the time offset setting is used to determine local time from the UTC provided. PTP
ALTERNATE_TIME_OFFSET_INDICATOR TLVs are not used to calculate local time.
The DAYLIGHT SAVINGS TIME (DST) settings can be used to allow the relay to follow the DST rules of the local time zone.
Note that when IRIG-B time synchronization is active, the local time in the IRIG-B signal contains any daylight savings time
offset and so the DST settings are ignored.
5.2.7 USER-PROGRAMMABLE FAULT REPORT
PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  USER-PROGRAMMABLE FAULT REPORT  USER-PROGRAMMABLE FAULT REPORT 1(2)
 USER-PROGRAMMABLE FAULT REPORT 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

 FAULT REPORT 1 FUNCTION: Disabled
5
PRE-FAULT 1 TRIGGER:
MESSAGE
Off
FAULT 1 TRIGGER: Range: FlexLogic operand
MESSAGE
Off
FAULT REPORT 1 #1: Range: Off, any actual value analog parameter
MESSAGE
Off
MESSAGE
Off
MESSAGE
Off
↓
MESSAGE
Off
When enabled, this function monitors the pre-fault trigger. The pre-fault data are stored in the memory for prospective cre-
ation of the fault report on the rising edge of the pre-fault trigger. The element waits for the fault trigger as long as the pre-
fault trigger is asserted, but not shorter than 1 second. When the fault trigger occurs, the fault data is stored and the com-
plete report is created. If the fault trigger does not occur within 1 second after the pre-fault trigger drops out, the element
resets and no record is created.
The user programmable record contains the following information: the user-programmed relay name, detailed firmware
revision (7.2x, for example) and relay model (B30), the date and time of trigger, the name of pre-fault trigger (a specific
FlexLogic operand), the name of fault trigger (a specific FlexLogic operand), the active setting group at pre-fault trigger, the
active setting group at fault trigger, pre-fault values of all programmed analog channels (one cycle before pre-fault trigger),
and fault values of all programmed analog channels (at the fault trigger).
Each fault report is stored as a file to a maximum capacity of ten files. An eleventh trigger overwrites the oldest file. The
EnerVista UR Setup software is required to view all captured data. A FAULT RPT TRIG event is automatically created when
the report is triggered.

The relay includes two user-programmable fault reports to enable capture of two types of trips (for example, trip from ther-
mal protection with the report configured to include temperatures, and short-circuit trip with the report configured to include
voltages and currents). Both reports feed the same report file queue.
The last record is available as individual data items via communications protocols.
• PRE-FAULT 1 TRIGGER: Specifies the FlexLogic operand to capture the pre-fault data. The rising edge of this oper-
and stores one cycle-old data for subsequent reporting. The element waits for the fault trigger to actually create a
record as long as the operand selected as PRE-FAULT 1 TRIGGER is “On”. If the operand remains “Off” for 1 second, the
element resets and no record is created.
• FAULT 1 TRIGGER: Specifies the FlexLogic operand to capture the fault data. The rising edge of this operand stores
the data as fault data and results in a new report. The trigger (not the pre-fault trigger) controls the date and time of the
report.
• FAULT REPORT 1 #1 to FAULT REPORT 1 #32: These settings specify an actual value such as voltage or current
magnitude, true RMS, phase angle, frequency, temperature, etc., to be stored should the report be created. Up to 32
channels can be configured. Two reports are configurable to cope with variety of trip conditions and items of interest.
5.2.8 OSCILLOGRAPHY
a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  OSCILLOGRAPHY
 OSCILLOGRAPHY NUMBER OF RECORDS: Range: 1 to 64 in steps of 1

 15
TRIGGER MODE: Range: Automatic Overwrite, Protected
MESSAGE
5 Automatic Overwrite
Range: 0 to 100% in steps of 1
TRIGGER POSITION:
MESSAGE
50%
TRIGGER SOURCE: Range: FlexLogic operand
MESSAGE
Off
AC INPUT WAVEFORMS: Range: Off; 8, 16, 32, 64 samples/cycle
MESSAGE
16 samples/cycle
 DIGITAL CHANNELS
MESSAGE

 ANALOG CHANNELS
MESSAGE

Oscillography records contain waveforms captured at the sampling rate as well as other relay data at the point of trigger.
Oscillography records are triggered by a programmable FlexLogic operand. Multiple oscillography records can be captured
simultaneously.
The NUMBER OF RECORDS is selectable, but the number of cycles captured in a single record varies considerably based on
other factors, such as sample rate and the number of operational modules. There is a fixed amount of data storage for
oscillography; the more data captured, the less the number of cycles captured per record. See the ACTUAL VALUES 
RECORDS  OSCILLOGRAPHY menu to view the number of cycles captured per record. The following table provides sam-
ple configurations with corresponding cycles/record. The minimum number of oscillographic records is three.

Table 5–9: OSCILLOGRAPHY CYCLES/RECORD EXAMPLE

RECORDS CT/VTS SAMPLE DIGITAL ANALOG CYCLES PER
RATE CHANNELS CHANNELS RECORD
3 1 32 32 16 2399
3 1 64 32 16 1450
16 1 32 32 16 666
16 1 64 32 16 402
32 1 32 32 16 352
32 1 64 32 16 213
3 2 32 32 16 1516
3 2 64 32 16 851
16 2 32 32 16 421
A new record can automatically overwrite an older record when TRIGGER MODE is set to “Automatic Overwrite.”
Set the TRIGGER POSITION to a percentage of the total buffer size (for example, 10%, 50%, 75%, and so on). A trigger posi-
tion of 25% consists of 25% pre- and 75% post-trigger data. The TRIGGER SOURCE is always captured in oscillography and
can be any FlexLogic parameter (element state, contact input, virtual output, and so on). The relay sampling rate is 64 sam-
ples per cycle.
The AC INPUT WAVEFORMS setting determines the sampling rate at which AC input signals (that is, current and voltage) are
stored. Reducing the sampling rate allows longer records to be stored. This setting has no effect on the internal sampling
rate of the relay which is always 64 samples per cycle; that is, it has no effect on the fundamental calculations of the device.
When changes are made to the oscillography settings, all existing oscillography records are cleared.
NOTE
5
b) DIGITAL CHANNELS
PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  OSCILLOGRAPHY  DIGITAL CHANNELS
 DIGITAL CHANNELS DIGITAL CHANNEL 1: Range: FlexLogic operand

 Off
DIGITAL CHANNEL 2: Range: FlexLogic operand
MESSAGE
Off
MESSAGE
Off
↓

MESSAGE
Off
A DIGITAL 1(63) CHANNEL setting selects the FlexLogic operand state recorded in an oscillography trace. The length of each
oscillography trace depends in part on the number of parameters selected here. Parameters set to “Off” are ignored. Upon
startup, the relay will automatically prepare the parameter list.

c) ANALOG CHANNELS
PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  OSCILLOGRAPHY  ANALOG CHANNELS
 ANALOG CHANNELS ANALOG CHANNEL 1: Range: Off, any FlexAnalog parameter

 Off See Appendix A for complete list.
ANALOG CHANNEL 2: Range: Off, any FlexAnalog parameter

MESSAGE See Appendix A for complete list.
Off
Off
↓

Off
These settings select the metering actual value recorded in an oscillography trace. The length of each oscillography trace
depends in part on the number of parameters selected here. Parameters set to “Off” are ignored. The parameters available
in a given relay are dependent on:
• The type of relay,
• The type and number of CT/VT hardware modules installed, and
• The type and number of analog input hardware modules installed.
Upon startup, the relay will automatically prepare the parameter list. A list of all possible analog metering actual value
parameters is presented in Appendix A: FlexAnalog parameters. The parameter index number shown in any of the tables is
5 used to expedite the selection of the parameter on the relay display. It can be quite time-consuming to scan through the list
of parameters via the relay keypad and display - entering this number via the relay keypad will cause the corresponding
parameter to be displayed.
All eight CT/VT module channels are stored in the oscillography file. The CT/VT module channels are named as follows:
<slot_letter><terminal_number>—<I or V><phase A, B, or C, or 4th input>
The fourth current input in a bank is called IG, and the fourth voltage input in a bank is called VX. For example, F2-IB desig-
nates the IB signal on terminal 2 of the CT/VT module in slot F.
If there are no CT/VT modules and analog input modules, no analog traces will appear in the file; only the digital traces will
appear.
5.2.9 USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS
a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS
 USER-PROGRAMMABLE  LED TEST

See below.
 LEDS 
 TRIP & ALARM LEDS

 LED 1
MESSAGE
 LED 2
MESSAGE
 LED 3
↓
MESSAGE
 LED 48

The 48 amber LEDs on relay panels 2 and 3 can be customized to illuminate when a selected FlexLogic operand is in the
logic 1 state. The trip and alarm LEDs on panel 1 can also be customized in a similar manner. To ensure correct functional-
ity of all LEDs, an LED test feature is also provided.
b) LED TEST
PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS  LED TEST
 LED TEST LED TEST FUNCTION: Range: Disabled, Enabled.

 Disabled
LED TEST CONTROL: Range: FlexLogic operand
MESSAGE
Off
When enabled, the LED test can be initiated from any digital input or user-programmable condition such as user-program-
mable pushbutton. The control operand is configured under the LED TEST CONTROL setting. The test covers all LEDs,
including the LEDs of the optional user-programmable pushbuttons.
The test consists of three stages.
1. All 62 LEDs on the relay are illuminated. This is a quick test to verify if any of the LEDs is “burned”. This stage lasts as
long as the control input is on, up to a maximum of 1 minute. After 1 minute, the test will end.
2. All the LEDs are turned off, and then one LED at a time turns on for 1 second, then back off. The test routine starts at
the top left panel, moving from the top to bottom of each LED column. This test checks for hardware failures that lead
to more than one LED being turned on from a single logic point. This stage can be interrupted at any time.
3. All the LEDs are turned on. One LED at a time turns off for 1 second, then back on. The test routine starts at the top left
panel moving from top to bottom of each column of the LEDs. This test checks for hardware failures that lead to more
than one LED being turned off from a single logic point. This stage can be interrupted at any time.
5
When testing is in progress, the LEDs are controlled by the test sequence, rather than the protection, control, and monitor-
ing features. However, the LED control mechanism accepts all the changes to LED states generated by the relay and
stores the actual LED states (on or off) in memory. When the test completes, the LEDs reflect the actual state resulting from
relay response during testing. The reset pushbutton will not clear any targets when the LED Test is in progress.
A dedicated FlexLogic operand, LED TEST IN PROGRESS, is set for the duration of the test. When the test sequence is initi-
ated, the LED TEST INITIATED event is stored in the event recorder.
The entire test procedure is user-controlled. In particular, stage 1 can last as long as necessary, and stages 2 and 3 can be
interrupted. The test responds to the position and rising edges of the control input defined by the LED TEST CONTROL set-
ting. The control pulses must last at least 250 ms to take effect. The following diagram explains how the test is executed.

READY TO TEST
Reset the
LED TEST IN PROGRESS
rising edge of the
operand
control input
Start the software image of Restore the LED states

the LEDs from the software image
Set the
LED TEST IN PROGRESS
operand
control input is on
STAGE 1 time-out
(all LEDs on) (1 minute)
dropping edge of the

control input
rising edge of the

Wait 1 second
control input
STAGE 2 rising edge of the

(one LED on at a time) control input
rising edge of the
5
Wait 1 second
control input
rising edge
STAGE 3
of the control
(one LED off at a time) input
842011A1.CDR
Figure 5–9: LED TEST SEQUENCE

APPLICATION EXAMPLE 1:
Assume one needs to check if any of the LEDs is “burned” through user-programmable pushbutton 1. The following set-
tings should be applied. Configure user-programmable pushbutton 1 by making the following entries in the SETTINGS 
PRODUCT SETUP  USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS  USER PUSHBUTTON 1 menu:

PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT TIME: “0.10 s”
Configure the LED test to recognize user-programmable pushbutton 1 by making the following entries in the SETTINGS 
PRODUCT SETUP  USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS  LED TEST menu:
LED TEST FUNCTION: “Enabled”

LED TEST CONTROL: “PUSHBUTTON 1 ON”
The test will be initiated when the user-programmable pushbutton 1 is pressed. The pushbutton should remain pressed for
as long as the LEDs are being visually inspected. When finished, the pushbutton should be released. The relay will then
automatically start stage 2. At this point forward, test may be aborted by pressing the pushbutton.
APPLICATION EXAMPLE 2:
Assume one needs to check if any LEDs are “burned” as well as exercise one LED at a time to check for other failures. This
is to be performed via user-programmable pushbutton 1.
After applying the settings in application example 1, hold down the pushbutton as long as necessary to test all LEDs. Next,
release the pushbutton to automatically start stage 2. Once stage 2 has started, the pushbutton can be released. When
stage 2 is completed, stage 3 will automatically start. The test may be aborted at any time by pressing the pushbutton.

c) TRIP AND ALARM LEDS

PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS  TRIP & ALARM LEDS
 TRIP & ALARM LEDS TRIP LED INPUT: Range: FlexLogic operand
 Off
ALARM LED INPUT: Range: FlexLogic operand
MESSAGE
Off
The trip and alarm LEDs are in the first LED column (enhanced faceplate) and on LED panel 1 (standard faceplate). Each
indicator can be programmed to become illuminated when the selected FlexLogic operand is in the logic 1 state.
d) USER-PROGRAMMABLE LED 1(48)

PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS  USER-PROGRAMMABLE LED 1(48)
 USER-PROGRAMMABLE LED 1 OPERAND: Range: FlexLogic operand

 LED 1 Off
LED 1 TYPE: Range: Self-Reset, Latched
MESSAGE
Self-Reset
There are 48 amber LEDs across the relay faceplate LED panels. Each of these indicators can be programmed to illumi-
nate when the selected FlexLogic operand is in the logic 1 state.
For the standard faceplate, the LEDs are located as follows.
• LED Panel 2: user-programmable LEDs 1 through 24
• LED Panel 3: user programmable LEDs 25 through 48
5
For the enhanced faceplate, the LEDs are located as follows.
• LED column 2: user-programmable LEDs 1 through 12
See the LED Indicators section in chapter 4 for information on the location of these indexed LEDs.
The user-programmable LED settings select the FlexLogic operands that control the LEDs. If the LED 1 TYPE setting is “Self-
Reset” (the default setting), the LED illumination will track the state of the selected LED operand. If the LED 1 TYPE setting is
“Latched”, the LED, once lit, remains so until reset by the faceplate RESET button, from a remote device via a communica-
tions channel, or from any programmed operand, even if the LED operand state de-asserts.
Table 5–10: RECOMMENDED SETTINGS FOR USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS

SETTING PARAMETER SETTING PARAMETER
LED 1 operand SETTING GROUP ACT 1 LED 13 operand Off
LED 7 operand Off LED 19 operand Off

See the figure in the Setting Groups section in the Control Elements section later in this chapter for an example of group
activation.
5.2.10 USER-PROGRAMMABLE SELF TESTS
PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  USER-PROGRAMMABLE SELF TESTS
 USER-PROGRAMMABLE DIRECT RING BREAK Range: Disabled, Enabled. Valid for units equipped with
 SELF TESTS FUNCTION: Enabled Direct Input/Output module.
DIRECT DEVICE OFF Range: Disabled, Enabled. Valid for units equipped with
MESSAGE Direct Input/Output module.
FUNCTION: Enabled
REMOTE DEVICE OFF Range: Disabled, Enabled.
MESSAGE
FUNCTION: Enabled
FIRST ETHERNET FAIL Range: Disabled, Enabled.
MESSAGE
FUNCTION: Disabled
SEC. ETHERNET FAIL Range: Disabled, Enabled.
MESSAGE
FUNCTION: Disabled
THIRD ETHERNET FAIL Range: Disabled, Enabled.
MESSAGE
FUNCTION: Disabled
BATTERY FAIL Range: Disabled, Enabled.
MESSAGE
FUNCTION: Enabled
5 SNTP FAIL Range: Disabled, Enabled.

MESSAGE
FUNCTION: Enabled
IRIG-B FAIL Range: Disabled, Enabled.
MESSAGE
FUNCTION: Enabled
PTP FAIL Range: Disabled, Enabled.
MESSAGE
FUNCTION: Enabled
SFP MODULE FAIL Range: Disabled, Enabled.
MESSAGE
FUNCTION: Disabled
All major self-test alarms are reported automatically with their corresponding FlexLogic operands, events, and targets. Most
of the minor alarms can be disabled if desired.
When in the Disabled mode, minor alarms do not assert a FlexLogic operand, write to the event recorder, or display target
messages. Moreover, they do not trigger the ANY MINOR ALARM or ANY SELF-TEST messages. When in Enabled mode,
minor alarms continue to function along with other major and minor alarms. See the Relay Self-tests section in chapter 7 for
information on major and minor self-test alarms.
5.2.11 CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS
PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS  CONTROL PUSHBUTTON 1(7)
 CONTROL CONTROL PUSHBUTTON 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

 PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION: Disabled
CONTROL PUSHBUTTON 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
There are three standard control pushbuttons, labeled USER 1, USER 2, and USER 3, on the standard and enhanced front
panels. These are user-programmable and can be used for various applications such as performing an LED test, switching
setting groups, and invoking and scrolling though user-programmable displays.

The location of the control pushbuttons are shown in the following figures.
Control pushbuttons
842813A1.CDR
Figure 5–10: CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS (ENHANCED FACEPLATE)

An additional four control pushbuttons are included on the standard faceplate when the B30 is ordered with the 12 user-
programmable pushbutton option.
STATUS EVENT CAUSE

IN SERVICE VOLTAGE
TEST MODE FREQUENCY
TRIP OTHER USER 1 THREE
ALARM PHASE A STANDARD
PICKUP PHASE B USER 2
PHASE C
CONTROL
NEUTRAL/GROUND USER 3 PUSHBUTTONS
USER 4
USER 5 FOUR EXTRA
5
OPTIONAL
USER 6
CONTROL
USER 7 PUSHBUTTONS
842733A2.CDR
Figure 5–11: CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS (STANDARD FACEPLATE)

Control pushbuttons are not typically used for critical operations and are not protected by the control password. However,
by supervising their output operands, the user can dynamically enable or disable control pushbuttons for security reasons.
Each control pushbutton asserts its own FlexLogic operand. These operands should be configured appropriately to perform
the desired function. The operand remains asserted as long as the pushbutton is pressed and resets when the pushbutton
is released. A dropout delay of 100 ms is incorporated to ensure fast pushbutton manipulation will be recognized by various
features that may use control pushbuttons as inputs.
An event is logged in the event record (as per user setting) when a control pushbutton is pressed. No event is logged when
the pushbutton is released. The faceplate keys (including control keys) cannot be operated simultaneously – a given key
must be released before the next one can be pressed.

SETTING
CONTROL PUSHBUTTON
{
1 FUNCTION:
Enabled=1
SETTINGS
SYSTEM SETUP/
BREAKERS/BREAKER 1/
BREAKER 1 PUSHBUTTON
CONTROL:
When applicable
AND RUN
Enabled=1
OFF TIMER
SYSTEM SETUP/ FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BREAKERS/BREAKER 2/ ON 0 CONTROL PUSHBTN 1 ON
BREAKER 2 PUSHBUTTON 100 msec
CONTROL:
842010A2.CDR
Enabled=1
Figure 5–12: CONTROL PUSHBUTTON LOGIC

5.2.12 USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS
PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS  USER PUSHBUTTON 1(16)
 USER PUSHBUTTON 1 PUSHBUTTON 1 Range: Self-Reset, Latched, Disabled

 FUNCTION: Disabled
PUSHBTN 1 ID TEXT: Range: Up to 20 alphanumeric characters
MESSAGE
USER PB 1
PUSHBTN 1 ON TEXT: Range: Up to 20 alphanumeric characters
MESSAGE
PUSHBTN 1 OFF TEXT: Range: Up to 20 alphanumeric characters

MESSAGE
PUSHBTN 1 HOLD: Range: 0.0 to 10.0 s in steps of 0.1

MESSAGE
0.0 s
PUSHBTN 1 SET: Range: FlexLogic operand
MESSAGE
Off
PUSHBTN 1 RESET: Range: FlexLogic operand
MESSAGE
Off
PUSHBTN 1 AUTORST: Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
Disabled
PUSHBTN 1 AUTORST Range: 0.2 to 600.0 s in steps of 0.1
MESSAGE
DELAY: 1.0 s 5
PUSHBTN 1 REMOTE: Range: FlexLogic operand
MESSAGE
Off
PUSHBTN 1 LOCAL: Range: FlexLogic operand
MESSAGE
Off
PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT Range: 0 to 60.00 s in steps of 0.05
MESSAGE
TIME: 0.00 s
PUSHBTN 1 LED CTL: Range: FlexLogic operand
MESSAGE
Off
PUSHBTN 1 MESSAGE: Range: Disabled, Normal, High Priority
MESSAGE
Disabled
PUSHBUTTON 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
The B30 is provided with this optional feature, specified as an option at the time of ordering. Using the
order code for your device, see the order codes in chapter 2 for details.
User-programmable pushbuttons provide an easy and error-free method of entering digital state (on, off) information. The
number depends on the front panel ordered.
• Enhanced horizontal front panel — 16 user-programmable pushbuttons
• Enhanced vertical front panel — 6 user-programmable pushbuttons
• Standard horizontal front panel — 12 user-programmable pushbuttons
User-programmable pushbuttons require a front panel with that option. If the front panel was ordered separately,
update the EnerVista software under Maintenance > Enable Pushbutton.
NOTE

The digital state can be entered locally (by directly pressing the front panel pushbutton) or remotely (via FlexLogic oper-
ands) into FlexLogic equations, protection elements, and control elements. Typical applications include breaker control,
autorecloser blocking, and setting groups changes. The user-programmable pushbuttons are under the control level of
password protection.
The figure shows user-configurable pushbuttons for the enhanced front panel.
USER USER USER USER USER USER USER USER USER USER USER USER USER USER USER USER
LABEL 1 LABEL 2 LABEL 3 LABEL 4 LABEL 5 LABEL 6 LABEL 7 LABEL 8 LABEL 9 LABEL 10 LABEL 11 LABEL 12 LABEL 13 LABEL 14 LABEL 15 LABEL 16
842814A1.CDR
Figure 5–13: USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS (ENHANCED FRONT PANEL

The following figure shows user-configurable pushbuttons for the standard front panel.
1 3 5 7 9 11
USER LABEL USER LABEL USER LABEL USER LABEL USER LABEL USER LABEL
2 4 6 8 10 12
USER LABEL USER LABEL USER LABEL USER LABEL USER LABEL USER LABEL
5
842779A1.cdr
Figure 5–14: USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS (STANDARD FRONT PANEL)

Both the standard and enhanced front panel pushbuttons can be custom labeled with a factory-provided template, available
online at http://www.gegridsolutions.com/multilin. The EnerVista software can also be used to create labels for the
enhanced front panel.
Each pushbutton asserts its own “On” and “Off” FlexLogic operands (for example, PUSHBUTTON 1 ON and PUSHBUTTON 1
OFF). These operands are available for each pushbutton and are used to program specific actions. If any pushbutton is
active, the ANY PB ON operand is asserted.
Each pushbutton has an associated LED indicator. By default, this indicator displays the present status of the correspond-
ing pushbutton (on or off). However, each LED indicator can be assigned to any FlexLogic operand through the PUSHBTN 1
LED CTL setting.
The activation and deactivation of user-programmable pushbuttons depends on whether latched or self-reset mode is pro-
grammed.
• Latched mode: In latched mode, a pushbutton can be set (activated) by asserting the operand assigned to the PUSH-
BTN 1 SET setting or by directly pressing the associated front panel pushbutton. The state of each pushbutton is stored
in non-volatile memory and maintained through a loss of control power.
The pushbutton is reset (deactivated) in latched mode by asserting the operand assigned to the PUSHBTN 1 RESET set-
ting or by directly pressing the associated active front panel pushbutton.
It can also be programmed to reset automatically through the PUSHBTN 1 AUTORST and PUSHBTN 1 AUTORST DELAY set-
tings. These settings enable the autoreset timer and specify the associated time delay. The autoreset timer can be
used in select-before-operate (SBO) breaker control applications, where the command type (close/open) or breaker
location (feeder number) must be selected prior to command execution. The selection must reset automatically if con-
trol is not executed within a specified time period.
• Self-reset mode: In self-reset mode, a user-programmable pushbutton can be set (activated) by asserting the operand
assigned to the PUSHBTN 1 SET setting or by pressing the front panel pushbutton. A pushbutton remains active for the
time it is pressed plus the dropout time specified in the PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT TIME setting. If the pushbutton is activated
via FlexLogic, the pulse duration is specified by the PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT TIME only. The time the operand remains
assigned to the PUSHBTN 1 SET setting remains On has no effect on the pulse duration.

The pulse duration of the remote set or local front panel pushbutton must be at least 50 ms to operate the pushbut-
ton. This allows the user-programmable pushbuttons to properly operate during power cycling events and various
NOTE system disturbances that can cause transient assertion of the operating signals.
The local and remote operation of each user-programmable pushbutton can be inhibited through the PUSHBTN 1 LOCAL and
PUSHBTN 1 REMOTE settings. If local inhibit is applied, the pushbutton ignores set and reset commands executed through
the front panel pushbuttons. If remote inhibit is applied, the pushbutton ignores set and reset commands executed through
FlexLogic operands.
The inhibit functions are not applied to the autoreset feature. The inhibit function can be used in SBO control operations to
prevent user-programmable pushbutton activation and ensuring “one-at-a-time” select operation.
The inhibit functions can also be used to prevent pushbutton activation from the accidental pressing of the front panel push-
buttons. The separate inhibit of the local and remote operation simplifies the implementation of local/remote control super-
vision.
Pushbutton states can be logged by the event recorder. User-defined messages can also be associated with each pushbut-
ton and displayed when the pushbutton is activated and when in latched mode when the pushbutton deactivated.
• PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION: This setting selects the mode of the pushbutton (Self-Reset, Latched, Disabled). If set
to “Disabled,” the pushbutton is not active and the corresponding FlexLogic operands (both “On” and “Off”) are de-
asserted.
• PUSHBTN 1 ID TEXT: This setting specifies the top 20-character line of the user-programmable pushbutton message
and is intended to provide ID information of the pushbutton. See the User-definable Displays section in this chapter for
instructions on how to enter alphanumeric characters from the keypad.
• PUSHBTN 1 ON TEXT: This setting specifies the bottom 20-character line of the user-programmable message and is
displayed when the pushbutton is in the “on” position. See the User-definable Displays section for instructions on
•
entering alphanumeric characters from the keypad.
PUSHBTN 1 OFF TEXT: This setting specifies the bottom 20-character line of the user-programmable pushbutton
5
message and displays when the pushbutton is deactivated and the PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION is “Latched”. A message
does not display when the PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION is “Self-reset” as the pushbutton operand status is implied to be
“Off” upon its release. The length of the “Off” message is configured with the PRODUCT SETUP  DISPLAY PROPERTIES
 FLASH MESSAGE TIME setting.
• PUSHBTN 1 HOLD: This setting specifies the time required for a front panel pushbutton to be pressed before it is
deemed active. This timer is reset upon release of the pushbutton. Note that user-programmable pushbutton operation
requires the front panel pushbutton to be pressed a minimum of 50 ms. This minimum time is required prior to activat-
ing the user-programmable pushbutton hold timer.
• PUSHBTN 1 SET: This setting assigns the FlexLogic operand serving to activate the user-programmable pushbutton
element. The duration of the incoming set signal must be at least 50 ms.
• PUSHBTN 1 RESET: This setting assigns the FlexLogic operand serving to deactivate the user-programmable push-
button element. This setting is applicable only if the user-programmable pushbutton is in "Latched" mode.
• PUSHBTN 1 AUTORST: This setting enables the user-programmable pushbutton autoreset feature. This setting is
applicable only if the pushbutton is in “Latched” mode.
• PUSHBTN 1 AUTORST DELAY: This setting specifies the time delay for automatic reset of the pushbutton when in
"Latched" mode.
• PUSHBTN 1 REMOTE: This setting assigns the FlexLogic operand serving to inhibit user-programmable pushbutton
operation from the operand assigned to the PUSHBTN 1 SET or PUSHBTN 1 RESET settings.
• PUSHBTN 1 LOCAL: This setting assigns the FlexLogic operand serving to inhibit user-programmable pushbutton
operation from the front panel pushbuttons. This inhibit functionality is not applicable to pushbutton autoreset.
• PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT TIME: This setting applies only to “Self-Reset” mode and specifies the duration of the user-
programmable pushbutton active status after the front panel pushbutton has been released. When activated remotely,
this setting specifies the entire activation time of the pushbutton; the length of time the operand selected by PUSHBTN
1 SET remains on has no effect on the pulse duration.
• PUSHBTN 1 LED CTL: This setting assigns the FlexLogic operand serving to drive the front panel pushbutton LED. If
this setting is “Off”, then LED operation is directly linked to the PUSHBUTTON 1 ON operand.

• PUSHBTN 1 MESSAGE: This setting controls the behavior of the user-programmable pushbutton that is programmed
in the PUSHBTN 1 ID and PUSHBTN 1 ON TEXT settings, and the behavior of the user-programmable pushbutton off mes-
sage that is programmed in the PUSHBTN1 ID and PUSHBTN 1 OFF TEXT settings.
When set to "Disabled", user-programmable pushbutton messages do not display. Otherwise the on message displays
when the user-programmable pushbutton becomes activated, and if in the "Latched" mode the off message displays
when the user-programmable pushbutton becomes deactivated.
When set to "Normal", the duration the message displays is as specified by the FLASH MESSAGE TIME setting.
When set to "High Priority", the duration of the off message is as specified by the FLASH MESSAGE TIME setting, but the
on message is displayed as long as the user-programmable pushbutton is activated. While activated, target and other
messages are suppressed. To allow front panel keypad operation, when a keypad button is pressed the message is
supressed for 10 seconds.
• PUSHBUTTON 1 EVENTS: If this setting is enabled, each user-programmable pushbutton state change is logged as
an event into the event recorder.
The figures show the user-programmable pushbutton logic.
SETTING
PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION
= Enabled
= Latched LATCHED To user-programmable
= Self-Reset pushbuttons logic
sheet 2
OR From front panel
SETTING SETTING
PUSHBTN 1 LOCAL PUSHBTN 1 HOLD
Off = 0 TPKP
From front panel AND
0
5 TIMER
50 ms
AND
SETTING 0 OR
PUSHBTN 1 SET
Off = 0 TIMER
50 ms Non-volatile latch
SETTING AND S
AND
0
PUSHBTN 1 REMOTE Latch
Off = 0 R
TIMER
SETTING 200 ms
PUSHBUTTON 1 OFF
0
SETTING
PUSHBTN 1 RESET AND
Off = 0
OR To user-programmable
SETTING OR PUSHBUTTON ON pushbuttons logic
SETTING sheet 2
PUSHBTN 1 AUTORST DELAY
PUSHBTN 1 AUTORST
TPKP
= Enabled
AND AND
= Disabled
0
TIMER
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND 200 ms OR
PUSHBUTTON 1 ON
0
SETTING
AND PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT TIME
0
OR
TRST
AND
842021A4.CDR
Figure 5–15: USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTON LOGIC (Sheet 1 of 2)

OFF MESSAGE
ENGAGE MESSAGE
SETTING
LATCHED FLASH MESSAGE TIME
SETTINGS
0 PUSHBTN ID TEXT
AND
OR TRST = XXXXXXXXXX
PUSHBTN OFF TEXT
= XXXXXXXXXX
Instantaneous
From user-programmable reset *
pushbuttons logic sheet 1
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
LATCHED/SELF-RESET
AND PUSHBUTTON 1 OFF
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
PUSHBUTTON ON PUSHBUTTON 1 ON
ON MESSAGE
SETTING ENGAGE MESSAGE
PUSHBTN 1 MESSAGE
AND
= Disabled
= High Priority SETTINGS
= Normal PUSHBTN ID TEXT
= XXXXXXXXXX
OR
PUSHBTN ON TEXT
SETTING
= XXXXXXXXXX
FLASH MESSAGE TIME
0
AND The message is temporarily removed if
TRST
5
any keypad button is pressed. Ten
seconds of keypad inactivity restores
Instantaneous the message.
Instantaneous reset is executed if any reset *
front panel button is pressed or any new
target or message becomes active.
PUSHBUTTON 1 LED LOGIC

1. If pushbutton 1 LED control is set to off.
Pushbutton 1
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND FLEXLOGIC OPERAND LED
PUSHBUTTON 1 ON PUSHBUTTON 1 ON
PUSHBUTTON 2 ON
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
PUSHBUTTON 3 ON 2. If pushbutton 1 LED control is not set to off.
OR ANY PB ON
SETTING Pushbutton 1
LED
PUSHBTN 1 LED CTL
PUSHBUTTON 16 ON = any FlexLogic operand
The enhanced front panel has 16 operands;
the standard front panel has 12
842024A3.CDR
Figure 5–16: USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTON LOGIC (Sheet 2 of 2)
5.2.13 FLEX STATE PARAMETERS
PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  FLEX STATE PARAMETERS
 FLEX STATE PARAMETER 1: Range: FlexLogic operand

 PARAMETERS Off
PARAMETER 2: Range: FlexLogic operand
MESSAGE
Off
MESSAGE
Off
↓

MESSAGE
Off

This feature provides a mechanism where any of 256 selected FlexLogic operand states can be used for efficient monitor-
ing. The feature allows user-customized access to the FlexLogic operand states in the relay. The state bits are packed so
that 16 states may be read out in a single Modbus register. The state bits can be configured so that all of the states which
are of interest to the user are available in a minimum number of Modbus registers.
The state bits may be read out in the “Flex States” register array beginning at Modbus address 0900h. Sixteen states are
packed into each register, with the lowest-numbered state in the lowest-order bit. There are sixteen registers to accommo-
date the 256 state bits.
5.2.14 USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS
a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS
 USER-DEFINABLE INVOKE AND SCROLL: Range: FlexLogic operand

 DISPLAYS Off
 USER DISPLAY 1 Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters
MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

↓
5 MESSAGE
 USER DISPLAY 16

Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters
This menu provides a mechanism for manually creating up to 16 user-defined information displays in a convenient viewing
sequence in the USER DISPLAYS menu (between the TARGETS and ACTUAL VALUES top-level menus). The sub-menus facili-
tate text entry and Modbus register data pointer options for defining the user display content.
Once programmed, the user-definable displays can be viewed in two ways.
• KEYPAD: Use the MENU key to select the USER DISPLAYS menu item to access the first user-definable display (note
that only the programmed screens are displayed). The screens can be scrolled using the UP and DOWN keys. The
display disappears after the default message time-out period specified by the PRODUCT SETUP  DISPLAY PROPER-
TIES  DEFAULT MESSAGE TIMEOUT setting.
• USER-PROGRAMMABLE CONTROL INPUT: The user-definable displays also respond to the INVOKE AND SCROLL
setting. Any FlexLogic operand (in particular, the user-programmable pushbutton operands), can be used to navigate
the programmed displays.
On the rising edge of the configured operand (such as when the pushbutton is pressed), the displays are invoked by
showing the last user-definable display shown during the previous activity. From this moment onward, the operand
acts exactly as the down key and allows scrolling through the configured displays. The last display wraps up to the first
one. The INVOKE AND SCROLL input and the DOWN key operate concurrently.
When the default timer expires (set by the DEFAULT MESSAGE TIMEOUT setting), the relay will start to cycle through the
user displays. The next activity of the INVOKE AND SCROLL input stops the cycling at the currently displayed user dis-
play, not at the first user-defined display. The INVOKE AND SCROLL pulses must last for at least 250 ms to take effect.

b) USER DISPLAY 1(16)

PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS  USER DISPLAY 1(16)
 USER DISPLAY 1 DISP 1 TOP LINE: Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters


DISP 1 BOTTOM LINE: Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters
MESSAGE
DISP 1 ITEM 1 Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1

MESSAGE
0
MESSAGE
0
MESSAGE
0
MESSAGE
0
DISP 1 ITEM 5: Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
0
Any existing system display can be automatically copied into an available user display by selecting the existing display and
pressing the ENTER key. The display will then prompt ADD TO USER DISPLAY LIST?. After selecting “Yes”, a message indi-
cates that the selected display has been added to the user display list. When this type of entry occurs, the sub-menus are
automatically configured with the proper content – this content may subsequently be edited.
This menu is used to enter user-defined text and user-selected Modbus-registered data fields into the particular user dis- 5
play. Each user display consists of two 20-character lines (top and bottom). The tilde (~) character is used to mark the start
of a data field – the length of the data field needs to be accounted for. Up to five separate data fields can be entered in a
user display – the nth tilde (~) refers to the nth item.
A user display may be entered from the faceplate keypad or the EnerVista UR Setup interface (preferred for convenience).
The following procedure shows how to enter text characters in the top and bottom lines from the faceplate keypad:
1. Select the line to be edited.
2. Press the decimal key to enter text edit mode.
3. Use either VALUE key to scroll through the characters. A space is selected like a character.
4. Press the decimal key to advance the cursor to the next position.
5. Repeat step 3 and continue entering characters until the desired text is displayed.
6. The HELP key may be pressed at any time for context sensitive help information.
7. Press the ENTER key to store the new settings.
To enter a numerical value for any of the five items (the decimal form of the selected Modbus address) from the faceplate
keypad, use the number keypad. Use the value of “0” for any items not being used. Use the HELP key at any selected sys-
tem display (setting, actual value, or command) which has a Modbus address, to view the hexadecimal form of the Modbus
address, then manually convert it to decimal form before entering it (EnerVista UR Setup usage conveniently facilitates this
conversion).
Use the MENU key to go to the user displays menu to view the user-defined content. The current user displays will show in
sequence, changing every four seconds. While viewing a user display, press the ENTER key and then select the ‘Yes”
option to remove the display from the user display list. Use the MENU key again to exit the user displays menu.

An example user display setup and result is shown below:
 USER DISPLAY 1 DISP 1 TOP LINE: Shows user-defined text with first tilde marker.
 Current X ~ A
DISP 1 BOTTOM LINE: Shows user-defined text with second tilde marker.
MESSAGE
Current Y ~ A
DISP 1 ITEM 1: Shows decimal form of user-selected Modbus register
MESSAGE address, corresponding to first tilde marker.
6016
DISP 1 ITEM 2: Shows decimal form of user-selected Modbus register
MESSAGE address, corresponding to second tilde marker.
6357
DISP 1 ITEM 3: This item is not being used. There is no corresponding
MESSAGE tilde marker in top or bottom lines.
0
MESSAGE tilde marker in top or bottom lines.
0
MESSAGE
0 tilde marker in top or bottom lines.
USER DISPLAYS Current X 0.850 Shows the resultant display content.

→
Current Y 0.327 A
If the parameters for the top line and the bottom line items have the same units, then the unit is displayed on the
5 bottom line only. The units are only displayed on both lines if the units specified both the top and bottom line items
NOTE are different.
5.2.15 DIRECT INPUTS AND OUTPUTS
a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  DIRECT I/O
 DIRECT I/O DIRECT OUTPUT Range: 1 to 16 in steps of 1

 DEVICE ID: 1
DIRECT I/O CH1 RING Range: Yes, No
MESSAGE
CONFIGURATION: Yes
DIRECT I/O CH2 RING Range: Yes, No
MESSAGE
CONFIGURATION: Yes
DIRECT I/O DATA Range: 64 kbps, 128 kbps
MESSAGE
RATE: 64 kbps
DIRECT I/O CHANNEL Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
CROSSOVER: Disabled
 CRC ALARM CH1

 CRC ALARM CH2

 UNRETURNED
 MESSAGES ALARM CH1
 UNRETURNED
 MESSAGES ALARM CH2

This option is available when an INTER-RELAY COMMUNICATIONS card is specified at the time of order-
ing. With the option, direct inputs/outputs display by default. When you enable the teleprotection feature,
direct I/O is not visible.
Direct inputs and outputs are intended for exchange of status information (inputs and outputs) between UR-series relays
connected directly via type 7 or type 2 digital communications cards. The mechanism is very similar to IEC 61850 GSSE,
except that communications takes place over a non-switchable isolated network and is optimized for speed. On type 7
cards that support two channels, direct output messages are sent from both channels simultaneously. This effectively
sends direct output messages both ways around a ring configuration. On type 7 cards that support one channel, direct out-
put messages are sent only in one direction. Messages will be resent (forwarded) when it is determined that the message
did not originate at the receiver.
Direct output message timing is similar to GSSE message timing. Integrity messages (with no state changes) are sent at
least every 1000 ms. Messages with state changes are sent within the main pass scanning the inputs and asserting the
outputs unless the communication channel bandwidth has been exceeded. Two self-tests are performed and signaled by
the following FlexLogic operands:
1. DIRECT RING BREAK (direct input/output ring break). This FlexLogic operand indicates that direct output messages
sent from a UR-series relay are not being received back by the relay.
2. DIRECT DEVICE 1 OFF to DIRECT DEVICE 16 OFF (direct device offline). These FlexLogic operands indicate that direct
output messages from at least one direct device are not being received.
Direct input and output settings are similar to remote input and output settings. The equivalent of the remote device name
strings for direct inputs and outputs is the DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID. The DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID setting identifies the
relay in all direct output messages. All UR-series IEDs in a ring should have unique numbers assigned. The IED ID is used
to identify the sender of the direct input and output message.
5
If the direct input and output scheme is configured to operate in a ring (DIRECT I/O CH1 RING CONFIGURATION or DIRECT I/O
CH2 RING CONFIGURATION is “Yes”), all direct output messages should be received back. If not, the direct input/output ring
break self-test is triggered. The self-test error is signaled by the DIRECT RING BREAK FlexLogic operand.
Select the DIRECT I/O DATA RATE to match the data capabilities of the communications channel. All IEDs communicating
over direct inputs and outputs must be set to the same data rate. UR-series IEDs equipped with dual-channel communica-
tions cards apply the same data rate to both channels. Delivery time for direct input and output messages is approximately
0.2 of a power system cycle at 128 kbps and 0.4 of a power system cycle at 64 kbps, per each ‘bridge’.

Table 5–11: DIRECT INPUT AND OUTPUT DATA RATES

MODULE CHANNEL SUPPORTED DATA RATES
74 Channel 1 64 kbps
Channel 2 64 kbps
7L Channel 1 64 kbps, 128 kbps
Channel 2 64 kbps, 128 kbps
7M Channel 1 64 kbps, 128 kbps
7P Channel 1 64 kbps, 128 kbps
7T Channel 1 64 kbps, 128 kbps
7W Channel 1 64 kbps, 128 kbps
7V Channel 1 64 kbps, 128 kbps
2A Channel 1 64 kbps
2B Channel 1 64 kbps
Channel 2 64 kbps
2G Channel 1 128 kbps
2H Channel 1 128 kbps
2I Channel 1 64 kbps, 128 kbps
5 Channel 2 64 kbps, 128 kbps
2J Channel 1 64 kbps, 128 kbps
Channel 2 64 kbps
Channel 2 64 kbps
7E Channel 1 64 kbps
Channel 2 64 kbps
7F Channel 1 64 kbps
Channel 2 64 kbps
7G Channel 1 64 kbps
Channel 2 64 kbps
7Q Channel 1 64 kbps
Channel 2 64 kbps
7R Channel 1 64 kbps
7S Channel 1 64 kbps
Channel 2 64 kbps
The G.703 modules are fixed at 64 kbps. The DIRECT I/O DATA RATE setting is not applicable to these modules.
NOTE
The DIRECT I/O CHANNEL CROSSOVER setting applies to B30s with dual-channel communication cards and allows crossing
over messages from channel 1 to channel 2. This places all UR-series IEDs into one direct input and output network
regardless of the physical media of the two communication channels.
The following application examples illustrate the basic concepts for direct input and output configuration. See the Inputs
and Outputs section in this chapter for information on configuring FlexLogic operands (flags, bits) to be exchanged.

EXAMPLE 1: EXTENDING THE INPUT/OUTPUT CAPABILITIES OF A UR-SERIES RELAY

Consider an application that requires additional quantities of contact inputs or output contacts or lines of programmable
logic that exceed the capabilities of a single UR-series chassis. The problem is solved by adding an extra UR-series IED,
such as the C30, to satisfy the additional input and output and programmable logic requirements. The two IEDs are con-
nected via single-channel digital communication cards as shown in the figure below.
TX1
UR IED 1
RX1
TX1
UR IED 2
RX1
842711A1.CDR
Figure 5–17: INPUT AND OUTPUT EXTENSION VIA DIRECT INPUTS AND OUTPUTS
In the above application, the following settings should be applied. For UR-series IED 1:
DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: “1”
DIRECT I/O CH1 RING CONFIGURATION: “Yes”
DIRECT I/O DATA RATE: “128 kbps”
For UR-series IED 2:

DIRECT I/O CH1 RING CONFIGURATION:
DIRECT I/O DATA RATE: “128 kbps”
“Yes”
5
The message delivery time is about 0.2 of power cycle in both ways (at 128 kbps); that is, from device 1 to device 2, and
from device 2 to device 1. Different communications cards can be selected by the user for this back-to-back connection (for
example: fiber, G.703, or RS422).
EXAMPLE 2: INTERLOCKING BUSBAR PROTECTION
A simple interlocking busbar protection scheme could be accomplished by sending a blocking signal from downstream
devices, say 2, 3, and 4, to the upstream device that monitors a single incomer of the busbar, as shown below.
UR IED 1 BLOCK
UR IED 2 UR IED 3 UR IED 4
842712A1.CDR
Figure 5–18: SAMPLE INTERLOCKING BUSBAR PROTECTION SCHEME

For increased reliability, a dual-ring configuration (shown below) is recommended for this application.

TX1 RX1
UR IED 1
RX2 TX2
RX1 TX2 RX2 TX1

UR IED 2 UR IED 4
TX1 RX2 TX2 RX1
TX2 RX2
UR IED 3
RX1 TX1
842716A1.CDR
Figure 5–19: INTERLOCKING BUS PROTECTION SCHEME VIA DIRECT INPUTS/OUTPUTS

5 DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: “3”

Message delivery time is approximately 0.2 of power system cycle (at 128 kbps) times number of ‘bridges’ between the ori-
gin and destination. Dual-ring configuration effectively reduces the maximum ‘communications distance’ by a factor of two.
In this configuration the following delivery times are expected (at 128 kbps) if both rings are healthy:
IED 1 to IED 2: 0.2 of power system cycle;
IED 3 to IED 4: 0.2 of power system cycle.
If one ring is broken (say TX2-RX2) the delivery times are as follows:
A coordinating timer for this bus protection scheme could be selected to cover the worst case scenario (0.4 of a power sys-
tem cycle). Upon detecting a broken ring, the coordination time should be adaptively increased to 0.6 of a power system
cycle. The complete application requires addressing a number of issues such as failure of both the communications rings,
failure or out-of-service conditions of one of the relays, etc. Self-monitoring flags of the direct inputs and outputs feature
would be primarily used to address these concerns.

EXAMPLE 3: PILOT-AIDED SCHEMES

Consider the three-terminal line protection application shown below:
UR IED 1 UR IED 2
UR IED 3
842713A1.CDR
Figure 5–20: THREE-TERMINAL LINE APPLICATION

A permissive pilot-aided scheme could be implemented in a two-ring configuration as shown below (IEDs 1 and 2 constitute
a first ring, while IEDs 2 and 3 constitute a second ring):
TX1 RX1 RX2

UR IED 1 UR IED 2
RX1 TX1 TX2
5
RX1
UR IED 3
TX1
842714A1.CDR
Figure 5–21: SINGLE-CHANNEL OPEN LOOP CONFIGURATION

In this configuration the following delivery times are expected (at 128 kbps):
In the above scheme, IEDs 1 and 3 do not communicate directly. IED 2 must be configured to forward the messages as
explained in the Inputs and Outputs section. A blocking pilot-aided scheme should be implemented with more security and,
ideally, faster message delivery time. This is accomplished using a dual-ring configuration as shown here.

TX2 TX1 RX1 RX2

UR IED 1 UR IED 2
RX1 RX2 TX2 TX1
TX1 RX1
UR IED 3
RX2 TX2
842715A1.CDR
Figure 5–22: DUAL-CHANNEL CLOSED LOOP (DUAL-RING) CONFIGURATION

5 DIRECT I/O CH1 RING CONFIGURATION:

DIRECT I/O CH2 RING CONFIGURATION:
“Yes”
“Yes”
In this configuration the following delivery times are expected (at 128 kbps) if both the rings are healthy:
The two communications configurations could be applied to both permissive and blocking schemes. Speed, reliability and
cost should be taken into account when selecting the required architecture.
b) CRC ALARM CH1(2)

PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  DIRECT I/O  CRC ALARM CH1(2)
 CRC ALARM CH1 CRC ALARM CH1 Range: Enabled, Disabled

CRC ALARM CH1 Range: 100 to 10000 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
MESSAGE COUNT: 600
CRC ALARM CH1 Range: 1 to 1000 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
THRESHOLD: 10
CRC ALARM CH1 Range: Enabled, Disabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
The B30 checks integrity of the incoming direct input and output messages using a 32-bit CRC. The CRC alarm function is
available for monitoring the communication medium noise by tracking the rate of messages failing the CRC check. The
monitoring function counts all incoming messages, including messages that failed the CRC check. A separate counter adds
up messages that failed the CRC check. When the failed CRC counter reaches the user-defined level specified by the CRC
ALARM CH1 THRESHOLD setting within the user-defined message count CRC ALARM 1 CH1 COUNT, the DIR IO CH1 CRC ALARM
FlexLogic operand is set.
When the total message counter reaches the user-defined maximum specified by the CRC ALARM CH1 MESSAGE COUNT set-
ting, both the counters reset and the monitoring process is restarted.

The operand shall be configured to drive an output contact, user-programmable LED, or selected communication-based
output. Latching and acknowledging conditions - if required - should be programmed accordingly.
The CRC alarm function is available on a per-channel basis. The total number of direct input and output messages that
failed the CRC check is available as the ACTUAL VALUES  STATUS  DIRECT INPUTS  CRC FAIL COUNT CH1 actual
value.
• Message count and length of the monitoring window: To monitor communications integrity, the relay sends 1 message
per second (at 64 kbps) or 2 messages per second (128 kbps) even if there is no change in the direct outputs. For
example, setting the CRC ALARM CH1 MESSAGE COUNT to “10000”, corresponds a time window of about 160 minutes at
64 kbps and 80 minutes at 128 kbps. If the messages are sent faster as a result of direct outputs activity, the monitor-
ing time interval will shorten. This should be taken into account when determining the CRC ALARM CH1 MESSAGE COUNT
setting. For example, if the requirement is a maximum monitoring time interval of 10 minutes at 64 kbps, then the CRC
ALARM CH1 MESSAGE COUNT should be set to 10 × 60 × 1 = 600.
• Correlation of failed CRC and bit error rate (BER): The CRC check may fail if one or more bits in a packet are cor-
rupted. Therefore, an exact correlation between the CRC fail rate and the BER is not possible. Under certain assump-
tions an approximation can be made as follows. A direct input and output packet containing 20 bytes results in 160 bits
of data being sent and therefore, a transmission of 63 packets is equivalent to 10,000 bits. A BER of 10–4 implies 1 bit
error for every 10000 bits sent or received. Assuming the best case of only 1 bit error in a failed packet, having 1 failed
packet for every 63 received is about equal to a BER of 10–4.
c) UNRETURNED MESSAGES ALARM CH1(2)

PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  DIRECT I/O  UNRETURNED MESSAGES ALARM CH1(2)
 UNRETURNED UNRET MSGS ALARM CH1 Range: Enabled, Disabled

 MESSAGES ALARM CH1 FUNCTION: Disabled
MESSAGE
UNRET MSGS ALARM CH1 Range: 100 to 10000 in steps of 1 5
MESSAGE COUNT: 600
UNRET MSGS ALARM CH1 Range: 1 to 1000 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
THRESHOLD: 10
UNRET MSGS ALARM CH1 Range: Enabled, Disabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
The B30 checks integrity of the direct input and output communication ring by counting unreturned messages. In the ring
configuration, all messages originating at a given device should return within a pre-defined period of time. The unreturned
messages alarm function is available for monitoring the integrity of the communication ring by tracking the rate of unre-
turned messages. This function counts all the outgoing messages and a separate counter adds the messages have failed
to return. When the unreturned messages counter reaches the user-definable level specified by the UNRET MSGS ALARM
CH1 THRESHOLD setting and within the user-defined message count UNRET MSGS ALARM CH1 COUNT, the DIR IO CH1 UNRET
ALM FlexLogic operand is set.
When the total message counter reaches the user-defined maximum specified by the UNRET MSGS ALARM CH1 MESSAGE
COUNT setting, both the counters reset and the monitoring process is restarted.
The operand shall be configured to drive an output contact, user-programmable LED, or selected communication-based
output. Latching and acknowledging conditions, if required, should be programmed accordingly.
The unreturned messages alarm function is available on a per-channel basis and is active only in the ring configuration.
The total number of unreturned input and output messages is available as the ACTUAL VALUES  STATUS  DIRECT
INPUTS  UNRETURNED MSG COUNT CH1 actual value.

5.2.16 TELEPROTECTION
PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  TELEPROTECTION
 TELEPROTECTION TELEPROTECTION Range: Disabled, Enabled

NUMBER OF TERMINALS: Range: 2, 3
MESSAGE
2
NUMBER OF COMM Range: 1, 2
MESSAGE
CHANNELS: 1
LOCAL RELAY ID Range: 0 to 255 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
NUMBER: 0
TERMINAL 1 RELAY ID Range: 0 to 255 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
NUMBER: 0
TERMINAL 2 RELAY ID Range: 0 to 255 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
NUMBER: 0
This option is available when an INTER-RELAY COMMUNICATIONS card is specified at the time of order-
ing. With the option, direct inputs/outputs display by default. When you enable the teleprotection feature,
direct I/O is not visible.
5 Digital teleprotection functionality is designed to transfer protection commands between two or three relays in a secure,
fast, dependable, and deterministic fashion. Possible applications are permissive or blocking pilot schemes and direct
transfer trip (DTT). Teleprotection can be applied over any analog or digital channels and any communications media, such
as direct fiber, copper wires, optical networks, or microwave radio links. A mixture of communication media is possible.
Once teleprotection is enabled and the teleprotection input/outputs are configured, data packets are transmitted continu-
ously every 1/4 cycle (3/8 cycle if using C37.94 modules) from peer-to-peer. Security of communication channel data is
achieved by using CRC-32 on the data packet.
Teleprotection inputs/outputs and direct inputs/outputs are mutually exclusive – as such, they cannot be used
simultaneously. Once teleprotection inputs and outputs are enabled, direct inputs and outputs are blocked, and vice
NOTE versa.
• NUMBER OF TERMINALS: Specifies whether the teleprotection system operates between two peers or three peers.
• NUMBER OF CHANNELS: Specifies how many channels are used. If the NUMBER OF TERMINALS is “3” (three-terminal
system), set the NUMBER OF CHANNELS to “2”. For a two-terminal system, the NUMBER OF CHANNELS can set to “1” or
“2” (redundant channels).
• LOCAL RELAY ID NUMBER, TERMINAL 1 RELAY ID NUMBER, and TERMINAL 2 RELAY ID NUMBER: In installa-
tions that use multiplexers or modems, it is desirable to ensure that the data used by the relays protecting a given line
is from the correct relays. The teleprotection function performs this check by reading the message ID sent by transmit-
ting relays and comparing it to the programmed ID in the receiving relay. This check is also used to block inputs if inad-
vertently set to loopback mode or data is being received from a wrong relay by checking the ID on a received channel.
If an incorrect ID is found on a channel during normal operation, the TELEPROT CH1 ID FAIL or TELEPROT CH2 ID FAIL
FlexLogic operand is set, driving the event with the same name and blocking the teleprotection inputs. For commis-
sioning purposes, the result of channel identification is also shown in the STATUS  CHANNEL TESTS  VALIDITY OF
CHANNEL CONFIGURATION actual value. The default value of “0” for the LOCAL RELAY ID NUMBER indicates that relay ID
is not to be checked. On two- terminals two-channel systems, the same LOCAL RELAY ID NUMBER is transmitted over
both channels; as such, only the TERMINAL 1 ID NUMBER has to be programmed on the receiving end.

5.2.17 INSTALLATION
PATH: SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  INSTALLATION
 INSTALLATION RELAY SETTINGS: Range: Not Programmed, Programmed

 Not Programmed
RELAY NAME: Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters
MESSAGE
Relay-1
To safeguard against the installation of a relay without any entered settings, the unit will not allow signaling of any output
relay until RELAY SETTINGS is set to "Programmed". This setting is defaulted to "Not Programmed" when at the factory. The
UNIT NOT PROGRAMMED self-test error message is displayed until the relay is put into the "Programmed" state.
The RELAY NAME setting allows the user to uniquely identify a relay. This name will appear on generated reports.

5.3 REMOTE RESOURCES 5 SETTINGS
5.3REMOTE RESOURCES 5.3.1 REMOTE RESOURCES CONFIGURATION
When B30 is ordered with a process card module as a part of HardFiber system, then an additional Remote Resources
menu tree is available in EnerVista UR Setup software to allow configuration of the HardFiber system.
Figure 5–23: REMOTE RESOURCES CONFIGURATION MENU

The remote resources settings configure a B30 with a process bus module to work with HardFiber Bricks. Remote
resources configuration is only available through the EnerVista UR Setup software, and is not available through the B30
5 front panel. A Brick provides eight AC measurements, along with contact inputs, DC analog inputs, and contact outputs, to
be the remote interface to field equipment such as circuit breakers and transformers. The B30 with a process bus module
has access to all of the capabilities of up to eight Bricks. Remote resources settings configure the point-to-point connection
between specific fiber optic ports on the B30 process card and specific Brick. The relay is then configured to measure spe-
cific currents, voltages and contact inputs from those Bricks, and to control specific outputs.
The configuration process for remote resources is straightforward and consists of the following steps.
• Configure the field units. This establishes the point-to-point connection between a specific port on the relay process
bus module, and a specific digital core on a specific Brick. This is a necessary first step in configuring a process bus
relay.
• Configure the AC banks. This sets the primary and secondary quantities and connections for currents and voltages.
AC bank configuration also provides a provision for redundant measurements for currents and voltages, a powerful
reliability improvement possible with process bus.
• Configure signal sources. This functionality of the B30 has not changed other than the requirement to use currents and
voltages established by AC bank configuration under the remote resources menu.
• Configure field contact inputs, field contact outputs, RTDs, and transducers as required for the application's functional-
ity. These inputs and outputs are the physical interface to circuit breakers, transformers, and other equipment. They
replace the traditional contact inputs and outputs located at the relay to virtually eliminate copper wiring.
• Configure shared inputs and outputs as required for the application's functionality. Shared inputs and outputs are dis-
tinct binary channels that provide high-speed protection quality signaling between relays through a Brick.
For additional information on how to configure a relay with a process bus module, see GE publication number GEK-113658:
HardFiber Process Bus System Instruction Manual.

5 SETTINGS 5.4 SYSTEM SETUP
5.4SYSTEM SETUP 5.4.1 AC INPUTS
a) CURRENT BANKS
PATH: SETTINGS  SYSTEM SETUP  AC INPUTS  CURRENT BANK F1(S5)
 CURRENT BANK F1 PHASE CT F1 Range: 1 to 65000 A in steps of 1

 PRIMARY: 1 A
PHASE CT F1 Range: 1 A, 5 A
MESSAGE
SECONDARY: 1 A
GROUND CT F1 Range: 1 to 65000 A in steps of 1
MESSAGE
PRIMARY: 1 A
GROUND CT F1 Range: 1 A, 5 A
MESSAGE
SECONDARY: 1 A
Six banks of phase and ground CTs can be set, where the current banks are denoted in the following format (X represents
the module slot position letter):
Xa, where X = {F, L, S} and a = {1, 5}
See the Introduction to AC Sources section at the beginning of this chapter for details.
These settings are critical for all features that have settings dependent on current measurements. When the relay is
ordered, the CT module must be specified to include a standard or sensitive ground input. As the phase CTs are connected
in wye (star), the calculated phasor sum of the three phase currents (IA + IB + IC = neutral current = 3Io) is used as the
input for the neutral overcurrent elements. In addition, a zero-sequence (core balance) CT which senses current in all of the
circuit primary conductors, or a CT in a neutral grounding conductor can also be used. For this configuration, the ground CT
primary rating must be entered. To detect low level ground fault currents, the sensitive ground input can be used. In this 5
case, the sensitive ground CT primary rating must be entered. Refer to chapter 3 for more details on CT connections.
Enter the rated CT primary current values. For both 1000:5 and 1000:1 CTs, the entry would be 1000. For correct opera-
tion, the CT secondary rating must match the setting (which must also correspond to the specific CT connections used).
The following example illustrates how multiple CT inputs (current banks) are summed as one source current. Given the fol-
lowing current banks:
• F1: CT bank with 500:1 ratio.
• F5: CT bank with 1000:1 ratio
• L1: CT bank with 800:1 ratio
The following rule applies:
SRC 1 = F1 + F5 + L1 (EQ 5.3)
1 pu is the highest primary current. In this case, 1000 is entered and the secondary current from the 500:1 ratio CT will be
adjusted to that created by a 1000:1 CT before summation. If a protection element is set up to act on SRC 1 currents, then
a pickup level of 1 pu will operate on 1000 A primary.
The same rule applies for current sums from CTs with different secondary taps (5 A and 1 A).

5.4 SYSTEM SETUP 5 SETTINGS
b) VOLTAGE BANKS
PATH: SETTINGS  SYSTEM SETUP  AC INPUTS  VOLTAGE BANK F5(S5)
 VOLTAGE BANK F5 PHASE VT F5 Range: Wye, Delta

 CONNECTION: Wye
PHASE VT F5 Range: 25.0 to 240.0 V in steps of 0.1
MESSAGE
SECONDARY: 66.4 V
PHASE VT F5 Range: 1.00 to 24000.00 in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
RATIO: 1.00 :1
AUXILIARY VT F5 Range: Vn, Vag, Vbg, Vcg, Vab, Vbc, Vca
MESSAGE
CONNECTION: Vag
AUXILIARY VT F5 Range: 25.0 to 240.0 V in steps of 0.1
MESSAGE
SECONDARY: 66.4 V
AUXILIARY VT F5 Range: 1.00 to 24000.00 in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
RATIO: 1.00 :1
Three banks of phase/auxiliary VTs can be set, where voltage banks are denoted in the following format (X represents the
module slot position letter):
Xa, where X = {F, L, S} and a = {5}
See the Introduction to AC Sources section at the beginning of this chapter for details.
With VTs installed, the relay can perform voltage measurements as well as power calculations. Enter the PHASE VT F5 CON-
5 NECTION made to the system as “Wye” or “Delta”. An open-delta source VT connection would be entered as “Delta”.
The nominal PHASE VT F5 SECONDARY voltage setting is the voltage across the relay input terminals when nominal
voltage is applied to the VT primary.
NOTE
For example, on a system with a 13.8 kV nominal primary voltage and with a 14400:120 volt VT in a delta connec-
tion, the secondary voltage would be 115; that is, (13800 / 14400) × 120. For a wye connection, the voltage value
entered must be the phase to neutral voltage which would be 115 / 3 = 66.4.
On a 14.4 kV system with a delta connection and a VT primary to secondary turns ratio of 14400:120, the voltage
value entered would be 120; that is, 14400 / 120.
5.4.2 POWER SYSTEM
PATH: SETTINGS  SYSTEM SETUP  POWER SYSTEM
 POWER SYSTEM NOMINAL FREQUENCY: Range: 25 to 60 Hz in steps of 1

 60 Hz
PHASE ROTATION: Range: ABC, ACB
MESSAGE
ABC
FREQUENCY AND PHASE Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4, SRC 5, SRC 6
MESSAGE
REFERENCE: SRC 1
FREQUENCY TRACKING: Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
Enabled
The power system NOMINAL FREQUENCY value is used as a default to set the digital sampling rate if the system frequency
cannot be measured from available signals. This may happen if the signals are not present or are heavily distorted. Before
reverting to the nominal frequency, the frequency tracking algorithm holds the last valid frequency measurement for a safe
period of time while waiting for the signals to reappear or for the distortions to decay.
The phase sequence of the power system is required to properly calculate sequence components and power parameters.
The PHASE ROTATION setting matches the power system phase sequence. Note that this setting informs the relay of the
actual system phase sequence, either ABC or ACB. CT and VT inputs on the relay, labeled as A, B, and C, must be con-
nected to system phases A, B, and C for correct operation.

The FREQUENCY AND PHASE REFERENCE setting determines which signal source is used (and hence which AC signal) for
phase angle reference. The AC signal used is prioritized based on the AC inputs that are configured for the signal source:
phase voltages takes precedence, followed by auxiliary voltage, then phase currents, and finally ground current.
For three phase selection, phase A is used for angle referencing ( V ANGLE REF = V A ), while Clarke transformation of the
phase signals is used for frequency metering and tracking ( V FREQUENCY = ( 2V A – V B – V C ) ⁄ 3 ) for better performance dur-
ing fault, open pole, and VT and CT fail conditions.
The phase reference and frequency tracking AC signals are selected based upon the Source configuration, regardless of
whether or not a particular signal is actually applied to the relay.
Phase angle of the reference signal always displays zero degrees and all other phase angles are relative to this signal. If
the pre-selected reference signal is not measurable at a given time, the phase angles are not referenced.
The phase angle referencing is done via a phase locked loop, which can synchronize independent UR-series relays if they
have the same AC signal reference. This results in very precise correlation of phase angle indications between different
UR-series relays.
FREQUENCY TRACKING is set to “Disabled” only in unusual circumstances; consult the factory for special variable-
frequency applications.
NOTE
The frequency tracking feature functions only when the B30 is in the “Programmed” mode. If the B30 is “Not Pro-
grammed”, then metering values are available but can exhibit significant errors.
NOTE
5.4.3 SIGNAL SOURCES
PATH: SETTINGS  SYSTEM SETUP  SIGNAL SOURCES  SOURCE 1(6)
 SOURCE 1 SOURCE 1 NAME: Range: up to six alphanumeric characters

5
 SRC 1
SOURCE 1 PHASE CT: Range: None, F1,... up to any 6 CTs. Only Phase CT
MESSAGE inputs are displayed.
None
SOURCE 1 GROUND CT: Range: None, F1,... up to any 6 CTs. Only Ground CT
MESSAGE inputs are displayed.
None
SOURCE 1 PHASE VT: Range: None, S5
MESSAGE Only phase voltage inputs are displayed.
None
SOURCE 1 AUX VT: Range: None, S5
MESSAGE Only auxiliary voltage inputs are displayed.
None
Identical menus are available for each source. The "SRC 1" text can be replaced by with a user-defined name appropriate
for the associated source.
The first letter in the source identifier represents the module slot position. The number directly following this letter repre-
sents either the first bank of four channels (1, 2, 3, 4) called “1” or the second bank of four channels (5, 6, 7, 8) called “5” in
a particular CT/VT module. See the Introduction to AC Sources section at the beginning of this chapter for details on this
concept.
It is possible to select the sum of all CT combinations. The first channel displayed is the CT to which all others will be
referred. For example, the selection “F1+F5” indicates the sum of each phase from channels “F1” and “F5”, scaled to
whichever CT has the higher ratio. Selecting “None” hides the associated actual values.
The approach used to configure the AC sources consists of several steps; first step is to specify the information about each
CT and VT input. For CT inputs, this is the nominal primary and secondary current. For VTs, this is the connection type,
ratio and nominal secondary voltage. Once the inputs have been specified, the configuration for each source is entered,
including specifying which CTs are summed together.

User selection of AC parameters for comparator elements:

CT/VT modules automatically calculate all current and voltage parameters from the available inputs. Users must select the
specific input parameters to be measured by every element in the relevant settings menu. The internal design of the ele-
ment specifies which type of parameter to use and provides a setting for source selection. In elements where the parameter
may be either fundamental or RMS magnitude, such as phase time overcurrent, two settings are provided. One setting
specifies the source, the second setting selects between fundamental phasor and RMS.
AC input actual values:
The calculated parameters associated with the configured voltage and current inputs are displayed in the current and volt-
age sections of actual values. Only the phasor quantities associated with the actual AC physical input channels will be dis-
played here. All parameters contained within a configured source are displayed in the sources section of the actual values.
EXAMPLE USE OF SOURCES:
An example of the use of sources is shown in the diagram below. A relay could have the following hardware configuration:
INCREASING SLOT POSITION LETTER -->
CT/VT MODULE 1 CT/VT MODULE 2 CT/VT MODULE 3
8 CTs 4 CTs, 4 VTs 4 CTs, 4 VTs
This configuration could be used on a two-winding transformer, with one winding connected into a breaker-and-a-half sys-
tem. The following figure shows the arrangement of sources used to provide the functions required in this application, and
the CT/VT inputs that are used to provide the data.
F1 DSP Bank
5
F5
Source 1 Source 2
Amps Amps
Source 3
51BF-1 51BF-2
U1 Volts Amps
A W Var 87T
A W Var 51P
Volts Amps
M1
M1 Source 4
UR Relay
M5
827794A1.CDR
Figure 5–24: EXAMPLE USE OF SOURCES

Y LV D HV AUX
SRC 1 SRC 2 SRC 3
Phase CT M1 F1+F5 None
Ground CT M1 None None
Phase VT M5 None None
Aux VT None None U1

5.4.4 BREAKERS
PATH: SETTINGS  SYSTEM SETUP  BREAKERS  BREAKER 1(6)
 BREAKER 1 BREAKER 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

BREAKER1 PUSH BUTTON Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
CONTROL: Disabled
BREAKER 1 NAME: Range: up to 6 alphanumeric characters
MESSAGE
Bkr 1
BREAKER 1 MODE: Range: 3-Pole, 1-Pole
MESSAGE
3-Pole
BREAKER 1 OPEN: Range: FlexLogic operand
MESSAGE
Off
BREAKER 1 BLK OPEN: Range: FlexLogic operand
MESSAGE
Off
BREAKER 1 CLOSE: Range: FlexLogic operand
MESSAGE
Off
BREAKER 1 BLK CLOSE: Range: FlexLogic operand
MESSAGE
Off
BREAKER 1 ΦA/3P CLSD: Range: FlexLogic operand
5 MESSAGE
Off
BREAKER 1 ΦA/3P OPND: Range: FlexLogic operand
MESSAGE
Off
BREAKER 1 ΦB CLOSED: Range: FlexLogic operand
MESSAGE
Off
BREAKER 1 ΦB OPENED: Range: FlexLogic operand
MESSAGE
Off
BREAKER 1 ΦC CLOSED: Range: FlexLogic operand
MESSAGE
Off
BREAKER 1 ΦC OPENED: Range: FlexLogic operand
MESSAGE
Off
BREAKER 1 Toperate: Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
0.070 s
BREAKER 1 EXT ALARM: Range: FlexLogic operand
MESSAGE
Off
BREAKER 1 ALARM Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.000 s
MANUAL CLOSE RECAL1 Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
TIME: 0.000 s
BREAKER 1 OUT OF SV: Range: FlexLogic operand
MESSAGE
Off
BREAKER 1 EVENTS: Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
Disabled

A description of the operation of the breaker control and status monitoring features is provided in chapter 4. Only informa-
tion concerning programming of the associated settings is covered here. These features are provided for two or more
breakers; a user may use only those portions of the design relevant to a single breaker, which must be breaker 1.
The number of breaker control elements is dependent on the number of CT/VT modules specified with the B30. The follow-
ing settings are available for each breaker control element.
• BREAKER 1 FUNCTION: This setting enables and disables the operation of the breaker control feature.
• BREAKER1 PUSH BUTTON CONTROL: Set to “Enable” to allow faceplate push button operations.
• BREAKER 1 NAME: Assign a user-defined name (up to six characters) to the breaker. This name will be used in flash
messages related to breaker 1.
• BREAKER 1 MODE: This setting selects “3-Pole” mode, where all breaker poles are operated simultaneously, or “1-
Pole” mode where all breaker poles are operated either independently or simultaneously.
• BREAKER 1 OPEN: This setting selects an operand that creates a programmable signal to operate an output relay to
open breaker 1.
• BREAKER 1 BLK OPEN: This setting selects an operand that prevents opening of the breaker. This setting can be
used for select-before-operate functionality or to block operation from a panel switch or from SCADA.
• BREAKER 1 CLOSE: This setting selects an operand that creates a programmable signal to operate an output relay
to close breaker 1.
• BREAKER 1 BLK CLOSE: This setting selects an operand that prevents closing of the breaker. This setting can be
used for select-before-operate functionality or to block operation from a panel switch or from SCADA.
• BREAKER 1 ΦA/3P CLOSED: This setting selects an operand, usually a contact input connected to a breaker auxil-
iary position tracking mechanism. This input should be a normally-open 52/a status input to create a logic 1 when the
breaker is closed. If the BREAKER 1 MODE setting is selected as “3-Pole”, this setting selects a single input as the oper-
and used to track the breaker open or closed position. If the mode is selected as “1-Pole”, the input mentioned above
5
is used to track phase A and the BREAKER 1 ΦB and BREAKER 1 ΦC settings select operands to track phases B and C,
respectively.
• BREAKER 1 ΦA/3P OPND: This setting selects an operand, usually a contact input, that should be a normally-closed
52/b status input to create a logic 1 when the breaker is open. If a separate 52/b contact input is not available, then the
inverted BREAKER 1 CLOSED status signal can be used.
• BREAKER 1 ΦB CLOSED: If the mode is selected as three-pole, this setting has no function. If the mode is selected
as single-pole, this input is used to track the breaker phase B closed position as above for phase A.
• BREAKER 1 ΦB OPENED: If the mode is selected as three-pole, this setting has no function. If the mode is selected
as single-pole, this input is used to track the breaker phase B opened position as above for phase A.
• BREAKER 1 ΦC CLOSED: If the mode is selected as three-pole, this setting has no function. If the mode is selected
as single-pole, this input is used to track the breaker phase C closed position as above for phase A.
• BREAKER 1 ΦC OPENED: If the mode is selected as three-pole, this setting has no function. If the mode is selected
as single-pole, this input is used to track the breaker phase C opened position as above for phase A.
• BREAKER 1 Toperate: This setting specifies the required interval to overcome transient disagreement between the
52/a and 52/b auxiliary contacts during breaker operation. If transient disagreement still exists after this time has
expired, the BREAKER 1 BAD STATUS FlexLogic operand is asserted from alarm or blocking purposes.
• BREAKER 1 EXT ALARM: This setting selects an operand, usually an external contact input, connected to a breaker
alarm reporting contact.
• BREAKER 1 ALARM DELAY: This setting specifies the delay interval during which a disagreement of status among
the three-pole position tracking operands will not declare a pole disagreement. This allows for non-simultaneous oper-
ation of the poles.
• MANUAL CLOSE RECAL1 TIME: This setting specifies the interval required to maintain setting changes in effect after
an operator has initiated a manual close command to operate a circuit breaker.
• BREAKER 1 OUT OF SV: Selects an operand indicating that breaker 1 is out-of-service.

SETTING
BREAKER 1 FUNCTION
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
= Enabled
AND BREAKER 1 OFF CMD
61850 model BREAKER 1 TRIP A
BrkXCBR1.BlkOpn.ctlVal AND BREAKER 1 TRIP B
OR AND
SETTING BREAKER 1 TRIP C
OR
BREAKER 1 BLOCK OPEN
Off = 0 OR AND
D60, L60, and L90 devices from trip output

FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS OR AND
TRIP PHASE A
TRIP PHASE B
TRIP PHASE C
TRIP 3-POLE
61850 model 61850 model
BrkCSWI1.PosOpn.ctVal BrkXCBR1.BlkOpn.stVal
OR AND
BrkXCBR1.PosOpn.ctVal
SETTING
OR
BREAKER 1 OPEN
Off = 0
USER 3 OFF/ON
To open BRK1-(Name)
SETTING
AND
BREAKER 1 PUSHBUTTON
CONTROL
= Enabled
OR 0
USER 2 OFF/ON AND
AND 20 ms
5
To close BRK1-(Name)
61850 model
BrkCSWI1.PosCls.ctVal
OR
BrkXCBR1.PosCls.ctVal
AND
61850 XCBR config setting AND
SETTING OR
XCBR1 ST.LOC OPERAND: OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Off = 0
AND BREAKER 1 MNL CLS
SETTING SETTING
MANUAL CLOSE RECAL1 TIME AND
BREAKER 1 CLOSE
Off = 0
C60, D60, L60, and L90 relays from recloser
0
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AR CLOSE BKR 1
61850 model OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND
BrkCBR1.BlkCls.ctVal AND BREAKER 1 ON CMD
SETTING OR
BREAKER 1 BLOCK CLOSE
Off = 0 OR 61850 model
BrkXCBR1.BlkCls.stVal
To breaker control logic sheet 2 859711A2.CDR
Figure 5–25: DUAL BREAKER CONTROL SCHEME LOGIC (Sheet 1 of 2)

IEC 61850 functionality is permitted when the B30 is in “Programmed” mode and not in the local control mode.
NOTE

From breaker
control logic BKR ENABLED
sheet 1 FLEXLOGIC OPERAND BREAKER 1
AND AND BREAKER 1 CLOSED CLOSED
OR (DEFAULT)
SETTING
BREAKER 1 MODE
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND BREAKER 1
= 3-Pole AND OR AND BREAKER 1 OPEN OPEN
= 1-Pole (DEFAULT)
BKR1 A CLOSED SETTING FLEXLOGIC OPERAND

BKR1 B CLOSED BREAKER 1 ALARM DELAY AND
AND BREAKER 1 DISCREP
BKR1 C CLOSED
AND
BKR1 A OPENED 0
BKR1 B OPENED
BKR1 C OPENED AND FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OR BREAKER 1
SETTING AND BREAKER 1 TROUBLE TROUBLE
Note: the BREAKER 1 TROUBLE LED (DEFAULT)
BREAKER 1 EXT ALARM
can be latched using FlexLogic
= Off
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SETTING SETTING
AND OR BREAKER 1 BAD STATUS
BREAKER 1 ΦA/3P CLSD BREAKER 1 Toperate
= Off OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
AND AND
BREAKER 1 ΦA BAD ST
0
BREAKER 1 ΦA CLSD
SETTING BKR1 A CLOSED AND BREAKER 1 ΦA OPEN
BREAKER 1 ΦA/3P OPND
AND BREAKER 1 ΦA INTERM
= Off
BKR1 A OPENED AND
AND
AND
SETTING SETTING
AND
5
BREAKER 1 ΦB CLSD BREAKER 1 Toperate
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
= Off OR AND
AND BREAKER 1 ΦB BAD ST
0 BREAKER 1 ΦB CLSD
SETTING BREAKER 1 ΦB OPEN
BKR1 B CLOSED AND
BREAKER 1 ΦB OPENED BREAKER 1 ΦB INTERM
AND
= Off
BKR1 B OPENED AND
AND
AND
SETTING SETTING
AND
BREAKER 1 ΦC CLSD BREAKER 1 Toperate
OR FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
= Off AND
AND BREAKER 1 ΦC BAD ST
0 BREAKER 1 ΦC CLSD
SETTING BREAKER 1 ΦC OPEN
BKR1 C CLOSED AND
BREAKER 1 ΦC OPENED BREAKER 1 ΦC INTERM
AND
= Off
BKR1 C OPENED AND
AND
AND
BKR1 A CLOSED
BKR1 B CLOSED AND FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
BKR1 C CLOSED AND BREAKER 1 ANY P OPEN
BREAKER 1 1P OPEN
BREAKER 1 OOS
XOR AND
SETTING
BREAKER 1 OUT OF SV AND
= Off 859712A1.cdr
Figure 5–26: DUAL BREAKER CONTROL SCHEME LOGIC (Sheet 2 of 2)

The breaker element has direct hard-coded connections to IEC 61850 model as shown in the logic diagram. This allows
remote open/close operation of each breaker, using either CSWI or XCBR IEC 61850 logical nodes. IEC 61850 select-
before-operate functionality, local/remote switch functionality along with a blocking of open/close commands are provided.
Note that IEC 61850 commands are event-driven and dwell time for these is one protection pass only. If you want to main-
tain the close/open command for a certain time, do so either on the contact outputs using the "Seal-in" setting or in Flex-
Logic.

5.4.5 DISCONNECT SWITCHES
PATH: SETTINGS  SYSTEM SETUP  SWITCHES  SWITCH 1(24)
 SWITCH 1 SWITCH 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

SWITCH 1 NAME: Range: up to 6 alphanumeric characters
MESSAGE
SW 1
SWITCH 1 MODE: Range: 3-Pole, 1-Pole
MESSAGE
3-Pole
SWITCH 1 OPEN: Range: FlexLogic operand
MESSAGE
Off
SWITCH 1 BLK OPEN: Range: FlexLogic operand
MESSAGE
Off
SWITCH 1 CLOSE: Range: FlexLogic operand
MESSAGE
Off
SWITCH 1 BLK CLOSE: Range: FlexLogic operand
MESSAGE
Off
SWTCH 1 ΦA/3P CLSD: Range: FlexLogic operand
MESSAGE
Off
SWTCH 1 ΦA/3P OPND: Range: FlexLogic operand
5 MESSAGE
Off
SWITCH 1 ΦB CLOSED: Range: FlexLogic operand
MESSAGE
Off
SWITCH 1 ΦB OPENED: Range: FlexLogic operand
MESSAGE
Off
SWITCH 1 ΦC CLOSED: Range: FlexLogic operand
MESSAGE
Off
SWITCH 1 ΦC OPENED: Range: FlexLogic operand
MESSAGE
Off
SWITCH 1 TOPERATE: Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
0.070 s
SWITCH 1 ALARM Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.000 s
SWITCH 1 EVENTS: Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
Disabled
The disconnect switch control element contains the auxiliary logic for status and serves as the interface for opening and
closing of disconnect switches from SCADA or through the front panel interface. The disconnect switch control element can
be used to create interlocking functionality. For greater security in determination of the switch pole position, both the 89/a
and 89/b auxiliary contacts are used with reporting of the discrepancy between them. The number of available disconnect
switches is four per breaker.
To use this element, configure the contact outputs that open and close the disconnect switch to use FlexLogic operands
SWITCH 1 OFF CMD and SWITCH 1 ON CMD, and configure the disconnect switch control element's inputs as outlined here.
• SWITCH 1 FUNCTION: This setting enables and disables the operation of the disconnect switch element.
• SWITCH 1 NAME: Assign a user-defined name (up to six characters) to the disconnect switch. This name will be used
in flash messages related to disconnect switch 1.

• SWITCH 1 MODE: This setting selects “3-Pole” mode, where disconnect switch poles have a single common auxiliary
switch, or “1-Pole” mode where each disconnect switch pole has its own auxiliary switch.
• SWITCH 1 OPEN: This setting selects an operand that when activated, and unless blocked, initiates the disconnect
switch 1 open command.
• SWITCH 1 BLK OPEN: This setting selects an operand that prevents initiation of the disconnect switch 1 command.
This setting can be used for blocking disconnect switch opening for instance when switchyard monitoring indicates cur-
rent exceeding the switch's interrupting rating can be flowing through the switch.
• SWITCH 1 CLOSE: This setting selects an operand that when activated, and unless blocked, initiates the disconnect
switch 1 close command.
• SWITCH 1 BLK CLOSE: This setting selects an operand that prevents initiation of disconnect switch 1 close com-
mands. This setting can be used for blocking disconnect switch closing, for instance to prevent closing into a closed
ground switch.
• SWTCH 1 ΦA/3P CLSD: This setting selects an operand, usually a contact input connected to a disconnect switch
auxiliary position tracking mechanism. This input is for a normally-open 89/a status input that creates a logic 1 when
the disconnect switch is closed. If the SWITCH 1 MODE setting is selected as “3-Pole”, this setting selects a single 89/a
input as the operand used to track the disconnect switch open or closed position. If the mode is selected as “1-Pole”,
the input mentioned above is used to track phase A and the SWITCH 1 ΦB and SWITCH 1 ΦC settings select operands to
track phases B and C, respectively.
• SWTCH 1 ΦA/3P OPND: This setting selects an operand, usually a contact input, that is for a normally-closed 89/b
status input that creates a logic 1 when the disconnect switch is open. If a separate 89/b contact input is not available,
then an inverted 89/a status signal can be used.
• SWITCH 1 ΦB CLOSED: If the mode is selected as three-pole, this setting has no function. If the mode is selected as
•
single-pole, this input is used to track the disconnect switch phase B closed position as above for phase A.
SWITCH 1 ΦB OPENED: If the mode is selected as three-pole, this setting has no function. If the mode is selected as
5
single-pole, this input is used to track the disconnect switch phase B opened position as above for phase A.
• SWITCH 1 ΦC CLOSED: If the mode is selected as three-pole, this setting has no function. If the mode is selected as
single-pole, this input is used to track the disconnect switch phase C closed position as above for phase A.
• SWITCH 1 ΦC OPENED: If the mode is selected as three-pole, this setting has no function. If the mode is selected as
single-pole, this input is used to track the disconnect switch phase C opened position as above for phase A.
• SWITCH 1 TOPERATE: This setting specifies the required interval to overcome transient disagreement between the
89/a and 89/b auxiliary contacts during disconnect switch operation. If transient disagreement still exists after this time
has expired, the SWITCH 1 BAD STATUS FlexLogic operand is asserted for alarm or blocking purposes.
• SWITCH 1 ALARM DELAY: This setting specifies the delay interval during which a disagreement of status among the
pole position tracking operands will not declare a pole disagreement. This allows for non-simultaneous operation of the
poles.
IEC 61850 functionality is permitted when the B30 is in “Programmed” mode and not in the local control mode.
NOTE

SETTING
SWITCH 1 OPEN
= Off
61850 model
OR
SwCSWI1.PosOpn.ctVal
OR
SwXSWI1.PosOpn.ctVal
AND
61850 model FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SwXSWI1.BlkOpn.ctlVal AND SWITCH 1 OFF CMD
AND
SETTING
SWITCH 1 BLK OPEN OR 61850 model
= Off SwXSWI1.BlkOpn.stVal
SETTING
SWITCH 1 CLOSE
= Off
61850 model
SwCSWI1.PosCls.ctVal FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OR
SwXSWI1.PosCls.ctVal AND SWITCH 1 ON CMD
OR
61850 XSWI configuration setting AND
SETTING
XSWI1 ST.LOC OPERAND:
61850 model
Off = 0 SwXSWI1.BlkCls.stVal
61850 model AND
SwXSWI1.BlkCls.ctlVal OR
SETTING FLEXLOGIC OPERAND

SWITCH 1 BLK CLOSE AND SWITCH 1 CLOSED
= Off AND OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SETTING AND SWITCH 1 OPEN
SWITCH 1 MODE AND OR
= 3-Pole
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
= 1-Pole SETTING AND SWITCH 1 DISCREP
SWITCH 1 ALARM DELAY
5 SW1 A CLOSED
SW1 B CLOSED
SW1 C CLOSED
AND
AND
0
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OR AND SWITCH 1 TROUBLE
SW1 A OPENED
AND
SW1 B OPENED
SW1 C OPENED
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SETTING OR SWITCH 1 BAD STATUS
SETTING
SWITCH 1 Toperate
SWTCH1 ΦA/3P CLSD AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
= Off
AND SWITCH 1 ΦA BAD ST
OR
AND 0 SWITCH 1 ΦA CLSD
SETTING SW1 A CLOSED
AND SWITCH 1 ΦA OPEN
SWTCH 1 ΦA/3P OPND
AND SWITCH 1 ΦA INTERM
= Off
SW1 A OPENED AND
AND
AND
SETTING
SETTING
SWITCH 1 Toperate
SWITCH 1 ΦB CLOSED AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
= Off AND SWITCH 1 ΦB BAD ST
OR
AND 0 SWITCH 1 ΦB CLSD
SETTING SW1 B CLOSED
AND SWITCH 1 ΦB OPEN
SWITCH 1 ΦB OPENED
AND SWITCH 1 ΦB INTERM
= Off
SW1 B OPENED
AND
AND
SETTING AND
SETTING
SWITCH 1 Toperate
SWITCH 1 ΦC CLOSED AND
= Off FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
AND SWITCH 1 ΦC BAD ST
OR
AND 0 SWITCH 1 ΦC CLSD
SETTING SW1 C CLOSED
AND SWITCH 1 ΦC OPEN
SWITCH 1 ΦC OPENED
AND SWITCH 1 ΦC INTERM
= Off
SW1 C OPENED
AND
SETTING AND
SWITCH 1 FUNCTION
= Disabled AND
= Enabled 859713A1.CDR
Figure 5–27: DISCONNECT SWITCH SCHEME LOGIC

The switch element has direct hard-coded connections to IEC 61850 model as shown in the logic diagram. This allows
remote open/close operation of each switch, using either CSWI or XSWI IEC 61850 logical nodes. IEC 61850 select-
before-operate functionality, local/remote switch functionality along with a blocking open/close commands are provided.
Note that IEC 61850 commands are event-driven and dwell time for these is one protection pass only. If you want to main-
tain close/open command for a certain time, do so either on the contact outputs using the "Seal-in" setting or in FlexLogic.
5.4.6 FLEXCURVES
a) SETTINGS
PATH: SETTINGS  SYSTEM SETUP  FLEXCURVES  FLEXCURVE A(D)
 FLEXCURVE A FLEXCURVE A TIME AT Range: 0 to 65535 ms in steps of 1

 0.00 xPKP: 0 ms
FlexCurves A through D have settings for entering times to reset and operate at the following pickup levels: 0.00 to 0.98
and 1.03 to 20.00. This data is converted into two continuous curves by linear interpolation between data points. To enter a
custom FlexCurve, enter the reset and operate times (using the VALUE keys) for each selected pickup point (using the
MESSAGE UP/DOWN keys) for the desired protection curve (A, B, C, or D).
Table 5–12: FLEXCURVE TABLE

RESET TIME RESET TIME OPERATE TIME OPERATE TIME OPERATE TIME OPERATE TIME
MS MS MS MS MS MS
0.00 0.68 1.03 2.9 4.9 10.5
0.05 0.70 1.05 3.0 5.0 11.0
0.10 0.72 1.1 3.1 5.1 11.5 5

0.15 0.74 1.2 3.2 5.2 12.0
0.20 0.76 1.3 3.3 5.3 12.5
0.25 0.78 1.4 3.4 5.4 13.0
0.30 0.80 1.5 3.5 5.5 13.5
0.35 0.82 1.6 3.6 5.6 14.0
0.40 0.84 1.7 3.7 5.7 14.5
0.45 0.86 1.8 3.8 5.8 15.0
0.48 0.88 1.9 3.9 5.9 15.5
0.50 0.90 2.0 4.0 6.0 16.0
0.52 0.91 2.1 4.1 6.5 16.5
0.54 0.92 2.2 4.2 7.0 17.0
0.56 0.93 2.3 4.3 7.5 17.5
0.58 0.94 2.4 4.4 8.0 18.0
0.60 0.95 2.5 4.5 8.5 18.5
0.62 0.96 2.6 4.6 9.0 19.0
0.64 0.97 2.7 4.7 9.5 19.5
0.66 0.98 2.8 4.8 10.0 20.0

The relay using a given FlexCurve applies linear approximation for times between the user-entered points. Special
care must be applied when setting the two points that are close to the multiple of pickup of 1; that is, 0.98 pu and
NOTE
1.03 pu. It is recommended to set the two times to a similar value; otherwise, the linear approximation may result in
undesired behavior for the operating quantity that is close to 1.00 pu.
b) FLEXCURVE CONFIGURATION WITH ENERVISTA UR SETUP

The EnerVista UR Setup software allows for easy configuration and management of FlexCurves and their associated data
points. Prospective FlexCurves can be configured from a selection of standard curves to provide the best approximate fit,
then specific data points can be edited afterwards. Alternately, curve data can be imported from a specified file (.csv format)
by selecting the Import Data From EnerVista UR Setup setting.
Curves and data can be exported, viewed, and cleared by clicking the appropriate buttons. FlexCurves are customized by
editing the operating time (ms) values at pre-defined per-unit current multiples. Note that the pickup multiples start at zero
(implying the "reset time"), operating time below pickup, and operating time above pickup.
c) RECLOSER CURVE EDITING

Recloser curve selection is special in that recloser curves can be shaped into a composite curve with a minimum response
time and a fixed time above a specified pickup multiples. There are 41 recloser curve types supported. These definite oper-
ating times are useful to coordinate operating times, typically at higher currents and where upstream and downstream pro-
tective devices have different operating characteristics. The recloser curve configuration window shown below appears
when the Initialize From EnerVista UR Setup setting is set to “Recloser Curve” and the Initialize FlexCurve button is
clicked.
Multiplier: Scales (multiplies) the curve operating times
5 Addr: Adds the time specified in this field (in ms) to each
curve operating time value.
Minimum Response Time (MRT): If enabled, the MRT setting

defines the shortest operating time even if the curve suggests
a shorter time at higher current multiples. A composite operating
characteristic is effectively defined. For current multiples lower
than the intersection point, the curve dictates the operating time;
otherwise, the MRT does. An information message appears
when attempting to apply an MRT shorter than the minimum
curve time.
High Current Time: Allows the user to set a pickup multiple

from which point onwards the operating time is fixed. This is
normally only required at higher current levels. The HCT Ratio
defines the high current pickup multiple; the HCT defines the
operating time.
842721A1.CDR
Figure 5–28: RECLOSER CURVE INITIALIZATION

The multiplier and adder settings only affect the curve portion of the characteristic and not the MRT and HCT set-
tings. The HCT settings override the MRT settings for multiples of pickup greater than the HCT ratio.
NOTE

d) EXAMPLE
A composite curve can be created from the GE_111 standard with MRT = 200 ms and HCT initially disabled and then
enabled at eight (8) times pickup with an operating time of 30 ms. At approximately four (4) times pickup, the curve operat-
ing time is equal to the MRT and from then onwards the operating time remains at 200 ms (see below).
842719A1.CDR
Figure 5–29: COMPOSITE RECLOSER CURVE WITH HCT DISABLED

With the HCT feature enabled, the operating time reduces to 30 ms for pickup multiples exceeding 8 times pickup.
842720A1.CDR
Figure 5–30: COMPOSITE RECLOSER CURVE WITH HCT ENABLED

Configuring a composite curve with an increase in operating time at increased pickup multiples is not allowed. If this
is attempted, the EnerVista UR Setup software generates an error message and discards the proposed changes.
NOTE
e) STANDARD RECLOSER CURVES

The standard recloser curves available for the B30 are displayed in the following graphs.

1 GE106
0.5
0.2
TIME (sec)
GE103
GE104 GE105
0.1
0.05
GE101 GE102
0.02
0.01
1 1.2 1.5 2 2.5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 20
5 CURRENT (multiple of pickup)
Figure 5–31: RECLOSER CURVES GE101 TO GE106

842723A1.CDR
50
20 GE142
10
5
GE138
TIME (sec)
1 GE120
GE113
0.5
0.2
0.1
0.05
1 1.2 1.5 2 2.5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 20
CURRENT (multiple of pickup) 842725A1.CDR
Figure 5–32: RECLOSER CURVES GE113, GE120, GE138 AND GE142

50
20
10
GE201
TIME (sec)
GE151
2
GE134 GE140
1
GE137
0.5
1 1.2 1.5 2 2.5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 20

CURRENT (multiple of pickup)
Figure 5–33: RECLOSER CURVES GE134, GE137, GE140, GE151 AND GE201
842730A1.CDR
5
50
GE152
20
TIME (sec)
GE141
10
GE131
5
GE200
2
1 1.2 1.5 2 2.5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 20
Figure 5–34: RECLOSER CURVES GE131, GE141, GE152, AND GE200

50
20
GE164
10
2
TIME (sec)
GE162
1
0.5
GE133
0.2
GE165
0.1
0.05
GE161
0.02 GE163
0.01
1 1.2 1.5 2 2.5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 20
5
842729A1.CDR
Figure 5–35: RECLOSER CURVES GE133, GE161, GE162, GE163, GE164 AND GE165
20
GE132
10
1
TIME (sec)
0.5 GE139
0.2
GE136
0.1
GE116
0.05
GE118 GE117
0.02
0.01
1 1.2 1.5 2 2.5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 20
Figure 5–36: RECLOSER CURVES GE116, GE117, GE118, GE132, GE136, AND GE139

20
10
5
GE122
2
1
TIME (sec)
0.5
GE114
0.2
GE111
GE121
0.1
0.05 GE115 GE112

GE107
0.02
0.01
1 1.2 1.5 2 2.5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 20
5
842724A1.CDR
Figure 5–37: RECLOSER CURVES GE107, GE111, GE112, GE114, GE115, GE121, AND GE122
50
20
GE202
10
TIME (sec)
GE135
2 GE119
0.5
0.2
1 1.2 1.5 2 2.5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 20
Figure 5–38: RECLOSER CURVES GE119, GE135, AND GE202

5.4.7 BUS
PATH: SETTINGS  SYSTEM SETUP  BUS  BUS ZONE 1(2)
 BUS ZONE 1 BUS ZONE 1A SOURCE: Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4, SRC 5, SRC 6
 SRC 1
BUS ZONE 1B SOURCE: Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4, SRC 5, SRC 6
MESSAGE
SRC 1
BUS ZONE 1C SOURCE: Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4, SRC 5, SRC 6
MESSAGE
SRC 1
BUS ZONE 1D SOURCE: Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4, SRC 5, SRC 66
MESSAGE
SRC 1
BUS ZONE 1E SOURCE: Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4, SRC 5, SRC 6
MESSAGE
SRC 1
BUS ZONE 1F SOURCE: Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4, SRC 5, SRC 6
MESSAGE
SRC 1
BUS ZONE 1A STATUS: Range: FlexLogic operand
MESSAGE
Off
BUS ZONE 1B STATUS: Range: FlexLogic operand
MESSAGE
Off
BUS ZONE 1C STATUS: Range: FlexLogic operand
5 MESSAGE
Off
BUS ZONE 1D STATUS: Range: FlexLogic operand
MESSAGE
Off
BUS ZONE 1E STATUS: Range: FlexLogic operand
MESSAGE
Off
BUS ZONE 1F STATUS: Range: FlexLogic operand
MESSAGE
Off
Two bus differential zones can be configured. The zone is associated with its own bus differential protection element and
CT trouble monitoring element.
The bus differential zone is defined by providing the names of sources whose currents bound the differential zone (refer to
settings BUS ZONE 1A SOURCE to BUS ZONE 1F SOURCE).
The connection status of a circuit with respect to the protected bus is dynamically provided by FlexLogic operands assigned
to the BUS ZONE 1A STATUS to BUS ZONE 1F STATUS settings. The selected operand must be ON when the corresponding cir-
cuit is connected to the bus. The operands are selected from the contact inputs that reflect positions of particular circuit
switches and/or breakers. If contact discrepancy filtering is needed, accomplish this using appropriate FlexLogic to form a
Virtual Output, representing the current circuit status. If a given circuit (feeder) is fixed to the protected bus section and can-
not be attached to any other bus section, then use the FlexLogic "ON" operand to represent fixed circuit status.
The status signal is meant to exclude a given current from the bus zone if the circuit is connected to a different bus section
and its non-zero values would upset the current balance causing a spurious differential signal. Therefore, it is not required
nor recommended to use the position of the breaker to control the status signal of a given circuit. If the breaker is opened,
the circuit may remain included in the bus differential zone as the zero current values are measured and used when calcu-
lating the differential signal. Dynamically excluding or including a given current during the breaker operation can cause
undesirable transients and race conditions for the relay algorithm.
If a given circuit cannot be connected to any other bus section different than the protected one, the FlexLogic constant "On"
is recommended for the status signal.

5 SETTINGS 5.5 FLEXLOGIC
5.5FLEXLOGIC 5.5.1 INTRODUCTION TO FLEXLOGIC
To provide maximum flexibility to the user, the arrangement of internal digital logic combines fixed and user-programmed
parameters. Logic upon which individual features are designed is fixed, and all other logic, from digital input signals through
elements or combinations of elements to digital outputs, is variable. The user has complete control of all variable logic
through FlexLogic. In general, the system receives analog and digital inputs which it uses to produce analog and digital out-
puts. The major sub-systems of a generic UR-series relay involved in this process are shown below.
CTs DSP
VTs (A/D) FlexLogic™ Virtual
equations outputs
Calculate
DCmA parameters Measuring
Analog and
or
input decision Digital Flags
RTD
(A/D) elements elements
inputs
V I
Contact Form-A and
inputs FlexLogic™ SCR only
Block counters
operation Contact
(each outputs
element)
Keypad
Virtual Remote
inputs (FlexLogic operands) outputs
OR
Remote Display 5
inputs Control and LEDs
(GOOSE) and Display
monitoring
features
fiber Analog
Direct output (D/A)
G.703 inputs
RS422 (dcmA)
(Status) Fiber
Direct
G.703
outputs
RS422
(Actual values) (Status)
EnerVista UR Setup and LAN communications
827022A7.cdr
Figure 5–39: UR ARCHITECTURE OVERVIEW

The states of all digital signals used in the B30 are represented by flags (or FlexLogic operands, which are described later
in this section). A digital “1” is represented by a 'set' flag. Any external contact change-of-state can be used to block an ele-
ment from operating, as an input to a control feature in a FlexLogic equation, or to operate a contact output. The state of the
contact input can be displayed locally or viewed remotely via the communications facilities provided. If a simple scheme
where a contact input is used to block an element is desired, this selection is made when programming the element. This
capability also applies to the other features that set flags: elements, virtual inputs, remote inputs, schemes, and human
operators.
If more complex logic than presented above is required, it is implemented via FlexLogic. For example, if it is desired to have
the closed state of contact input H7a and the operated state of the phase undervoltage element block the operation of the
phase time overcurrent element, the two control input states are programmed in a FlexLogic equation. This equation ANDs
the two control inputs to produce a virtual output which is then selected when programming the phase time overcurrent to
be used as a blocking input. Virtual outputs can only be created by FlexLogic equations.
Traditionally, protective relay logic has been relatively limited. Any unusual applications involving interlocks, blocking, or
supervisory functions had to be hard-wired using contact inputs and outputs. FlexLogic minimizes the requirement for aux-
iliary components and wiring while making more complex schemes possible.

5.5 FLEXLOGIC 5 SETTINGS
The logic that determines the interaction of inputs, elements, schemes and outputs is field programmable through the use
of logic equations that are sequentially processed. The use of virtual inputs and outputs in addition to hardware is available
internally and on the communication ports for other relays to use (distributed FlexLogic).
FlexLogic allows users to customize the relay through a series of equations that consist of operators and operands. The
operands are the states of inputs, elements, schemes and outputs. The operators are logic gates, timers and latches (with
set and reset inputs). A system of sequential operations allows any combination of specified operands to be assigned as
inputs to specified operators to create an output. The final output of an equation is a numbered register called a virtual out-
put. Virtual outputs can be used as an input operand in any equation, including the equation that generates the output, as a
seal-in or other type of feedback.
A FlexLogic equation consists of parameters that are either operands or operators. Operands have a logic state of 1 or 0.
Operators provide a defined function, such as an AND gate or a Timer. Each equation defines the combinations of parame-
ters to be used to set a Virtual Output flag. Evaluation of an equation results in either a 1 (=ON, i.e. flag set) or 0 (=OFF, i.e.
flag not set). Each equation is evaluated at least 4 times every power system cycle.
Some types of operands are present in the relay in multiple instances; e.g. contact and remote inputs. These types of oper-
ands are grouped together (for presentation purposes only) on the faceplate display. The characteristics of the different
types of operands are listed in the table below.
Table 5–13: B30 FLEXLOGIC OPERAND TYPES

OPERAND TYPE STATE EXAMPLE FORMAT CHARACTERISTICS
[INPUT IS ‘1’ (= ON) IF...]
Contact Input On Cont Ip On Voltage is presently applied to the input (external contact
closed)
Off Cont Ip Off Voltage is presently not applied to the input (external
contact open)
5 Contact Output
(type Form-A contact
Contact Closed Cont Op 1 Closed Contact output is closed
only) Current On Cont Op 1 Ion Current is flowing through the contact

Voltage On Cont Op 1 VOn Voltage exists across the contact
Voltage Off Cont Op 1 VOff Voltage does not exists across the contact
Direct Input On DIRECT INPUT 1 On The direct input is presently in the ON state
Element Pickup PHASE TOC1 PKP The tested parameter is presently above the pickup setting
(Analog) of an element which responds to rising values or below the
pickup setting of an element which responds to falling
values
Dropout PHASE TOC1 DPO This operand is the logical inverse of the above PKP
operand
Operate PHASE TOC1 OP The tested parameter has been above/below the pickup
setting of the element for the programmed delay time, or
has been at logic 1 and is now at logic 0 but the reset timer
has not finished timing
Block PHASE TOC1 BLK The output of the comparator is set to the block function
Element Pickup Dig Element 1 PKP The input operand is at logic 1
(Digital)
Dropout Dig Element 1 DPO This operand is the logical inverse of the above PKP
operand
Operate Dig Element 1 OP The input operand has been at logic 1 for the programmed
pickup delay time, or has been at logic 1 for this period and
is now at logic 0 but the reset timer has not finished timing
Element Higher than Counter 1 HI The number of pulses counted is above the set number
(Digital Counter)
Equal to Counter 1 EQL The number of pulses counted is equal to the set number
Lower than Counter 1 LO The number of pulses counted is below the set number
Fixed On On Logic 1
Off Off Logic 0
Remote Input On REMOTE INPUT 1 On The remote input is presently in the ON state
Virtual Input On Virt Ip 1 On The virtual input is presently in the ON state
Virtual Output On Virt Op 1 On The virtual output is presently in the set state (i.e.
evaluation of the equation which produces this virtual
output results in a "1")

The operands available for this relay are listed alphabetically by types in the following table.
Table 5–14: B30 FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS (Sheet 1 of 6)
OPERAND TYPE OPERAND SYNTAX OPERAND DESCRIPTION
CONTROL CONTROL PUSHBTN 1 ON Control pushbutton 1 is being pressed
PUSHBUTTONS CONTROL PUSHBTN 2 ON Control pushbutton 2 is being pressed
CONTROL PUSHBTN 3 ON Control pushbutton 3 is being pressed
CYBERSENTRY ROLE ADMIN ACT Administrator role is active and is set to true when that is the case
ROLE SUPERVISOR ACT Supervisor role is active and is set to true when that is the case
ROLE ENGINEER ACT Engineer role is active and is set to true when that is the case
ROLE OPERATOR ACT Operator role is active and is set to true when that is the case
ROLE OBSERVER ACT Observer role is active and is set to true when that is the case
AUTHENTICATION FAIL Operand set for Failed Authentication self-test and alarm
UNAUTH FW ATTEMPT Operand set for firmware lock self-test and alarm
UNAUTH SETTING WRITE Operand set for settings lock self-test and alarm
DIRECT DEVICES DIRECT DEVICE 1On Flag is set, logic=1
↓ ↓
DIRECT DEVICE 16On Flag is set, logic=1
DIRECT DEVICE 1Off Flag is set, logic=1
↓ ↓
DIRECT DEVICE 16Off Flag is set, logic=1
DIRECT INPUT/ DIR IO CH1 CRC ALARM The rate of direct input messages received on channel 1 and failing the CRC
OUTPUT exceeded the user-specified level
CHANNEL DIR IO CH2 CRC ALARM The rate of direct input messages received on channel 2 and failing the CRC
MONITORING exceeded the user-specified level
DIR IO CH1 UNRET ALM The rate of returned direct input/output messages on channel 1 exceeded the
user-specified level (ring configurations only)
DIR IO CH2 UNRET ALM The rate of returned direct input/output messages on channel 2 exceeded the
user-specified level (ring configurations only) 5
ELEMENT: AUX OV1 PKP Auxiliary overvoltage element has picked up
Auxiliary AUX OV1 DPO Auxiliary overvoltage element has dropped out
overvoltage AUX OV1 OP Auxiliary overvoltage element has operated
AUX OV2 to 3 Same set of operands as shown for AUX OV1
ELEMENT BKR 1 FLSHOVR PKP A Breaker 1 flashover element phase A has picked up
Breaker flashover BKR 1 FLSHOVR PKP B Breaker 1 flashover element phase B has picked up
BKR 1 FLSHOVR PKP C Breaker 1 flashover element phase C has picked up
BKR 1 FLSHOVR PKP Breaker 1 flashover element has picked up
BKR 1 FLSHOVR OP A Breaker 1 flashover element phase A has operated
BKR 1 FLSHOVR OP B Breaker 1 flashover element phase B has operated
BKR 1 FLSHOVR OP C Breaker 1 flashover element phase C has operated
BKR 1 FLSHOVR OP Breaker 1 flashover element has operated
BKR 1 FLSHOVR DPO A Breaker 1 flashover element phase A has dropped out
BKR 1 FLSHOVR DPO B Breaker 1 flashover element phase B has dropped out
BKR 1 FLSHOVR DPO C Breaker 1 flashover element phase C has dropped out
BKR 1 FLSHOVR DPO Breaker 1 flashover element has dropped out
BKR 2 FLSHOVR Same set of operands as shown for BKR 1 FLSHOVR
ELEMENT BKR FAIL 1 RETRIPA Breaker failure 1 re-trip phase A (only for 1-pole schemes)
Breaker failure BKR FAIL 1 RETRIPB Breaker failure 1 re-trip phase B (only for 1-pole schemes)
BKR FAIL 1 RETRIPC Breaker failure 1 re-trip phase C (only for 1-pole schemes)
BKR FAIL 1 RETRIP Breaker failure 1 re-trip 3-phase
BKR FAIL 1 T1 OP Breaker failure 1 timer 1 is operated
BKR FAIL 1 TRIP OP Breaker failure 1 trip is operated
BKR FAIL 2 to 6 Same set of operands as shown for BKR FAIL 1


ELEMENT: BREAKER 1 OFF CMD Breaker 1 open command initiated
Breaker control BREAKER 1 ON CMD Breaker 1 close command initiated
BREAKER 1 ΦA BAD ST Breaker 1 phase A bad status is detected (discrepancy between
the 52/a and 52/b contacts)
BREAKER 1 ΦA INTERM Breaker 1 phase A intermediate status is detected (transition from one
position to another)
BREAKER 1 ΦA CLSD Breaker 1 phase A is closed
BREAKER 1 ΦA OPEN Breaker 1 phase A is open
BREAKER 1 ΦB BAD ST Breaker 1 phase B bad status is detected (discrepancy between
BREAKER 1 ΦB INTERM Breaker 1 phase B intermediate status is detected (transition from one
BREAKER 1 ΦB CLSD Breaker 1 phase B is closed
BREAKER 1 ΦB OPEN Breaker 1 phase B is open
BREAKER 1 ΦC BAD ST Breaker 1 phase C bad status is detected (discrepancy between
BREAKER 1 ΦC INTERM Breaker 1 phase C intermediate status is detected (transition from one
BREAKER 1 ΦC CLSD Breaker 1 phase C is closed
BREAKER 1 ΦC OPEN Breaker 1 phase C is open
BREAKER 1 BAD STATUS Breaker 1 bad status is detected on any pole
BREAKER 1 CLOSED Breaker 1 is closed
BREAKER 1 OPEN Breaker 1 is open
BREAKER 1 DISCREP Breaker 1 has discrepancy
BREAKER 1 TROUBLE Breaker 1 trouble alarm
BREAKER 1 MNL CLS Breaker 1 manual close
BREAKER 1 TRIP A Breaker 1 trip phase A command
BREAKER 1 TRIP B Breaker 1 trip phase B command
BREAKER 1 TRIP C Breaker 1 trip phase C command
BREAKER 1 ANY P OPEN At least one pole of breaker 1 is open
BREAKER 1 ONE P OPEN Only one pole of breaker 1 is open
5 BREAKER 1 OOS
BREAKER 2 to 6
Breaker 1 is out of service
Same set of operands as shown for BREAKER 1
ELEMENT: BUS 1 OP At least one phase of the bus differential characteristic has operated
Bus differential BUS 1 DPO At least one phase of the bus differential characteristic has dropped out
BUS 1 BIASED OP A Phase A biased differential function has operated
BUS 1 BIASED OP B Phase B biased differential function has operated
BUS 1 BIASED OP C Phase C biased differential function has operated
BUS 1 BIASED PKP A Phase A biased differential function has picked up
BUS 1 BIASED PKP B Phase B biased differential function has picked up
BUS 1 BIASED PKP C Phase C biased differential function has picked up
BUS 1 UNBIASED OP A Phase A unbiased differential function has operated
BUS 1 UNBIASED OP B Phase B unbiased differential function has operated
BUS 1 UNBIASED OP C Phase C unbiased differential function has operated
BUS 1 BIASED DPO A Phase A biased differential function has dropped out
BUS 1 BIASED DPO B Phase B biased differential function has dropped out
BUS 1 BIASED DPO C Phase C biased differential function has dropped out
BUS 1 UNBIASED DPO A Phase A unbiased differential function has dropped out
BUS 1 UNBIASED DPO B Phase B unbiased differential function has dropped out
BUS 1 UNBIASED DPO C Phase C unbiased differential function has dropped out
BUS 1 DIR A Phase A directional principle has picked up
BUS 1 DIR B Phase B directional principle has picked up
BUS 1 DIR C Phase C directional principle has picked up
BUS 1 SAT A CT saturation is detected in phase A
BUS 1 SAT B CT saturation is detected in phase B
BUS 1 SAT C CT saturation is detected in phase C
BUS 2 Same set of operands as shown for BUS 1
ELEMENT: CT TROUBLE1 OP At least one phase of CT Trouble Zone 1 is operated
CT trouble CT TROUBLE1 OP A Phase A of CT trouble zone 1 has operated
CT TROUBLE1 OP B Phase B of CT trouble zone 1 has operated
CT TROUBLE1 OP C Phase C of CT trouble zone 1 has operated
CT TROUBLE 2 Same set of operands as shown for CT TROUBLE 1
ELEMENT: Counter 1 HI Digital counter 1 output is ‘more than’ comparison value
Digital counters Counter 1 EQL Digital counter 1 output is ‘equal to’ comparison value
Counter 1 LO Digital counter 1 output is ‘less than’ comparison value
Counter 2 to 8 Same set of operands as shown for Counter 1


ELEMENT: Dig Element 1 PKP Digital Element 1 is picked up
Digital elements Dig Element 1 OP Digital Element 1 is operated
Dig Element 1 DPO Digital Element 1 is dropped out
Dig Element 2 to 48 Same set of operands as shown for Dig Element 1
ELEMENT: FxE 1 PKP FlexElement 1 has picked up
FlexElements FxE 1 OP FlexElement 1 has operated
FxE 1 DPO FlexElement 1 has dropped out
FxE 2 to 8 Same set of operands as shown for FxE 1
ELEMENT: GROUND IOC1 PKP Ground instantaneous overcurrent 1 has picked up
Ground GROUND IOC1 OP Ground instantaneous overcurrent 1 has operated
instantaneous GROUND IOC1 DPO Ground instantaneous overcurrent 1 has dropped out
overcurrent
GROUND IOC2 to 6 Same set of operands as shown for GROUND IOC 1
ELEMENT: GROUND TOC1 PKP Ground time overcurrent 1 has picked up
Ground time GROUND TOC1 OP Ground time overcurrent 1 has operated
overcurrent GROUND TOC1 DPO Ground time overcurrent 1 has dropped out
GROUND TOC2 to 6 Same set of operands as shown for GROUND TOC1
ELEMENT LATCH 1 ON Non-volatile latch 1 is ON (Logic = 1)
Non-volatile latches LATCH 1 OFF Non-volatile latch 1 is OFF (Logic = 0)
LATCH 2 to 16 Same set of operands as shown for LATCH 1
ELEMENT: NEUTRAL IOC1 PKP Neutral instantaneous overcurrent 1 has picked up
Neutral NEUTRAL IOC1 OP Neutral instantaneous overcurrent 1 has operated
instantaneous NEUTRAL IOC1 DPO Neutral instantaneous overcurrent 1 has dropped out
overcurrent
NEUTRAL IOC2 to 6 Same set of operands as shown for NEUTRAL IOC1
ELEMENT: NEUTRAL OV1 PKP Neutral overvoltage element 1 has picked up
Neutral overvoltage NEUTRAL OV1 DPO
NEUTRAL OV1 OP
Neutral overvoltage element 1 has dropped out
Neutral overvoltage element 1 has operated 5
NEUTRAL OV2 to 3 Same set of operands as shown for NEUTRAL OV1
ELEMENT: NEUTRAL TOC1 PKP Neutral time overcurrent 1 has picked up
Neutral time NEUTRAL TOC1 OP Neutral time overcurrent 1 has operated
overcurrent NEUTRAL TOC1 DPO Neutral time overcurrent 1 has dropped out
NEUTRAL TOC2 to 6 Same set of operands as shown for NEUTRAL TOC1
ELEMENT: PHASE IOC1 PKP At least one phase of phase instantaneous overcurrent 1 has picked up
Phase PHASE IOC1 OP At least one phase of phase instantaneous overcurrent 1 has operated
instantaneous PHASE IOC1 DPO All phases of phase instantaneous overcurrent 1 have dropped out
overcurrent PHASE IOC1 PKP A Phase A of phase instantaneous overcurrent 1 has picked up
PHASE IOC1 PKP B Phase B of phase instantaneous overcurrent 1 has picked up
PHASE IOC1 PKP C Phase C of phase instantaneous overcurrent 1 has picked up
PHASE IOC1 OP A Phase A of phase instantaneous overcurrent 1 has operated
PHASE IOC1 OP B Phase B of phase instantaneous overcurrent 1 has operated
PHASE IOC1 OP C Phase C of phase instantaneous overcurrent 1 has operated
PHASE IOC1 DPO A Phase A of phase instantaneous overcurrent 1 has dropped out
PHASE IOC1 DPO B Phase B of phase instantaneous overcurrent 1 has dropped out
PHASE IOC1 DPO C Phase C of phase instantaneous overcurrent 1 has dropped out
PHASE IOC2 to 6 Same set of operands as shown for PHASE IOC1
ELEMENT: PHASE TOC1 PKP At least one phase of phase time overcurrent 1 has picked up
Phase time PHASE TOC1 OP At least one phase of phase time overcurrent 1 has operated
overcurrent PHASE TOC1 DPO All phases of phase time overcurrent 1 have dropped out
PHASE TOC1 PKP A Phase A of phase time overcurrent 1 has picked up
PHASE TOC1 PKP B Phase B of phase time overcurrent 1 has picked up
PHASE TOC1 PKP C Phase C of phase time overcurrent 1 has picked up
PHASE TOC1 OP A Phase A of phase time overcurrent 1 has operated
PHASE TOC1 OP B Phase B of phase time overcurrent 1 has operated
PHASE TOC1 OP C Phase C of phase time overcurrent 1 has operated
PHASE TOC1 DPO A Phase A of phase time overcurrent 1 has dropped out
PHASE TOC1 DPO B Phase B of phase time overcurrent 1 has dropped out
PHASE TOC1 DPO C Phase C of phase time overcurrent 1 has dropped out
PHASE TOC2 to 6 Same set of operands as shown for PHASE TOC1


ELEMENT: PHASE UV1 PKP At least one phase of phase undervoltage 1 has picked up
Phase undervoltage PHASE UV1 OP At least one phase of phase undervoltage 1 has operated
PHASE UV1 DPO All phases of phase undervoltage 1 have dropped out
PHASE UV1 PKP A Phase A of phase undervoltage 1 has picked up
PHASE UV1 PKP B Phase B of phase undervoltage 1 has picked up
PHASE UV1 PKP C Phase C of phase undervoltage 1 has picked up
PHASE UV1 OP A Phase A of phase undervoltage 1 has operated
PHASE UV1 OP B Phase B of phase undervoltage 1 has operated
PHASE UV1 OP C Phase C of phase undervoltage 1 has operated
PHASE UV1 DPO A Phase A of phase undervoltage 1 has dropped out
PHASE UV1 DPO B Phase B of phase undervoltage 1 has dropped out
PHASE UV1 DPO C Phase C of phase undervoltage 1 has dropped out
PHASE UV2 to 3 Same set of operands as shown for PHASE UV1
ELEMENT: SELECTOR 1 POS Y Selector switch 1 is in Position Y (mutually exclusive operands)
Selector switch SELECTOR 1 BIT 0 First bit of the 3-bit word encoding position of selector 1
SELECTOR 1 BIT 1 Second bit of the 3-bit word encoding position of selector 1
SELECTOR 1 BIT 2 Third bit of the 3-bit word encoding position of selector 1
SELECTOR 1 STP ALARM Position of selector 1 has been pre-selected with the stepping up control
input but not acknowledged
SELECTOR 1 BIT ALARM Position of selector 1 has been pre-selected with the 3-bit control input but
not acknowledged
SELECTOR 1 ALARM Position of selector 1 has been pre-selected but not acknowledged
SELECTOR 1 PWR ALARM Position of selector switch 1 is undetermined or restored from memory when
the relay powers up and synchronizes to the three-bit input
SELECTOR 2 Same set of operands as shown above for SELECTOR 1
ELEMENT: SETTING GROUP ACT 1 Setting group 1 is active
Setting group SETTING GROUP ACT 2 Setting group 2 is active
SETTING GROUP ACT 3 Setting group 3 is active
SETTING GROUP ACT 4 Setting group 4 is active
5 SETTING GROUP ACT 5
SETTING GROUP ACT 6
Setting group 5 is active
Setting group 6 is active
ELEMENT: SWITCH 1 OFF CMD Disconnect switch 1 open command initiated
Disconnect switch SWITCH 1 ON CMD Disconnect switch 1 close command initiated
SWITCH 1 CLOSED Disconnect switch 1 is closed
SWITCH 1 OPEN Disconnect switch 1 is open
SWITCH 1 DISCREP Disconnect switch 1 has discrepancy
SWITCH 1 TROUBLE Disconnect switch 1 trouble alarm
SWITCH 1 ΦA CLSD Disconnect switch 1 phase A is closed
SWITCH 1 ΦA OPEN Disconnect switch 1 phase A is open
SWITCH 1 ΦA BAD ST Disconnect switch 1 phase A bad status is detected (discrepancy between
SWITCH 1 ΦA INTERM Disconnect switch 1 phase A intermediate status is detected (transition from
one position to another)
SWITCH 1 ΦB CLSD Disconnect switch 1 phase B is closed
SWITCH 1 ΦB OPEN Disconnect switch 1 phase B is open
SWITCH 1 ΦB BAD ST Disconnect switch 1 phase B bad status is detected (discrepancy between
SWITCH 1 ΦB INTERM Disconnect switch 1 phase B intermediate status is detected (transition from
SWITCH 1 ΦC CLSD Disconnect switch 1 phase C is closed
SWITCH 1 ΦC OPEN Disconnect switch 1 phase C is open
SWITCH 1 ΦC BAD ST Disconnect switch 1 phase C bad status is detected (discrepancy between
SWITCH 1 ΦC INTERM Disconnect switch 1 phase C intermediate status is detected (transition from
SWITCH 1 BAD STATUS Disconnect switch 1 bad status is detected on any pole
SWITCH 2 to 24 Same set of operands as shown for SWITCH 1
ELEMENT: TELEPRO CH1 FAIL Channel 1 failed
Teleprotection TELEPRO CH2 FAIL Channel 2 failed
channel tests TELEPRO CH1 ID FAIL The ID check for a peer relay on channel 1 has failed
TELEPRO CH2 ID FAIL The ID check for a peer relay on channel 2 has failed
TELEPRO CH1 CRC FAIL CRC detected packet corruption on channel 1
TELEPRO CH2 CRC FAIL CRC detected packet corruption on channel 2
TELEPRO CH1 PKT LOST CRC detected lost packet on channel 1
TELEPRO CH2 PKT LOST CRC detected lost packet on channel 2
ELEMENT: TELEPRO INPUT 1-1 On Flag is set, Logic =1
Teleprotection ↓ ↓
inputs/outputs TELEPRO INPUT 1-16 On Flag is set, Logic =1
TELEPRO INPUT 2-1 On Flag is set, Logic =1
↓ ↓
TELEPRO INPUT 2-16 On Flag is set, Logic =1


ELEMENT: THERMAL PROT 1 PKP Thermal overload protection 1 picked up
Thermal overload THERMAL PROT 1 OP Thermal overload protection 1 operated
protection
THERMAL PROT 2 Same set of operands as shown for THERMAL PROT 1
ELEMENT TRIP BUS 1 PKP Asserted when the trip bus 1 element picks up
Trip bus TRIP BUS 1 OP Asserted when the trip bus 1 element operates
TRIP BUS 2 to 6 Same set of operands as shown for TRIP BUS 1
FIXED OPERANDS Off Logic = 0. Does nothing and may be used as a delimiter in an equation list;
used as ‘Disable’ by other features.
On Logic = 1. Can be used as a test setting.
INPUTS/OUTPUTS: Cont Ip 1 On (will not appear unless ordered)
Contact inputs Cont Ip 2 On (will not appear unless ordered)
↓ ↓
Cont Ip 1 Off (will not appear unless ordered)
↓ ↓
Cont Ip 96 On (will not appear unless ordered)
INPUTS/OUTPUTS: Cont Op 1 Closed Contact output is closed
Contact outputs Cont Op 1 IOn Current is flowing through the contact
Cont Op 1 VOn Voltage exists across the contact (present for contact outputs equipped with
monitoring)
Cont Op 1 VOff Voltage exists across the contact (present for contact outputs equipped with
monitoring)
Cont Op 2 to 64 Same set of operands as shown for Cont Op 1
INPUTS/OUTPUTS DIRECT INPUT 1 On Flag is set, logic=1
Direct inputs ↓ ↓
DIRECT INPUT 32 On Flag is set, logic=1 5
INPUTS/OUTPUTS: RemDPS Ip 1 BAD Asserted while the remote double-point status input is in the bad state
Remote double- RemDPS Ip 1 INTERM Asserted while the remote double-point status input is in the intermediate
point status inputs state
RemDPS Ip 1 OFF Asserted while the remote double-point status input is off
RemDPS Ip 1 ON Asserted while the remote double-point status input is on
REMDPS Ip 2 to 5 Same set of operands as per REMDPS 1
INPUTS/OUTPUTS: REMOTE INPUT 1 On Flag is set, logic=1
Remote inputs REMOTE INPUT 2 On Flag is set, logic=1
REMOTE INPUT 3 On Flag is set, logic=1
↓ ↓
REMOTE INPUT 32 On Flag is set, logic=1
INPUTS/OUTPUTS: Virt Ip 1 On Flag is set, logic=1
Virtual inputs Virt Ip 2 On Flag is set, logic=1
Virt Ip 3 On Flag is set, logic=1
↓ ↓
Virt Ip 64 On Flag is set, logic=1
INPUTS/OUTPUTS: Virt Op 1 On Flag is set, logic=1
Virtual outputs Virt Op 2 On Flag is set, logic=1
Virt Op 3 On Flag is set, logic=1
↓ ↓
Virt Op 96 On Flag is set, logic=1
LED INDICATORS: LED IN SERVICE Asserted when the front panel IN SERVICE LED is on
Fixed front panel LED TROUBLE Asserted when the front panel TROUBLE LED is on
LEDs LED TEST MODE Asserted when the front panel TEST MODE LED is on
LED TRIP Asserted when the front panel TRIP LED is on
LED ALARM Asserted when the front panel ALARM LED is on
LED PICKUP Asserted when the front panel PICKUP LED is on
LED VOLTAGE Asserted when the front panel VOLTAGE LED is on
LED CURRENT Asserted when the front panel CURRENT LED is on
LED FREQUENCY Asserted when the front panel FREQUENCY LED is on
LED OTHER Asserted when the front panel OTHER LED is on
LED PHASE A Asserted when the front panel PHASE A LED is on
LED PHASE B Asserted when the front panel PHASE B LED is on
LED PHASE C Asserted when the front panel PHASE C LED is on
LED NEUTRAL/GROUND Asserted when the front panel NEUTRAL/GROUND LED is on
LED INDICATORS: LED TEST IN PROGRESS An LED test has been initiated and has not finished
LED test


LED INDICATORS: LED USER 1 Asserted when user-programmable LED 1 is on
User-programmable
LEDs LED USER 2 to 48 The operand above is available for user-programmable LEDs 2 through 48
PASSWORD ACCESS LOC SETG OFF Asserted when local setting access is disabled
SECURITY ACCESS LOC SETG ON Asserted when local setting access is enabled
ACCESS LOC CMND OFF Asserted when local command access is disabled
ACCESS LOC CMND ON Asserted when local command access is enabled
ACCESS REM SETG OFF Asserted when remote setting access is disabled
ACCESS REM SETG ON Asserted when remote setting access is enabled
ACCESS REM CMND OFF Asserted when remote command access is disabled
ACCESS REM CMND ON Asserted when remote command access is enabled
UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS Asserted when a password entry fails while accessing a password protected
level of the B30
REMOTE DEVICES REMOTE DEVICE 1 On Flag is set, logic=1
REMOTE DEVICE 2 On Flag is set, logic=1
↓ ↓
REMOTE DEVICE 1 Off Flag is set, logic=1
↓ ↓
RESETTING RESET OP Reset command is operated (set by all three operands below)
RESET OP (COMMS) Communications source of the reset command
RESET OP (OPERAND) Operand (assigned in the INPUTS/OUTPUTS  RESETTING menu) source
of the reset command
RESET OP (PUSHBUTTON) Reset key (pushbutton) source of the reset command
5 SELF-
DIAGNOSTICS
(See Relay Self-
ANY MAJOR ERROR
ANY MINOR ERROR
ANY SELF-TESTS
Any of the major self-test errors generated (major error)
Any of the minor self-test errors generated (minor error)
Any self-test errors generated (generic, any error)
tests descriptions in BATTERY FAIL The battery is not functioning. Return power supply module to manufacturer.
Chapter 7: CLOCK UNSYNCHRONIZED Relay is not synchronized to the international time standard
Commands and DIRECT DEVICE OFF A direct device is configured but not connected
Targets) DIRECT RING BREAK The Direct I/O settings is for a connection that is not in a ring
EQUIPMENT MISMATCH The configuration of modules does not match the stored order code
FLEXLOGIC ERR TOKEN A FlexLogic equation is incorrect
IRIG-B FAILURE "Bad IRIG-B Signal" self-test. See Chapter 7: Commands and Targets.
LATCHING OUT ERROR A difference is detected between the desired and actual latch contact state
MAINTENANCE ALERT A subset of the minor self-test errors generated, see Chapter 7
FIRST ETHERNET FAIL Link failure detected. See description in Chapter 7: Commands and targets.
PROCESS BUS FAILURE See description in Chapter 7: Commands and targets
PTP FAILURE "Bad PTP Signal" self-test as described in Chapter 7
REMOTE DEVICE OFF One or more GOOSE devices are not responding
RRTD COMM FAIL See description in Chapter 7: Commands and targets
SECOND ETHERNET FAIL See description in Chapter 7: Commands and targets
THIRD ETHERNET FAIL See description in Chapter 7: Commands and targets
SNTP FAILURE SNTP server is not responding
SYSTEM EXCEPTION See description in Chapter 7: Commands and targets
TEMP MONITOR Monitors ambient temperature and maximum operating temperature
UNIT NOT PROGRAMMED The Settings > Product Setup > Installation > Relay Settings setting is
not programmed
TEMPERATURE TEMP MONITOR Asserted while the ambient temperature is greater than the maximum
MONITOR operating temperature (80°C)
USER- PUSHBUTTON 1 ON Pushbutton number 1 is in the “On” position
PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTON 1 OFF Pushbutton number 1 is in the “Off” position
PUSHBUTTONS ANY PB ON Any of twelve pushbuttons is in the “On” position
PUSHBUTTON 2 to 6, 12, or 16 Same set of operands as PUSHBUTTON 1
depending on front panel
Some operands can be re-named by the user. These are the names of the breakers in the breaker control feature, the ID
(identification) of contact inputs and outputs, the ID of virtual inputs, and the ID of virtual outputs. If the user changes the
default name or ID of any of these operands, the assigned name will appear in the relay list of operands. The default names
are shown in the FlexLogic operands table above.
The characteristics of the logic gates are tabulated below, and the operators available in FlexLogic are listed in the Flex-
Logic operators table.

Table 5–15: FLEXLOGIC GATE CHARACTERISTICS

GATES NUMBER OF INPUTS OUTPUT IS ‘1’ (= ON) IF...
NOT 1 input is ‘0’
OR 2 to 16 any input is ‘1’
AND 2 to 16 all inputs are ‘1’
NOR 2 to 16 all inputs are ‘0’
NAND 2 to 16 any input is ‘0’
XOR 2 only one input is ‘1’
Table 5–16: FLEXLOGIC OPERATORS

TYPE SYNTAX DESCRIPTION NOTES
Editor INSERT Insert a parameter in an equation list.
DELETE Delete a parameter from an equation list.
End END The first END encountered signifies the last entry in
the list of processed FlexLogic parameters.
One-shot POSITIVE ONE SHOT One shot that responds to a positive going edge. A ‘one shot’ refers to a single input gate
that generates a pulse in response to an
NEGATIVE ONE One shot that responds to a negative going edge. edge on the input. The output from a ‘one
SHOT shot’ is True (positive) for only one pass
DUAL ONE SHOT One shot that responds to both the positive and through the FlexLogic equation. There is a
negative going edges. maximum of 64 ‘one shots’.
Logic NOT Logical NOT Operates on the previous parameter.
gate
OR(2)
↓
OR(16)
2 input OR gate
↓
16 input OR gate
Operates on the 2 previous parameters.
↓
Operates on the 16 previous parameters.
5
AND(2) 2 input AND gate Operates on the 2 previous parameters.
↓ ↓ ↓
AND(16) 16 input AND gate Operates on the 16 previous parameters.
NOR(2) 2 input NOR gate Operates on the 2 previous parameters.
↓ ↓ ↓
NOR(16) 16 input NOR gate Operates on the 16 previous parameters.
NAND(2) 2 input NAND gate Operates on the 2 previous parameters.
↓ ↓ ↓
NAND(16) 16 input NAND gate Operates on the 16 previous parameters.
XOR(2) 2 input Exclusive OR gate Operates on the 2 previous parameters.
LATCH (S,R) Latch (set, reset): reset-dominant The parameter preceding LATCH(S,R) is
the reset input. The parameter preceding
the reset input is the set input.
Timer TIMER 1 Timer set with FlexLogic timer 1 settings. The timer is started by the preceding
↓ ↓ parameter. The output of the timer is
TIMER 32 Timer set with FlexLogic timer 32 settings. TIMER #.
Assign = Virt Op 1 Assigns previous FlexLogic operand to virtual The virtual output is set by the preceding
virtual ↓ output 1. parameter
output = Virt Op 96 ↓
Assigns previous FlexLogic operand to virtual
output 96.
5.5.2 FLEXLOGIC RULES
When forming a FlexLogic equation, the sequence in the linear array of parameters must follow these general rules:
1. Operands must precede the operator which uses the operands as inputs.
2. Operators have only one output. The output of an operator must be used to create a virtual output if it is to be used as
an input to two or more operators.
3. Assigning the output of an operator to a virtual output terminates the equation.
4. A timer operator (for example, "TIMER 1") or virtual output assignment (for example, " = Virt Op 1") may only be used
once. If this rule is broken, a syntax error will be declared.

5.5.3 FLEXLOGIC EVALUATION
Each equation is evaluated in the ascending order in which the parameters have been entered.
FlexLogic provides built-in latches that by definition have a memory action, remaining in the set state after the set
input has been asserted. These built-in latches are reset dominant, meaning that if logical "1" is applied to both set
NOTE and reset entries simultaneously, then the output of the latch is logical "0." However, they are volatile, meaning that
they reset upon removal of control power.
When making changes to FlexLogic entries in the settings, all FlexLogic equations are re-compiled whenever any
new FlexLogic entry value is entered, and as a result of the re-compile all latches are reset automatically.
5.5.4 FLEXLOGIC EXAMPLE
This section provides an example of implementing logic for a typical application. The sequence of the steps is quite impor-
tant as it should minimize the work necessary to develop the relay settings. Note that the example presented in the figure
below is intended to demonstrate the procedure, not to solve a specific application situation.
In the example below, it is assumed that logic has already been programmed to produce virtual outputs 1 and 2, and is only
a part of the full set of equations used. When using FlexLogic, it is important to make a note of each virtual output used – a
virtual output designation (1 to 96) can only be properly assigned once.
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1
State=ON
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 2
Set
State=ON
LATCH
5 VIRTUAL INPUT 1 OR #1 Reset

State=ON Timer 2
XOR Time Delay Operate Output
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 OR #2
on Dropout Relay H1
State=Pickup
(200 ms)
DIGITAL ELEMENT 2 Timer 1

State=Operated Time Delay
AND
on Pickup
(800 ms)
CONTACT INPUT H1c 827025A2.vsd
State=Closed
Figure 5–40: EXAMPLE LOGIC SCHEME

1. Inspect the example logic diagram to determine if the required logic can be implemented with the FlexLogic operators.
If this is not possible, the logic must be altered until this condition is satisfied. Once this is done, count the inputs to
each gate to verify that the number of inputs does not exceed the FlexLogic limits, which is unlikely but possible. If the
number of inputs is too high, subdivide the inputs into multiple gates to produce an equivalent. For example, if 25
inputs to an AND gate are required, connect Inputs 1 through 16 to AND(16), 17 through 25 to AND(9), and the outputs
from these two gates to AND(2).
Inspect each operator between the initial operands and final virtual outputs to determine if the output from the operator
is used as an input to more than one following operator. If so, the operator output must be assigned as a virtual output.
For the example shown above, the output of the AND gate is used as an input to both OR#1 and Timer 1, and must
therefore be made a virtual output and assigned the next available number (i.e. Virtual Output 3). The final output must
also be assigned to a virtual output as virtual output 4, which will be programmed in the contact output section to oper-
ate relay H1 (that is, contact output H1).

Therefore, the required logic can be implemented with two FlexLogic equations with outputs of virtual output 3 and vir-
tual output 4 as shown below.
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1
State=ON
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 2
Set
State=ON
LATCH
VIRTUAL INPUT 1 OR #1 Reset
State=ON Timer 2
XOR Time Delay
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 OR #2 VIRTUAL OUTPUT 4
on Dropout
State=Pickup (200 ms)
DIGITAL ELEMENT 2 Timer 1

State=Operated Time Delay
AND
on Pickup
(800 ms)
CONTACT INPUT H1c
State=Closed VIRTUAL OUTPUT 3
827026A2.VSD
Figure 5–41: LOGIC EXAMPLE WITH VIRTUAL OUTPUTS

2. Prepare a logic diagram for the equation to produce virtual output 3, as this output will be used as an operand in the
virtual output 4 equation (create the equation for every output that will be used as an operand first, so that when these
operands are required they will already have been evaluated and assigned to a specific virtual output). The logic for
virtual output 3 is shown below with the final output assigned.
DIGITAL ELEMENT 2
State=Operated
AND(2) VIRTUAL OUTPUT 3 5

CONTACT INPUT H1c
State=Closed
827027A2.VSD
Figure 5–42: LOGIC FOR VIRTUAL OUTPUT 3

3. Prepare a logic diagram for virtual output 4, replacing the logic ahead of virtual output 3 with a symbol identified as vir-
tual output 3, as shown below.
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1
State=ON
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 2
Set
State=ON
LATCH
VIRTUAL INPUT 1 OR #1 Reset
State=ON Timer 2
XOR Time Delay VIRTUAL
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 OR #2
on Dropout OUTPUT 4
State=Pickup
(200 ms)
Timer 1
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 3 Time Delay
State=ON on Pickup
(800 ms)
CONTACT INPUT H1c
State=Closed 827028A2.VSD
Figure 5–43: LOGIC FOR VIRTUAL OUTPUT 4

4. Program the FlexLogic equation for virtual output 3 by translating the logic into available FlexLogic parameters. The
equation is formed one parameter at a time until the required logic is complete. It is generally easier to start at the out-
put end of the equation and work back towards the input, as shown in the following steps. It is also recommended to list
operator inputs from bottom to top. For demonstration, the final output will be arbitrarily identified as parameter 99, and
each preceding parameter decremented by one in turn. Until accustomed to using FlexLogic, it is suggested that a
worksheet with a series of cells marked with the arbitrary parameter numbers be prepared, as shown below.

01
02
03
04
05
.....
97
98
99
827029A1.VSD
Figure 5–44: FLEXLOGIC WORKSHEET

5. Following the procedure outlined, start with parameter 99, as follows:
99: The final output of the equation is virtual output 3, which is created by the operator "= Virt Op n". This parameter is
therefore "= Virt Op 3."
98: The gate preceding the output is an AND, which in this case requires two inputs. The operator for this gate is a 2-
input AND so the parameter is “AND(2)”. Note that FlexLogic rules require that the number of inputs to most types
of operators must be specified to identify the operands for the gate. As the 2-input AND will operate on the two
operands preceding it, these inputs must be specified, starting with the lower.
97: This lower input to the AND gate must be passed through an inverter (the NOT operator) so the next parameter is
5 “NOT”. The NOT operator acts upon the operand immediately preceding it, so specify the inverter input next.
96: The input to the NOT gate is to be contact input H1c. The ON state of a contact input can be programmed to be
set when the contact is either open or closed. Assume for this example the state is to be ON for a closed contact.
The operand is therefore “Cont Ip H1c On”.
95: The last step in the procedure is to specify the upper input to the AND gate, the operated state of digital element 2.
This operand is "DIG ELEM 2 OP".
Writing the parameters in numerical order can now form the equation for virtual output 3:
[95] DIG ELEM 2 OP
[96] Cont Ip H1c On
[97] NOT
[98] AND(2)
[99] = Virt Op 3
It is now possible to check that this selection of parameters will produce the required logic by converting the set of parame-
ters into a logic diagram. The result of this process is shown below, which is compared to the logic for virtual output 3 dia-
gram as a check.
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
95 DIG ELEM 2 OP VIRTUAL
AND
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n: OUTPUT 3
96 Cont Ip H1c On
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
97 NOT
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
98 AND (2)
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
99 =Virt Op 3
827030A2.VSD
Figure 5–45: FLEXLOGIC EQUATION FOR VIRTUAL OUTPUT 3

6. Repeating the process described for virtual output 3, select the FlexLogic parameters for Virtual Output 4.
99: The final output of the equation is virtual output 4 which is parameter “= Virt Op 4".
98: The operator preceding the output is timer 2, which is operand “TIMER 2". Note that the settings required for the
timer are established in the timer programming section.

97: The operator preceding timer 2 is OR #2, a 3-input OR, which is parameter “OR(3)”.
96: The lowest input to OR #2 is operand “Cont Ip H1c On”.
95: The center input to OR #2 is operand “TIMER 1".
94: The input to timer 1 is operand “Virt Op 3 On".
93: The upper input to OR #2 is operand “LATCH (S,R)”.
92: There are two inputs to a latch, and the input immediately preceding the latch reset is OR #1, a 4-input OR, which
is parameter “OR(4)”.
91: The lowest input to OR #1 is operand “Virt Op 3 On".
90: The input just above the lowest input to OR #1 is operand “XOR(2)”.
89: The lower input to the XOR is operand “DIG ELEM 1 PKP”.
88: The upper input to the XOR is operand “Virt Ip 1 On".
87: The input just below the upper input to OR #1 is operand “Virt Op 2 On".
86: The upper input to OR #1 is operand “Virt Op 1 On".
85: The last parameter is used to set the latch, and is operand “Virt Op 4 On".
The equation for virtual output 4 is:
[85] Virt Op 4 On
[86] Virt Op 1 On
[87] Virt Op 2 On
[88] Virt Ip 1 On
[89]
[90]
DIG ELEM 1 PKP
XOR(2)
5
[91] Virt Op 3 On
[92] OR(4)
[93] LATCH (S,R)
[94] Virt Op 3 On
[95] TIMER 1
[96] Cont Ip H1c On
[97] OR(3)
[98] TIMER 2
[99] = Virt Op 4
It is now possible to check that the selection of parameters will produce the required logic by converting the set of parame-
ters into a logic diagram. The result of this process is shown below, which is compared to the logic for virtual output 4 dia-
gram as a check.

FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
85 Virt Op 4 On
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
86 Virt Op 1 On
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
87 Virt Op 2 On
Set
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
88 Virt Ip 1 On
LATCH
XOR OR Reset
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
89 DIG ELEM 1 PKP
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
90 XOR
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
91 Virt Op 3 On VIRTUAL
OR T2 OUTPUT 4
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
92 OR (4)
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
93 LATCH (S,R)
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
94 Virt Op 3 On T1
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
95 TIMER 1
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
96 Cont Ip H1c On
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
97 OR (3)
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
98 TIMER 2
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
99 =Virt Op 4 827031A2.VSD
5 Figure 5–46: FLEXLOGIC EQUATION FOR VIRTUAL OUTPUT 4

7. Now write the complete FlexLogic expression required to implement the logic, making an effort to assemble the equa-
tion in an order where Virtual Outputs that will be used as inputs to operators are created before needed. In cases
where a lot of processing is required to perform logic, this may be difficult to achieve, but in most cases will not cause
problems as all logic is calculated at least four times per power frequency cycle. The possibility of a problem caused by
sequential processing emphasizes the necessity to test the performance of FlexLogic before it is placed in service.
In the following equation, virtual output 3 is used as an input to both latch 1 and timer 1 as arranged in the order shown
below:
DIG ELEM 2 OP
Cont Ip H1c On
NOT
AND(2)
= Virt Op 3
Virt Op 4 On
Virt Op 1 On
Virt Op 2 On
Virt Ip 1 On
DIG ELEM 1 PKP
XOR(2)
Virt Op 3 On
OR(4)
LATCH (S,R)
Virt Op 3 On
TIMER 1
Cont Ip H1c On
OR(3)
TIMER 2
= Virt Op 4
END
In the expression above, the virtual output 4 input to the four-input OR is listed before it is created. This is typical of a
form of feedback, in this case, used to create a seal-in effect with the latch, and is correct.

8. The logic should always be tested after it is loaded into the relay, in the same fashion as has been used in the past.
Testing can be simplified by placing an "END" operator within the overall set of FlexLogic equations. The equations will
then only be evaluated up to the first "END" operator.
The "On" and "Off" operands can be placed in an equation to establish a known set of conditions for test purposes, and
the "INSERT" and "DELETE" commands can be used to modify equations.
5.5.5 FLEXLOGIC EQUATION EDITOR
PATH: SETTINGS  FLEXLOGIC  FLEXLOGIC EQUATION EDITOR
 FLEXLOGIC FLEXLOGIC ENTRY 1: Range: FlexLogic operands

 EQUATION EDITOR END
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY 2: Range: FlexLogic operands
MESSAGE
END
↓
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY 512: Range: FlexLogic operands

MESSAGE
END
There are 512 FlexLogic entries available, numbered from 1 to 512, with default END entry settings. If a "Disabled" Element
is selected as a FlexLogic entry, the associated state flag will never be set to ‘1’. The ‘+/–‘ key may be used when editing
FlexLogic equations from the keypad to quickly scan through the major parameter types.
5.5.6 FLEXLOGIC TIMERS
PATH: SETTINGS  FLEXLOGIC  FLEXLOGIC TIMERS  FLEXLOGIC TIMER 1(32)

5
 FLEXLOGIC TIMER 1 Range: millisecond, second, minute
 TIMER 1 TYPE: millisecond
TIMER 1 PICKUP Range: 0 to 60000 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0
TIMER 1 DROPOUT Range: 0 to 60000 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0
There are 32 identical FlexLogic timers available. These timers can be used as operators for FlexLogic equations.
• TIMER 1 TYPE: This setting is used to select the time measuring unit.
• TIMER 1 PICKUP DELAY: Sets the time delay to pickup. If a pickup delay is not required, set this function to "0".
• TIMER 1 DROPOUT DELAY: Sets the time delay to dropout. If a dropout delay is not required, set this function to "0".

5.5.7 FLEXELEMENTS
PATH: SETTING  FLEXLOGIC  FLEXELEMENTS  FLEXELEMENT 1(8)
 FLEXELEMENT 1 FLEXELEMENT 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

FLEXELEMENT 1 NAME: Range: up to 6 alphanumeric characters
MESSAGE
FxE1
FLEXELEMENT 1 +IN: Range: Off, any analog actual value parameter
MESSAGE
Off
FLEXELEMENT 1 -IN: Range: Off, any analog actual value parameter
MESSAGE
Off
FLEXELEMENT 1 INPUT Range: Signed, Absolute
MESSAGE
MODE: Signed
FLEXELEMENT 1 COMP Range: Level, Delta
MESSAGE
MODE: Level
FLEXELEMENT 1 Range: Over, Under
MESSAGE
DIRECTION: Over
FLEXELEMENT 1 Range: –90.000 to 90.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
PICKUP: 1.000 pu
FLEXELEMENT 1 Range: 0.1 to 50.0% in steps of 0.1
5 MESSAGE
HYSTERESIS: 3.0%
FLEXELEMENT 1 dt Range: milliseconds, seconds, minutes
MESSAGE
UNIT: milliseconds
FLEXELEMENT 1 dt: Range: 20 to 86400 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
20
FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.000 s
FLEXELEMENT 1 RST Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.000 s
FLEXELEMENT 1 BLK: Range: FlexLogic operand
MESSAGE
Off
FLEXELEMENT 1 Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
TARGET: Self-reset
FLEXELEMENT 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
A FlexElement is a universal comparator that can be used to monitor any analog actual value calculated by the relay or a
net difference of any two analog actual values of the same type. The effective operating signal could be treated as a signed
number or its absolute value could be used as per user's choice.
FlexElements run every half power cycle (every four protection passes).
The element can be programmed to respond either to a signal level or to a rate-of-change (delta) over a pre-defined period
of time. The output operand is asserted when the operating signal is higher than a threshold or lower than a threshold as
per user's choice.

SETTING
SETTINGS
FLEXELEMENT 1
FUNCTION: FLEXELEMENT 1 INPUT MODE:
Enabled = 1
FLEXELEMENT 1 COMP MODE:
FLEXELEMENT 1 DIRECTION:
SETTING
FLEXELEMENT 1 PICKUP:
FLEXELEMENT 1 BLK:
FLEXELEMENT 1 INPUT
AND HYSTERESIS:
Off = 0
FLEXELEMENT 1 dt UNIT: SETTINGS
SETTINGS FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP

FLEXELEMENT 1 dt: DELAY:
FLEXELEMENT 1 +IN: FLEXELEMENT 1 RST
RUN DELAY:
Actual Value FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
+ tPKP
FLEXELEMENT 1 -IN: FxE 1 OP
- tRST
Actual Value FxE 1 DPO
FxE 1 PKP
ACTUAL VALUE
FlexElement 1 OpSig
842004A4.CDR
Figure 5–47: FLEXELEMENT SCHEME LOGIC

The FLEXELEMENT 1 +IN setting specifies the first (non-inverted) input to the FlexElement. Zero is assumed as the input if
this setting is set to “Off”. For proper operation of the element at least one input must be selected. Otherwise, the element
will not assert its output operands.
5
This FLEXELEMENT 1 –IN setting specifies the second (inverted) input to the FlexElement. Zero is assumed as the input if
this setting is set to “Off”. For proper operation of the element at least one input must be selected. Otherwise, the element
will not assert its output operands. This input should be used to invert the signal if needed for convenience, or to make the
element respond to a differential signal such as for a top-bottom oil temperature differential alarm. The element will not
operate if the two input signals are of different types, for example if one tries to use active power and phase angle to build
the effective operating signal.
The element responds directly to the differential signal if the FLEXELEMENT 1 INPUT MODE setting is set to “Signed”. The ele-
ment responds to the absolute value of the differential signal if this setting is set to “Absolute”. Sample applications for the
“Absolute” setting include monitoring the angular difference between two phasors with a symmetrical limit angle in both
directions, monitoring power regardless of its direction, or monitoring a trend.
The element responds directly to its operating signal – as defined by the FLEXELEMENT 1 +IN, FLEXELEMENT 1 –IN and FLEX-
ELEMENT 1 INPUT MODE settings – if the FLEXELEMENT 1 COMP MODE setting is set to “Level”. The element responds to the
rate of change of its operating signal if the FLEXELEMENT 1 COMP MODE setting is set to “Delta”. In this case the FLEXELE-
MENT 1 dt UNIT and FLEXELEMENT 1 dt settings specify how the rate of change is derived.
The FLEXELEMENT 1 DIRECTION setting enables the relay to respond to either high or low values of the operating signal. The
following figure explains the application of the FLEXELEMENT 1 DIRECTION, FLEXELEMENT 1 PICKUP and FLEXELEMENT 1 HYS-
TERESIS settings.

FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP
FLEXELEMENT
DIRECTION = Over
HYSTERESIS = % of PICKUP
FlexElement 1 OpSig
PICKUP
FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP
FLEXELEMENT
DIRECTION = Under
HYSTERESIS = % of PICKUP
FlexElement 1 OpSig
PICKUP
842705A1.CDR
Figure 5–48: FLEXELEMENT DIRECTION, PICKUP, AND HYSTERESIS

In conjunction with the FLEXELEMENT 1 INPUT MODE setting the element could be programmed to provide two extra charac-
teristics as shown in the figure below.

FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP
FLEXELEMENT
DIRECTION = Over;
FLEXELEMENT INPUT
MODE = Signed;
FlexElement 1 OpSig
FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP
FLEXELEMENT
DIRECTION = Over;
FLEXELEMENT INPUT
MODE = Absolute;
FlexElement 1 OpSig
FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP
FLEXELEMENT
DIRECTION = Under;
FLEXELEMENT INPUT
MODE = Signed;
5
FlexElement 1 OpSig
FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP
FLEXELEMENT
DIRECTION = Under;
FLEXELEMENT INPUT
MODE = Absolute;
FlexElement 1 OpSig
842706A2.CDR
Figure 5–49: FLEXELEMENT INPUT MODE SETTING

The FLEXELEMENT 1 PICKUP setting specifies the operating threshold for the effective operating signal of the element. If set
to “Over”, the element picks up when the operating signal exceeds the FLEXELEMENT 1 PICKUP value. If set to “Under”, the
element picks up when the operating signal falls below the FLEXELEMENT 1 PICKUP value.
The FLEXELEMENT 1 HYSTERESIS setting controls the element dropout. It should be noticed that both the operating signal
and the pickup threshold can be negative facilitating applications such as reverse power alarm protection. The FlexElement
can be programmed to work with all analog actual values measured by the relay. The FLEXELEMENT 1 PICKUP setting is
entered in per-unit values using the following definitions of the base units:
Table 5–17: FLEXELEMENT BASE UNITS

BUS DIFFERENTIAL IBASE = maximum primary RMS value of the +IN and –IN inputs
RESTRAINING CURRENT (CT primary for source currents, and bus reference primary current for bus differential currents)
(Bus Diff Mag)
BUS DIFFERENTIAL IBASE = maximum primary RMS value of the +IN and – IN inputs
(Bus Rest Mag)
DCmA BASE = maximum value of the DCMA INPUT MAX setting for the two transducers configured
under the +IN and –IN inputs.
DELTA TIME BASE = 1 µs
FREQUENCY fBASE = 1 Hz
PHASE ANGLE ϕBASE = 360 degrees (see the UR angle referencing convention)


POWER FACTOR PFBASE = 1.00
RTDs BASE = 100°C
SOURCE CURRENT IBASE = maximum nominal primary RMS value of the +IN and –IN inputs
SOURCE POWER PBASE = maximum value of VBASE × IBASE for the +IN and –IN inputs
SOURCE VOLTAGE VBASE = maximum nominal primary RMS value of the +IN and –IN inputs
The FLEXELEMENT 1 HYSTERESIS setting defines the pickup–dropout relation of the element by specifying the width of the
hysteresis loop as a percentage of the pickup value as shown in the FlexElement direction, pickup, and hysteresis diagram.
The FLEXELEMENT 1 DT UNIT setting specifies the time unit for the setting FLEXELEMENT 1 dt. This setting is applicable only if
FLEXELEMENT 1 COMP MODE is set to “Delta”. The FLEXELEMENT 1 DT setting specifies duration of the time interval for the
rate of change mode of operation. This setting is applicable only if FLEXELEMENT 1 COMP MODE is set to “Delta”.
This FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP DELAY setting specifies the pickup delay of the element. The FLEXELEMENT 1 RST DELAY setting
specifies the reset delay of the element.

5.5.8 NON-VOLATILE LATCHES
PATH: SETTINGS  FLEXLOGIC  NON-VOLATILE LATCHES  LATCH 1(16)
 LATCH 1 LATCH 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

LATCH 1 TYPE: Range: Reset Dominant, Set Dominant
MESSAGE
Reset Dominant
LATCH 1 SET: Range: FlexLogic operand
MESSAGE
Off
LATCH 1 RESET: Range: FlexLogic operand
MESSAGE
Off
LATCH 1 Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
TARGET: Self-reset
LATCH 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
The non-volatile latches provide a permanent logical flag that is stored safely and will not reset upon reboot after the relay
is powered down. Typical applications include sustaining operator commands or permanently block relay functions, such as
Autorecloser, until a deliberate interface action resets the latch. The settings element operation is described below:
• LATCH 1 TYPE: This setting characterizes Latch 1 to be Set- or Reset-dominant.
• LATCH 1 SET: If asserted, the specified FlexLogic operands 'sets' Latch 1.
• LATCH 1 RESET: If asserted, the specified FlexLogic operand 'resets' Latch 1. 5
SETTING SETTING
LATCH N LATCH N LATCH N LATCH N LATCH N
TYPE SET RESET ON OFF LATCH 1 FUNCTION: LATCH 1 TYPE:
Reset ON OFF ON OFF Enabled=1 RUN
Dominant
OFF OFF Previous Previous
State State
SETTING
ON ON OFF ON
OFF ON OFF ON LATCH 1 SET:
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
Set ON OFF ON OFF Off=0 SET LATCH 1 ON
Dominant
ON ON ON OFF LATCH 1 OFF
OFF OFF Previous Previous SETTING
State State
LATCH 1 RESET:
OFF ON OFF ON
Off=0 RESET 842005A3.CDR
Figure 5–50: NON-VOLATILE LATCH OPERATION TABLE (N = 1 to 16) AND LOGIC

5.6 GROUPED ELEMENTS 5 SETTINGS
5.6GROUPED ELEMENTS 5.6.1 OVERVIEW
Each protection element can be assigned up to six different sets of settings according to setting group designations 1 to 6.
The performance of these elements is defined by the active setting group at a given time. Multiple setting groups allow the
user to conveniently change protection settings for different operating situations (for example, altered power system config-
uration, season of the year, etc.). The active setting group can be preset or selected via the SETTING GROUPS menu (see the
Control Elements section later in this chapter). See also the Introduction to Elements section at the beginning of this chap-
ter.
5.6.2 SETTING GROUP
PATH: SETTINGS  GROUPED ELEMENTS  SETTING GROUP 1(6)
 SETTING GROUP 1  BUS DIFFERENTIAL

See page 5-139.
 
 PHASE CURRENT
MESSAGE See page 5-143.

 NEUTRAL CURRENT

 GROUND CURRENT

 BREAKER FAILURE

5 MESSAGE
 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS
See page 5-165.

Each of the six setting group menus is identical. Setting Group 1 (the default active group) automatically becomes active if
no other group is active (see section 5.7.3: Setting Groups on page 5–172 for details).

5 SETTINGS 5.6 GROUPED ELEMENTS
5.6.3 BUS DIFFERENTIAL
PATH: SETTINGS  GROUPED ELEMENTS  SETTING GROUP 1(6)  BUS DIFFERENTIAL  BUS ZONE 1(2) DIFFERENTIAL
 BUS ZONE 1 BUS ZONE 1 DIFF Range: Disabled, Enabled

 DIFFERENTIAL FUNCTION: Disabled
BUS ZONE 1 DIFF Range: 0.050 to 6.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
PICKUP: 0.100 pu
BUS ZONE 1 DIFF Range: 15 to 100% in steps of 1
MESSAGE
LOW SLOPE: 25%
MESSAGE
LOW BPNT: 2.00 pu
BUS ZONE 1 DIFF Range: 50 to 100% in steps of 1
MESSAGE
HIGH SLOPE: 60%
MESSAGE
HIGH BPNT: 8.00 pu
MESSAGE
HIGH SET: 15.00 pu
BUS ZONE 1 DIFF Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
SEAL-IN: 0.400 s
BUS ZONE 1 DIFF BLK: Range: FlexLogic operand
MESSAGE
Off 5
BUS ZONE 1 DIFF Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
TARGET: Latched
BUS ZONE 1 DIFF Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
Two zones of bus differential protection are provided. The operation of these elements is completely dependent on the
dynamic bus replica, which must be defined first. Both biased and unbiased bus differential protection functions are pro-
vided for the bus differential zone.
The biased bus differential function has a dual-slope operating characteristic (see figure below) operating in conjunction
with saturation detection and a directional comparison principle (see the Bus zone 1 differential scheme logic figure in this
section).

|Id|
differential
OPERATE
HIGH
SLOPE
BLOCK
LOW
SLOPE Ir
PICKUP
HIGH BPNT
LOW BPNT
restraining
836720A1.CDR
Figure 5–51: BIASED DIFFERENTIAL OPERATING CHARACTERISTIC

The protected zone input current with the highest magnitude is used as the restraining signal. Stability during heavy exter-
nal faults is achieved by dynamic CT saturation detection and current flow direction supervision without affecting sensitivity
and speed of operation for internal faults.
The differential operating characteristic is divided into two regions. In the region of low differential currents and lower slope,
5 the element operates on a 2-out-of-2 basis, applying both the differential and current directional tests. In the region of high
differential currents, the element operates on a dynamic 1-out-of-2 / 2-out-of-2 basis. If the differential current is in this
region and CT saturation is detected, both the differential and current directional tests are applied. If CT saturation is ruled
out by the saturation detector, the differential protection principle alone is capable of causing the element to operate.
The saturation detector is an integral part of the bus differential element. It has no settings but uses some of the differential
characteristic parameters. The flags indicating CT saturation are available on a per phase basis as FlexLogic operands.
The directional principle is an integral part of the biased bus differential element and has no associated settings. The direc-
tional element dynamically identifies what appears to be the faulted circuit and compares its current angle with that of the
sum of the remaining currents of the protected zone. The element declares a bus fault if the angle is less than 90°. Direc-
tional indicating flags signal operation on a per-phase basis and are available as FlexLogic operands.
The unbiased bus differential function checks the magnitude of the differential current against an adjustable threshold. Nei-
ther the bias nor the directional principles apply. The operation of the unbiased differential function is associated with sepa-
rate output operands. More information can be found in the Theory of Operation chapter.
Operation of this element is completely dependent on the dynamic bus replica which must be first defined under bus zone
1. The bus differential element 1 protects the differential zone defined as bus zone 1.
• BUS ZONE 1 DIFF PICKUP: This setting defines the minimum differential current required for operation of the biased
bus differential protection element. This setting is chosen based on the maximum magnitude of the differential current
that might be seen under no-load conditions. This setting prevents relay maloperation in the situation when the bus
carries little power and the restraining signal is too low to provide enough bias in the first slope region of the differential
characteristic.
This setting may also be set above the maximum load level to ensure security during CT trouble conditions. However,
voltage supervision or a check-zone are better alternatives.
• BUS ZONE 1 DIFF LOW SLOPE: This setting defines the percentage bias for the restraining currents, from zero to the
lower breakpoint (LOW BPNT). This setting determines the sensitivity of the relay for low current internal faults. The
value chosen should be high enough to accommodate the spurious differential current resulting from inaccuracy of the
CTs operating in their linear mode, i.e. in load conditions and during distant external faults. When adjusting this setting,
it must be kept in mind that the restraining signal used by the biased bus differential protection element is created as
the maximum of all the input currents.
• BUS ZONE 1 DIFF LOW BPNT: This setting defines the lower breakpoint of the dual-slope operating characteristic.
The percentage bias applied for the restraining current from zero to the value specified as LOW BPNT is given by the

LOW SLOPE setting. This setting should be set above the maximum load current. The LOW BPNT may be moved to the
AC current under which all the CTs are guaranteed to transform without saturation. This includes the effect of residual
magnetism. When adjusting this setting, it must be kept in mind that the restraining signal is created as the maximum
of all the input currents.
• BUS ZONE 1 DIFF HIGH SLOPE: This setting defines the percentage bias for the restraining currents above the
higher breakpoint (HIGH BPNT). This setting affects stability of the relay for heavy external faults. Traditionally, the
value chosen for this setting should be high enough to accommodate the spurious differential current resulting from
saturation of the CTs during heavy external faults. This requirement may be considerably relaxed in favor of sensitivity
and speed of operation as the relay detects CT saturation and upon detection applies the directional principle to pre-
vent maloperation. When adjusting this setting, it must be kept in mind that the restraining signal is created as the max-
imum of all the input currents.
• BUS ZONE 1 DIFF HIGH BPNT: This setting defines the higher breakpoint of the dual-slope operating characteristic.
The percentage bias applied for the restraining current above the value specified as HIGH BPNT is given by the HIGH
SLOPE setting. The HIGH BPNT setting should be set below the minimum AC current that is likely to saturate the weak-
est CT feeding the relay. When adjusting this setting, it must be kept in that mind the restraining signal is created as the
maximum of all the input currents.
The dual-slope operating characteristic of the biased bus differential protection element is shaped to ensure true per-
centage bias for high restraining currents (see the following figure). This means that the straight line defining the upper
slope intersects the origin of the differential-restraining plane and a discontinuity appears between the low and high
slope regions (between the LOW BPNT and HIGH BPNT settings). This discontinuity is handled by approximating the
operate/no-operate boundary of the characteristic using a certain “gluing” function. This ensures smooth transition of
the slope from LOW SLOPE (lower value) to HIGH SLOPE (higher value).
The following parameters of the biased operating characteristic are used by the saturation detector: LOW SLOPE, HIGH
SLOPE, and HIGH BPNT. The saturation detector uses these settings to detect specific relations between the differential
and restraining currents. The values of these settings should be selected based on the aforementioned criteria related 5
to the art of bus differential protection.
• BUS ZONE 1 DIFF HIGH SET: This setting defines the minimum differential current required for operation of the unbi-
ased bus differential protection function. This setting is based on the maximum magnitude of the differential current
that might be seen during heavy external faults causing deep CT saturation. When selecting this setting, keep in mind
that the unbiased bus differential protection function uses the full-cycle Fourier measuring algorithm and applies it to
pre-filtered samples of the input currents. As a result, the transient measuring errors including the effect of the DC
component are below 2%. During heavy CT saturation when the currents are significantly distorted, the magnitude of
the differential current as measured by the relay and used by the unbiased bus differential function is significantly lower
than both the peak values of the waveform and the true RMS value. The measured magnitude practically reflects the
power system frequency component alone. This allows for lower values of the HIGH SET setting.
The unbiased (high set) differential function can be virtually disabled by setting its operating threshold, HIGH SET, very
high.
• BUS ZONE 1 DIFF SEAL-IN: This setting defines the drop-out time of the seal-in timer applied to the BUS 1 OP Flex-
Logic operand.
More information on the bus zone differential settings can be found in the Application of Settings chapter.

5
5-142
SETTING
BUS ZONE 1 DIFF
FUNCTION:
SETTING
Enable=1
BUS ZONE 1 DIFF
HIGH SET:
SETTING FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
AND RUN
BUS ZONE 1 DIFF | Iad1 | > HIGH SET BUS 1 UNBIASED OP A
BLOCK: BUS 1 UNBIASED DPO A
RUN
Off = 0 | Ibd1 | > HIGH SET BUS 1 UNBIASED OP B
BUS 1 UNBIASED DPO B
RUN
| Icd1 | > HIGH SET BUS 1 UNBIASED OP C
BUS 1 UNBIASED DPO C
SETTING
SETTING BUS ZONE 1 DIFF
abc abc abc abc
BUS ZONE 1A SOURCE: OR SEAL-IN:
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Ia 0
OR t DPO BUS 1 OP
Ib
abc abc abc abc BUS 1 DPO
Ic OR
ia
ib AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
SAMPLES PHASORS
ic
OR BUS 1 BIASED OP A
OR
BUS 1 BIASED DPO A
AND
SETTING
BUS ZONE 1A STATUS:
Off = 0 AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
SETTING OR BUS 1 BIASED OP B
OR
BUS ZONE 1 DIFF BUS 1 BIASED DPO B
... ... ... PICKUP: AND
BUS ZONE 1 DIFF

LOW SLOPE:
AND
BUS ZONE 1 DIFF FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
SETTING
LOW BPNT:
BUS ZONE 1F SOURCE: OR BUS 1 BIASED OP C
OR
BUS ZONE 1 DIFF BUS 1 BIASED DPO C
Ia AND
HIGH SLOPE:
Ib
BUS ZONE 1 DIFF
Ic abc HIGH BPNT:

ia OR
DIFFERENTIAL AND RESTRAINING CURRENTS

Icd1 RUN d iffe r e n tia l
ib
SAMPLES PHASORS
ic Ibd1
restraining
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
Iad1 BUS 1 BIASED PKP A
OR BUS 1 BIASED PKP B
d iffe r e n tia l
BUS 1 BIASED PKP C
Icr1
restraining
Figure 5–52: BUS ZONE 1 DIFFERENTIAL SCHEME LOGIC

SETTING Ibr1
BUS ZONE 1F STATUS: Iar1 OR
Off = 0 FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
CURRENT BUS 1 DIR A
DIRECTIONAL BUS 1 DIR B
ELEMENT BUS 1 DIR C
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
BUS 1 SAT A
SATURATION
BUS 1 SAT B
DETECTOR
BUS 1 SAT C
836721A7.CDR
5 SETTINGS
GE Multilin
5.6.4 PHASE CURRENT
a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS  GROUPED ELEMENTS  SETTING GROUP 1(6)  PHASE CURRENT
 PHASE CURRENT  PHASE TOC1

See page 5–149.
 
 PHASE TOC2

 PHASE TOC3

 PHASE TOC4

 PHASE TOC5 Note: Seen only if slot F or slot M has an 8H or 8J CT
MESSAGE module installed.

 PHASE TOC6 Note: Seen only if slot F or slot M has an 8H or 8J CT
MESSAGE module installed.

 PHASE IOC1

 PHASE IOC2

MESSAGE
 PHASE IOC3
See page 5–151. 5

 PHASE IOC4

 PHASE IOC5

 PHASE IOC6


b) INVERSE TOC CURVE CHARACTERISTICS

The inverse time overcurrent curves used by the time overcurrent elements are the IEEE, IEC, GE Type IAC, and I2t stan-
dard curve shapes. This allows for simplified coordination with downstream devices.
If none of these curve shapes is adequate, FlexCurves may be used to customize the inverse time curve characteristics.
The definite time curve is also an option that may be appropriate if only simple protection is required.
Table 5–18: OVERCURRENT CURVE TYPES

IEEE IEC GE TYPE IAC OTHER
IEEE Extremely Inverse IEC Curve A (BS142) IAC Extremely Inverse I2t
IEEE Very Inverse IEC Curve B (BS142) IAC Very Inverse FlexCurves A, B, C, and D
IEEE Moderately Inverse IEC Curve C (BS142) IAC Inverse Recloser Curves
IEC Short Inverse IAC Short Inverse Definite Time
A time dial multiplier setting allows selection of a multiple of the base curve shape (where the time dial multiplier = 1) with
the curve shape (CURVE) setting. Unlike the electromechanical time dial equivalent, operate times are directly proportional
to the time multiplier (TD MULTIPLIER) setting value. For example, all times for a multiplier of 10 are 10 times the multiplier 1
or base curve values. Setting the multiplier to zero results in an instantaneous response to all current levels above pickup.
Time overcurrent time calculations are made with an internal energy capacity memory variable. When this variable indi-
cates that the energy capacity has reached 100%, a time overcurrent element will operate. If less than 100% energy capac-
ity is accumulated in this variable and the current falls below the dropout threshold of 97 to 98% of the pickup value, the
variable must be reduced. Two methods of this resetting operation are available: “Instantaneous” and “Timed”. The “Instan-
taneous” selection is intended for applications with other relays, such as most static relays, which set the energy capacity
directly to zero when the current falls below the reset threshold. The “Timed” selection can be used where the relay must
5 coordinate with electromechanical relays.
IEEE CURVES:
The IEEE time overcurrent curve shapes conform to industry standards and the IEEE C37.112-1996 curve classifications
for extremely, very, and moderately inverse. The IEEE curves are derived from the formulae:
A tr
---------------------------------- + B -----------------------------------
-
I p
T = TDM ×  ---------------- – 1 , T RESET = TDM × I -2
 --------------- (EQ 5.4)
 I pickup 1 –  I pickup 
where: T = operate time (in seconds), TDM = Multiplier setting, I = input current, Ipickup = Pickup Current setting
A, B, p = constants, TRESET = reset time in seconds (assuming energy capacity is 100% and RESET is “Timed”),
tr = characteristic constant
Table 5–19: IEEE INVERSE TIME CURVE CONSTANTS

IEEE CURVE SHAPE A B P TR
IEEE Extremely Inverse 28.2 0.1217 2.0000 29.1
IEEE Very Inverse 19.61 0.491 2.0000 21.6
IEEE Moderately Inverse 0.0515 0.1140 0.02000 4.85
Table 5–20: IEEE CURVE TRIP TIMES (IN SECONDS)

MULTIPLIER CURRENT ( I / Ipickup)
(TDM)
1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0
IEEE EXTREMELY INVERSE
0.5 11.341 4.761 1.823 1.001 0.648 0.464 0.355 0.285 0.237 0.203
1.0 22.682 9.522 3.647 2.002 1.297 0.927 0.709 0.569 0.474 0.407
2.0 45.363 19.043 7.293 4.003 2.593 1.855 1.418 1.139 0.948 0.813
4.0 90.727 38.087 14.587 8.007 5.187 3.710 2.837 2.277 1.897 1.626
6.0 136.090 57.130 21.880 12.010 7.780 5.564 4.255 3.416 2.845 2.439
8.0 181.454 76.174 29.174 16.014 10.374 7.419 5.674 4.555 3.794 3.252

Table 5–20: IEEE CURVE TRIP TIMES (IN SECONDS)

(TDM) 1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0
10.0 226.817 95.217 36.467 20.017 12.967 9.274 7.092 5.693 4.742 4.065
IEEE VERY INVERSE
0.5 8.090 3.514 1.471 0.899 0.654 0.526 0.450 0.401 0.368 0.345
1.0 16.179 7.028 2.942 1.798 1.308 1.051 0.900 0.802 0.736 0.689
2.0 32.358 14.055 5.885 3.597 2.616 2.103 1.799 1.605 1.472 1.378
4.0 64.716 28.111 11.769 7.193 5.232 4.205 3.598 3.209 2.945 2.756
6.0 97.074 42.166 17.654 10.790 7.849 6.308 5.397 4.814 4.417 4.134
8.0 129.432 56.221 23.538 14.387 10.465 8.410 7.196 6.418 5.889 5.513
10.0 161.790 70.277 29.423 17.983 13.081 10.513 8.995 8.023 7.361 6.891
IEEE MODERATELY INVERSE
0.5 3.220 1.902 1.216 0.973 0.844 0.763 0.706 0.663 0.630 0.603
1.0 6.439 3.803 2.432 1.946 1.688 1.526 1.412 1.327 1.260 1.207
2.0 12.878 7.606 4.864 3.892 3.377 3.051 2.823 2.653 2.521 2.414
4.0 25.756 15.213 9.729 7.783 6.753 6.102 5.647 5.307 5.041 4.827
6.0 38.634 22.819 14.593 11.675 10.130 9.153 8.470 7.960 7.562 7.241
8.0 51.512 30.426 19.458 15.567 13.507 12.204 11.294 10.614 10.083 9.654
10.0 64.390 38.032 24.322 19.458 16.883 15.255 14.117 13.267 12.604 12.068

IEC CURVES
For European applications, the relay offers three standard curves defined in IEC 255-4 and British standard BS142. These
are defined as IEC Curve A, IEC Curve B, and IEC Curve C. The formulae for these curves are:
K tr
--------------------------------------- --------------------------------------
-
T = TDM × ( I ⁄ I pickup ) E – 1 , T RESET = TDM × 1 – ( I ⁄ I 2 (EQ 5.5)
pickup )
where: T = operate time (in seconds), TDM = Multiplier setting, I = input current, Ipickup = Pickup Current setting, K, E =
constants, tr = characteristic constant, and TRESET = reset time in seconds (assuming energy capacity is 100%
and RESET is “Timed”)
Table 5–21: IEC (BS) INVERSE TIME CURVE CONSTANTS

IEC (BS) CURVE SHAPE K E TR
IEC Curve A (BS142) 0.140 0.020 9.7
IEC Curve B (BS142) 13.500 1.000 43.2
IEC Curve C (BS142) 80.000 2.000 58.2
IEC Short Inverse 0.050 0.040 0.500
Table 5–22: IEC CURVE TRIP TIMES (IN SECONDS)

(TDM)
1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0
IEC CURVE A
0.05 0.860 0.501 0.315 0.249 0.214 0.192 0.176 0.165 0.156 0.149
5 0.10
0.20
1.719
3.439
1.003
2.006
0.630
1.260
0.498
0.996
0.428
0.856
0.384
0.767
0.353
0.706
0.330
0.659
0.312
0.623
0.297
0.594
0.40 6.878 4.012 2.521 1.992 1.712 1.535 1.411 1.319 1.247 1.188
0.60 10.317 6.017 3.781 2.988 2.568 2.302 2.117 1.978 1.870 1.782
0.80 13.755 8.023 5.042 3.984 3.424 3.070 2.822 2.637 2.493 2.376
1.00 17.194 10.029 6.302 4.980 4.280 3.837 3.528 3.297 3.116 2.971
IEC CURVE B
0.05 1.350 0.675 0.338 0.225 0.169 0.135 0.113 0.096 0.084 0.075
0.10 2.700 1.350 0.675 0.450 0.338 0.270 0.225 0.193 0.169 0.150
0.20 5.400 2.700 1.350 0.900 0.675 0.540 0.450 0.386 0.338 0.300
0.40 10.800 5.400 2.700 1.800 1.350 1.080 0.900 0.771 0.675 0.600
0.60 16.200 8.100 4.050 2.700 2.025 1.620 1.350 1.157 1.013 0.900
0.80 21.600 10.800 5.400 3.600 2.700 2.160 1.800 1.543 1.350 1.200
1.00 27.000 13.500 6.750 4.500 3.375 2.700 2.250 1.929 1.688 1.500
IEC CURVE C
0.05 3.200 1.333 0.500 0.267 0.167 0.114 0.083 0.063 0.050 0.040
0.10 6.400 2.667 1.000 0.533 0.333 0.229 0.167 0.127 0.100 0.081
0.20 12.800 5.333 2.000 1.067 0.667 0.457 0.333 0.254 0.200 0.162
0.40 25.600 10.667 4.000 2.133 1.333 0.914 0.667 0.508 0.400 0.323
0.60 38.400 16.000 6.000 3.200 2.000 1.371 1.000 0.762 0.600 0.485
0.80 51.200 21.333 8.000 4.267 2.667 1.829 1.333 1.016 0.800 0.646
1.00 64.000 26.667 10.000 5.333 3.333 2.286 1.667 1.270 1.000 0.808
IEC SHORT TIME
0.05 0.153 0.089 0.056 0.044 0.038 0.034 0.031 0.029 0.027 0.026
0.10 0.306 0.178 0.111 0.088 0.075 0.067 0.062 0.058 0.054 0.052
0.20 0.612 0.356 0.223 0.175 0.150 0.135 0.124 0.115 0.109 0.104
0.40 1.223 0.711 0.445 0.351 0.301 0.269 0.247 0.231 0.218 0.207
0.60 1.835 1.067 0.668 0.526 0.451 0.404 0.371 0.346 0.327 0.311
0.80 2.446 1.423 0.890 0.702 0.602 0.538 0.494 0.461 0.435 0.415
1.00 3.058 1.778 1.113 0.877 0.752 0.673 0.618 0.576 0.544 0.518

IAC CURVES:
The curves for the General Electric type IAC relay family are derived from the formulae:
 B D E  tr
T = TDM ×  A + ------------------------------ + -------------------------------------2- + -------------------------------------3- , T RESET = TDM × -------------------------------
- (EQ 5.6)
 ( I ⁄ I pkp ) – C ( ( I ⁄ I ) – C ) ( ( I ⁄ I ) – C )  2
pkp pkp 1 – ( I ⁄ I pkp )
where: T = operate time (in seconds), TDM = Multiplier setting, I = Input current, Ipkp = Pickup Current setting, A to E =
constants, tr = characteristic constant, and TRESET = reset time in seconds (assuming energy capacity is 100%
and RESET is “Timed”)
Table 5–23: GE TYPE IAC INVERSE TIME CURVE CONSTANTS

IAC CURVE SHAPE A B C D E TR
IAC Extreme Inverse 0.0040 0.6379 0.6200 1.7872 0.2461 6.008
IAC Very Inverse 0.0900 0.7955 0.1000 –1.2885 7.9586 4.678
IAC Inverse 0.2078 0.8630 0.8000 –0.4180 0.1947 0.990
IAC Short Inverse 0.0428 0.0609 0.6200 –0.0010 0.0221 0.222
Table 5–24: IAC CURVE TRIP TIMES

(TDM)
1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0
IAC EXTREMELY INVERSE
0.5 1.699 0.749 0.303 0.178 0.123 0.093 0.074 0.062 0.053 0.046
1.0
2.0
3.398
6.796
1.498
2.997
0.606
1.212
0.356
0.711
0.246
0.491
0.186
0.372
0.149
0.298
0.124
0.248
0.106
0.212
0.093
0.185
5
4.0 13.591 5.993 2.423 1.422 0.983 0.744 0.595 0.495 0.424 0.370
6.0 20.387 8.990 3.635 2.133 1.474 1.115 0.893 0.743 0.636 0.556
8.0 27.183 11.987 4.846 2.844 1.966 1.487 1.191 0.991 0.848 0.741
10.0 33.979 14.983 6.058 3.555 2.457 1.859 1.488 1.239 1.060 0.926
IAC VERY INVERSE
0.5 1.451 0.656 0.269 0.172 0.133 0.113 0.101 0.093 0.087 0.083
1.0 2.901 1.312 0.537 0.343 0.266 0.227 0.202 0.186 0.174 0.165
2.0 5.802 2.624 1.075 0.687 0.533 0.453 0.405 0.372 0.349 0.331
4.0 11.605 5.248 2.150 1.374 1.065 0.906 0.810 0.745 0.698 0.662
6.0 17.407 7.872 3.225 2.061 1.598 1.359 1.215 1.117 1.046 0.992
8.0 23.209 10.497 4.299 2.747 2.131 1.813 1.620 1.490 1.395 1.323
10.0 29.012 13.121 5.374 3.434 2.663 2.266 2.025 1.862 1.744 1.654
IAC INVERSE
0.5 0.578 0.375 0.266 0.221 0.196 0.180 0.168 0.160 0.154 0.148
1.0 1.155 0.749 0.532 0.443 0.392 0.360 0.337 0.320 0.307 0.297
2.0 2.310 1.499 1.064 0.885 0.784 0.719 0.674 0.640 0.614 0.594
4.0 4.621 2.997 2.128 1.770 1.569 1.439 1.348 1.280 1.229 1.188
6.0 6.931 4.496 3.192 2.656 2.353 2.158 2.022 1.921 1.843 1.781
8.0 9.242 5.995 4.256 3.541 3.138 2.878 2.695 2.561 2.457 2.375
10.0 11.552 7.494 5.320 4.426 3.922 3.597 3.369 3.201 3.072 2.969
IAC SHORT INVERSE
0.5 0.072 0.047 0.035 0.031 0.028 0.027 0.026 0.026 0.025 0.025
1.0 0.143 0.095 0.070 0.061 0.057 0.054 0.052 0.051 0.050 0.049
2.0 0.286 0.190 0.140 0.123 0.114 0.108 0.105 0.102 0.100 0.099
4.0 0.573 0.379 0.279 0.245 0.228 0.217 0.210 0.204 0.200 0.197
6.0 0.859 0.569 0.419 0.368 0.341 0.325 0.314 0.307 0.301 0.296
8.0 1.145 0.759 0.559 0.490 0.455 0.434 0.419 0.409 0.401 0.394
10.0 1.431 0.948 0.699 0.613 0.569 0.542 0.524 0.511 0.501 0.493

I2t CURVES:
The curves for the I2t are derived from the formulae:
100 100
-------------------------- ----------------------------
I  2 , T RESET = TDM ×  I  – 2
T = TDM ×  --------------- (EQ 5.7)
- ----------------
 I pickup   I pickup 
where: T = Operate Time (sec.); TDM = Multiplier Setting; I = Input Current; Ipickup = Pickup Current Setting;
TRESET = Reset Time in sec. (assuming energy capacity is 100% and RESET: Timed)
Table 5–25: I2T CURVE TRIP TIMES

(TDM)
1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0
0.01 0.44 0.25 0.11 0.06 0.04 0.03 0.02 0.02 0.01 0.01
0.10 4.44 2.50 1.11 0.63 0.40 0.28 0.20 0.16 0.12 0.10
1.00 44.44 25.00 11.11 6.25 4.00 2.78 2.04 1.56 1.23 1.00
10.00 444.44 250.00 111.11 62.50 40.00 27.78 20.41 15.63 12.35 10.00
100.00 4444.4 2500.0 1111.1 625.00 400.00 277.78 204.08 156.25 123.46 100.00
600.00 26666.7 15000.0 6666.7 3750.0 2400.0 1666.7 1224.5 937.50 740.74 600.00
FLEXCURVES:
The custom FlexCurves are described in detail in the FlexCurves section of this chapter. The curve shapes for the Flex-
Curves are derived from the formulae:
5 I
T = TDM × FlexCurve Time at  ----------------
I
when  ---------------- ≥ 1.00 (EQ 5.8)
I pickup I pickup
I I
T RESET = TDM × FlexCurve Time at  ---------------- when  ---------------- ≤ 0.98 (EQ 5.9)
I pickup I pickup
where: T = Operate Time (sec.), TDM = Multiplier setting

I = Input Current, Ipickup = Pickup Current setting
TRESET = Reset Time in seconds (assuming energy capacity is 100% and RESET: Timed)
DEFINITE TIME CURVE:
The Definite Time curve shape operates as soon as the pickup level is exceeded for a specified period of time. The base
definite time curve delay is in seconds. The curve multiplier of 0.00 to 600.00 makes this delay adjustable from instanta-
neous to 600.00 seconds in steps of 10 ms.
T = TDM in seconds, when I > I pickup (EQ 5.10)
T RESET = TDM in seconds (EQ 5.11)
where: T = Operate Time (sec.), TDM = Multiplier setting

I = Input Current, Ipickup = Pickup Current setting
TRESET = Reset Time in seconds (assuming energy capacity is 100% and RESET: Timed)
RECLOSER CURVES:
The B30 uses the FlexCurve feature to facilitate programming of 41 recloser curves. See the FlexCurve section in this
chapter for details.

c) PHASE TIME OVERCURRENT (ANSI 51P, IEC PTOC)

PATH: SETTINGS  GROUPED ELEMENTS  SETTING GROUP 1(6)  PHASE CURRENT  PHASE TOC1(6)
 PHASE TOC1 PHASE TOC1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

PHASE TOC1 SIGNAL Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4, SRC 5, SRC 6
MESSAGE
SOURCE: SRC 1
PHASE TOC1 Range: Phasor, RMS
MESSAGE
INPUT: Phasor
PHASE TOC1 Range: 0.000 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
PICKUP: 1.000 pu
PHASE TOC1 Range: See Overcurrent Curve Types table
MESSAGE
CURVE: IEEE Mod Inv
PHASE TOC1 Range: 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
TD MULTIPLIER: 1.00
PHASE TOC1 Range: Instantaneous, Timed
MESSAGE
RESET: Instantaneous
PHASE TOC1 VOLTAGE Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
RESTRAINT: Disabled
PHASE TOC1 BLOCK A: Range: FlexLogic operand
MESSAGE
Off
PHASE TOC1 BLOCK B: Range: FlexLogic operand 5
MESSAGE
Off
PHASE TOC1 BLOCK C: Range: FlexLogic operand
MESSAGE
Off
PHASE TOC1 Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
TARGET: Self-reset
PHASE TOC1 Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
The phase time overcurrent element can provide a desired time-delay operating characteristic versus the applied current or
be used as a simple definite time element. The phase current input quantities may be programmed as fundamental phasor
magnitude or total waveform RMS magnitude as required by the application.
Two methods of resetting operation are available: “Timed” and “Instantaneous” (see the Inverse TOC Curve Characteristics
section earlier for details on curve setup, trip times, and reset operation). When the element is blocked, the time accumula-
tor will reset according to the reset characteristic. For example, if the element reset characteristic is set to “Instantaneous”
and the element is blocked, the time accumulator will be cleared immediately.
The PHASE TOC1 PICKUP setting can be dynamically reduced by a voltage restraint feature (when enabled). This is accom-
plished via the multipliers (Mvr) corresponding to the phase-phase voltages of the voltage restraint characteristic curve (see
the figure below); the pickup level is calculated as ‘Mvr’ times the PHASE TOC1 PICKUP setting. If the voltage restraint feature
is disabled, the pickup level always remains at the setting value.

Multiplier for Pickup Current

1.0
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0
Phase-Phase Voltage ÷ VT Nominal Phase-phase Voltage
818784A4.CDR
Figure 5–53: PHASE TIME OVERCURRENT VOLTAGE RESTRAINT CHARACTERISTIC
SETTING
PHASE TOC1
FUNCTION:
Enabled=1
SETTING
PHASE TOC1
BLOCK-A :
Off=0
5
SETTING
PHASE TOC1
BLOCK-B:
Off=0
SETTING
SETTING
PHASE TOC1
PHASE TOC1 INPUT:
BLOCK-C:
PHASE TOC1
Off=0 PICKUP:
PHASE TOC1
SETTING CURVE:
PHASE TOC1 PHASE TOC1
SOURCE: TD MULTIPLIER:
IA
PHASE TOC1
IB RESET: FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
IC AND RUN PHASE TOC1 A PKP
IA PICKUP
Seq=ABC Seq=ACB PHASE TOC1 A DPO
MULTIPLY INPUTS
RUN
t PHASE TOC1 A OP
VAB VAC Set
Calculate Multiplier Set Pickup AND RUN PHASE TOC1 B PKP
RUN
Multiplier-Phase A IB PICKUP
Set PHASE TOC1 B DPO
VBC VBA Set Pickup
Calculate Multiplier t PHASE TOC1 B OP
RUN
Multiplier-Phase B
Set AND RUN PHASE TOC1 C PKP
VCA VCB IC PICKUP
Calculate Multiplier Set Pickup PHASE TOC1 C DPO
Multiplier-Phase C
t PHASE TOC1 C OP
SETTING OR PHASE TOC1 PKP
PHASE TOC1 VOLT
RESTRAINT: OR PHASE TOC1 OP
Enabled
AND PHASE TOC1 DPO
827072A5.CDR
Figure 5–54: PHASE TIME OVERCURRENT 1 SCHEME LOGIC

d) PHASE INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT (ANSI 50P, IEC PIOC)

PATH: SETTINGS  GROUPED ELEMENTS  SETTING GROUP 1(6)  PHASE CURRENT  PHASE IOC 1(6)
 PHASE IOC1 PHASE IOC1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

PHASE IOC1 SIGNAL Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4, SRC 5, SRC 6
MESSAGE
SOURCE: SRC 1
PHASE IOC1 Range: 0.000 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
PICKUP: 1.000 pu
PHASE IOC1 PICKUP Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.00 s
PHASE IOC1 RESET Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.00 s
PHASE IOC1 BLOCK A: Range: FlexLogic operand
MESSAGE
Off
PHASE IOC1 BLOCK B: Range: FlexLogic operand
MESSAGE
Off
PHASE IOC1 BLOCK C: Range: FlexLogic operand
MESSAGE
Off
PHASE IOC1 Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
TARGET: Self-reset
PHASE IOC1 Range: Disabled, Enabled 5
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
Six instantaneous overcurrent elements facilitate applications including an external check zone function. For bus configura-
tions of up to five feeders, each with a second set of CTs, a check zone can be implemented by externally summing cur-
rents from the independent sets of CTs and connecting the resulting differential current to the sixth current input. In this
case, one element monitors the independently formed differential current and supervises the differential protection.
If applied, the overcurrent function responding to the independently formed differential signal should be used to supervise
the output from the main differential protection with a FlexLogic AND gate before driving the output contact. It is not recom-
mended to use the drop-out operand of the overcurrent function as the block input to the differential element. The differen-
tial element includes the saturation detector that responds to specific time relationships between the differential and
restraining currents, and therefore, it must be operational all the time in order to function properly.
The phase instantaneous overcurrent element may be used as an instantaneous element with no intentional delay or as a
definite time element. The input current is the fundamental phasor magnitude. For timing curves, see the publication Instan-
taneous Overcurrent Element Response to Saturated Waveforms in UR-Series Relays (GET-8400A).

SETTINGS FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS

SETTING
SETTING Pickup Delay PHASE IOC1 A PKP
Function
Pickup Reset Delay PHASE IOC1 A DPO
AND RUN TPKP PHASE IOC1 B PKP
1 = Enabled
IA > Pickup PHASE IOC1 B DPO
TRST PHASE IOC1 C PKP
AND RUN TPKP PHASE IOC1 C DPO
SETTING
Source IB > Pickup
TRST
= IA FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
AND RUN TPKP
= IB PHASE IOC1 A OP
IC > Pickup PHASE IOC1 B OP
= IC TRST
PHASE IOC1 C OP
SETTINGS FLEXLOGIC OPERAND

Block A OR PHASE IOC1 PKP
= Off
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Block B
OR PHASE IOC1 OP
= Off
Block C FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
= Off AND PHASE IOC1 DPO
827033A8.CDR
Figure 5–55: PHASE INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT 1 SCHEME LOGIC
5.6.5 NEUTRAL CURRENT
a) NEUTRAL TIME OVERCURRENT (ANSI 51N, IEC PTOC)

PATH: SETTINGS  GROUPED ELEMENTS  SETTING GROUP 1(6)  NEUTRAL CURRENT  NEUTRAL TOC1(6)
 NEUTRAL TOC1 NEUTRAL TOC1 Range: Disabled, Enabled
5  FUNCTION: Disabled
NEUTRAL TOC1 SIGNAL Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4, SRC 5, SRC 6
MESSAGE
SOURCE: SRC 1
NEUTRAL TOC1 Range: Phasor, RMS
MESSAGE
INPUT: Phasor
NEUTRAL TOC1 Range: 0.000 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
PICKUP: 1.000 pu
NEUTRAL TOC1 Range: See OVERCURRENT CURVE TYPES table
MESSAGE
CURVE: IEEE Mod Inv
NEUTRAL TOC1 Range: 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
TD MULTIPLIER: 1.00
NEUTRAL TOC1 Range: Instantaneous, Timed
MESSAGE
NEUTRAL TOC1 BLOCK: Range: FlexLogic operand
MESSAGE
Off
NEUTRAL TOC1 Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
TARGET: Self-reset
NEUTRAL TOC1 Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
The neutral time overcurrent element can provide a desired time-delay operating characteristic versus the applied current
or be used as a simple definite time element. The neutral current input value is a quantity calculated as 3Io from the phase
currents and may be programmed as fundamental phasor magnitude or total waveform RMS magnitude as required by the
application.

Two methods of resetting operation are available: “Timed” and “Instantaneous” (see the Inverse TOC Curve Characteristics
section for details on curve setup, trip times and reset operation). When the element is blocked, the time accumulator will
reset according to the reset characteristic. For example, if the element reset characteristic is set to “Instantaneous” and the
element is blocked, the time accumulator will be cleared immediately.
SETTINGS
NEUTRAL TOC1
INPUT:
SETTING NEUTRAL TOC1
NEUTRAL TOC1 PICKUP:
FUNCTION: NEUTRAL TOC1
Enabled = 1 CURVE:
NEUTRAL TOC1
TD MULTIPLIER:
NEUTRAL TOC 1 FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
SETTING
RESET: NEUTRAL TOC1 PKP
NEUTRAL TOC1
AND RUN IN PICKUP NEUTRAL TOC1 DPO
SOURCE:
NEUTRAL TOC1 OP
IN t
I
SETTING
NEUTRAL TOC1
BLOCK:
Off = 0 827034A4.VSD
Figure 5–56: NEUTRAL TIME OVERCURRENT 1 SCHEME LOGIC
b) NEUTRAL INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT (ANSI 50N, IEC PIOC)

PATH: SETTINGS  GROUPED ELEMENTS  SETTING GROUP 1(6)  NEUTRAL CURRENT  NEUTRAL IOC1(6) 5
 NEUTRAL IOC1 NEUTRAL IOC1 Range: Disabled, Enabled
NEUTRAL IOC1 SIGNAL Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4, SRC 5, SRC 6
MESSAGE
SOURCE: SRC 1
NEUTRAL IOC1 Range: 0.000 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
PICKUP: 1.000 pu
NEUTRAL IOC1 PICKUP Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.00 s
NEUTRAL IOC1 RESET Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.00 s
NEUTRAL IOC1 BLOCK: Range: FlexLogic operand
MESSAGE
Off
NEUTRAL IOC1 Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
TARGET: Self-reset
NEUTRAL IOC1 Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
The neutral instantaneous overcurrent element may be used as an instantaneous function with no intentional delay or as a
definite time function. The element essentially responds to the magnitude of a neutral current fundamental frequency pha-
sor calculated from the phase currents. A positive-sequence restraint is applied for better performance. A small portion
(6.25%) of the positive-sequence current magnitude is subtracted from the zero-sequence current magnitude when forming
the operating quantity of the element as follows:
I op = 3 × ( I_0 – Kx I_1 ) where K = 1 ⁄ 16 (EQ 5.12)
The positive-sequence restraint allows for more sensitive settings by counterbalancing spurious zero-sequence currents
resulting from

• System unbalances under heavy load conditions

• Transformation errors of current transformers (CTs) during double-line and three-phase faults
• Switch-off transients during double-line and three-phase faults
The positive-sequence restraint must be considered when testing for pickup accuracy and response time (multiple of
pickup). The operating quantity depends on how test currents are injected into the relay (single-phase injection):
1
I op = --- × ( 3 – K ) x I injected (EQ 5.13)
3
SETTING
SETTINGS
NEUTRAL IOC1 FUNCTION: NEUTRAL IOC1
SETTING PICKUP DELAY :
Enabled=1 FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
NEUTRAL IOC1
NEUTRAL IOC1 PICKUP: NEUTRAL IOC1 PKP
RESET DELAY :
SETTING NEUTRAL IOC1 DPO
AND RUN tPKP
tRST NEUTRAL IOC1 OP
NEUTRAL IOC1 BLOCK: 3( I_0 - K I_1 ) PICKUP
Off=0
SETTING
NEUTRAL IOC1 SOURCE:
I_0
827035A5.CDR
5 Figure 5–57: NEUTRAL IOC1 SCHEME LOGIC
5.6.6 GROUND CURRENT
a) GROUND TIME OVERCURRENT (ANSI 51G, IEC PTOC)

PATH: SETTINGS  GROUPED ELEMENTS  SETTING GROUP 1(6)  GROUND CURRENT  GROUND TOC1(6)
 GROUND TOC1 GROUND TOC1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

GROUND TOC1 SIGNAL Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4, SRC 5, SRC 6
MESSAGE
SOURCE: SRC 1
GROUND TOC1 Range: Phasor, RMS
MESSAGE
INPUT: Phasor
GROUND TOC1 Range: 0.000 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
PICKUP: 1.000 pu
GROUND TOC1 Range: see the Overcurrent Curve Types table
MESSAGE
CURVE: IEEE Mod Inv
GROUND TOC1 Range: 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
TD MULTIPLIER: 1.00
GROUND TOC1 Range: Instantaneous, Timed
MESSAGE
GROUND TOC1 BLOCK: Range: FlexLogic operand
MESSAGE
Off
GROUND TOC1 Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
TARGET: Self-reset
GROUND TOC1 Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled

This element can provide a desired time-delay operating characteristic versus the applied current or be used as a simple
definite time element. The ground current input value is the quantity measured by the ground input CT and is the funda-
mental phasor or RMS magnitude. Two methods of resetting operation are available: “Timed” and “Instantaneous” (see the
Inverse TOC Curve Characteristics section for details). When the element is blocked, the time accumulator will reset
according to the reset characteristic. For example, if the element reset characteristic is set to “Instantaneous” and the ele-
ment is blocked, the time accumulator will be cleared immediately.
These elements measure the current that is connected to the ground channel of a CT/VT module. The conversion
range of a standard channel is from 0.02 to 46 times the CT rating.
NOTE
This channel may be also equipped with a sensitive input. The conversion range of a sensitive channel is from
0.002 to 4.6 times the CT rating.
NOTE
SETTINGS
GROUND TOC1
INPUT:
SETTING GROUND TOC1
GROUND TOC1 PICKUP:
FUNCTION: GROUND TOC1
Enabled = 1 CURVE:
GROUND TOC1
TD MULTIPLIER:
GROUND TOC 1 FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
SETTING
RESET: GROUND TOC1 PKP
GROUND TOC1
AND RUN IG PICKUP GROUND TOC1 DPO
SOURCE:
GROUND TOC1 OP
IG t
I 5
SETTING
GROUND TOC1
BLOCK:
827036A4.VSD
Off = 0
Figure 5–58: GROUND TOC1 SCHEME LOGIC
b) GROUND INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT (ANSI 50G, IEC PIOC)

PATH: SETTINGS  GROUPED ELEMENTS  SETTING GROUP 1(6)  GROUND CURRENT  GROUND IOC1(6)
 GROUND IOC1 GROUND IOC1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

GROUND IOC1 SIGNAL Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4, SRC 5, SRC 6
MESSAGE
SOURCE: SRC 1
GROUND IOC1 Range: 0.000 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
PICKUP: 1.000 pu
GROUND IOC1 PICKUP Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.00 s
GROUND IOC1 RESET Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.00 s
GROUND IOC1 BLOCK: Range: FlexLogic operand
MESSAGE
Off
GROUND IOC1 Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
TARGET: Self-reset
GROUND IOC1 Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled

The ground instantaneous overcurrent element may be used as an instantaneous element with no intentional delay or as a
definite time element. The ground current input is the quantity measured by the ground input CT and is the fundamental
phasor magnitude.
These elements measure the current that is connected to the ground channel of a CT/VT module. The conversion
range of a standard channel is from 0.02 to 46 times the CT rating.
NOTE
This channel may be equipped with a standard or sensitive input. The conversion range of a sensitive channel is
from 0.002 to 4.6 times the CT rating.
NOTE
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
GROUND IOC1 PKP
SETTING GROUND IOIC DPO
GROUND IOC1
SETTINGS GROUND IOC1 OP
FUNCTION:
Enabled = 1 GROUND IOC1 PICKUP
SETTING DELAY:
GROUND IOC1 GROUND IOC1 RESET
SETTING
PICKUP: DELAY:
GROUND IOC1
AND RUN tPKP
SOURCE:
IG
IG PICKUP tRST
SETTING
GROUND IOC1
BLOCK:
827037A5.VSD
Off = 0
Figure 5–59: GROUND IOC1 SCHEME LOGIC

5

5.6.7 BREAKER FAILURE (ANSI 50BF)
PATH: SETTINGS  GROUPED ELEMENTS  SETTING GROUP 1(6)  BREAKER FAILURE  BREAKER FAILURE 1(6)
 BREAKER FAILURE 1 BF1 FUNCTION: Range: Disabled, Enabled

 Disabled
BF1 MODE: Range: 3-Pole, 1-Pole

MESSAGE
3-Pole
BF1 SOURCE: Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4, SRC 5, SRC 6

MESSAGE
SRC 1
BF1 USE AMP SUPV: Range: Yes, No
MESSAGE
Yes
BF1 USE SEAL-IN: Range: Yes, No
MESSAGE
Yes
BF1 3-POLE INITIATE: Range: FlexLogic operand
MESSAGE
Off
BF1 BLOCK: Range: FlexLogic operand
MESSAGE
Off
BF1 PH AMP SUPV Range: 0.001 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
PICKUP: 1.050 pu
BF1 N AMP SUPV Range: 0.001 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
PICKUP: 1.050 pu 5
BF1 USE TIMER 1: Range: Yes, No
MESSAGE
Yes
BF1 TIMER 1 PICKUP Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.000 s
MESSAGE
Yes
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.000 s
MESSAGE
Yes
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.000 s
BF1 BKR POS1 φA/3P: Range: FlexLogic operand
MESSAGE
Off
BF1 BKR POS2 φA/3P: Range: FlexLogic operand
MESSAGE
Off
BF1 BREAKER TEST ON: Range: FlexLogic operand
MESSAGE
Off
BF1 PH AMP HISET Range: 0.001 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
PICKUP: 1.050 pu
BF1 N AMP HISET Range: 0.001 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
PICKUP: 1.050 pu
BF1 PH AMP LOSET Range: 0.001 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
PICKUP: 1.050 pu

BF1 N AMP LOSET Range: 0.001 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001

MESSAGE
PICKUP: 1.050 pu
BF1 LOSET TIME Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.000 s
BF1 TRIP DROPOUT Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.000 s
BF1 TARGET Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
Self-Reset
BF1 EVENTS Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
Disabled
BF1 PH A INITIATE: Range: FlexLogic operand
MESSAGE Valid only for 1-Pole breaker failure schemes.
Off
BF1 PH B INITIATE: Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
BF1 PH C INITIATE: Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
BF1 BKR POS1 φB Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
BF1 BKR POS1 φC Range: FlexLogic operand
Off
5 MESSAGE
BF1 BKR POS2 φB Range: FlexLogic operand
Off Valid only for 1-Pole breaker failure schemes.
BF1 BKR POS2 φC Range: FlexLogic operand

Off
In general, a breaker failure scheme determines that a breaker signaled to trip has not cleared a fault within a definite time,
so further tripping action must be performed. Tripping from the breaker failure scheme should trip all breakers, both local
and remote, that can supply current to the faulted zone. Usually operation of a breaker failure element will cause clearing of
a larger section of the power system than the initial trip. Because breaker failure can result in tripping a large number of
breakers and this affects system safety and stability, a very high level of security is required.
Two schemes are provided: one for three-pole tripping only (identified by the name “3BF”) and one for three pole plus sin-
gle-pole operation (identified by the name “1BF”). The philosophy used in these schemes is identical. The operation of a
breaker failure element includes three stages: initiation, determination of a breaker failure condition, and output.
INITIATION STAGE:
A FlexLogic operand representing the protection trip signal initially sent to the breaker must be selected to initiate the
scheme. The initiating signal should be sealed-in if primary fault detection can reset before the breaker failure timers have
finished timing. The seal-in is supervised by current level, so it is reset when the fault is cleared. If desired, an incomplete
sequence seal-in reset can be implemented by using the initiating operand to also initiate a FlexLogic timer, set longer than
any breaker failure timer, whose output operand is selected to block the breaker failure scheme.
Schemes can be initiated either directly or with current level supervision. It is particularly important in any application to
decide if a current-supervised initiate is to be used. The use of a current-supervised initiate results in the breaker failure ele-
ment not being initiated for a breaker that has very little or no current flowing through it, which may be the case for trans-
former faults. For those situations where it is required to maintain breaker fail coverage for fault levels below the BF1 PH
AMP SUPV PICKUP or the BF1 N AMP SUPV PICKUP setting, a current supervised initiate should not be used. This feature
should be utilized for those situations where coordinating margins may be reduced when high speed reclosing is used.
Thus, if this choice is made, fault levels must always be above the supervision pickup levels for dependable operation of
the breaker fail scheme. This can also occur in breaker-and-a-half or ring bus configurations where the first breaker closes
into a fault; the protection trips and attempts to initiate breaker failure for the second breaker, which is in the process of
closing, but does not yet have current flowing through it.

When the scheme is initiated, it immediately sends a trip signal to the breaker initially signaled to trip (this feature is usually
described as re-trip). This reduces the possibility of widespread tripping that results from a declaration of a failed breaker.
DETERMINATION OF A BREAKER FAILURE CONDITION:
The schemes determine a breaker failure condition via three paths. Each of these paths is equipped with a time delay, after
which a failed breaker is declared and trip signals are sent to all breakers required to clear the zone. The delayed paths are
associated with breaker failure timers 1, 2, and 3, which are intended to have delays increasing with increasing timer num-
bers. These delayed paths are individually enabled to allow for maximum flexibility.
Timer 1 logic (early path) is supervised by a fast-operating breaker auxiliary contact. If the breaker is still closed (as indi-
cated by the auxiliary contact) and fault current is detected after the delay interval, an output is issued. Operation of the
breaker auxiliary switch indicates that the breaker has mechanically operated. The continued presence of current indicates
that the breaker has failed to interrupt the circuit.
Timer 2 logic (main path) is not supervised by a breaker auxiliary contact. If fault current is detected after the delay interval,
an output is issued. This path is intended to detect a breaker that opens mechanically but fails to interrupt fault current; the
logic therefore does not use a breaker auxiliary contact.
The timer 1 and 2 paths provide two levels of current supervision, high-set and low-set, that allow the supervision level to
change from a current which flows before a breaker inserts an opening resistor into the faulted circuit to a lower level after
resistor insertion. The high-set detector is enabled after timeout of timer 1 or 2, along with a timer that will enable the low-
set detector after its delay interval. The delay interval between high-set and low-set is the expected breaker opening time.
Both current detectors provide a fast operating time for currents at small multiples of the pickup value. The overcurrent
detectors are required to operate after the breaker failure delay interval to eliminate the need for very fast resetting overcur-
rent detectors.
Timer 3 logic (slow path) is supervised by a breaker auxiliary contact and a control switch contact used to indicate that the
breaker is in or out-of-service, disabling this path when the breaker is out-of-service for maintenance. There is no current
level check in this logic as it is intended to detect low magnitude faults and it is therefore the slowest to operate. 5
OUTPUT:
The outputs from the schemes are:
• FlexLogic operands that report on the operation of portions of the scheme
• FlexLogic operand used to re-trip the protected breaker
• FlexLogic operands that initiate tripping required to clear the faulted zone. The trip output can be sealed-in for an
adjustable period.
• Target message indicating a failed breaker has been declared
• Illumination of the faceplate Trip LED (and the Phase A, B or C LED, if applicable)
MAIN PATH SEQUENCE:
ACTUAL CURRENT MAGNITUDE

FAILED INTERRUPTION
0
AMP CALCULATED CURRENT MAGNITUDE
CORRECT INTERRUPTION
Rampdown
0
PROTECTION OPERATION BREAKER INTERRUPTING TIME
(ASSUMED 1.5 cycles) (ASSUMED 3 cycles)
MARGIN BACKUP BREAKER OPERATING TIME
(Assumed 2 Cycles) (Assumed 3 Cycles)
BREAKER FAILURE TIMER No. 2 (±1/8 cycle)

INITIATE (1/8 cycle)
BREAKER FAILURE CURRENT DETECTOR PICKUP (1/8 cycle)

BREAKER FAILURE OUTPUT RELAY PICKUP (1/4 cycle)
FAULT cycles
OCCURS
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
827083A6.CDR
Figure 5–60: BREAKER FAILURE MAIN PATH SEQUENCE

The current supervision elements reset in less than 0.7 of a power cycle for any multiple of pickup current as shown below.
0.8
Margin
Maximum
Breaker failure reset time (cycles)

Average
0.6
0.4
0.2
0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140
MulWLple of pickup fault current
threshold setting 836769A4.CDR
Figure 5–61: BREAKER FAILURE OVERCURRENT SUPERVISION RESET TIME

SETTINGS:
• BF1 MODE: This setting is used to select the breaker failure operating mode: single or three pole.
• BF1 USE AMP SUPV: If set to "Yes", the element will only be initiated if current flowing through the breaker is above
5 the supervision pickup level.
• BF1 USE SEAL-IN: If set to "Yes", the element will only be sealed-in if current flowing through the breaker is above the
supervision pickup level.
• BF1 3-POLE INITIATE: This setting selects the FlexLogic operand that will initiate three-pole tripping of the breaker.
• BF1 PH AMP SUPV PICKUP: This setting is used to set the phase current initiation and seal-in supervision level.
Generally this setting should detect the lowest expected fault current on the protected breaker. It can be set as low as
necessary (lower than breaker resistor current or lower than load current) – high-set and low-set current supervision
will guarantee correct operation.
• BF1 N AMP SUPV PICKUP: This setting is used to set the neutral current initiate and seal-in supervision level. Gener-
ally this setting should detect the lowest expected fault current on the protected breaker. Neutral current supervision is
used only in the three phase scheme to provide increased sensitivity. This setting is valid only for three-pole tripping
schemes.
• BF1 USE TIMER 1: If set to "Yes", the early path is operational.
• BF1 TIMER 1 PICKUP DELAY: Timer 1 is set to the shortest time required for breaker auxiliary contact Status-1 to
open, from the time the initial trip signal is applied to the breaker trip circuit, plus a safety margin.
• BF1 USE TIMER 2: If set to "Yes", the main path is operational.
• BF1 TIMER 2 PICKUP DELAY: Timer 2 is set to the expected opening time of the breaker, plus a safety margin. This
safety margin was historically intended to allow for measuring and timing errors in the breaker failure scheme equip-
ment. In microprocessor relays this time is not significant. In B30 relays, which use a Fourier transform, the calculated
current magnitude will ramp-down to zero one power frequency cycle after the current is interrupted, and this lag
should be included in the overall margin duration, as it occurs after current interruption. The Breaker failure main path
sequence diagram below shows a margin of two cycles; this interval is considered the minimum appropriate for most
applications.
Note that in bulk oil circuit breakers, the interrupting time for currents less than 25% of the interrupting rating can be
significantly longer than the normal interrupting time.
• BF1 USE TIMER 3: If set to "Yes", the Slow Path is operational.
• BF1 TIMER 3 PICKUP DELAY: Timer 3 is set to the same interval as timer 2, plus an increased safety margin.
Because this path is intended to operate only for low level faults, the delay can be in the order of 300 to 500 ms.

• BF1 BKR POS1 φA/3P: This setting selects the FlexLogic operand that represents the protected breaker early-type
auxiliary switch contact (52/a). When using the single-pole breaker failure scheme, this operand represents the pro-
tected breaker early-type auxiliary switch contact on pole A. This is normally a non-multiplied form-A contact. The con-
tact may even be adjusted to have the shortest possible operating time.
• BF1 BKR POS2 φA/3P: This setting selects the FlexLogic operand that represents the breaker normal-type auxiliary
switch contact (52/a). When using the single-pole breaker failure scheme, this operand represents the protected
breaker auxiliary switch contact on pole A. This may be a multiplied contact.
• BF1 BREAKER TEST ON: This setting is used to select the FlexLogic operand that represents the breaker in-service/
out-of-service switch set to the out-of-service position.
• BF1 PH AMP HISET PICKUP: This setting sets the phase current output supervision level. Generally this setting
should detect the lowest expected fault current on the protected breaker, before a breaker opening resistor is inserted.
• BF1 N AMP HISET PICKUP: This setting sets the neutral current output supervision level. Generally this setting
should detect the lowest expected fault current on the protected breaker, before a breaker opening resistor is inserted.
Neutral current supervision is used only in the three pole scheme to provide increased sensitivity. This setting is valid
only for three-pole breaker failure schemes.
• BF1 PH AMP LOSET PICKUP: This setting sets the phase current output supervision level. Generally this setting
should detect the lowest expected fault current on the protected breaker, after a breaker opening resistor is inserted
(approximately 90% of the resistor current).
• BF1 N AMP LOSET PICKUP: This setting sets the neutral current output supervision level. Generally this setting
should detect the lowest expected fault current on the protected breaker, after a breaker opening resistor is inserted
(approximately 90% of the resistor current). This setting is valid only for three-pole breaker failure schemes.
• BF1 LOSET TIME DELAY: Sets the pickup delay for current detection after opening resistor insertion.
• BF1 TRIP DROPOUT DELAY: This setting is used to set the period of time for which the trip output is sealed-in. This
timer must be coordinated with the automatic reclosing scheme of the failed breaker, to which the breaker failure ele-
5
ment sends a cancel reclosure signal. Reclosure of a remote breaker can also be prevented by holding a transfer trip
signal on longer than the reclaim time.
• BF1 PH A INITIATE / BF1 PH B INITIATE / BF 1 PH C INITIATE: These settings select the FlexLogic operand to initi-
ate phase A, B, or C single-pole tripping of the breaker and the phase A, B, or C portion of the scheme, accordingly.
This setting is only valid for single-pole breaker failure schemes.
• BF1 BKR POS1 φB / BF1 BKR POS 1 φC: These settings select the FlexLogic operand to represents the protected
breaker early-type auxiliary switch contact on poles B or C, accordingly. This contact is normally a non-multiplied Form-
A contact. The contact may even be adjusted to have the shortest possible operating time. This setting is valid only for
single-pole breaker failure schemes.
• BF1 BKR POS2 φB: Selects the FlexLogic operand that represents the protected breaker normal-type auxiliary switch
contact on pole B (52/a). This may be a multiplied contact. This setting is valid only for single-pole breaker failure
schemes.
• BF1 BKR POS2 φC: This setting selects the FlexLogic operand that represents the protected breaker normal-type
auxiliary switch contact on pole C (52/a). This may be a multiplied contact. For single-pole operation, the scheme has
the same overall general concept except that it provides re-tripping of each single pole of the protected breaker. The
approach shown in the following single pole tripping diagram uses the initiating information to determine which pole is
supposed to trip. The logic is segregated on a per-pole basis. The overcurrent detectors have ganged settings. This
setting is valid only for single-pole breaker failure schemes.
Upon operation of the breaker failure element for a single pole trip command, a three-pole trip command should be
given via output operand BKR FAIL 1 TRIP OP.

5
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
5-162
OR BKR FAIL 1 T1 OP
SETTINGS
Breaker Pos 1 Phase A/3P FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Off = 0 OR BKR FAIL 1 T2 OP
Use Timer 1 SETTING SETTING
No = 0 Timer 1 Pickup Delay AND Phase Current HiSet Pickup
Yes = 1 RUN
OR
AND IA Pickup
0
Initiated phase A
from single-pole breaker SETTING
failure logic sheet 1 SETTING
Timer 2 Pickup Delay LoSet Time Delay SETTING
Phase Current LoSet Pickup

SETTING
AND RUN
Use Timer 2
0 0
Yes = 1 IA Pickup
No = 0
SETTING
SETTINGS
Timer 1 Pickup Delay AND SETTING
Breaker Pos 1 Phase B
Phase Current HiSet Pickup
Off = 0
AND OR RUN
0
SINGLE-POLE BREAKER FAILURE, INITIATE
Initiated phase B IB Pickup

failure logic sheet 1 SETTING
SETTING Trip Dropout Delay
Timer 2 Pickup Delay
LoSet Time Delay SETTING 0 FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Phase Current LoSet Pickup OR BKR FAIL 1 TRIP OP
AND
SETTINGS RUN
0
Breaker Pos 1 Phase B 0
IB Pickup
Off = 0
SETTING
SETTING
AND Phase Current HiSet Pickup
RUN
AND OR IC Pickup
0
Initiated phase C

failure logic sheet 1 SETTING LoSet Time Delay SETTING
Phase Current LoSet Pickup
RUN
AND 0
0 IC Pickup
IA
IB
IC
Figure 5–62: SINGLE-POLE BREAKER FAILURE, TIMERS

SETTINGS
Use Timer 3
Yes = 1
Breaker Pos 2 Phase A/3P
Off = 0 SETTING
Breaker Pos 2 Phase B Timer 3 Pickup Delay
Off = 0 FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Breaker Pos 2 Phase C AND BKR FAIL 1 T3 OP
Off = 0 0
Breaker Test On
Off = 0
Initiated
from single-pole breaker failure logic sheet 1 827070A5.CDR
5 SETTINGS
GE Multilin
SETTING
BF1 FUNCTION:
Disable=0
Enable=1
SETTING AND
BF1 BLOCK:
Off=0
SETTING
BF1 INITIATE:
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BKR FAIL 1 RETRIP

Off=0
OR
AND
TO SHEET 2 OF 2
SETTING (Initiated)
BF1 USE SEAL-IN:
YES=1
NO=0
AND
Seal In Path
5
AND
OR
SETTING
BF1 USE AMP SUPV:
YES=1
NO=0 OR
SETTINGS
BF1 PH AMP SUPV
PICKUP:
SETTING BF1 N AMP SUPV

BF1 SOURCE: PICKUP:
RUN
IA ³ PICKUP
IA
RUN
IB IB ³ PICKUP
OR
RUN
IC IC ³ PICKUP
RUN
IN ³ PICKUP
IN
TO SHEET 2 OF 2
(827068.cdr)
827067A5.cdr
Figure 5–63: THREE-POLE BREAKER FAILURE, INITIATE

5
FROM SHEET 1 OF 2
(Initiated)
SETTING
5-164
SETTING BF1 TIMER1 PICKUP
BF1 USE TIMER 1: DELAY: FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
YES=1 AND 0 BKR FAIL 1 T1 OP

NO=0
SETTING
BF1 BKR POS1 ΦA/3P:
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Off=0 BKR FAIL 1 T2 OP

SETTING
BF1 TIMER2 PICKUP
SETTING DELAY:
OR
BF1 USE TIMER 2:
AND 0
YES=1
NO=0
SETTINGS
BF1 PH AMP HISET
PICKUP:
BF1 N AMP HISET

FROM SHEET 1 OF 2
PICKUP:
(Initiated)
RUN
IA
IA ³ PICKUP
RUN
IB
IB ³ PICKUP
RUN
IC
IC ³ PICKUP
RUN
IN
IN ³ PICKUP

SETTINGS
BF1 PH AMP LOSET SETTING
SETTING PICKUP:
SETTING BF1 TRIP DROPOUT
BF1 LOSET TIME TIME DELAY:
BF1 N AMP LOSET FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BF1 USE TIMER 3: DELAY:
PICKUP:
OR 0 BKR FAIL 1 TRIP OP
YES=1 0 RUN
NO=0
IA ³ PICKUP
Figure 5–64: THREE-POLE BREAKER FAILURE, TIMERS

RUN
IB ³ PICKUP
SETTING
BF1 BKR POS2 ΦA/3P: RUN
IC ³ PICKUP
Off=0 RUN
SETTING IN ³ PICKUP
SETTING BF1 TIMER3 PICKUP

DELAY:
BF1 BREAKER TEST ON:
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND 0
Off=0
BKR FAIL 1 T3 OP
5 SETTINGS
827068A7.cdr
GE Multilin
5.6.8 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS
a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS  GROUPED ELEMENTS  SETTING GROUP 1(6)  VOLTAGE ELEMENTS
 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS  PHASE

See page 5–166.
  UNDERVOLTAGE1
 PHASE
 UNDERVOLTAGE2
 NEUTRAL OV1

 NEUTRAL OV2

 NEUTRAL OV3

 AUXILIARY OV1

 AUXILIARY OV2

 AUXILIARY OV3

These protection elements can be used for a variety of applications such as: 5
• Undervoltage Protection: For voltage sensitive loads, such as induction motors, a drop in voltage increases the
drawn current which may cause dangerous overheating in the motor. The undervoltage protection feature can be used
to either cause a trip or generate an alarm when the voltage drops below a specified voltage setting for a specified time
delay.
• Permissive Functions: The undervoltage feature may be used to block the functioning of external devices by operat-
ing an output relay when the voltage falls below the specified voltage setting. The undervoltage feature may also be
used to block the functioning of other elements through the block feature of those elements.
• Source Transfer Schemes: In the event of an undervoltage, a transfer signal may be generated to transfer a load
from its normal source to a standby or emergency power source.
The undervoltage elements can be programmed to have a definite time delay characteristic. The definite time curve oper-
ates when the voltage drops below the pickup level for a specified period of time. The time delay is adjustable from 0 to
600.00 seconds in steps of 0.01. The undervoltage elements can also be programmed to have an inverse time delay char-
acteristic.
The undervoltage delay setting defines the family of curves shown below.
D
T = ---------------------------------- (EQ 5.14)
V 
 1 – ------------------
 V pickup
where: T = operating time

D = undervoltage delay setting (D = 0.00 operates instantaneously)
V = secondary voltage applied to the relay
Vpickup = pickup level

Time (seconds)
% of voltage pickup
842788A1.CDR
Figure 5–65: INVERSE TIME UNDERVOLTAGE CURVES

At 0% of pickup, the operating time equals the UNDERVOLTAGE DELAY setting.
NOTE
b) PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE (ANSI 27P, IEC PTUV)

5 PATH: SETTINGS  GROUPED ELEMENTS  SETTING GROUP 1(6)  VOLTAGE ELEMENTS  PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE1(3)
 PHASE PHASE UV1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

 UNDERVOLTAGE1 FUNCTION: Disabled
PHASE UV1 SIGNAL Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4, SRC 5, SRC 6
MESSAGE
SOURCE: SRC 1
PHASE UV1 MODE: Range: Phase to Ground, Phase to Phase
MESSAGE
Phase to Ground
PHASE UV1 Range: 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
PICKUP: 1.000 pu
PHASE UV1 Range: Definite Time, Inverse Time
MESSAGE
CURVE: Definite Time
PHASE UV1 Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
DELAY: 1.00 s
PHASE UV1 MINIMUM Range: 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
VOLTAGE: 0.100 pu
PHASE UV1 BLOCK: Range: FlexLogic operand
MESSAGE
Off
PHASE UV1 Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
TARGET: Self-reset
PHASE UV1 Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
Two undervoltage elements facilitate applications including undervoltage supervision of the main bus differential protection
to prevent maloperation in the event of CT trouble.

In this scheme, the normal voltage level halts the differential element. An actual bus fault operates the undervoltage ele-
ment, thereby permitting the differential element to operate. This can be applied for bus configurations of up to five feeders
with the voltage signal available. If applied, use the undervoltage function to supervise the main differential output with an
AND gate in the FlexLogic equation before driving the output contact.
Using the drop-out undervoltage operand as the Block input to the differential element is not recommended. The differential
element includes the saturation detector that responds to certain time relationships between the differential and restraining
currents, and therefore, it must be operational all the time in order to function properly.
This element may be used to give a desired time-delay operating characteristic versus the applied fundamental voltage
(phase-to-ground or phase-to-phase for wye VT connection, or phase-to-phase for delta VT connection) or as a definite
time element. The element resets instantaneously if the applied voltage exceeds the dropout voltage. The delay setting
selects the minimum operating time of the phase undervoltage. The minimum voltage setting selects the operating voltage
below which the element is blocked (a setting of “0” will allow a dead source to be considered a fault condition).
SETTING
SETTING PHASE UV1
PHASE UV1 PICKUP:
FUNCTION: PHASE UV1
Enabled = 1 CURVE:
PHASE UV1
SETTING DELAY: FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
AND
PHASE UV1 AND RUN VAG or VAB < PICKUP PHASE UV1 A PKP
BLOCK: t PHASE UV1 A DPO
Off = 0 PHASE UV1 A OP
V
SETTING
SETTING AND RUN VBG or VBC< PICKUP PHASE UV1 B PKP
PHASE UV1
t PHASE UV1 B DPO
PHASE UV1 SOURCE: MINIMUM VOLTAGE:
PHASE UV1 B OP
VAG or VAB < Minimum
Source VT = Delta V
}
VBG or VBC < Minimum
VAB AND RUN VCG or VCA< PICKUP PHASE UV1 C PKP
VCG or VCA < Minimum
5
VBC t PHASE UV1 C DPO
VCA PHASE UV1 C OP
Source VT = Wye V
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SETTING OR PHASE UV1 PKP
PHASE UV1 MODE:
Phase to Ground Phase to Phase FLEXLOGIC OPERAND

VAG VAB OR PHASE UV1 OP
VBG VBC
VCG VCA
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND PHASE UV1 DPO
827039AC.CDR
Figure 5–66: PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE1 SCHEME LOGIC

c) NEUTRAL OVERVOLTAGE (ANSI 59N, IEC PTOV)

PATH: SETTINGS  GROUPED ELEMENTS  SETTING GROUP 1(6)  VOLTAGE ELEMENTS  NEUTRAL OV1(3)
 NEUTRAL OV1 NEUTRAL OV1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

NEUTRAL OV1 SIGNAL Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4, SRC 5, SRC 6
MESSAGE
SOURCE: SRC 1
NEUTRAL OV1 PICKUP: Range: 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
0.300 pu
NEUTRAL OV1 CURVE: Range: Definite time, FlexCurve A, FlexCurve B,
MESSAGE FlexCurve C
Definite time
NEUTRAL OV1 PICKUP: Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
DELAY: 1.00 s
NEUTRAL OV1 RESET: Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
DELAY: 1.00 s
NEUTRAL OV1 BLOCK: Range: FlexLogic operand
MESSAGE
Off
NEUTRAL OV1 TARGET: Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
Self-reset
NEUTRAL OV1 EVENTS: Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
5
Disabled
There are three neutral overvoltage elements available. The neutral overvoltage element can be used to detect asymmetri-
cal system voltage condition due to a ground fault or to the loss of one or two phases of the source. The element responds
to the system neutral voltage (3V_0), calculated from the phase voltages. The nominal secondary voltage of the phase volt-
age channels entered under SETTINGS  SYSTEM SETUP  AC INPUTS  VOLTAGE BANK  PHASE VT SECONDARY is the
p.u. base used when setting the pickup level.
The neutral overvoltage element can provide a time-delayed operating characteristic versus the applied voltage (initialized
from FlexCurves A, B, or C) or be used as a definite time element. The NEUTRAL OV1 PICKUP DELAY setting applies only if
the NEUTRAL OV1 CURVE setting is “Definite time”. The source assigned to this element must be configured for a phase VT.
VT errors and normal voltage unbalance must be considered when setting this element. This function requires the VTs to
be wye-connected.
SETTING
NEUTRAL OV1
FUNCTION:
SETTING SETTING
Enabled=1
NEUTRAL OV1 PICKUP
NEUTRAL OV1 PICKUP: DELAY :
SETTING
AND RUN NEUTRAL OV1 RESET
DELAY :
NEUTRAL OV1 BLOCK:
NEUTRAL OV1 CURVE :
Off=0
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
3V_0< Pickup tPKP
t NEUTRAL OV1 OP
SETTING tRST
NEUTRAL OV1 DPO
NEUTRAL OV1 SIGNAL
SOURCE: NEUTRAL OV1 PKP
ZERO SEQ VOLT (V_0)
827848A3.CDR
Figure 5–67: NEUTRAL OVERVOLTAGE1 SCHEME LOGIC

d) AUXILIARY OVERVOLTAGE (ANSI 59X, IEC PTOV)

PATH: SETTINGS  GROUPED ELEMENTS  SETTING GROUP 1(6)  VOLTAGE ELEMENTS  AUXILIARY OV1(3)
 AUXILIARY OV1 AUX OV1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

AUX OV1 SIGNAL Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4, SRC 5, SRC 6
MESSAGE
SOURCE: SRC 1
AUX OV1 PICKUP: Range: 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
0.300 pu
AUX OV1 PICKUP Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
DELAY: 1.00 s
AUX OV1 RESET Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
DELAY: 1.00 s
AUX OV1 BLOCK: Range: FlexLogic operand
MESSAGE
Off
AUX OV1 TARGET: Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
Self-reset
AUX OV1 EVENTS: Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
Disabled
The B30 contains one auxiliary overvoltage element for each VT bank. This element is intended for monitoring overvoltage
conditions of the auxiliary voltage. The nominal secondary voltage of the auxiliary voltage channel entered under SYSTEM
SETUP  AC INPUTS  VOLTAGE BANK X5  AUXILIARY VT X5 SECONDARY is the per-unit (pu) base used when setting the 5
pickup level.
SETTING
AUX OV1
FUNCTION:
SETTING
Enabled=1
AUX OV1 PICKUP: SETTING
SETTING
AND RUN AUX OV1 PICKUP
DELAY :
AUX OV1 BLOCK:
AUX OV1 RESET
Off=0 DELAY :
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
Vx < Pickup tPKP
SETTING tRST AUX OV1 OP
AUX OV1 DPO
AUX OV1 SIGNAL
SOURCE: AUX OV1 PKP
AUXILIARY VOLT (Vx)
827836A3.CDR
Figure 5–68: AUXILIARY OVERVOLTAGE SCHEME LOGIC

5.7 CONTROL ELEMENTS 5 SETTINGS
5.7CONTROL ELEMENTS 5.7.1 OVERVIEW
Control elements are generally used for control rather than protection. See the Introduction to Elements section at the
beginning of this chapter for further information.
5.7.2 TRIP BUS
PATH: SETTINGS  CONTROL ELEMENTS  TRIP BUS  TRIP BUS 1(6)
 TRIP BUS 1 TRIP BUS 1 Range: Enabled, Disabled

TRIP BUS 1 BLOCK: Range: FlexLogic operand
MESSAGE
Off
TRIP BUS 1 PICKUP Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.00 s
TRIP BUS 1 RESET Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.00 s
TRIP BUS 1 INPUT 1: Range: FlexLogic operand
MESSAGE
Off
TRIP BUS 1 INPUT 2: Range: FlexLogic operand
MESSAGE
Off
↓
5 TRIP BUS 1 INPUT 16: Range: FlexLogic operand
MESSAGE
Off
TRIP BUS 1 Range: Enabled, Disabled
MESSAGE
LATCHING: Disabled
TRIP BUS 1 RESET: Range: FlexLogic operand
MESSAGE
Off
TRIP BUS 1 TARGET: Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
Self-reset
TRIP BUS 1 Range: Enabled, Disabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
The trip bus element allows aggregating outputs of protection and control elements without using FlexLogic and assigning
them a simple and effective manner. Each trip bus can be assigned for either trip or alarm actions. Simple trip conditioning
such as latch, delay, and seal-in delay are available.
The easiest way to assign element outputs to a trip bus is through the EnerVista UR Setup software A protection summary
is displayed by navigating to a specific protection or control protection element and checking the desired bus box. Once the
desired element is selected for a specific bus, a list of element operate-type operands are displayed and can be assigned
to a trip bus. If more than one operate-type operand is required, it may be assigned directly from the trip bus menu.

5 SETTINGS 5.7 CONTROL ELEMENTS
Figure 5–69: TRIP BUS FIELDS IN THE PROTECTION SUMMARY

The following settings are available.
• TRIP BUS 1 BLOCK: The trip bus output is blocked when the operand assigned to this setting is asserted.
• TRIP BUS 1 PICKUP DELAY: This setting specifies a time delay to produce an output depending on how output is
used.
• TRIP BUS 1 RESET DELAY: This setting specifies a time delay to reset an output command. The time delay should be 5
set long enough to allow the breaker or contactor to perform a required action.
• TRIP BUS 1 INPUT 1 to TRIP BUS 1 INPUT 16: These settings select a FlexLogic operand to be assigned as an input
to the trip bus.
• TRIP BUS 1 LATCHING: This setting enables or disables latching of the trip bus output. This is typically used when
lockout is required or user acknowledgement of the relay response is required.
• TRIP BUS 1 RESET: The trip bus output is reset when the operand assigned to this setting is asserted. Note that the
RESET OP operand is pre-wired to the reset gate of the latch, As such, a reset command the front panel interface or via
communications will reset the trip bus output.

SETTINGS
TRIP BUS 1 INPUT 1
SETTINGS
= Off
TRIP BUS 1 PICKUP
TRIP BUS 1 INPUT 2
DELAY
= Off Non-volatile,
TRIP BUS 1 RESET
OR set-dominant
***
DELAY
AND S TPKP FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
TRIP BUS 1 INPUT 16 TRIP BUS 1 OP
Latch
= Off TRST
R
SETTINGS
TRIP BUS 1 FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
FUNCTION
TRIP BUS 1 PKP
= Enabled
TRIP BUS 1 BLOCK AND
= Off
SETTINGS
TRIP BUS 1
LATCHING
= Enabled
TRIP BUS 1 RESET
= Off
OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
RESET OP 842023A1.CDR
5 Figure 5–70: TRIP BUS LOGIC
5.7.3 SETTING GROUPS
PATH: SETTINGS  CONTROL ELEMENTS  SETTINGS GROUPS
 SETTING GROUPS SETTING GROUPS Range: Disabled, Enabled

 FUNCTION: Enabled
SETTING GROUPS BLK: Range: FlexLogic operand
MESSAGE
Off
GROUP 2 ACTIVATE ON: Range: FlexLogic operand
MESSAGE
Off
MESSAGE
Off
↓
MESSAGE
Off
GROUP 1 NAME: Range: up to 16 alphanumeric characters
MESSAGE

MESSAGE
↓
MESSAGE
SETTING GROUP Range: Disabled, Enabled

MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled

The 61850 standard provides for the ability to monitor, edit, and change setting groups in a relay through a series of ser-
vices operating on Setting Group Control Block values. There is one SGCB in LLN0 in LD1 in the UR as, at present, the
other LDs do not support multiple setting groups The default value of SETTING GROUPS is Disabled. In order for 61850 and/
or UR setting group control to function, the SETTING GROUPS FUNCTION must be set to Enabled.
The active setting group in the UR is settable from either the value set via a FlexLogic operand in the UR (present practice)
or a SelectActiveSG command from a 61850 Client. For both the UR and IEC 61850, the default active setting group is "1".
A 61850 SelectActiveSG command sets one of the internal Non-Volatile flags (61850 SG Level x) that represents the
requested Active Setting Group shown as follows:
Table 5–26: ACTIVE SETTING GROUP
SELECTACTIVESG VALUE FLAG SET
1 (default) SG Level 1
2 SG Level 2
3 SG Level 3
4 SG Level 4
5 SG Level 4
6 SG Level 6
On power-up or restart, the previously selected 61850 SG Level x is re-instated. Similarly, the input to the setting group
control in the UR can be designed with Non-Volatile latches to achieve the same effect.
The setting groups menu controls the activation and deactivation of up to six possible groups of settings in the GROUPED
ELEMENTS settings menu. The faceplate Settings In Use LEDs indicate which active group (with a non-flashing energized
LED) is in service.
The SETTING GROUPS BLK setting prevents the active setting group from changing when the FlexLogic parameter is set to
"On". This can be useful in applications where it is undesirable to change the settings under certain conditions, such as the
5
breaker being open.
The GROUP 2 ACTIVATE ON to GROUP 6 ACTIVATE ON settings select a FlexLogic operand which, when set, makes the partic-
ular setting group active for use by any grouped element. A priority scheme ensures that only one group is active at a given
time – the highest-numbered group that is activated by its ACTIVATE ON parameter takes priority over the lower-numbered
groups. There is no activate on setting for group 1 (the default active group), because group 1 automatically becomes
active if no other group is active.
The SETTING GROUP 1 NAME to SETTING GROUP 6 NAME settings allows the user to assign a name to each of the six settings
groups. Once programmed, this name appears on the second line of the GROUPED ELEMENTS  SETTING GROUP 1(6) menu
display.
The relay can be set up via a FlexLogic equation to receive requests to activate or de-activate a particular non-default set-
tings group. The following FlexLogic equation (see the following figure) illustrates requests via remote communications (for
example, VIRTUAL INPUT 1 ON) or from a local contact input (for example, CONTACT IP 1 ON) to initiate the use of a particu-
lar settings group, and requests from several overcurrent pickup measuring elements to inhibit the use of the particular set-
tings group. The assigned VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1 operand is used to control the “On” state of a particular settings group.

1 VIRT IP 1 ON (VI1)
OR (2)
2 CONT IP 1 ON (H5A)
3 OR (2)
AND (3) = VIRT OP 1 (VO1)
4 PHASE TOC1 PKP
5 NOT
6 PHASE TOC2 PKP
7 NOT
8 AND (3)
9 = VIRT OP 1 (VO1)
10 END
842789A1.CDR
Figure 5–71: EXAMPLE FLEXLOGIC CONTROL OF A SETTINGS GROUP
5.7.4 SELECTOR SWITCH
PATH: SETTINGS  CONTROL ELEMENTS  SELECTOR SWITCH  SELECTOR SWITCH 1(2)
 SELECTOR SWITCH 1 SELECTOR 1 FUNCTION: Range: Disabled, Enabled

 Disabled
SELECTOR 1 FULL Range: 1 to 7 in steps of 1
5 MESSAGE
RANGE: 7
SELECTOR 1 TIME-OUT: Range: 3.0 to 60.0 s in steps of 0.1
MESSAGE
5.0 s
SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP: Range: FlexLogic operand
MESSAGE
Off
SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP Range: Time-out, Acknowledge
MESSAGE
MODE: Time-out
SELECTOR 1 ACK: Range: FlexLogic operand
MESSAGE
Off
SELECTOR 1 3BIT A0: Range: FlexLogic operand
MESSAGE
Off
MESSAGE
Off
MESSAGE
Off
SELECTOR 1 3BIT Range: Time-out, Acknowledge
MESSAGE
MODE: Time-out
SELECTOR 1 3BIT ACK: Range: FlexLogic operand
MESSAGE
Off
SELECTOR 1 POWER-UP Range: Restore, Synchronize, Sync/Restore
MESSAGE
MODE: Restore
SELECTOR 1 TARGETS: Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
Self-reset
SELECTOR 1 EVENTS: Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
Disabled

The selector switch element is intended to replace a mechanical selector switch. Typical applications include setting group
control or control of multiple logic sub-circuits in user-programmable logic.
The element provides for two control inputs. The step-up control allows stepping through selector position one step at a
time with each pulse of the control input, such as a user-programmable pushbutton. The three-bit control input allows set-
ting the selector to the position defined by a three-bit word.
The element allows pre-selecting a new position without applying it. The pre-selected position gets applied either after time-
out or upon acknowledgement via separate inputs (user setting). The selector position is stored in non-volatile memory.
Upon power-up, either the previous position is restored or the relay synchronizes to the current three-bit word (user set-
ting). Basic alarm functionality alerts the user under abnormal conditions; for example, the three-bit control input being out
of range.
A selector switch runs every two power cycles.
• SELECTOR 1 FULL RANGE: This setting defines the upper position of the selector. When stepping up through avail-
able positions of the selector, the upper position wraps up to the lower position (position 1). When using a direct three-
bit control word for programming the selector to a desired position, the change would take place only if the control word
is within the range of 1 to the SELECTOR FULL RANGE. If the control word is outside the range, an alarm is established
by setting the SELECTOR ALARM FlexLogic operand for 3 seconds.
• SELECTOR 1 TIME-OUT: This setting defines the time-out period for the selector. This value is used by the relay in
the following two ways. When the SELECTOR STEP-UP MODE is “Time-out”, the setting specifies the required period of
inactivity of the control input after which the pre-selected position is automatically applied. When the SELECTOR STEP-
UP MODE is “Acknowledge”, the setting specifies the period of time for the acknowledging input to appear. The timer is
re-started by any activity of the control input. The acknowledging input must come before the SELECTOR 1 TIME-OUT
timer expires; otherwise, the change will not take place and an alarm will be set.
• SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP: This setting specifies a control input for the selector switch. The switch is shifted to a new
position at each rising edge of this signal. The position changes incrementally, wrapping up from the last (SELECTOR 1 5
FULL RANGE) to the first (position 1). Consecutive pulses of this control operand must not occur faster than every
50 ms. After each rising edge of the assigned operand, the time-out timer is restarted and the SELECTOR SWITCH 1:
POS Z CHNG INITIATED target message is displayed, where Z the pre-selected position. The message is displayed for
the time specified by the FLASH MESSAGE TIME setting. The pre-selected position is applied after the selector times out
(“Time-out” mode), or when the acknowledging signal appears before the element times out (“Acknowledge” mode).
When the new position is applied, the relay displays the SELECTOR SWITCH 1: POSITION Z IN USE message. Typically,
a user-programmable pushbutton is configured as the stepping up control input.
• SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP MODE: This setting defines the selector mode of operation. When set to “Time-out”, the
selector will change its position after a pre-defined period of inactivity at the control input. The change is automatic and
does not require any explicit confirmation of the intent to change the selector's position. When set to “Acknowledge”,
the selector will change its position only after the intent is confirmed through a separate acknowledging signal. If the
acknowledging signal does not appear within a pre-defined period of time, the selector does not accept the change
and an alarm is established by setting the SELECTOR STP ALARM output FlexLogic operand for 3 seconds.
• SELECTOR 1 ACK: This setting specifies an acknowledging input for the stepping up control input. The pre-selected
position is applied on the rising edge of the assigned operand. This setting is active only under “Acknowledge” mode of
operation. The acknowledging signal must appear within the time defined by the SELECTOR 1 TIME-OUT setting after the
last activity of the control input. A user-programmable pushbutton is typically configured as the acknowledging input.
• SELECTOR 1 3BIT A0, A1, and A2: These settings specify a three-bit control input of the selector. The three-bit con-
trol word pre-selects the position using the following encoding convention:
A2 A1 A0 POSITION
0 0 0 rest
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 2
0 1 1 3
1 0 0 4
1 0 1 5
1 1 0 6
1 1 1 7

The “rest” position (0, 0, 0) does not generate an action and is intended for situations when the device generating the
three-bit control word is having a problem. When SELECTOR 1 3BIT MODE is “Time-out”, the pre-selected position is
applied in SELECTOR 1 TIME-OUT seconds after the last activity of the three-bit input. When SELECTOR 1 3BIT MODE is
“Acknowledge”, the pre-selected position is applied on the rising edge of the SELECTOR 1 3BIT ACK acknowledging
input.
The stepping up control input (SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP) and the three-bit control inputs (SELECTOR 1 3BIT A0 through A2)
lock-out mutually: once the stepping up sequence is initiated, the three-bit control input is inactive; once the three-bit
control sequence is initiated, the stepping up input is inactive.
• SELECTOR 1 3BIT MODE: This setting defines the selector mode of operation. When set to “Time-out”, the selector
changes its position after a pre-defined period of inactivity at the control input. The change is automatic and does not
require explicit confirmation to change the selector position. When set to “Acknowledge”, the selector changes its posi-
tion only after confirmation via a separate acknowledging signal. If the acknowledging signal does not appear within a
pre-defined period of time, the selector rejects the change and an alarm established by invoking the SELECTOR BIT
ALARM FlexLogic operand for 3 seconds.
• SELECTOR 1 3BIT ACK: This setting specifies an acknowledging input for the three-bit control input. The pre-
selected position is applied on the rising edge of the assigned FlexLogic operand. This setting is active only under the
“Acknowledge” mode of operation. The acknowledging signal must appear within the time defined by the SELECTOR
TIME-OUT setting after the last activity of the three-bit control inputs. Note that the stepping up control input and three-
bit control input have independent acknowledging signals (SELECTOR 1 ACK and SELECTOR 1 3BIT ACK, accordingly).
• SELECTOR 1 POWER-UP MODE: This setting specifies the element behavior on power up of the relay.
When set to “Restore”, the last position of the selector (stored in the non-volatile memory) is restored after powering up
the relay. If the position restored from memory is out of range, position 0 (no output operand selected) is applied and
an alarm is set (SELECTOR 1 PWR ALARM).
5 When set to “Synchronize” selector switch acts as follows. For two power cycles, the selector applies position 0 to the
switch and activates SELECTOR 1 PWR ALARM. After two power cycles expire, the selector synchronizes to the position
dictated by the three-bit control input. This operation does not wait for time-out or the acknowledging input. When the
synchronization attempt is unsuccessful (that is, the three-bit input is not available (0,0,0) or out of range) then the
selector switch output is set to position 0 (no output operand selected) and an alarm is established (SELECTOR 1 PWR
ALARM).
The operation of “Synch/Restore” mode is similar to the “Synchronize” mode. The only difference is that after an
unsuccessful synchronization attempt, the switch will attempt to restore the position stored in the relay memory. The
“Synch/Restore” mode is useful for applications where the selector switch is employed to change the setting group in
redundant (two relay) protection schemes.
• SELECTOR 1 EVENTS: If enabled, the following events are logged:
EVENT NAME DESCRIPTION

SELECTOR 1 POS Z Selector 1 changed its position to Z.
SELECTOR 1 STP ALARM The selector position pre-selected via the stepping up control input has not been
confirmed before the time out.
SELECTOR 1 BIT ALARM The selector position pre-selected via the three-bit control input has not been confirmed
before the time out.

The following figures illustrate the operation of the selector switch. In these diagrams, “T” represents a time-out setting.
pre-existing changed to 4 with changed to 1 with changed to 2 with a changed to 7 with

position 2 a pushbutton a 3-bit input pushbutton a 3-bit input
STEP-UP
T T
3BIT A0
3BIT A1
3BIT A2
T T
POS 1
POS 2
POS 3
POS 4
POS 5
POS 6 5
POS 7
BIT 0
BIT 1
BIT 2
STP ALARM
BIT ALARM
ALARM
842737A1.CDR
Figure 5–72: TIME-OUT MODE

pre-existing changed to 4 with changed to 1 with changed to 2 with

position 2 a pushbutton a 3-bit input a pushbutton
STEP-UP
ACK
3BIT A0
3BIT A1
3BIT A2
3BIT ACK
POS 1
POS 2
POS 3
POS 4
POS 5
POS 6
5 POS 7
BIT 0
BIT 1
BIT 2
STP ALARM
BIT ALARM
ALARM
842736A1.CDR
Figure 5–73: ACKNOWLEDGE MODE

APPLICATION EXAMPLE
Consider an application where the selector switch is used to control setting groups 1 through 4 in the relay. The setting
groups are to be controlled from both user-programmable pushbutton 1 and from an external device via contact inputs 1
through 3. The active setting group shall be available as an encoded three-bit word to the external device and SCADA via
output contacts 1 through 3. The pre-selected setting group shall be applied automatically after 5 seconds of inactivity of
the control inputs. When the relay powers up, it should synchronize the setting group to the three-bit control input.
Make the following changes to setting group control in the SETTINGS  CONTROL ELEMENTS  SETTING GROUPS menu:
SETTING GROUPS FUNCTION: “Enabled” GROUP 4 ACTIVATE ON: “SELECTOR 1 POS 4"
SETTING GROUPS BLK: “Off” GROUP 5 ACTIVATE ON: “Off”
GROUP 2 ACTIVATE ON: “SELECTOR 1 POS 2" GROUP 6 ACTIVATE ON: “Off”
GROUP 3 ACTIVATE ON: “SELECTOR 1 POS 3"
Make the following changes to selector switch element in the SETTINGS  CONTROL ELEMENTS  SELECTOR SWITCH 
SELECTOR SWITCH 1 menu to assign control to user programmable pushbutton 1 and contact inputs 1 through 3:

SELECTOR 1 FUNCTION: “Enabled” SELECTOR 1 3BIT A0: “CONT IP 1 ON”

SELECTOR 1 FULL-RANGE: “4” SELECTOR 1 3BIT A1: “CONT IP 2 ON”
SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP MODE: “Time-out” SELECTOR 1 3BIT A2: “CONT IP 3 ON”
SELECTOR 1 TIME-OUT: “5.0 s” SELECTOR 1 3BIT MODE: “Time-out”
SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP: “PUSHBUTTON 1 ON” SELECTOR 1 3BIT ACK: “Off”
SELECTOR 1 ACK: “Off” SELECTOR 1 POWER-UP MODE: “Synchronize”
Now, assign the contact output operation (assume the H6E module) to the selector switch element by making the following
changes in the SETTINGS  INPUTS/OUTPUTS  CONTACT OUTPUTS menu:
OUTPUT H1 OPERATE: “SELECTOR 1 BIT 0"
Finally, assign configure user-programmable pushbutton 1 by making the following changes in the SETTINGS  PRODUCT
SETUP  USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS  USER PUSHBUTTON 1 menu:

PUSHBUTTON 1 DROP-OUT TIME: “0.10 s”
The logic for the selector switch is shown below:
SETTINGS
SELECTOR 1 FULL RANGE:
SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP MODE:
SELECTOR 1 3BIT MODE:
SETTINGS
SELECTOR 1 TIME-OUT: ACTUAL VALUE 5
SELECTOR 1 POSITION
SELECTOR 1 FUNCTION: SELECTOR 1 POWER-UP MODE:
Enabled = 1 RUN
SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP: FLEXLOGIC™ OPERANDS
Off = 0 step up SELECTOR 1 POS 1
2
SELECTOR 1 ACK: 1 SELECTOR 1 POS 2
3
Off = 0 acknowledge SELECTOR 1 POS 3
SELECTOR 1 3BIT A0: 4
SELECTOR 1 POS 4
three-bit control input
Off = 0 SELECTOR 1 POS 5

ON
SELECTOR 1 3BIT A1: 7 5
SELECTOR 1 POS 6
Off = 0 6
SELECTOR 1 POS 7
SELECTOR 1 3BIT A2:
Off = 0 FLEXLOGIC™ OPERANDS
SELECTOR 1 3BIT ACK:
SELECTOR 1 STP ALARM
Off = 0 3-bit acknowledge
SELECTOR 1 BIT ALARM
3-bit position out
OR
SELECTOR 1 ALARM
SELECTOR 1 PWR ALARM
SELECTOR 1 BIT 0
SELECTOR 1 BIT 1
SELECTOR 1 BIT 2
842012A2.CDR
Figure 5–74: SELECTOR SWITCH LOGIC

5.7.5 DIGITAL ELEMENTS
PATH: SETTINGS  CONTROL ELEMENTS  DIGITAL ELEMENTS  DIGITAL ELEMENT 1(48)
 DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

DIG ELEM 1 NAME: Range: 16 alphanumeric characters
MESSAGE
Dig Element 1
DIG ELEM 1 INPUT: Range: FlexLogic operand
MESSAGE
Off
DIG ELEM 1 PICKUP Range: 0.000 to 999999.999 s in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.000 s
DIG ELEM 1 RESET Range: 0.000 to 999999.999 s in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.000 s
DIG ELEMENT 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
PICKUP LED: Enabled
DIG ELEM 1 BLOCK: Range: FlexLogic operand
MESSAGE
Off
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
TARGET: Self-reset
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled
5 MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
Digital elements run once per power system cycle.
NOTE As such they can easily fail to react to an input signal or a block signal with a duration less than one power system
cycle. This also means that digital element output can react up to one power system cycle later than the pickup and
reset delay settings indicate.
Do not use digital elements with transient signals, such as communications commands. Do not use digital elements
where random delays of up to one cycle cannot be tolerated, such as in high speed protection.
There are 48 identical digital elements available, numbered 1 to 48. A digital element can monitor any FlexLogic operand
and present a target message and/or enable events recording depending on the output operand state. The digital element
settings include a name which will be referenced in any target message, a blocking input from any selected FlexLogic oper-
and, and a timer for pickup and reset delays for the output operand.
• DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 INPUT: Selects a FlexLogic operand to be monitored by the digital element.
• DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 PICKUP DELAY: Sets the required time delay from element pickup to element operation. If a
pickup delay is not required, set to "0". To avoid nuisance alarms, set the delay greater than the operating time of the
breaker.
• DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 RESET DELAY: Sets the time delay to reset. If a reset delay is not required, set to “0”.
• DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 PICKUP LED: This setting enables or disabled the digital element pickup LED. When set to
“Disabled”, the operation of the pickup LED is blocked.

SETTING
DIGITAL ELEMENT 01
FUNCTION: SETTINGS
Enabled = 1 DIGITAL ELEMENT 01
SETTING PICKUP DELAY:
DIGITAL ELEMENT 01 DIGITAL ELEMENT 01 FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
SETTING
NAME: RESET DELAY:
DIGITAL ELEMENT 01 DIG ELEM 01 DPO
AND RUN tPKP
INPUT: DIG ELEM 01 PKP
Off = 0 DIG ELEM 01 OP
INPUT = 1 tRST
SETTING
DIGITAL ELEMENT 01
BLOCK:
Off = 0 827042A2.VSD
Figure 5–75: DIGITAL ELEMENT SCHEME LOGIC

CIRCUIT MONITORING APPLICATIONS:
Some versions of the digital input modules include an active voltage monitor circuit connected across form-A contacts. The
voltage monitor circuit limits the trickle current through the output circuit (see technical specifications for form-A).
As long as the current through the voltage monitor is above a threshold (see technical specifications for form-A), the “Cont
Op 1 VOn” FlexLogic operand will be set (for contact input 1 – corresponding operands exist for each contact output). If the
output circuit has a high resistance or the DC current is interrupted, the trickle current will drop below the threshold and the
“Cont Op 1 VOff” FlexLogic operand will be set. Consequently, the state of these operands can be used as indicators of the
integrity of the circuits in which form-A contacts are inserted.
EXAMPLE 1: BREAKER TRIP CIRCUIT INTEGRITY MONITORING 5
In many applications it is desired to monitor the breaker trip circuit integrity so problems can be detected before a trip oper-
ation is required. The circuit is considered to be healthy when the voltage monitor connected across the trip output contact
detects a low level of current, well below the operating current of the breaker trip coil. If the circuit presents a high resis-
tance, the trickle current will fall below the monitor threshold and an alarm would be declared.
In most breaker control circuits, the trip coil is connected in series with a breaker auxiliary contact which is open when the
breaker is open (see diagram below). To prevent unwanted alarms in this situation, the trip circuit monitoring logic must
include the breaker position.
UR-series device
with form-A contacts
H1a
I
H1b DC–
V DC+
H1c 52a Trip coil
I = current monitor
V = voltage monitor 827073A2.CDR
Figure 5–76: TRIP CIRCUIT EXAMPLE 1

Assume the output contact H1 is a trip contact. Using the contact output settings, this output will be given an ID name; for
example, “Cont Op 1". Assume a 52a breaker auxiliary contact is connected to contact input H7a to monitor breaker status.
Using the contact input settings, this input will be given an ID name, for example, “Cont Ip 1", and will be set “On” when the
breaker is closed. The settings to use digital element 1 to monitor the breaker trip circuit are indicated below (EnerVista UR
Setup example shown):
EXAMPLE 2: BREAKER TRIP CIRCUIT INTEGRITY MONITORING

If it is required to monitor the trip circuit continuously, independent of the breaker position (open or closed), a method to
maintain the monitoring current flow through the trip circuit when the breaker is open must be provided (as shown in the fig-
ure below). This can be achieved by connecting a suitable resistor (see figure below) across the auxiliary contact in the trip
circuit. In this case, it is not required to supervise the monitoring circuit with the breaker position – the BLOCK setting is
5 selected to “Off”. In this case, the settings are as follows (EnerVista UR Setup example shown).
UR-series device
with form-A contacts
Values for resistor “R”

H1a
Power supply Resistance Power
I
24 V DC 1000 O 2W
H1b DC– 30 V DC 5000 O 2W
48 V DC 10000 O 2W
V DC+
110 V DC 25000 O 5W
H1c 52a Trip coil
125 V DC 25000 O 5W
R
250 V DC 50000 O 5W
Bypass
I = current monitor resistor
V = voltage monitor 827074A3.CDR
Figure 5–77: TRIP CIRCUIT EXAMPLE 2

The wiring connection for two examples above is applicable to both form-A contacts with voltage monitoring and
solid-state contact with voltage monitoring.
NOTE
5.7.6 DIGITAL COUNTERS
PATH: SETTINGS  CONTROL ELEMENTS  DIGITAL COUNTERS  COUNTER 1(8)
 COUNTER 1 COUNTER 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

COUNTER 1 NAME: Range: 12 alphanumeric characters
MESSAGE
Counter 1
COUNTER 1 UNITS: Range: 6 alphanumeric characters
MESSAGE
COUNTER 1 PRESET: Range: –2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647

MESSAGE
0
COUNTER 1 COMPARE: Range: –2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647
MESSAGE
0
COUNTER 1 UP: Range: FlexLogic operand
MESSAGE
Off
COUNTER 1 DOWN: Range: FlexLogic operand
MESSAGE
Off
MESSAGE
COUNTER 1 BLOCK:
Off 5
CNT1 SET TO PRESET: Range: FlexLogic operand
MESSAGE
Off
COUNTER 1 RESET: Range: FlexLogic operand
MESSAGE
Off
COUNT1 FREEZE/RESET: Range: FlexLogic operand
MESSAGE
Off
COUNT1 FREEZE/COUNT: Range: FlexLogic operand
MESSAGE
Off
There are 8 identical digital counters, numbered from 1 to 8. A digital counter counts the number of state transitions from
Logic 0 to Logic 1. The counter is used to count operations such as the pickups of an element, the changes of state of an
external contact (e.g. breaker auxiliary switch), or pulses from a watt-hour meter.
• COUNTER 1 UNITS: Assigns a label to identify the unit of measure pertaining to the digital transitions to be counted.
The units label will appear in the corresponding actual values status.
• COUNTER 1 PRESET: Sets the count to a required preset value before counting operations begin, as in the case
where a substitute relay is to be installed in place of an in-service relay, or while the counter is running.
• COUNTER 1 COMPARE: Sets the value to which the accumulated count value is compared. Three FlexLogic output
operands are provided to indicate if the present value is ‘more than (HI)’, ‘equal to (EQL)’, or ‘less than (LO)’ the set
value.
• COUNTER 1 UP: Selects the FlexLogic operand for incrementing the counter. If an enabled UP input is received when
the accumulated value is at the limit of +2,147,483,647 counts, the counter will rollover to –2,147,483,648.
• COUNTER 1 DOWN: Selects the FlexLogic operand for decrementing the counter. If an enabled DOWN input is
received when the accumulated value is at the limit of –2,147,483,648 counts, the counter will rollover to
+2,147,483,647.
• COUNTER 1 BLOCK: Selects the FlexLogic operand for blocking the counting operation. All counter operands are
blocked.

• CNT1 SET TO PRESET: Selects the FlexLogic operand used to set the count to the preset value. The counter will be
set to the preset value in the following situations:
1. When the counter is enabled and the CNT1 SET TO PRESET operand has the value 1 (when the counter is enabled
and CNT1 SET TO PRESET operand is 0, the counter will be set to 0).
2. When the counter is running and the CNT1 SET TO PRESET operand changes the state from 0 to 1 (CNT1 SET TO
PRESET changing from 1 to 0 while the counter is running has no effect on the count).
3. When a reset or reset/freeze command is sent to the counter and the CNT1 SET TO PRESET operand has the value
1 (when a reset or reset/freeze command is sent to the counter and the CNT1 SET TO PRESET operand has the
value 0, the counter will be set to 0).
• COUNTER 1 RESET: Selects the FlexLogic operand for setting the count to either “0” or the preset value depending
on the state of the CNT1 SET TO PRESET operand.
• COUNTER 1 FREEZE/RESET: Selects the FlexLogic operand for capturing (freezing) the accumulated count value
into a separate register with the date and time of the operation, and resetting the count to “0”.
• COUNTER 1 FREEZE/COUNT: Selects the FlexLogic operand for capturing (freezing) the accumulated count value
into a separate register with the date and time of the operation, and continuing counting. The present accumulated
value and captured frozen value with the associated date/time stamp are available as actual values. If control power is
interrupted, the accumulated and frozen values are saved into non-volatile memory during the power down operation.
SETTING
COUNTER 1 FUNCTION:
SETTINGS
Enabled = 1
COUNTER 1 NAME:
5
SETTING AND COUNTER 1 UNITS:
COUNTER 1 PRESET:
COUNTER 1 UP:
RUN
Off = 0 SETTING
FLEXLOGIC
COUNTER 1 COMPARE: OPERANDS
SETTING
CALCULATE Count more than Comp. COUNTER 1 HI
COUNTER 1 DOWN: VALUE Count equal to Comp. COUNTER 1 EQL
Off = 0 Count less than Comp. COUNTER 1 LO
SETTING
COUNTER 1 BLOCK:
Off = 0 SET TO PRESET VALUE
SETTING SET TO ZERO

ACTUAL VALUE
CNT 1 SET TO PRESET: COUNTER 1 ACCUM:
Off = 0
AND
SETTING AND ACTUAL VALUES

COUNTER 1 RESET:
COUNTER 1 FROZEN:
Off = 0
OR STORE DATE & TIME Date & Time
SETTING
COUNT1 FREEZE/RESET:
Off = 0
OR
827065A2.VSD
SETTING
COUNT1 FREEZE/COUNT:
Off = 0
Figure 5–78: DIGITAL COUNTER SCHEME LOGIC

5.7.7 MONITORING ELEMENTS
a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS  CONTROL ELEMENTS  MONITORING ELEMENTS
 MONITORING  BREAKER
See page 5–186.
 ELEMENTS  FLASHOVER 1
 BREAKER
 FLASHOVER 2
 CT TROUBLE ZONE 1

 THERMAL OVERLOAD
 PROTECTION

b) BREAKER FLASHOVER
PATH: SETTINGS  CONTROL ELEMENTS  MONITORING ELEMENTS  BREAKER FLASHOVER 1(2)
 BREAKER BKR 1 FLSHOVR Range: Disabled, Enabled

 FLASHOVER 1 FUNCTION: Disabled
BKR 1 FLSHOVR SIDE 1 Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4, SRC 5, SRC 6
MESSAGE
SRC: SRC 1
BKR 1 FLSHOVR SIDE 2 Range: None, SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4, SRC 5,
MESSAGE SRC 6
SRC: None
BKR 1 STATUS CLSD A: Range: FlexLogic operand
MESSAGE
Off
BKR 1 STATUS CLSD B: Range: FlexLogic operand
MESSAGE
Off
BKR 1 STATUS CLSD C: Range: FlexLogic operand
MESSAGE
Off
BKR 1 FLSHOVR V PKP: Range: 0.000 to 1.500 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
0.850 pu
BKR 1 FLSHOVR DIFF V Range: 0 to 100000 V in steps of 1
MESSAGE
PKP: 1000 V
BKR 1 FLSHOVR AMP Range: 0.000 to 1.500 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
5
PKP: 0.600 pu
BKR 1 FLSHOVR PKP Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.100 s
BKR 1 FLSHOVR SPV A: Range: FlexLogic operand
MESSAGE
Off
BKR 1 FLSHOVR SPV B: Range: FlexLogic operand
MESSAGE
Off
BKR 1 FLSHOVR SPV C: Range: FlexLogic operand
MESSAGE
Off
BKR 1 FLSHOVR BLOCK: Range: FlexLogic operand
MESSAGE
Off
BKR 1 FLSHOVR Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
TARGET: Self-reset
BKR 1 FLSHOVR Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
The detection of the breaker flashover is based on the following condition:

1. Breaker open,
2. Voltage difference drop, and
3. Measured flashover current through the breaker.
Furthermore, the scheme is applicable for cases where either one or two sets of three-phase voltages are available across
the breaker.

THREE VT BREAKER FLASHOVER APPLICATION

When only one set of VTs is available across the breaker, the BRK 1 FLSHOVR SIDE 2 SRC setting should be “None”. To detect
an open breaker condition in this application, the scheme checks if the per-phase voltages were recovered (picked up), the
status of the breaker is open (contact input indicating the breaker status is off), and no flashover current is flowing. A con-
tact showing the breaker status must be provided to the relay. The voltage difference will not be considered as a condition
for open breaker in this part of the logic.
Voltages must be present prior to flashover conditions. If the three VTs are placed after the breaker on the line (or
feeder), and the downstream breaker is open, the measured voltage would be zero and the flashover element will
NOTE not be initiated.
The flashover detection will reset if the current drops back to zero, the breaker closes, or the selected FlexLogic operand
for supervision changes to high. Using supervision through the BRK 1 FLSHOVR SPV A, BRK 1 FLSHOVR SPV B, and BRK 1
FLSHOVR SPV C settings is recommended by selecting a trip operand that will not allow the flashover element to pickup prior
to the trip.
The flashover detection can be used for external alarm, re-tripping the breaker, or energizing the lockout relay.
Consider the following configuration:
Bus
CTs Breaker
Line/Feeder
5
Bus VTs
842746A1.CDR
The source 1 (SRC1) phase currents are feeder CTs and phase voltages are bus VTs, and Contact Input 1 is set as Breaker
52a contact. The conditions prior to flashover detection are:
1. 52a status = 0.
2. VAg, VBg, or VCg is greater than the pickup setting.
3. IA, IB, IC = 0; no current flows through the breaker.
4. ΔVA is greater than pickup (not applicable in this scheme).
The conditions at flashover detection are:
1. 52a status = 0.
2. IA, IB, or IC is greater than the pickup current flowing through the breaker.
3. ΔVA is greater than pickup (not applicable in this scheme).
SIX VT BREAKER FLASHOVER APPLICATION
The per-phase voltage difference approaches zero when the breaker is closed. The is well below any typical minimum
pickup voltage. Select the level of the BRK 1 FLSHOVR DIFF V PKP setting to be less than the voltage difference measured
across the breaker when the close or open breaker resistors are left in service. Prior to flashover, the voltage difference is
larger than BRK 1 FLSHOVR DIFF V PKP. This applies to either the difference between two live voltages per phase or when the
voltage from one side of the breaker has dropped to zero (line de-energized), at least one per-phase voltage is larger than
the BRK 1 FLSHOVR V PKP setting, and no current flows through the breaker poles. During breaker flashover, the per-phase
voltages from both sides of the breaker drops below the pickup value defined by the BRK 1 FLSHOVR V PKP setting, the volt-
age difference drops below the pickup setting, and flashover current is detected. These flashover conditions initiate Flex-
Logic pickup operands and start the BRK 1 FLSHOVR PKP DELAY timer.
This application does not require detection of breaker status via a 52a contact, as it uses a voltage difference larger than
the BRK 1 FLSHOVR DIFF V PKP setting. However, monitoring the breaker contact will ensure scheme stability.

Consider the following configuration:
Bus
CTs Breaker
Line/Feeder
VTs
VTs
842745A1.CDR
The source 1 (SRC1) phase currents are CTs and phase voltages are bus VTs. The source 2 (SRC2) phase voltages are
line VTs. Contact input 1 is set as the breaker 52a contact (optional).
The conditions prior to flashover detection are:
1. ΔVA is greater than pickup
2. IA, IB, IC = 0; no current flows through the breaker
3. 52a status = 0 (optional)
The conditions at flashover detection are:
1. ΔVA is less than pickup
2. VAg, VBg, or VCg is lower than the pickup setting
5 3. IA, IB, or IC is greater than the pickup current flowing through the breaker
4. 52a status = 0 (optional)
The element is operational only when phase-to-ground voltages are connected to relay terminals. The flashover
element will not operate if delta voltages are applied.
NOTE
The breaker flashover settings are described below.

• BRK 1 FLSHOVR SIDE 1 SRC: This setting specifies a signal source used to provide three-phase voltages and three-
phase currents from one side of the current breaker. The source selected as a setting and must be configured with
breaker phase voltages and currents, even if only three (3) VTs are available across the breaker.
• BRK 1 FLSHOVR SIDE 2 SRC: This setting specifies a signal source used to provide another set of three phase volt-
ages whenever six (6) VTs are available across the breaker.
• BRK 1 STATUS CLSD A to BRK 1 STATUS CLSD C: These settings specify FlexLogic operands to indicate the open
status of the breaker. A separate FlexLogic operand can be selected to detect individual breaker pole status and pro-
vide flashover detection. The recommended setting is 52a breaker contact or another operand defining the breaker
poles open status.
• BRK 1 FLSHOVR V PKP: This setting specifies a pickup level for the phase voltages from both sides of the breaker. If
six VTs are available, opening the breaker leads to two possible combinations – live voltages from only one side of the
breaker, or live voltages from both sides of the breaker. Either case will set the scheme ready for flashover detection
upon detection of voltage above the selected value. Set BRK FLSHOVR V PKP to 85 to 90% of the nominal voltage.
• BRK 1 FLSHOVR DIFF V PKP: This setting specifies a pickup level for the phase voltage difference when two VTs per
phase are available across the breaker. The pickup voltage difference should be below the monitored voltage differ-
ence when close or open breaker resistors are left in service. The setting is selected as primary volts difference
between the sources.
• BRK 1 FLSHOVR AMP PKP: This setting specifies the normal load current which can flow through the breaker.
Depending on the flashover protection application, the flashover current can vary from levels of the charging current
when the line is de-energized (all line breakers open), to well above the maximum line (feeder) load (line/feeder con-
nected to load).

• BRK 1 FLSHOVR SPV A to BRK 1 FLSHOVR SPV C: These settings specify FlexLogic operands (per breaker pole)
that supervise the operation of the element per phase. Supervision can be provided by operation of other protection
elements, breaker failure, and close and trip commands. A six-cycle time delay applies after the selected FlexLogic
operand resets.
• BRK FLSHOVR PKP DELAY: This setting specifies the time delay to operate after a pickup condition is detected.

5
5-190
SETTINGS
BRK 1 FLSHOVR SUPV A:

0
FlexLogic operand: Off=0
6 cycle
BRK 1 FLSHOVR SUPV B: Phase B
logic
5.7 CONTROL ELEMENTS
FlexLogic operand: Off=0
BRK 1 FLSHOVR SUPV C: Phase C

logic FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
FlexLogic operand: Off=0 BRK 1 FLSHOVR PKP A FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
BRK 1 FLSHOVR PKP B OR BRK 1 FLSHOVR PKP
SETTING
SETTING BRK 1 FLSHOVR PKP C BRK 1 FLSHOVR DPO
BREAKER FLASHOVER
FUNCTION: BRK 1 FLSHOVR V PKP:
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
Enable=1
AND RUN BRK 1 FLSHOVR DPO A
Block: OFF=0
VA > PKP BRK 1 FLSHOVR DPO B
0 AND BRK 1 FLSHOVR DPO C
OR SET
5 cycle
dominant
Va > PKP Phase C logic
Phase B logic
RESET
SETTINGS
5 cycle
BRK 1 STATUS CLSD A:
0 OR
SET SETTING
RUN dominant
BRK 1 FLSHOVR PKP
FlexLogic operand: On=1
DELAY:
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
BRK 1 STATUS CLSD B: Phase B tPKP
logic 0 BRK 1 FLSHOVR OP A
RUN
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
FlexLogic operand: On=1
Phase B logic BRK 1 FLSHOVR OP B OR BRK 1 FLSHOVR OP
BRK 1 STATUS CLSD C: Phase C RESET
logic OR Phase C logic BRK 1 FLSHOVR OP C
SETTINGS RUN
BRK 1 FLSHOVR SIDE 1 FlexLogic operand: On=1

SRC:
SRC 1, SRC 2, … , SRC 6 SETTING
VA
BRK 1 FLSHOVR AMP PKP:
VB
VC RUN
IA IA > PKP
IB
AND
IC
Figure 5–79: BREAKER FLASHOVER SCHEME LOGIC

SETTINGS
SETTING
BRK 1 FLSHOVR SIDE 2
SRC: BRK 1 FLSHOVR DIFF V
PKP:
SRC 1, SRC 2, … , SRC 6, none
RUN
Va ΔVA > PKP
ΔVA = | VA - Va |
Vb
Vc 842018A2.CDR
5 SETTINGS
GE Multilin
c) CT TROUBLE ZONE (ANSI 50/74)

PATH: SETTINGS  CONTROL ELEMENTS  MONITORING ELEMENTS  CT TROUBLE ZONE 1(2)
 CT TROUBLE ZONE 1 CT TROUBLE ZONE 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

CT TROUBLE ZONE 1 Range: 0.020 to 2.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
PICKUP: 0.100 pu
CT TROUBLE ZONE 1 Range: 1.0 to 60.0 s in steps of 0.1
MESSAGE
DELAY: 10.0 s
CT TROUBLE ZONE 1 Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
TARGET: Self-reset
CT TROUBLE ZONE 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
This element uses the differential current calculated in accordance with the bus configuration programmed under Bus Zone
1. Operation of this element is therefore completely dependent on the dynamic bus replica, which must be defined first. The
bus differential zones are defined using the path SETTINGS  SYSTEM SETUP  BUS. The CT Trouble element 1 detects
CT problems in any of the circuits actually connected to the differential zone defined as Bus Zone 1.
The CT TROUBLE ZONE 1 PICKUP setting specifies the differential current level that defines an abnormal bus state. If the dif-
ferential current in a given phase remains above this level for the time interval defined by the CT TROUBLE ZONE 1 DELAY
setting, CT Trouble is declared for the given phase by setting the appropriate FlexLogic output operand.
SETTING
CT TROUBLE ZONE 1
FUNCTION:
5
Enabled =1
SETTING
BUS ZONE 1A SOURCE:
PHASORS
Ia
Ib
Ic FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SETTING SETTING OR CT TROUBLE 1 OP
CT TROUBLE ZONE 1 CT TROUBLE ZONE 1
PICKUP: DELAY:
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
SETTING RUN
BUS ZONE 1A STATUS: | Iad1 | > PICKUP PKP
Iad1
DIFFERENTIAL CURRENTS
CT TROUBLE 1 OP A
Off = 0 0
RUN
... | Ibd1 | > PICKUP PKP CT TROUBLE 1 OP B
Ibd1
0
SETTING RUN
BUS ZONE 1F SOURCE: | Icd1 | > PICKUP PKP CT TROUBLE 1 OP C
Icd1
0
PHASORS
Ia
Ib
Ic
836722A3.CDR
SETTING
BUS ZONE 1F STATUS:
Off = 0
Figure 5–80: CT TROUBLE SCHEME LOGIC

d) THERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION (ANSI 49)

PATH: SETTINGS  CONTROL ELEMENTS  MONITORING ELEMENTS  THERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION  THERMAL
PROTECTION 1(2)
 THERMAL THERMAL PROTECTION 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

 PROTECTION 1 FUNCTION: Disabled
THERMAL PROTECTION 1 Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4, SRC 5, SRC 6
MESSAGE
SOURCE: SRC1
THERMAL PROTECTION 1 Range: 0.20 to 3.00 pu in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
BASE CURR: 0.80 pu
THERMAL PROTECTION 1 Range: 1.00 to 1.20 in steps of 0.05
MESSAGE
k FACTOR: 1.10
THERM PROT 1 TRIP Range: 0 to 1000 min. in steps of 1
MESSAGE
TIME CONST: 45 min.
THERM PROT 1 RESET Range: 0 to 1000 min. in steps of 1
MESSAGE
TIME CONST: 45 min.
THERM PROT 1 MINIM Range: 0 to 1000 min. in steps of 1
MESSAGE
RESET TIME: 20 min.
THERM PROT 1 RESET: Range: FlexLogic operand
MESSAGE
Off
5
THERM PROT 1 BLOCK:
MESSAGE
Off
THERMAL PROTECTION 1 Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
TARGET: Self-reset
THERMAL PROTECTION 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
The thermal overload protection element corresponds to the IEC 255-8 standard and is used to detect thermal overload
conditions in protected power system elements. Choosing an appropriate time constant element can be used to protect dif-
ferent elements of the power system. The cold curve characteristic is applied when the estimated Ip current is less than
10% of the base current. If Ip current is greater or equal than 10% than the base current, then the hot curve characteristic is
applied. Ip current is estimated with a fixed time constant for both cooling and heating that reaches to the final value in two
seconds on a step change (either step up or step down) signal.
The IEC255-8 cold curve is defined as follows:
 2 
I
t op = τ op × ln  -------------------------
- (EQ 5.15)
 I – ( kI B ) 2
2
The IEC255-8 hot curve is defined as follows:

2 2
 I – Ip 
t op = τ op × ln  -------------------------
- (EQ 5.16)
 I 2 – ( kI B ) 2
In the above equations,

• top = time to operate
• τop = thermal protection trip time constant
• I = measured overload RMS current
• Ip = measured load RMS current before overload occurs
• k= IEC 255-8 k-factor applied to IB, defining maximum permissible current above nominal current

• IB = protected element base (nominal) current

To ensure element accuracy for high overcurrent conditions, the maximum value of I/(k x IB) is limited to 8, even when real-
istically it is exceeding this value.
The reset time of the thermal overload protection element is also time delayed using following formula:
2
 ( kI B ) 
t rst = τ rst × ln  ----------------------------
2 2
- + T min (EQ 5.17)
 I – ( kI B ) 
In the above equation,

• τrst = thermal protection trip time constant
• Tmin is a minimum reset time setting
100
Tmin = 10
10
τrst = 30
5
τop = 30
t (min)
0.1
0.01
0.1 1 10 100
I / Ipkp
827724A1.CDR
Figure 5–81: IEC 255-8 SAMPLE OPERATE AND RESET CURVES

The thermal overload protection element estimates accumulated thermal energy E using the following equations calculated
each power cycle. When current is greater than the pickup level, In > k × IB, element starts increasing the thermal energy:

Δt
E n = E n – 1 + --------------- (EQ 5.18)
t op ( In )
When current is less than the dropout level, In > 0.97 × k × IB, the element starts decreasing the thermal energy:
Δt
E n = E n – 1 – --------------- (EQ 5.19)
t rst ( In )
In the above equations,

• ∆t is the power cycle duration
• n is the power cycle index
• top(In) is the trip time calculated at index n as per the IEC255-8 cold curve or hot curve equations
• trst(In) is the reset time calculated at index n as per the reset time equation
• In is the measured overload RMS current at index n
• En is the accumulated energy at index n
• En – 1 is the accumulated energy at index n – 1
The thermal overload protection element removes the THERMAL PROT 1 OP output operand when E < 0.05. In case of
emergency, the thermal memory and THERMAL PROT 1 OP output operand can be reset using THERM PROT 1 RESET setting.
All calculations are performed per phase. If the accumulated energy reaches value 1 in any phase, the thermal overload
protection element operates and only resets when energy is less than 0.05 in all three phases.
Table 5–27: TYPICAL TIME CONSTANTS
5 PROTECTED EQUIPMENT
Capacitor bank
TIME CONSTANT
10 minutes
MINIMUM RESET TIME
30 minutes
Overhead line 10 minutes 20 minutes
Air-core reactor 40 minutes 30 minutes
Busbar 60 minutes 20 minutes
Underground cable 20 to 60 minutes 60 minutes
The logic for the thermal overload protection element is shown below.
SETTINGS
Function
Enabled = 1
Block AND
Off = 0
SETTINGS FLEXLOGIC OPERAND

SETTING Base Current AND THERMAL PROT 1 PKP
Source K Factor
IA RMS IA > k × Ib SETTING
IB RMS IB > k × Ib OR Trip Time Constant
IC RMS IC > k × Ic RUN
E > 0.1 S FLEXLOGIC OPERAND

Latch THERMAL PROT 1 OP
R
Reset-dominant
SETTINGS
Reset Time Constant
Minimum Reset Time
RUN
E < 0.1
SETTING
Reset
Off = 0 Reset E to 0 827013A1.CDR
Figure 5–82: THERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION SCHEME LOGIC

5 SETTINGS 5.8 INPUTS AND OUTPUTS
5.8INPUTS AND OUTPUTS 5.8.1 CONTACT INPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS  INPUTS/OUTPUTS  CONTACT INPUTS
 CONTACT INPUTS

 CONTACT INPUT H5a


CONTACT INPUT H5a ID: Range: up to 12 alphanumeric characters

MESSAGE
Cont Ip 1
CONTACT INPUT H5a Range: 0.0 to 16.0 ms in steps of 0.5

MESSAGE
DEBNCE TIME: 2.0 ms
CONTACT INPUT H5a Range: Disabled, Enabled

MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
↓
 CONTACT INPUT xxx


 CONTACT INPUT
 THRESHOLDS
Ips H5a,H5c,H6a,H6c Range: 17, 33, 84, 166 Vdc

MESSAGE
THRESHOLD: 33 Vdc
Range: 17, 33, 84, 166 Vdc
5
Ips H7a,H7c,H8a,H8c
MESSAGE
THRESHOLD: 33 Vdc
↓
Ips xxx,xxx,xxx,xxx Range: 17, 33, 84, 166 Vdc

MESSAGE
THRESHOLD: 33 Vdc
The contact inputs menu contains configuration settings for each contact input as well as voltage thresholds for each group
of four contact inputs. Upon startup, the relay processor determines (from an assessment of the installed modules) which
contact inputs are available and then display settings for only those inputs.
An alphanumeric ID may be assigned to a contact input for diagnostic, setting, and event recording purposes. The CON-
TACT IP X On” (Logic 1) FlexLogic operand corresponds to contact input “X” being closed, while CONTACT IP X Off corre-
sponds to contact input “X” being open. The CONTACT INPUT DEBNCE TIME defines the time required for the contact to
overcome ‘contact bouncing’ conditions. As this time differs for different contact types and manufacturers, set it as a maxi-
mum contact debounce time (per manufacturer specifications) plus some margin to ensure proper operation. If CONTACT
INPUT EVENTS is set to “Enabled”, every change in the contact input state will trigger an event.
A raw status is scanned for all Contact Inputs synchronously at the constant rate of 0.5 ms as shown in the figure below.
The DC input voltage is compared to a user-settable threshold. A new contact input state must be maintained for a user-
settable debounce time in order for the B30 to validate the new contact state. In the figure below, the debounce time is set
at 2.5 ms; thus the 6th sample in a row validates the change of state (mark no. 1 in the diagram). Once validated (de-
bounced), the contact input asserts a corresponding FlexLogic operand and logs an event as per user setting.
A time stamp of the first sample in the sequence that validates the new state is used when logging the change of the con-
tact input into the Event Recorder (mark no. 2 in the diagram).
Protection and control elements, as well as FlexLogic equations and timers, are executed eight times in a power system
cycle. The protection pass duration is controlled by the frequency tracking mechanism. The FlexLogic operand reflecting
the debounced state of the contact is updated at the protection pass following the validation (marks no. 3 and 4 on the fig-
ure below). The update is performed at the beginning of the protection pass so all protection and control functions, as well
as FlexLogic equations, are fed with the updated states of the contact inputs.

5.8 INPUTS AND OUTPUTS 5 SETTINGS
The FlexLogic operand response time to the contact input change is equal to the debounce time setting plus up to one pro-
tection pass (variable and depending on system frequency if frequency tracking enabled). If the change of state occurs just
after a protection pass, the recognition is delayed until the subsequent protection pass; that is, by the entire duration of the
protection pass. If the change occurs just prior to a protection pass, the state is recognized immediately. Statistically a delay
of half the protection pass is expected. Owing to the 0.5 ms scan rate, the time resolution for the input contact is below
1msec.
For example, 8 protection passes per cycle on a 60 Hz system correspond to a protection pass every 2.1 ms. With a con-
tact debounce time setting of 3.0 ms, the FlexLogic operand-assert time limits are: 3.0 + 0.0 = 3.0 ms and 3.0 + 2.1 = 5.1
ms. These time limits depend on how soon the protection pass runs after the debouncing time.
Regardless of the contact debounce time setting, the contact input event is time-stamped with a 1 μs accuracy using the
time of the first scan corresponding to the new state (mark no. 2 below). Therefore, the time stamp reflects a change in the
DC voltage across the contact input terminals that was not accidental as it was subsequently validated using the debounce
timer. Keep in mind that the associated FlexLogic operand is asserted/de-asserted later, after validating the change.
The debounce algorithm is symmetrical: the same procedure and debounce time are used to filter the LOW-HIGH (marks
no.1, 2, 3, and 4 in the figure below) and HIGH-LOW (marks no. 5, 6, 7, and 8 below) transitions.
VOLTAGE
INPUT
USER-PROGRAMMABLE THRESHOLD
6
2 1 3 5
Time stamp of the first
5
TM
Time stamp of the first At this time, the The FlexLogic scan corresponding to the
At this time, the new
scan corresponding to new (HIGH) operand is going to new validated state is
(LOW) contact state is
the new validated state is contact state is be asserted at this logged in the SOE record
validated
logged in the SOE record validated protection pass
7
RAW CONTACT
The FlexLogicTM
operand is going to be
STATE
de-asserted at this
protection pass
DEBOUNCE TIME
(user setting)
4
The FlexLogicTM operand
DEBOUNCE TIME
The FlexLogicTM operand changes reflecting the
SCAN TIME (user setting)
changes reflecting the validated contact state
FLEXLOGICTM
(0.5 msec) validated contact state

OPERAND
PROTECTION PASS
(8 times a cycle controlled by the
frequency tracking mechanism)
842709A1.cdr
Figure 5–83: INPUT CONTACT DEBOUNCING MECHANISM AND TIME-STAMPING SAMPLE TIMING
Contact inputs are isolated in groups of four to allow connection of wet contacts from different voltage sources for each
group. The CONTACT INPUT THRESHOLDS determine the minimum voltage required to detect a closed contact input. This
value should be selected according to the following criteria: 17 for 24 V sources, 33 for 48 V sources, 84 for 110 to 125 V
sources and 166 for 250 V sources.
For example, to use contact input H5a as a status input from the breaker 52b contact to seal-in the trip relay and record it in
the Event Records menu, make the following settings changes:
CONTACT INPUT H5A ID: "Breaker Closed (52b)"
CONTACT INPUT H5A EVENTS: "Enabled"
Note that the 52b contact is closed when the breaker is open and open when the breaker is closed.

5.8.2 VIRTUAL INPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS  INPUTS/OUTPUTS  VIRTUAL INPUTS  VIRTUAL INPUT 1(64)
 VIRTUAL INPUT 1 VIRTUAL INPUT 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

VIRTUAL INPUT 1 ID: Range: Up to 12 alphanumeric characters
MESSAGE
Virt Ip 1
VIRTUAL INPUT 1 Range: Self-Reset, Latched
MESSAGE
TYPE: Latched
VIRTUAL INPUT 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
There are 64 virtual inputs that can be individually programmed to respond to input signals from the keypad (via the COM-
MANDS menu) and communications protocols. All virtual input operands are defaulted to “Off” (logic 0) unless the appropri-
ate input signal is received.
If the VIRTUAL INPUT x FUNCTION is to “Disabled”, the input will be forced to off (logic 0) regardless of any attempt to alter the
input. If set to “Enabled”, the input operates as shown on the logic diagram and generates output FlexLogic operands in
response to received input signals and the applied settings.
There are two types of operation: self-reset and latched. If VIRTUAL INPUT x TYPE is “Self-Reset”, when the input signal tran-
sits from off to on, the output operand will be set to on for only one evaluation of the FlexLogic equations and then return to
off. If set to “Latched”, the virtual input sets the state of the output operand to the same state as the most recent received
input.
The self-reset operating mode generates the output operand for a single evaluation of the FlexLogic equations. If 5
the operand is to be used anywhere other than internally in a FlexLogic equation, it will likely have to be lengthened
NOTE
in time. A FlexLogic timer with a delayed reset can perform this function.
SETTING
VIRTUAL INPUT 1
FUNCTION:
Enabled=1 S
AND
Latch
“Virtual Input 1 to ON = 1”
SETTING
“Virtual Input 1 to OFF = 0” R VIRTUAL INPUT 1 ID:
AND
SETTING (Flexlogic Operand)
OR
Virt Ip 1
VIRTUAL INPUT 1
TYPE:
Latched AND
Self - Reset 827080A3.CDR
Figure 5–84: VIRTUAL INPUTS SCHEME LOGIC

5.8.3 CONTACT OUTPUTS
a) DIGITAL OUTPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS  INPUTS/OUTPUTS  CONTACT OUTPUTS  CONTACT OUTPUT H1
 CONTACT OUTPUT H1 CONTACT OUTPUT H1 ID Range: Up to 12 alphanumeric characters

 Cont Op 1
OUTPUT H1 OPERATE: Range: FlexLogic operand
MESSAGE
Off
OUTPUT H1 SEAL-IN: Range: FlexLogic operand
MESSAGE
Off
CONTACT OUTPUT H1 Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Enabled
Upon startup of the relay, the main processor determines from an assessment of the modules installed in the chassis which
contact outputs are available and presents the settings for only these outputs. Where the contact input is non-latching, the
settings are as shown.
An ID may be assigned to each contact output. The signal that can OPERATE a contact output may be any FlexLogic oper-
and (virtual output, element state, contact input, or virtual input). An additional FlexLogic operand may be used to SEAL-IN
the relay. Any change of state of a contact output can be logged as an Event if programmed to do so.
For example, the trip circuit current is monitored by providing a current threshold detector in series with some Form-A con-
tacts (see the trip circuit example in the Digital Elements section). The monitor sets a flag (see the specifications for Form-
A). The name of the FlexLogic operand set by the monitor, consists of the output relay designation, followed by the name of
5 the flag; for example, CONT OP 1 ION.
In most breaker control circuits, the trip coil is connected in series with a breaker auxiliary contact used to interrupt current
flow after the breaker has tripped, to prevent damage to the less robust initiating contact. This can be done by monitoring
an auxiliary contact on the breaker which opens when the breaker has tripped, but this scheme is subject to incorrect oper-
ation caused by differences in timing between breaker auxiliary contact change-of-state and interruption of current in the
trip circuit. The most dependable protection of the initiating contact is provided by directly measuring current in the tripping
circuit, and using this parameter to control resetting of the initiating relay. This scheme is often called trip seal-in.
This can be realized using the CONT OP 1 ION FlexLogic operand to seal-in the contact output as follows:
CONTACT OUTPUT H1 ID: “Cont Op 1"
OUTPUT H1 OPERATE: any suitable FlexLogic operand
OUTPUT H1 SEAL-IN: “Cont Op 1 IOn”
CONTACT OUTPUT H1 EVENTS: “Enabled”
Figure 5–85: CONTACT INPUT/OUTPUT MODULE TYPE 6A CONTACT 1 LOGIC

SETTING
CONTACT OUTPUT H1 OPERATE
= On FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OR Cont Op 1 Closed
Cont Op 1 Ion
Cont Op 1 Von
Cont Op 1 Voff
SETTING
CONTACT OUTPUT H1 SEAL-IN AND H1a
= On
H1b
859743A1.vsd H1c
b) LATCHING OUTPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS  INPUTS/OUTPUTS  CONTACT OUTPUTS  CONTACT OUTPUT H1a
 CONTACT OUTPUT H1a OUTPUT H1a ID Range: Up to 12 alphanumeric characters

 L-Cont Op 1
OUTPUT H1a OPERATE: Range: FlexLogic operand
MESSAGE
Off

OUTPUT H1a RESET: Range: FlexLogic operand

MESSAGE
Off
OUTPUT H1a TYPE: Range: Operate-dominant, Reset-dominant
MESSAGE
Operate-dominant
OUTPUT H1a EVENTS: Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
Disabled
The latching output contacts are mechanically bi-stable and controlled by two separate (open and close) coils. As such they
retain their position even if the relay is not powered up. The relay recognizes all latching output contact cards and populates
the setting menu accordingly. On power up, the relay reads positions of the latching contacts from the hardware before exe-
cuting any other functions of the relay (such as protection and control features or FlexLogic).
The latching output modules, either as a part of the relay or as individual modules, are shipped from the factory with all
latching contacts opened. It is highly recommended to double-check the programming and positions of the latching con-
tacts when replacing a module.
Since the relay asserts the output contact and reads back its position, it is possible to incorporate self-monitoring capabili-
ties for the latching outputs. If any latching outputs exhibits a discrepancy, the LATCHING OUTPUT ERROR self-test error is
declared. The error is signaled by the LATCHING OUT ERROR FlexLogic operand, event, and target message.
• OUTPUT H1a OPERATE: This setting specifies a FlexLogic operand to operate the ‘close coil’ of the contact. The
relay will seal-in this input to safely close the contact. Once the contact is closed and the RESET input is logic 0 (off),
any activity of the OPERATE input, such as subsequent chattering, will not have any effect. With both the OPERATE and
RESET inputs active (logic 1), the response of the latching contact is specified by the OUTPUT H1A TYPE setting.
• OUTPUT H1a RESET: This setting specifies a FlexLogic operand to operate the ‘trip coil’ of the contact. The relay will
seal-in this input to safely open the contact. Once the contact is opened and the OPERATE input is logic 0 (off), any
activity of the RESET input, such as subsequent chattering, will not have any effect. With both the OPERATE and RESET
5
inputs active (logic 1), the response of the latching contact is specified by the OUTPUT H1A TYPE setting.
• OUTPUT H1a TYPE: This setting specifies the contact response under conflicting control inputs; that is, when both the
OPERATE and RESET signals are applied. With both control inputs applied simultaneously, the contact will close if set to
“Operate-dominant” and will open if set to “Reset-dominant”.
Figure 5–86: CONTACT INPUT/OUTPUT MODULE TYPE 4L CONTACT 1 LOGIC
SETTING
CONTACT OUTPUT H1a Non-volatile,
OPERATE = On Set-dominant
AND S
SETTING OR Latch On
CONTACT OUTPUT H1a TYPE Close
= Operate-dominant R
H1b
= Reset-dominant
Non-volatile,
SETTING OR Set-dominant
H1a
CONTACT OUTPUT H1a RESET AND S
= On Open
Latch
R
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
859744A1.vsd Cont Op 1 Closed
Application Example 1:
A latching output contact H1a is to be controlled from two user-programmable pushbuttons (buttons number 1 and 2). The
following settings should be applied.
Program the Latching Outputs by making the following changes in the SETTINGS  INPUTS/OUTPUTS  CONTACT OUT-
PUTS  CONTACT OUTPUT H1a menu (assuming an H4L module):
OUTPUT H1a OPERATE: “PUSHBUTTON 1 ON”

OUTPUT H1a RESET: “PUSHBUTTON 2 ON”
Program the pushbuttons by making the following changes in the PRODUCT SETUP  USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUT-
TONS  USER PUSHBUTTON 1 and USER PUSHBUTTON 2 menus:
PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION: “Self-reset” PUSHBUTTON 2 FUNCTION: “Self-reset”

PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT TIME: “0.00 s” PUSHBTN 2 DROP-OUT TIME: “0.00 s”

A relay, having two latching contacts H1a and H1c, is to be programmed. The H1a contact is to be a Type-a contact, while
the H1c contact is to be a Type-b contact (Type-a means closed after exercising the operate input; Type-b means closed
after exercising the reset input). The relay is to be controlled from virtual outputs: VO1 to operate and VO2 to reset.
PUTS  CONTACT OUTPUT H1a and CONTACT OUTPUT H1c menus (assuming an H4L module):
OUTPUT H1a OPERATE: “VO1” OUTPUT H1c OPERATE: “VO2”
OUTPUT H1a RESET: “VO2” OUTPUT H1c RESET: “VO1”
Since the two physical contacts in this example are mechanically separated and have individual control inputs, they will not
operate at exactly the same time. A discrepancy in the range of a fraction of a maximum operating time may occur. There-
fore, a pair of contacts programmed to be a multi-contact relay will not guarantee any specific sequence of operation (such
as make before break). If required, the sequence of operation must be programmed explicitly by delaying some of the con-
trol inputs as shown in the next application example.
A make before break functionality must be added to the preceding example. An overlap of 20 ms is required to implement
this functionality as described below:
Write the following FlexLogic equation (EnerVista UR Setup example shown):
Both timers (Timer 1 and Timer 2) should be set to 20 ms pickup and 0 ms dropout.
PUTS  CONTACT OUTPUT H1a and CONTACT OUTPUT H1c menus (assuming an H4L module):
OUTPUT H1a OPERATE: “VO1” OUTPUT H1c OPERATE: “VO2”
OUTPUT H1a RESET: “VO4” OUTPUT H1c RESET: “VO3”
A latching contact H1a is to be controlled from a single virtual output VO1. The contact should stay closed as long as VO1
is high, and should stay opened when VO1 is low. Program the relay as follows.
Write the following FlexLogic equation (EnerVista UR Setup example shown):
PUTS  CONTACT OUTPUT H1a menu (assuming an H4L module):

OUTPUT H1a OPERATE: “VO1”

OUTPUT H1a RESET: “VO2”
5.8.4 VIRTUAL OUTPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS  INPUTS/OUTPUTS  VIRTUAL OUTPUTS  VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1(96)
 VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1 VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1 ID Range: Up to 12 alphanumeric characters

 Virt Op 1
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
There are 96 virtual outputs that may be assigned via FlexLogic. If not assigned, the output will be forced to ‘OFF’ (Logic 0).
An ID may be assigned to each virtual output. Virtual outputs are resolved in each pass through the evaluation of the Flex-
Logic equations. Any change of state of a virtual output can be logged as an event if programmed to do so.
For example, if Virtual Output 1 is the trip signal from FlexLogic and the trip relay is used to signal events, the settings
would be programmed as follows:
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1 ID: "Trip"
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1 EVENTS: "Disabled"
5.8.5 REMOTE DEVICES
a) REMOTE INPUTS/OUTPUTS OVERVIEW

Remote inputs and outputs provide a means of exchanging digital state information between Ethernet-networked devices.
The IEC 61850 GSSE (Generic Substation State Event) and GOOSE (Generic Object Oriented Substation Event) stan- 5
dards are used.
The sharing of digital point state information between GSSE/GOOSE equipped relays is essentially an extension to Flex-
Logic, allowing distributed FlexLogic by making operands available to/from devices on a common communications net-
work. In addition to digital point states, GSSE/GOOSE messages identify the originator of the message and provide other
information required by the communication specification. All devices listen to network messages and capture data only from
messages that have originated in selected devices.
IEC 61850 GSSE messages are compatible with UCA GOOSE messages and contain a fixed set of digital points. IEC
61850 GOOSE messages can, in general, contain any configurable data items. When used by the remote input/output fea-
ture, IEC 61850 GOOSE messages contain the same data as GSSE messages.
Both GSSE and GOOSE messages are designed to be short, reliable, and high priority. GOOSE messages have additional
advantages over GSSE messages due to their support of VLAN (virtual LAN) and Ethernet priority tagging functionality.
The GSSE message structure contains space for 128 bit pairs representing digital point state information. The IEC 61850
specification provides 32 “DNA” bit pairs that represent the state of two pre-defined events and 30 user-defined events. All
remaining bit pairs are “UserSt” bit pairs, which are status bits representing user-definable events. The B30 implementation
provides 32 of the 96 available UserSt bit pairs.
The IEC 61850 specification includes features that are used to cope with the loss of communication between transmitting
and receiving devices. Each transmitting device will send a GSSE/GOOSE message upon a successful power-up, when
the state of any included point changes, or after a specified interval (the default update time) if a change-of-state has not
occurred. The transmitting device also sends a ‘hold time’ which is set greater than four times the programmed default time
required by the receiving device.
Receiving devices are constantly monitoring the communications network for messages they require, as recognized by the
identification of the originating device carried in the message. Messages received from remote devices include the mes-
sage time allowed to live. The receiving relay sets a timer assigned to the originating device to this time interval, and if it
has not received another message from this device at time-out, the remote device is declared to be non-communicating, so
it will use the programmed default state for all points from that specific remote device. If a message is received from a
remote device before the time allowed to live expires, all points for that device are updated to the states contained in the
message and the hold timer is restarted. The status of a remote device, where “Offline” indicates non-communicating, can
be displayed.
The remote input/output facility provides for 32 remote inputs and 64 remote outputs.

b) LOCAL DEVICES: ID OF DEVICE FOR TRANSMITTING GSSE/GOOSE MESSAGES

In a B30 relay, the device ID that represents the IEC 61850 GOOSE application ID (GoID) name string sent as part of each
GOOSE message is programmed in the SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  IEC 61850 PROTOCOL 
GSSE/GOOSE CONFIGURATION  TRANSMISSION  FIXED GOOSE  GOOSE ID setting.
Likewise, the device ID that represents the IEC 61850 GSSE application ID name string sent as part of each GSSE mes-
sage is programmed in the SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  IEC 61850 PROTOCOL  GSSE/GOOSE
CONFIGURATION  TRANSMISSION  GSSE  GSSE ID setting.
In B30 releases previous to 5.0x, these name strings were represented by the RELAY NAME setting.
c) REMOTE DEVICES: ID OF DEVICE FOR RECEIVING GSSE/GOOSE MESSAGES

PATH: SETTINGS  INPUTS/OUTPUTS  REMOTE DEVICES  REMOTE DEVICE 1(16)
 REMOTE DEVICE 1 REMOTE DEVICE 1 ID: Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters

 Remote Device 1
REMOTE DEVICE 1 Range: 0 to 16383 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
ETYPE APPID: 0
REMOTE DEVICE 1 Range: Fixed, GOOSE 1 through GOOSE 16
MESSAGE
DATASET: Fixed
Remote devices are available for setting purposes. A receiving relay must be programmed to capture messages from only
those originating remote devices of interest. This setting is used to select specific remote devices by entering (bottom row)
the exact identification (ID) assigned to those devices.
The REMOTE DEVICE 1 ETYPE APPID setting is only used with GOOSE messages; they are not applicable to GSSE mes-
5 sages. This setting identifies the Ethernet application identification in the GOOSE message. It should match the corre-
sponding settings on the sending device.
The REMOTE DEVICE 1 DATASET setting provides for the choice of the B30 fixed (DNA/UserSt) dataset (that is, containing
DNA and UserSt bit pairs), or one of the configurable datasets.
Note that the dataset for the received data items must be made up of existing items in an existing logical node. For this rea-
son, logical node GGIO3 is instantiated to hold the incoming data items. GGIO3 is not necessary to make use of the
received data. The remote input data item mapping takes care of the mapping of the inputs to remote input FlexLogic oper-
ands. However, GGIO3 data can be read by IEC 61850 clients.
5.8.6 REMOTE INPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS  INPUTS/OUTPUTS  REMOTE INPUTS  REMOTE INPUT 1(32)
 REMOTE INPUT 1 REMOTE INPUT 1 ID: Range: up to 12 alphanumeric characters

 Remote Ip 1
REMOTE IN 1 DEVICE: Range: Remote Device 1 to Remote device 16
MESSAGE
Remote Device 1
REMOTE IN 1 ITEM: Range: None, DNA-1 to DNA-32, UserSt-1 to UserSt-32,
MESSAGE Config Item 1 to Config Item 32
None
REMOTE IN 1 DEFAULT Range: On, Off, Latest/On, Latest/Off
MESSAGE
STATE: Off
REMOTE IN 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
Remote Inputs that create FlexLogic operands at the receiving relay are extracted from GSSE/GOOSE messages originat-
ing in remote devices. Each remote input can be selected from a list consisting of: DNA-1 through DNA-32, UserSt-1
through UserSt-32, and Dataset Item 1 through Dataset Item 32. The function of DNA inputs is defined in the IEC 61850

specification and is presented in the IEC 61850 DNA Assignments table in the Remote Outputs section. The function of
UserSt inputs is defined by the user selection of the FlexLogic operand whose state is represented in the GSSE/GOOSE
message. A user must program a DNA point from the appropriate FlexLogic operand.
Remote input 1 must be programmed to replicate the logic state of a specific signal from a specific remote device for local
use. This programming is performed via the three settings shown above.
The REMOTE INPUT 1 ID setting allows the user to assign descriptive text to the remote input. The REMOTE IN 1 DEVICE setting
selects the remote device which originates the required signal, as previously assigned to the remote device via the setting
REMOTE DEVICE (16) ID (see the Remote Devices section). The REMOTE IN 1 ITEM setting selects the specific bits of the
GSSE/GOOSE message required.
The REMOTE IN 1 DEFAULT STATE setting selects the logic state for this point if the local relay has just completed startup or
the remote device sending the point is declared to be non-communicating. The following choices are available:
• Setting REMOTE IN 1 DEFAULT STATE to “On” value defaults the input to logic 1.
• Setting REMOTE IN 1 DEFAULT STATE to “Off” value defaults the input to logic 0.
• Setting REMOTE IN 1 DEFAULT STATE to “Latest/On” freezes the input in case of lost communications. If the latest state is
not known, such as after relay power-up but before the first communication exchange, the input will default to logic 1.
When communication resumes, the input becomes fully operational.
• Setting REMOTE IN 1 DEFAULT STATE to “Latest/Off” freezes the input in case of lost communications. If the latest state is
not known, such as after relay power-up but before the first communication exchange, the input will default to logic 0.
When communication resumes, the input becomes fully operational.
For additional information on GSSE/GOOOSE messaging, see the Remote Devices section in this chapter.
NOTE
5.8.7 REMOTE DOUBLE-POINT STATUS INPUTS 5

PATH: SETTINGS  INPUTS/OUTPUTS  REMOTE DPS INPUTS  REMOTE DPS INPUT 1(5)
 REMOTE DPS INPUT 1 REM DPS IN 1 ID: Range: up to 12 alphanumeric characters

 RemDPS Ip 1
REM DPS IN 1 DEV: Range: Remote Device 1 to Remote device 16
MESSAGE
Remote Device 1
REM DPS IN 1 ITEM: Range: None, Dataset Item 1 to Dataset Item 32
MESSAGE
None
REM DPS IN 1 Range: Enabled, Disabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
Remote double-point status inputs are extracted from GOOSE messages originating in the remote device. Each remote
double point status input must be programmed to replicate the logic state of a specific signal from a specific remote device
for local use. This functionality is accomplished with the five remote double-point status input settings.
• REM DPS IN 1 ID: This setting assigns descriptive text to the remote double-point status input.
• REM DPS IN 1 DEV: This setting selects a remote device ID to indicate the origin of a GOOSE message. The range is
selected from the remote device IDs specified in the Remote Devices section.
• REM DPS IN 1 ITEM: This setting specifies the required bits of the GOOSE message.
The configurable GOOSE dataset items must be changed to accept a double-point status item from a GOOSE dataset
(changes are made in the SETTINGS  COMMUNICATION  IEC 61850 PROTOCOL  GSSE/GOOSE CONFIGURATION 
RECEPTION  CONFIGURABLE GOOSE  CONFIGURABLE GOOSE 1(16)  CONFIG GSE 1 DATASET ITEMS menus). Dataset
items configured to receive any of “GGIO3.ST.IndPos1.stV” to “GGIO3.ST.IndPos5.stV” will accept double-point status
information that will be decoded by the remote double-point status inputs configured to this dataset item.
The remote double point status is recovered from the received IEC 61850 dataset and is available as through the RemDPS
Ip 1 BAD, RemDPS Ip 1 INTERM, RemDPS Ip 1 OFF, and RemDPS Ip 1 ON FlexLogic operands. These operands can then be
used in breaker or disconnect control schemes.

5.8.8 REMOTE OUTPUTS
a) DNA BIT PAIRS

PATH: SETTINGS  INPUTS/OUTPUTS  REMOTE OUTPUTS DNA BIT PAIRS  REMOTE OUTPUTS DNA- 1(32) BIT PAIR
 REMOTE OUTPUTS DNA- 1 OPERAND: Range: FlexLogic operand

 DNA- 1 BIT PAIR Off
DNA- 1 EVENTS: Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
Disabled
Remote outputs (1 to 32) are FlexLogic operands inserted into GSSE/GOOSE messages that are transmitted to remote
devices on a LAN. Each digital point in the message must be programmed to carry the state of a specific FlexLogic oper-
and. The above operand setting represents a specific DNA function (as shown in the following table) to be transmitted.
Table 5–28: IEC 61850 DNA ASSIGNMENTS

DNA IEC 61850 DEFINITION FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
1 Test IEC 61850 TEST MODE
2 ConfRev IEC 61850 CONF REV
b) USERST BIT PAIRS

PATH: SETTINGS  INPUTS/OUTPUTS  REMOTE OUTPUTS UserSt BIT PAIRS  REMOTE OUTPUTS UserSt- 1(32) BIT PAIR
 REMOTE OUTPUTS UserSt- 1 OPERAND: Range: FlexLogic operand

 UserSt- 1 BIT PAIR Off
5 MESSAGE
UserSt- 1 EVENTS: Range: Disabled, Enabled
Disabled
Remote outputs 1 to 32 originate as GSSE/GOOSE messages to be transmitted to remote devices. Each digital point in the
message must be programmed to carry the state of a specific FlexLogic operand. The setting above is used to select the
operand which represents a specific UserSt function (as selected by the user) to be transmitted.
For more information on GSSE/GOOSE messaging, see the Remote Inputs/Outputs Overview in the Remote
Devices section.
NOTE
5.8.9 RESETTING
PATH: SETTINGS  INPUTS/OUTPUTS  RESETTING
 RESETTING RESET OPERAND: Range: FlexLogic operand

 Off
Some events can be programmed to latch the faceplate LED event indicators, target message, and/or graphical panel
annunciator windows. Once set, the latching mechanism holds all of the latched indicators or messages in the set state
after the initiating condition has cleared until a RESET command is received to return these latches (not including FlexLogic
latches) to the reset state where the initiating condition has cleared. The RESET command can be sent from the faceplate
Reset button, a remote device via a communications channel, or any selected operand.
The three sources of RESET commands each activates the RESET OP FlexLogic operand. Each individual source of a
RESET command also creates its individual operand RESET OP (PUSHBUTTON), RESET OP (COMMS), or RESET OP (OPER-
AND) to identify the source of the command. Each of these three operands generates an event in the event record when
activated. The setting shown above selects the operand that activates the RESET OP (OPERAND) operand.

5.8.10 DIRECT INPUTS AND OUTPUTS
a) DIRECT INPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS  INPUTS/OUTPUTS  DIRECT INPUTS  DIRECT INPUT 1(32)
 DIRECT INPUT 1 DIRECT INPUT 1 Range: up to 12 alphanumeric characters

 NAME: Dir Ip 1
DIRECT INPUT 1 Range: 1 to 16
MESSAGE
DEVICE ID: 1
DIRECT INPUT 1 Range: 1 to 32
MESSAGE
BIT NUMBER: 1
DIRECT INPUT 1 Range: On, Off, Latest/On, Latest/Off
MESSAGE
DEFAULT STATE: Off
DIRECT INPUT 1 Range: Enabled, Disabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
These settings specify how the direct input information is processed. The DIRECT INPUT 1 NAME setting allows the user to
assign a descriptive name to the direct input. The DIRECT INPUT 1 DEVICE ID represents the source of direct input 1. The
specified direct input is driven by the device identified here.
The DIRECT INPUT 1 BIT NUMBER is the bit number to extract the state for direct input 1. Direct Input 1 is driven by the bit
identified as DIRECT INPUT 1 BIT NUMBER. This corresponds to the direct output number of the sending device.
The DIRECT INPUT 1 DEFAULT STATE represents the state of the direct input when the associated direct device is offline. The
following choices are available:
• Setting DIRECT INPUT 1 DEFAULT STATE to “On” value defaults the input to Logic 1.
5
• Setting DIRECT INPUT 1 DEFAULT STATE to “Off” value defaults the input to Logic 0.
• Setting DIRECT INPUT 1 DEFAULT STATE to “Latest/On” freezes the input in case of lost communications. If the latest
state is not known, such as after relay power-up but before the first communication exchange, the input will default to
Logic 1. When communication resumes, the input becomes fully operational.
• Setting DIRECT INPUT 1 DEFAULT STATE to “Latest/Off” freezes the input in case of lost communications. If the latest
state is not known, such as after relay power-up but before the first communication exchange, the input will default to
Logic 0. When communication resumes, the input becomes fully operational.
b) DIRECT OUTPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS  INPUTS/OUTPUTS  DIRECT OUTPUTS  DIRECT OUTPUT 1(32)
 DIRECT OUTPUT 1 DIRECT OUT 1 NAME: Range: up to 12 alphanumeric characters

 Dir Out 1
DIRECT OUT 1 OPERAND: Range: FlexLogic operand
MESSAGE
Off
DIRECT OUTPUT 1 Range: Enabled, Disabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
The DIRECT OUT 1 NAME setting allows the user to assign a descriptive name to the direct output. The DIR OUT 1 OPERAND is
the FlexLogic operand that determines the state of this direct output.
c) APPLICATION EXAMPLES
The examples introduced in the earlier Direct Inputs and Outputs section (part of the Product Setup section) are continued
below to illustrate usage of the direct inputs and outputs.

EXAMPLE 1: EXTENDING INPUT/OUTPUT CAPABILITIES OF A B30 RELAY

Consider an application that requires additional quantities of contact inputs or output contacts or lines of programmable
logic that exceed the capabilities of a single UR-series chassis. The problem is solved by adding an extra UR-series IED,
such as the C30, to satisfy the additional inputs/outputs and programmable logic requirements. The two IEDs are con-
nected via single-channel digital communication cards as shown below.
TX1
UR IED 1
RX1
TX1
UR IED 2
RX1
Figure 5–87: INPUT AND OUTPUT EXTENSION VIA DIRECT INPUTS AND OUTPUTS
Assume contact input 1 from UR IED 2 is to be used by UR IED 1. The following settings should be applied (Direct Input 5
and bit number 12 are used, as an example):
UR IED 1: DIRECT INPUT 5 DEVICE ID = “2” UR IED 2: DIRECT OUT 12 OPERAND = “Cont Ip 1 On”
DIRECT INPUT 5 BIT NUMBER = “12”
The Cont Ip 1 On operand of UR IED 2 is now available in UR IED 1 as DIRECT INPUT 5 ON.
EXAMPLE 2: INTERLOCKING BUSBAR PROTECTION
A simple interlocking busbar protection scheme can be accomplished by sending a blocking signal from downstream
5 devices, say 2, 3 and 4, to the upstream device that monitors a single incomer of the busbar, as shown in the figure below.
UR IED 1 BLOCK
UR IED 2 UR IED 3 UR IED 4
842712A1.CDR
Figure 5–88: SAMPLE INTERLOCKING BUSBAR PROTECTION SCHEME

Assume that Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 is used by Devices 2, 3, and 4 to block Device 1. If not blocked, Device 1
would trip the bus upon detecting a fault and applying a short coordination time delay.
The following settings should be applied (assume Bit 3 is used by all 3 devices to send the blocking signal and Direct Inputs
7, 8, and 9 are used by the receiving device to monitor the three blocking signals):
UR IED 2: DIRECT OUT 3 OPERAND: "PHASE IOC1 OP"
UR IED 1: DIRECT INPUT 7 DEVICE ID: "2"

DIRECT INPUT 7 BIT NUMBER: "3"
DIRECT INPUT 7 DEFAULT STATE: select "On" for security, select "Off" for dependability
DIRECT INPUT 8 DEVICE ID: "3"



Now the three blocking signals are available in UR IED 1 as DIRECT INPUT 7 ON, DIRECT INPUT 8 ON, and DIRECT INPUT 9
ON. Upon losing communications or a device, the scheme is inclined to block (if any default state is set to “On”), or to trip
the bus on any overcurrent condition (all default states set to “Off”).
EXAMPLE 2: PILOT-AIDED SCHEMES
Consider a three-terminal line protection application shown in the figure below.
UR IED 1 UR IED 2
UR IED 3
842713A1.CDR
Figure 5–89: THREE-TERMINAL LINE APPLICATION

Assume the Hybrid Permissive Overreaching Transfer Trip (Hybrid POTT) scheme is applied using the architecture shown
below. The scheme output operand HYB POTT TX1 is used to key the permission.
5
TX1 RX1 RX2
UR IED 1 UR IED 2
RX1 TX1 TX2
RX1
UR IED 3
TX1
842714A1.CDR
Figure 5–90: SINGLE-CHANNEL OPEN-LOOP CONFIGURATION

In the above architecture, Devices 1 and 3 do not communicate directly. Therefore, Device 2 must act as a ‘bridge’. The fol-
lowing settings should be applied:
UR IED 1: DIRECT OUT 2 OPERAND: "HYB POTT TX1"
DIRECT INPUT 5 BIT NUMBER: "2" (this is a message from IED 2)
DIRECT INPUT 6 BIT NUMBER: "4" (effectively, this is a message from IED 3)
UR IED 3: DIRECT OUT 2 OPERAND: "HYB POTT TX1"
DIRECT INPUT 5 BIT NUMBER: "2" (this is a message from IED 2)
DIRECT INPUT 6 BIT NUMBER: "3" (effectively, this is a message from IED 1)
UR IED 2: DIRECT INPUT 5 DEVICE ID: "1"

DIRECT OUT 2 OPERAND: "HYB POTT TX1"

DIRECT OUT 3 OPERAND: "DIRECT INPUT 5" (forward a message from 1 to 3)
DIRECT OUT 4 OPERAND: "DIRECT INPUT 6" (forward a message from 3 to 1)
Signal flow between the three IEDs is shown in the figure below:
UR IED 1 UR IED 2
DIRECT OUT 2 = HYB POTT TX1 DIRECT INPUT 5
DIRECT INPUT 5 DIRECT OUT 2 = HYB POTT TX1
DIRECT INPUT 6 DIRECT OUT 4 = DIRECT INPUT 6
DIRECT OUT 3 = DIRECT INPUT 5
DIRECT INPUT 6
UR IED 3 DIRECT INPUT 5

DIRECT INPUT 6
DIRECT OUT 2 = HYB POTT TX1
842717A1.CDR
Figure 5–91: SIGNAL FLOW FOR DIRECT INPUT AND OUTPUT – EXAMPLE 3
In three-terminal applications, both the remote terminals must grant permission to trip. Therefore, at each terminal, direct
inputs 5 and 6 should be ANDed in FlexLogic and the resulting operand configured as the permission to trip (HYB POTT RX1
setting).

5.8.11 TELEPROTECTION INPUTS AND OUTPUTS
a) OVERVIEW
The relay provides sixteen teleprotection inputs on communications channel 1 (numbered 1-1 through 1-16) and sixteen
teleprotection inputs on communications channel 2 (on two-terminals two-channel and three-terminal systems only, num-
bered 2-1 through 2-16). The remote relay connected to channels 1 and 2 of the local relay is programmed by assigning
FlexLogic operands to be sent via the selected communications channel. This allows the user to create distributed protec-
tion and control schemes via dedicated communications channels. Some examples are directional comparison pilot
schemes and direct transfer tripping. It should be noted that failures of communications channels will affect teleprotection
functionality. The teleprotection function must be enabled to utilize the inputs.
b) TELEPROTECTION INPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS  INPUTS/OUTPUTS  TELEPROTECTION  TELEPROT INPUTS
 TELEPROT INPUTS TELEPROT INPUT 1-1 Range: Off, On, Latest/Off, Latest/On
 DEFAULT: Off
TELEPROT INPUT 1-2 Range: Off, On, Latest/Off, Latest/On
MESSAGE
DEFAULT: Off
↓

MESSAGE
DEFAULT: Off
MESSAGE
DEFAULT: Off
TELEPROT INPUT 2-2 Range: Off, On, Latest/Off, Latest/On 5
MESSAGE
DEFAULT: Off
↓

MESSAGE
DEFAULT: Off
Setting the TELEPROT INPUT ~~ DEFAULT setting to “On” defaults the input to logic 1 when the channel fails. A value of “Off”
defaults the input to logic 0 when the channel fails.
The “Latest/On” and “Latest/Off” values freeze the input in case of lost communications. If the latest state is not known,
such as after relay power-up but before the first communication exchange, then the input defaults to logic 1 for “Latest/On”
and logic 0 for “Latest/Off”.

c) TELEPROTECTION OUTPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS  INPUTS/OUTPUTS  TELEPROTECTION  TELEPROT OUTPUTS
 TELEPROT OUTPUTS TELEPROT OUTPUT 1-1: Range: FlexLogic operand

 Off
TELEPROT OUTPUT 1-2: Range: FlexLogic operand
MESSAGE
Off
↓

MESSAGE
Off
MESSAGE
Off
MESSAGE
Off
↓

MESSAGE
Off
As the following figure demonstrates, processing of the teleprotection inputs/outputs is dependent on the number of com-
munication channels and terminals. On two-terminal two-channel systems, they are processed continuously on each chan-
nel and mapped separately per channel. Therefore, to achieve redundancy, the user must assign the same operand on
both channels (teleprotection outputs at the sending end or corresponding teleprotection inputs at the receiving end). On
5 three-terminal two-channel systems, redundancy is achieved by programming signal re-transmittal in the case of channel
failure between any pair of relays.
UR-1 UR-2
ACTUAL VALUES SETTING
CHANNEL 1 STATUS: TELEPROT INPUT 1-1
DEFAULT:
SETTING (same for 1-2...1-16)
TELEPROT OUTPUT 1-1:
(same for 1-2...1-16) On FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Fail
Off (Flexlogic Operand) Off TELEPRO INPUT 1-1 On
OK OR
(same for 1-2...1-16)
SETTING ACTUAL VALUES

TELEPROT INPUT 1-1 CHANNEL 1 STATUS:
DEFAULT:
Communication channel #1
(same for 1-2...1-16) (Teleprotection I/O Enabled) SETTING
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND TELEPROT OUTPUT 1-1:
On (same for 1-2...1-16)
TELEPRO INPUT 1-1 On Fail
OR Off Off (Flexlogic Operand)
(same for 1-2...1-16) OK
UR-2 or UR-3
ACTUAL VALUES SETTING
CHANNEL 2 STATUS: TELEPROT INPUT 2-1
DEFAULT:
SETTING (same for 2-2...2-16)
(same for 1-2...1-16) On FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Fail
Off TELEPRO INPUT 2-1 On
Off (Flexlogic Operand) OK OR
(same for 2-2...2-16)
SETTING ACTUAL VALUES

CHANNEL 2 STATUS:
TELEPROT INPUT 2-1 Communication channel #2
DEFAULT:
(same for 1-2...1-16) (On 3-terminal system or 2-terminal SETTING
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
with redundant channel)
On (same for 2-2...2-16)
TELEPRO INPUT 2-1 On Fail
Off
(same for 1-2...1-16) OR OK Off (Flexlogic Operand)
842750A2.CDR
Figure 5–92: TELEPROTECTION INPUT/OUTPUT PROCESSING

5.8.12 IEC 61850 GOOSE ANALOGS
PATH: SETTINGS  INPUTS/OUTPUTS  IEC 61850 GOOSE ANALOGS  GOOSE ANALOG INPUT 1(32)
 GOOSE ANALOG ANALOG 1 DEFAULT: Range: –1000000.000 to 1000000.000 in steps of 0.001

 INPUT 1 1000.000
ANALOG 1 DEFAULT Range: Default Value, Last Known
MESSAGE
MODE: Default Value
GOOSE ANALOG 1 Range: up to 4 alphanumeric characters
MESSAGE
UNITS:
GOOSE ANALOG 1 PU: Range: 0.000 to 1000000000.000 in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
1.000
The IEC 61850 GOOSE analog inputs feature allows the transmission of analog values between any two UR-series
devices. The following settings are available for each GOOSE analog input.
• ANALOG 1 DEFAULT: This setting specifies the value of the GOOSE analog input when the sending device is offline
and the ANALOG 1 DEFAULT MODE is set to “Default Value”.This setting is stored as an IEEE 754 / IEC 60559 floating
point number. Because of the large range of this setting, not all possible values can be stored. Some values may be
rounded to the closest possible floating point number.
• ANALOG 1 DEFAULT MODE: When the sending device is offline and this setting is “Last Known”, the value of the
GOOSE analog input remains at the last received value. When the sending device is offline and this setting value is
“Default Value”, then the value of the GOOSE analog input is defined by the ANALOG 1 DEFAULT setting.
• GOOSE ANALOG 1 UNITS: This setting specifies a four-character alphanumeric string that can is used in the actual
values display of the corresponding GOOSE analog input value. 5
GOOSE Analogs are floating-point values, with no units. The GOOSE UNIT and PU base settings allow the user to
configure GOOSE Analog, so that it can be used in a FlexElement.
GOOSE Analogs that represent current, voltage, power, frequency, angles, or power factor can be used in a FlexEle-
ment. The following text must be used in the UNITS setting, to represent these types of analogs: A, V, W, var, VA, Hz,
deg, and no text (blank setting) for power factor.
GOOSE Analogs can be compared to other GOOSE Analogs with any character string or no string.
• GOOSE ANALOG 1 PU: This setting specifies the per-unit base factor when using the GOOSE analog input FlexAna-
log values in other B30 features, such as FlexElements. The base factor is applied to the GOOSE analog input FlexAn-
alog quantity to normalize it to a per-unit quantity. The base units are described in the following table.
The per-unit base setting represents thousands, not single units. For example, a PU base of 1.000 is actually 1000 and
a PU base of 0.001 is 1.
When using GOOSE Analogs and PU base in FlexElements, the largest value that can be displayed in the FlexEle-
ment actual values is 2,140,000.000.
Table 5–29: GOOSE ANALOG INPUT BASE UNITS (Sheet 1 of 2)

ELEMENT BASE UNITS
(Bus Diff Mag)
(Bus Rest Mag)
dcmA BASE = maximum value of the DCMA INPUT MAX setting for the two transducers configured
RTDs BASE = 100°C

Table 5–29: GOOSE ANALOG INPUT BASE UNITS (Sheet 2 of 2)

ELEMENT BASE UNITS
The GOOSE analog input FlexAnalog values are available for use in other B30 functions that use FlexAnalog values.
5.8.13 IEC 61850 GOOSE INTEGERS
PATH: SETTINGS  INPUTS/OUTPUTS  IEC 61850 GOOSE UINTEGERS  GOOSE UINTEGER INPUT 1(16)
 GOOSE UINTEGER UINTEGER 1 DEFAULT: Range: 0 to 429496295 in steps of 1

 INPUT 1 1000
UINTEGER 1 DEFAULT Range: Default Value, Last Known
MESSAGE
MODE: Default Value
The IEC 61850 GOOSE uinteger inputs feature allows the transmission of FlexInteger values between any two UR-series
devices. The following settings are available for each GOOSE uinteger input.
• UINTEGER 1 DEFAULT: This setting specifies the value of the GOOSE uinteger input when the sending device is
offline and the UINTEGER 1 DEFAULT MODE is set to “Default Value”.This setting is stored as a 32-bit unsigned integer
number.
• UINTEGER 1 DEFAULT MODE: When the sending device is offline and this setting is “Last Known”, the value of the
5 GOOSE uinteger input remains at the last received value. When the sending device is offline and this setting value is
“Default Value”, then the value of the GOOSE uinteger input is defined by the UINTEGER 1 DEFAULT setting.
The GOOSE integer input FlexInteger values are available for use in other B30 functions that use FlexInteger values.

5 SETTINGS 5.9 TRANSDUCER INPUTS AND OUTPUTS
5.9TRANSDUCER INPUTS AND OUTPUTS 5.9.1 DCMA INPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS  TRANSDUCER I/O  DCMA INPUTS  DCMA INPUT H1(U8)
 DCMA INPUT H1 DCMA INPUT H1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

DCMA INPUT H1 ID: Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters
MESSAGE
DCMA Ip 1
DCMA INPUT H1 Range: 6 alphanumeric characters
MESSAGE
UNITS: μA
DCMA INPUT H1 Range: 0 to –1 mA, 0 to +1 mA, –1 to +1 mA, 0 to 5 mA,
MESSAGE 0 to 10mA, 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA
RANGE: 0 to -1 mA
DCMA INPUT H1 MIN Range: –9999.999 to +9999.999 in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
VALUE: 0.000
DCMA INPUT H1 MAX Range: –9999.999 to +9999.999 in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
VALUE: 0.000
Hardware and software is provided to receive signals from external transducers and convert these signals into a digital for-
mat for use as required. The relay will accept inputs in the range of –1 to +20 mA DC, suitable for use with most common
transducer output ranges; all inputs are assumed to be linear over the complete range. Specific hardware details are con-
tained in chapter 3.
Before the DCmA input signal can be used, the value of the signal measured by the relay must be converted to the range
and quantity of the external transducer primary input parameter, such as DC voltage or temperature. The relay simplifies
this process by internally scaling the output from the external transducer and displaying the actual primary parameter.
5
DCmA input channels are arranged in a manner similar to CT and VT channels. The user configures individual channels
with the settings shown here.
The channels are arranged in sub-modules of two channels, numbered from 1 through 8 from top to bottom. On power-up,
the relay will automatically generate configuration settings for every channel, based on the order code, in the same general
manner that is used for CTs and VTs. Each channel is assigned a slot letter followed by the row number, 1 through 8 inclu-
sive, which is used as the channel number. The relay generates an actual value for each available input channel.
Settings are automatically generated for every channel available in the specific relay as shown above for the first channel of
a type 5F transducer module installed in slot H.
The function of the channel may be either “Enabled” or “Disabled”. If “Disabled”, no actual values are created for the chan-
nel. An alphanumeric “ID” is assigned to each channel; this ID will be included in the channel actual value, along with the
programmed units associated with the parameter measured by the transducer, such as volts, °C, megawatts, etc. This ID is
also used to reference the channel as the input parameter to features designed to measure this type of parameter. The
DCMA INPUT H1 RANGE setting specifies the mA DC range of the transducer connected to the input channel.
The DCMA INPUT H1 MIN VALUE and DCMA INPUT H1 MAX VALUE settings are used to program the span of the transducer in
primary units. For example, a temperature transducer might have a span from 0 to 250°C; in this case the DCMA INPUT H1
MIN VALUE value is “0” and the DCMA INPUT H1 MAX VALUE value is “250”. Another example would be a watts transducer with
a span from –20 to +180 MW; in this case the DCMA INPUT H1 MIN VALUE value would be “–20” and the DCMA INPUT H1 MAX
VALUE value “180”. Intermediate values between the min and max values are scaled linearly.

5.9 TRANSDUCER INPUTS AND OUTPUTS 5 SETTINGS
5.9.2 RTD INPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS  TRANSDUCER I/O  RTD INPUTS  RTD INPUT H1(U8)
 RTD INPUT H1 RTD INPUT H1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

RTD INPUT H1 ID: Range: Up to 20 alphanumeric characters
MESSAGE
RTD Ip 1
RTD INPUT H1 TYPE: Range: 100Ω Nickel, 10Ω Copper, 100Ω Platinum,
MESSAGE 120Ω Nickel
100Ω Nickel
Hardware and software is provided to receive signals from external resistance temperature detectors and convert these
signals into a digital format for use as required. These channels are intended to be connected to any of the RTD types in
common use. Specific hardware details are contained in chapter 3.
RTD input channels are arranged in a manner similar to CT and VT channels. The user configures individual channels with
the settings shown here.
The channels are arranged in sub-modules of two channels, numbered from 1 through 8 from top to bottom. On power-up,
the relay will automatically generate configuration settings for every channel, based on the order code, in the same general
manner that is used for CTs and VTs. Each channel is assigned a slot letter followed by the row number, 1 through 8 inclu-
sive, which is used as the channel number. The relay generates an actual value for each available input channel.
Settings are automatically generated for every channel available in the specific relay as shown above for the first channel of
a type 5C transducer module installed in the first available slot.
The function of the channel may be either “Enabled” or “Disabled”. If “Disabled”, there will not be an actual value created for
5 the channel. An alphanumeric ID is assigned to the channel; this ID will be included in the channel actual values. It is also
used to reference the channel as the input parameter to features designed to measure this type of parameter. Selecting the
type of RTD connected to the channel configures the channel.
Actions based on RTD overtemperature, such as trips or alarms, are done in conjunction with the FlexElements feature. In
FlexElements, the operate level is scaled to a base of 100°C. For example, a trip level of 150°C is achieved by setting the
operate level at 1.5 pu. FlexElement operands are available to FlexLogic for further interlocking or to operate an output
contact directly.
Refer to the following table for reference temperature values for each RTD type.

Table 5–30: RTD TEMPERATURE VS. RESISTANCE

TEMPERATURE RESISTANCE (IN OHMS)
°C °F 100 Ω PT 120 Ω NI 100 Ω NI 10 Ω CU
(DIN 43760)
–50 –58 80.31 86.17 71.81 7.10
–40 –40 84.27 92.76 77.30 7.49
–30 –22 88.22 99.41 82.84 7.88
–20 –4 92.16 106.15 88.45 8.26
–10 14 96.09 113.00 94.17 8.65
0 32 100.00 120.00 100.00 9.04
10 50 103.90 127.17 105.97 9.42
20 68 107.79 134.52 112.10 9.81
30 86 111.67 142.06 118.38 10.19
40 104 115.54 149.79 124.82 10.58
50 122 119.39 157.74 131.45 10.97
60 140 123.24 165.90 138.25 11.35
70 158 127.07 174.25 145.20 11.74
80 176 130.89 182.84 152.37 12.12
90 194 134.70 191.64 159.70 12.51
100 212 138.50 200.64 167.20 12.90
110 230 142.29 209.85 174.87 13.28
120
130
248
266
146.06
149.82
219.29
228.96
182.75
190.80
13.67
14.06
5
140 284 153.58 238.85 199.04 14.44
150 302 157.32 248.95 207.45 14.83
160 320 161.04 259.30 216.08 15.22
170 338 164.76 269.91 224.92 15.61
180 356 168.47 280.77 233.97 16.00
190 374 172.46 291.96 243.30 16.39
200 392 175.84 303.46 252.88 16.78
210 410 179.51 315.31 262.76 17.17
220 428 183.17 327.54 272.94 17.56
230 446 186.82 340.14 283.45 17.95
240 464 190.45 353.14 294.28 18.34
250 482 194.08 366.53 305.44 18.73

5.9.3 DCMA OUTPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS  TRANSDUCER I/O  DCMA OUTPUTS  DCMA OUTPUT H1(U8)
 DCMA OUTPUT H1 DCMA OUTPUT H1 Range: Off, any analog actual value parameter
 SOURCE: Off
DCMA OUTPUT H1 Range: –1 to 1 mA, 0 to 1 mA, 4 to 20 mA
MESSAGE
RANGE: –1 to 1 mA
DCMA OUTPUT H1 Range: –90.000 to 90.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
MIN VAL: 0.000 pu
DCMA OUTPUT H1 Range: –90.000 to 90.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
MAX VAL: 1.000 pu
Hardware and software is provided to generate DCmA signals that allow interfacing with external equipment. Specific hard-
ware details are contained in chapter 3. The DCmA output channels are arranged in a manner similar to transducer input or
CT and VT channels. The user configures individual channels with the settings shown below.
The channels are arranged in sub-modules of two channels, numbered 1 through 8 from top to bottom. On power-up, the
relay automatically generates configuration settings for every channel, based on the order code, in the same manner used
for CTs and VTs. Each channel is assigned a slot letter followed by the row number, 1 through 8 inclusive, which is used as
the channel number.
Both the output range and a signal driving a given output are user-programmable via the following settings menu (an exam-
ple for channel M5 is shown).
5 The relay checks the driving signal (x in equations below) for the minimum and maximum limits, and subsequently re-
scales so the limits defined as MIN VAL and MAX VAL match the output range of the hardware defined as RANGE. The follow-
ing equation is applied:
 I min if x < MIN VAL


I out =  I max if x > MAX VAL (EQ 5.20)

 k ( x – MIN VAL ) + I min otherwise
where: x is a driving signal specified by the SOURCE setting

Imin and Imax are defined by the RANGE setting
k is a scaling constant calculated as:
I max – I min
k = ------------------------------------------------- (EQ 5.21)
MAX VAL – MIN VAL
The feature is intentionally inhibited if the MAX VAL and MIN VAL settings are entered incorrectly, e.g. when MAX VAL – MIN
VAL< 0.1 pu. The resulting characteristic is illustrated in the following figure.
Imax
OUTPUT CURRENT
Imin
DRIVING SIGNAL
MIN VAL MAX VAL 842739A1.CDR
Figure 5–93: DCMA OUTPUT CHARACTERISTIC

The DCmA output settings are described below.

• DCMA OUTPUT H1 SOURCE: This setting specifies an internal analog value to drive the analog output. Actual values
(FlexAnalog parameters) such as power, current amplitude, voltage amplitude, power factor, etc. can be configured as
sources driving DCmA outputs. Refer to Appendix A for a complete list of FlexAnalog parameters.
• DCMA OUTPUT H1 RANGE: This setting allows selection of the output range. Each DCmA channel may be set inde-
pendently to work with different ranges. The three most commonly used output ranges are available.
• DCMA OUTPUT H1 MIN VAL: This setting allows setting the minimum limit for the signal that drives the output. This
setting is used to control the mapping between an internal analog value and the output current. The setting is entered
in per-unit values. The base units are defined in the same manner as the FlexElement base units.
• DCMA OUTPUT H1 MAX VAL: This setting allows setting the maximum limit for the signal that drives the output. This
setting is used to control the mapping between an internal analog value and the output current. The setting is entered
in per-unit values. The base units are defined in the same manner as the FlexElement base units.
The DCMA OUTPUT H1 MIN VAL and DCMA OUTPUT H1 MAX VAL settings are ignored for power factor base units (i.e. if
the DCMA OUTPUT H1 SOURCE is set to FlexAnalog value based on power factor measurement).
NOTE
Three application examples are described below.

EXAMPLE: CURRENT MONITORING
The phase A current (true RMS value) is to be monitored via the H2 current output working with the range from 4 to 20 mA.
The CT ratio is 5000:5 and the maximum load current is 4200 A. The current should be monitored from 0 A upwards, allow-
ing for 50% overload.
The phase current with the 50% overload margin is:
I max = 1.5 × 4.2 kA = 6.3 kA (EQ 5.22) 5
The base unit for current (refer to the FlexElements section in this chapter for additional details) is:
I BASE = 5 kA (EQ 5.23)
The minimum and maximum power values to be monitored (in pu) are:
0 kA 6.3 kA
minimum current = ------------ = 0 pu, maximum current = ----------------- = 1.26 pu (EQ 5.24)
5 kA 5 kA
The following settings should be entered:
DCMA OUTPUT H2 SOURCE: “SRC 1 Ia RMS”
DCMA OUTPUT H2 RANGE: “4 to 20 mA”
DCMA OUTPUT H2 MIN VAL: “0.000 pu”
DCMA OUTPUT H2 MAX VAL: “1.260 pu”
The worst-case error for this application could be calculated by superimposing the following two sources of error:
• ±0.5% of the full scale for the analog output module, or ± 0.005 × ( 20 – 4 ) × 6.3 kA = ± 0.504 kA
• ±0.25% of reading or ±0.1% of rated (whichever is greater) for currents between 0.1 and 2.0 of nominal
For example, at the reading of 4.2 kA, the worst-case error is max(0.0025 × 4.2 kA, 0.001 × 5 kA) + 0.504 kA = 0.515 kA.
EXAMPLE: VOLTAGE MONITORING
A positive-sequence voltage on a 400 kV system measured via source 2 is to be monitored by the DCmA H3 output with a
range of 0 to 1 mA. The VT secondary setting is 66.4 V, the VT ratio setting is 6024, and the VT connection setting is
“Delta”. The voltage should be monitored in the range from 70% to 110% of nominal.
The minimum and maximum positive-sequence voltages to be monitored are:
400 kV 400 kV
V min = 0.7 × ------------------- = 161.66 kV, V max = 1.1 × ------------------- = 254.03 kV (EQ 5.25)
3 3
The base unit for voltage (refer to the FlexElements section in this chapter for additional details) is:
V BASE = 0.0664 kV × 6024 = 400 kV (EQ 5.26)

The minimum and maximum voltage values to be monitored (in pu) are:
161.66 kV 254.03 kV
minimum voltage = --------------------------- = 0.404 pu, maximum voltage = --------------------------- = 0.635 pu (EQ 5.27)
400 kV 400 kV
The following settings should be entered:
DCMA OUTPUT H3 SOURCE: “SRC 2 V_1 mag”
DCMA OUTPUT H3 RANGE: “0 to 1 mA”
DCMA OUTPUT H3 MIN VAL: “0.404 pu”
DCMA OUTPUT H3 MAX VAL: “0.635 pu”
The limit settings differ from the expected 0.7 pu and 1.1 pu because the relay calculates the positive-sequence quantities
scaled to the phase-to-ground voltages, even if the VTs are connected in “Delta” (see the Metering Conventions section in
chapter 6), while at the same time the VT nominal voltage is 1 pu for the settings. Consequently the settings required in this
example differ from naturally expected by the factor of 3 .
The worst-case error for this application could be calculated by superimposing the following two sources of error:
• ±0.5% of the full scale for the analog output module, or ± 0.005 × ( 1 – 0 ) × 254.03 kV = ± 1.27 kV
• ±0.5% of reading
For example, under nominal conditions, the positive-sequence reads 230.94 kV and the worst-case error is
0.005 x 230.94 kV + 1.27 kV = 2.42 kV.

5 SETTINGS 5.10 TESTING
5.10TESTING 5.10.1 TEST MODE
PATH: SETTINGS  TESTING  TEST MODE
 SETTINGS TEST MODE Range: Disabled, Isolated, Forcible

 TESTING FUNCTION: Disabled
TEST MODE FORCING: Range: FlexLogic operand
MESSAGE
On
The B30 provides a test facility to verify the functionality of contact inputs and outputs, some communication functions and
the phasor measurement unit (where applicable), using simulated conditions. The test mode is indicated on the relay face-
plate by a Test Mode LED indicator.
The test mode may be in any of three states: disabled, isolated, or forcible.
In the “Disabled” mode, B30 operation is normal and all test features are disabled.
In the “Isolated” mode, the B30 is prevented from performing certain control actions, including tripping via contact outputs.
All relay contact outputs, including latching outputs, are disabled. Channel tests and phasor measurement unit tests remain
usable on applicable UR-series models.
In the “Forcible” mode, the operand selected by the TEST MODE FORCING setting controls the relay inputs and outputs. If the
test mode is forcible, and the operand assigned to the TEST MODE FORCING setting is “Off”, the B30 inputs and outputs oper-
ate normally. If the test mode is forcible, and the operand assigned to the TEST MODE FORCING setting is “On”, the B30 con-
tact inputs and outputs are forced to the values specified in the following sections. Forcing may be controlled by manually
changing the operand selected by the TEST MODE FORCING setting between on and off, or by selecting a user-programma-
ble pushbutton, contact input, or communication-based input operand. Channel tests and phasor measurement unit tests
remain usable on applicable UR-series models.
5
Communications based inputs and outputs remain fully operational in test mode. If a control action is programmed
using direct inputs and outputs or remote inputs and outputs, then the test procedure must take this into account.
NOTE
When in “Forcible” mode, the operand selected by the TEST MODE FORCING setting dictates further response of the B30 to
testing conditions. To force contact inputs and outputs through relay settings, set TEST MODE FORCING to “On”. To force con-
tact inputs and outputs through a user-programmable condition, such as FlexLogic operand (pushbutton, contact input,
communication-based input, or a combination of these), set TEST MODE FORCING to the desired operand. The contact input
or output is forced when the selected operand assumes a logic 1 state.
The B30 remains fully operational in test mode, allowing for various testing procedures. In particular, the protection and
control elements, FlexLogic, and communication-based inputs and outputs function normally.
The only difference between the normal operation and the test mode is the behavior of the input and output contacts. The
contact inputs can be forced to report as open or closed or remain fully operational, whereas the contact outputs can be
forced to open, close, freeze, or remain fully operational. The response of the contact input and output contacts to the test
mode is programmed individually for each input and output using the force contact inputs and force contact outputs test
functions described in the following sections.
The test mode state is indicated on the relay faceplate by a combination of the Test Mode LED indicator, the In-Service LED
indicator, and by the critical fail relay, as shown in the following table.

5.10 TESTING 5 SETTINGS
Table 5–31: TEST MODE OPERATION

TEST MODE TEST MODE IN-SERVICE TEST MODE CRITICAL INPUT AND OUTPUT BEHAVIOR
FUNCTION FORCING LED LED FAIL
OPERAND RELAY
Disabled No effect Unaffected Off Unaffected Contact outputs and inputs are under normal
operation. Channel tests and PMU tests not
operational (where applicable).
Isolated No effect Off On De- Contact outputs are disabled and contact inputs
energized are operational. Channel tests and PMU tests
are also operational (where applicable).
Forcible On (logic 1) Off Flashing De- Contact inputs and outputs are controlled by the
energized force contact input and force contact output
functions. Channel tests and PMU tests are
Off (logic 0) Off Flashing De- Contact outputs and inputs are under normal
energized operation. Channel tests and PMU tests are also
The TEST MODE FUNCTION setting can only be changed by a direct user command. Following a restart, power up, settings
upload, or firmware upgrade, the test mode will remain at the last programmed value. This allows a B30 that has been
placed in isolated mode to remain isolated during testing and maintenance activities. On restart, the TEST MODE FORCING
setting and the force contact input and force contact output settings all revert to their default states.
5.10.2 FORCE CONTACT INPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS  TESTING  FORCE CONTACT INPUTS
5  FORCE CONTACT
 INPUTS
FORCE Cont Ip 1
:Disabled
Range: Disabled, Open, Closed
FORCE Cont Ip 2 Range: Disabled, Open, Closed

MESSAGE
:Disabled
↓
FORCE Cont Ip xx Range: Disabled, Open, Closed

MESSAGE
:Disabled
The relay contact inputs can be pre-programmed to respond to the test mode in the following ways:
• If set to “Disabled”, the input remains fully operational. It is controlled by the voltage across its input terminals and can
be turned on and off by external circuitry. This value should be selected if a given input must be operational during the
test. This includes, for example, an input initiating the test, or being a part of a user pre-programmed test sequence.
• If set to “Open”, the input is forced to report as opened (Logic 0) for the entire duration of the test mode regardless of
the voltage across the input terminals.
• If set to “Closed”, the input is forced to report as closed (Logic 1) for the entire duration of the test mode regardless of
the voltage across the input terminals.
The force contact inputs feature provides a method of performing checks on the function of all contact inputs. Once
enabled, the relay is placed into test mode, allowing this feature to override the normal function of contact inputs. The Test
Mode LED will be on, indicating that the relay is in test mode. The state of each contact input may be programmed as “Dis-
abled”, “Open”, or “Closed”. All contact input operations return to normal when all settings for this feature are disabled.

5 SETTINGS 5.10 TESTING
5.10.3 FORCE CONTACT OUTPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS  TESTING  FORCE CONTACT OUTPUTS
 FORCE CONTACT FORCE Cont Op 1 Range: Disabled, Energized, De-energized, Freeze

 OUTPUTS :Disabled
FORCE Cont Op 2 Range: Disabled, Energized, De-energized, Freeze
MESSAGE
:Disabled
↓
FORCE Cont Op xx Range: Disabled, Energized, De-energized, Freeze

MESSAGE
:Disabled
The relay contact outputs can be pre-programmed to respond to the test mode.
If set to “Disabled”, the contact output remains fully operational. If operates when its control operand is logic 1 and will
resets when its control operand is logic 0. If set to “Energized”, the output will close and remain closed for the entire dura-
tion of the test mode, regardless of the status of the operand configured to control the output contact. If set to “De-ener-
gized”, the output will open and remain opened for the entire duration of the test mode regardless of the status of the
operand configured to control the output contact. If set to “Freeze”, the output retains its position from before entering the
test mode, regardless of the status of the operand configured to control the output contact.
These settings are applied two ways. First, external circuits may be tested by energizing or de-energizing contacts. Sec-
ond, by controlling the output contact state, relay logic may be tested and undesirable effects on external circuits avoided.
Example 1: Initiating test mode through user-programmable pushbutton 1
For example, the test mode can be initiated from user-programmable pushbutton 1. The pushbutton will be programmed as
“Latched” (pushbutton pressed to initiate the test, and pressed again to terminate the test). During the test, contact input 1
5
should remain operational, contact inputs 2 and 3 should open, and contact input 4 should close. Also, contact output 1
should freeze, contact output 2 should open, contact output 3 should close, and contact output 4 should remain fully opera-
tional. The required settings are shown below.
To enable user-programmable pushbutton 1 to initiate the test mode, make the following changes in the SETTINGS 
TESTING  TEST MODE menu: TEST MODE FUNCTION: “Enabled” and TEST MODE INITIATE: “PUSHBUTTON 1 ON”
Make the following changes to configure the contact inputs and outputs. In the SETTINGS  TESTING  FORCE CONTACT
INPUTS and FORCE CONTACT OUTPUTS menus, set:
FORCE Cont Ip 1: “Disabled”, FORCE Cont Ip 2: “Open”, FORCE Cont Ip 3: “Open”, and FORCE Cont Ip 4: “Closed”
FORCE Cont Op 1: “Freeze”, FORCE Cont Op 2: “De-energized”, FORCE Cont Op 3: “Energized”,
and FORCE Cont Op 4: “Disabled”
Example 2: Initiating a test from user-programmable pushbutton 1 or through remote input 1
In this example, the test can be initiated locally from user-programmable pushbutton 1 or remotely through remote input 1.
Both the pushbutton and the remote input will be programmed as “Latched”. Write the following FlexLogic equation:
Set the user-programmable pushbutton as latching by changing SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  USER-PROGRAMMABLE
PUSHBUTTONS  USER PUSHBUTTON 1  PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION to “Latched”. To enable either pushbutton 1 or remote
input 1 to initiate the Test mode, make the following changes in the SETTINGS  TESTING  TEST MODE menu:
TEST MODE FUNCTION: “Enabled” and TEST MODE INITIATE: “VO1”

5.10 TESTING 5 SETTINGS

6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.1 OVERVIEW
6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.1OVERVIEW 6.1.1 ACTUAL VALUES MENU
 ACTUAL VALUES  CONTACT INPUTS

See page 6-3.
 STATUS 
 VIRTUAL INPUTS
See page 6-3.

 REMOTE INPUTS
See page 6-3.

 REMOTE DPS INPUTS
See page 6-4.

 TELEPROTECTION
See page 6-4.
 INPUTS
 CONTACT OUTPUTS
See page 6-4.

 VIRTUAL OUTPUTS
See page 6-5.

 REMOTE DEVICES
See page 6-5.
 STATUS
 REMOTE DEVICES
See page 6-5.
 STATISTICS
 DIGITAL COUNTERS
See page 6-6.

 SELECTOR SWITCHES
See page 6-6.

 FLEX STATES
See page 6-6.
6

 ETHERNET
See page 6-6.

 REAL TIME CLOCK
See page 6-7.
 SYNCHRONIZING
 DIRECT INPUTS
See page 6-8.

 DIRECT DEVICES
See page 6-8.
 STATUS
 IEC 61850
See page 6-9.
 GOOSE UINTEGERS
 EGD PROTOCOL
See page 6-9.
 STATUS
 TELEPROT CH TESTS
See page 6-10.

 COMM STATUS
See page 6-10.
 REMAINING CONNECT
 PRP
See page 6-11.


6.1 OVERVIEW 6 ACTUAL VALUES
 ACTUAL VALUES  BUS

See page 6-14.
 METERING 
 SOURCE SRC 1
See page 6-14.

 SOURCE SRC 2

 SOURCE SRC 3

 SOURCE SRC 4

 SOURCE SRC 5

 SOURCE SRC 6

 TRACKING FREQUENCY
See page 6-17.

 FLEXELEMENTS
See page 6-17.

 IEC 61850
See page 6-18.
 GOOSE ANALOGS
 TRANSDUCER I/O
See page 6-18.
 DCMA INPUTS
 TRANSDUCER I/O
6  RTD INPUTS
See page 6-18.
 ACTUAL VALUES  USER-PROGRAMMABLE

See page 6-19.
 RECORDS  FAULT REPORTS
 EVENT RECORDS
See page 6-19.

 OSCILLOGRAPHY
See page 6-19.

 ACTUAL VALUES  MODEL INFORMATION

See page 6-21.
 PRODUCT INFO 
 FIRMWARE REVISIONS
See page 6-21.


6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.2 STATUS
6.2STATUS
For status reporting, ‘On’ represents Logic 1 and ‘Off’ represents Logic 0.
NOTE
6.2.1 CONTACT INPUTS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES  STATUS  CONTACT INPUTS
 CONTACT INPUTS Cont Ip 1 Range: On, Off

 Off
Cont Ip 2 Range: On, Off
MESSAGE
Off
↓
Cont Ip xx Range: On, Off

MESSAGE
Off
The present status of the contact inputs is shown here. The first line of a message display indicates the ID of the contact
input. For example, ‘Cont Ip 1’ refers to the contact input in terms of the default name-array index. The second line of the
display indicates the logic state of the contact input.
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES  STATUS  VIRTUAL INPUTS
 VIRTUAL INPUTS Virt Ip 1 Range: On, Off

 Off
Virt Ip 2 Range: On, Off
MESSAGE
Off
↓
Virt Ip 64 Range: On, Off

6
MESSAGE
Off
The present status of the 64 virtual inputs is shown here. The first line of a message display indicates the ID of the virtual
input. For example, ‘Virt Ip 1’ refers to the virtual input in terms of the default name. The second line of the display indicates
the logic state of the virtual input.
6.2.3 REMOTE INPUTS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES  STATUS  REMOTE INPUTS
 REMOTE INPUTS REMOTE INPUT 1 Range: On, Off

 STATUS: Off
REMOTE INPUT 2 Range: On, Off
MESSAGE
STATUS: Off
↓
REMOTE INPUT 32 Range: On, Off

MESSAGE
STATUS: Off
The present state of the 32 remote inputs is shown here.

The state displayed will be that of the remote point unless the remote device has been established to be “Offline” in which
case the value shown is the programmed default state for the remote input.

6.2 STATUS 6 ACTUAL VALUES
6.2.4 REMOTE DOUBLE-POINT STATUS INPUTS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES  STATUS  REMOTE DPS INPUTS
 REMOTE DPS INPUTS REMOTE DPS INPUT 1 Range: On, Off, Intermediate, Bad
 STATUS: Bad
REMOTE DPS INPUT 2 Range: On, Off, Intermediate, Bad
MESSAGE
STATUS: Bad
↓
REMOTE DPS INPUT 5 Range: On, Off, Intermediate, Bad

MESSAGE
STATUS: Bad
The present state of the remote double-point status inputs is shown here. The actual values indicate if the remote double-
point status inputs are in the on (close), off (open), intermediate, or bad state.
6.2.5 TELEPROTECTION INPUTS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES  STATUS  TELEPROTECTION INPUTS
 TELEPROTECTION TELEPROTECTION Range: Off, On

 INPUTS INPUT 1-1: Off
TELEPROTECTION Range: Off, On
MESSAGE
INPUT 1-2: Off
↓

MESSAGE
INPUT 1-16: Off
MESSAGE
INPUT 2-1: Off
6 MESSAGE
INPUT 2-2: Off
↓

MESSAGE
INPUT 2-16: Off
The present state of teleprotection inputs from communication channels 1 and 2 are shown here. The state displayed will
be that of corresponding remote output unless the channel is declared failed.
6.2.6 CONTACT OUTPUTS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES  STATUS  CONTACT OUTPUTS
 CONTACT OUTPUTS Cont Op 1 Range: On, Off, VOff, VOn, IOn, IOff
 Off
Cont Op 2 Range: On, Off, VOff, VOn, IOn, IOff
MESSAGE
Off
↓
Cont Op xx Range: On, Off, VOff, VOn, IOn, IOff

MESSAGE
Off
The present state of the contact outputs is shown here. The first line of a message display indicates the ID of the contact
output. For example, ‘Cont Op 1’ refers to the contact output in terms of the default name-array index. The second line of
the display indicates the logic state of the contact output.

For form-A contact outputs, the state of the voltage and current detectors is displayed as Off, VOff, IOff, On, IOn,
and VOn. For form-C contact outputs, the state is displayed as Off or On.
NOTE
6.2.7 VIRTUAL OUTPUTS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES  STATUS  VIRTUAL OUTPUTS
 VIRTUAL OUTPUTS Virt Op 1 Range: On, Off

 Off
Virt Op 2 Range: On, Off
MESSAGE
Off
↓
Virt Op 96 Range: On, Off

MESSAGE
Off
The present state of up to 96 virtual outputs is shown here. The first line of a message display indicates the ID of the virtual
output. For example, ‘Virt Op 1’ refers to the virtual output in terms of the default name-array index. The second line of the
display indicates the logic state of the virtual output, as calculated by the FlexLogic equation for that output.
6.2.8 REMOTE DEVICES
a) STATUS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES  STATUS  REMOTE DEVICES STATUS
 REMOTE DEVICES All REMOTE DEVICES Range: Yes, No

 STATUS ONLINE: No
REMOTE DEVICE 1 Range: Online, Offline
MESSAGE
STATUS: Offline
MESSAGE
REMOTE DEVICE 2
STATUS: Offline
Range: Online, Offline
6
↓
REMOTE DEVICE 16 Range: Online, Offline

MESSAGE
STATUS: Offline
The present state of the programmed remote devices is shown here. The ALL REMOTE DEVICES ONLINE message indicates
whether or not all programmed remote devices are online. If the corresponding state is "No", then at least one required
remote device is not online.
b) STATISTICS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES  STATUS  REMOTE DEVICES STATISTICS  REMOTE DEVICE 1(16)
 REMOTE DEVICE 1 REMOTE DEVICE 1

 StNum: 0
REMOTE DEVICE 1
MESSAGE
SqNum: 0
Statistical data (two types) for up to 16 programmed remote devices is shown here.
The STNUM number is obtained from the indicated remote device and increments whenever a change of state of at least
one item occurs in the GSSE/GOOSE message. The SQNUM number is obtained from the indicated remote device and
increments whenever a GSSE/GOOSE message, without a state change, is sent. When the GSSE/GOOSE message
trasmits a state change, the SQNUM resets to 0. This number rolls over to zero when a count of 4,294,967,295 is incre-
mented.

6.2.9 DIGITAL COUNTERS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES  STATUS  DIGITAL COUNTERS  DIGITAL COUNTERS Counter 1(8)
 DIGITAL COUNTERS Counter 1 ACCUM:

 Counter 1 0
Counter 1 FROZEN:
MESSAGE
0
Counter 1 FROZEN:
MESSAGE
YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS
Counter 1 MICROS:
MESSAGE
0
The present status of the eight digital counters is shown here. The status of each counter, with the user-defined counter
name, includes the accumulated and frozen counts (the count units label will also appear). Also included, is the date and
time stamp for the frozen count. The COUNTER 1 MICROS value refers to the microsecond portion of the time stamp.
6.2.10 SELECTOR SWITCHES
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES  STATUS  SELECTOR SWITCHES
 SELECTOR SWITCHES SELECTOR SWITCH 1 Range: Current Position / 7

 POSITION: 0/7
SELECTOR SWITCH 2 Range: Current Position / 7
MESSAGE
POSITION: 0/7
The display shows both the current position and the full range. The current position only (an integer from 0 through 7) is the
actual value.
6 6.2.11 FLEX STATES
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES  STATUS  FLEX STATES
 FLEX STATES PARAM 1: Off Range: Off, On

 Off
PARAM 2: Off Range: Off, On
MESSAGE
Off
↓
PARAM 256: Off Range: Off, On

MESSAGE
Off
There are 256 FlexStateTM bits available. The second line value indicates the state of the given FlexState bit.
6.2.12 ETHERNET
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES  STATUS  ETHERNET
 ETHERNET ETHERNET PRI LINK Range: Fail, OK

 STATUS: Fail
ETHERNET SEC LINK Range: Fail, OK
MESSAGE
STATUS: Fail
ETHERNET TRD LINK Range: Fail, OK
MESSAGE
STATUS: Fail

These values indicate the status of the first, second, and third Ethernet links.
6.2.13 REAL TIME CLOCK SYNCHRONIZING
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES  STATUS  REAL TIME CLOCK SYNCHRONIZING
 REAL TIME CLOCK RTC Sync Source: Range: See text below
 SYNCHRONIZING None
GrandMaster ID: Range: Any 8 octet value

MESSAGE
0X0000000000000000
Accuracy: Range: 0 to 999, 999, 999 ns
MESSAGE
999,999,999 ns
Port 1 PTP State: Range: Disabled, No Signal, Calibrating, Synch’d (No
MESSAGE Pdelay), Synchronized
NO SIGNAL
NO SIGNAL
NO SIGNAL
PTP - IRIG-B Delta: Range: -500,000,000 to +500,000,000 ns
MESSAGE
500,000,000 ns
The RTC Sync Source actual value is the time synchronizing source the relay is using at present. Possible sources are:
Port 1 PTP Clock, Port 2 PTP Clock, Port 3 PTP Clock, IRIG-B, SNTP, and None. An actual value displays when the relay
includes the IEEE 1588 software option.
The Grandmaster ID is the grandmasterIdentity code being received from the present PTP grandmaster, if any. When the
relay is not using any PTP grandmaster, this actual value is zero. The grandmasterIdentity code is specified by PTP to be
globally unique, so one can always know which clock is grandmaster in a system with multiple grandmaster-capable clocks.
Accuracy is the estimated maximum time error at present in the RTC, considering the quality information imbedded in the
received time signal. The value 999,999,999 indicates that the magnitude of the estimated error is one second or more, or
6
that the error cannot be estimated.
PORT 1…3 PTP STATE is the present state of the port’s PTP clock. The PTP clock state is:
• DISABLED is the port’s function setting is Disabled,
• NO SIGNAL if enabled but no signal from an active master has been found and selected,
• CALIBRATING if an active master has been selected but lock is not at present established,
• SYNCH’D (NO PDELAY) if the port is synchronized, but the peer delay mechanism is non-operational, and
• SYNCHRONIZED if synchronized.
PTP-— IRIG-B DELTA is the time difference, measured in nanoseconds, between the fractional seconds portion of the time
being received via PTP and that being received via IRIG-B. A positive value indicates that PTP time is fast compared to
IRIG-B time.

6.2.14 DIRECT INPUTS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES  STATUS  DIRECT INPUTS
 DIRECT INPUTS AVG MSG RETURN

 TIME CH1: 0 ms
UNRETURNED MSG
MESSAGE
COUNT CH1: 0
CRC FAIL COUNT
MESSAGE
CH1: 0
AVG MSG RETURN
MESSAGE
TIME CH2: 0 ms
UNRETURNED MSG
MESSAGE
COUNT CH2: 0
CRC FAIL COUNT
MESSAGE
CH2: 0
DIRECT INPUT 1:
MESSAGE
On
DIRECT INPUT 2:
MESSAGE
On
↓
DIRECT INPUT 32:

MESSAGE
On
The AVERAGE MSG RETURN TIME is the time taken for direct output messages to return to the sender in a direct input/output
ring configuration (this value is not applicable for non-ring configurations). This is a rolling average calculated for the last
6 ten messages. There are two return times for dual-channel communications modules.
The UNRETURNED MSG COUNT values (one per communications channel) count the direct output messages that do not
make the trip around the communications ring. The CRC FAIL COUNT values (one per communications channel) count the
direct output messages that have been received but fail the CRC check. High values for either of these counts may indicate
on a problem with wiring, the communication channel, or one or more relays. The UNRETURNED MSG COUNT and CRC FAIL
COUNT values can be cleared using the CLEAR DIRECT I/O COUNTERS command.
The DIRECT INPUT 1 to DIRECT INPUT (32) values represent the state of each direct input.
6.2.15 DIRECT DEVICES STATUS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES  STATUS  DIRECT DEVICES STATUS
 DIRECT DEVICES DIRECT DEVICE 1 Range: Offline, Online

 STATUS STATUS: Offline
DIRECT DEVICE 2 Range: Offline, Online
MESSAGE
STATUS: Offline
↓
DIRECT DEVICE 16 Range: Offline, Online

MESSAGE
STATUS: Offline
These actual values represent the state of direct devices 1 through 16.

6.2.16 IEC 61850 GOOSE INTEGERS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES  STATUS  IEC 61850 GOOSE UINTEGERS
 IEC 61850 UINT INPUT 1

 GOOSE UINTEGERS 0
UINT INPUT 2
MESSAGE
0
↓
UINT INPUT 16
MESSAGE
0
ture is specified as a software option at the time of ordering. See the Order Codes section in chapter 2 for
details.
The IEC 61850 GGIO5 integer input data points are displayed in this menu. The GGIO5 integer data values are received
via IEC 61850 GOOSE messages sent from other devices.
6.2.17 EGD PROTOCOL STATUS
a) FAST EXCHANGE
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES  STATUS  EGD PROTOCOL STATUS  PRODUCER STATUS  FAST EXCHANGE 1
 FAST EXCHANGE 1 FAST EXCHANGE 1

 SIGNATURE: 0
6
FAST EXCHANGE 1
MESSAGE
DATA LENGTH: 0
These values provide information that may be useful for debugging an EGD network. The EGD signature and packet size
for the fast EGD exchange is displayed.
b) SLOW EXCHANGE
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES  STATUS  EGD PROTOCOL STATUS  PRODUCER STATUS  SLOW EXCHANGE 1(2)
 SLOW EXCHANGE 1 SLOW EXCHANGE 1

 SIGNATURE: 0
SLOW EXCHANGE 1
MESSAGE
DATA LENGTH: 0
These values provide information that may be useful for debugging an EGD network. The EGD signature and packet size
for the slow EGD exchanges are displayed.

6.2.18 TELEPROTECTION CHANNEL TESTS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES  STATUS  TELEPROT CH TESTS
 TELEPROT CH TESTS CHANNEL 1 Range: n/a, FAIL, OK

 STATUS: n/a
CHANNEL 1 LOST Range: 1 to 65535 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
PACKETS: 1
CHANNEL 2 Range: n/a, FAIL, OK
MESSAGE
STATUS: n/a
CHANNEL 2 LOST Range: 1 to 65535 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
PACKETS: 1
VALIDITY OF CHANNEL Range: n/a, FAIL, OK
MESSAGE
CONFIGURATION: FAIL
The status information for two channels is shown here.

• CHANNEL 1 STATUS: This represents the receiver status of each channel. If the value is “OK”, teleprotection is
enabled and data is being received from the remote terminal; If the value is “FAIL”, teleprotection enabled and data is
not being received from the remote terminal. If “n/a”, teleprotection is disabled.
• CHANNEL 1 LOST PACKETS: Data is transmitted to the remote terminals in data packets at a rate of two packets per
cycle. The number of lost packets represents data packets lost in transmission; this count can be reset to 0 through the
COMMANDS  CLEAR RECORDS menu.
• VALIDITY OF CHANNEL CONFIGURATION: This value displays the current state of the communications channel
identification check, and hence validity. If a remote relay ID does not match the programmed ID at the local relay, the
“FAIL” message will be displayed. The “N/A” value appears if the local relay ID is set to a default value of “0”, the chan-
nel is failed, or if the teleprotection inputs/outputs are not enabled.
6.2.19 REMAINING CONNECTION STATUS

6
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES  STATUS  COMM STATUS REMAINING CONNECT
 COMM STATUS MMS TCP(max 5) Range: 0 to 5

 REMAINING CONNECT 5
MODBUS TCP(max 4) Range: 0 to 4
MESSAGE
4
DNP TCP (max 2) Range: 0 to 2
MESSAGE
2
IEC-104 (max 2) Range: 0 to 2
MESSAGE
2
These values specify the remaining number of TCP connections still available for each protocol. The display depends on
the options applicable to your device, for example the PMU entry does not display when not applicable. Each time a con-
nection is used, the remaining number of connections decrements. When released, the remaining number of connections
increments. If no connection is made over the specific protocol, the number equals the maximum number available for the
specific protocol.
For example, the maximum number of Modbus TCP connections is 4. Once an EnerVista session is opened on a computer
connected to the UR over Ethernet, the Modbus TCP status shows 3. If the EnerVista application is closed, the Modbus
TCP status shows 4.
MMS TCP — The number of IEC 61850 connections remaining.

6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.3 METERING
6.3METERING 6.3.1 PARALLEL REDUNDANCY PROTOCOL (PRP)
The Parallel Redundancy Protocol (PRP) defines a redundancy protocol for high availability in substation automation net-
works.
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES  STATUS  PRP
 PRP Total Rx Port A: Range: 0 to 4G, blank if PRP disabled


Total Rx Port B: Range: 0 to 4G, blank if PRP disabled
MESSAGE
Total Errors: Range: 0 to 4G, blank if PRP disabled

MESSAGE
Mismatches Port A: Range: 0 to 4G, blank if PRP disabled

MESSAGE
Mismatches Port B: Range: 0 to 4G, blank if PRP disabled

MESSAGE
The B30 Bus Differential System is provided with optional PRP capability. This feature is specified as a
software option at the time of ordering. See the Order Codes section in chapter 2 for details.
TOTAL RECEIVED PORT A is a counter for total messages received (either from DANPs or from SANs) on Port A.
TOTAL RECEIVED PORT B is a counter for total messages received (either from DANPs or from SANs) on Port B.
TOTAL ERRORS is a counter for total messages received with an error (bad port code, frame length too short).
MISMATCHES PORT A is a counter for total messages received with an error on Port A (PRP frame, but port received through
and LAN ID in the frame do not match).
MISMATCHES PORT B is a counter for total messages received with an error on Port B (PRP frame, but port received through 6
and LAN ID in the frame do not match).
6.3.2 METERING CONVENTIONS
a) UR CONVENTION FOR MEASURING PHASE ANGLES

All phasors calculated by UR-series relays and used for protection, control and metering functions are rotating phasors that
maintain the correct phase angle relationships with each other at all times.
For display and oscillography purposes, all phasor angles in a given relay are referred to an AC input channel pre-selected
by the SETTINGS  SYSTEM SETUP  POWER SYSTEM  FREQUENCY AND PHASE REFERENCE setting. This setting
defines a particular AC signal source to be used as the reference.
The relay will first determine if any “Phase VT” bank is indicated in the source. If it is, voltage channel VA of that bank is
used as the angle reference. Otherwise, the relay determines if any “Aux VT” bank is indicated; if it is, the auxiliary voltage
channel of that bank is used as the angle reference. If neither of the two conditions is satisfied, then two more steps of this
hierarchical procedure to determine the reference signal include “Phase CT” bank and “Ground CT” bank.
If the AC signal pre-selected by the relay upon configuration is not measurable, the phase angles are not referenced. The
phase angles are assigned as positive in the leading direction, and are presented as negative in the lagging direction, to
more closely align with power system metering conventions. This is illustrated below.

6.3 METERING 6 ACTUAL VALUES
-270o
-225o -315o
positive
angle
direction
-180o 0o
UR phase angle
reference
-135o -45o
-90o 827845A1.CDR
Figure 6–1: UR PHASE ANGLE MEASUREMENT CONVENTION
b) UR CONVENTION FOR MEASURING SYMMETRICAL COMPONENTS

The UR-series of relays calculate voltage symmetrical components for the power system phase A line-to-neutral voltage,
and symmetrical components of the currents for the power system phase A current. Owing to the above definition, phase
angle relations between the symmetrical currents and voltages stay the same irrespective of the connection of instrument
transformers. This is important for setting directional protection elements that use symmetrical voltages.
For display and oscillography purposes the phase angles of symmetrical components are referenced to a common refer-
ence as described in the previous sub-section.
WYE-CONNECTED INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS:
• ABC phase rotation: • ACB phase rotation:
6 1
V_0 = --- ( V AG + V BG + V CG )
1
V_0 = --- ( V AG + V BG + V CG )
3
3
1 2 1 2
V_1 = --- ( V AG + aV BG + a V CG ) V_1 = --- ( V AG + a V BG + aV CG )
3 3
1 2 1 2
V_2 = --- ( V AG + a V BG + aV CG ) V_2 = --- ( V AG + aV BG + a V CG )
3 3
The above equations apply to currents as well.

DELTA-CONNECTED INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS:

• ABC phase rotation: • ACB phase rotation:
V_0 = N/A V_0 = N/A

1 ∠– 30 ° 1 ∠30° 2
2
V_1 = -------------------- ( V AB + aV BC + a V CA ) V_1 = ----------------- ( V AB + a V BC + aV CA )
3 3 3 3
1 ∠ 30° 1 ∠– 30 ° 2
2
V_2 = ----------------- ( V AB + a V BC + aV CA ) V_2 = -------------------- ( V AB + aV BC + a V CA )
3 3 3 3
The zero-sequence voltage is not measurable under the Delta connection of instrument transformers and is defaulted to
zero. The table below shows an example of symmetrical components calculations for the ABC phase rotation.
Table 6–1: SYMMETRICAL COMPONENTS CALCULATION EXAMPLE
SYSTEM VOLTAGES, SEC. V * VT RELAY INPUTS, SEC. V SYMM. COMP, SEC. V
CONN.
VAG VBG VCG VAB VBC VCA F5AC F6AC F7AC V0 V1 V2
13.9 76.2 79.7 84.9 138.3 85.4 WYE 13.9 76.2 79.7 19.5 56.5 23.3
∠0° ∠–125° ∠–250° ∠–313° ∠–97° ∠–241° ∠0° ∠–125° ∠–250° ∠–192° ∠–7° ∠–187°
UNKNOWN (only V1 and V2 84.9 138.3 85.4 DELTA 84.9 138.3 85.4 N/A 56.5 23.3
can be determined) ∠0° ∠–144° ∠–288° ∠0° ∠–144° ∠–288° ∠–54° ∠–234°
* The power system voltages are phase-referenced – for simplicity – to VAG and VAB, respectively. This, however, is a
relative matter. It is important to remember that the B30 displays are always referenced as specified under SETTINGS
 SYSTEM SETUP  POWER SYSTEM  FREQUENCY AND PHASE REFERENCE.
The example above is illustrated in the following figure.
SYSTEM VOLTAGES SYMMETRICAL

COMPONENTS
UR phase angle
6
reference
1
UR phase angle
A
reference
WYE VTs
C
B
0
2
U
re R ph
fe a
re se
nc a
e ng
le
A U
1
re R ph
fe a
re se
nc a
e ng
DELTA VTs le
C
B
2
827844A1.CDR
Figure 6–2: MEASUREMENT CONVENTION FOR SYMMETRICAL COMPONENTS

6.3.3 BUS ZONE
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES  METERING  BUS  BUS ZONE 1
 BUS ZONE 1 BUS 1 DIFF Iad:

 0.000 A 0.0°
BUS 1 REST Iar:
MESSAGE
0.000 A 0.0°
BUS 1 DIFF Ibd:
MESSAGE
0.000 A 0.0°
BUS 1 REST Ibr:
MESSAGE
0.000 A 0.0°
BUS 1 DIFF Icd:
MESSAGE
0.000 A 0.0°
BUS 1 REST Icr:
MESSAGE
0.000 A 0.0°
These values display the differential and restraint currents phasors for the bus zone. The magnitudes are displayed in pri-
mary amperes (see chapter 8: Theory of operation for additional details).
6.3.4 SOURCES
a) MAIN MENU
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES  METERING  SOURCE SRC1
 SOURCE SRC 1  PHASE CURRENT

See page 6–15.
  SRC 1
 GROUND CURRENT
MESSAGE
6
See page 6–15.
 SRC 1
 PHASE VOLTAGE
 SRC 1
 AUXILIARY VOLTAGE
 SRC 1
 FREQUENCY
 SRC 1
This menu displays the metered values available for each source.
Metered values presented for each source depend on the phase and auxiliary VTs and phase and ground CTs assignments
for this particular source. For example, if no phase VT is assigned to this source, then any voltage, energy, and power val-
ues will be unavailable.

b) PHASE CURRENT
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES  METERING  SOURCE SRC 1  PHASE CURRENT
 PHASE CURRENT SRC 1 RMS Ia: 0.000

 SRC 1 b: 0.000 c: 0.000 A
SRC 1 RMS Ia:
MESSAGE
0.000 A
SRC 1 RMS Ib:
MESSAGE
0.000 A
SRC 1 RMS Ic:
MESSAGE
0.000 A
SRC 1 RMS In:
MESSAGE
0.000 A
SRC 1 PHASOR Ia:
MESSAGE
0.000 A 0.0°
SRC 1 PHASOR Ib:
MESSAGE
0.000 A 0.0°
SRC 1 PHASOR Ic:
MESSAGE
0.000 A 0.0°
SRC 1 PHASOR In:
MESSAGE
0.000 A 0.0°
SRC 1 ZERO SEQ I0:
MESSAGE
0.000 A 0.0°
SRC 1 POS SEQ I1:
MESSAGE
0.000 A 0.0°
MESSAGE
SRC 1 NEG SEQ I2:
0.000 A 0.0°
6
The metered phase current values are displayed in this menu. The "SRC 1" text will be replaced by whatever name was
programmed by the user for the associated source (see SETTINGS  SYSTEM SETUP  SIGNAL SOURCES).
c) GROUND CURRENT
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES  METERING  SOURCE SRC 1  GROUND CURRENT
 GROUND CURRENT SRC 1 RMS Ig:

 SRC 1 0.000 A
SRC 1 PHASOR Ig:
MESSAGE
0.000 A 0.0°
SRC 1 PHASOR Igd:
MESSAGE
0.000 A 0.0°
The metered ground current values are displayed in this menu. The "SRC 1" text will be replaced by whatever name was

d) PHASE VOLTAGE
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES  METERING  SOURCE SRC 1  PHASE VOLTAGE
 PHASE VOLTAGE SRC 1 RMS Vag:

 SRC 1 0.00 V
SRC 1 RMS Vbg:
MESSAGE
0.00 V
SRC 1 RMS Vcg:
MESSAGE
0.00 V
SRC 1 PHASOR Vag:
MESSAGE
0.000 V 0.0°
SRC 1 PHASOR Vbg:
MESSAGE
0.000 V 0.0°
SRC 1 PHASOR Vcg:
MESSAGE
0.000 V 0.0°
SRC 1 RMS Vab:
MESSAGE
0.00 V
SRC 1 RMS Vbc:
MESSAGE
0.00 V
SRC 1 RMS Vca:
MESSAGE
0.00 V
SRC 1 PHASOR Vab:
MESSAGE
0.000 V 0.0°
SRC 1 PHASOR Vbc:
MESSAGE
0.000 V 0.0°
6 MESSAGE
SRC 1 PHASOR Vca:
0.000 V 0.0°
SRC 1 ZERO SEQ V0:
MESSAGE
0.000 V 0.0°
SRC 1 POS SEQ V1:
MESSAGE
0.000 V 0.0°
SRC 1 NEG SEQ V2:
MESSAGE
0.000 V 0.0°
The metered phase voltage values are displayed in this menu. The "SRC 1" text will be replaced by whatever name was
e) AUXILIARY VOLTAGE
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES  METERING  SOURCE SRC 1  AUXILIARY VOLTAGE
 AUXILIARY VOLTAGE SRC 1 RMS Vx:

 SRC 1 0.00 V
SRC 1 PHASOR Vx:
MESSAGE
0.000 V 0.0°
The metered auxiliary voltage values are displayed in this menu. The "SRC 1" text will be replaced by whatever name was

f) FREQUENCY
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES  METERING  SOURCE SRC 1  FREQUENCY
 FREQUENCY SRC 1 FREQUENCY:

 SRC 1 0.00 Hz
The metered frequency values are displayed in this menu. The "SRC 1" text will be replaced by whatever name was pro-
grammed by the user for the associated source (see SETTINGS  SYSTEM SETUP  SIGNAL SOURCES).
SOURCE FREQUENCY is measured via software-implemented zero-crossing detection of an AC signal. The signal is either a
Clarke transformation of three-phase voltages or currents, auxiliary voltage, or ground current as per source configuration
(see the SYSTEM SETUP  POWER SYSTEM settings). The signal used for frequency estimation is low-pass filtered. The
final frequency measurement is passed through a validation filter that eliminates false readings due to signal distortions and
transients.
6.3.5 TRACKING FREQUENCY
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES  METERING  TRACKING FREQUENCY
 TRACKING FREQUENCY TRACKING FREQUENCY:

 60.00 Hz
The tracking frequency is displayed here. The frequency is tracked based on the selection of the reference source with the
FREQUENCY AND PHASE REFERENCE setting in the SETTINGS  SYSTEM SETUP  POWER SYSTEM menu. See the Power
System section of chapter 5 for details.
6.3.6 FLEXELEMENTS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES  METERING  FLEXELEMENTS  FLEXELEMENT 1(8)
 FLEXELEMENT 1 FLEXELEMENT 1
 OpSig: 0.000 pu
The operating signals for the FlexElements are displayed in pu values using the following definitions of the base units. 6
(Bus Diff Mag)
(Bus Rest Mag)
DCmA BASE = maximum value of the DCMA INPUT MAX setting for the two transducers configured
RTDs BASE = 100°C

6.3.7 IEC 61580 GOOSE ANALOG VALUES
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES  METERING  IEC 61850 GOOSE ANALOGS
 IEC 61850 ANALOG INPUT 1

 GOOSE ANALOGS 0.000
ANALOG INPUT 2
MESSAGE
0.000
ANALOG INPUT 3
MESSAGE
0.000
↓
ANALOG INPUT 32
MESSAGE
0.000
ture is specified as a software option at the time of ordering. See the Order Codes section of chapter 2 for
details.
The IEC 61850 GGIO3 analog input data points are displayed in this menu. The GGIO3 analog data values are received
via IEC 61850 GOOSE messages sent from other devices.
6.3.8 TRANSDUCER INPUTS AND OUTPUTS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES  METERING  TRANSDUCER I/O DCMA INPUTS  DCMA INPUT xx
 DCMA INPUT xx DCMA INPUT xx


6
0.000 mA
Actual values for each dcmA input channel that is enabled are displayed with the top line as the programmed channel ID
and the bottom line as the value followed by the programmed units.
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES  METERING  TRANSDUCER I/O RTD INPUTS  RTD INPUT xx
 RTD INPUT xx RTD INPUT xx

 -50 °C
Actual values for each RTD input channel that is enabled are displayed with the top line as the programmed channel ID and
the bottom line as the value.

6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.4 RECORDS
6.4RECORDS 6.4.1 USER-PROGRAMMABLE FAULT REPORTS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES  RECORDS  USER-PROGRAMMABLE FAULT REPORT
 USER-PROGRAMMABLE NEWEST RECORD

 FAULT REPORT NUMBER: 0
LAST CLEARED DATE:
MESSAGE
2002/8/11 14:23:57
LAST REPORT DATE:
MESSAGE
2002/10/09 08:25:27
This menu displays the user-programmable fault report actual values. See the User-Programmable Fault Report section in
chapter 5 for additional information on this feature.
6.4.2 EVENT RECORDS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES  RECORDS  EVENT RECORDS
 EVENT RECORDS EVENT: XXXX

 RESET OP(PUSHBUTTON)
↓
EVENT: 3 EVENT 3
MESSAGE
POWER ON DATE: 2000/07/14
EVENT: 2 EVENT 3
MESSAGE
POWER OFF TIME: 14:53:00.03405
EVENT: 1
MESSAGE Date and Time Stamps
EVENTS CLEARED
The event records menu shows the contextual data associated with up to the last 1024 events, listed in chronological order
from most recent to oldest. If all 1024 event records have been filled, the oldest record will be removed as a new record is 6
added. Each event record shows the event identifier/sequence number, cause, and date/time stamp associated with the
event trigger. See the COMMANDS  CLEAR RECORDS menu for clearing event records.
Only major output operands generate events, not every operand. Elements that assert output per phase, for example, log
operating phase output only without asserting the common three-phase operand event.
6.4.3 OSCILLOGRAPHY
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES  RECORDS  OSCILLOGRAPHY
 OSCILLOGRAPHY FORCE TRIGGER? Range: No, Yes

 No
NUMBER OF TRIGGERS:
MESSAGE
0
AVAILABLE RECORDS:
MESSAGE
0
CYCLES PER RECORD:
MESSAGE
0.0
LAST CLEARED DATE:
MESSAGE
2000/07/14 15:40:16
This menu allows the user to view the number of triggers involved and number of oscillography traces available. The
CYCLES PER RECORD value is calculated to account for the fixed amount of data storage for oscillography. See the Oscillog-
raphy section of chapter 5 for additional details.

6.4 RECORDS 6 ACTUAL VALUES
A trigger can be forced here at any time by setting “Yes” to the FORCE TRIGGER? command. Refer to the COMMANDS 
CLEAR RECORDS menu for information on clearing the oscillography records.

6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.5 PRODUCT INFORMATION
6.5PRODUCT INFORMATION 6.5.1 MODEL INFORMATION
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES  PRODUCT INFO  MODEL INFORMATION
 MODEL INFORMATION ORDER CODE LINE 1: Range: standard GE order code format;
 B30-E00-HCL-F8H-H6A example order code shown
SERIAL NUMBER: Range: standard GE serial number format

MESSAGE
ETHERNET MAC ADDRESS Range: standard Ethernet MAC address format

MESSAGE
000000000000
MANUFACTURING DATE: Range: YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS
MESSAGE
0
CT/ VT ADVANCED DIAG Range: Yes, No
MESSAGE
ACTIVE: No
OPERATING TIME: Range: operating time in HH:MM:SS
MESSAGE
0:00:00
LAST SETTING CHANGE: Range: YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS
MESSAGE
1970/01/01 23:11:19
The order code, serial number, Ethernet MAC address, date and time of manufacture, and operating time are shown here.
ETHERNET MAC ADDRESS — UR devices with firmware 7.0x and above have three Ethernet ports that can be used on three
networks. The MAC address displays for port 1. The MAC address for port 2 is one higher. The MAC address for port 3 is
one higher than port 2. In redundant mode, the MAC addresses for ports 2 and 3 are the same as port 2.
6.5.2 FIRMWARE REVISIONS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES  PRODUCT INFO  FIRMWARE REVISIONS
 FIRMWARE REVISIONS B30 Bus Relay Range: 0.00 to 655.35

Revision number of the application firmware.
6
 REVISION: 7.2x
MODIFICATION FILE Range: 0 to 65535 (ID of the MOD FILE)
MESSAGE Value is 0 for each standard firmware release.
NUMBER: 0
BOOT PROGRAM Range: 0.00 to 655.35
MESSAGE Revision number of the boot program firmware.
REVISION: 3.01
FRONT PANEL PROGRAM Range: 0.00 to 655.35
MESSAGE Revision number of faceplate program firmware.
REVISION: 2.01
COMPILE DATE: Range: Any valid date and time.
MESSAGE Date and time when product firmware was built.
2012/09/15 04:55:16
BOOT DATE: Range: Any valid date and time.
MESSAGE Date and time when the boot program was built.
2012/09/15 16:41:32
The shown data is illustrative only. A modification file number of 0 indicates that, currently, no modifications have been
installed.

6.5 PRODUCT INFORMATION 6 ACTUAL VALUES

7 COMMANDS AND TARGETS 7.1 COMMANDS
7 COMMANDS AND TARGETS 7.1COMMANDS 7.1.1 COMMANDS MENU
COMMANDS

 COMMANDS
MESSAGE
 VIRTUAL INPUTS
 COMMANDS
MESSAGE
 CLEAR RECORDS
 COMMANDS
MESSAGE
 SET DATE AND TIME
 COMMANDS
MESSAGE
 RELAY MAINTENANCE
 COMMANDS
MESSAGE
 SECURITY
The commands menu contains relay directives intended for operations personnel. All commands can be protected from
unauthorized access via the command password; see the Security section of chapter 5 for details. The following flash mes-
sage appears after successfully command entry:
COMMAND
EXECUTED
PATH: COMMANDS  VIRTUAL INPUTS
 COMMANDS Virt Ip 1 Range: Off, On

 VIRTUAL INPUTS Off
Virt Ip 2 Range: Off, On
7
Off
↓
Virt Ip 64 Range: Off, On

MESSAGE
Off
The states of up to 64 virtual inputs are changed here. The first line of the display indicates the ID of the virtual input. The
second line indicates the current or selected status of the virtual input. This status will be a state off (logic 0) or on (logic 1).

7.1 COMMANDS 7 COMMANDS AND TARGETS
7.1.3 CLEAR RECORDS
PATH: COMMANDS  CLEAR RECORDS
 COMMANDS CLEAR USER FAULT Range: No, Yes

 CLEAR RECORDS REPORTS? No
CLEAR EVENT RECORDS? Range: No, Yes
No
CLEAR OSCILLOGRAPHY? Range: No, Yes
No
CLEAR UNAUTHORIZED Range: No, Yes
ACCESS? No
CLEAR DIRECT I/O Range: No, Yes. Valid only for units with Direct Input/
COUNTERS? No Output module.
CLEAR TELEPROTECT Range: No, Yes

COUNTERS? No
CLEAR ALL RELAY Range: No, Yes
RECORDS? No
This menu contains commands for clearing historical data such as the event records. Data is cleared by changing a com-
mand setting to “Yes” and pressing the ENTER key. After clearing data, the command setting automatically reverts to “No”.
7.1.4 SET DATE AND TIME
PATH: COMMANDS  SET DATE AND TIME
 COMMANDS SET DATE AND TIME: (YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS)

 SET DATE AND TIME 2000/01/14 13:47:03
The date and time can be entered on the faceplate keypad. The time setting is based on the 24-hour clock. The complete
date, as a minimum, must be entered to allow execution of this command. The new time and date take effect when the
ENTER key is pressed.
When the relay is synchronizing to an external time source such as PTP, IRIG-B, or SNTP, the manually entered time is
over-written.
7 The timescale of the entered time is local time, including daylight savings time where and when applicable.
7.1.5 RELAY MAINTENANCE
PATH: COMMANDS  RELAY MAINTENANCE
 COMMANDS PERFORM LAMPTEST? Range: No, Yes

 RELAY MAINTENANCE No
UPDATE ORDER CODE? Range: No, Yes
No
REBOOT RELAY? Range: No, Yes
No
SERVICE COMMAND: Range: 0, 101
0
SAVE VOLATILE DATA? Range: No, Yes
No

7 COMMANDS AND TARGETS 7.1 COMMANDS
This menu contains commands for relay maintenance purposes. Commands for the lamp test and order code are activated
by changing a command setting to “Yes” and pressing the ENTER key. The command setting will then automatically revert
to “No”. The service command is activated by entering a numerical code and pressing the ENTER key.
The PERFORM LAMPTEST command turns on all faceplate LEDs and display pixels for a short duration. The UPDATE
ORDER CODE command causes the relay to scan the backplane for the hardware modules and update the order code to
match. If an update occurs, the following message is shown.
UPDATING...
PLEASE WAIT
There is no impact if there have been no changes to the hardware modules. When an update does not occur, the ORDER
CODE NOT UPDATED message will be shown.
The REBOOT RELAY COMMAND reboots the relay so that changes to configuration settings can take effect. In most cases, if
changes are made to the configuration settings these changes do not take effect unless the relay is rebooted.
With the CyberSentry option, the Administrator or Operator role can initiate the Reboot Relay command.
NOTE
The SERVICE COMMAND is used to perform specific B30 service actions. Presently, there is only one service action avail-
able. Code “101” is used to clear factory diagnostic information stored in the non-volatile memory. If a code other than “101”
is entered, the command will be ignored and no actions will be taken. Various self-checking diagnostics are performed in
the background while the B30 is running, and diagnostic information is stored on the non-volatile memory from time to time
based on the self-checking result. Although the diagnostic information is cleared before the B30 is shipped from the factory,
the user may want to clear the diagnostic information for themselves under certain circumstances. For example, it may be
desirable to clear diagnostic information after replacement of hardware. Once the diagnostic information is cleared, all self-
checking variables are reset to their initial state and diagnostics will restart from scratch.
SAVE VOLATILE DATA saves this data to compact flash memory prior to shutdown. This allows the saved data to be as recent
as possible instead of relying on the periodic timer to save the data.
7.1.6 SECURITY
iPATH: COMMANDS  SECURITY

 SECURITY ADMINISTRATOR Range: Yes, No
 LOGOFF: No Default: No
ENGINEER Range: Yes, No

LOGOFF: No Default: No 7
OPERATOR Range: Yes, No
LOGOFF: No Default: No
CLEAR SECURITY DATA: Range: Yes, No

Default: No
With the CyberSentry option, this setting is available to enable or disable the following commands:
• Administrator Logoff: Selecting ‘Yes’ allows the Supervisor to forcefully logoff an administrator session.
• Engineer Logoff: Selecting ‘Yes’ allows the Supervisor to forcefully logoff an engineer session.
• Operator Logoff: Selecting ‘Yes’ allows the Supervisor to forcefully logoff an operator session.
• Clear Security Data: Selecting ‘Yes’ allows the Supervisor to forcefully clear all the security logs and clears all the
operands associated with the self-tests.

7.2 TARGETS 7 COMMANDS AND TARGETS
7.2TARGETS 7.2.1 TARGETS MENU
TARGETS

PHASE TOC4 Displayed only if targets for this element are active.
MESSAGE Example shown.
OP: A B -
DIGITAL ELEMENT 48: Displayed only if targets for this element are active.
MESSAGE Example shown.
LATCHED

MESSAGE
Each B30 element with a TARGET setting has a target message that when activated by its element is displayed in
sequence with any other currently active target messages in the TARGETS menu. In the example shown, the Phase TOC4
and Digital Element 48 target settings are active and so have their targets displayed. The down arrow below the two ele-
ments indicates that there can be other active elements beyond these two.
For more information, see the description of target messages in the next section, and the Introduction to Elements section
in the Settings chapter for instructions on TARGET setting.
When no targets are active, the display reads NO TARGETS.
7.2.2 TARGET MESSAGES
When there are no active targets, the first target to become active will cause the display to immediately default to that mes-
sage. If there are active targets and the user is navigating through other messages, and when the default message timer
times out (i.e. the keypad has not been used for a determined period of time), the display will again default back to the tar-
get message.
The range of variables for the target messages is described below. Phase information will be included if applicable. If a tar-
get message status changes, the status with the highest priority will be displayed.
Table 7–1: TARGET MESSAGE PRIORITY STATUS

PRIORITY ACTIVE STATUS DESCRIPTION
7 1 OP element operated and still picked up
2 PKP element picked up and timed out
3 LATCHED element had operated but has dropped out
If a self test error is detected, a message appears indicating the cause of the error. For example UNIT NOT PROGRAMMED
indicates that the minimal relay settings have not been programmed.
7.2.3 RELAY SELF-TESTS
a) DESCRIPTION
The relay performs a number of self-test diagnostic checks to ensure device integrity. The two types of self-tests (major and
minor) are listed in the tables below. When either type of self-test error occurs, the Trouble LED Indicator will turn on and a
target message displayed. All errors record an event in the event recorder. Latched errors can be cleared by pressing the
RESET key, providing the condition is no longer present.
Major self-test errors also result in the following:
• The critical fail relay on the power supply module is de-energized.
• All other output relays are de-energized and are prevented from further operation.
• The faceplate In Service LED indicator is turned off.

7 COMMANDS AND TARGETS 7.2 TARGETS
• A RELAY OUT OF SERVICE event is recorded.
b) MAJOR SELF-TEST ERROR MESSAGES

The major self-test errors are outlined in this section.
INCOMPATIBLE H/W:
Contact Factory (xxx)
• Latched target message: Yes.
• Description of problem: One or more installed hardware modules is not compatible with the B30 order code.
• How often the test is performed: Module dependent.
• What to do: Contact the factory and supply the failure code noted in the display. The “xxx” text identifies the failed mod-
ule (for example, F8L).
EQUIPMENT MISMATCH:
with 2nd line detail
• Latched target message: No.
• Description of problem: The configuration of modules does not match the order code stored in the B30.
• How often the test is performed: On power up. Afterwards, the backplane is checked for missing cards every five sec-
onds.
• What to do: Check all modules against the order code, ensure they are inserted properly, and cycle control power. If
the problem persists, contact the factory.
FLEXLOGIC ERROR:
with 2nd line detail
• Description of problem: A FlexLogic equation is incorrect.
• How often the test is performed: The test is event driven, performed whenever FlexLogic equations are modified.
• What to do: Finish all equation editing and use self tests to debug any errors.
UNIT NOT PROGRAMMED:

Check Settings 7
• Description of problem: The PRODUCT SETUP  INSTALLATION  RELAY SETTINGS setting indicates the B30 is not pro-
grammed.
• How often the test is performed: On power up and whenever the PRODUCT SETUP  INSTALLATION  RELAY SETTINGS
setting is altered.
• What to do: Program all settings and then set PRODUCT SETUP  INSTALLATION  RELAY SETTINGS to “Programmed”
MODULE FAILURE___:
• Description of problem: Module hardware failure detected. Module Failures 1 to 11 are major. The system can reboot
for four of these, as follows.
MODULE FAILURE 06 — Event message reads SYSTEM INTEGRITRY RECOVERY 06 when a reboot was required
and otherwise MODULE FAILURE 06 when a failure was detected

c) MINOR SELF-TEST ERROR MESSAGES

Most of the minor self-test errors can be disabled. See the settings in the User-programmable Self-tests section in chapter
5.
MODULE FAILURE___:

• Description of problem: Module hardware failure detected. Module Failures 12 and 31 to 33 are minor.
For Module Failure 31, a new process card hardware is available. The process card hardware has been enhanced to
support new features, such as fast distance protection, Synchrophasors Frequency, and Rate of Change of Frequency
calculations to conform to C37.118 - 2005 standard. The new functionality leveraging the hardware is supported with
firmware revision 7.25 and above. When using an older revision of the process card with a new firmware revision
(7.25), Module Failure 31 indicates the limited functionality. If your application requires the new functionality, then new
process card hardware is required and otherwise you can continue using the existing hardware. To know the revision
of your hardware, contact the factory.
IEC 61850 DATA SET:

LLN0 GOOSE# Error

7 • Description of problem: A data item in a configurable GOOSE data set is not supported by the B30 order code.
• How often the test is performed: On power up.
• What to do: Verify that all the items in the GOOSE data set are supported by the B30. The EnerVista UR Setup soft-
ware will list the valid items. An IEC61850 client will also show which nodes are available for the B30.
IEC 61850 DATA SET:

LLN0 BR# Error
• Description of problem: A data item in a configurable report data set is not supported by the B30 order code.
• How often the test is performed: On power up.
• What to do: Verify that all the items in the configurable report data set are supported by the B30. The EnerVista UR
Setup software will list the valid items. An IEC61850 client will also show which nodes are available for the B30.
MAINTENANCE ALERT:
Replace Battery

• Description of problem: The battery is not functioning.

• How often the test is performed: The battery is monitored every five seconds. The error message displays after 60 sec-
onds if the problem persists.
• What to do: Replace the battery as outlined in the Maintenance chapter.
MAINTENANCE ALERT:
Direct I/O Ring Break

• Description of problem: Direct input and output settings are configured for a ring, but the connection is not in a ring.
• How often the test is performed: Every second.
• What to do: Check direct input and output configuration and wiring.
MAINTENANCE ALERT:
Bad IRIG-B Signal

• Description of problem: A bad IRIG-B input signal has been detected.
• How often the test is performed: Monitored whenever an IRIG-B signal is received.
• What to do: Ensure the following:
– The IRIG-B cable is properly connected.
– Proper cable functionality (that is, check for physical damage or perform a continuity test).
– The IRIG-B receiver is functioning.
– Check the input signal level (it may be less than specification).
If none of these apply, then contact the factory.
MAINTENANCE ALERT:
**Bad PTP Signal**

• Description of problem: No PTP enabled port has good PTP signal input.
• How often the test is performed: Activated when no acceptable signal is being received. 7
• What to do: Ensure the following:
– The Ethernet cable(s) are properly connected.
– At least one PTP grandmaster-capable clock is functioning.
– If strict PP is enabled, that entire network is PP compliant.
– The network is delivering PTP messages to the relay.
MAINTENANCE ALERT:
SNTP Failure

• Description of problem: The SNTP server is not responding.
• How often the test is performed: Every 10 to 60 seconds.
• What to do: Check that Ethernet cable(s) are properly connected. Check that configuration for the SNTP server corre-
sponds to the actual server settings. Check connectivity to the server (ping the server IP address.

MAINTENANCE ALERT:
4L Discrepancy

• Description of problem: A discrepancy has been detected between the actual and desired state of a latching contact
output of an installed type “4L” module.
• How often the test is performed: Upon initiation of a contact output state change.
• What to do: Verify the state of the output contact and contact the factory if the problem persists.
MAINTENANCE ALERT:
GGIO Ind xxx oscill

• Description of problem: A data item in a configurable GOOSE data set is oscillating.
• How often the test is performed: Upon scanning of each configurable GOOSE data set.
• What to do: The “xxx” text denotes the data item that has been detected as oscillating. Evaluate all logic pertaining to
this item.
DIRECT I/O FAILURE:

COMM Path Incomplete

• Description of problem: A direct device is configured but not connected.
• How often the test is performed: Every second.
• What to do: Check direct input and output configuration and wiring.
REMOTE DEVICE FAIL:

COMM Path Incomplete

• Description of problem: One or more GOOSE devices are not responding.
7 • How often the test is performed: Event driven. The test is performed when a device programmed to receive GOOSE
messages stops receiving. This can be from 1 to 60 seconds, depending on GOOSE packets.
What to do: Check GOOSE setup.
TEMP MONITOR:
OVER TEMPERATURE
• Description of problem: The ambient temperature is greater than the maximum operating temperature (+80°C).
• How often the test is performed: Every hour.
• What to do: Remove the B30 from service and install in a location that meets operating temperature standards.
UNEXPECTED RESTART:
Press “RESET” key
• Description of problem: Abnormal restart from modules being removed or inserted while the B30 is powered-up, when
there is an abnormal DC supply, or as a result of internal relay failure.
• How often the test is performed: Event driven.

• What to do: Contact the factory.
FIRST ETHERNET FAIL
SECOND ETHERNET FAIL
THIRD ETHERNET FAIL

• Description of problem: A link loss detection on an Ethernet port. The link loss is due to unplugging the cable or the
switch port being down.
• How often the test is performed:
• What to do: Check the connection.
AUTHENTICATION FAIL

• Description of problem: The number of failures threshold was exceeded.
• What to do: Wait for the lockout interval and try to authenticate again.
FIRMWARE LOCK
• Message: "Unauthorized firmware attempt"

• Description of problem: A firmware upgrade operation was attempted while the lock relay setting was enabled.
• What to do: Ask the Supervisor to unlock the relay and try again.
SETTING LOCK 7
• Message: "Unauthorized setting write"
• Description of problem: A setting write was attempted while the lock relay setting was enabled.
• What to do: Ask the Supervisor to unlock the settings and try again.
SERVER UNAVAILABLE
• Message: "An attempt to contact the Radius server has failed"

• Description of problem: The RADIUS authentication server is unavailable.
• What to do: Verify network connectivity and try again.

d) WRONG TRANSCEIVER MESSAGES

Description: The type of SFP does not match the CPU type.
T-type CPU = All ports support fiber SFPs only
Type: minor
Target: latched
Message: "WRONG TRANSCEIVER"
A webpage "SFP Transceiver Information" is provided. This page displays the type of the SFP in it. This data is to be used
with the CPU type to know the cause of the problem.
e) SFP X MODULE FAIL MESSAGES

Description: A faulty SFP or unplugging the SFP would generate this self test.
Type: minor
Target: self reset
Message: SFP MODULE x FAIL
The webpage "SFP Transceiver Information" described in the previous section applies for this self test as well. The "SFP
Module Fail" has higher priority and it suppresses the "Ethernet Fail" target message. The "SFP MODULE FAIL FUNC-
TION" setting enables/disables this self test. The target for this self test is priority-based, with the third one being the high-
est priority. For example, if all three SFP modules fail, then the third SFP target is activated. If the third SFP module failure
resolves, then the second SFP target is activated.
HARDFIBER SELF-TEST ERROR MESSAGES
In addition to those provided by the standard UR-series devices, the UR devices implement HardFiber self-tests. These are
listed below. Any abnormal diagnostic condition indicated by the LEDs or the critical failure relay also results in a self-test
message, so troubleshooting is described here. For other relays, such at the B95Plus, see that product’s instruction manual.
Equipment Mismatch Major Self-Test
Description: The number or type of installed hardware modules does not match the order code stored in the CPU. The stan-
dard UR-series Equipment Mismatch self-test is extended to cover the possible presence of a Process Card.
Severity: Protection is not available and all contact outputs and shared outputs are de-asserted.
If this message appears, check all modules against the order code. Ensure they are inserted properly, and cycle the control
power. If a module has intentionally been added or removed use the Update Order Code command to notify the relay that
the current module configuration is correct.
7 Module Failure Major Self-Test
Description: UR-series device module hardware failure detected.
If this message appears, contact the factory and supply the failure code noted in the display. Text in the message identifies
the failed module (for example, H81). If operated on a Process Card failure, the Module Fail self-test seals-in (latches) till
the UR-series device is restarted.
Process Bus Failure Major Self-test
Description: Mission critical data is not available via the process bus. An AC quantity is considered critical if both AC bank
origins and the crosschecking settings are other than none. This self-test is also initiated by an AC input discrepancy being
detected. See the description of the crosschecking setting in this manual for further information. In addition, this self-test
can be initiated by user logic responding to loss of critical contact input/output or other data using the Process Bus Failure
Operand user-programmable self-test setting. This setting is located in the Settings > Product Setup > User-Program-
mable Self Test menu.
If this message appears, first rectify any Process Bus Trouble and Brick Trouble self-test errors. Check the actual value of
the operand referenced by the Process Bus Failure Operand setting, and if “On”, determine the cause and rectify.

Should the problem persist with the foregoing all clear, the cause must be an AC input discrepancy, which is typically the
result of problems in the input signals to the Bricks, or faults in the Brick input conditioning hardware. If the error was
annunciated the first time significant signal was encountered, suspect the former cause and check the copper connections
external to the Brick. Where multiple UR-series devices have self-test errors, look for common causes.
To further isolate AC input discrepancy errors, put the relay in test-isolated mode, then one by one, temporally change an
AC bank crosschecking setting to none, until the Process Bus Failure clears. Once the problem AC bank has been identi-
fied, the values from each of the two Bricks can be examined individually by temporarily mapping each to an AC bank with
a single origin.
Process Bus Trouble Minor Self-Test
Description: Communications problems with one or more Bricks. The text of the message identifies the affected field units.
This self-test is initiated by low received signal levels at either the Brick or Process Card end, and by the sustained failure
to receive poll responses from the proper Brick.
Severity: This self-test error does not directly inhibit protection. However, the affected Brick inputs/outputs may not be avail-
able to the UR-series device.
If this message appears, check the field unit actual values. An indication of equipment mismatch means that messages are
being received from a Brick, but there is a discrepancy between the settings and the actual Brick serial number, order code,
and/or core number. Check that the correct core on the correct Brick is patched through to the correct Process Card port,
and that the field unit settings are correct. An indication of communications loss means that no messages are being
received. Check that the patching is correct, and that the Brick has power. If that is not the problem, use a professional opti-
cal fiber connector cleaning kit to clean both sides of all optical fiber connections from the Process Card through to the
affected Brick. If the problem continues after cleaning, consult the factory.
Brick Trouble Minor Self-Test
Description: Brick internal self-testing has detected a trouble internal to the Brick.
Severity: This self-test error does not directly inhibit protection. However, some or all of the affected Brick inputs/outputs
may not be available to the UR-series device.
If this message appears, check the Brick environment for over/under temperatures and the voltage of its power source. If
the ambient temperature and supply voltage are within Brick specifications, consult the factory. Troubles resulting from a
Brick output failing to respond to an output command can only be detected while the command is active, and so in this case
the target is latched. A latched target can be unlatched by pressing the faceplate reset key if the command has ended,
however the output may still be non-functional.


8 THEORY OF OPERATION 8.1 INTRODUCTION
8 THEORY OF OPERATION 8.1INTRODUCTION 8.1.1 BUS DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION
Referring to the figure below, input currents defining (through the dynamic bus replica) the bus differential zone are
received by the B30 from current transformers (CTs) associated with the power system.
Measuring Unit Unbiased Differential

Unit
1 2 3
i1 I1
Differential
Unbiased
DIFUNB
4
i2 I2
ID
Ratio Matching and Scaling
Differential 6
Current
Phasor Estimation
i3 I3
Pre-Filtering
input currents
DIFL
DIF1
5 7
IR
Restraining
DIFH
DIF2
Current
8 L
iN IN O DIFBIASED
G
I
C
Directional
DIR
Element
10
Saturation SAT
Detector
11
9 Biased Differential
Unit
836723A1.CDR
Figure 8–1: BUS DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION BLOCK DIAGRAM

The currents are digitally pre-filtered (Block 1) in order to remove the decaying DC components and other signal distortions.
The filtered input signals are brought to a common scale taking into account the transformation ratios of the connected CTs
(Block 2). See section 8.2: Dynamic Bus Replica for details.
Phasors of the differential zone currents are estimated digitally (Block 3) and the differential (Block 4) and restraining (Block
5) signals are calculated. See section 8.3: Differential Principle for details.
The magnitude of the differential signal is compared with a threshold and an appropriate flag indicating operation of the
unbiased bus differential protection is produced (Block 6).
The magnitudes of the differential and restraining currents are compared and two auxiliary flags that correspond to two spe- 8
cifically shaped portions of the differential operating characteristic (DIF1 and DIF2) are produced (blocks 7 and 8). The
characteristic is split in order to enhance performance of the relay by applying diverse security measures for each of the
regions. See section 8.3: Differential Principle for details.
The directional element (Block 10) supervises the biased differential characteristic when necessary. The current directional
comparison principle is used that processes phasors of all the input currents as well as the differential and restraining cur-
rents. See section 8.4: Directional Principle for details.
The saturation detector (Block 9) analyzes the differential and restraining currents as well as the samples of the input cur-
rents. This block sets its output flag upon detecting CT saturation. See section 8.5: Saturation Detector for details.
The output logic (Block 11) combines the differential, directional and saturation flags into the biased differential operation
flag. The applied logic enhances performance of the relay while keeping an excellent balance between dependability/speed
and security. See section 8.6: Output Logic and Examples for details.

8.2 DYNAMIC BUS REPLICA 8 THEORY OF OPERATION
8.2DYNAMIC BUS REPLICA 8.2.1 DYNAMIC BUS REPLICA MECHANISM
The B30 provides protection for one bus differential zone. The bus differential zone of the B30 allows for protecting bus
sections that include circuits that are switchable between different bus sections. Proper relay operation is achieved by
associating a status signal with each input current. This mechanism is referred to as a dynamic bus replica.
The dynamic bus zone is programmed as a number of ‘source-status’ pairs. The Sources feature of the UR is a convenient
and flexible mechanism for associating input currents and voltages with protection and control elements.
The Source mechanism permits summing physical input currents and assigning the resulting sum to a Source. It is not rec-
ommended to use this aspect of the Source mechanism for the bus differential protection. If two or more physical currents
are summed using the Source mechanism, and then used as an input to the differential protection element, the restraining
current calculated by the relay may not reflect external fault currents properly. Consequently, the relay would lack sufficient
bias during certain external faults. Also, the directional principle and saturation detector may not work properly. This is not a
limitation of the B30, but misapplication of Sources in conjunction with the biased differential principle.
Normally, each Source defining the input to the B30's bus differential zone should be associated with a single physical cur-
rent transformer bank. The only situation when two or more currents may be summed up into a single Source before enter-
ing into the bus zone is when the currents are purely load currents and cannot produce any fault current in any
circumstances.
The status signal of a given ‘source-status’ pair of the dynamic bus replica is a FlexLogic operand created to indicate
whether or not the associated circuit (current) is connected to the protected bus zone. Normally, the status signals are to be
created from input contacts wired to appropriate auxiliary contacts of switches and/or breakers.
EXAMPLE 1:
The following figure shows an example of a circuit that could be connected to two separate bus sections. It is assumed that
each section is protected individually by two B30s. Consider the B30 as protecting the Bus Section 1. The current signals
are connected to the relay using a CT bank, say F1, and assigned to a Source, say SRC 1. The status signal of the switch
is brought into the relay as an input contact, say U7a. The input contact can be used directly (say, Cont Ip 1 On), or further
processed using the FlexLogic for contact discrepancy filtering or extra security. The pair “SRC 1 - Cont Ip 1 On” defines
the input to the Bus Zone 1.
BUS SECTION 1
BUS SECTION 2
BUS ZONE 1A STATUS

U7a Cont Ip 1 On
BUS
BUS ZONE 1A SOURCE
8 FLEXLOGIC
Z1
SOURCES
F1 SRC 1
B30
836724A3.CDR
Figure 8–2: DYNAMIC BUS REPLICA MECHANISM

8 THEORY OF OPERATION 8.2 DYNAMIC BUS REPLICA
If a given circuit cannot be connected to any power system element other than the protected bus, then its status signal
should be fixed using the FlexLogic “On” constant.
8.2.2 CT RATIO MATCHING
The B30 allows for using CTs with various rated secondary currents and transformation ratios. Scaling to a common base is
performed internally by the relay. The maximum allowable ratio mismatch is 32:1. For proper setting of the differential char-
acteristic, it is imperative to understand the common base used by the relay.
The B30 scales the secondary currents to the maximum primary current among the CTs defining a given bus differential
zone: 1 per unit corresponds to the highest rated primary current.
The scaling base is selected automatically by the relay during the configuration phase and is not affected by the dynamic
aspect of the bus differential zone. This means that even though the circuit containing the CT with the maximum rated pri-
mary current is not connected to a given bus zone at a given time, the scaling base does not change.
EXAMPLE 2:
Assume the CTs installed in the circuit defining the BUS ZONE 1 have the following ratings:
• 1A CT: 600:5
• 1B CT: 500:1
• 1C CT: 600:5
• 1D CT: 1000:5
• 1E CT: 500:1
• 1F CT: 600:5
The maximum of 600, 500, 600, 1000, 500, and 600 is 1000 A which is therefore selected as the base upon configuration
of the BUS ZONE 1. 1 per unit (pu) represents 1000A primary.
Note that independently from the ratios and rated secondary currents, the per unit values of the differential current retain
their original meaning regardless of the distribution of the differential current between individual circuits. Assume, for exam-
ple, that the differential current is fed by the inputs 1A and 1B exclusively, and consider two situations:
• The 1A input supplies 1kA primary, and the 1B input supplies 2kA primary. The currents are in phase. The pu current of
the 1A source is 1000 A : (600:5) : 5A/pu = 1.67 pu. The pu current of the 1B source is 2000 A : (500:1) : 1A/pu = 4.00
pu. The pu differential current is (1000A + 2000A) : 1000A = 3.00 pu.
• The 1A input supplies 2kA primary, and the 1B input supplies 1kA primary. The currents are in phase. The pu current of
the 1A source is 2000 A : (600:5) : 5A/pu = 3.33 pu. The pu current of the 1B source is 1000 A : (500:1) : 1A/pu = 2.00
pu. The pu differential current is (1000A + 2000A) : 1000A = 3.00 pu.

8.3 DIFFERENTIAL PRINCIPLE 8 THEORY OF OPERATION
8.3DIFFERENTIAL PRINCIPLE 8.3.1 BIASED DIFFERENTIAL CHARACTERISTIC
The B30 uses a dual-slope dual-breakpoint operating characteristic as shown in the figure below.
The PICKUP setting is provided to cope with spurious differential signals when the bus carries a light load and there is no
effective restraining signal.
The first breakpoint (LOW BPNT) is provided to specify the limit of guaranteed linear operation of the CTs in the most unfa-
vorable conditions such as high residual magnetism left in the magnetic cores or multiple autoreclosure shots. This point
defines the upper limit for the application of the first slope (LOW SLOPE).
The second breakpoint (HIGH BPNT) is provided to specify the limits of operation of the CTs without any substantial satura-
tion. This point defines the lower limit for the application of the second slope (HIGH SLOPE).
|Id|
differential
OPERATE
HIGH
SLOPE
BLOCK
LOW
SLOPE Ir
PICKUP
HIGH BPNT
LOW BPNT
restraining
836720A1.CDR
Figure 8–3: BIASED OPERATING CHARACTERISTIC

The higher slope used by the B30 acts as an actual percentage bias regardless of the value of the restraining signal. This is
so because the boundary of the operating characteristic in the higher slope region is a straight line intersecting the origin of
the ‘differential - restraining’ plane. The advantage of having a constant bias specified by the HIGH SLOPE setting creates an
obstacle of a discontinuity between the first and second slopes. This is overcome by using a smooth approximation (cubic
spline) of the characteristic between the lower and higher breakpoints. Consequently, the characteristic ensures:
• a constant percentage bias of LOW SLOPE for restraining currents below the lower breakpoint of LOW BPNT,
• a constant percentage bias of HIGH SLOPE for restraining currents above the higher breakpoint of HIGH BPNT, and
• a smooth transition from the bias of LOW SLOPE to HIGH SLOPE between the breakpoints.

8 THEORY OF OPERATION 8.3 DIFFERENTIAL PRINCIPLE
8.3.2 DIFFERENTIAL AND RESTRAINING CURRENTS
The differential current is produced as a sum of the phasors of the input currents of a differential bus zone taking into
account the status signals of the currents, i.e. applying the dynamic bus replica of the protected zone. The differential cur-
rent is scaled to the maximum rated primary current as explained in section 8.1 Introduction. The scaling must be taken into
account when setting the PICKUP value of the biased differential characteristic and the HIGH SET operating point of the unbi-
ased differential function.
The restraining current is produced as a maximum of the magnitudes of the phasors of the zone input currents taking into
account the status signals of the currents, i.e. applying the dynamic bus replica of the protected bus zone. The restraining
current is scaled to the maximum rated primary current as explained in section 8.1 Introduction. The scaling must be taken
into account when setting the breakpoints of the biased differential characteristic.
The “maximum of” definition of the restraining signal biases the relay toward dependability without jeopardizing security as
the relay uses additional means to cope with CT saturation on external faults. An additional benefit of this approach is that
the restraining signal always represents a physical – compared to an “average” or “sum of” – current flowing through the CT
that is most likely to saturate during given external fault. This brings more meaning to the breakpoint settings of the operat-
ing characteristic.
The following example is provided with respect to the breakpoint settings.
EXAMPLE 3:
Proceed with the previous example (see page 8–2) and assume that taking into account the relevant factors such as prop-
erties of the CTs themselves, resistance of the leads and burden of the CTs, the following primary currents are guaranteed
to be transformed without significant saturation:
• 1A CT: 6.0 kA
• 1B CT: 7.5 kA
• 1C CT: 5.0 kA
• 1D CT: 13.0 kA
• 1E CT: 8.0 kA
• 1F CT: 9.0 kA
As having the lowest primary current guaranteeing operation without saturation, the CT associated with the 1C input is
most exposed to saturation. During an external fault on the 1C circuit, the 1C CT will carry the fault current contributed by
potentially all the remaining circuits. The fault current is higher than any contributing current, and therefore, the current of
the 1C CT will become the restraining signal for the biased differential characteristic for external faults on the 1C circuit.
Consequently, the higher breakpoint of the differential characteristic (HIGH BPNT) should be set not higher than
5000A : 1000A = 5 pu (1000A is the base unit; see page 8–2 for the example).
The same approach applies to the setting of the lower breakpoint, LOW BPNT.

8.3 DIFFERENTIAL PRINCIPLE 8 THEORY OF OPERATION
8.3.3 ENHANCED SECURITY
In order to enhance the performance of the B30, the differential characteristic is divided into two regions having diverse
operating modes as shown in following diagram.
The first region applies to comparatively low differential currents and has been introduced to deal with CT saturation on low-
current external faults. Certain distant external faults may cause CT saturation due to extremely long time constants of the
DC component or multiple autoreclosure shots. The saturation, however, is difficult to detect in such cases. Additional secu-
rity via the “directional check” is permanently applied to this region without regard to the saturation detector.
Region 2
(high differential
differential
currents)
Region 1
(low differential
currents)
restraining
836725A1.CDR
Figure 8–4: TWO REGIONS OF DIFFERENTIAL CHARACTERISTIC

The second region includes the remaining portion of the differential characteristic and applies to comparatively high differ-
ential currents. If, during an external fault, the spurious differential current is high enough so that the differential-restraining
current trajectory enters the second region, then saturation is guaranteed to be detected by the saturation detector.
The B30 operates in the 2-out-of-2 mode in the first region of the differential characteristic. Both differential and directional
principles (see sections 8.3 Differential Principle and 8.4 Directional Principle) must confirm an internal fault in order for the
biased differential element to operate.
The relay operates in the dynamic 1-out-of-2 / 2-out-of-2 mode in the second region of the differential characteristic. If the
saturation detector (see section 8.5 Saturation Detector) does not detect CT saturation, the differential protection principle
alone is capable of operating the biased differential element. If CT saturation is detected, both differential and directional
principles must confirm an internal fault in order for the biased differential element to operate.
Because of diverse operating modes in the first and second regions of the differential characteristic, the user gains double
control over the dependability and security issues. The first level includes slopes and breakpoints of the characteristic with
regard to the amount of the bias. The second level includes control over the split between the first and second regions of
the characteristic.

8 THEORY OF OPERATION 8.4 DIRECTIONAL PRINCIPLE
8.4DIRECTIONAL PRINCIPLE 8.4.1 CURRENT DIRECTIONAL PROTECTION
For better security, the B30 uses the current directional protection principle to dynamically supervise the main current differ-
ential function. The directional principle is in effect permanently for low differential currents (region 1 in the Two Regions of
Differential Characteristic figure) and is switched on dynamically for large differential currents (region 2 in the same figure)
by the saturation detector (see the Saturation Detector section) upon detecting CT saturation.
The directional principle responds to a relative direction of the fault currents. This means that a reference signal, such as
bus voltage, is not required. The directional principle declares that
• if all of the fault currents flow in one direction, the fault is internal, or
• if at least one fault current flows in an opposite direction compared with the sum of the remaining currents, the fault is
external.
The directional principle is implemented in two stages.
First, based on the magnitude of a given current, it is determined whether the current is a fault current. If so, its relative
phase relation has to be considered. The angle check must not be initiated for the load currents as the direction will be out
of the bus even during internal faults. The auxiliary comparator of this stage applies an adaptable threshold. The threshold
is a fraction of the restraining current. The current from a particular feeder is used for bus directional comparison if its mag-
nitude is greater than K × Irestraint or it is greater than 2 times its CT rating. For bus zones with two feeders, K = 0.2. For
bus zones with three to six feeders, K = 0.8 / (N – 1). For bus zones with more than six feeders, K = 0.16.
Second, for – and only for – the selected fault currents, the phase angle between a given current and the sum of all the
remaining currents is checked. The sum of all the remaining currents is the differential current less the current under con-
sideration. Therefore, for each, say the pth, current to be considered, the angle between the I P and I D – I P phasors is to be
checked.
Ideally, during external faults, the said angle is close to 180° (see below); and during internal faults - close to 0 degrees.
External Fault Conditions
⎛ Ip ⎞
imag ⎜ ⎟
⎜ ID − I p ⎟ OPERATE
⎝ ⎠
BLOCK
⎛ Ip ⎞
ID - Ip real ⎜ ⎟
Ip ⎜ ID − I p ⎟
⎝ ⎠
BLOCK
OPERATE
836726A2.CDR
Figure 8–5: DIRECTIONAL PRINCIPLE OPERATION DURING EXTERNAL FAULTS
Internal Fault Conditions
⎛ Ip ⎞
imag ⎜
⎜ ID − I p
⎝
⎟
⎟
⎠ OPERATE 8
BLOCK
⎛ Ip ⎞
ID - Ip real ⎜ ⎟
⎜ ID − I p ⎟
⎝ ⎠
Ip
BLOCK
OPERATE
836727A2.CDR
Figure 8–6: DIRECTIONAL PRINCIPLE OPERATION DURING INTERNAL FAULTS

The B30 implementation calculates the maximum angle for the considered currents and compares it against a fixed thresh-
old of 90°. The flag indicating whether the directional protection principle is satisfied is available as the FlexLogic operand
BUS 1(2) DIR A/B/C.

8.5 SATURATION DETECTOR 8 THEORY OF OPERATION
8.5SATURATION DETECTOR 8.5.1 CT SATURATION DETECTION
The saturation detector of the B30 takes advantage of the fact that any CT operates correctly for a short period of time even
under very large primary currents that would subsequently cause a very deep saturation. As a result of that, in the case of
an external fault, the differential current stays very low during the initial period of linear operation of the CTs while the
restraining signal develops rapidly. Once one or more CTs saturate, the differential current will increase. The restraining sig-
nal, however, yields by at least a few milliseconds. During internal faults, both the differential and restraining currents
develop simultaneously. This creates characteristic patterns for the differential - restraining trajectory as depicted below.
N
differential
TTER
RN
TTE
A
ULT P OPERATE
T PA
FA
AUL
RNAL
AL F
BLOCK
ERN
INTE
EXT
ERN
EXTERNAL FAULT PATT
restraining
836728A1.CDR
Figure 8–7: CT SATURATION DETECTION: INTERNAL & EXTERNAL FAULT PATTERNS

The CT saturation condition is declared by the saturation detector when the magnitude of the restraining signal becomes
larger than the higher breakpoint (HIGH BPNT) and at the same time the differential current is below the first slope (LOW
SLOPE). The said condition is of a transient nature and requires a seal-in. A special logic in the form of a “state machine” is
used for this purpose as depicted in the following figure.
As the phasor estimator introduces a delay into the measurement process, the aforementioned saturation test would fail to
detect CT saturation occurring very fast. In order to cope with very fast CT saturation, another condition is checked that
uses relations between the signals at the waveform level. The basic principle is similar to that described above. Addition-
ally, the sample-based stage of the saturation detector uses the time derivative of the restraining signal (di/dt) to better
trace the saturation pattern shown in the following figure.
The saturation detector is capable of detecting saturation occurring in approximately 3 ms from fault inception. It is worth
emphasizing that the saturation detector, although having no dedicated settings, uses the main differential characteristic for
proper operation. This must be kept in mind when setting the characteristic as its parameters must retain their original
meaning.
The operation of the saturation detector is available as the FlexLogic operand BUS 1(2) SAT A/B/C.

8 THEORY OF OPERATION 8.5 SATURATION DETECTOR
NORMAL
SAT := 0
The differential
current below the saturation
first slope for a condition
certain period of
time
EXTERNAL
FAULT
SAT := 1
The differential-
The differential restraining trajectory
characteristic out of the differential
entered characteristic for a
certain period of time
EXTERNAL
FAULT and CT
SATURATION
SAT := 1
836729A1.CDR
Figure 8–8: SATURATION DETECTOR STATE MACHINE

8.6 OUTPUT LOGIC AND EXAMPLES 8 THEORY OF OPERATION
8.6OUTPUT LOGIC AND EXAMPLES 8.6.1 OUTPUT LOGIC
The biased differential characteristic uses the output logic shown below.
For low differential signals, the biased differential element operates on the 2-out-of-2 basis utilizing both the differential and
directional principles.
For high differential signals, the directional principle is included only if demanded by the saturation detector (dynamic 1-out-
of-2 / 2-out-of-2 mode). Typically, the directional principle is slower, and by avoiding using it when possible, the B30 gains
speed.
The dynamic inclusion/exclusion of the directional principle is not applied for the low differential currents but is included per-
manently only because it is comparatively difficult to reliably detect CT saturation occurring when the currents are small, i.e.
saturation due to extremely long time constant of the DC component or due to multiple autoreclosure actions.
DIFL
AND
DIR biased bus

OR differential
OR DIFBIASED
SAT
AND
DIFH 836730A1.CDR
Figure 8–9: OUTPUT LOGIC OF BIASED DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION
8.6.2 INTERNAL AND EXTERNAL FAULT EXAMPLE
Two examples of relay operation are presented: an external fault with heavy CT saturation and an internal fault.
The protected bus includes six circuits connected to CT terminals F1, F5, M1, M5, U1 and U5, respectively. The circuits F1,
F5, M1, M5 and U5 are capable of feeding some fault current; the U1 circuit supplies a load. The F1, F5 and U5 circuits are
significantly stronger than the F5 and M1 connections.
The M5 circuit contains the weakest (most prone to saturation) CT of the bus.
Figure 8-10 presents the bus currents and the most important logic signals for the case of an external fault. Despite very
fast and severe CT saturation, the B30 remains stable.
Figure 8-11 presents the same signals but for the case of an internal fault. The B30 trips in 10 ms (fast form-C output con-
tact).

GE Multilin
200
150
100 ~1 ms
50
0
8 THEORY OF OPERATION
-50
-100
-150
-200
0.06 0.07 0.08 0.09 0.1 0.11 0.12
The bus differential The CT saturation flag

protection element is set safely before the
picks up due to heavy pickup flag
CT saturation

Despite heavy CT
saturation the
Figure 8–10: EXTERNAL FAULT EXAMPLE

external fault current
is seen in the
opposite direction
The element
The
does not
directional flag
maloperate
is not set
836735A1.CDR
8-11
8
8
8-12
The bus differential

protection element
picks up
The saturation
flag is not set - no
directional
decision required

Figure 8–11: INTERNAL FAULT EXAMPLE
All the fault currents
are seen in one
direction
The
The element directional
operates in flag is set
10ms
836736A1.CDR
8 THEORY OF OPERATION
GE Multilin
9 APPLICATION OF SETTINGS 9.1 OVERVIEW
9 APPLICATION OF SETTINGS 9.1OVERVIEW 9.1.1 INTRODUCTION
The B30 is a high-speed low-impedance microprocessor-based current differential relay for power system busbars. The
relay is limited to six circuits. The B30 incorporates the dynamic bus replica mechanism that allows for protecting buses
with circuits interconnectable between various sections but with single current measurement points.
As explained in the Theory of Operation chapter, the relay uses a dual-slope dual-breakpoint differential characteristic with
the restraint signal created as the maximum among the magnitudes of the circuit connected to the protected bus. The low-
impedance operating principle is enhanced by the use of the Saturation Detector and a current directional principle.
This chapter provides an example of setting calculations for a sample bus. The selected example includes various bus con-
figurations to clarify a number of typical situations. Both the bus configuration and numerical data used are not meant to
reflect any specific utility practice or design standards.
It is also assumed that the CTs have been selected without considering a B30 application, but the B30 settings are to be
calculated for proper relay application. The CT data used in this example are kept to a minimum and in a generic form. The
CT data does not reflect any particular notation or national standards.
The analysis provided in this chapter has been performed with the following goals:
• The limits of linear operation of the CTs considering zero remanent flux have been determined in order to select the
high breakpoint settings of the biased differential characteristic.
• The limits of linear operation of the CTs considering a remanent flux of 80% have been determined in order to select
the low breakpoint settings of the biased differential characteristic.
• Saturation of the CTs has been analyzed in order to select the higher slope of the biased differential characteristic and
the high set differential overcurrent setting.
The analysis tools and safety margins applied are examples only and do not reflect any particular protection philosophy.
Typically, for the CT saturation related calculations, it is sufficient to consider the weakest (most prone to saturation) CT
connected to the bus and the total bus fault current combined with the longest time constant among all the circuits con-
nected to the bus. This chapter provides more detailed analysis (see the Slopes and High Set Threshold section) in order to
illustrate the idea of using setting groups to enhance the B30 performance when the bus configuration changes (see the
Enhancing Relay Performance section).
9.1.2 SAMPLE BUSBAR AND DATA
The following figure shows a double bus arrangement with North and South buses. This station has five circuits (C-1
through C-5) and a tiebreaker (B-7). Circuit C-1 is connected to the North bus; circuits C-2, C-3 and C-4 can be routed to
either bus via switches S-1 through S-6; circuit C-5 can be connected to either bus via breakers B-5 and B-6.
C-3 C-5
NORTH BUS
B-1 S-1 S-3 S-5

B-5
CT-1 CT-7
CT-2 B-2 CT-3 B-3 CT-4 B-4 CT-5
B-7
CT-6
9
CT-8
B-6
S-2 S-4 S-6
SOUTH BUS
C-1 C-2 C-4
836731A2.CDR
Figure 9–1: SAMPLE BUS CONFIGURATION

9.1 OVERVIEW 9 APPLICATION OF SETTINGS
The following table shows the assumed short circuit contributions of the connected circuits and their DC time constants.
Table 9–1: BASIC FAULT DATA OF THE CONNECTED CIRCUIT

CIRCUIT IFAULT (KA) TDC (MS)
C-1 0.00 N/A
C-2 0.00 N/A
C-3 6.00 5
C-4 5.00 30
C-5 3.00 40
The basic CT data is presented in the table below. The magnetizing characteristics of the three different types of CTs used
in this example are shown in the following figure.
Table 9–2: BASIC CT DATA

CT RATIO VSAT (V) RCTSEC (Ω) LEADS (M)
CT-1 600:5 144 0.34 210
CT-2 600:5 144 0.34 205
CT-3 1200:5 288 0.64 200
CT-4 1000:5 240 0.54 200
CT-5, CT-6 1000:5 240 0.54 180
CT-7, CT-8 1200:5 288 0.64 200
836732A4.CDR
9 Figure 9–2: APPROXIMATE CT MAGNETIZING CHARACTERISTICS

9 APPLICATION OF SETTINGS 9.2 ZONING AND DYNAMIC BUS REPLICA
9.2ZONING AND DYNAMIC BUS REPLICA 9.2.1 DESCRIPTION
The figures in this section show the adopted protection zoning for the two bus sections.
To provide the bus differential zoning as shown in the figures, eight currents need to be measured. Consequently, the pro-
tection cannot be accomplished by one B30. However, as each bus has not more than six connections, two B30s can be
used.
9.2.2 NORTH BUS ZONE
With reference to the following diagram, the North bus differential zone is bounded by the following CTs: CT-1, CT-2 (if S-1
closed), CT-3 (if S-3 closed), CT-4 (if S-5 closed), CT-5 and CT-8. The North bus protection should operate the following
breakers: B-1, B-2 (if S-1 closed), B-3 (if S-3 closed), B-4 (if S-5 closed), B-5 and B-7.
Consequently, the B30 for the North bus should be wired and configured as follows:
• CT-1 currents should be configured as SRC 1 and used as the source 1A of the bus differential zone 1 together with
the FlexLogic “On” constant for the status.
• CT-2 currents should be configured as SRC 2 and used as the source 1B of the bus differential zone 1 together with
the status of the S-1 switch.
• CT-3 currents should be configured as SRC 3 and used as the source 1C of the bus differential zone 1 together with
• CT-4 currents should be configured as SRC 4 and used as the source 1D of the bus differential zone 1 together with
• CT-5 currents should be configured as SRC 5 and used as the source 1E of the bus differential zone 1 together with
• CT-8 currents should be configured as SRC 6 and used as the source 1F of the bus differential zone 1 together with
• The trip signal should be routed directly to the B-1, B-5 and B-7 breakers while it should be supervised by the status of
S-1, S-3 and S-5 for the B-2, B-3 and B-4 breakers, respectively.
Depending on utility practice, extra security may be required with respect to the status signals. This may include bringing in
both the normally opened and normally closed contacts of a switch as well as status of a peer switch (S-1 and S-2, for
example). If this is the case, the required security filtering should be accomplished using FlexLogic and a single (final) sta-
tus operand should be indicated for the status signal when setting the bus differential zone.
C-3 C-5
NORTH BUS
B-1 S-1 S-3 S-5

B-5
CT-1 CT-2 B-2 CT-4 B-4 CT-7

CT-3 B-3
CT-5
B-7
CT-6
CT-8
9
B-6
S-2 S-4 S-6
SOUTH BUS
C-1 C-2 C-4
836733A1.CDR
Figure 9–3: NORTH BUS ZONE

9.2 ZONING AND DYNAMIC BUS REPLICA 9 APPLICATION OF SETTINGS
9.2.3 SOUTH BUS ZONE
The South bus differential zone is bounded by the following CTs: CT-2 (if S-2 closed), CT-3 (if S-4 closed), CT-4 (if S-6
closed), CT-6 and CT-7. The South bus protection should operate the following breakers: B-2 (if S-2 closed), B-3 (if S-4
closed), B-4 (if S-6 closed), B-6 and B-7.
Consequently, the second B30 for the South bus should be wired and configured as follows:
• CT-2 currents should be configured as SRC 1 and used as the source 1A of the bus differential zone 1 together with
• CT-3 currents should be configured as SRC 2 and used as the source 1B of the bus differential zone 1 together with
• CT-4 currents should be configured as SRC 3 and used as the source 1C of the bus differential zone 1 together with
• CT-6 currents should be configured as SRC 4 and used as the source 1D of the bus differential zone 1 together with
• CT-7 currents should be configured as SRC 5 and used as the source 1E of the bus differential zone 1 together with
• The trip signal should be routed directly to the B-6 and B-7 breakers while it should be supervised by the status of S-2,
S-4 and S-6 for the B-2, B-3 and B-4 breakers, respectively.
C-3 C-5
NORTH BUS
B-1 S-1 S-3 S-5

B-5
CT-1 CT-2 B-2 CT-4 B-4 CT-7

CT-3 B-3
CT-5
B-7
CT-6
CT-8
B-6
S-2 S-4 S-6
SOUTH BUS
C-1 C-2 C-4
836734A1.CDR
Figure 9–4: SOUTH BUS ZONE

9 APPLICATION OF SETTINGS 9.3 BIASED CHARACTERISTIC BREAKPOINTS
9.3BIASED CHARACTERISTIC BREAKPOINTS 9.3.1 DESCRIPTION
The limits of linear operation of the CTs need to be found in order to set the breakpoints of the biased differential character-
istic. The settings for the North and South bus relays are analyzed simultaneously from this point on as the two differential
zones share some CTs and the results of computations apply to both the relays.
For microprocessor-based relays it is justified to assume the burden of the CTs to be resistive. The limits of the linear oper-
ation of a CT, neglecting the effects of the DC component and residual magnetism, can be approximated as follows:
V sat
I max = ---------- (EQ 9.1)
Rs
where: Imax is the maximum secondary current transformed without saturation (AC component only, no
residual magnetism),
Rs is the total burden resistance,
Vsat is the saturation voltage of the CT.
The total burden resistance depends on both the fault type and connection of the CTs. For single-line-to-ground faults and
CTs connected in Wye, the burden resistance is calculated as:
R s = 2R lead + R CTsec + R relay (EQ 9.2)
where: Rlead is the lead resistance (one way, hence the factor of 2)
RCTsec is the secondary CT resistance
Rrelay is the relay input resistance.
Assuming 0.003 Ω/m lead resistance and approximating the B30 input resistance for the 5A input CTs as 0.2 VA / (5 A)2 or
0.008 Ω, the limits of the linear operation of the CTs have been calculated and presented in the Limits of Linear Operations
of the CTs table.
9.3.2 HIGH BREAKPOINT
As an external fault may happen on any of the connected circuits, threatening saturation of any of the CTs, the minimum
value of the linear operation limit should be taken as the HIGH BPNT setting. The limit of linear operation that neglects both
the residual magnetism and the effect of the DC component should be the base for setting the higher breakpoint of the
biased differential characteristic.
The B30 requires the breakpoints to be entered as ‘pu’ values. The relay uses the largest primary current of the CTs bound-
ing the bus differential zone as a base for the pu settings. Both the North and South buses have the largest primary current
of the CTs of 1200 A (CT-7 and CT-8), thus upon configuration of the relays, 1200 A is automatically selected as base for
the pu quantities. With a given Ibase current, the limits of linear operation have been recalculated to pu values as follows:
I max ( secondary )
I max ( pu ) = ----------------------------------- × CT ratio (EQ 9.3)
I base
Table 9–3: LIMITS OF LINEAR OPERATIONS OF THE CTS

CT RS (Ω) IMAX (A SEC) IMAX (PU) IMAX (PU)
(NO REMANENCE) (80% REMANENCE)
CT-1 1.61 89.55 8.96 1.79
CT-2 1.58 91.25 9.13 1.83
CT-3 1.85 155.84 31.17 6.23
CT-4 1.75 137.30 22.88 4.58 9
CT-5, CT-6 1.63 147.42 24.57 4.91
CT-7, CT-8 1.85 155.84 31.17 6.23
The third and fourth columns of the above table have the following significance.

9.3 BIASED CHARACTERISTIC BREAKPOINTS 9 APPLICATION OF SETTINGS
If an external fault occurs on circuit C-1, CT-1 will carry the fault current. As the fault current is higher than any of the other
currents, the current supplied by CT-1 will be used as the restraint signal. CT-1 is guaranteed to saturate if the current
exceeds 89.55 A secondary, or 17.9 times its rated current, or 8.96 pu of the bus differential zone. Consequently, consider-
ing CT-1, the value of 8.96 pu should be used as the higher breakpoint of the characteristic.
Considering CTs that could be connected (depending on the positions of the switches) to the North bus, the HIGH BPNT for
the North bus zone should be selected as the minimum of (8.96, 9.13, 31.17, 22.88, 24.57, 31.17), or 8.96 pu.
Considering CTs that could be connected (depending on the positions of the switches) to the South bus, the HIGH BPNT for
the South bus zone should be selected as the minimum of (9.13, 31.17, 22.88, 24.57, 31.17), or 9.13 pu.
9.3.3 LOW BREAKPOINT
The DC component in the primary current may saturate a given CT even with the AC current below the suggested value of
the higher breakpoint. The relay copes with this threat by using the Saturation Detector and applying a 2-out-of-2 operating
principle upon detecting saturation.
The residual magnetism (remanence) left in the core of a CT can limit the linear operation of the CT significantly. It is justi-
fied to assume that the residual flux could be as high as 80% of the saturation level leaving only 20% to accommodate the
flux component created by the primary current. This phenomenon may be reflected by reducing the saturation voltage in
the calculations by the factor of 100% / 20%, or 5. This, in turn, is equivalent to reducing the limit of linear operation by the
factor of 5, hence the last column in the Limits of Linear Operations of the CTs table.
For example, if the residual flux left in the core of the CT-1 is as high as 80% of its saturation level, the CT will saturate at
17.92 A secondary, or 3.58 times its rated current, or at 1.79 pu of the bus differential zone.
The reduced limit of linear operation should be used as the lower breakpoint of the biased differential characteristic (the
LOW BPNT setting). In this way the interval spanning from the lower to higher breakpoints covers the indistinct area of possi-
ble saturation due to the random factor of residual magnetism.
The LOW BPNT should be set at 1.79 pu for the North bus zone, and at 1.83 pu for the South bus zone.
A combination of very high residual magnetism and a DC component with a long time constant may saturate a given CT
even with the AC current below the suggested value of the lower breakpoint. The relay copes with this threat by using a 2-
out-of-2 operating mode for low differential currents.

9 APPLICATION OF SETTINGS 9.4 SLOPES AND HIGH SET THRESHOLD
9.4SLOPES AND HIGH SET THRESHOLD 9.4.1 DESCRIPTION
To set the higher slope and threshold of the high set (unbiased) differential operation, external faults must be analyzed.
Consider an external fault for the North bus relay. It is justified to assume bus configurations that give maximum stress to
the maximum number of CTs. For this purpose we will assume the tie breaker, B-7 closed; all the circuitry capable of sup-
plying the fault current to be in service; moreover, they are connected to the South bus in order to analyze the CT-7 and CT-
8 carrying the fault current.
9.4.2 EXTERNAL FAULTS ON C-1
The following table presents the results of analysis of an external fault on circuit C-1 (C-1 is connected to the North bus; C-
3, C-4, and C-5 are connected to the South bus).
For security reasons, it has been assumed that the fault current being a sum of several contributors (C-3, C-4, and C-5 in
this case) has a time constant of the DC component of the maximum among the time constants of the contributors. The
fault current is supplied from circuits C-3, C-4, and C-5 connected to the South bus, thus through CT-3, CT-4, and CT-6.
The current passes through the tie breaker threatening saturation of CT-7 and CT-8.
By comparing the secondary currents (column 3 in the table below) with the limits of linear operation for the CTs (column 4
in the Limits of Linear Operations of the CTs table earlier), it is concluded that CT-1 will saturate during this fault, producing
a spurious differential signal for the North bus zone differential protection. All other CTs do not saturate due to the AC com-
ponents. The amount of the spurious differential current (magnetizing current of CT-1) can be calculated using the burden,
magnetizing characteristic and primary current of the noted CT by solving the following equations:
2 2
I relay = I s – I magnetizing
(EQ 9.4)
I relay × R s = V magnetizing
For Is = 116.67 A, Rs = 1.61 Ω and the characteristic shown earlier in the Approximate CT Magnetizing Characteristics fig-
ure, the solution is Imagnetizing = 29.73 A, Irelay = 112.8 A.
The magnetizing current of the saturated CT-1 appears to the differential element protecting the North bus as a differential
signal of 29.73 A, while the restraint signal is the maximum of the bus currents (112.8 A in this case). Consequently, the
higher slope of the characteristic should not be lower than 29.73 A / 112.8 A, or 26%, and the pickup of the high set differ-
ential elements should not be lower than 29.73 A, or 2.97 pu.
The CTs identified as operating in the linear mode as far as the AC components are considered can, however, saturate due
to the DC components. Saturation does not occur if V sat > I s × R s × ( 1 + ω × T dc ) , where ω is radian system frequency
(2πf).
If the above condition is violated, CT time-to-saturate for a full DC saturation can be estimated as follows. The CT satura-
tion factor Ks capability curve is defined as
ω × T1 × T2
- –t ⁄ T1 – e – t ⁄ T2 – sin ( ωt )
K S = ------------------------ (EQ 9.5)
T1 – T2 e
where
T1 is a primary system time constant
T2 is the secondary CT time constant, which can be estimated by the following equation:
Vs × N
T 2 = ------------------------------ (EQ 9.6)
20 × ( ω × R s )
where 9
N is the CT ratio
Vs is the CT voltage at 10 A exciting current obtained from the CT excitation curve
CT limiting factor KS_LIM is defined by the following equation:
Vs × N
K S…LIM = -------------
- (EQ 9.7)
Ip × Rs

9.4 SLOPES AND HIGH SET THRESHOLD 9 APPLICATION OF SETTINGS
where
Ip is the maximum CT primary fault current
The figure illustrates the Ks CT saturation capability curve and KS_LIM limiting factor.
Figure 9–5: DETERMINING CT TIME-TO-SATURATE

CT time-to-saturate (tSAT) is determined as a projection of the intersection of the Ks CT saturation capability curve and
KS_LIM CT limiting factor, as shown in the figure.
Practically, CT time-to-saturate can be obtained by either of the following methods:
• Method 1 — Download the "CT Time-to-Saturate Estimator.xlsm" spreadsheet from the GE Multilin web site, located
under Support > Support Documents > B30 Bus Differential System. Enter the required system and CT parameters to
obtain the CT time-to-saturate.
• Method 2
•Define several time instances t1, t2...tn
•Use equation 9-5 to calculate the corresponding KS1, KS2…KSn
•Calculate KS_LIM using equation 9-7
•Compare each KS value with KS_LIM. If KS at the given time instance ti is less than KS_LIM, it means that true tSAT is
greater than ti, otherwise it is less than ti
Columns 6 and 7 of the table below summarize the DC saturation threat for the fault on C-1. CT-4, CT-6, CT-7, and CT-8
may saturate due to the DC components and may generate spurious differential signal for both the North and South bus
relays depending on the bus configuration. The saturation will not occur before 5.02 ms and will be detected by the Satura-
tion Detector.
The transient saturation of the CTs due to the DC component may be neglected when setting the slopes of the characteris-
tic as the saturation is detected and the relay uses the current directional principle. It must, however, be taken into account
when setting the high set (unbiased) differential element.
9 Table 9–4: EXTERNAL FAULT CALCULATIONS ON C-1

CT IFAULT (KA) IFAULT (A SEC) TDC (MS) AC DC TSAT (MS)
SATURATION SATURATION
CT-1 14.0 116.67 40 Yes Yes 5.02
CT-2 0 0.00 N/A No No N/A
CT-3 6.0 25.00 5 No No N/A
CT-4 5.0 25.00 30 No Yes 26.37

9 APPLICATION OF SETTINGS 9.4 SLOPES AND HIGH SET THRESHOLD
Table 9–4: EXTERNAL FAULT CALCULATIONS ON C-1

CT-6 3.0 15.00 40 No Yes 61.50
CT-7, CT-8 14.0 58.33 40 No Yes 9.44
3, C-4 and C-5 are connected to the South bus).
By comparing the secondary currents (column 3 in the following table) with the limits of linear operation for the CTs (column
4 shown earlier in the Limits of Linear Operations of the CTs table) it is concluded that CT-2 will saturate during this fault
producing a spurious differential signal. All other CTs do not saturate due to the AC components. The amount of the spuri-
ous differential current (magnetizing current of CT-2) can be calculated using the burden, magnetizing characteristic, and
the primary current of the said CT.
For Is = 116.67 A, Rs = 1.23 Ω and the characteristic shown earlier in the Approximate CT Magnetizing Characteristics fig-
ure, the solution is Imagnetizing = 27.69 A, Irelay = 113.3 A.
The magnetizing current of the saturated CT-2 appears to the differential element protecting the North bus as a differential
signal of 27.69 A, while the restraint signal is the maximum of the bus currents (113.3 A). Consequently, the higher slope of
the characteristic should not be lower than 27.69 A / 113.3 A, or 24% and the pickup of the high-set differential elements
should not be lower than 27.69 A, or 2.77 pu.
Columns 6 and 7 of the following table summarize the DC saturation threat for the fault on C-2. CT-4, CT-6, CT-7, and CT-
8 can saturate due to the DC components and can generate spurious differential signal for both the North and South bus
relays depending on the bus configuration. The saturation does not occur before 5.06 ms and is detected by the Saturation
Detector.

CT-2 14.0 116.67 40 Yes Yes 5.06
CT-3 6.0 25.00 5 No No N/A
CT-4 5.0 25.00 30 No Yes 26.37
CT-6 3.0 15.00 40 No Yes 61.50
CT-7, CT-8 14.0 58.33 40 No Yes 9.44
4 and C-5 are connected to the South bus).
in the Limits of Linear Operations of the CTs table shown earlier), it is concluded that none of the CTs saturate due to the
AC currents during this fault.
Columns 6 and 7 of the table below summarize the DC saturation threat for the fault on C-3. CT-3, CT-4, CT-6, CT-7, and
CT-8 can saturate due to the DC components and can generate a spurious differential signal for both the North and South
bus relays depending on the bus configuration. The saturation does not occur before 23.68 ms and is detected by the Sat-
9
uration Detector.
Table 9–6: CALCULATIONS FOR THE EXTERNAL FAULTS ON C-3


9.4 SLOPES AND HIGH SET THRESHOLD 9 APPLICATION OF SETTINGS
Table 9–6: CALCULATIONS FOR THE EXTERNAL FAULTS ON C-3

CT-3 8.0 33.33 40 No Yes 23.68
CT-4 5.0 25.00 30 No Yes 26.37
CT-6 3.0 15.00 40 No Yes 61.50
CT-7, CT-8 8.0 33.33 40 No Yes 23.68
8 can saturate due to the DC components and can generate a spurious differential signal for both the North and South bus
relays depending on the bus configuration. The saturation does not occur before 10.03 ms and is detected by the Satura-
tion Detector.

CT-3 6.0 25.00 5 No No N/A
CT-4 9.0 45.00 40 No Yes 10.03
CT-6 3.0 15.00 40 No Yes 61.50
CT-7, CT-8 9.0 37.50 40 No Yes 22.23
8 can saturate due to the DC components and can generate a spurious differential signal for both the North and South bus
relays depending on the bus configuration. The saturation does not occur before 9.45 ms and is detected by the Saturation
Detector.

9 CT IFAULT (KA) IFAULT (A SEC) TDC (MS) AC
SATURATION
DC
SATURATION
TSAT (MS)

CT-3 6.0 25.00 5 No No N/A
CT-4 5.0 25.00 30 No Yes 26.37
CT-5 11.0 55.00 30 No Yes 9.45
CT-7, CT-8 11.0 45.83 30 No Yes 11.54

9 APPLICATION OF SETTINGS 9.5 BUS DIFFERENTIAL SETTINGS
9.5BUS DIFFERENTIAL SETTINGS 9.5.1 DESCRIPTION
Taking the previous analysis from this chapter into account, the settings have been calculated as shown in below.
Table 9–9: NORTH BUS DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION SETTINGS

SETTING VALUE COMMENTS
PICKUP 0.1 pu Default value. Lower or higher values may be entered upon security/dependability
requirements. The pu value is for the base of 1200A. This means the actual pickup is
120 A primary.
LOW SLOPE 25% Default value. Lower or higher values may be entered upon security/dependability
requirements.
LOW BPNT 1.79 pu None of the CTs will saturate for ac currents below 1.79 pu even with 80% remanence.
The dc component, however, combined with the remanence may saturate some CTs
even for currents below 1.79 pu. The B30 copes with saturation using the current
directional principle.
HIGH SLOPE 60% Default value. Lower or higher values may be entered upon security/dependability
requirements. The value of 60% ensures that the differential characteristic alone
(without the directional principle) will work correctly under ac saturation of the CTs
(26% of spurious differential during the fault on C-1 saturating CT-1).
HIGH BPNT 8.96 None of the CTs will saturate for ac currents below 8.96 pu. The dc component,
however, may saturate some CTs even for currents below 8.96 pu. The B30 copes with
saturation using the current directional principle.
HIGH SET 5.94 The maximum spurious differential current is 2.97 pu. Due to limited accuracy of
analysis and the effect of dc saturation a security factor of 2 has been adopted. The
highest internal fault current is 14kA, or 11.67 pu giving a good chance to clear a
number of faults by the unbiased differential operation.
Table 9–10: SOUTH BUS DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION SETTINGS

SETTING VALUE COMMENTS
PICKUP 0.1 pu Default value. Lower or higher values may be entered upon security/dependability
requirements. The pu value is for the base of 1200A. This means the actual pickup is
120 A primary.
LOW SLOPE 25% Default value. Lower or higher values may be entered upon security/dependability
requirements.
LOW BPNT 1.83 pu None of the CTs will saturate for ac currents below 1.83 pu even with 80% remanence.
The dc component, however, combined with the remanence may saturate some CTs
even for currents below 1.83 pu. The B30 copes with saturation using the current
directional principle.
HIGH SLOPE 60% Default value. Lower or higher values may be entered upon security/dependability
requirements. The value of 60% ensures that the differential characteristic alone
(without the directional principle) will work correctly under ac saturation of the CTs
(24% of spurious differential during the fault on C-2 saturating CT-2).
HIGH BPNT 9.13 pu None of the CTs will saturate for ac currents below 9.13 pu. The dc component,
however, may saturate some CTs even for currents below 9.13 pu. The B30 copes with
saturation using the current directional principle.
HIGH SET 5.54 The maximum spurious differential current is 2.77 pu. Due to limited accuracy of
analysis and the effect of dc saturation a security factor of 2 has been adopted. The
highest internal fault current is 14kA, or 11.67 pu giving a good chance to clear a
number of faults by the unbiased differential operation.

9.6 ENHANCING RELAY PERFORMANCE 9 APPLICATION OF SETTINGS
9.6ENHANCING RELAY PERFORMANCE 9.6.1 USING SETTING GROUPS
In the example of the South bus, CT-2 is the weakest (most prone to saturation) CT dictating values of some settings. How-
ever, CT-2 may not be a part of the South bus protection zone if the S-2 switch is opened. As the position of the switch must
be provided for the dynamic bus replica, the status of the switch may be re-used to control the setting groups and apply
more sensitive settings if the weakest CT is not part of the bus zone at a given time. For example, if the S-2 switch is
opened while the S-6 switch is closed, the CT-4 becomes the weakest CT connected to the South bus. The higher break-
point (HIGH BPNT) could be increased to 22.88 pu (fourth column of the Limits of Linear Operations of the CTs table). The
lower breakpoint (LOW BPNT) could be increased to 4.58 pu (fifth column of the Limits of Linear Operations of the CTs table).
The higher slope (HIGH SLOPE) could be decreased as no AC saturation is possible for the South bus CTs (see the external
fault calculation tables for each circuit).
The concept could be implemented by using:
• FlexLogic to process the status signals in order to identify the weakest CT.
• Setting Groups to switch dynamically from one setting group to another (adaptive settings).
This approach may be extended even further for buses that do not require the dynamic bus replica mechanism. This could
include approximation of the total bus fault current using positions of all switches and breakers and optimizing the settings
depending on the amount of stress imposed on the CTs in any particular bus configuration.

10 MAINTENANCE 10.1 MODULES
10 MAINTENANCE 10.1 MODULES 10.1.1 REPLACE A MODULE
Withdraw or insert a module only when control power has been removed from the unit, and
WARNING be sure to insert only the correct module type into a slot, else personal injury, damage to the
unit or connected equipment, or undesired operation can result.
To avoid damage to the equipment, use proper electrostatic discharge protection (for example, a
NOTICE static strap) when coming in contact with modules while the relay is energized.
The relay, being modular in design, allows for the withdrawal and insertion of modules. Modules must only be replaced with
like modules in their original factory configured slots.
The enhanced faceplate can be opened to the left, once the thumb screw has been removed, as shown below. This allows
for easy accessibility of the modules for withdrawal. The new wide-angle hinge assembly in the enhanced front panel opens
completely and allows easy access to all modules in the B30.
842812A1.CDR
Figure 10–1: UR MODULE WITHDRAWAL AND INSERTION (ENHANCED FACEPLATE)

The standard faceplate can be opened to the left, once the sliding latch on the right side has been pushed up, as shown
below. This allows for easy accessibility of the modules for withdrawal.
Figure 10–2: UR MODULE WITHDRAWAL AND INSERTION (STANDARD FACEPLATE)
10

10.1 MODULES 10 MAINTENANCE
To properly remove a module, the ejector/inserter clips, located at the top and bottom of each module, must be pulled
simultaneously. Before performing this action, control power must be removed from the relay. Record the original loca-
tion of the module to ensure that the same or replacement module is inserted into the correct slot. While modules with cur-
rent input provide automatic shorting of external CT circuits, for CT/VT modules it is recommended to short/isolate external
circuits accordingly for maximum safety.
To properly insert a module, ensure that the correct module type is inserted into the correct slot position. The ejector/
inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module must be in the disengaged position as the module is
smoothly inserted into the slot. Once the clips have cleared the raised edge of the chassis, engage the clips simultaneously.
When the clips have locked into position, the module will be fully inserted.
CPU connections must be individually disconnected from the module before the module can be removed from the
chassis.
NOTE
The new CT/VT modules can only be used with new CPUs; similarly, old CT/VT modules can only be used with old
CPUs. In the event that there is a mismatch between the CPU and CT/VT module, the relay does not function and
NOTE a DSP ERROR or HARDWARE MISMATCH error displays.
10

10 MAINTENANCE 10.2 BATTERIES
10.2 BATTERIES 10.2.1 REPLACE BATTERY
A battery powers the real time clock on startup of the device.

When required, the battery can be replaced. The power supply module contains the battery. The older type is the RH/RL
power supply, while the newer type is the SH/SL power supply. To determine which procedure to use, check the power sup-
ply module or use the photographs here.
a) REPLACE BATTERY FOR RH/RL POWER SUPPLY
The power supply module contains the battery.
To avoid injury, ensure that the unit has been powered off for a minimum of three minutes
CAUTION before replacing the battery.
Risk of fire if battery is replaced with incorrect type or polarity.
To replace the battery:
1. Turn off the power to the unit.
2. Wait a minimum of three minutes to ensure that there is no power to the battery.
3. As outlined in the previous section, open the unit by sliding up the plastic latch on the right side of the front panel
(standard front panel) or unscrewing the panel (enhanced front panel).
4. For the standard front panel, it needs to be removed in order to access the power supply module, which is typically in
the first slot on the left side and blocked by the hinge of the front panel. To remove the front panel, unscrew the bracket
on the front left side of the unit.
5. Simultaneously pull the ejector clips at the top and bottom of the power supply module and remove the module.
6. Unscrew the screw that attaches the metal cover to the module.
7. Slide the metal cover away from the clips about 1 cm (1/4 inch) and remove the cover.
8. Unclip the black plastic holder that keeps the battery in place. The plastic clips into the socket at the bottom on both
sides. Use a flat-head screwdriver if you cannot unclip the plastic with your fingers.
9. Observe the + and - polarity of the battery and replace it with the same polarity as marked on the battery holder.
Replace the battery with the identical make and model. For example, do not use a rechargeable battery.
Figure 10–3: BATTERY LOCATION ON RH/RL POWER SUPPLY MODULE
10. Reinstall the battery clip and the metal cover, and reinsert the power supply module into the unit.
11. Power on the unit.
12. Dispose of the old battery as outlined in the next section.
10

10.2 BATTERIES 10 MAINTENANCE
b) REPLACE BATTERY FOR SH/SL POWER SUPPLY

The power supply module contains the battery.
To avoid injury, ensure that the unit has been powered off for a minimum of three minutes
CAUTION before replacing the battery.
Risk of fire if battery is replaced with incorrect type or polarity.
To replace the battery:
13. Turn off the power to the unit.
14. Wait a minimum of three minutes to ensure that there is no power to the battery.
15. As outlined in the previous section, open the unit by sliding up the plastic latch on the right side of the front panel
(standard front panel) or unscrewing the panel (enhanced front panel).
16. For the standard front panel, it needs to be removed in order to access the power supply module, which is typically in
the first slot on the left side and blocked by the hinge of the front panel. To remove the front panel, unscrew the bracket
on the left side of the unit.
17. Remove the power supply module by simultaneously pulling the ejector clips at the top and bottom of the module and
sliding it out.
18. Unscrew all four screws (not three) that attach the metal cover to the module. The fourth screw is at the back end of
the module, on the opposite side from the clips, beside the white electronics part (see figure).
19. Slide the metal cover away from the clips about 0.5 cm (1/8 inch) and remove the cover.
20. Unclip the black plastic holder that keeps the battery in place. The plastic clips into the socket at the bottom on both
sides—pull the plastic away from the battery. Use a flat-head screwdriver if you cannot unclip the plastic with your
fingers.
21. Replace the battery with the identical make and model. For example, do not use a rechargeable battery. Observe the +
and - polarity of the battery and replace it with the same polarity as marked on the battery holder.
Figure 10–4: BATTERY LOCATION ON SH/SL POWER SUPPLY MODULE
22. Reinstall the battery holder and the metal cover, and reinsert the power supply module into the unit.
23. Power on the unit.
24. Dispose of the old battery as outlined in the next section.
10

10.2.2 DISPOSE OF BATTERY
EN Battery Disposal
This product contains a battery that cannot be disposed of as unsorted municipal waste in the European Union. See the product
documentation for specific battery information. The battery is marked with this symbol, which may include lettering to indicate cadmium
(Cd), lead (Pb), or mercury (Hg). For proper recycling return the battery to your supplier or to a designated collection point. For more
information see: www.recyclethis.info.
CS Nakládání s bateriemi
Tento produkt obsahuje baterie, které nemohou být zneškodněny v Evropské unii jako netříděný komunální odpadu. Viz dokumentace k
produktu pro informace pro konkrétní baterie. Baterie je označena tímto symbolem, který může zahrnovat i uvedena písmena, kadmium
(Cd), olovo (Pb), nebo rtuť (Hg). Pro správnou recyklaci baterií vraťte svémudodavateli nebo na určeném sběrném místě. Pro více informací
viz: www.recyclethis.info.
DA Batteri affald
Dette produkt indeholder et batteri som ikke kan bortskaffes sammen med almindeligt husholdningsaffald i Europa. Se
produktinformation for specifikke informationer om batteriet. Batteriet er forsynet med indgraveret symboler for hvad batteriet
indeholder: kadmium (Cd), bly (Pb) og kviksølv (Hg). Europæiske brugere af elektrisk udstyr skal aflevere kasserede produkter til genbrug
eller til leverandøren. Yderligere oplysninger findes på webstedet www.recyclethis.info.
DE Entsorgung von Batterien
Dieses Produkt beinhaltet eine Batterie, die nicht als unsortierter städtischer Abfall in der europäischen Union entsorgt werden darf.
Beachten Sie die spezifischen Batterie-informationen in der Produktdokumentation. Die Batterie ist mit diesem Symbol gekennzeichnet,
welches auch Hinweise auf möglicherweise enthaltene Stoffe wie Kadmium (Cd), Blei (Pb) oder Quecksilber (Hektogramm) darstellt. Für
die korrekte Wiederverwertung bringen Sie diese Batterie zu Ihrem lokalen Lieferanten zurück oder entsorgen Sie das Produkt an den
gekennzeichneten Sammelstellen. Weitere Informationen hierzu finden Sie auf der folgenden Website: www.recyclethis.info.
EL Απόρριψη μπαταριών
Αυτό το προϊόν περιέχει μια μπαταρία που δεν πρέπει να απορρίπτεται σε δημόσια συστήματα απόρριψης στην Ευρωπαϊκή
Κοινότητα. ∆είτε την τεκμηρίωση του προϊόντος για συγκεκριμένες πληροφορίες που αφορούν τη μπαταρία. Η μπαταρία είναι φέρει
σήμανση με αυτό το σύμβολο, το οποίο μπορεί να περιλαμβάνει γράμματα για να δηλώσουν το κάδμιο (Cd), τον μόλυβδο (Pb), ή τον
υδράργυρο (Hg). Για την κατάλληλη ανακύκλωση επιστρέψτε την μπαταρία στον προμηθευτή σας ή σε καθορισμένο σημείο συλλογής.
Για περισσότερες πληροφορίες δείτε: www.recyclethis.info.
ES Eliminacion de baterias
Este producto contiene una batería que no se pueda eliminar como basura normal sin clasificar en la Unión Europea. Examine la
documentación del producto para la información específica de la batería. La batería se marca con este símbolo, que puede incluir siglas
para indicar el cadmio (Cd), el plomo (Pb), o el mercurio (Hg ). Para el reciclaje apropiado, devuelva este producto a su distribuidor ó
deshágase de él en los puntos de reciclaje designados. Para mas información : wwwrecyclethis.info.
ET Patareide kõrvaldamine
Käesolev toode sisaldab patareisid, mida Euroopa Liidus ei tohi kõrvaldada sorteerimata olmejäätmetena. Andmeid patareide kohta
vaadake toote dokumentatsioonist. Patareid on märgistatud käesoleva sümboliga, millel võib olla kaadmiumi (Cd), pliid (Pb) või
elavhõbedat (Hg) tähistavad tähed. Nõuetekohaseks ringlusse võtmiseks tagastage patarei tarnijale või kindlaksmääratud
vastuvõtupunkti. Lisainformatsiooni saab Internetist aadressil: www.recyclethis.info.
FI Paristoje ja akkujen hävittäminen
Tuote sisältää pariston, jota ei saa hävittää Euroopan Unionin alueella talousjätteen mukana. Tarkista tuoteselosteesta tuotteen tiedot.
Paristo on merkitty tällä symbolilla ja saattaa sisältää cadmiumia (Cd), lyijyä (Pb) tai elohopeaa (Hg). Oikean kierrätystavan
varmistamiseksi palauta tuote paikalliselle jälleenmyyjälle tai palauta se paristojen keräyspisteeseen. Lisätietoja sivuilla
www.recyclethis.info.
FR Élimination des piles
Ce produit contient une batterie qui ne peuvent être éliminés comme déchets municipaux non triés dans l'Union européenne. Voir la
documentation du produit au niveau des renseignements sur la pile. La batterie est marqué de ce symbole, qui comprennent les
indications cadmium (Cd), plomb (Pb), ou mercure (Hg). Pour le recyclage, retourner la batterie à votre fournisseur ou à un point de
collecte. Pour plus d'informations, voir: www.recyclethis.info.
HU Akkumulátor hulladék kezelése
Ezen termék akkumulátort tartalmaz, amely az Európai Unión belül csak a kijelölt módon és helyen dobható ki. A terméken illetve a
mellékelt ismertetőn olvasható a kadmium (Cd), ólom (Pb) vagy higany (Hg) tartalomra utaló betűjelzés. A hulladék akkumulátor leadható 10
a termék forgalmazójánál új akkumulátor vásárlásakor, vagy a kijelölt elektronikai hulladékudvarokban. További információ a
www.recyclethis.info oldalon.

10.2 BATTERIES 10 MAINTENANCE
IT Smaltimento batterie
Questo prodotto contiene una batteria che non può essere smaltita nei comuni contenitori per lo smaltimento rifiuti, nell' Unione
Europea. Controllate la documentazione del prodotto per le informazioni specifiche sulla batteria. La batteria è contrassegnata con
questo simbolo e può includere alcuni caratteri ad indicare la presenza di cadmio (Cd), piombo (Pb) oppure mercurio (Hg). Per il corretto
smaltimento, potete restituirli al vostro fornitore locale, oppure rivolgervi e consegnarli presso i centri di raccolta preposti. Per maggiori
informazioni vedere: ww.recyclethis.info.
LT Baterijų šalinimas
Šios įrangos sudėtyje yra baterijų, kurias draudžiama šalinti Europos Sąjungos viešose nerūšiuotų atliekų šalinimo sistemose. Informaciją
apie baterijas galite rasti įrangos techninėje dokumentacijoje. Baterijos žymimos šiuo simboliu, papildomai gali būti nurodoma kad
baterijų sudėtyje yra kadmio (Cd), švino (Pb) ar gyvsidabrio (Hg). Eksploatavimui nebetinkamas baterijas pristatykite į tam skirtas
surinkimo vietas arba grąžinkite jas tiesioginiam tiekėjui, kad jos būtų tinkamai utilizuotos. Daugiau informacijos rasite šioje interneto
svetainėje: www.recyclethis.info.
LV Bateriju likvidēšana
Šis produkts satur bateriju vai akumulatoru, kuru nedrīkst izmest Eiropas Savienībā esošajās sadzīves atkritumu sistēmās. Sk. produkta
dokumentācijā, kur ir norādīta konkrēta informācija par bateriju vai akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora marķējumā ir šis simbols,
kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda kadmiju (Cd), svinu (Pb) vai dzīvsudrabu (Hg). Pēc ekspluatācijas laika beigām baterijas vai akumulatori
jānodod piegādātājam vai specializētā bateriju savākšanas vietā. Sīkāku informāciju var iegūt vietnē: www.recyclethis.info.
NL Verwijderen van baterijen
Dit product bevat een batterij welke niet kan verwijdert worden via de gemeentelijke huisvuilscheiding in de Europese Gemeenschap.
Gelieve de product documentatie te controleren voor specifieke batterij informatie. De batterijen met deze label kunnen volgende
indictaies bevatten cadium (Cd), lood (Pb) of kwik (Hg). Voor correcte vorm van kringloop, geef je de producten terug aan jou locale
leverancier of geef het af aan een gespecialiseerde verzamelpunt. Meer informatie vindt u op de volgende website: www.recyclethis.info.
NO Retur av batteri
Dette produkt inneholder et batteri som ikke kan kastes med usortert kommunalt søppel i den Europeiske Unionen. Se
produktdokumentasjonen for spesifikk batteriinformasjon. Batteriet er merket med dette symbolet som kan inkludere symboler for å
indikere at kadmium (Cd), bly (Pb), eller kvikksølv (Hg) forekommer. Returner batteriet til leverandøren din eller til et dedikert
oppsamlingspunkt for korrekt gjenvinning. For mer informasjon se: www.recyclethis.info.
PL Pozbywanie się zużytych baterii
Ten produkt zawiera baterie, które w Unii Europejskiej mogą być usuwane tylko jako posegregowane odpady komunalne. Dokładne
informacje dotyczące użytych baterii znajdują się w dokumentacji produktu. Baterie oznaczone tym symbolem mogą zawierać
dodatkowe oznaczenia literowe wskazujące na zawartość kadmu (Cd), ołowiu (Pb) lub rtęci (Hg). Dla zapewnienia właściwej utylizacji,
należy zwrócić baterie do dostawcy albo do wyznaczonego punktu zbiórki. Więcej informacji można znaleźć na stronie internetowej
www.recyclethis.info.
PT Eliminação de Baterias
Este produto contêm uma bateria que não pode ser considerado lixo municipal na União Europeia. Consulte a documentação do
produto para obter informação específica da bateria. A bateria é identificada por meio de este símbolo, que pode incluir a rotulação
para indicar o cádmio (Cd), chumbo (Pb), ou o mercúrio (hg). Para uma reciclagem apropriada envie a bateria para o seu fornecedor ou
para um ponto de recolha designado. Para mais informação veja: www.recyclethis.info.
RU Утилизация батарей
Согласно европейской директиве об отходах электрического и электронного оборудования, продукты, содержащие батареи,
нельзя утилизировать как обычные отходы на территории ЕС. Более подробную информацию вы найдете в документации к
продукту. На этом символе могут присутствовать буквы, которые означают, что батарея собержит кадмий (Cd), свинец (Pb) или ртуть
(Hg). Для надлежащей утилизации по окончании срока эксплуатации пользователь должен возвратить батареи локальному
поставщику или сдать в специальный пункт приема. Подробности можно найти на веб-сайте: www.recyclethis.info.
SK Zaobchádzanie s batériami
Tento produkt obsahuje batériu, s ktorou sa v Európskej únii nesmie nakladať ako s netriedeným komunálnym odpadom. Dokumentácia
k produktu obsahuje špecifické informácie o batérii. Batéria je označená týmto symbolom, ktorý môže obsahovať písmená na označenie
kadmia (Cd), olova (Pb), alebo ortuti (Hg). Na správnu recykláciu vráťte batériu vášmu lokálnemu dodávateľovi alebo na určené zberné
miesto. Pre viac informácii pozrite: www.recyclethis.info.
SL Odlaganje baterij
Ta izdelek vsebuje baterijo, ki je v Evropski uniji ni dovoljeno odstranjevati kot nesortiran komunalni odpadek. Za posebne informacije o
bateriji glejte dokumentacijo izdelka. Baterija je označena s tem simbolom, ki lahko vključuje napise, ki označujejo kadmij (Cd), svinec (Pb)
ali živo srebro (Hg). Za ustrezno recikliranje baterijo vrnite dobavitelju ali jo odstranite na določenem zbirališču. Za več informacij obiščite
spletno stran: www.recyclethis.info.
SV Kassering av batteri
Denna produkt innehåller ett batteri som inte får kastas i allmänna sophanteringssytem inom den europeiska unionen. Se
10 produktdokumentationen för specifik batteriinformation. Batteriet är märkt med denna symbol, vilket kan innebära att det innehåller
kadmium (Cd), bly (Pb) eller kvicksilver (Hg). För korrekt återvinning skall batteriet returneras till leverantören eller till en därför avsedd
deponering. För mer information, se: www.recyclethis.info.

TR Pil Geri Dönüşümü

Bu ürün Avrupa Birliği genel atık sistemlerine atılmaması gereken pil içermektedir. Daha detaylı pil bilgisi için ürünün kataloğunu
inceleyiniz. Bu sembolle işaretlenmiş piller Kadmiyum(Cd), Kurşun(Pb) ya da Civa(Hg) içerebilir. Doğru geri dönüşüm için ürünü yerel
tedarikçinize geri veriniz ya da özel işaretlenmiş toplama noktlarına atınız. Daha fazla bilgi için: www.recyclethis.info.
Global Contacts
North America 905-294-6222
Latin America +55 11 3614 1700
Europe, Middle East, Africa +(34) 94 485 88 00
Asia +86-21-2401-3208
India +91 80 41314617
From GE Part Number 1604-0021-A1, GE Publication Number GEK-113574
10

10.3 UNINSTALL AND CLEAR FILES AND DATA 10 MAINTENANCE
10.3UNINSTALL AND CLEAR FILES AND DATA 10.3.1 UNINSTALL AND CLEAR FILES AND DATA
The unit can be decommissioned by turning off power to the unit and disconnecting the wires to it.
Files can be cleared after uninstalling the EnerVista software or UR device, for example to comply with data security regu-
lations.
On the computer, settings files can identified by the .urs extension. To clear the current settings file, create a default set-
tings file, write it to the relay, then delete all other .urs files. For the existing installation, upgrading the firmware overwrites
the flash memory. Other files can be in standard formats, such as COMTRADE or .csv.
You cannot erase directly the flash memory, but all records and settings in that memory can be deleted. Do this using the
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  CLEAR RELAY RECORDS command.
10

10 MAINTENANCE 10.4 REPAIRS
10.4REPAIRS 10.4.1 REPAIRS
The battery and modules inside the case can be replaced without return of the device to the factory. The firmware and soft-
ware can be upgraded without return of the device to the factory.
Fuses in the power supply module are not field-replaceable.
For issues not solved by troubleshooting, the process to return the device to the factory for repair is as follows:
• Contact a GE Grid Solutions Technical Support Center. Contact information is found in the first chapter.
• Obtain a Return Materials Authorization (RMA) number from the Technical Support Center.
• Verify that the RMA and Commercial Invoice received have the correct information.
• Tightly pack the unit in a box with bubble wrap, foam material, or styrofoam inserts or packaging peanuts to cushion
the item(s). You may also use double boxing whereby you place the box in a larger box that contains at least 5 cm of
cushioning material.
• Ship the unit by courier or freight forwarder, along with the Commercial Invoice and RMA, to the factory.
GE GRID SOLUTIONS
650 MARKLAND STREET
MARKHAM, ONTARIO
CANADA L6C 0M1
ATTN: SERVICE DEPT.
RMA# : ______________
Customers are responsible for shipping costs to the factory, regardless of whether the unit is under warranty.
• Fax a copy of the shipping information to the GE Grid Solutions service department in Canada at +1 905 927 5098.
Use the detailed return procedure outlined at
https://www.gegridsolutions.com/multilin/support/ret_proc.htm
The current warranty and return information are outlined at
https://www.gegridsolutions.com/multilin/warranty.htm
10

10.5 STORAGE 10 MAINTENANCE
10.5STORAGE 10.5.1 STORAGE
Store the unit indoors in a cool, dry place. If possible, store in the original packaging. Follow the storage temperature range
outlined in the Specifications.
To avoid deterioration of electrolytic capacitors, power up units that are stored in a de-energized
NOTICE state once per year, for one hour continuously.
10

10 MAINTENANCE 10.6 DISPOSAL
10.6DISPOSAL 10.6.1 DISPOSAL
Other than the battery, there are no special requirements for disposal of the unit at the end its service life. For customers
located in the European Union, dispose of the battery as outlined earlier. To prevent non-intended use of the unit, remove
the modules as outlined earlier, dismantle the unit, and recycle the metal when possible.
10

10.6 DISPOSAL 10 MAINTENANCE
10

APPENDIX A A.1 PARAMETER LISTS
AppendicesAPPENDIX A FlexAnalog and FlexInteger ParametersA.1Parameter Lists A.1.1 FLEXANALOG ITEMS
A FlexAnalog parameter is an analog parameter.

A
FlexAnalog items are also viewable in a web browser. Enter the IP address of the UR, access the Device Information
Menu option, then the FlexAnalog Parameter Listing option. Entries displayed online depend on order code.
Table A–1: FLEXANALOG DATA ITEMS (Sheet 1 of 13)

ADDRESS FLEXANALOG NAME UNITS DESCRIPTION
5824 Field RTD 1 Value --- Field RTD 1 value
5832 Field TDR 1 Value --- Field TDR 1 value
6144 SRC 1 Ia RMS Amps Source 1 phase A current RMS
6146 SRC 1 Ib RMS Amps Source 1 phase B current RMS
6148 SRC 1 Ic RMS Amps Source 1 phase C current RMS
6150 SRC 1 In RMS Amps Source 1 neutral current RMS
6152 SRC 1 Ia Mag Amps Source 1 phase A current magnitude
6154 SRC 1 Ia Angle Degrees Source 1 phase A current angle
6155 SRC 1 Ib Mag Amps Source 1 phase B current magnitude
6157 SRC 1 Ib Angle Degrees Source 1 phase B current angle
6158 SRC 1 Ic Mag Amps Source 1 phase C current magnitude
6160 SRC 1 Ic Angle Degrees Source 1 phase C current angle
6161 SRC 1 In Mag Amps Source 1 neutral current magnitude
6163 SRC 1 In Angle Degrees Source 1 neutral current angle
6164 SRC 1 Ig RMS Amps Source 1 ground current RMS
6166 SRC 1 Ig Mag Amps Source 1 ground current magnitude
6168 SRC 1 Ig Angle Degrees Source 1 ground current angle
6169 SRC 1 I_0 Mag Amps Source 1 zero-sequence current magnitude
6171 SRC 1 I_0 Angle Degrees Source 1 zero-sequence current angle
6172 SRC 1 I_1 Mag Amps Source 1 positive-sequence current magnitude
6174 SRC 1 I_1 Angle Degrees Source 1 positive-sequence current angle
6175 SRC 1 I_2 Mag Amps Source 1 negative-sequence current magnitude
6177 SRC 1 I_2 Angle Degrees Source 1 negative-sequence current angle
6178 SRC 1 Igd Mag Amps Source 1 differential ground current magnitude
6180 SRC 1 Igd Angle Degrees Source 1 differential ground current angle
GE Multilin B30 Bus Differential System A-1

A.1 PARAMETER LISTS APPENDIX A
A ADDRESS
6212
FLEXANALOG NAME
SRC 2 Ic RMS
UNITS
Amps
DESCRIPTION
Source 2 phase C current RMS
A-2 B30 Bus Differential System GE Multilin


ADDRESS FLEXANALOG NAME UNITS DESCRIPTION A

A ADDRESS
6472
FLEXANALOG NAME
SRC 6 Ia Mag
UNITS
Amps
DESCRIPTION
Source 6 phase A current magnitude
6656 SRC 1 Vag RMS Volts Source 1 phase AG voltage RMS
6658 SRC 1 Vbg RMS Volts Source 1 phase BG voltage RMS
6660 SRC 1 Vcg RMS Volts Source 1 phase CG voltage RMS
6662 SRC 1 Vag Mag Volts Source 1 phase AG voltage magnitude
6664 SRC 1 Vag Angle Degrees Source 1 phase AG voltage angle
6665 SRC 1 Vbg Mag Volts Source 1 phase BG voltage magnitude
6667 SRC 1 Vbg Angle Degrees Source 1 phase BG voltage angle
6668 SRC 1 Vcg Mag Volts Source 1 phase CG voltage magnitude
6670 SRC 1 Vcg Angle Degrees Source 1 phase CG voltage angle
6671 SRC 1 Vab RMS Volts Source 1 phase AB voltage RMS
6673 SRC 1 Vbc RMS Volts Source 1 phase BC voltage RMS
6675 SRC 1 Vca RMS Volts Source 1 phase CA voltage RMS
6677 SRC 1 Vab Mag Volts Source 1 phase AB voltage magnitude
6679 SRC 1 Vab Angle Degrees Source 1 phase AB voltage angle
6680 SRC 1 Vbc Mag Volts Source 1 phase BC voltage magnitude
6682 SRC 1 Vbc Angle Degrees Source 1 phase BC voltage angle
6683 SRC 1 Vca Mag Volts Source 1 phase CA voltage magnitude
6685 SRC 1 Vca Angle Degrees Source 1 phase CA voltage angle
6686 SRC 1 Vx RMS Volts Source 1 auxiliary voltage RMS
6688 SRC 1 Vx Mag Volts Source 1 auxiliary voltage magnitude
6690 SRC 1 Vx Angle Degrees Source 1 auxiliary voltage angle
6691 SRC 1 V_0 Mag Volts Source 1 zero-sequence voltage magnitude
6693 SRC 1 V_0 Angle Degrees Source 1 zero-sequence voltage angle
6694 SRC 1 V_1 Mag Volts Source 1 positive-sequence voltage magnitude
6696 SRC 1 V_1 Angle Degrees Source 1 positive-sequence voltage angle
6697 SRC 1 V_2 Mag Volts Source 1 negative-sequence voltage magnitude
6699 SRC 1 V_2 Angle Degrees Source 1 negative-sequence voltage angle



A ADDRESS
6819
FLEXANALOG NAME
SRC 3 V_0 Mag
UNITS
Volts
DESCRIPTION
Source 3 zero-sequence voltage magnitude


7168 SRC 1 P Watts Source 1 three-phase real power
7170 SRC 1 Pa Watts Source 1 phase A real power
7172 SRC 1 Pb Watts Source 1 phase B real power
7174 SRC 1 Pc Watts Source 1 phase C real power
7176 SRC 1 Q Vars Source 1 three-phase reactive power
7178 SRC 1 Qa Vars Source 1 phase A reactive power
7180 SRC 1 Qb Vars Source 1 phase B reactive power

A ADDRESS
7182
FLEXANALOG NAME
SRC 1 Qc
UNITS
Vars
DESCRIPTION
Source 1 phase C reactive power
7184 SRC 1 S VA Source 1 three-phase apparent power
7186 SRC 1 Sa VA Source 1 phase A apparent power
7188 SRC 1 Sb VA Source 1 phase B apparent power
7190 SRC 1 Sc VA Source 1 phase C apparent power
7192 SRC 1 PF --- Source 1 three-phase power factor
7193 SRC 1 Phase A PF --- Source 1 phase A power factor
7194 SRC 1 Phase B PF --- Source 1 phase B power factor
7195 SRC 1 Phase C PF --- Source 1 phase C power factor
7214 SRC 2 Qc Vars Source 2 phase C reactive power


7424 SRC 1 Pos Watthour kWh Source 1 positive Watthour
7426 SRC 1 Neg Watthour Wh Source 1 negative Watthour
7428 SRC 1 Pos varh varh Source 1 positive varhour
7430 SRC 1 Neg varh varh Source 1 negative varhour

A ADDRESS
7442
FLEXANALOG NAME
SRC 2 Neg Watthour
UNITS
Wh
DESCRIPTION
Source 2 negative Watthour
7458 SRC 3 Neg Watthour kWh Source 3 negative Watthour
7472 SRC 4 Pos Watthour Wh Source 4 positive Watthour
7552 SRC 1 Frequency Hz Source 1 frequency
9472 Bus 1 Diff A Mag Amps Bus differential current phase A magnitude
9474 Bus 1 Diff A Ang Degrees Bus differential current phase A angle
9475 Bus 1 Diff B Mag Amps Bus differential current phase B magnitude
9477 Bus 1 Diff B Ang Degrees Bus differential current phase B angle
9478 Bus 1 Diff C Mag Amps Bus differential current phase C magnitude
9480 Bus 1 Diff C Ang Degrees Bus differential current phase C angle
9481 Bus 1 Rest A Mag Amps Bus restraint current phase A magnitude
9483 Bus 1 Rest A Ang Degrees Bus restraint current phase A angle
9484 Bus 1 Rest B Mag Amps Bus restraint current phase B magnitude
9486 Bus 1 Rest B Ang Degrees Bus restraint current phase B angle
9487 Bus 1 Rest C Mag Amps Bus restraint current phase C magnitude
9489 Bus 1 Rest C Ang Degrees Bus restraint current phase C angle
9493 Bus Max CT Primary Amps Bus maximum CT primary
9504 Bus 2 Diff A Mag Amps Bus differential IA magnitude
9506 Bus 2 Diff A Ang Degrees Bus differential IA angle
9507 Bus 2 Diff B Mag Amps Bus differential IB magnitude
9509 Bus 2 Diff B Ang Degrees Bus differential IB angle
9510 Bus 2 Diff C Mag Amps Bus differential IC magnitude
9512 Bus 2 Diff C Ang Degrees Bus differential IC angle
9513 Bus 2 Rest A Mag Amps Bus restraint IA magnitude
9515 Bus 2 Rest A Ang Degrees Bus restraint IA angle
9516 Bus 2 Rest B Mag Amps Bus restraint IB magnitude


9518 Bus 2 Rest B Ang Degrees Bus restraint IB angle
9519 Bus 2 Rest C Mag Amps Bus restraint IC magnitude
9521 Bus 2 Rest C Ang Degrees Bus restraint IC angle
9525 Bus 2 Max CT Primary Amps Bus maximum CT primary
12306 Oscill Num Triggers --- Oscillography number of triggers
13504 DCmA Ip 1 mA DCmA input 1 actual value
13552 RTD Ip 1 --- RTD input 1 actual value

A ADDRESS
13570
FLEXANALOG NAME
RTD Ip 19
UNITS
---
DESCRIPTION
RTD input 19 actual value
13600 Ohm Inputs 1 Value Ohms Ohm inputs 1 value
13601 Ohm Inputs 2 Value Ohms Ohm inputs 2 value
14189 PTP–IRIG-B Delta ns PTP time minus IRIG-B time
24432 Communications Group --- Groups communications group
24447 Active Setting Group --- Current setting group
32768 Tracking Frequency Hz Tracking frequency
39168 FlexElement 1 Value --- FlexElement 1 actual value
45584 GOOSE Analog In 1 --- IEC 61850 GOOSE analog input 1


63616 Bus 1 M_Id A --- Bus M_Id A
63618 Bus 1 M_Id B --- Bus M_Id B
63620 Bus 1 M_Id C --- Bus M_Id C
63622 Bus 1 M_Ir A --- Bus M_Ir A
63624 Bus 1 M_Ir B --- Bus M_Ir B
63626 Bus 1 M_Ir C --- Bus M_Ir C
63628 Bus 1 d_Ir A --- Bus d_Ir A
63630 Bus 1 d_Ir B --- Bus d_Ir B
63632 Bus 1 d_Ir C --- Bus d_Ir C

A.1.2 FLEXINTEGER ITEMS
A FlexInteger items are also viewable in a web browser. In the browser, enter the IP address of the UR, access the Device
Information Menu option, then the FlexInteger Parameter Listing option.
Table A–2: FLEXINTEGER DATA ITEMS
ADDRESS FLEXINTEGER NAME UNITS DESCRIPTION
9968 GOOSE UInt Input 1 --- IEC61850 GOOSE UInteger input 1

APPENDIX B B.1 MODBUS RTU PROTOCOL
APPENDIX B MODBUS COMMUNICATIONSB.1MODBUS RTU PROTOCOL B.1.1 INTRODUCTION
The UR series supports several communications protocols to allow connection to equipment such as personal computers,
remote terminal units (RTUs), supervisory control and data acquisition (SCADA) masters, and programmable logic control-
lers. The Modicon Modbus protocol is the most basic protocol supported by the UR. Modbus RTU is available via the
RS232 and RS485 serial links, and Modbus TCP/IP is available over Ethernet. The following description is intended primar-
ily for users who want to develop their own master communication drivers. Note that:
• The UR always acts as a slave device, meaning that it never initiates communications. It listens and responds to B
requests issued by a master computer.
• A subset of Modbus RTU and Modbus TCP/IP protocol format is supported that allows extensive monitoring, program-
ming, and control functions using read and write register commands.
B.1.2 PHYSICAL LAYER
Each data byte is transmitted in an asynchronous format consisting of 1 start bit, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, and possibly 1 parity
bit. This produces a 10 or 11 bit data frame. This can be important for transmission through modems at high bit rates (11 bit
data frames are not supported by many modems at baud rates greater than 300).
The faceplate RS232 port is intended for local use and is fixed at 19200 bit/s baud and even parity. The rear terminal
RS485 port can be set for baud rates of 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 14400, 19200, 28800, 33600, 38400, 57600, or
115200 bps, and even, odd, and no parity options are available. See the Communications section of chapter 5 for details.
The Modbus TCP/IP protocol is available on each of the rear Ethernet ports. These ports are 100Base-FX.
B.1.3 DATA LINK LAYER
Modbus RTU communications takes place in packets that are groups of asynchronously framed byte data. The master
transmits a packet to the slave and the slave responds with a packet. The following information describes the general for-
mat for both transmit and receive packets. For details on packet formatting, see subsequent sections describing each func-
tion code.
Table B–1: MODBUS RTU PACKET FORMAT

DESCRIPTION SIZE
SLAVE ADDRESS 1 byte
FUNCTION CODE 1 byte
DATA N bytes
CRC 2 bytes
DEAD TIME 3.5 bytes transmission time
• SLAVE ADDRESS: This is the address of the slave device that is intended to receive the packet sent by the master
and to perform the desired action. Each slave device on a communications bus must have a unique address to prevent
bus contention. All of the relay’s ports have the same address which is programmable from 1 to 254; see chapter 5 for
details. Only the addressed slave will respond to a packet that starts with its address. Note that the faceplate port is an
exception to this rule; it will act on a message containing any slave address.
A master transmit packet with slave address 0 indicates a broadcast command. All slaves on the communication link
take action based on the packet, but none respond to the master.
• FUNCTION CODE: This is one of the supported functions codes of the unit which tells the slave what action to per-
form. See the Supported Function Codes section for details. An exception response from the slave is indicated by set-
ting the high order bit of the function code in the response packet. See the Exception Responses section for details.
• DATA: This will be a variable number of bytes depending on the function code. This may include actual values, set-
tings, or addresses sent by the master to the slave or by the slave to the master.
• CRC: This is a two byte error checking code. The RTU version of Modbus includes a 16-bit cyclic redundancy check
(CRC-16) with every packet which is an industry standard method used for error detection. If a Modbus slave device
receives a packet in which an error is indicated by the CRC, the slave device does not act upon or respond to the
GE Multilin B30 Bus Differential System B-1

B.1 MODBUS RTU PROTOCOL APPENDIX B
packet thus preventing any erroneous operations. See the CRC-16 Algorithm section for details on calculating the
CRC.
• DEAD TIME: A packet is terminated when no data is received for a period of 3.5 byte transmission times (about 15 ms
at 2400 bps, 2 ms at 19200 bps, and 300 µs at 115200 bps). Consequently, the transmitting device must not allow gaps
between bytes longer than this interval. Once the dead time has expired without a new byte transmission, all slaves
start listening for a new packet from the master except for the addressed slave.
Modbus-TCP/IP communications takes place in application data units (ADUs), which are wrapped in the TCP/IP/Ethernet
B protocols. Ethernet provides Layer 2 addressing and CRC-32 error checking. IP provides Layer 3 addressing. TCP pro-
vides communication establishment and ending and manages data flow. The Parallel Redundancy Protocol (PRP) can also
be used to provide seamless data flow in case of a single failure in the network, by using a combination of LAN duplication
and frame duplication. See chapter 5 in the instruction manual for information on setting up TCP for Modbus (in the Modbus
section), IP and PRP (Network section).
The ADU is described as follows.
Table B–2: MODBUS TCP/IP FORMAT
DESCRIPTION SIZE
MBAP header Transaction identifier 2 bytes
Protocol identifier 2 bytes
Length 2 bytes
Unit identifier 1 byte
FUNCTION CODE 1 byte
DATA N bytes
MBAP header: This Modbus Application Protocol header contains the following fields:
• Transaction Identifier: Used for transaction pairing. The Modbus server copies in the response the transaction identifier
of the request.
• Protocol Identifier: Used for intra-system multiplexing. The Modbus protocol is identified by the value 0.
• Length: The length field is a byte count of the following fields, including the Unit Identifier and data fields.
– Unit Identifier: For the purposes of the UR, this field is equivalent to the Modbus RTU SLAVE ADDRESS
field. The client must use the same value here as programmed in the UR setting MODBUS SLAVE ADDRESS.
FUNCTION CODE: This is the same as the Modbus RTU function code field described above.
DATA: This is the same as the Modbus RTU data field described above.
B.1.4 MODBUS RTU CRC-16 ALGORITHM
The Modbus TPC/IP CRC-32 algorithm is universally executed in hardware, so there is no need to describe it here.
The Modbus RTU CRC-16 algorithm essentially treats the entire data stream (data bits only; start, stop and parity ignored)
as one continuous binary number. This number is first shifted left 16 bits and then divided by a characteristic polynomial
(11000000000000101b). The 16-bit remainder of the division is appended to the end of the packet, MSByte first. The result-
ing packet including CRC, when divided by the same polynomial at the receiver will give a zero remainder if no transmis-
sion errors have occurred. This algorithm requires the characteristic polynomial to be reverse bit ordered. The most
significant bit of the characteristic polynomial is dropped, since it does not affect the value of the remainder.
A C programming language implementation of the CRC algorithm will be provided upon request.
B-2 B30 Bus Differential System GE Multilin

APPENDIX B B.1 MODBUS RTU PROTOCOL
Table B–3: MODBUS RTU CRC-16 ALGORITHM

SYMBOLS: --> data transfer
A 16 bit working register
Alow low order byte of A
Ahigh high order byte of A
CRC 16 bit CRC-16 result
i,j loop counters B
(+) logical EXCLUSIVE-OR operator
N total number of data bytes
Di i-th data byte (i = 0 to N-1)
G 16 bit characteristic polynomial = 1010000000000001 (binary) with MSbit dropped and bit order reversed
shr (x) right shift operator (th LSbit of x is shifted into a carry flag, a '0' is shifted into the MSbit of x, all other bits
are shifted right one location)
ALGORITHM: 1. FFFF (hex) --> A

2. 0 --> i
3. 0 --> j
4. Di (+) Alow --> Alow
5. j + 1 --> j
6. shr (A)
7. Is there a carry? No: go to 8; Yes: G (+) A --> A and continue.
8. Is j = 8? No: go to 5; Yes: continue
9. i + 1 --> i
10. Is i = N? No: go to 3; Yes: continue
11. A --> CRC

B.2 MODBUS FUNCTION CODES APPENDIX B
B.2MODBUS FUNCTION CODES B.2.1 SUPPORTED FUNCTION CODES
Modbus officially defines function codes from 1 to 127 though only a small subset is generally needed. The relay supports
some of these functions, as summarized in the following table. Subsequent sections describe each function code in detail.
FUNCTION CODE MODBUS DEFINITION GE MULTILIN DEFINITION
B HEX
03
DEC
3 Read holding registers Read actual values or settings
04 4 Read holding registers Read actual values or settings
05 5 Force single coil Execute operation
06 6 Preset single register Store single setting
10 16 Preset multiple registers Store multiple settings
B.2.2 READ ACTUAL VALUES OR SETTINGS (FUNCTION CODE 03/04H)
This function code allows the master to read one or more consecutive data registers (actual values or settings) from a relay.
The maximum number of registers that can be read in a single packet is 125. See the Modbus memory map table for exact
details on the data registers.
Since some PLC implementations of Modbus only support one of function codes 03h and 04h. The UR interpretation allows
either function code to be used for reading one or more consecutive data registers. The data starting address will determine
the type of data being read. Function codes 03h and 04h are therefore identical.
The following table shows the format of the master and slave packetsin Modbus RTU. Modbus TCP/IP ADUs have a MBAP
instead of slave address, and CRC is in another stack layer. The example shows a master device requesting three register
values starting at address 4050h from slave device 11h (17 decimal); the slave device responds with the values 40, 300,
and 0 from registers 4050h, 4051h, and 4052h, respectively.
Table B–4: MASTER AND SLAVE DEVICE PACKET TRANSMISSION EXAMPLE

MASTER TRANSMISSION SLAVE RESPONSE
PACKET FORMAT EXAMPLE (HEX) PACKET FORMAT EXAMPLE (HEX)
SLAVE ADDRESS 11 SLAVE ADDRESS 11
FUNCTION CODE 04 FUNCTION CODE 04
DATA STARTING ADDRESS - high 40 BYTE COUNT 06
DATA STARTING ADDRESS - low 50 DATA #1 - high 00
NUMBER OF REGISTERS - high 00 DATA #1 - low 28
NUMBER OF REGISTERS - low 03 DATA #2 - high 01
CRC - low A7 DATA #2 - low 2C
CRC - high 4A DATA #3 - high 00
DATA #3 - low 00
CRC - low 0D
CRC - high 60

APPENDIX B B.2 MODBUS FUNCTION CODES
B.2.3 EXECUTE OPERATION (FUNCTION CODE 05H)
This function code allows the master to perform various operations in the relay. Available operations are shown in the Sum-
mary of operation codes table below.
The following table shows the format of the master and slave packets in Modbus RTU. Modbus TCP/IP ADUs have a
MBAP instead of slave address, and CRC is in another stack layer. The example shows a master device requesting the
slave device 11h (17 decimal) to perform a reset. The high and low code value bytes always have the values “FF” and “00”
respectively and are a remnant of the original Modbus definition of this function code. B
OPERATION CODE - high 00 OPERATION CODE - high 00
OPERATION CODE - low 01 OPERATION CODE - low 01
CODE VALUE - high FF CODE VALUE - high FF
CODE VALUE - low 00 CODE VALUE - low 00
CRC - low DF CRC - low DF
CRC - high 6A CRC - high 6A
Table B–6: SUMMARY OF OPERATION CODES FOR FUNCTION 05H

OPERATION DEFINITION DESCRIPTION
CODE (HEX)
0000 NO OPERATION Does not do anything.
0001 RESET Performs the same function as the faceplate RESET key.
0005 CLEAR EVENT RECORDS Performs the same function as the faceplate CLEAR EVENT RECORDS menu
command.
0006 CLEAR OSCILLOGRAPHY Clears all oscillography records.
1000 to 103F VIRTUAL IN 1 to 64 ON/OFF Sets the states of Virtual Inputs 1 to 64 either “ON” or “OFF”.
B.2.4 STORE SINGLE SETTING (FUNCTION CODE 06H)
This function code allows the master to modify the contents of a single setting register in an relay. Setting registers are
always 16 bit (two byte) values transmitted high order byte first. The following table shows the format of the master and
slave packets in Modbus RTU. Modbus TCP/IP ADUs have a MBAP instead of slave address, and CRC is in another stack
layer. The example shows a master device storing the value 200 at memory map address 4051h to slave device 11h (17
dec).

DATA STARTING ADDRESS - high 40 DATA STARTING ADDRESS - high 40
DATA STARTING ADDRESS - low 51 DATA STARTING ADDRESS - low 51
DATA - high 00 DATA - high 00
DATA - low C8 DATA - low C8
CRC - low CE CRC - low CE
CRC - high DD CRC - high DD

B.2 MODBUS FUNCTION CODES APPENDIX B
B.2.5 STORE MULTIPLE SETTINGS (FUNCTION CODE 10H)
This function code allows the master to modify the contents of a one or more consecutive setting registers in a relay. Setting
registers are 16-bit (two byte) values transmitted high order byte first. The maximum number of setting registers that can be
stored in a single packet is 123. The following table shows the format of the master and slave packets in Modbus RTU.
Modbus TCP/IP ADUs have a MBAP instead of slave address, and CRC is in another stack layer. The example shows a
master device storing the value 200 at memory map address 4051h, and the value 1 at memory map address 4052h to
B slave device 11h (17 decimal).

DATA STARTING ADDRESS - hi 40 DATA STARTING ADDRESS - hi 40
DATA STARTING ADDRESS - lo 51 DATA STARTING ADDRESS - lo 51
NUMBER OF SETTINGS - hi 00 NUMBER OF SETTINGS - hi 00
NUMBER OF SETTINGS - lo 02 NUMBER OF SETTINGS - lo 02
BYTE COUNT 04 CRC - lo 07
DATA #1 - high order byte 00 CRC - hi 64
DATA #1 - low order byte C8
DATA #2 - high order byte 00
DATA #2 - low order byte 01
CRC - low order byte 12
CRC - high order byte 62
B.2.6 EXCEPTION RESPONSES
Programming or operation errors usually happen because of illegal data in a packet. These errors result in an exception
response from the slave. The slave detecting one of these errors sends a response packet to the master with the high order
bit of the function code set to 1.
The following table shows the format of the master and slave packets in Modbus RTU. Modbus TCP/IP ADUs have a
MBAP instead of slave address, and CRC is in another stack layer. The example shows a master device sending the
unsupported function code 39h to slave device 11h.

FUNCTION CODE 39 FUNCTION CODE B9
CRC - low order byte CD ERROR CODE 01
CRC - high order byte F2 CRC - low order byte 93
CRC - high order byte 95

APPENDIX B B.3 FILE TRANSFERS
B.3FILE TRANSFERS B.3.1 OBTAINING RELAY FILES VIA MODBUS
a) DESCRIPTION
The UR relay has a generic file transfer facility, meaning that you use the same method to obtain all of the different types of
files from the unit. The Modbus registers that implement file transfer are found in the "Modbus File Transfer (Read/Write)"
and "Modbus File Transfer (Read Only)" modules, starting at address 3100h in the Modbus Memory Map. To read a file
from the UR relay, use the following steps:
1. Write the filename to the "Name of file to read" register using a write multiple registers command. If the name is shorter B
than 80 characters, you may write only enough registers to include all the text of the filename. Filenames are not case
sensitive.
2. Repeatedly read all the registers in "Modbus File Transfer (Read Only)" using a read multiple registers command. It is
not necessary to read the entire data block, since the UR relay will remember which was the last register you read. The
"position" register is initially zero and thereafter indicates how many bytes (2 times the number of registers) you have
read so far. The "size of..." register indicates the number of bytes of data remaining to read, to a maximum of 244.
3. Keep reading until the "size of..." register is smaller than the number of bytes you are transferring. This condition indi-
cates end of file. Discard any bytes you have read beyond the indicated block size.
4. If you need to re-try a block, read only the "size of.." and "block of data", without reading the position. The file pointer is
only incremented when you read the position register, so the same data block will be returned as was read in the pre-
vious operation. On the next read, check to see if the position is where you expect it to be, and discard the previous
block if it is not (this condition would indicate that the UR relay did not process your original read request).
The UR relay retains connection-specific file transfer information, so files may be read simultaneously on multiple Modbus
connections.
b) OTHER PROTOCOLS
All the files available via Modbus may also be retrieved using the standard file transfer mechanisms in other protocols (for
example, TFTP or MMS).
c) COMTRADE, OSCILLOGRAPHY, AND DATA LOGGER FILES

Oscillography and data logger files are formatted using the COMTRADE file format per IEEE C37.111-1999 Standard Com-
mon Format for Transient Data Exchange (COMTRADE) for Power Systems. The files can be obtained in either text or
binary COMTRADE format.
d) READING OSCILLOGRAPHY FILES

Familiarity with the oscillography feature is required to understand the following description. See the Oscillography section
in chapter 5 for details.
The "Oscillography Number of Triggers" register increments by one every time a new oscillography file is triggered (cap-
tured) and cleared to zero when oscillography data is cleared. When a new trigger occurs, the associated oscillography file
is assigned a file identifier number equal to the incremented value of this register; the newest file number is equal to the
"Oscillography Number of Triggers" register. This register can be used to determine if any new data has been captured by
periodically reading it to see if the value has changed; if the number has increased then new data is available.
The "Oscillography Number of Records" register specifies the maximum number of files (and the number of cycles of data
per file) that can be stored in memory of the relay. The "Oscillography Available Records" register specifies the actual num-
ber of files that are stored and still available to be read out of the relay.
Writing “Yes” (that is, the value 1) to the "Oscillography Clear Data" register clears oscillography data files, clears both the
"Oscillography Number of Triggers" and "Oscillography Available Records" registers to zero, and sets the "Oscillography
Last Cleared Date" to the present date and time.
To read binary COMTRADE oscillography files, read the following filenames:
OSCnnnn.CFG and OSCnnn.DAT
Replace “nnn” with the desired oscillography trigger number. For ASCII format, use the following file names
OSCAnnnn.CFG and OSCAnnn.DAT

B.3 FILE TRANSFERS APPENDIX B
e) READING EVENT RECORDER FILES

To read the entire event recorder contents in ASCII format (the only available format), use the following filename:
EVT.TXT
To read from a specific record to the end of the log, use the following filename:
EVTnnn.TXT (replace nnn with the desired starting record number)
B To read from a specific record to another specific record, use the following filename:
EVT.TXT xxxxx yyyyy (replace xxxxx with the starting record number and yyyyy with the ending record number)

APPENDIX B B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
B.4MEMORY MAPPING B.4.1 MODBUS MEMORY MAP
The table provides the Modbus memory map. The addresses in the table are expressed in hexadecimal. The particular reg-
isters actually present depend on the UR product and on the order codes software and module options.
The map is also viewable in a web browser. In the browser, enter the IP address of the UR and click the option.
In the table, "Grouped Setting" refers to content in the Settings > Grouped Elements > Group menus.
The data format tables that follow the memory map provide more information for some entries. B
Table B–10: MODBUS MEMORY MAP (Sheet 1 of 64)
ADDR REGISTER NAME RANGE UNITS STEP FORMAT DEFAULT
Product Information (Read Only)
0000 UR Product Type 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
0002 Product Version 0 to 655.35 --- 0.01 F001 1
0003 Boot Configuration Register 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
Product Information (Read Only -- Written by Factory)
0010 Serial Number --- --- --- F203 “0”
0020 Manufacturing Date 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F050 0
0022 Modification Number 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
0040 Order Code --- --- --- F204 “Order Code
x”
0090 Ethernet MAC Address --- --- --- F072 0
0093 Reserved (13 items) --- --- --- F001 0
00A0 CPU Module Serial Number --- --- --- F203 (none)
00B0 CPU Supplier Serial Number --- --- --- F203 (none)
00C0 Ethernet Sub Module Serial Number (8 items) --- --- --- F203 (none)
Product Information (Read Only -- Written by Factory)
0110 FPGA Version --- --- --- F206 (none)
0113 FPGA Date 0 to 4294967295 -- 1 F050 0
Product Information (Read/Write)
0120 Undefined 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0
Self Test Targets (Read Only)
0200 Self Test States (4 items) 0 to 4294967295 0 1 F143 0
Front Panel (Read Only)
0208 LED Column n State, n = 1 to 10 (10 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F501 0
0220 Display Message --- --- --- F204 (none)
0248 Last Key Pressed 0 to 47 --- 1 F530 0 (None)
Keypress Emulation (Read/Write)
0280 Simulated keypress -- write zero before each 0 to 46 --- 1 F190 0 (No key --
keystroke use between
real keys)
Virtual Input Commands (Read/Write Command) (64 modules)
0400 Virtual Input 1 State 0 to 1 --- 1 F108 0 (Off)
040A Virtual Input 11 State 0 to 1 --- 1 F108 0 (Off)

B.4 MEMORY MAPPING APPENDIX B

040B Virtual Input 12 State 0 to 1 --- 1 F108 0 (Off)
040C Virtual Input 13 State 0 to 1 --- 1 F108 0 (Off)
040D Virtual Input 14 State 0 to 1 --- 1 F108 0 (Off)
040E Virtual Input 15 State 0 to 1 --- 1 F108 0 (Off)
B 040F
0410
Virtual Input 16 State
Virtual Input 17 State
0 to 1
0 to 1
---
---
1
1
F108
F108
0 (Off)
0 (Off)
041F Virtual Input 32 State 0 to 1 --- 1 F108 0 (Off)


IEC103 Protocol Settings (Read/Write Setting)
0582 IEC103 Common ASDU Address 0 to 254 --- 1 F001 0
B
0583 IEC103 Sync Timeout 1 to 1440 min 1 F001 1
IEC 103 Binary Inputs (Read/Write Setting) (96 modules)
0584 IEC103 Binary Input 1 FUN 0 to 255 --- 1 F001 0
0585 IEC103 Binary Input 1 INF 0 to 255 --- 1 F001 0
0586 IEC103 Binary Input 1 Operand 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0
0588 ...Repeated for Binary Input 2
058C ...Repeated for Binary Input 3
05A0 ...Repeated for Binary Input 8
05AC ...Repeated for Binary Input 11
05B0 ...Repeated for Binary Input 12
05BC ...Repeated for Binary Input 15
05C0 ...Repeated for Binary Input 16
05CC ...Repeated for Binary Input 19
05D0 ...Repeated for Binary Input 20
05DC ...Repeated for Binary Input 23
05E0 ...Repeated for Binary Input 24
05EC ...Repeated for Binary Input 27
05F0 ...Repeated for Binary Input 28
05FC ...Repeated for Binary Input 31


B 0630
0634
...Repeated for Binary Input 44
06AC ...Repeated for Binary Input 75
06BC ...Repeated for Binary Input 79
06CC ...Repeated for Binary Input 83
06DC ...Repeated for Binary Input 87


06EC ...Repeated for Binary Input 91
06F4
06F8
B
06FC ...Repeated for Binary Input 95
IEC 103 ASDU Settings (Read/Write Setting) (4 modules)
0704 IEC103 ASDU1 TYP 0 to 1 --- 1 F630 1(9)
0705 IEC103 ASDU 1 FUN 0 to 255 --- 1 F001 0
0706 IEC103 ASDU 1 INF 0 to 255 --- 1 F001 0
0707 IEC103 ASDU 1 Scan Timeout 0 to 1000 --- 1 F001 0
0708 IEC103 ASDU 1 Analog Param 1 0 to 65535 --- 1 F600 0
0709 IEC103 ASDU 1 Analog Factor 1 0 to 65.535 --- 0.001 F001 1000
070A IEC103 ASDU 1 Analog Offset 1 -32768 to 32767 --- 1 F002 0
070B IEC103 ASDU 1 Analog Param 2 0 to 65535 --- 1 F600 0
070C IEC103 ASDU 1 Analog Factor 2 0 to 65.535 --- 0.001 F001 1000
070D IEC103 ASDU 1 Analog Offset 2 -32768 to 32767 --- 1 F002 0
070E IEC103 ASDU 1 Analog Param 3 0 to 65535 --- 1 F600 0
070F IEC103 ASDU 1 Analog Factor 3 0 to 65.535 --- 0.001 F001 1000
0710 IEC103 ASDU 1 Analog Offset 3 -32768 to 32767 --- 1 F002 0
071A IEC103 ASDU 1 Analog Param 7 0 to 65535 --- 1 F600 0
071B IEC103 ASDU 1 Analog Factor 7 0 to 65.535 --- 0.001 F001 1000
071C IEC103 ASDU 1 Analog Offset 7 -32768 to 32767 --- 1 F002 0
071D IEC103 ASDU 1 Analog Param 8 0 to 65535 --- 1 F600 0
071E IEC103 ASDU 1 Analog Factor 8 0 to 65.535 --- 0.001 F001 1000
071F IEC103 ASDU 1 Analog Offset 8 -32768 to 32767 --- 1 F002 0
0723 ...Repeated for IEC103 ASDU 2
IEC 103 Commands (Read/Write Setting) (32 modules)
0780 IEC103 Command 1 FUN 0 to 255 --- 1 F001 0
0781 IEC103 Command 1 INF 0 to 255 --- 1 F001 0
0782 IEC103 Command 1 Param ON 0 to 64 --- 1 F631 0 (OFF)
0783 IEC103 Command 1 Param OFF 0 to 64 --- 1 F631 0 (OFF)
0784 ...Repeated for IEC103 Command 2


078C ...Repeated for IEC103 Command 4
B 0798
079C
...Repeated for IEC103 Command 7
...Repeated for IEC103 Command 8
07A0 ...Repeated for IEC103 Command 9
07AC ...Repeated for IEC103 Command 12
07B0 ...Repeated for IEC103 Command 13
07BC ...Repeated for IEC103 Command 16
07C0 ...Repeated for IEC103 Command 17
07CC ...Repeated for IEC103 Command 20
07D0 ...Repeated for IEC103 Command 21
07DC ...Repeated for IEC103 Command 24
07E0 ...Repeated for IEC103 Command 25
07EC ...Repeated for IEC103 Command 28
07F0 ...Repeated for IEC103 Command 29
07FC ...Repeated for IEC103 Command 32
Digital Counter States Actual Values (Read Only Non-Volatile) (8 modules)
0800 Digital Counter 1 Value -2147483647 to --- 1 F004 0
2147483647
0802 Digital Counter 1 Frozen -2147483647 to --- 1 F004 0
2147483647
0804 Digital Counter 1 Frozen Time Stamp 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F050 0
0806 Digital Counter 1 Frozen Time Stamp us 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
(microsecond part of time stamp)
0808 ...Repeated for Digital Counter 2
FlexStates (Read Only)
0900 FlexState Bits (16 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
Element States (Read Only)
1000 Element Operate States (64 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F502 0


User Displays Actuals (Read Only)
1080 Formatted user-definable displays (16 items) --- --- --- F200 (none)
Modbus User Map Actuals (Read Only)
1200 User Map Values (256 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
Element Targets (Read Only)
14E0 Target Sequence 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
B
14E1 Number of Targets 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
Element Targets (Read/Write)
14E2 Target to Read 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
Element Targets (Read Only)
14E3 Target Message --- --- --- F200 “.”
Contact Input/Output States (Read Only)
1500 Contact Input States (6 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F500 0
1508 Virtual Input States (8 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F500 0
1510 Contact Output States (4 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F500 0
1518 Contact Output Current States (4 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F500 0
1520 Contact Output Voltage States (4 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F500 0
1528 Virtual Output States (6 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F500 0
1530 Contact Output Detectors (4 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F500 0
Remote Input/Output States (Read Only)
1540 Remote Device States (2 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F500 0
1542 Remote Input States (4 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F500 0
1550 Remote Devices Online 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 0 (No)
1551 Remote Double-Point Status Input 1 State 0 to 3 --- 1 F605 3 (Bad)
Platform Direct Input/Output States (Read Only)
15C0 Direct Input States (6 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F500 0
15C8 Direct Outputs Average Message Return Time 1 0 to 65535 ms 1 F001 0
15C9 Direct Outputs Average Message Return Time 2 0 to 65535 ms 1 F001 0
15CA Direct Inputs/Outputs Unreturned Message Count - 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
Ch. 1
15CB Direct Inputs/Outputs Unreturned Message Count - 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
Ch. 2
15D0 Direct Device States 0 to 65535 --- 1 F500 0
15D1 Reserved 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
15D2 Direct Inputs/Outputs CRC Fail Count 1 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
15D3 Direct Inputs/Outputs CRC Fail Count 2 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
Field Unit Input/Output States (Read Only)
15E0 Field Unit Contact Input States (3 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F500 0
15E3 Field Unit Contact Input Output Operand States (8 0 to 65535 --- 1 F500 0
items)
15EB Field Contact Output Physical States (8 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F500 0
15F3 Field Contact Output Current States (8 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F500 0
15FB Field Contact Output Physical States (8 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F500 0
1603 Field Shared Input States 0 to 65535 --- 1 F500 0
1604 Field Shared Input Channel States 0 to 65535 --- 1 F500 0
1605 Field Shared Input Test States 0 to 65535 --- 1 F500 0


1606 Field Shared Output Operand States 0 to 65535 --- 1 F500 0
1607 Field Latching Output Open Operand States 0 to 65535 --- 1 F500 0
1608 Field Latching Output Close Operand States 0 to 65535 --- 1 F500 0
1609 Field Latching Output Open Driver States 0 to 65535 --- 1 F500 0
B 160A
160B
Field Latching Output Close Driver States
Field Latching Output Physical States
0 to 65535
0 to 65535
---
---
1
1
F500
F500
0
0
160C Field Unit Online/Offline States 0 to 65535 --- 1 F500 0
160D Field RTD Input Trouble States 0 to 65535 --- 1 F500 0
160E Field Transducer Input Trouble States 0 to 65535 --- 1 F500 0
Ethernet Fibre Channel Status (Read Only)
1610 Ethernet Primary Fibre Channel Status 0 to 2 --- 1 F134 0 (Fail)
1611 Ethernet Secondary Fibre Channel Status 0 to 2 --- 1 F134 0 (Fail)
1612 Ethernet Tertiary Fibre Channel Status 0 to 2 --- 1 F134 0 (Fail)
Field Unit RTD Actuals (Read Only) (8 modules)
16C0 Field RTD 1 Value -32768 to 32767 °C 1 F002 0
16C1 ...Repeated for Field RTD 2
Field Unit Transducer Actuals (Read Only) (8 modules)
16C8 Field Transducer 1 Value -32.768 to 32.767 --- 0.001 F004 0
16CA ...Repeated for Field Transducer 2
16CC ...Repeated for Field Transducer 3
16CE ...Repeated for Field Transducer 4
16D0 ...Repeated for Field Transducer 5
Source Current (Read Only) (6 modules)
1800 Source 1 Phase A Current RMS 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
1802 Source 1 Phase B Current RMS 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
1804 Source 1 Phase C Current RMS 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
1806 Source 1 Neutral Current RMS 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
1808 Source 1 Phase A Current Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
180A Source 1 Phase A Current Angle -359.9 to 0 degrees 0.1 F002 0
180B Source 1 Phase B Current Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
180D Source 1 Phase B Current Angle -359.9 to 0 degrees 0.1 F002 0
180E Source 1 Phase C Current Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
1810 Source 1 Phase C Current Angle -359.9 to 0 degrees 0.1 F002 0
1811 Source 1 Neutral Current Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
1813 Source 1 Neutral Current Angle -359.9 to 0 degrees 0.1 F002 0
1814 Source 1 Ground Current RMS 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
1816 Source 1 Ground Current Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
1818 Source 1 Ground Current Angle -359.9 to 0 degrees 0.1 F002 0
1819 Source 1 Zero Sequence Current Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
181B Source 1 Zero Sequence Current Angle -359.9 to 0 degrees 0.1 F002 0


181C Source 1 Positive Sequence Current Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
181E Source 1 Positive Sequence Current Angle -359.9 to 0 degrees 0.1 F002 0
181F Source 1 Negative Sequence Current Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
1821 Source 1 Negative Sequence Current Angle -359.9 to 0 degrees 0.1 F002 0
1822
1824
Source 1 Differential Ground Current Magnitude
Source 1 Differential Ground Current Angle
0 to 999999.999
-359.9 to 0
A
degrees
0.001
0.1
F060
F002
0
0
B
1825 Reserved (27 items) --- --- --- F001 0
1840 ...Repeated for Source 2
18C0 ...Repeated for Source 4
Source Voltage (Read Only) (6 modules)
1A00 Source 1 Phase AG Voltage RMS 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0
1A02 Source 1 Phase BG Voltage RMS 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0
1A04 Source 1 Phase CG Voltage RMS 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0
1A06 Source 1 Phase AG Voltage Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0
1A08 Source 1 Phase AG Voltage Angle -359.9 to 0 degrees 0.1 F002 0
1A09 Source 1 Phase BG Voltage Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0
1A0B Source 1 Phase BG Voltage Angle -359.9 to 0 degrees 0.1 F002 0
1A0C Source 1 Phase CG Voltage Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0
1A0E Source 1 Phase CG Voltage Angle -359.9 to 0 degrees 0.1 F002 0
1A0F Source 1 Phase AB or AC Voltage RMS 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0
1A11 Source 1 Phase BC or BA Voltage RMS 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0
1A13 Source 1 Phase CA or CB Voltage RMS 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0
1A15 Source 1 Phase AB or AC Voltage Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0
1A17 Source 1 Phase AB or AC Voltage Angle -359.9 to 0 degrees 0.1 F002 0
1A18 Source 1 Phase BC or BA Voltage Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0
1A1A Source 1 Phase BC or BA Voltage Angle -359.9 to 0 degrees 0.1 F002 0
1A1B Source 1 Phase CA or CB Voltage Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0
1A1D Source 1 Phase CA or CB Voltage Angle -359.9 to 0 degrees 0.1 F002 0
1A1E Source 1 Auxiliary Voltage RMS 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0
1A20 Source 1 Auxiliary Voltage Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0
1A22 Source 1 Auxiliary Voltage Angle -359.9 to 0 degrees 0.1 F002 0
1A23 Source 1 Zero Sequence Voltage Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0
1A25 Source 1 Zero Sequence Voltage Angle -359.9 to 0 degrees 0.1 F002 0
1A26 Source 1 Positive Sequence Voltage Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0
1A28 Source 1 Positive Sequence Voltage Angle -359.9 to 0 degrees 0.1 F002 0
1A29 Source 1 Negative Sequence Voltage Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0
1A2B Source 1 Negative Sequence Voltage Angle -359.9 to 0 degrees 0.1 F002 0
1A2C Reserved (20 items) --- --- --- F001 0
1A40 ...Repeated for Source 2
1AC0 ...Repeated for Source 4
1B00 ...Repeated for Source 5
1B40 ...Repeated for Source 6
Source Frequency (Read Only) (6 modules)
1D80 Frequency for Source 1 2 to 90 Hz 0.001 F003 0


1D8A Frequency for Source 6 2 to 90 Hz 0.001 F003 0
B Breaker Flashover (Read/Write Setting) (2 modules)

2196 Breaker Flashover 1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
2197 Breaker Flashover 1 Side 1 Source 0 to 5 --- 1 F167 0 (SRC 1)
2198 Breaker Flashover 1 Side 2 Source 0 to 6 --- 1 F211 0 (None)
2199 Breaker Flashover 1 Status Closed A 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0
219B Breaker Flashover 1 Status Closed B 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0
219D Breaker Flashover 1 Status Closed C 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0
219F Breaker Flashover 1 Voltage Pickup Level 0 to 1.5 pu 0.001 F001 850
21A0 Breaker Flashover 1 Voltage Difference Pickup 0 to 100000 V 1 F060 1000
Level
21A2 Breaker Flashover 1 Current Pickup Level 0 to 1.5 pu 0.001 F001 600
21A3 Breaker Flashover 1 Pickup Delay 0 to 65.535 s 0.001 F001 100
21A4 Breaker Flashover 1 Supervision Phase A 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0
21A6 Breaker Flashover 1 Supervision Phase B 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0
21A8 Breaker Flashover 1 Supervision Phase C 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0
21AA Breaker Flashover 1 Block 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0
21AC Breaker Flashover 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
21AD Breaker Flashover 1 Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-Reset)
21AE Reserved (4 items) --- --- --- F001 0
21B2 ...Repeated for Breaker Flashover 2
Passwords Unauthorized Access (Read/Write Command)
2230 Reset Unauthorized Access 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 0 (No)
Field Unit Raw Data Settings (Read/Write Setting)
2460 Field Raw Data Port 0 to 7 --- 1 F244 6 (H1a)
2461 Field Raw Data Freeze 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
Bus Actuals (Read Only) (2 modules)
2500 Bus Differential IA Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
2502 Bus Differential IA Angle -359.9 to 0 degrees 0.1 F002 0
2503 Bus Differential IB Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
2505 Bus Differential IB Angle -359.9 to 0 degrees 0.1 F002 0
2506 Bus Differential IC Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
2508 Bus Differential IC Angle -359.9 to 0 degrees 0.1 F002 0
2509 Bus Differential Rest IA Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
250B Bus Differential Rest IA Angle -359.9 to 0 degrees 0.1 F002 0
250C Bus Differential Rest IB Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
250E Bus Differential Rest IB Angle -359.9 to 0 degrees 0.1 F002 0
250F Bus Differential Rest IC Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
2511 Bus Differential Rest IC Angle -359.9 to 0 degrees 0.1 F002 0
2515 Bus Maximum CT Primary 0 to 50000 --- 1 F060 1
2517 Reserved (9 items) --- --- --- F001 0
2520 ...Repeated for module number 2
Remote Double-Point Status Inputs (Read/Write Setting Registers) (5 modules)
2540 Remote Double-point Status Input 1 Device 1 to 32 --- 1 F001 1
2541 Remote Double-point Status Input 1 Item 0 to 64 --- 1 F606 0 (None)
2542 Remote Double-point Status Input 1 Name 1 to 64 --- 1 F205 "RemDPS Ip
1"


2548 Remote Double-point Status Input 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
2549 ... Repeated for Remote Double-point Status Input
2
3
255B ... Repeated for Remote Double-point Status Input
4 B
5
IEC 61850 GGIO5 Configuration (Read/Write Setting Registers) (16 modules)
26D0 IEC 61850 GGIO5 uinteger Input 1 Operand --- --- --- F612 0
26DA IEC 61850 GGIO5 uinteger Input 11 Operand --- --- --- F612 0
26DB IEC 61850 GGIO5 uinteger Input 12 Operand --- --- --- F612 0
26DC IEC 61850 GGIO5 uinteger Input 13 Operand --- --- --- F612 0
26DD IEC 61850 GGIO5 uinteger Input 14 Operand --- --- --- F612 0
26DE IEC 61850 GGIO5 uinteger Input 15 Operand --- --- --- F612 0
26DF IEC 61850 GGIO5 uinteger Input 16 Operand --- --- --- F612 0
IEC 61850 Received Integers (Read Only Actual Values) (16 modules)
26F0 IEC 61850 Received uinteger 1 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
26FA IEC 61850 Received uinteger 6 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
26FC IEC 61850 Received uinteger 7 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
26FE IEC 61850 Received uinteger 8 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
2700 IEC 61850 Received uinteger 9 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
270A IEC 61850 Received uinteger 14 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
270C IEC 61850 Received uinteger 15 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
270E IEC 61850 Received uinteger 16 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
Expanded FlexStates (Read Only)
2B00 FlexStates, one per register (256 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F108 0 (Off)
Expanded Contact Input/Output States (Read Only)
2D00 Contact Input States, one per register (96 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F108 0 (Off)
2D80 Contact Output States, one per register (64 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F108 0 (Off)
2E00 Virtual Output States, one per register (96 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F108 0 (Off)
Expanded Remote Input/Output Status (Read Only)
2F00 Remote Device States, one per register (32 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F155 0 (Offline)


2F80 Remote Input States, one per register (64 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F108 0 (Off)
Oscillography Values (Read Only)
3000 Oscillography Number of Triggers 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
3001 Oscillography Available Records 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
B 3002
3004
Oscillography Last Cleared Date
Oscillography Number Of Cycles Per Record
0 to 400000000
0 to 65535
---
---
1
1
F050
F001
0
0
Oscillography Commands (Read/Write Command)
3005 Oscillography Force Trigger 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 0 (No)
3011 Oscillography Clear Data 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 0 (No)
Oscillography Analog Values (Read Only)
3012 Oscillography Number of Triggers 0 to 32767 --- 1 F001 0
User-Programmable Fault Report Commands (Read/Write Command)
3060 User Fault Report Clear 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 0 (No)
User-Programmable Fault Report Actual Values (Read Only)
3070 Newest Record Number 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
3071 Cleared Date 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F050 0
3073 Report Date (10 items) 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F050 0
User-Programmable Fault Report (Read/Write Setting) (2 modules)
3090 Fault Report 1 Fault Trigger 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0
3092 Fault Report 1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
3093 Fault Report 1 Prefault Trigger 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0
3095 Fault Report Analog Channel 1 (32 items) 0 to 65536 --- 1 F600 0
30B5 Fault Report 1 Reserved (5 items) --- --- --- F001 0
30BA ...Repeated for Fault Report 2
Modbus File Transfer (Read/Write)
3100 Name of file to read --- --- --- F204 (none)
Modbus File Transfer Values (Read Only)
3200 Character position of current block within file 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
3202 Size of currently-available data block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
3203 Block of data from requested file (122 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
Security (Read/Write Setting)
3280 Administrator Alphanumeric Password Setting --- --- --- F202 (none)
Security (Read Only)
328A Administrator Alphanumeric Password Status 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
Security (Read/Write)
328B Administrator Alphanumeric Password Entry --- --- --- F202 (none)
3295 Supervisor Alphanumeric Password Setting --- --- --- F202 (none)
329F Supervisor Alphanumeric Password Status 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
32A0 Supervisor Alphanumeric Password Entry --- --- --- F202 (none)
32AA Engineer Alphanumeric Password Setting --- --- --- F202 (none)
32B4 Engineer Alphanumeric Password Status 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
32B5 Engineer Alphanumeric Password Entry --- --- --- F202 (none)


32BF Operator Alphanumeric Password Setting --- --- --- F202 (none)
32C9 Operator Alphanumeric Password Status 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
32CA Operator Alphanumeric Password Entry --- --- --- F202 (none)
B
32D4 Observer Alphanumeric Password Setting --- --- --- F202 (none)
32DE Observer Alphanumeric Password Status 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
32DF Observer Alphanumeric Password Entry --- --- 1 F202 (none)
32E9 Reserved for password settings of future roles (63 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
items)
3328 Security Status Indicator 0 to 65535 --- 1 F618 0
3329 Session Lockout 0 to 99 --- 1 F001 3
332A Session Lockout Period 0 to 9999 min 1 F001 3
332B Load Factory Defaults 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 0 (No)
332C Syslog Server IP Address 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
332E Syslog Server Port Number 1 to 65535 --- 1 F001 514
Security Supervisory (Read/Write Setting)
3331 Device Authentication Enable 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 1 (Yes)
3332 Supervisor Role Enable 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
3333 Lock Relay 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
3334 Factory Service Mode Enable 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
3335 Failed Authentication Alarm Enable 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 1 (Enabled)
3336 Firmware Lock Alarm 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 1 (Enabled)
3337 Settings Lock Alarm 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 1 (Enabled)
3338 Bypass Access 0 to 3 --- 1 F628 0 (Disabled)
333A Serial Inactivity Timeout 1 to 9999 --- 1 F001 1
Security Command (Read/Write Command)
3350 Operator Logoff 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 0 (No)
3351 Engineer Logoff 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 0 (No)
3352 Administrator Logoff 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 0 (No)
3353 Clear Security Data 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 0 (No)
Security Reserved Modbus Registers (Read/Write)
3360 Address 0x3360 reserved for serial login (20 items) 0 to 9999 --- 1 F001 3
3374 Address 0x3374 reserved for serial logout 0 to 9999 --- 1 F001 3
Security Reserved Modbus Registers (Read Only)
3375 Address 0x3374 reserved for serial logout 0 to 5 --- 1 F617 3 (Engineer)
Event Recorder (Read Only)
3400 Events Since Last Clear 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
3402 Number of Available Events 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
3404 Event Recorder Last Cleared Date 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F050 0
Event Recorder Commands (Read/Write Command)
3406 Event Recorder Clear Command 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 0 (No)
DCmA Input Values (Read Only) (24 modules)
34C0 DCmA Inputs 1 Value -9999.999 to 9999.999 --- 0.001 F004 0


B 34CA
34CC
DCmA Inputs 6 Value
DCmA Inputs 7 Value
-9999.999 to 9999.999 ---
-9999.999 to 9999.999 ---
0.001
0.001
F004
F004
0
0
34CE DCmA Inputs 8 Value -9999.999 to 9999.999 --- 0.001 F004 0
34D0 DCmA Inputs 9 Value -9999.999 to 9999.999 --- 0.001 F004 0
34DA DCmA Inputs 14 Value -9999.999 to 9999.999 --- 0.001 F004 0
34DC DCmA Inputs 15 Value -9999.999 to 9999.999 --- 0.001 F004 0
34DE DCmA Inputs 16 Value -9999.999 to 9999.999 --- 0.001 F004 0
34E0 DCmA Inputs 17 Value -9999.999 to 9999.999 --- 0.001 F004 0
34EA DCmA Inputs 22 Value -9999.999 to 9999.999 --- 0.001 F004 0
34EC DCmA Inputs 23 Value -9999.999 to 9999.999 --- 0.001 F004 0
34EE DCmA Inputs 24 Value -9999.999 to 9999.999 --- 0.001 F004 0
RTD Input Values (Read Only) (48 modules)
34F0 RTD Input 1 Value -32768 to 32767 °C 1 F002 0
34FA RTD Input 11 Value -32768 to 32767 °C 1 F002 0
34FB RTD Input 12 Value -32768 to 32767 °C 1 F002 0
34FC RTD Input 13 Value -32768 to 32767 °C 1 F002 0
34FD RTD Input 14 Value -32768 to 32767 °C 1 F002 0
34FE RTD Input 15 Value -32768 to 32767 °C 1 F002 0
34FF RTD Input 16 Value -32768 to 32767 °C 1 F002 0
3500 RTD Input 17 Value -32768 to 32767 °C 1 F002 0


350A RTD Input 27 Value -32768 to 32767 °C 1 F002 0
350B RTD Input 28 Value -32768 to 32767 °C 1 F002 0
350C RTD Input 29 Value -32768 to 32767 °C 1 F002 0
350D
350E
RTD Input 30 Value
RTD Input 31 Value
-32768 to 32767
-32768 to 32767
°C
°C
1
1
F002
F002
0
0
B
350F RTD Input 32 Value -32768 to 32767 °C 1 F002 0
351A RTD Input 43 Value -32768 to 32767 °C 1 F002 0
351B RTD Input 44 Value -32768 to 32767 °C 1 F002 0
351C RTD Input 45 Value -32768 to 32767 °C 1 F002 0
351D RTD Input 46 Value -32768 to 32767 °C 1 F002 0
351E RTD Input 47 Value -32768 to 32767 °C 1 F002 0
351F RTD Input 48 Value -32768 to 32767 °C 1 F002 0
Ohm Input Values (Read Only) (2 modules)
3520 Ohm Inputs 1 Value 0 to 65535 Ohm 1 F001 0
3521 Ohm Inputs 2 Value 0 to 65535 Ohm 1 F001 0
Expanded Direct Input/Output Status (Read Only)
3560 Direct Device States, one per register (16 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F155 0 (Offline)
3570 Direct Input States, one per register (96 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F108 0 (Off)
RADIUS Configuration (Read/Write Setting)
3735 Primary RADIUS IP Address 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
3737 Primary Authentication Port 1 to 65535 --- 1 F001 1812
3738 Primary Accounting Port 1 to 65535 --- 1 F001 1813
3739 Secondary RADIUS IP Address 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
373B Secondary Authentication Port 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 1812
373D Secondary Accounting Port 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 1813
373F RADIUS Authentication Method --- --- 1 F619 0 (EAP-TTLS)
3740 RADIUS Vendor ID 1 to 65535 --- 1 F001 2910
3741 Authentication Timeout 0 to 9999 sec 1 F001 10
3742 Authentication Retries 0 to 9999 --- 1 F001 3
3743 RADIUS Authentication Shared Secret --- --- --- F202 (none)
PTP Basic Configuration (Read/Write Setting)
3750 PTP Strict Power Profile 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
3751 PTP Domain Number 0 to 255 --- 1 F001 0
3752 PTP VLAN Priority 0 to 7 --- 1 F001 4
3753 PTP VLAN ID 0 to 4095 --- 1 F001 0
3754 Undefined (2 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F001 0
PTP Port Configuration (Read/Write Setting) (3 modules)
3756 PTP Port 1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)


3757 PTP Port 1 Path Delay Adder 0 to 60000 ns 1 F001 0
3758 PTP Port 1 Path Delay Asymmetry -1000 to 1000 ns 1 F002 0
3759 ...Repeated for PTP Port 2
375C ...Repeated for PTP Port 3
B Real Time Clock Synchronizing Actual Values (Read Only)

375F RTC Sync Source 0 to 5 --- 1 F624 0 (None)
3760 PTP GrandMaster ID 0 to 100 -- 1 F073 0
3764 Real Time Clock Accuracy 0 to 999999999 ns 1 F003 0
3766 PTP Port 1 State (3 items) 0 to 4 -- 1 F625 0 (Disabled)
3769 RTC Offset 0 to 999999999 ns 1 F004 0
376B PTP - IRIG-B Delta -500000000 to ns 1 F004 0
500000000
Real Time Clock Synchronizing FlexAnalogs (Read Only)
376D PTP - IRIG-B Delta FlexAnalog -262143 to 262143 --- 1 F004 0
Field Units (Read/Write Setting) (8 modules)
3800 Field Unit 1 ID 0 to 1 --- 1 F205 "U1"
3806 Field Unit 1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
3807 Field Unit 1 Type 0 to 3 --- 1 F243 0 (CC-05)
3808 Field Unit 1 Serial Number 1 to1 --- 1 F205 "0000000000
00"
380E Field Unit 1 Port 1 to 4 --- 1 F001 1
380F ...Repeated for Field Unit 2
381E ...Repeated for Filed Unit 3
382D ...Repeated for Filed Unit 4
383C ...Repeated for Filed Unit 5
384B ...Repeated for Filed Unit 6
385A ...Repeated for Filed Unit 7
3869 ...Repeated for Filed Unit 8
Field Unit Process Card Ports (Read/Write Setting)
3878 Field Unit 1 Process Card Port 0 to 7 --- 1 F244 6 (H1a)
3879 Field Unit 2 Process Card Port 0 to 7 --- 1 F244 4 (H2a)
387A Field Unit3 Process Card Port 0 to 7 --- 1 F244 2 (H3a)
387B Field Unit 4 Process Card Port 0 to 7 --- 1 F244 0 (H4a)
387C Field Unit 5 Process Card Port 0 to 7 --- 1 F244 7 (H1b)
387D Field Unit 6 Process Card Port 0 to 7 --- 1 F244 5 (H2b)
387E Field Unit 7 Process Card Port 0 to 7 --- 1 F244 3 (H3b)
387F Field Unit 8 Process Card Port 0 to 7 --- 1 F244 1 (H4b)
Field Unit CT VT Settings (Read/Write Setting) (6 modules)
3890 Remote Phase CT x Origin 1 0 to 16 --- 1 F247 0 (None)
3891 Remote Phase CT x Origin 2 0 to 16 --- 1 F247 0 (None)
3892 Remote Ground CT x Origin 1 0 to 16 --- 1 F248 0 (None)
3893 Remote Ground CT x Origin 2 0 to 16 --- 1 F248 0 (None)
3894 AC Bank Redundancy Type 0 to 2 --- 1 F261 1
(Dependabilit
y Biased)
3895 Remote Phase CT 1 Primary 1 to 65000 --- 1 F001 1
3896 Remote Phase CT 1 Secondary 0 to 1 --- 1 F123 0 (1 A)
3897 Remote Ground CT 1 Primary 1 to 65000 --- 1 F001 1
3898 Remote Ground CT 1 Secondary 0 to 1 --- 1 F123 0 (1 A)
3899 Remote Phase VT 1 Connection 0 to 1 --- 1 F100 0 (Wye)
389A Remote Phase VT 1 Secondary 25 to 240 --- 0.1 F001 664


389B Remote Phase VT 1 Ratio 1 to 24000 --- 1 F060 1
389D Remote Auxiliary VT 1 Connection 0 to 6 --- 1 F166 1 (Vag)
389E Remote Auxiliary VT 1 Secondary 25 to 240 --- 0.1 F001 664
389F Remote Auxiliary VT 1 Ratio 1 to 24000 --- 1 F060 1
38A1
38B2
...Repeated for Field Unit 2
...Repeated for Field Unit 3
B
38C3 ...Repeated for Field Unit 4
38D4 ...Repeated for Field Unit 5
38E5 ...Repeated for Field Unit 6
Field Unit Contact Inputs (Read/Write Setting) (40 modules)
3900 Field Contact Input 1 ID --- --- --- F205 "FCI 1"
3906 Field Contact Input 1 Origin 0 to 8 --- 1 F256 0 (None)
3907 Field Contact Input 1 Input 1 to 18 --- 1 F001 1
3908 Field Contact Input 1 Failsafe Value 0 to 1 --- 1 F108 0 (Off)
3909 Field Contact Input 1 Debounce Time 0 to 16 ms 0.5 F001 20
390A Field Contact Input 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 1 (Enabled)
390B ...Repeated for Field Contact Input 2
3916 ...Repeated for Field Contact Input 3
392C ...Repeated for Field Contact Input 5
394D ...Repeated for Field Contact Input 8
3958 ...Repeated for Field Contact Input9
396E ...Repeated for Field Contact Input 11
398F ...Repeated for Field Contact Input 14
399A ...Repeated for Field Contact Input 15
39A5 ...Repeated for Field Contact Input 16
39B0 ...Repeated for Field Contact Input 17
39BB ...Repeated for Field Contact Input 18
39C6 ...Repeated for Field Contact Input 19
39D1 ...Repeated for Field Contact Input 20
39DC ...Repeated for Field Contact Input 21
39E7 ...Repeated for Field Contact Input 22
39F2 ...Repeated for Field Contact Input 23
39FD ...Repeated for Field Contact Input 24
3A1E ...Repeated for Field Contact Input 27
3A3F ...Repeated for Field Contact Input 30
3A4A ...Repeated for Field Contact Input 31
3A6B ...Repeated for Field Contact Input 34


3A8C ...Repeated for Field Contact Input 37
B 3AA2
3AAD
...Repeated for Field Contact Input 39
...Repeated for Field Contact Input 40
Field Unit Shared Inputs (Read/Write Setting) (16 modules)
3B00 Field Shared Input 1 ID 0 to 65535 --- 1 F205 "SI 1"
3B06 Field Shared Input 1 Unit Origin 1 0 to 8 --- 1 F256 0 (None)
3B07 Field Shared Input 1 Channel Origin 1 1 to 15 --- 1 F001 1
3B08 Field Shared Input 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 1 (Enabled)
3B09 ...Repeated for Field Shared Input 2
3B1B ...Repeated for Field Shared Input 4
3B2D ...Repeated for Field Shared Input 6
3B3F ...Repeated for Field Shared Input 8
3B5A ...Repeated for Field Shared Input 11
3B6C ...Repeated for Field Shared Input 13
3B7E ...Repeated for Field Shared Input 15
Field Unit Contact Outputs (Read/Write Setting) (8 modules)
3B90 Field Contact Output 1 ID (6 items) --- --- --- F205 "FCO U /
OUT"
3BB4 Field Output 1 Operate (6 items) 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0
3BC0 Field Output 1 Seal In (6 items) 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0
3BCC Field Output 1 Events (6 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 1 (Enabled)
3BD2 ...Repeated for Field Contact Output 2
3C14 ...Repeated for Field Contact Output 3
3CDA ...Repeated for Field Contact Output 6
3D1C ...Repeated for Field Contact Output 7
3D5E ...Repeated for Field Contact Output 8
Field Unit Latching Outputs (Read/Write Setting) (8 modules)
3DC7 Field Latching Output 1 ID 0 to 1 --- 1 F205 "FLO Ux /LO"
3DCD Field Latching Output 1 Open 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0
3DCF Field Latching Output 1 Close 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0
3DD1 Field Latching Output 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 1 (Enabled)
3DD2 Field Latching Output 1 Reserved (2 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F001 0
3DD4 ...Repeated for Field Latching Output 2
3DE1 ...Repeated for Field Latching Output 3
3DEE ...Repeated for Field Latching Output 4
3DFB ...Repeated for Field Latching Output 5
3E08 ...Repeated for Field Latching Output 6


Field Unit Shared Outputs (Read/Write Setting) (16 modules)
3E30 Field Shared Output 1 ID 0 to 65535 --- 1 F205 "SO 1"
3E36
3E38
Field Shared Output 1 Operate
Field Shared Output 1 Unit Dest 1
0 to 4294967295
0 to 8
---
---
1
1
F300
F256
0
0 (None)
B
3E39 Field Shared Output 1 Channel Dest 1 1 to 15 --- 1 F001 1
3E3A Field Shared Output 1 Unit Dest 2 0 to 8 --- 1 F256 0 (None)
3E3B Field Shared Output 1 Channel Dest 2 1 to 15 --- 1 F001 1
3E3C Field Shared Output 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 1 (Enabled)
3E3D ...Repeated for Field Shared Output 2
3E4A ...Repeated for Field Shared Output 3
3E57 ...Repeated for Field Shared Output 4
3E7E ...Repeated for Field Shared Output 7
3E8B ...Repeated for Field Shared Output 8
3EA5 ...Repeated for Field Shared Output 10
3EB2 ...Repeated for Field Shared Output 11
3EBF ...Repeated for Field Shared Output 12
3ECC ...Repeated for Field Shared Output 13
3ED9 ...Repeated for Field Shared Output 14
3EE6 ...Repeated for Field Shared Output 15
3EF3 ...Repeated for Field Shared Output 16
Field Unit RTDs (Read/Write Setting) (8 modules)
3F00 Field Unit RTD 1Name 0 to 1 --- 1 F205 "RTD 1"
3F06 Field Unit RTD 1 Origin 0 to 24 --- 1 F253 0 (None)
3F07 Field Unit RTD 1 Type 0 to 2 --- 1 F259 0 (100 Ohm
Nickel)
3F08 ...Repeated for Field Unit RTD 2
Field Unit Transducers (Read/Write Setting) (8 modules)
3F40 Field Unit Transducer 1 Name 0 to 1 --- 1 F205 "TRD 1"
3F46 Field Unit Transducer 1 Origin 0 to 24 --- 1 F253 0 (None)
3F47 Field Unit Transducer 1 Range 0 to 9 --- 1 F246 6 (0...20mA)
3F48 Field Unit Transducer 1 Min Value -9999.999 to 9999.999 --- 0.001 F004 0
3F4A Field Unit Transducer 1 Max Value -9999.999 to 9999.999 --- 0.001 F004 100000
3F4C Field Unit Transducer 1 Units --- --- --- F206 (none)
3F4F ...Repeated for Field Unit Transducer 2
3F5E ...Repeated for Field Unit Transducer 3
3F6D ...Repeated for Field Unit Transducer 4
3F7C ...Repeated for Field Unit Transducer 5
3F8B ...Repeated for Field Unit Transducer 6
3F9A ...Repeated for Field Unit Transducer 7


3FA9 ...Repeated for Field Unit Transducer 8
Field Unit Identifiers (Read Only) (8 modules)
3FB8 Attached Field Unit 1 Serial Number --- --- 1 F205 (none)
3FBE Attached Filed Unit 1 Port Number --- --- 1 F001 0
B 3FBF
3FC0
Attached Field Unit 1 Type
Field Unit 1 Status
0 to 3
0 to 4
---
---
1
1
F243
F262
0 (CC-05)
0 (Disabled)
3FC1 ...Repeated for Field Unit 2
3FCA ...Repeated for Field Unit 3
3FD3 ...Repeated for Field Unit 4
3FDC ...Repeated for Field Unit 5
3FE5 ...Repeated for Field Unit 6
3FEE ...Repeated for Field Unit 7
3FF7 ...Repeated for Field Unit 8
Passwords (Read/Write Command)
4000 Command Password Setting 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F202 (none)
Passwords (Read/Write Setting)
400A Setting Password Setting 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F202 (none)
Passwords (Read/Write)
4014 Command Password Entry 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F202 (none)
401E Setting Password Entry 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F202 (none)
Passwords (Read Only)
4028 Command Password Status 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
4029 Setting Password Status 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
402A Command Password Access Timeout 5 to 480 min 1 F001 5
402B Setting Password Access Timeout 5 to 480 min 1 F001 30
402C Invalid Password Attempts (before lockout) 2 to 5 --- 1 F001 3
402D Password Lockout Duration 5 to 60 min 1 F001 5
Passwords (Read/Write)
402E Password Access Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
402F Local Setting Auth 1 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 1
4031 Remote Setting Auth 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 1
4033 Access Auth Timeout 5 to 480 min 1 F001 30
User Display Invoke (Read/Write Setting)
4040 Invoke and Scroll Through User Display Menu 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0
Operand
LED Test (Read/Write Setting)
4048 LED Test Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
4049 LED Test Control 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0
Preferences (Read/Write Setting)
404F Language 0 to 5 --- 1 F531 0 (English)
4050 Flash Message Time 0.5 to 10 s 0.1 F001 10
4051 Default Message Timeout 10 to 900 s 1 F001 300
4052 Default Message Intensity 0 to 3 --- 1 F101 0 (25%)
4053 Screen Saver Feature 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
4054 Screen Saver Wait Time 1 to 65535 min 1 F001 30
4055 Current Cutoff Level 0.002 to 0.02 pu 0.001 F001 20
4056 Voltage Cutoff Level 0.1 to 1 V 0.1 F001 10


Communications (Read/Write Setting)
407D COM2 Selection 0 to 3 --- 1 F601 0 (RS485)
407E COM1 Minimum Response Time 0 to 1000 ms 10 F001 0
407F COM2 Minimum Response Time 0 to 1000 ms 10 F001 0
4080
4083
Modbus Slave Address
RS485 Com1 Baud Rate
1 to 254
0 to 11
---
---
1
1
F001
F112
254
8 (115200)
B
4084 RS485 Com1 Parity 0 to 2 --- 1 F113 0 (None)
4085 RS485 Com2 Baud Rate 0 to 11 --- 1 F112 8 (115200)
4086 RS485 Com2 Parity 0 to 2 --- 1 F113 2 (Even)
4087 Port 1 IP Address 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 2130706433
4089 Port 1 IP Subnet Mask 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 4278190080
408B Port 1 Gateway IP Address 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 56554497
408D Network Address NSAP --- --- --- F074 0
4097 Port 1 Link Loss Alert 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
409A DNP Channel 1 Port 0 to 5 --- 1 F177 0 (None)
409B DNP Channel 2 Port 0 to 5 --- 1 F177 0 (None)
409C DNP Address 0 to 65519 --- 1 F001 1
409E DNP Client Addresses (2 items) 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
40A3 TCP Port Number for the Modbus protocol 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 502
40A4 TCP/UDP Port Number for the DNP Protocol 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 20000
40A5 TCP Port Number for the HTTP (Web Server) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 80
Protocol
40A6 Main UDP Port Number for the TFTP Protocol 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 69
40A7 Data Transfer UDP Port Numbers for the TFTP 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
Protocol (zero means “automatic”) (2 items)
40A9 DNP Unsolicited Responses Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
40AA DNP Unsolicited Responses Timeout 0 to 60 s 1 F001 5
40AB DNP Unsolicited Responses Maximum Retries 1 to 255 --- 1 F001 10
40AC DNP Unsolicited Responses Destination Address 0 to 65519 --- 1 F001 1
40AD Ethernet Operation Mode 0 to 1 --- 1 F192 1 (Full-
Duplex)
40AE DNP Current Scale Factor 0 to 8 --- 1 F194 2 (1)
40AF DNP Voltage Scale Factor 0 to 8 --- 1 F194 2 (1)
40B0 DNP Power Scale Factor 0 to 8 --- 1 F194 2 (1)
40B1 DNP Energy Scale Factor 0 to 8 --- 1 F194 2 (1)
40B2 DNP Power Scale Factor 0 to 8 --- 1 F194 2 (1)
40B3 DNP Other Scale Factor 0 to 8 --- 1 F194 2 (1)
40B4 DNP Current Default Deadband 0 to 100000000 --- 1 F003 30000
40B6 DNP Voltage Default Deadband 0 to 100000000 --- 1 F003 30000
40B8 DNP Power Default Deadband 0 to 100000000 --- 1 F003 30000
40BA DNP Energy Default Deadband 0 to 100000000 --- 1 F003 30000
40BC DNP Power Factor Default Deadband 0 to 100000000 -- 1 F003 30000
40BE DNP Other Default Deadband 0 to 100000000 --- 1 F003 30000
40C0 DNP IIN Time Synchronization Bit Period 1 to 10080 min 1 F001 1440
40C1 DNP Message Fragment Size 30 to 2048 --- 1 F001 240
40C2 DNP Client Address 3 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0


40C8 DNP Number of Paired Binary Output Control 0 to 32 --- 1 F001 0
Points
40C9 DNP TCP Connection Timeout 10 to 7200 s 1 F001 120
40CA DNP Communications Reserved (22 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F001 0
40E0 TCP Port Number for the IEC 60870-5-104 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 2404
B 40E1
Protocol
IEC 60870-5-104 Protocol Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
40E2 IEC 60870-5-104 Protocol Common Address of 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
ASDU
40E3 IEC 60870-5-104 Protocol Cyclic Data Transmit 1 to 65535 s 1 F001 60
Period
40E4 IEC 60870-5-104 Current Default Threshold 0 to 100000000 --- 1 F003 30000
40E6 IEC 60870-5-104 Voltage Default Threshold 0 to 100000000 --- 1 F003 30000
40E8 IEC 60870-5-104 Power Default Threshold 0 to 100000000 --- 1 F003 30000
40EA IEC 60870-5-104 Energy Default Threshold 0 to 100000000 --- 1 F003 30000
40EC IEC 60870-5-104 Power Default Threshold 0 to1 --- 0.01 F001 100
40EE IEC 60870-5-104 Other Default Threshold 0 to 100000000 --- 1 F003 30000
40F0 IEC 60870-5-104 Client Address (5 items) 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
4104 IEC 60870-5-104 Redundancy Port Enabled/ 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 0 (No)
Disabled
4105 Port 2 IP Address 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 2130706433
4107 Port 2 IP Subnet Mask 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 4278190080
4109 Port 2 Gateway IP Address 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 56554497
410B PRT2 Ethernet Operation Mode 0 to 1 --- 1 F192 1 (Full-
Duplex)
410C PRT2 Redundancy Enabled 0 to 2 --- 1 F627 0 (None)
410D Port 3 IP Address 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 2130706433
410F Port 3 IP Subnet Mask 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 4278190080
4111 Port 3 Gateway IP Address 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 56554497
4113 Port 3 Ethernet Operation Mode 0 to 1 --- 1 F192 1 (Full-
Duplex)
4114 PRT1 GOOSE Enabled 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 1 (Enabled)
4117 Default IPv4 Route 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 2130706433
4119 PRT2 PRP Mcst Addr --- --- --- F072 0
411C IEC Communications Reserved (33 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F001 0
413E High Enet Traffic Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
413F High Enet Traffic Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
4140 DNP Object 1 Default Variation 1 to 2 --- 1 F001 2
4142 DNP Object 20 Default Variation 0 to 3 --- 1 F523 0 (1)
4148 SCADA Protocol 0 to 2 --- 1 F629 0 (DNP 3.0)
Communications Actual Values (Read Only)
4160 Modbus Available TCP/IP Connections 0 to 4 --- 1 F001 4
4161 DNP Available TCP/IP Connections 0 to 2 --- 1 F001 2
4162 IEC Available TCP/IP Connections 0 to 2 --- 1 F001 2


4163 MMS Available TCP/IP Connections 0 to 5 --- 1 F001 5
4164 PMU Available TCP/IP Connections 0 to 4 --- 1 F001 4
Simple Network Time Protocol (Read/Write Setting)
4168 Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
4169 Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) Server IP
Address
0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
B
416B Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) UDP Port 1 to 65535 --- 1 F001 123
Number
Clock (Read/Write Setting)
419F Synchronizing Source 0 to 3 --- 1 F623 0 (None)
Clock (Read/Write Command)
41A0 Real Time Clock Set Time 0 to 235959 --- 1 F050 0
Clock (Read/Write Setting)
41A2 SR Date Format 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F051 0
41A4 SR Time Format 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F052 0
41A6 IRIG-B Signal Type 0 to 2 --- 1 F114 0 (None)
41A7 Clock Events Enable / Disable 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
41A8 Time Zone Offset from UTC –24 to 24 hours 0.5 F002 0
41A9 Daylight Savings Time (DST) Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
41AA Daylight Savings Time (DST) Start Month 0 to 11 --- 1 F237 0 (January)
41AB Daylight Savings Time (DST) Start Day 0 to 6 --- 1 F238 0 (Sunday)
41AC Daylight Savings Time (DST) Start Day Instance 0 to 4 --- 1 F239 0 (First)
41AD Daylight Savings Time (DST) Start Hour 0 to 23 --- 1 F001 2
41AE Daylight Savings Time (DST) Stop Month 0 to 11 --- 1 F237 0 (January)
41AF Daylight Savings Time (DST) Stop Day 0 to 6 --- 1 F238 0 (Sunday)
41B0 Daylight Savings Time (DST) Stop Day Instance 0 to 4 --- 1 F239 0 (First)
41B1 Daylight Savings Time (DST) Stop Hour 0 to 23 --- 1 F001 2
Oscillography (Read/Write Setting)
41C0 Oscillography Number of Records 3 to 64 --- 1 F001 15
41C1 Oscillography Trigger Mode 0 to 1 --- 1 F118 0 (Auto.
Overwrite)
41C2 Oscillography Trigger Position 0 to 100 % 1 F001 50
41C3 Oscillography Trigger Source 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0
41C5 Oscillography AC Input Waveforms 0 to 4 --- 1 F183 2 (16
samples/
cycle)
41D0 Oscillography Analog Channel n (16 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F600 0
4200 Oscillography Digital Channel n (63 items) 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0
Trip and Alarm LEDs (Read/Write Setting)
42B0 Trip LED Input FlexLogic Operand 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0
42B2 Alarm LED Input FlexLogic Operand 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0
User Programmable LEDs (Read/Write Setting) (48 modules)
42C0 FlexLogic Operand to Activate LED 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0
42C2 User LED type (latched or self-resetting) 0 to 1 --- 1 F127 1 (Self-Reset)
42C3 ...Repeated for User-Programmable LED 2
42CC ...Repeated for User-Programmable LED 5
42CF ...Repeated for User-Programmable LED 6
42D2 ...Repeated for User-Programmable LED 7


42DB ...Repeated for User-Programmable LED 10
42DE ...Repeated for User-Programmable LED 11
42E1 ...Repeated for User-Programmable LED 12
B 42E4
42E7
...Repeated for User-Programmable LED 13
...Repeated for User-Programmable LED 14
42EA ...Repeated for User-Programmable LED 15
42ED ...Repeated for User-Programmable LED 16
42F0 ...Repeated for User-Programmable LED 17
42FC ...Repeated for User-Programmable LED 21
42FF ...Repeated for User-Programmable LED 22
4302 ...Repeated for User-Programmable LED 23
430B ...Repeated for User-Programmable LED 26
430E ...Repeated for User-Programmable LED 27
431A ...Repeated for User-Programmable LED 31
431D ...Repeated for User-Programmable LED 32
432C ...Repeated for User-Programmable LED 37
432F ...Repeated for User-Programmable LED 38
433B ...Repeated for User-Programmable LED 42
433E ...Repeated for User-Programmable LED 43
434A ...Repeated for User-Programmable LED 47
434D ...Repeated for User-Programmable LED 48
PRP Status (Read Only)
4363 Total Received Port A 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
4365 Total Received Port B 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
4367 Total Mismatches Port A 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
4369 Total Mismatches Port B 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
436B Total Errors 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
IPv4 Route Table (Read/Write Setting) (6 modules)
4370 IPv4 Network Route 1 Destination 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 2130706433
4372 IPv4 Network Route 1 Netmask 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 4278190080


4374 IPv4 Network Route 1 Gateway 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 2130706433
4376 ...Repeated for Route 2
437C ...Repeated for Route 3
4382 ...Repeated for Route 4
4388
438E
...Repeated for Route 5
...Repeated for Route 6
B
Installation (Read/Write Setting)
43E0 Relay Programmed State 0 to 1 --- 1 F133 0 (Not
Programmed)
43E1 Relay Name --- --- --- F202 “Relay-1”
User Programmable Self Tests (Read/Write Setting)
4441 User Programmable Detect Ring Break Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 1 (Enabled)
4442 User Programmable Direct Device Off Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 1 (Enabled)
4443 User Programmable Remote Device Off Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 1 (Enabled)
4444 User Programmable First Ethernet Fail Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
4445 User Programmable Secondary Ethernet Fail 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
Function
4446 User Programmable Battery Fail Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 1 (Enabled)
4447 User Programmable SNTP Fail Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 1 (Enabled)
4448 User Programmable IRIG-B Fail Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 1 (Enabled)
4449 User Programmable Ethernet Switch Fail Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 1 (Enabled)
444A Process Bus Failure Operand 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0
444C PTP Fail Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 1 (Enabled)
444D User Programmable Third Ethernet Fail Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
444E User Programmable SFP Fail Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
CT Settings (Read/Write Setting) (6 modules)
4480 Phase CT 1 Primary 1 to 65000 A 1 F001 1
4481 Phase CT 1 Secondary 0 to 1 --- 1 F123 0 (1 A)
4482 Ground CT 1 Primary 1 to 65000 A 1 F001 1
4483 Ground CT 1 Secondary 0 to 1 --- 1 F123 0 (1 A)
4484 ...Repeated for CT Bank 2
448C ...Repeated for CT Bank 4
VT Settings (Read/Write Setting) (6 modules)
4500 Phase VT 1 Connection 0 to 1 --- 1 F100 0 (Wye)
4501 Phase VT 1 Secondary 25 to 240 V 0.1 F001 664
4502 Phase VT 1 Ratio 1 to 24000 :1 1 F060 1
4504 Auxiliary VT 1 Connection 0 to 6 --- 1 F166 1 (Vag)
4505 Auxiliary VT 1 Secondary 25 to 240 V 0.1 F001 664
4506 Auxiliary VT 1 Ratio 1 to 24000 :1 1 F060 1
4508 ...Repeated for VT Bank 2
Source Settings (Read/Write Setting) (6 modules)
4580 Source 1 Name 0 to 1 --- 1 F206 “SRC 1"
4583 Source 1 Phase CT 0 to 63 --- 1 F400 0


4584 Source 1 Ground CT 0 to 63 --- 1 F400 0
4585 Source 1 Phase VT 0 to 63 --- 1 F400 0
4586 Source 1 Auxiliary VT 0 to 63 --- 1 F400 0
B 458E
4595
...Repeated for Source 3
...Repeated for Source 4
459C ...Repeated for Source 5
Power System (Read/Write Setting)
4600 Nominal Frequency 25 to 60 Hz 1 F001 60
4601 Phase Rotation 0 to 1 --- 1 F106 0 (ABC)
4602 Frequency and Phase Reference 0 to 5 --- 1 F167 0 (SRC 1)
4603 Frequency Tracking Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 1 (Enabled)
Breaker Control (Read/Write Settings) (6 modules)
47D0 Breaker 1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
47D1 Breaker 1 Name --- --- --- F206 “Bkr 1"
47D4 Breaker 1 Mode 0 to 1 --- 1 F157 0 (3-Pole)
47D5 Breaker 1 Open 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0
47D7 Breaker 1 Close 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0
47D9 Breaker 1 Phase A / Three-pole Closed 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0
47DB Breaker 1 Phase B Closed 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0
47DD Breaker 1 Phase C Closed 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0
47DF Breaker 1 External Alarm 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0
47E1 Breaker 1 Alarm Delay 0 to 65.535 s 0.001 F003 0
47E3 Breaker 1 Pushbutton Control 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
47E4 Breaker 1 Manual Close Recall Time 0 to 4294967295 s 0.001 F003 0
47E6 Breaker 1 Out of Service 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0
47E8 Breaker 1 Block Open 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0
47EA Breaker 1 Block Close 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0
47EC Breaker 1 Phase A / Three-pole Opened 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0
47EE Breaker 1 Phase B Opened 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0
47F0 Breaker 1 Phase C Opened 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0
47F2 Breaker 1 Operate Time 0 to 65.535 s 0.001 F001 70
47F3 Breaker 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
47F4 Reserved 0 to 65535 s 1 F001 0
47F5 ...Repeated for Breaker 2
481A ...Repeated for Breaker 3
483F ...Repeated for Breaker 4
4864 ...Repeated for Breaker 5
4889 ...Repeated for Breaker 6
FlexCurves A and B (Read/Write Settings)
4910 FlexCurve A (120 items) 0 to 65535 ms 1 F011 0
4988 FlexCurve B (120 items) 0 to 65535 ms 1 F011 0
Modbus User Map (Read/Write Setting)
4A00 Modbus Address Settings for User Map (256 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
items)
User Displays Settings (Read/Write Setting) (16 modules)
4C00 User-Definable Display 1 Top Line Text --- --- --- F202 ““
4C0A User-Definable Display 1 Bottom Line Text --- --- --- F202 ““
4C14 Modbus Addresses of Display 1 Items (5 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0


4C19 Reserved (7 items) --- --- --- F001 0
4C20 ...Repeated for User-Definable Display 2
4C80
4CA0
...Repeated for User-Definable Display 5
...Repeated for User-Definable Display 6
B
4CC0 ...Repeated for User-Definable Display 7
4CE0 ...Repeated for User-Definable Display 8
4D00 ...Repeated for User-Definable Display 9
4DA0 ...Repeated for User-Definable Display 14
4DC0 ...Repeated for User-Definable Display 15
4DE0 ...Repeated for User-Definable Display 16
Field Unit Raw Data Actuals (Read Only) (8 modules)
4E00 Raw Field Data AC1 Mag 0 to 0.001 A 0.001 F003 0
4E02 Raw Field Data AC1 Angle 0 to 0.1 degree 0.1 F002 0
4E0B Raw Field Data AC4 Angle 0 to 0.01 degree 0.1 F002 0
4E0C Raw Field Data AC5 Mag 0 to 0.001 A/V 0.001 F003 0
4E0E Raw Field Data AC5 Angle 0 to 0.01 degree 0.1 F002 0
4E0F Raw Field Data AC6 Mag 0 to 0.001 A/V 0.001 F003 0
4E12 Raw Field Data AC7 Mag 0 to 0.001 A/V 0.001 F003 0
4E15 Raw Field Data AC8 Mag 0 to 0.001 A/V 0.001 F003 0
4E18 Raw Field Data DC1 0 to 0.001 V 0.001 F002 0
4E19 Raw Field Data DC2 0 to 0.001 V 0.001 F002 0
4E1A Raw Field Data DC3 0 to 0.001 V 0.001 F002 0
4E1B Raw Field Data FCI States (2 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F500 0
4E1D Raw Field Data SI States 0 to 1 --- 1 F500 0
4E1E Raw Field Data SI Test States 0 to 1 --- 1 F500 0
4E1F Raw Field Data Brick ADC Temperature 0 to 1 degree 1 F002 0
4E20 Raw Field Data Brick Transceiver Temperature 0 to 1 degree 1 F002 0
4E21 Raw Field Data Brick Transceiver Voltage 0 to 0.01 V 0.01 F001 0
4E22 Raw Field Data Brick Transceiver Current 0 to 1 mA 1 F001 0
4E23 Raw Field Data Brick Tx Power 0 to 0.1 dBm 0.1 F002 0
4E24 Raw Field Data Brick Rx Power 0 to 0.1 dBm 0.1 F002 0
4E25 Raw Field Data Brick Diagnostics (2 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F500 0
4E27 Raw Field Data Local Transceiver Temperature 0 to 1 degree 1 F002 0
4E28 Raw Field Data Local Transceiver Voltage 0 to 0.01 V 0.01 F001 0
4E29 Raw Field Data Local Transceiver Current 0 to 1 mA 1 F001 0


4E2A Raw Field Data Local Tx Power 0 to 0.1 dBm 0.1 F002 0
4E2B Raw Field Data Local Rx Power 0 to 0.1 dBm 0.1 F002 0
4E2C Repeated for Field Unit 2
4E58 Repeated for Field Unit 3
B 4E84
4E80
Repeated for Field Unit 4
Repeated for Field Unit 5
4EDC Repeated for Field Unit 6
4F08 Repeated for Field Unit 7
4F34 Repeated for Field Unit 8
FlexLogic (Read/Write Setting)
5000 FlexLogic Entry (512 items) 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 2097152
RTD Inputs (Read/Write Setting) (48 modules)
5400 RTD Input 1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
5401 RTD Input 1 ID --- --- --- F205 “RTD Ip 1“
5407 RTD Input 1 Type 0 to 3 --- 1 F174 0 (100 ohm
Platinum)
5414 ...Repeated for RTD Input 2
543C ...Repeated for RTD Input 4
54A0 ...Repeated for RTD Input 9
54B4 ...Repeated for RTD Input 10
54C8 ...Repeated for RTD Input 11
54DC ...Repeated for RTD Input 12
54F0 ...Repeated for RTD Input 13
55B8 ...Repeated for RTD Input 23
55CC ...Repeated for RTD Input 24
55E0 ...Repeated for RTD Input 25


56BC ...Repeated for RTD Input 36
56D0 ...Repeated for RTD Input 37
56E4 ...Repeated for RTD Input 38
570C
5720
...Repeated for RTD Input 40
...Repeated for RTD Input 41
B
57AC ...Repeated for RTD Input 48
FlexLogic Timers (Read/Write Setting) (32 modules)
5800 FlexLogic Timer 1 Type 0 to 2 --- 1 F129 0
(millisecond)
5801 FlexLogic Timer 1 Pickup Delay 0 to 60000 --- 1 F001 0
5802 FlexLogic Timer 1 Dropout Delay 0 to 60000 --- 1 F001 0
5803 Reserved (5 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
5808 ...Repeated for FlexLogic Timer 2
58A0 ...Repeated for FlexLogic Timer 21
58A8 ...Repeated for FlexLogic Timer 22
58B0 ...Repeated for FlexLogic Timer 23
58B8 ...Repeated for FlexLogic Timer 24
58C0 ...Repeated for FlexLogic Timer 25
58C8 ...Repeated for FlexLogic Timer 26
58D0 ...Repeated for FlexLogic Timer 27
58D8 ...Repeated for FlexLogic Timer 28
58E0 ...Repeated for FlexLogic Timer 29
58E8 ...Repeated for FlexLogic Timer 30
58F0 ...Repeated for FlexLogic Timer 31
58F8 ...Repeated for FlexLogic Timer 32


Phase Time Overcurrent (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (6 modules)
5900 Phase Time Overcurrent 1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
5901 Phase Time Overcurrent 1 Signal Source 0 to 5 --- 1 F167 0 (SRC 1)
5902 Phase Time Overcurrent 1 Input 0 to 1 --- 1 F122 0 (Phasor)
B 5903
5904
Phase Time Overcurrent 1 Pickup
Phase Time Overcurrent 1 Curve
0 to 30
0 to 16
pu
---
0.001
1
F001
F103
1000
0 (IEEE Mod
Inv)
5905 Phase Time Overcurrent 1 Multiplier 0 to 600 --- 0.01 F001 100
5906 Phase Time Overcurrent 1 Reset 0 to 1 --- 1 F104 0
(Instantaneou
s)
5907 Phase Time Overcurrent 1 Voltage Restraint 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
5908 Phase TOC 1 Block For Each Phase (3 items) 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0
590F Phase Time Overcurrent 1 Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
5910 Phase Time Overcurrent 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
5914 ...Repeated for Phase Time Overcurrent 2
593C ...Repeated for Phase Time Overcurrent 4
Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (6 modules)
5A00 Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
5A01 Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Signal Source 0 to 5 --- 1 F167 0 (SRC 1)
5A02 Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Pickup 0 to 30 pu 0.001 F001 1000
5A03 Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 0
5A04 Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Reset Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 0
5A05 Phase IOC1 Block For Each Phase (3 items) 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0
5A0B Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
5A0C Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
5A0D Reserved (6 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F001 0
5A13 ...Repeated for Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent
2
3
4
5A4C ...Repeated for Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent
5
5A5F ...Repeated for Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent
6
Neutral Time Overcurrent (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (6 modules)
5B00 Neutral Time Overcurrent 1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
5B01 Neutral Time Overcurrent 1 Signal Source 0 to 5 --- 1 F167 0 (SRC 1)
5B02 Neutral Time Overcurrent 1 Input 0 to 1 --- 1 F122 0 (Phasor)
5B03 Neutral Time Overcurrent 1 Pickup 0 to 30 pu 0.001 F001 1000
5B04 Neutral Time Overcurrent 1 Curve 0 to 16 --- 1 F103 0 (IEEE Mod
Inv)
5B05 Neutral Time Overcurrent 1 Multiplier 0 to 600 --- 0.01 F001 100
5B06 Neutral Time Overcurrent 1 Reset 0 to 1 --- 1 F104 0
(Instantaneou
s)
5B07 Neutral Time Overcurrent 1 Block 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0


5B09 Neutral Time Overcurrent 1 Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
5B0A Neutral Time Overcurrent 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
5B0B Reserved (6 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F001 0
5B11 ...Repeated for Neutral Time Overcurrent 2
5B22
5B33
...Repeated for Neutral Time Overcurrent 3
...Repeated for Neutral Time Overcurrent 4
B
Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (6 modules)
5C00 Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
5C01 Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Signal 0 to 5 --- 1 F167 0 (SRC 1)
Source
5C02 Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Pickup 0 to 30 pu 0.001 F001 1000
5C03 Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 0
5C04 Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Reset Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 0
5C05 Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Block 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0
5C07 Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
5C08 Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
5C09 Reserved (8 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F001 0
5C11 ...Repeated for Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent
2
3
4
5
6
Ground Time Overcurrent (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (6 modules)
5D00 Ground Time Overcurrent 1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
5D01 Ground Time Overcurrent 1 Signal Source 0 to 5 --- 1 F167 0 (SRC 1)
5D02 Ground Time Overcurrent 1 Input 0 to 1 --- 1 F122 0 (Phasor)
5D03 Ground Time Overcurrent 1 Pickup 0 to 30 pu 0.001 F001 1000
5D04 Ground Time Overcurrent 1 Curve 0 to 16 --- 1 F103 0 (IEEE Mod
Inv)
5D05 Ground Time Overcurrent 1 Multiplier 0 to 600 --- 0.01 F001 100
5D06 Ground Time Overcurrent 1 Reset 0 to 1 --- 1 F104 0
(Instantaneou
s)
5D07 Ground Time Overcurrent 1 Block 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0
5D09 Ground Time Overcurrent 1 Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
5D0A Ground Time Overcurrent 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
5D0B Reserved (6 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F001 0
5D11 ...Repeated for Ground Time Overcurrent 2
Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (6 modules)
5DA0 Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
5DA1 Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Signal 0 to 5 --- 1 F167 0 (SRC 1)
Source


5DA2 Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Pickup 0 to 30 pu 0.001 F001 1000
5DA3 Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 0
5DA4 Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Reset Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 0
5DA5 Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Block 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0
B 5DA7
5DA8
Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Target
Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Events
0 to 2
0 to 1
---
---
1
1
F109
F102
0 (Self-reset)
0 (Disabled)
5DA9 Reserved (8 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F001 0
5DB1 ...Repeated for Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent
2
5DC2 ...Repeated for Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent
3
5DD3 ...Repeated for Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent
4
5DE4 ...Repeated for Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent
5
5DF5 ...Repeated for Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent
6
Setting Groups (Read/Write Setting)
5F70 Setting Group for Modbus Comms (0 means group 0 to 5 --- 1 F001 0
1)
5F71 Setting Groups Block 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0
5F73 FlexLogic Operands to Activate Groups 2 through 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0
6 (5 items)
5F7D Setting Group Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
5F7E Setting Group Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
Setting Groups (Read Only)
5F7F Current Setting Group 0 to 5 --- 1 F001 0
Setting Group Names (Read/Write Setting)
5F8C Setting Group 1 Name --- --- --- F203 (none)
5F94 Setting Group 2 Name --- --- --- F203 (none)
5F9C Setting Group 3 Name --- --- --- F203 (none)
5FA4 Setting Group 4 Name --- --- --- F203 (none)
5FAC Setting Group 5 Name --- --- --- F203 (none)
5FB4 Setting Group 6 Name --- --- --- F203 (none)
Bus Configuration (Read/Write Setting) (2 modules)
64B0 Bus Zone xA Source (6 items) 0 to 5 --- 1 F167 0 (SRC 1)
64B6 Bus Zone xA Status (6 items) 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0
64C2 ...Repeated for Bus Zone 2
Bus Differential (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (4 modules)
64E0 Bus Zone 1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
64E1 Bus Zone 1 Pickup 0.05 to 6 pu 0.001 F001 100
64E2 Bus Zone 1 Low Slope 15 to 100 % 1 F001 25
64E3 Bus Zone 1 Low Breakpoint 1 to 30 pu 0.01 F001 200
64E4 Bus Zone 1 High Slope 50 to 100 % 1 F001 60
64E5 Bus Zone 1 High Breakpoint 1 to 30 pu 0.01 F001 800
64E6 Bus Zone 1 High Set 0.1 to 99.99 pu 0.01 F001 1500
64E7 Bus Zone 1 Seal In 0 to 65.535 s 0.001 F001 400
64E8 Bus Zone 1 Block 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0
64EA Bus Zone 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
64EB Bus Zone 1 Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
64F8 ...Repeated for Bus Zone 2
6510 ...Repeated for Bus Zone 3


6528 ...Repeated for Bus Zone 4
CT Trouble (Read/Write Setting) (2 modules)
65A0 CT Trouble 1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
65A1 CT Trouble 1 Pickup 0.02 to 2 pu 0.001 F001 100
65A2
65A3
CT Trouble 1 Delay
CT Trouble 1 Target
1 to 60
0 to 2
s
---
0.1
1
F001
F109
100
0 (Self-reset)
B
65A4 CT Trouble 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
65A5 ...Repeated for CT Trouble 2
Phase Undervoltage (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (3 modules)
7000 Phase Undervoltage 1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
7001 Phase Undervoltage 1 Signal Source 0 to 5 --- 1 F167 0 (SRC 1)
7002 Phase Undervoltage 1 Pickup 0 to 3 pu 0.001 F001 1000
7003 Phase Undervoltage 1 Curve 0 to 1 --- 1 F111 0 (Definite
Time)
7004 Phase Undervoltage 1 Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 100
7005 Phase Undervoltage 1 Minimum Voltage 0 to 3 pu 0.001 F001 100
7006 Phase Undervoltage 1 Block 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0
7008 Phase Undervoltage 1 Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
7009 Phase Undervoltage 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
700A Phase Undervoltage 1 Measurement Mode 0 to 1 --- 1 F186 0 (Phase to
Ground)
700B Reserved (6 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F001 0
7011 ...Repeated for Phase Undervoltage 2
7022 ...Repeated for Phase Undervoltage 3
Disconnect (Breaker) Switch (Read/Write Setting) (24 modules)
74A0 Disconnect Switch 1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
74A1 Disconnect Switch 1 Name --- --- --- F206 “SW 1"
74A4 Disconnect Switch 1 Mode 0 to 1 --- 1 F157 0 (3-Pole)
74A5 Disconnect Switch 1 Open 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0
74A7 Disconnect Switch 1 Block Open 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0
74A9 Disconnect Switch 1 Close 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0
74AB Disconnect Switch 1 Block Close 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0
74AD Disconnect Switch 1 Phase A / Three-pole Closed 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0
74AF Disconnect Switch 1 Phase A / Three-pole Opened 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0
74B1 Disconnect Switch 1 Phase B Closed 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0
74B3 Disconnect Switch 1 Phase B Opened 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0
74B5 Disconnect Switch 1 Phase C Closed 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0
74B7 Disconnect Switch 1 Phase C Opened 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0
74B9 Disconnect Switch 1 Operate Time 0 to 65.535 s 0.001 F001 70
74BA Disconnect Switch 1 Alarm Delay 0 to 65.535 s 0.001 F003 0
74BC Disconnect Switch 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
74BD Reserved (2 items) --- --- --- F001 0
74BF ...Repeated for Disconnect Switch 2
74DE ...Repeated for Disconnect Switch 3
74FD ...Repeated for Disconnect Switch 4
751C ...Repeated for Disconnect Switch 5
753B ...Repeated for Disconnect Switch 6
755A ...Repeated for Disconnect Switch 7
7579 ...Repeated for Disconnect Switch 8


75B7 ...Repeated for Disconnect Switch 10
75D6 ...Repeated for Disconnect Switch 11
75F5 ...Repeated for Disconnect Switch 12
B 7633
7652
...Repeated for Disconnect Switch 14
...Repeated for Disconnect Switch 15
76AF ...Repeated for Disconnect Switch 18
76CE ...Repeated for Disconnect Switch 19
76ED ...Repeated for Disconnect Switch 20
770C ...Repeated for Disconnect Switch 21
772B ...Repeated for Disconnect Switch 22
774A ...Repeated for Disconnect Switch 23
Thermal Overload Protection (Read/Write Settings) (2 modules)
7788 Thermal Protection 1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
7789 Thermal Protection 1 Source 0 to 5 --- 1 F167 0 (SRC 1)
778A Thermal Protection 1 Base Current 0.2 to 3 pu 0.01 F001 80
778B Thermal Protection 1 K Factor 1 to 1.2 --- 0.05 F001 110
778C Thermal Protection 1 Trip Time Constant 0 to 1000 min. 1 F001 45
778D Thermal Protection 1 Reset Time Constant 0 to 1000 min. 1 F001 45
778E Thermal Protection 1 Minimum Reset Time 0 to 1000 min. 1 F001 20
778F Thermal Protection 1 Reset 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0
7791 Thermal Protection 1 Block 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0
7793 Thermal Protection 1 Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
7794 Thermal Protection 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
7795 Reserved (2 items) --- --- --- F001 0
7797 Repeated for Thermal Protection 2
Ohm Inputs (Read/Write Setting) (2 modules)
77F8 Ohm Inputs 1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
77F9 Ohm Inputs 1 ID --- --- --- F205 "Ohm Ip 1 "
77FF Ohm Inputs 1 Reserved (9 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
7808 ...Repeated for Ohm Inputs 2
User Programmable Pushbuttons (Read/Write Setting) (16 modules)
7B60 User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Function 0 to 2 --- 1 F137 0 (Disabled)
7B61 User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Top Line --- --- --- F202 (none)
7B6B User Programmable Pushbutton 1 On Text --- --- --- F202 (none)
7B75 User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Off Text --- --- --- F202 (none)
7B7F User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Drop-Out Time 0 to 60 s 0.05 F001 0
7B80 User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
7B81 User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
7B82 User Programmable Pushbutton 1 LED Operand 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0
7B84 User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Autoreset Delay 0.2 to 600 s 0.1 F001 10
7B85 User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Autoreset 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
Function
7B86 User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Local Lock 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0
Operand
7B88 User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Message 0 to 2 --- 1 F220 0 (Disabled)
Priority


7B89 User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Remote Lock 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0
Operand
7B8B User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Reset Operand 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0
7B8D User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Set Operand 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0
7B8F User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Hold 0 to 10 s 0.1 F001 1
7B90 ...Repeated for User Programmable Pushbutton 2 B
7BC0 ...Repeated for User Programmable Pushbutton 3
7BF0 ...Repeated for User Programmable Pushbutton 4
7C20 ...Repeated for User Programmable Pushbutton 5
7CB0 ...Repeated for User Programmable Pushbutton 8
7DE0 ...Repeated for User Programmable Pushbutton 9
7D10 ...Repeated for User Programmable Pushbutton 10
7DA0 ...Repeated for User Programmable Pushbutton 13
7DD0 ...Repeated for User Programmable Pushbutton 14
7E00 ...Repeated for User Programmable Pushbutton 15
7E30 ...Repeated for User Programmable Pushbutton 16
Neutral Overvoltage (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (3 modules)
7F00 Neutral Overvoltage 1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
7F01 Neutral Overvoltage 1 Signal Source 0 to 5 --- 1 F167 0 (SRC 1)
7F02 Neutral Overvoltage 1 Pickup 0 to 3 pu 0.001 F001 300
7F03 Neutral Overvoltage 1 Pickup Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 100
7F04 Neutral Overvoltage 1 Reset Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 100
7F05 Neutral Overvoltage 1 Block 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0
7F07 Neutral Overvoltage 1 Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
7F08 Neutral Overvoltage 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
7F09 Neutral Overvoltage 1 Curves 0 to 3 --- 1 F116 0 (Definite
Time)
7F0A Reserved (7 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
7F11 ...Repeated for Neutral Overvoltage 2
7F22 ...Repeated for Neutral Overvoltage 3
Auxiliary Overvoltage (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (3 modules)
7FA0 Auxiliary Overvoltage 1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
7FA1 Auxiliary Overvoltage 1 Signal Source 0 to 5 --- 1 F167 0 (SRC 1)
7FA2 Auxiliary Overvoltage 1 Pickup 0 to 3 pu 0.001 F001 300
7FA3 Auxiliary Overvoltage 1 Pickup Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 100
7FA4 Auxiliary Overvoltage 1 Reset Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 100
7FA5 Auxiliary Overvoltage 1 Block 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0
7FA7 Auxiliary Overvoltage 1 Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
7FA8 Auxiliary Overvoltage 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
7FA9 Reserved (8 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
7FB1 ...Repeated for Auxiliary Overvoltage 2
7FC2 ...Repeated for Auxiliary Overvoltage 3
Frequency (Read Only)
8000 Tracking Frequency 2 to 90 Hz 0.01 F001 0
Temp Monitor Actual Values (Read Only Non-Volatile)
81C0 Reserved Register T1 -55 to 125 C 1 F002 -55


81C1 Reserved Register T2 -55 to 125 C 1 F002 125
81C2 Reserved Register T3 -2147483647 to --- 1 F004 0
2147483647
81C4 Reserved Register T4 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
81C6 Reserved Register T5 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
B 81C8 Reserved Register T6 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
81CA Reserved Register T7 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
81CC Reserved Register T8 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
EGD Fast Production Status (Read Only Non-Volatile and Read Only)
83E0 EGD Fast Producer Exchange 1 Signature 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
83E1 EGD Fast Producer Exchange 1 Configuration 0 to 4294967295 --- --- F003 0
Time
83E3 EGD Fast Producer Exchange 1 Size 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
EGD Slow Production Status (Read Only Non-Volatile and Read Only) (2 modules)
83F0 EGD Slow Producer Exchange 1 Signature 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
83F1 EGD Slow Producer Exchange 1 Configuration 0 to 4294967295 --- --- F003 0
Time
83F3 EGD Slow Producer Exchange 1 Size 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
83F4 ...Repeated for EGD Slow Producer Exchange 2
EGD Fast Production (Read/Write Setting)
8400 EGD Fast Producer Exchange 1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
8401 EGD Fast Producer Exchange 1 Destination 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
8403 EGD Fast Producer Exchange 1 Data Rate 50 to 1000 ms 50 F001 1000
8404 EGD Fast Producer Exchange 1 Data Item 1 (20 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
items)
8418 Reserved (80 items) --- --- --- F001 0
EGD Slow Production (Read/Write Setting) (2 modules)
8468 EGD Slow Producer Exchange 1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
8469 EGD Fast Producer Exchange 1 Destination 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
846B EGD Slow Producer Exchange 1 Data Rate 500 to 1000 ms 50 F001 1000
846C EGD Slow Producer Exchange 1 Data Item 1 (50 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
items)
849E Reserved (50 items) --- --- --- F001 0
84D0 ...Repeated for EGD Exchange 2
Breaker Failure (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (6 modules)
8600 Breaker Failure 1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
8601 Breaker Failure 1 Mode 0 to 1 --- 1 F157 0 (3-Pole)
8602 Breaker Failure 1 Source 0 to 5 --- 1 F167 0 (SRC 1)
8603 Breaker Failure 1 Amp Supervision 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 1 (Yes)
8604 Breaker Failure 1 Use Seal-In 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 1 (Yes)
8605 Breaker Failure 1 Three Pole Initiate 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0
8607 Breaker Failure 1 Block 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0
8609 Breaker Failure 1 Phase Amp Supv Pickup 0.001 to 30 pu 0.001 F001 1050
860A Breaker Failure 1 Neutral Amp Supv Pickup 0.001 to 30 pu 0.001 F001 1050
860B Breaker Failure 1 Use Timer 1 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 1 (Yes)
860C Breaker Failure 1 Timer 1 Pickup 0 to 65.535 s 0.001 F001 0
860D Breaker Failure 1 Use Timer 2 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 1 (Yes)
860E Breaker Failure 1 Timer 2 Pickup 0 to 65.535 s 0.001 F001 0
860F Breaker Failure 1 Use Timer 3 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 1 (Yes)
8610 Breaker Failure 1 Timer 3 Pickup 0 to 65.535 s 0.001 F001 0
8611 Breaker Failure 1 Breaker Status 1 Phase A/3P 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0


8613 Breaker Failure 1 Breaker Status 2 Phase A/3P 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0
8615 Breaker Failure 1 Breaker Test On 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0
8617 Breaker Failure 1 Phase Amp Hiset Pickup 0.001 to 30 pu 0.001 F001 1050
8618 Breaker Failure 1 Neutral Amp Hiset Pickup 0.001 to 30 pu 0.001 F001 1050
8619
861A
Breaker Failure 1 Phase Amp Loset Pickup
Breaker Failure 1 Neutral Amp Loset Pickup
0.001 to 30
0.001 to 30
pu
pu
0.001
0.001
F001
F001
1050
1050
B
861B Breaker Failure 1 Loset Time 0 to 65.535 s 0.001 F001 0
861C Breaker Failure 1 Trip Dropout Delay 0 to 65.535 s 0.001 F001 0
861D Breaker Failure 1 Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
861E Breaker Failure 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
861F Breaker Failure 1 Phase A Initiate 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0
8621 Breaker Failure 1 Phase B Initiate 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0
8623 Breaker Failure 1 Phase C Initiate 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0
8625 Breaker Failure 1 Breaker Status 1 Phase B 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0
8627 Breaker Failure 1 Breaker Status 1 Phase C 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0
8629 Breaker Failure 1 Breaker Status 2 Phase B 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0
862B Breaker Failure 1 Breaker Status 2 Phase C 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0
862D ...Repeated for Breaker Failure 2
865A ...Repeated for Breaker Failure 3
8687 ...Repeated for Breaker Failure 4
86B4 ...Repeated for Breaker Failure 5
86E1 ...Repeated for Breaker Failure 6
FlexState Settings (Read/Write Setting)
8800 FlexState Parameters (256 items) 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0
Digital Elements (Read/Write Setting) (48 modules)
8A00 Digital Element 1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
8A01 Digital Element 1 Name --- --- --- F203 “Dig Element
1“
8A09 Digital Element 1 Input 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0
8A0B Digital Element 1 Pickup Delay 0 to 999999.999 s 0.001 F003 0
8A0D Digital Element 1 Reset Delay 0 to 999999.999 s 0.001 F003 0
8A0F Digital Element 1 Block 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0
8A11 Digital Element 1 Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
8A12 Digital Element 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
8A13 Digital Element 1 Pickup LED 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 1 (Enabled)
8A14 Reserved (2 items) --- --- --- F001 0
8A16 ...Repeated for Digital Element 2
8A2C ...Repeated for Digital Element 3
8A6E ...Repeated for Digital Element 6
8A9A ...Repeated for Digital Element 8
8AB0 ...Repeated for Digital Element 9
8AC6 ...Repeated for Digital Element 10
8ADC ...Repeated for Digital Element 11
8AF2 ...Repeated for Digital Element 12
8B08 ...Repeated for Digital Element 13
8B1E ...Repeated for Digital Element 14


8B4A ...Repeated for Digital Element 16
8B8C ...Repeated for Digital Element 19
B 8BA2
8BB8
...Repeated for Digital Element 20
...Repeated for Digital Element 21
8BCE ...Repeated for Digital Element 22
8BE4 ...Repeated for Digital Element 23
8BFA ...Repeated for Digital Element 24
8C10 ...Repeated for Digital Element 25
8C3C ...Repeated for Digital Element 27
8C7E ...Repeated for Digital Element 30
8CAA ...Repeated for Digital Element 32
8CC0 ...Repeated for Digital Element 33
8CD6 ...Repeated for Digital Element 34
8CEC ...Repeated for Digital Element 35
8D02 ...Repeated for Digital Element 36
8D2E ...Repeated for Digital Element 38
8D5A ...Repeated for Digital Element 40
8D9C ...Repeated for Digital Element 43
8DB2 ...Repeated for Digital Element 44
8DC8 ...Repeated for Digital Element 45
8DDE ...Repeated for Digital Element 46
8DF4 ...Repeated for Digital Element 47
8E0A ...Repeated for Digital Element 48
Trip Bus (Read/Write Setting) (6 modules)
8ED0 Trip Bus 1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
8ED1 Trip Bus 1 Block 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0
8ED3 Trip Bus 1 Pickup Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 0
8ED4 Trip Bus 1 Reset Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 0
8ED5 Trip Bus 1 Input (16 items) 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0
8EF5 Trip Bus 1 Latching 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
8EF6 Trip Bus 1 Reset 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0
8EF8 Trip Bus 1 Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
8EF9 Trip Bus 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
8EFA Reserved (8 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F001 0
8F02 ...Repeated for Trip Bus 2
8FCA ...Repeated for Trip Bus 6


FlexElement (Read/Write Setting) (8 modules)
9000 FlexElement 1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
9001 FlexElement 1 Name --- --- --- F206 “FxE 1”
9004 FlexElement 1 InputP 0 to 65535 --- 1 F600 0
9005
9006
FlexElement 1 InputM
FlexElement 1 Compare
0 to 65535
0 to 1
---
---
1
1
F600
F516
0
0 (LEVEL)
B
9007 FlexElement 1 Input 0 to 1 --- 1 F515 0 (SIGNED)
9008 FlexElement 1 Direction 0 to 1 --- 1 F517 0 (OVER)
9009 FlexElement 1 Hysteresis 0.1 to 50 % 0.1 F001 30
900A FlexElement 1 Pickup -90 to 90 pu 0.001 F004 1000
900C FlexElement 1 DeltaT Units 0 to 2 --- 1 F518 0
(Milliseconds)
900D FlexElement 1 DeltaT 20 to 86400 --- 1 F003 20
900F FlexElement 1 Pickup Delay 0 to 65.535 s 0.001 F001 0
9010 FlexElement 1 Reset Delay 0 to 65.535 s 0.001 F001 0
9011 FlexElement 1 Block 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0
9013 FlexElement 1 Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
9014 FlexElement 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
9015 ...Repeated for FlexElement 2
902A ...Repeated for FlexElement 3
903F ...Repeated for FlexElement 4
907E ...Repeated for FlexElement 7
DCmA Outputs (Read/Write Setting) (24 modules)
9360 DCmA Output 1 Source 0 to 65535 --- 1 F600 0
9361 DCmA Output 1 Range 0 to 2 --- 1 F522 0 (–1 to 1 mA)
9362 DCmA Output 1 Minimum –90 to 90 pu 0.001 F004 0
9364 DCmA Output 1 Maximum –90 to 90 pu 0.001 F004 1000
9366 ...Repeated for DCmA Output 2
936C ...Repeated for DCmA Output 3
937E ...Repeated for DCmA Output 6
938A ...Repeated for DCmA Output 8
939C ...Repeated for DCmA Output 11
93A2 ...Repeated for DCmA Output 12
93A8 ...Repeated for DCmA Output 13
93AE ...Repeated for DCmA Output 14
93B4 ...Repeated for DCmA Output 15
93BA ...Repeated for DCmA Output 16
93C0 ...Repeated for DCmA Output 17
93C6 ...Repeated for DCmA Output 18
93CC ...Repeated for DCmA Output 19
93D2 ...Repeated for DCmA Output 20
93D8 ...Repeated for DCmA Output 21


93DE ...Repeated for DCmA Output 22
93E4 ...Repeated for DCmA Output 23
93EA ...Repeated for DCmA Output 24
Direct Input/Output Names (Read/Write Setting) (32 modules)
B 9400
9406
Direct Input 1 Name
Direct Output 1 Name
0 to 96
1 to 96
---
---
1
1
F205
F205
“Dir Ip 1”
“Dir Out 1”
940C ...Repeated for Direct Input/Output 2
9418 ...Repeated for Direct Input/Output 3
94A8 ...Repeated for Direct Input/Output 15
94B4 ...Repeated for Direct Input/Output 16
94C0 ...Repeated for Direct Input/Output 17
94CC ...Repeated for Direct Input/Output 18
94D8 ...Repeated for Direct Input/Output 19
94E4 ...Repeated for Direct Input/Output 20
94F0 ...Repeated for Direct Input/Output 21
94FC ...Repeated for Direct Input/Output 22
IEC 61850 Received Integers (Read/Write Setting) (16 modules)
98A0 IEC 61850 GOOSE uinteger 1 Default Value 0 to 429496295 --- 1 F003 1000
98A2 IEC 61850 GOOSE uinteger Input 1 Mode 0 to 1 --- 1 F491 0 (Default
Value)
98A3 ...Repeated for IEC61850 GOOSE uinteger 2
98AC ...Repeated for IEC61850 GOOSE uinteger 5
98AF ...Repeated for IEC61850 GOOSE uinteger 6
98B2 ...Repeated for IEC61850 GOOSE uinteger 7
98BB ...Repeated for IEC61850 GOOSE uinteger 10


98BE ...Repeated for IEC61850 GOOSE uinteger 11
98C1 ...Repeated for IEC61850 GOOSE uinteger 12
98CA
98CD
...Repeated for IEC61850 GOOSE uinteger 15
...Repeated for IEC61850 GOOSE uinteger 16
B
FlexElement Actual Values (Read Only) (8 modules)
9900 FlexElement 1 Actual -2147483.647 to --- 0.001 F004 0
2147483.647
2147483.647
2147483.647
2147483.647
2147483.647
990A FlexElement 6 Actual -2147483.647 to --- 0.001 F004 0
2147483.647
990C FlexElement 7 Actual -2147483.647 to --- 0.001 F004 0
2147483.647
990E FlexElement 8 Actual -2147483.647 to --- 0.001 F004 0
2147483.647
Teleprotection Inputs/Outputs Commands (Read/Write Command)
9980 Teleprotection Clear Lost Packets 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 0 (No)
Teleprotection Inputs/Outputs (Read/Write Settings)
9990 Teleprotection Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
9991 Teleprotection Number of Terminals 2 to 3 --- 1 F001 2
9992 Teleprotection Number of Channels 1 to 2 --- 1 F001 1
9993 Teleprotection Local Relay ID 0 to 255 --- 1 F001 0
9994 Teleprotection Terminal 1 ID 0 to 255 --- 1 F001 0
9995 Teleprotection Terminal 2 ID 0 to 255 --- 1 F001 0
9A00 Teleprotection Input 1-n Default States (16 items) 0 to 3 --- 1 F086 0 (Off)
9A10 Teleprotection Input 2-n Default States (16 items) 0 to 3 --- 1 F086 0 (Off)
9A20 Teleprotection Output 1-n Operand (16 items) 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0
9A40 Teleprotection Output 2-n Operand (16 items) 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0
Teleprotection Channel Tests (Read Only)
9AA0 Teleprotection Channel 1 Status 0 to 2 --- 1 F134 1 (OK)
9AA1 Teleprotection Channel 1 Number of Lost Packets 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
9AA2 Teleprotection Channel 2 Status 0 to 2 --- 1 F134 2 (n/a)
9AA3 Teleprotection Channel 2 Number of Lost Packets 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
9AA4 Teleprotection Network Status 0 to 2 --- 1 F134 2 (n/a)
9AAF Teleprotection Channel 1 Input States 0 to 1 --- 1 F500 0
9AB0 Teleprotection Channel 2 Input States 0 to 1 --- 1 F500 0
9AC0 Teleprotection Input 1 States, 1 per register (16 0 to 1 --- 1 F108 0 (Off)
items)
9AD0 Teleprotection Input 2 States, 1 per register (16 0 to 1 --- 1 F108 0 (Off)
items)
Selector Switch Actual Values (Read Only)
A210 Selector Switch 1 Position 1 to 7 --- 1 F001 0
A211 Selector Switch 2 Position 1 to 7 --- 1 F001 1
Selector Switch Settings (Read/Write) (2 modules)


A280 Selector 1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
A281 Selector 1 Range 1 to 7 --- 1 F001 7
A282 Selector 1 Timeout 3 to 60 s 0.1 F001 50
A283 Selector 1 Step Up 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0
B A285
A286
Selector 1 Step Mode
Selector 1 Acknowledge
0 to 1
0 to 4294967295
---
---
1
1
F083
F300
0 (Time-out)
0
A288 Selector 1 Bit0 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0
A28A Selector 1 Bit1 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0
A28C Selector 1 Bit2 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0
A28E Selector 1 Bit Mode 0 to 1 --- 1 F083 0 (Time-out)
A28F Selector 1 Bit Acknowledge 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0
A291 Selector 1 Power Up Mode 0 to 2 --- 1 F084 0 (Restore)
A292 Selector 1 Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
A293 Selector 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
A294 Reserved (10 items) --- --- 1 F001 0
A29E ...Repeated for Selector 2
Digital Counter (Read/Write Setting) (8 modules)
A300 Digital Counter 1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
A301 Digital Counter 1 Name --- --- --- F205 “Counter 1"
A307 Digital Counter 1 Units --- --- --- F206 (none)
A30A Digital Counter 1 Block 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0
A30C Digital Counter 1 Up 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0
A30E Digital Counter 1 Down 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0
A311 Digital Counter 1 Preset –2147483647 to --- 1 F004 0
2147483647
A313 Digital Counter 1 Compare –2147483647 to --- 1 F004 0
2147483647
A315 Digital Counter 1 Reset 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0
A317 Digital Counter 1 Freeze/Reset 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0
A319 Digital Counter 1 Freeze/Count 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0
A31B Digital Counter 1 Set To Preset 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0
A31D Reserved (11 items) --- --- --- F001 0
A328 ...Repeated for Digital Counter 2
A3A0 ...Repeated for Digital Counter 5
A3C8 ...Repeated for Digital Counter 6
A3F0 ...Repeated for Digital Counter 7
FlexCurves C and D (Read/Write Setting)
A600 FlexCurve C (120 items) 0 to 65535 ms 1 F011 0
A680 FlexCurve D (120 items) 0 to 65535 ms 1 F011 0
Non Volatile Latches (Read/Write Setting) (16 modules)
A700 Non-Volatile Latch 1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
A701 Non-Volatile Latch 1 Type 0 to 1 --- 1 F519 0 (Reset
Dominant)
A702 Non-Volatile Latch 1 Set 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0
A704 Non-Volatile Latch 1 Reset 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0
A706 Non-Volatile Latch 1 Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
A707 Non-Volatile Latch 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)


A708 Reserved (4 items) --- --- --- F001 0
A70C ...Repeated for Non-Volatile Latch 2
A718 ...Repeated for Non-Volatile Latch 3
A730
A73C
...Repeated for Non-Volatile Latch 5
...Repeated for Non-Volatile Latch 6
B
A7A8 ...Repeated for Non-Volatile Latch 15
A7B4 ...Repeated for Non-Volatile Latch 16
IEC 61850 Received Analog Settings (Read/Write Setting) (32 modules)
AA00 IEC 61850 GOOSE Analog 1 Default Value –1000000 to 1000000 --- 0.001 F060 1000
AA02 IEC 61850 GOOSE Analog Input 1 Mode 0 to 1 --- 1 F491 0 (Default
Value)
AA03 IEC 61850 GOOSE Analog Input 1 Units --- --- --- F207 (none)
AA05 IEC 61850 GOOSE Analog Input 1 Per-Unit Base 0 to 999999999.999 --- 0.001 F060 1
AA07 ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GOOSE Analog Input 2
AA0E ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GOOSE Analog Input 3
AA1C ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GOOSE Analog Input 5
AA2A ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GOOSE Analog Input 7
AA3F ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GOOSE Analog Input
10
AA46 ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GOOSE Analog Input
11
AA4D ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GOOSE Analog Input
12
13
AA5B ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GOOSE Analog Input
14
15
16
17
18
AA7E ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GOOSE Analog Input
19
20
AA8C ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GOOSE Analog Input
21


22
AA9A ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GOOSE Analog Input
23
AAA1 ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GOOSE Analog Input
B AAA8
24
...Repeated for IEC 61850 GOOSE Analog Input
25
AAAF ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GOOSE Analog Input
26
AAB6 ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GOOSE Analog Input
27
AABD ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GOOSE Analog Input
28
AAC4 ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GOOSE Analog Input
29
AACB ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GOOSE Analog Input
30
AAD2 ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GOOSE Analog Input
31
AAD9 ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GOOSE Analog Input
32
IEC 61850 XCBR Configuration (Read/Write Settings and Commands) (6 modules)
AB00 Operand for IEC 61850 XCBR1.ST.Loc status 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0
AB02 Command to Clear XCBR1 OpCnt (Operation 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 0 (No)
Counter
AB03 Operand for IEC 61850 XCBR Check Sync 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0
Release
AB05 Operand for IEC 61850 XCBR Open Interlock 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0
AB07 Operand for IEC 61850 XCBR Close Interlock 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0
AB09 Operand for IEC 61850 XCBR Pos ct1Model 0 to 4 --- 1 F001 2
AB0A Operand for IEC 61850 XCBR Pos sboTimeout 2 to 60 s 1 F001 30
AB0B ...Repeated for Module 2
AB16 ...Repeated for Module 3
AB2C ...Repeated for Module 5
IEC 61850 LN Name Prefixes (Read/Write Settings)
AB48 IEC 61850 Logical Node LPHD1 Name Prefix 0 to 65534 --- 1 F206 (none)
AB4B IEC 61850 Logical Node PIOCx Name Prefix (72 0 to 65534 --- 1 F206 (none)
items)
AC23 IEC 61850 Logical Node PTOCx Name Prefix (24 0 to 65534 --- 1 F206 (none)
items)
AC6B IEC 61850 Logical Node PTUVx Name Prefix (13 0 to 65534 --- 1 F206 (none)
items)
AC92 IEC 61850 Logical Node PTOVx Name Prefix (10 0 to 65534 --- 1 F206 (none)
items)
ACB6 IEC 61850 Logical Node PDISx Name Prefix (10 0 to 65534 --- 1 F206 (none)
items)
ACD4 IEC 61850 Logical Node RBRFx Name Prefix (24 0 to 65534 --- 1 F206 (none)
items)
AD1C IEC 61850 Logical Node RPSBx Name Prefix 0 to 65534 --- 1 F206 (none)
AD1F IEC 61850 Logical Node RRECx Name Prefix (6 0 to 65534 --- 1 F206 (none)
items)
AD31 IEC 61850 Logical Node MMXUx Name Prefix (6 0 to 65534 --- 1 F206 (none)
items)


AD43 IEC 61850 Logical Node GGIOx Name Prefix (5 0 to 65534 --- 1 F206 (none)
items)
AD52 IEC 61850 Logical Node RFLOx Name Prefix (5 0 to 65534 --- 1 F206 (none)
items)
AD61 IEC 61850 Logical Node XCBRx Name Prefix (6 0 to 65534 --- 1 F206 (none)
items)
AD73 IEC 61850 Logical Node PTRCx Name Prefix (6 0 to 65534 --- 1 F206 (none) B
items)
AD85 IEC 61850 Logical Node PDIFx Name Prefix (4 0 to 65534 --- 1 F206 (none)
items)
AD91 IEC 61850 Logical Node MMXNx Name Prefix (37 0 to 65534 --- 1 F206 (none)
items)
AE00 IEC 61850 Logical Node CSWIx Name Prefix (30 0 to 65534 --- 1 F206 (none)
items)
AE5A IEC 61850 Logical Node XSWIx Name Prefix (24 0 to 65534 --- 1 F206 (none)
items)
IEC 61850 GGIO4 General Analog Configuration Settings (Read/Write)
AF00 Number of Analog Input Points in GGIO4 4 to 32 --- 4 F001 4
IEC 61850 GGIO4 Analog Input Points Configuration Settings (Read/Write Setting) (32 modules)
AF10 IEC 61850 GGIO4 Analog Input 1 Value --- --- --- F600 0
AF11 IEC 61850 GGIO4 Analog Input 1 Deadband 0.001 to 100 % 0.001 F003 100000
AF13 IEC 61850 GGIO4 Analog Input 1 Minimum –1000000000000 to --- 0.001 F060 0
1000000000000
AF15 IEC 61850 GGIO4 Analog Input 1 Maximum –1000000000000 to --- 0.001 F060 1000000
1000000000000
AF17 ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GGIO4 Analog Input 2
AF1E ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GGIO4 Analog Input 3
AF2C ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GGIO4 Analog Input 5
AF3A ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GGIO4 Analog Input 7
AF4F ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GGIO4 Analog Input 10
AF5D ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GGIO4 Analog Input 12
AF6B ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GGIO4 Analog Input 14
AF8E ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GGIO4 Analog Input 19
AF9C ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GGIO4 Analog Input 21
AFA3 ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GGIO4 Analog Input 22
AFAA ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GGIO4 Analog Input 23
AFB1 ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GGIO4 Analog Input 24
AFB8 ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GGIO4 Analog Input 25
AFBF ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GGIO4 Analog Input 26
AFC6 ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GGIO4 Analog Input 27
AFCD ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GGIO4 Analog Input 28
AFD4 ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GGIO4 Analog Input 29


AFDB ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GGIO4 Analog Input 30
AFE2 ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GGIO4 Analog Input 31
AFE9 ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GGIO4 Analog Input 32
IEC 61850 GOOSE/GSSE Configuration (Read/Write Setting)
B B01C
B01D
Default GOOSE/GSSE Update Time
IEC 61850 GSSE Function (GsEna)
1 to 60
0 to 1
s
---
1
1
F001
F102
60
1 (Enabled)
B01E IEC 61850 GSSE ID --- --- --- F209 “GSSEOut”
B03F IEC 61850 GOOSE Function (GoEna) 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
B040 IEC 61850 GSSE Destination MAC Address --- --- --- F072 0
B043 IEC 61850 Standard GOOSE ID --- --- --- F209 “GOOSEOut”
B064 IEC 61850 Standard GOOSE Destination MAC --- --- --- F072 0
Address
B067 IEC 61850 GOOSE VLAN Transmit Priority 0 to 7 --- 1 F001 4
B068 IEC 61850 GOOSE VLAN ID 0 to 4095 --- 1 F001 0
B069 IEC 61850 GOOSE ETYPE APPID 0 to 16383 --- 1 F001 0
B06A Reserved (2 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F001 0
IEC 61850 Server Configuration (Read/Write Settings/Commands)
B06C TCP Port Number for the IEC 61850 / MMS 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 102
Protocol
B06D IEC 61850 Logical Device Name --- --- --- F213 “IEDName”
B07D IEC 61850 Logical Device Instance --- --- --- F213 “LDInst”
B08D IEC 61850 LPHD Location 0 to 65534 --- 1 F204 “Location”
B0B5 Include non-IEC 61850 Data 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
B0B6 IEC 61850 Server Data Scanning Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
B0B7 IEC 61850 LPHD Latitude -90 to 90 degrees 0.001 F004 0
B0B9 IEC 61850 LPHD DC PhyNam Longitude -180 to 180 degrees 0.001 F004 0
B9BB IEC 61850 LPHD DC PhyNam Altitude 0 to 10000 m 1 F003 0
B0BD Reserved (3 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F001 0
IEC 61850 MMXU Deadbands (Read/Write Setting) (6 modules)
B0C0 IEC 61850 MMXU TotW Deadband 1 0.001 to 100 % 0.001 F003 10000
B0C2 IEC 61850 MMXU TotVAr Deadband 1 0.001 to 100 % 0.001 F003 10000
B0C4 IEC 61850 MMXU TotVA Deadband 1 0.001 to 100 % 0.001 F003 10000
B0C6 IEC 61850 MMXU TotPF Deadband 1 0.001 to 100 % 0.001 F003 10000
B0C8 IEC 61850 MMXU Hz Deadband 1 0.001 to 100 % 0.001 F003 10000
B0CA IEC 61850 MMXU PPV.phsAB Deadband 1 0.001 to 100 % 0.001 F003 10000
B0CC IEC 61850 MMXU PPV.phsBC Deadband 1 0.001 to 100 % 0.001 F003 10000
B0CE IEC 61850 MMXU PPV.phsCA Deadband 1 0.001 to 100 % 0.001 F003 10000
B0D0 IEC 61850 MMXU PhV.phsA Deadband 1 0.001 to 100 % 0.001 F003 10000
B0D2 IEC 61850 MMXU PhV.phsB Deadband 1 0.001 to 100 % 0.001 F003 10000
B0D4 IEC 61850 MMXU PhV.phsC Deadband 1 0.001 to 100 % 0.001 F003 10000
B0D6 IEC 61850 MMXU A.phsA Deadband 1 0.001 to 100 % 0.001 F003 10000
B0D8 IEC 61850 MMXU A.phsB Deadband 1 0.001 to 100 % 0.001 F003 10000
B0DA IEC 61850 MMXU A.phsC Deadband 1 0.001 to 100 % 0.001 F003 10000
B0DC IEC 61850 MMXU A.neut Deadband 1 0.001 to 100 % 0.001 F003 10000
B0DE IEC 61850 MMXU W.phsA Deadband 1 0.001 to 100 % 0.001 F003 10000
B0E0 IEC 61850 MMXU W.phsB Deadband 1 0.001 to 100 % 0.001 F003 10000
B0E2 IEC 61850 MMXU W.phsC Deadband 1 0.001 to 100 % 0.001 F003 10000
B0E4 IEC 61850 MMXU VAr.phsA Deadband 1 0.001 to 100 % 0.001 F003 10000
B0E6 IEC 61850 MMXU VAr.phsB Deadband 1 0.001 to 100 % 0.001 F003 10000
B0E8 IEC 61850 MMXU VAr.phsC Deadband 1 0.001 to 100 % 0.001 F003 10000


B0EA IEC 61850 MMXU VA.phsA Deadband 1 0.001 to 100 % 0.001 F003 10000
B0EC IEC 61850 MMXU VA.phsB Deadband 1 0.001 to 100 % 0.001 F003 10000
B0EE IEC 61850 MMXU VA.phsC Deadband 1 0.001 to 100 % 0.001 F003 10000
B0F0 IEC 61850 MMXU PF.phsA Deadband 1 0.001 to 100 % 0.001 F003 10000
B0F2
B0F4
IEC 61850 MMXU PF.phsB Deadband 1
IEC 61850 MMXU PF.phsC Deadband 1
0.001 to 100
0.001 to 100
%
%
0.001
0.001
F003
F003
10000
10000
B
B0F6 ...Repeated for Deadband 2
B12C ...Repeated for Deadband 3
B162 ...Repeated for Deadband 4
B198 ...Repeated for Deadband 5
B1CE ...Repeated for Deadband 6
IEC 61850 Received Analogs (Read Only) (32 modules)
B210 IEC 61850 Received Analog 1 -1000000000000 to --- 0.001 F060 0
1000000000000
B212 ...Repeated for Received Analog 2
B21A ...Repeated for Received Analog 6
B21C ...Repeated for Received Analog 7
B21E ...Repeated for Received Analog 8
IEC 61850 Configurable Report Settings (Read/Write Setting)
B290 IEC 61850 Configurable Reports Dataset Items (64 0 to 848 --- 1 F615 0 (None)
items)


IEC 61850 XSWI Configuration (Read/Write Setting) (24 modules)
B370 FlexLogic Operand for IEC 61850 XSWI.ST.Loc 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0
Status
B373 ...Repeated for module number 2
B B379 ...Repeated for module number 4
B37C ...Repeated for module number 5
B37F ...Repeated for module number 6
B38B ...Repeated for module number 10
B38E ...Repeated for module number 11
B39A ...Repeated for module number 15
B39D ...Repeated for module number 16
B3A0 ...Repeated for module number 17
B3AC ...Repeated for module number 21
B3AF ...Repeated for module number 22
B3B2 ...Repeated for module number 23
IEC 61850 XSWI Configuration (Read/Write Command) (24 modules)
B372 Command to Clear XSWI OpCnt (Operation 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 0 (No)
Counter)
IEC 61850 GGIO1 Configuration Settings (Read/Write Setting)
B400 Number of Status Indications in GGIO1 8 to 128 --- 8 F001 8
B402 IEC 61850 GGIO1 Indication FlexLogic operands 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0
(128 items)
IEC 61850 Configurable GOOSE Transmission (Read/Write Setting) (8 modules)
B5A0 IEC 61850 Configurable GOOSE Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 1 (Enabled)
(GoEna)
B5A1 IEC 61850 Configurable GOOSE ID --- --- --- F209 “GOOSEOut_
x_”
B5C2 Configurable GOOSE Destination MAC Address --- --- --- F072 0
B5C5 IEC 61850 Configurable GOOSE VLAN Transmit 0 to 7 --- 1 F001 4
Priority
B5C6 IEC 61850 Configurable GOOSE VLAN ID 0 to 4095 --- 1 F001 0
B5C7 IEC 61850 Configurable GOOSE ETYPE APPID 0 to 16383 --- 1 F001 0
B5C8 IEC 61850 Configurable GOOSE ConfRev 1 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 1
(Configuration Revision)
B5CA IEC 61850 Configurable GOOSE Retransmission 0 to 3 --- 1 F611 3 (Relaxed)
Curve
B5CB Configurable GOOSE Dataset Items for 0 to 1008 --- 1 F616 0 (None)
Transmission
(64 items)
B60B ...Repeated for module number 2
B6E1 ...Repeated for module number 4


B74C ...Repeated for module number 5
B88D ...Repeated for module number 8
IEC 61850 Configurable GOOSE Reception (Read/Write Setting) (16 modules)
B900 Configurable GOOSE Dataset Items for Reception 0 to 197 --- 1 F233 0 (None)
B
(32 items)
B9C0 ...Repeated for module number 7
B9E0 ...Repeated for module number 8
BA00 ...Repeated for module number 9
BAA0 ...Repeated for module number 14
BAC0 ...Repeated for module number 15
BAE0 ...Repeated for module number 16
Contact Inputs (Read/Write Setting) (96 modules)
BB00 Contact Input 1 Name --- --- --- F205 “Cont Ip 1“
BB06 Contact Input 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
BB07 Contact Input 1 Debounce Time 0 to 16 ms 0.5 F001 20
BB08 ...Repeated for Contact Input 2
BBA0 ...Repeated for Contact Input 21
BBA8 ...Repeated for Contact Input 22
BBB0 ...Repeated for Contact Input 23
BBB8 ...Repeated for Contact Input 24
BBC0 ...Repeated for Contact Input 25


BBC8 ...Repeated for Contact Input 26
BBD0 ...Repeated for Contact Input 27
BBD8 ...Repeated for Contact Input 28
BBE0 ...Repeated for Contact Input 29
B BBE8
BBF0
...Repeated for Contact Input 30
BBF8 ...Repeated for Contact Input 32
BC00 ...Repeated for Contact Input 33
BCA0 ...Repeated for Contact Input 53
BCA8 ...Repeated for Contact Input 54
BCB0 ...Repeated for Contact Input 55
BCB8 ...Repeated for Contact Input 56
BCC0 ...Repeated for Contact Input 57
BCC8 ...Repeated for Contact Input 58
BCD0 ...Repeated for Contact Input 59
BCD8 ...Repeated for Contact Input 60
BCE0 ...Repeated for Contact Input 61
BCE8 ...Repeated for Contact Input 62
BCF0 ...Repeated for Contact Input 63
BCF8 ...Repeated for Contact Input 64
BD00 ...Repeated for Contact Input 65


BD70
BD78
B
BDA0 ...Repeated for Contact Input 85
BDA8 ...Repeated for Contact Input 86
BDB0 ...Repeated for Contact Input 87
BDB8 ...Repeated for Contact Input 88
BDC0 ...Repeated for Contact Input 89
BDC8 ...Repeated for Contact Input 90
BDD0 ...Repeated for Contact Input 91
BDD8 ...Repeated for Contact Input 92
BDE0 ...Repeated for Contact Input 93
BDE8 ...Repeated for Contact Input 94
BDF0 ...Repeated for Contact Input 95
BDF8 ...Repeated for Contact Input 96
Contact Input Thresholds (Read/Write Setting)
BE00 Contact Input n Threshold, n = 1 to 48 (48 items) 0 to 3 --- 1 F128 1 (33 Vdc)
Virtual Inputs (Read/Write Setting) (64 modules)
BE30 Virtual Input 1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
BE31 Virtual Input 1 Name --- --- --- F205 “Virt Ip 1“
BE37 Virtual Input 1 Programmed Type 0 to 1 --- 1 F127 0 (Latched)
BE38 Virtual Input 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
BE39 Reserved (3 items) --- --- --- F001 0
BE3C ...Repeated for Virtual Input 2
BE48 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 3
BEA8 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 11
BEB4 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 12
BEC0 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 13
BECC ...Repeated for Virtual Input 14
BED8 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 15
BEE4 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 16
BEF0 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 17
BEFC ...Repeated for Virtual Input 18
BF08 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 19


BF2C ...Repeated for Virtual Input 22
B BF50
BF5C
...Repeated for Virtual Input 25
...Repeated for Virtual Input 26
BF8C ...Repeated for Virtual Input 30
BFA4 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 32
BFB0 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 33
BFBC ...Repeated for Virtual Input 34
BFC8 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 35
BFD4 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 36
BFE0 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 37
BFEC ...Repeated for Virtual Input 38
BFF8 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 39
C004 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 40
C01C ...Repeated for Virtual Input 42
C0A0 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 53
C0AC ...Repeated for Virtual Input 54
C0B8 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 55
C0C4 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 56
C0D0 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 57
C0DC ...Repeated for Virtual Input 58
C0E8 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 59
C0F4 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 60
Virtual Outputs (Read/Write Setting) (96 modules)
C130 Virtual Output 1 Name --- --- --- F205 “Virt Op 1 “
C136 Virtual Output 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
C137 Reserved --- --- --- F001 0
C138 ...Repeated for Virtual Output 2


C160
C168
...Repeated for Virtual Output 7
B
C1A0 ...Repeated for Virtual Output 15
C1B0 ...Repeated for Virtual Output 17
C1C0 ...Repeated for Virtual Output 19
C1D0 ...Repeated for Virtual Output 21
C1E0 ...Repeated for Virtual Output 23
C1F0 ...Repeated for Virtual Output 25


B C2E8
C2F0
Mandatory (Read/Write Setting or Command)
C430 Test Mode Function 0 to 2 --- 1 F245 0 (Disabled)
C431 Force VFD and LED 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 0 (No)
C432 Test Mode Initiate 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 1


Clear Commands (Read/Write)
C434 Clear All Relay Records Command 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 0 (No)
Mandatory (Read Only)
C435 DSP Advanced Diagnostics Active 0 to 1 -- 1 F126 0 (No)
C436 Synchrophasor Feature Active
Mandatory (Read/Write Command)
0 to 1 -- 1 F126 0 (No)
B
C437 Relay Reboot Command 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 0 (No)
C438 Save Volatile Data 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 0 (No)
Clear Records (Read/Write Setting)
C452 Clear User Fault Reports Operand 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0
C454 Clear Event Records Operand 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0
C456 Clear Oscillography Operand 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0
C46C Clear Unauthorized Access Operand 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0
C470 Clear Platform Direct Input/Output Statistics 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0
Operand
C472 Reserved (13 items) --- --- --- F001 0
Platform Direct Outputs (Read/Write Setting) (32 modules)
C600 Direct Output 1 Operand 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0
C602 Direct Output 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
C603 ...Repeated for Direct Output 2
C60C ...Repeated for Direct Output 5
C60F ...Repeated for Direct Output 6
C61B ...Repeated for Direct Output 10
C61E ...Repeated for Direct Output 11
C62A ...Repeated for Direct Output 15
C62D ...Repeated for Direct Output 16
C63C ...Repeated for Direct Output 21
C63F ...Repeated for Direct Output 22
C64B ...Repeated for Direct Output 26
C64E ...Repeated for Direct Output 27
C65A ...Repeated for Direct Output 31
C65D ...Repeated for Direct Output 32


Reset (Read/Write Setting)
C750 FlexLogic operand which initiates a reset 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0
Control Pushbuttons (Read/Write Setting) (7 modules)
C760 Control Pushbutton 1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
B C761
C762
Control Pushbutton 1 Events
...Repeated for Control Pushbutton 2
0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
C764 ...Repeated for Control Pushbutton 3

C76A ...Repeated for Control Pushbutton 6
C76C ...Repeated for Control Pushbutton 7
Force Contact Inputs/Outputs (Read/Write Settings)
C7A0 Force Contact Input x State (96 items) 0 to 2 --- 1 F144 0 (Disabled)
C800 Force Contact Output x State (64 items) 0 to 3 --- 1 F131 0 (Disabled)
Direct Inputs/Outputs (Read/Write Setting)
C880 Direct Device ID 1 to 16 --- 1 F001 1
C881 Direct I/O Channel 1 Ring Configuration Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 0 (No)
C882 Platform Direct I/O Data Rate 64 to 128 kbps 64 F001 64
C883 Direct I/O Channel 2 Ring Configuration Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 0 (No)
C884 Platform Direct I/O Crossover Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
Direct Input/Output Commands (Read/Write Command)
C888 Direct Input/Output Clear Counters Command 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 0 (No)
Direct inputs (Read/Write Setting) (32 modules)
C890 Direct Input 1 Device Number 0 to 16 --- 1 F001 0
C891 Direct Input 1 Number 0 to 96 --- 1 F001 0
C892 Direct Input 1 Default State 0 to 3 --- 1 F086 0 (Off)
C893 Direct Input 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
C894 ...Repeated for Direct Input 2
C89C ...Repeated for Direct Input 4
C8A0 ...Repeated for Direct Input 5
C8AC ...Repeated for Direct Input 8
C8B0 ...Repeated for Direct Input 9
C8BC ...Repeated for Direct Input 12
C8C0 ...Repeated for Direct Input 13
C8CC ...Repeated for Direct Input 16
C8D0 ...Repeated for Direct Input 17
C8DC ...Repeated for Direct Input 20
C8E0 ...Repeated for Direct Input 21


C8EC ...Repeated for Direct Input 24
C8F0 ...Repeated for Direct Input 25
C8FC
C900
...Repeated for Direct Input 28
...Repeated for Direct Input 29
B
C90C ...Repeated for Direct Input 32
Direct Input/Output Alarms (Read/Write Setting)
CAD0 Direct Input/Output Channel 1 CRC Alarm Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
CAD1 Direct Input/Output Channel 1 CRC Alarm 100 to 10000 --- 1 F001 600
Message Count
Threshold
CAD3 Direct Input/Output Channel 1 CRC Alarm Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
CAD4 Reserved (4 items) 1 to 1000 --- 1 F001 10
CAD8 Direct Input/Output Channel 2 CRC Alarm Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
Message Count
CADA Direct Input/Output Channel 2 CRC Alarm 1 to 1000 --- 1 F001 10
Threshold
CADB Direct Input/Output Channel 2 CRC Alarm Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
CADC Reserved (4 items) 1 to 1000 --- 1 F001 10
CAE0 Direct Input/Output Ch 1 Unreturned Messages 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
Alarm Function
CAE1 Direct Input/Output Ch 1 Unreturned Messages 100 to 10000 --- 1 F001 600
Alarm Msg Count
Alarm Threshold
Alarm Events
CAE4 Reserved (4 items) 1 to 1000 --- 1 F001 10
Alarm Function
Alarm Msg Count
CAEA Direct Input/Output Ch 2 Unreturned Messages 1 to 1000 --- 1 F001 10
Alarm Threshold
CAEB Direct Input/Output Channel 2 Unreturned 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
Messages Alarm Events
CAEC Reserved (4 items) 1 to 1000 --- 1 F001 10
Remote Devices (Read/Write Setting) (16 modules)
CB00 Remote Device 1 GSSE/GOOSE Application ID --- --- --- F209 “Remote
(GOID) Device 1“
CB21 Remote Device 1 GOOSE Ethernet APPID 0 to 16383 --- 1 F001 0
CB22 Remote Device 1 GOOSE Dataset 0 to 16 --- 1 F184 0 (Fixed)
CB23 Remote Device 1 in PMU Scheme 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 0 (No)
CB24 Reserved 0 to 3 --- 1 F626 0 (None)
CB25 ...Repeated for Device 2
CB4A ...Repeated for Device 3
CB6F ...Repeated for Device 4
CB94 ...Repeated for Device 5
CBB9 ...Repeated for Device 6


CBDE ...Repeated for Device 7
CC03 ...Repeated for Device 8
CC28 ...Repeated for Device 9
CC4D ...Repeated for Device 10
B CC72
CC97
...Repeated for Device 11
...Repeated for Device 12
CCBC ...Repeated for Device 13
CCE1 ...Repeated for Device 14
CD06 ...Repeated for Device 15
CD2B ...Repeated for Device 16
Remote Inputs (Read/Write Setting) (32 modules)
CFA0 Remote Input 1 Device 1 to 32 --- 1 F001 1
CFA1 Remote Input 1 Bit Pair 0 to 96 --- 1 F156 0 (None)
CFA2 Remote Input 1 Default State 0 to 3 --- 1 F086 0 (Off)
CFA3 Remote Input 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
CFA4 Remote Input 1 Name 1 to 64 --- 1 F205 “Rem Ip 1”
CFAA ...Repeated for Remote Input 2
CFB4 ...Repeated for Remote Input 3
CFBE ...Repeated for Remote Input 4
CFC8 ...Repeated for Remote Input 5
CFD2 ...Repeated for Remote Input 6
CFDC ...Repeated for Remote Input 7
CFE6 ...Repeated for Remote Input 8
CFF0 ...Repeated for Remote Input 9
CFFA ...Repeated for Remote Input 10
D004 ...Repeated for Remote Input 11
D00E ...Repeated for Remote Input 12
D02C ...Repeated for Remote Input 15
D04A ...Repeated for Remote Input 18
D05E ...Repeated for Remote Input 20
D07C ...Repeated for Remote Input 23
D09A ...Repeated for Remote Input 26
D0A4 ...Repeated for Remote Input 27
D0AE ...Repeated for Remote Input 28
D0B8 ...Repeated for Remote Input 29
D0C2 ...Repeated for Remote Input 30
D0CC ...Repeated for Remote Input 31
D0D6 ...Repeated for Remote Input 32
Remote Output DNA Pairs (Read/Write Setting) (32 modules)
D220 Remote Output DNA 1 Operand 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0


D222 Remote Output DNA 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
D223 Reserved 0 to 1 --- 1 F001 0
D224 ...Repeated for Remote Output 2
D22C
D230
...Repeated for Remote Output 4
B
D23C ...Repeated for Remote Output 8
Remote Output UserSt Pairs (Read/Write Setting) (32 modules)
D2A0 Remote Output UserSt 1 Operand 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0
D2A2 Remote Output UserSt 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
D2A3 Reserved 0 to 1 --- 1 F001 0
D2A4 ...Repeated for Remote Output 2
D2A8 ...Repeated for Remote Output 3
D2AC ...Repeated for Remote Output 4
D2B0 ...Repeated for Remote Output 5
D2BC ...Repeated for Remote Output 8
D2C0 ...Repeated for Remote Output 9
D2CC ...Repeated for Remote Output 12
D2D0 ...Repeated for Remote Output 13


D2DC ...Repeated for Remote Output 16
D2E0 ...Repeated for Remote Output 17
B D2E4
D2E8
D2EC ...Repeated for Remote Output 20
D2F0 ...Repeated for Remote Output 21
D2FC ...Repeated for Remote Output 24
IEC 61850 GGIO2 Control Configuration (Read/Write Setting) (64 modules)
D320 IEC 61850 GGIO2.CF.SPCSO1.ctlModel Value 0 to 2 --- 1 F001 1
D32A IEC 61850 GGIO2.CF.SPCSO11.ctlModel Value 0 to 2 --- 1 F001 1
D32B IEC 61850 GGIO2.CF.SPCSO12.ctlModel Value 0 to 2 --- 1 F001 1
D32C IEC 61850 GGIO2.CF.SPCSO13.ctlModel Value 0 to 2 --- 1 F001 1
D32D IEC 61850 GGIO2.CF.SPCSO14.ctlModel Value 0 to 2 --- 1 F001 1
D32E IEC 61850 GGIO2.CF.SPCSO15.ctlModel Value 0 to 2 --- 1 F001 1
D32F IEC 61850 GGIO2.CF.SPCSO16.ctlModel Value 0 to 2 --- 1 F001 1


D341
D342
IEC 61850 GGIO2.CF.SPCSO34.ctlModel Value
IEC 61850 GGIO2.CF.SPCSO35.ctlModel Value
0 to 2
0 to 2
---
---
1
1
F001
F001
1
1
B
Remote Device Status (Read Only) (16 modules)
D360 Remote Device 1 StNum 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
D362 Remote Device 1 SqNum 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
D364 ...Repeated for Remote Device 2
D36C ...Repeated for Remote Device 4


B Contact Outputs (Read/Write Setting) (64 modules)

D3E0 Contact Output 1 Name --- --- --- F205 “Cont Op 1"
D3E6 Contact Output 1 Operation 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0
D3E8 Contact Output 1 Seal In 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0
D3EA Latching Output 1 Reset 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0
D3EC Contact Output 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 1 (Enabled)
D3ED Latching Output 1 Type 0 to 1 --- 1 F090 0 (Operate-
dominant)
D3EE Reserved --- --- --- F001 0
D3EF ...Repeated for Contact Output 2
D3FE ...Repeated for Contact Output 3
D40D ...Repeated for Contact Output 4
D41C ...Repeated for Contact Output 5
D42B ...Repeated for Contact Output 6
D43A ...Repeated for Contact Output 7
D449 ...Repeated for Contact Output 8
D4A3 ...Repeated for Contact Output 14
D4B2 ...Repeated for Contact Output 15
D4C1 ...Repeated for Contact Output 16
D4D0 ...Repeated for Contact Output 17
D4DF ...Repeated for Contact Output 18
D4EE ...Repeated for Contact Output 19
D4FD ...Repeated for Contact Output 20
D50C ...Repeated for Contact Output 21
D5C0 ...Repeated for Contact Output 33
D5CF ...Repeated for Contact Output 34
D5DE ...Repeated for Contact Output 35
D5ED ...Repeated for Contact Output 36
D5FC ...Repeated for Contact Output 37


D656
D665
...Repeated for Contact Output 43
...Repeated for Contact Output 44
B
D6BF ...Repeated for Contact Output 50
D6CE ...Repeated for Contact Output 51
D6DD ...Repeated for Contact Output 52
D6EC ...Repeated for Contact Output 53
D6FB ...Repeated for Contact Output 54
DCmA Inputs (Read/Write Setting) (24 modules)
D7A0 DCmA Inputs 1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
D7A1 DCmA Inputs 1 ID --- --- --- F205 “DCMA Ip 1"
D7A7 Reserved 1 (4 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
D7AB DCmA Inputs 1 Units --- --- --- F206 “mA”
D7AE DCmA Inputs 1 Range 0 to 6 --- 1 F173 6 (4 to 20 mA)
D7AF DCmA Inputs 1 Minimum Value -9999.999 to 9999.999 --- 0.001 F004 4000
D7B1 DCmA Inputs 1 Maximum Value -9999.999 to 9999.999 --- 0.001 F004 20000
D7B3 ...Repeated for DCmA Inputs 2
D7C6 ...Repeated for DCmA Inputs 3
D7D9 ...Repeated for DCmA Inputs 4
D7EC ...Repeated for DCmA Inputs 5
D7FF ...Repeated for DCmA Inputs 6
D812 ...Repeated for DCmA Inputs 7
D84B ...Repeated for DCmA Inputs 10
D85E ...Repeated for DCmA Inputs 11
D8AA ...Repeated for DCmA Inputs 15
D8BD ...Repeated for DCmA Inputs 16


D8D0 ...Repeated for DCmA Inputs 17
D8E3 ...Repeated for DCmA Inputs 18
D8F6 ...Repeated for DCmA Inputs 19
B D91C
D92F
...Repeated for DCmA Inputs 21
...Repeated for DCmA Inputs 22
DNP/IEC Points (Read/Write Setting)
D968 DNP/IEC 60870-5-104 Binary Input Points (256 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F300 0
items)
DB68 DNP/IEC 60870-5-104 Analog Input Points (256 0 to 65535 --- 1 F600 0
items)
Settings File Template (Read/Write Setting)
ED00 FlexLogic Displays Active 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 1 (Enabled)
ED01 Template Access --- --- --- F205 (none)
Setting File Template (Read Only Non-Volatile)
ED07 Last Settings Change Date 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F050 0
Settings File Template (Read/Write Setting)
ED09 Template Bitmask (750 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0

B.4.2 DATA FORMATS
F001 F060
UR_UINT16 UNSIGNED 16 BIT INTEGER FLOATING_POINT IEEE FLOATING POINT (32 bits)
F002
UR_SINT16 SIGNED 16 BIT INTEGER
F072
HEX6 6 BYTES - 12 ASCII DIGITS
B
F003 F073
UR_UINT32 UNSIGNED 32 BIT INTEGER (2 registers) HEX8 8 BYTES - 16 ASCII DIGITS
High order word is stored in the first register.
Low order word is stored in the second register.
F074
HEX20 20 BYTES - 40 ASCII DIGITS
F004
UR_SINT32 SIGNED 32 BIT INTEGER (2 registers)
F083
High order word is stored in the first register. ENUMERATION: SELECTOR MODES
Low order word is stored in the second register.
0 = Time-Out, 1 = Acknowledge
F011
F084
UR_UINT16 FLEXCURVE DATA (120 points)
ENUMERATION: SELECTOR POWER UP
A FlexCurve is an array of 120 consecutive data points (x, y) that
0 = Restore, 1 = Synchronize, 2 = Sync/Restore
are interpolated to generate a smooth curve. The y-axis is the
user-defined trip or operation time setting; the x-axis is the pickup
ratio and is pre-defined. See format F119 for a listing of the pickup
F086
ratios; the enumeration value for the pickup ratio indicates the off-
ENUMERATION: CONTACT INPUT DEFAULT STATE
set into the FlexCurve base address where the corresponding time
value is stored. 0 = Off, 1 = On, 2= Latest/Off, 3 = Latest/On
F050 F090
UR_UINT32 TIME and DATE (UNSIGNED 32 BIT INTEGER) ENUMERATION: LATCHING OUTPUT TYPE
Gives the current time in seconds elapsed since 00:00:00 January 0 = Operate-dominant, 1 = Reset-dominant
1, 1970.
F100
F051 ENUMERATION: VT CONNECTION TYPE
UR_UINT32 DATE in SR format (alternate format for F050)
0 = Wye, 1 = Delta
First 16 bits are Month/Day (MM/DD/xxxx).
Month: 1=January, 2=February,...,12=December.
Day: 1 to 31 in steps of 1. F101
Last 16 bits are Year (xx/xx/YYYY): 1970 to 2106 in steps of 1. ENUMERATION: MESSAGE DISPLAY INTENSITY
0 = 25%, 1 = 50%, 2 = 75%, 3 = 100%
F052
UR_UINT32 TIME in SR format (alternate format for F050)
F102
First 16 bits are Hours/Minutes (HH:MM:xx.xxx). ENUMERATION: DISABLED/ENABLED
Hours: 0=12am, 1=1am,...,12=12pm,...23=11pm.
0 = Disabled, 1 = Enabled
Minutes: 0 to 59 in steps of 1.
Last 16 bits are Seconds (xx:xx:.SS.SSS): 0=00.000s,
1=00.001,...,59999=59.999s).

F103 F114
ENUMERATION: CURVE SHAPES ENUMERATION: IRIG-B SIGNAL TYPE
0 = None, 1 = DC Shift, 2 = Amplitude Modulated
Bitmask Curve shape Bitmask Curve shape
0 IEEE Mod Inv 9 IAC Inverse
1 IEEE Very Inv 10 IAC Short Inv F116
ENUMERATION: NEUTRAL OVERVOLTAGE CURVES
B
2 IEEE Ext Inv 11 I2t
3 IEC Curve A 12 Definite Time 0 = Definite Time, 1 = FlexCurve A, 2 = FlexCurve B,
4 IEC Curve B 13 FlexCurve A 3 = FlexCurve C
5 IEC Curve C 14 FlexCurve B
6 IEC Short Inv 15 FlexCurve C
F118
7 IAC Ext Inv 16 FlexCurve D
ENUMERATION: OSCILLOGRAPHY MODE
8 IAC Very Inv
0 = Automatic Overwrite, 1 = Protected
F104
ENUMERATION: RESET TYPE F122
ENUMERATION: ELEMENT INPUT SIGNAL TYPE
0 = Instantaneous, 1 = Timed
0 = Phasor, 1 = RMS
F106
ENUMERATION: PHASE ROTATION F123
ENUMERATION: CT SECONDARY
0 = ABC, 1 = ACB
0 = 1 A, 1 = 5 A
F108
ENUMERATION: OFF/ON F124
ENUMERATION: LIST OF ELEMENTS
0 = Off, 1 = On
Bitmask Element
0 Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 1
F109
ENUMERATION: CONTACT OUTPUT OPERATION
0 = Self-reset, 1 = Latched, 2 = Disabled
F111 5 Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 6
ENUMERATION: UNDERVOLTAGE CURVE SHAPES 16 Phase Time Overcurrent 1
0 = Definite Time, 1 = Inverse Time 17 Phase Time Overcurrent 2
18 Phase Time Overcurrent 3
F112
ENUMERATION: RS485 BAUD RATES
Bitmask Value Bitmask Value Bitmask Value 32 Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 1
0 300 4 9600 8 115200 33 Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 2
37 Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 6
48 Neutral Time Overcurrent 1
F113
ENUMERATION: PARITY
0 = None, 1 = Odd, 2 = Even 51 Neutral Time Overcurrent 4
64 Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 1
65 Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 2

Bitmask Element Bitmask Element

66 Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 3 424 Non-volatile Latch 5
80 Ground Time Overcurrent 1 428 Non-volatile Latch 9
82 Ground Time Overcurrent 3 430 Non-volatile Latch 11 B
133 Bus Zone 1 434 Non-volatile Latch 15
134 Bus Zone 2 435 Non-volatile Latch 16
144 Phase Undervoltage 1 544 Digital Counter 1
148 Auxiliary Overvoltage 1 547 Digital Counter 4
150 Auxiliary Overvoltage 3 548 Digital Counter 5
156 Neutral Overvoltage 1 549 Digital Counter 6
251 CT Trouble 1 692 Digital Element 1
252 CT Trouble 2 693 Digital Element 2
280 Breaker Failure 1 694 Digital Element 3
294 Breaker 1 Flashover 700 Digital Element 9
295 Breaker 2 Flashover 701 Digital Element 10
336 Setting Group 702 Digital Element 11
337 Reset 703 Digital Element 12
388 Selector switch 1 704 Digital Element 13
389 Selector switch 2 705 Digital Element 14
390 Control pushbutton 1 706 Digital Element 15
400 FlexElement 1 713 Digital Element 22
420 Non-volatile Latch 1 721 Digital Element 30

Bitmask Element Bitmask Element

725 Digital Element 34 881 RTD Input 33
B 731 Digital Element 40 887 RTD Input 39
842 Trip Bus 1 896 RTD Input 48
843 Trip Bus 2 900 User-Programmable Pushbutton 1
849 RTD Input 1 905 User-Programmable Pushbutton 6
860 RTD Input 12 920 Disconnect switch 1

Bitmask Element
F141
941 Disconnect switch 22
ENUMERATION: SELF TEST ERRORS
942 Disconnect switch 23
943 Disconnect switch 24 Bitmask Error
968 Breaker 1 0 Any Self Tests
969 Breaker 2 1 IRIG-B Failure
970 Breaker 3 2 Port 1 Offline
971 Breaker 4 3 Port 2 Offline B
1012 Thermal overload protection 1 6 Port 5 Offline
1013 Thermal overload protection 2 7 Port 6 Offline
8 RRTD Communications Failure
9 Voltage Monitor
F126
ENUMERATION: NO/YES CHOICE 10 FlexLogic Error Token
11 Equipment Mismatch
0 = No, 1 = Yes
12 Process Bus Failure
13 Unit Not Programmed
F127 14 System Exception
ENUMERATION: LATCHED OR SELF-RESETTING 15 Latching Output Discrepancy
0 = Latched, 1 = Self-Reset 17 Maintenance Alert 01
18 SNTP Failure
19 Maintenance Alert
F128
ENUMERATION: CONTACT INPUT THRESHOLD
0 = 17 V DC, 1 = 33 V DC, 2 = 84 V DC, 3 = 166 V DC
22 Temperature Monitor
23 Process Bus Trouble
F129 24 Brick Trouble
ENUMERATION: FLEXLOGIC TIMER TYPE 25 Field RTD Trouble
0 = millisecond, 1 = second, 2 = minute 26 Field TDR Trouble

27 Remote Device Offline
28 Direct Device Offline
F131 29 Maintenance Alert
ENUMERATION: FORCED CONTACT OUTPUT STATE
30 Any Minor Error
0 = Disabled, 1 = Energized, 2 = De-energized, 3 = Freeze 31 Any Major Error
F133
ENUMERATION: PROGRAM STATE 65 IEC 61850 Data Set
66 Aggregator Error
0 = Not Programmed, 1 = Programmed
67 Unit Not Calibrated
68 Settings Save Error
F134 69 SRAM Data Error
ENUMERATION: PASS/FAIL 70 Program Memory
0 = Fail, 1 = OK, 2 = n/a 71 Watchdog Error
72 Low On Memory
73 Prototype Firmware
F137
74 Module Failure 01
ENUMERATION: USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTON
FUNCTION 75 Module Failure 02
0 = Disabled, 1 = Self-Reset, 2 = Latched

Bitmask Error Bitmask Definition

81 Module Failure 08 19 ---
82 Module Failure 09 20 Ethernet Port 1 Offline
83 Incompatible H/W 21 Ethernet Port 2 Offline
B 87 High ENET Traffic 25 Ethernet Port 6 Offline
89 Relay Restart 26 Test Mode Isolated
90 FGM Failure 27 Test Mode Forcible
91 FGM Failure 28 Test Mode Disabled
92 FGM Failure 29 Temperature Warning On
93 FGM Failure 30 Temperature Warning Off
94 FGM Failure 31 Unauthorized Access
95 FGM Error 32 System Integrity Recovery
96 Maintenance Alert 33 System Integrity Recovery 06
97 PHY Monitor 34 System Integrity Recovery 07
98 Storage Media Alarm
99 Wrong Transceiver
F152
100 Power Supply Warning
ENUMERATION: SETTING GROUP
0 = Active Group, 1 = Group 1, 2 = Group 2, 3 = Group 3
F143 4 = Group 4, 5 = Group 5, 6 = Group 6
UR_UINT32: 32 BIT ERROR CODE (F141 specifies bit number)
A bit value of 0 = no error, 1 = error
F155
ENUMERATION: REMOTE DEVICE STATE
F144 0 = Offline, 1 = Online

ENUMERATION: FORCED CONTACT INPUT STATE
0 = Disabled, 1 = Open, 2 = Closed F156
ENUMERATION: REMOTE INPUT BIT PAIRS
F146 Bitmask Value Bitmask Value

ENUMERATION: MISCELLANEOUS EVENT CAUSES
0 None 35 UserSt-3
Bitmask Definition 1 DNA-1 36 UserSt-4
0 Events Cleared 2 DNA-2 37 UserSt-5
1 Oscillography Triggered 3 DNA-3 38 UserSt-6
2 Date/time Changed 4 DNA-4 39 UserSt-7
3 Default Settings Loaded 5 DNA-5 40 UserSt-8
4 Test Mode Forcing On 6 DNA-6 41 UserSt-9
5 Test Mode Forcing Off 7 DNA-7 42 UserSt-10
6 Power On 8 DNA-8 43 UserSt-11
7 Power Off 9 DNA-9 44 UserSt-12
8 Relay In Service 10 DNA-10 45 UserSt-13
9 Relay Out Of Service 11 DNA-11 46 UserSt-14
10 Watchdog Reset 12 DNA-12 47 UserSt-15
11 Oscillography Clear 13 DNA-13 48 UserSt-16
12 Reboot Command 14 DNA-14 49 UserSt-17
13 Led Test Initiated 15 DNA-15 50 UserSt-18
14 Flash Programming 16 DNA-16 51 UserSt-19
15 Fault Report Trigger 17 DNA-17 52 UserSt-20
16 User Programmable Fault Report Trigger 18 DNA-18 53 UserSt-21
17 --- 19 DNA-19 54 UserSt-22
18 Reload CT/VT module Settings 20 DNA-20 55 UserSt-23

21 DNA-21 56 UserSt-24

Bitmask Value Bitmask Value

F174
ENUMERATION: TRANSDUCER RTD INPUT TYPE
24 DNA-24 59 UserSt-27 0 = 100 Ohm Platinum, 1 = 120 Ohm Nickel,
2 = 100 Ohm Nickel, 3 = 10 Ohm Copper
27 DNA-27 62 UserSt-30 F177
28 DNA-28 63 UserSt-31 ENUMERATION: COMMUNICATION PORT B
29 DNA-29 64 UserSt-32 0 = None, 1 = COM1-RS485 (not applicable to UR firmware 7.00),
30 DNA-30 65 Dataset Item 1 2 = COM2-RS485, 3 = Front Panel-RS232, 4 = Network - TCP,
31 DNA-31 66 Dataset Item 2 5 = Network - UDP
32 DNA-32 67 Dataset Item 3
33 UserSt-1 ↓ ↓
F183
34 UserSt-2 96 Dataset Item 32 ENUMERATION: AC INPUT WAVEFORMS
Bitmask Definition
F157
0 Off
ENUMERATION: BREAKER MODE
1 8 samples/cycle
0 = 3-Pole, 1 = 1-Pole 2 16 samples/cycle
3 32 samples/cycle
F166 4 64 samples/cycle
ENUMERATION: AUXILIARY VT CONNECTION TYPE
0 = Vn, 1 = Vag, 2 = Vbg, 3 = Vcg, 4 = Vab, 5 = Vbc, 6 = Vca F184
ENUMERATION: IEC GOOSE DATASET
F167 Value IEC 61850 dataset

ENUMERATION: SIGNAL SOURCE
0 Off
0 = SRC 1, 1 = SRC 2, 2 = SRC 3, 3 = SRC 4, 1 GooseIn 1
4 = SRC 5, 5 = SRC 6
2 GooseIn 2
3 GooseIn 3
4 GooseIn 4
5 GooseIn 5
F172
ENUMERATION: SLOT LETTERS 6 GooseIn 6
7 GooseIn 7
Bitmas Slot Bitmas Slot Bitmas Slot Bitmas Slot 8 GooseIn 8
k k k k
9 GooseIn 9
0 F 4 K 8 P 12 U
10 GooseIn 10
1 G 5 L 9 R 13 V
11 GooseIn 11
2 H 6 M 10 S 14 W
12 GooseIn 12
3 J 7 N 11 T 15 X
13 GooseIn 13
14 GooseIn 14
F173 15 GooseIn 15
ENUMERATION: DCmA INPUT/OUTPUT RANGE 16 GooseIn 16
Bitmask DCmA input/output range

0 0 to –1 mA F186
1 0 to 1 mA ENUMERATION: MEASUREMENT MODE
2 –1 to 1 mA
0 = Phase to Ground, 1 = Phase to Phase
3 0 to 5 mA
4 0 to 10 mA
5 0 to 20 mA
6 4 to 20 mA

F190 F205
ENUMERATION: SIMULATED KEYPRESS TEXT12: 12-CHARACTER ASCII TEXT
Bitmask Keypress Bitmask Keypress

0 No key --- 23 Reset F206
use between real keys TEXT6: 6-CHARACTER ASCII TEXT
24 User 1
B
1 1 25 User 2
2 2 26 User 3 F207
3 3 27 User-programmable key 1 TEXT4: 4-CHARACTER ASCII TEXT
4 4 28 User-programmable key 2
F209
TEXT65: 65-CHARACTER ASCII TEXT
9 9 33 User-programmable key 7 F211
10 0 34 User-programmable key 8 ENUMERATION: SOURCE SELECTION
11 Decimal Point 35 User-programmable key 9 0 = None, 1 = SRC 1, 2 = SRC 2, 3 = SRC 3, 4 = SRC 4,
12 Plus/Minus 36 User-programmable key 10 5 = SRC 5, 6 = SRC 6
13 Value Up 37 User-programmable key 11
14 Value Down 38 User-programmable key 12
F213
15 Message Up 39 User 4 (control pushbutton) TEXT32: 32-CHARACTER ASCII TEXT
16 Message Down 40 User 5 (control pushbutton)
17 Message Left 41 User 6 (control pushbutton)
F220
18 Message Right 42 User 7 (control pushbutton)
ENUMERATION: PUSHBUTTON MESSAGE PRIORITY
19 Menu 43 User-programmable key 13
20 Help 44 User-programmable key 14 Value Priority
21 Escape 45 User-programmable key 15 0 Disabled
22 Enter 46 User-programmable key 16 1 Normal
2 High Priority
F192
ENUMERATION: ETHERNET OPERATION MODE
F232
0 = Half-Duplex, 1 = Full-Duplex ENUMERATION: CONFIGURABLE GOOSE Tx
DATASET ITEMS
F194 Value IEC 61850 Tx dataset item

ENUMERATION: DNP SCALE 0 None
0 = 0.01, 1 = 0.1, 2 = 1, 3 = 10, 4 = 100, 5 = 1000, 6 = 10000, 1 GGIO1.ST.Ind1.q
7 = 100000, 8 = 0.001 2 GGIO1.ST.Ind1.stVal
3 GGIO1.ST.Ind2.q
4 GGIO1.ST.Ind2.stVal
F200
↓ ↓
255 GGIO1.ST.Ind128.q
20 registers, 16 Bits: 1st Char MSB, 2nd Char LSB
257 MMXU1.MX.TotW.mag.f
F202 258 MMXU1.MX.TotVAr.mag.f
TEXT20: 20-CHARACTER ASCII TEXT 259 MMXU1.MX.TotVA.mag.f
10 registers, 16 Bits: 1st Char MSB, 2nd Char LSB 260 MMXU1.MX.TotPF.mag.f
261 MMXU1.MX.Hz.mag.f
262 MMXU1.MX.PPV.phsAB.cVal.mag.f
F203
263 MMXU1.MX.PPV.phsAB.cVal.ang.f
264 MMXU1.MX.PPV.phsBC.cVal.mag.f
265 MMXU1.MX.PPV.phsBC.cVal.ang.f
F204 266 MMXU1.MX.PPV.phsCA.cVal.mag.f

Value IEC 61850 Tx dataset item Value IEC 61850 Tx dataset item
267 MMXU1.MX.PPV.phsCA.cVal.ang.f 320 MMXU2.MX.W.phsB.cVal.mag.f
268 MMXU1.MX.PhV.phsA.cVal.mag.f 321 MMXU2.MX.W.phsC.cVal.mag.f
269 MMXU1.MX.PhV.phsA.cVal.ang.f 322 MMXU2.MX.VAr.phsA.cVal.mag.f
270 MMXU1.MX.PhV.phsB.cVal.mag.f 323 MMXU2.MX.VAr.phsB.cVal.mag.f
271 MMXU1.MX.PhV.phsB.cVal.ang.f 324 MMXU2.MX.VAr.phsC.cVal.mag.f
272 MMXU1.MX.PhV.phsC.cVal.mag.f 325 MMXU2.MX.VA.phsA.cVal.mag.f
273 MMXU1.MX.PhV.phsC.cVal.ang.f 326 MMXU2.MX.VA.phsB.cVal.mag.f B
274 MMXU1.MX.A.phsA.cVal.mag.f 327 MMXU2.MX.VA.phsC.cVal.mag.f
275 MMXU1.MX.A.phsA.cVal.ang.f 328 MMXU2.MX.PF.phsA.cVal.mag.f
276 MMXU1.MX.A.phsB.cVal.mag.f 329 MMXU2.MX.PF.phsB.cVal.mag.f
277 MMXU1.MX.A.phsB.cVal.ang.f 330 MMXU2.MX.PF.phsC.cVal.mag.f
278 MMXU1.MX.A.phsC.cVal.mag.f 331 MMXU3.MX.TotW.mag.f
279 MMXU1.MX.A.phsC.cVal.ang.f 332 MMXU3.MX.TotVAr.mag.f
280 MMXU1.MX.A.neut.cVal.mag.f 333 MMXU3.MX.TotVA.mag.f
281 MMXU1.MX.A.neut.cVal.ang.f 334 MMXU3.MX.TotPF.mag.f
282 MMXU1.MX.W.phsA.cVal.mag.f 335 MMXU3.MX.Hz.mag.f
283 MMXU1.MX.W.phsB.cVal.mag.f 336 MMXU3.MX.PPV.phsAB.cVal.mag.f
284 MMXU1.MX.W.phsC.cVal.mag.f 337 MMXU3.MX.PPV.phsAB.cVal.ang.f
285 MMXU1.MX.VAr.phsA.cVal.mag.f 338 MMXU3.MX.PPV.phsBC.cVal.mag.f
286 MMXU1.MX.VAr.phsB.cVal.mag.f 339 MMXU3.MX.PPV.phsBC.cVal.ang.f
287 MMXU1.MX.VAr.phsC.cVal.mag.f 340 MMXU3.MX.PPV.phsCA.cVal.mag.f
288 MMXU1.MX.VA.phsA.cVal.mag.f 341 MMXU3.MX.PPV.phsCA.cVal.ang.f
289 MMXU1.MX.VA.phsB.cVal.mag.f 342 MMXU3.MX.PhV.phsA.cVal.mag.f
290 MMXU1.MX.VA.phsC.cVal.mag.f 343 MMXU3.MX.PhV.phsA.cVal.ang.f
291 MMXU1.MX.PF.phsA.cVal.mag.f 344 MMXU3.MX.PhV.phsB.cVal.mag.f
292 MMXU1.MX.PF.phsB.cVal.mag.f 345 MMXU3.MX.PhV.phsB.cVal.ang.f
293 MMXU1.MX.PF.phsC.cVal.mag.f 346 MMXU3.MX.PhV.phsC.cVal.mag.f
294 MMXU2.MX.TotW.mag.f 347 MMXU3.MX.PhV.phsC.cVal.ang.f
295 MMXU2.MX.TotVAr.mag.f 348 MMXU3.MX.A.phsA.cVal.mag.f
296 MMXU2.MX.TotVA.mag.f 349 MMXU3.MX.A.phsA.cVal.ang.f
297 MMXU2.MX.TotPF.mag.f 350 MMXU3.MX.A.phsB.cVal.mag.f
298 MMXU2.MX.Hz.mag.f 351 MMXU3.MX.A.phsB.cVal.ang.f
299 MMXU2.MX.PPV.phsAB.cVal.mag.f 352 MMXU3.MX.A.phsC.cVal.mag.f
300 MMXU2.MX.PPV.phsAB.cVal.ang.f 353 MMXU3.MX.A.phsC.cVal.ang.f
301 MMXU2.MX.PPV.phsBC.cVal.mag.f 354 MMXU3.MX.A.neut.cVal.mag.f
302 MMXU2.MX.PPV.phsBC.cVal.ang.f 355 MMXU3.MX.A.neut.cVal.ang.f
303 MMXU2.MX.PPV.phsCA.cVal.mag.f 356 MMXU3.MX.W.phsA.cVal.mag.f
310 MMXU2.MX.PhV.phsC.cVal.ang.f 363 MMXU3.MX.VA.phsB.cVal.mag.f

B 379 MMXU4.MX.PhV.phsA.cVal.mag.f 432 MMXU5.MX.W.phsC.cVal.mag.f

479 GGIO4.MX.AnIn1.mag.f 532 GGIO5.ST.UIntIn11.stVal
480 GGIO4.MX.AnIn2.mag.f 533 GGIO5.ST.UIntIn12.q
485 GGIO4.MX.AnIn7.mag.f 538 GGIO5.ST.UIntIn14.stVal B
490 GGIO4.MX.AnIn12.mag.f
F233
ENUMERATION: CONFIGURABLE GOOSE Rx
493 GGIO4.MX.AnIn15.mag.f DATASET ITEMS
495 GGIO4.MX.AnIn17.mag.f Value IEC 61850 GOOSE Rx dataset
item
0 None
1 GGIO3.ST.Ind1.q
3 GGIO3.ST.Ind2.q
↓ ↓
127 GGIO3.ST.Ind64q
511 GGIO5.ST.UIntIn1.q
512 GGIO5.ST.UIntIn1.stVal

Value IEC 61850 GOOSE Rx dataset Value Month

item
3 April
4 May
5 June
6 July
7 August
8 September
B 161
162
GGIO3.ST.IndPos1.stVal
GGIO3.ST.IndPos2.stVal
9 October
10 November
163 GGIO3.ST.IndPos3.stVal
11 December
166 GGIO3.ST.UIntIn1.q F238
167 GGIO3.ST.UIntIn1.stVal ENUMERATION: REAL TIME CLOCK DAY (FOR EXAMPLE,
DAYLIGHT SAVINGS TIME)
169 GGIO3.ST.UIntIn2.stVal Value Day
170 GGIO3.ST.UIntIn3.q 0 Sunday
171 GGIO3.ST.UIntIn3.stVal 1 Monday
172 GGIO3.ST.UIntIn4.q 2 Tuesday
173 GGIO3.ST.UIntIn4.stVal 3 Wednesday
174 GGIO3.ST.UIntIn5.q 4 Thursday
175 GGIO3.ST.UIntIn5.stVal 5 Friday
176 GGIO3.ST.UIntIn6.q 6 Saturday
179 GGIO3.ST.UIntIn7.stVal F239
ENUMERATION: REAL TIME CLOCK DAYLIGHT SAVINGS
TIME START DAY INSTANCE
182 GGIO3.ST.UIntIn9.q Value Instance
183 GGIO3.ST.UIntIn9.stVal 0 First
184 GGIO3.ST.UIntIn10.q 1 Second
185 GGIO3.ST.UIntIn10.stVal 2 Third
186 GGIO3.ST.UIntIn11.q 3 Fourth
187 GGIO3.ST.UIntIn11.stVal 4 Last
190 GGIO3.ST.UIntIn13.q F243
ENUMERATION: FIELD UNIT TYPE
192 GGIO3.ST.UIntIn14.q 0 = CC-05, 1 = CV-05, 2 = CC-01, 3 = CV-01
F244
195 GGIO3.ST.UIntIn15.stVal ENUMERATION: FIELD UNIT PROCESS CARD PORT
0 = H4a, 1 = H4b, 2 = H3a, 3 = H3b, 4 = H2a, 5 = H2b, 6 = H1a,
197 GGIO3.ST.UIntIn16.stVal 7 = H1b
F237 F245
ENUMERATION: REAL TIME CLOCK MONTH (FOR EXAMPLE, ENUMERATION: TEST MODE FUNCTION
DAYLIGHT SAVINGS TIME)
Value Instance
Value Month
0 Disabled
0 January
1 Isolated
1 February
2 Forcible
2 March

Value Description
F246
12 U6/AC8
ENUMERATION: BRICK TRANSDUCER RANGE
13 U7/AC5
Value Description 14 U7/AC8
0 -5...5V 15 U8/AC5
1 -1...1mA 16 U8/AC8
2 0...1mA
3 0...-1mA
F253
B
4 0...5mA ENUMERATION: BRICK TRANSDUCER ORIGIN
5 0...10mA
6 0...20mA Value Description
7 4...20mA 0 None
8 potentiometer 1 U1/DC1
9 tap position 2 U1/DC2

3 U1/DC3
4 U2/DC1
F247 ... ...
ENUMERATION: BRICK AC BANK ORIGIN
24 U8/DC3
Value Description
0 None
F256
1 U1/AC1..3 ENUMERATION: BRICK ORIGIN/DESTINATION
2 U1/AC5..7
3 U2/AC1..3 Value Description
4 U2/AC5..7 0 None
5 U3/AC1..3 1 U1
6 U3/AC5..7 2 U2
7 U4/AC1..3 3 U3
8 U4/AC5..7 4 U4
9 U5/AC1..3 5 U5
10 U5/AC5..7 6 U6
11 U6/AC1..3 7 U7
12 U6/AC5..7 8 U8
13 U7/AC1..3
14 U7/AC5..7
F259
15 U8/AC1..3 ENUMERATION: BRICK RTD TYPE
16 U8/AC5..7
0 = 100 Ohm Nickel, 1 = 120 Ohm Nickel, 2 = 100 Ohm Platinum
F248
F261
ENUMERATION: BRICK AUX BANK ORIGIN
ENUMERATION: BANK REDUNDANCY TYPE
Value Description 0 = None, 1 = Dependability Biased, 2 = Security Biased
0 None
1 U1/AC4
F262
2 U1/AC8
ENUMERATION: BRICK STATUS
3 U2/AC4
0 = Disabled, 1 = OK, 2 = Communications Trouble, 3 = Equip-
4 U2/AC8
ment Mismatch, 4 = Brick Trouble
5 U3/AC4
6 U3/AC8
7 U4/AC4 F300
8 U4/AC8 UR_UINT32: FLEXLOGIC BASE TYPE (15-bit type)
9 U5/AC4 The FlexLogic BASE type is 14 bits and is combined with a 17-bit
10 U5/AC8 descriptor and 1 bit for the protection element to form a 32-bit
value. The combined bits are of the form:
11 U6/AC4
PTTTTTTTTTTTTTTDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD, where P bit if

set indicates that the FlexLogic type is associated with a protection

element state and D represents bits for the type in F124 format. If F400
P bit is not set, then the T represents bits for the type and D repre- UR_UINT16: CT/VT BANK SELECTION
sents range.
Bitmask Bank selection
The values in square brackets indicate the base type with P prefix 0 Card 1 Contact 1 to 4
[PTTTTTTTTTTTTTT] and the values in round brackets indicate
1 Card 1 Contact 5 to 8
the descriptor range. The left-most D bit indicates whether the type
2 Card 2 Contact 1 to 4
is an ON or OFF type. There can be a total 65535 BASE type ele-
B ments, 131071 protection element IDs, and 16383 element states.
There can be a total of 65535 descriptors of each type.
3
4
Card 2 Contact 5 to 8
Card 3 Contact 1 to 4
[0] Off (0) – This is boolean FALSE value 5 Card 3 Contact 5 to 8
[1] On (1) – This is boolean TRUE value
[2] CONTACT INPUTS (1 to 96)
[3] CONTACT INPUTS OFF (1 to 96) F491
[4] VIRTUAL INPUTS (1 to 32) ENUMERATION: ANALOG INPUT MODE
[6] VIRTUAL OUTPUTS (1 to 64)
0 = Default Value, 1 = Last Known
[8] CONTACT OUTPUTS
[10] CONTACT OUTPUTS VOLTAGE DETECTED (1 to 64)
[11] CONTACT OUTPUTS VOLTAGE OFF DETECTED (1 to 64)
F500
[12] CONTACT OUTPUTS CURRENT DETECTED (1 to 64) UR_UINT16: PACKED BITFIELD
[13] CONTACT OUTPUTS CURRENT OFF DETECTED (1 to 64)
[14] REMOTE INPUTS (1 to 32) First register indicates input/output state with bits 0 (MSB) to 15
[16] DIRECT INPUTS (1 to 96 (LSB) corresponding to input/output state 1 to 16. The second reg-
[18] REMOTE OUTPUT DNA BIT PAIRS (1 to 32) ister indicates input/output state with bits 0 to 15 corresponding to
[20] REMOTE OUTPUT UserSt BIT PAIRS (1 to 32) input/output state 17 to 32 (if required). The third register indicates
[22] REMOTE DEVICE ONLINE (1 to 16) input/output state with bits 0 to 15 corresponding to input/output
[24] MISCELLANEOUS EQUATION state 33 to 48 (if required). The fourth register indicates input/out-
[26] TELEPROTECTION INPUTS put state with bits 0 to 15 corresponding to input/output state 49 to
[28] INSERT (via keypad only) 64 (if required).
[30] DELETE (via keypad only) The number of registers required is determined by the specific
[32] END data item. A bit value of 0 = Off and 1 = On.
[34] NOT (1 INPUT)
[36] 2 INPUT XOR (0)
[38] LATCH SET/RESET (2 inputs) F501
[40] OR (2 to 16 inputs) UR_UINT16: LED STATUS
[42] AND (2 to 16 inputs)
[44] NOR (2 to 16 inputs) Low byte of register indicates LED status with bit 0 representing
[46] NAND (2 to 16 inputs) the top LED and bit 7 the bottom LED. A bit value of 1 indicates
[48] TIMER (1 to 32) the LED is on, 0 indicates the LED is off.
[50] ASSIGN VIRTUAL OUTPUT (1 to 64) 0 = Off, 1 = On
[52] ONE SHOT
[54] SELF-TEST ERROR (see F141 for range)
[56] PLATFORM DIRECT INPUT (1 to 96) F502
[58] PLATFORM DIRECT OUTPUT (1 to 96) BITFIELD: ELEMENT OPERATE STATES
[60] PLATFORM DIRECT DEVICE (1 to 8)
[62] MISCELLANEOUS EVENTS (see F146 for range) Each bit contains the operate state for an element. See the F124
[64] PDC NETWORK CONTROL format code for a list of element IDs. The operate bit for element ID
[66] PMU RECORDER OUT OF MEMORY X is bit [X mod 16] in register [X/16].
[68] PMU RECORDER STOPPED
[128 to 255] ELEMENT STATES (see the Element States section
in the Modbus memory map) F515
ENUMERATION ELEMENT INPUT MODE
0 = Signed, 1 = Absolute
F516
ENUMERATION ELEMENT COMPARE MODE
0 = Level, 1 = Delta
F517
ENUMERATION: ELEMENT DIRECTION OPERATION
0 = Over, 1 = Under

F518 F530
ENUMERATION: FLEXELEMENT UNITS ENUMERATION: FRONT PANEL INTERFACE KEYPRESS
0 = Milliseconds, 1 = Seconds, 2 = Minutes Value Keypress Value Keypress Value Keypress
0 None 15 3 33 User PB 3
1 Menu 16 Enter 34 User PB 4
F519
2 Message Up 17 Message 35 User PB 5
ENUMERATION: NON-VOLATILE LATCH
B
Down
0 = Reset-Dominant, 1 = Set-Dominant 3 7 ~
18 0 ~
36 User PB 6
4 8 19 Decimal 37 User PB 7
5 9 20 +/– 38 User PB 8
F522
6 Help 21 Value Up 39 User PB 9
ENUMERATION: TRANSDUCER DCmA OUTPUT RANGE
7 Message Left 22 Value Down 40 User PB 10
0 = –1 to 1 mA, 1 = 0 to 1 mA, 2 = 4 to 20 mA
8 4 23 Reset 41 User PB 11
9 5 24 User 1 42 User PB 12
F523 10 6 25 User 2 44 User 4
ENUMERATION: DNP OBJECTS 20, 22, AND 23 DEFAULT 11 Escape 26 User 3 45 User 5
VARIATION 12 Message 31 User PB 1 46 User 6
Right
Bitmask Default variation 13 1 32 User PB 2 47 User 7
0 1 14 2
1 2
2 5
3 6 F531
ENUMERATION: LANGUAGE
0 = English, 1 = French, 2 = Chinese, 3 = Russian, 4 = Turkish, 5 =
F524 German
ENUMERATION: DNP OBJECT 21 DEFAULT VARIATION
Bitmask Default variation F600

0 1 UR_UINT16: FLEXANALOG PARAMETER
1 2
Corresponds to the Modbus address of the value used when this
2 9 parameter is selected. Only certain values can be used as FlexAn-
3 10 alogs (basically all metering quantities used in protection).
F525 F601
ENUMERATION: DNP OBJECT 32 DEFAULT VARIATION ENUMERATION: COM2 PORT USAGE
Bitmask Default variation Enumeration COM2 port usage

0 1 0 RS485
1 2 1 RRTD
2 3 2 GPM-F
3 4 3 RRTD and GPM-F
4 5
5 7
F605
ENUMERATION: REMOTE DOUBLE-POINT STATUS INPUT
STATUS
Enumeration Remote DPS input status

0 Intermediate
1 Off
2 On
3 Bad

Enumeration IEC 61850 report dataset items

F606
23 PDIS8.ST.Str.general
ENUMERATION: REMOTE DOUBLE-POINT STATUS INPUT
24 PDIS8.ST.Op.general
Enumeration Remote double-point status input 25 PDIS9.ST.Str.general
0 None 26 PDIS9.ST.Op.general
1 Remote input 1 27 PDIS10.ST.Str.general
28 PDIS10.ST.Op.general
B
2 Remote input 2
3 Remote input 3 29 PIOC1.ST.Str.general
↓ ↓ 30 PIOC1.ST.Op.general
64 Remote input 64 31 PIOC2.ST.Str.general
32 PIOC2.ST.Op.general
33 PIOC3.ST.Str.general
F611
ENUMERATION: GOOSE RETRANSMISSION CURVE
Enumeration Configurable GOOSE retransmission scheme 36 PIOC4.ST.Op.general
0 Heartbeat 37 PIOC5.ST.Str.general
1 Aggressive 38 PIOC5.ST.Op.general
2 Medium 39 PIOC6.ST.Str.general
3 Relaxed 40 PIOC6.ST.Op.general
F612
UR_UINT16: FLEXINTEGER PARAMETER
This 16-bit value corresponds to the Modbus address of the
selected FlexInteger parameter. Only certain values can be used
as FlexIntegers. There is no operation executed even though they 46 PIOC9.ST.Op.general
are called FlexIntegers. 47 PIOC10.ST.Str.general
F615
ENUMERATION: IEC 61850 REPORT DATASET ITEMS
Enumeration IEC 61850 report dataset items 52 PIOC12.ST.Op.general
0 None 53 PIOC13.ST.Str.general
1 PDIF1.ST.Str.general 54 PIOC13.ST.Op.general
2 PDIF1.ST.Op.general 55 PIOC14.ST.Str.general
9 PDIS1.ST.Str.general 62 PIOC17.ST.Op.general
10 PDIS1.ST.Op.general 63 PIOC18.ST.Str.general

Enumeration IEC 61850 report dataset items Enumeration IEC 61850 report dataset items
76 PIOC24.ST.Op.general 129 PIOC51.ST.Str.general
77 PIOC25.ST.Str.general 130 PIOC51.ST.Op.general
82 PIOC27.ST.Op.general 135 PIOC54.ST.Str.general B
120 PIOC46.ST.Op.general 173 PTOC1.ST.Str.general
121 PIOC47.ST.Str.general 174 PTOC1.ST.Op.general

182 PTOC5.ST.Op.general 235 PTOV8.ST.Str.general
183 PTOC6.ST.Str.general 236 PTOV8.ST.Op.general
B 188 PTOC8.ST.Op.general 241 PTRC1.ST.Tr.general
189 PTOC9.ST.Str.general 242 PTRC1.ST.Op.general
190 PTOC9.ST.Op.general 243 PTRC2.ST.Tr.general
200 PTOC14.ST.Op.general 253 PTUV1.ST.Str.general
201 PTOC15.ST.Str.general 254 PTUV1.ST.Op.general
221 PTOV1.ST.Str.general 274 PTUV11.ST.Op.general
222 PTOV1.ST.Op.general 275 PTUV12.ST.Str.general
224 PTOV2.ST.Op.general 277 PTUV13.ST.Str.general
226 PTOV3.ST.Op.general 279 RBRF1.ST.OpEx.general
227 PTOV4.ST.Str.general 280 RBRF1.ST.OpIn.general

288 RBRF5.ST.OpIn.general 341 RREC4.ST.Op.general
289 RBRF6.ST.OpEx.general 342 RREC4.ST.AutoRecSt.stVal
294 RBRF8.ST.OpIn.general 347 CSWI1.ST.Loc.stVal B
295 RBRF9.ST.OpEx.general 348 CSWI1.ST.Pos.stVal
296 RBRF9.ST.OpIn.general 349 CSWI2.ST.Loc.stVal
327 RFLO1.MX.FltDiskm.mag.f 380 CSWI17.ST.Pos.stVal
328 RFLO2.MX.FltDiskm.mag.f 381 CSWI18.ST.Loc.stVal
330 RFLO4.MX.FltDiskm.mag.f 383 CSWI19.ST.Loc.stVal
332 RPSB1.ST.Str.general 385 CSWI20.ST.Loc.stVal
333 RPSB1.ST.Op.general 386 CSWI20.ST.Pos.stVal
334 RPSB1.ST.BlkZn.stVal 387 CSWI21.ST.Loc.stVal
335 RREC1.ST.Op.general 388 CSWI21.ST.Pos.stVal
336 RREC1.ST.AutoRecSt.stVal 389 CSWI22.ST.Loc.stVal

394 CSWI24.ST.Pos.stVal 447 GGIO1.ST.Ind41.stVal
395 CSWI25.ST.Loc.stVal 448 GGIO1.ST.Ind42.stVal
B 400 CSWI27.ST.Pos.stVal 453 GGIO1.ST.Ind47.stVal
407 GGIO1.ST.Ind1.stVal 460 GGIO1.ST.Ind54.stVal

500 GGIO1.ST.Ind94.stVal 553 MMXU1.MX.A.phsA.cVal.ang.f
501 GGIO1.ST.Ind95.stVal 554 MMXU1.MX.A.phsB.cVal.mag.f
502 GGIO1.ST.Ind96.stVal 555 MMXU1.MX.A.phsB.cVal.ang.f
503 GGIO1.ST.Ind97.stVal 556 MMXU1.MX.A.phsC.cVal.mag.f
504 GGIO1.ST.Ind98.stVal 557 MMXU1.MX.A.phsC.cVal.ang.f
505 GGIO1.ST.Ind99.stVal 558 MMXU1.MX.A.neut.cVal.mag.f
506 GGIO1.ST.Ind100.stVal 559 MMXU1.MX.A.neut.cVal.ang.f B
507 GGIO1.ST.Ind101.stVal 560 MMXU1.MX.W.phsA.cVal.mag.f
508 GGIO1.ST.Ind102.stVal 561 MMXU1.MX.W.phsB.cVal.mag.f
509 GGIO1.ST.Ind103.stVal 562 MMXU1.MX.W.phsC.cVal.mag.f
510 GGIO1.ST.Ind104.stVal 563 MMXU1.MX.VAr.phsA.cVal.mag.f
511 GGIO1.ST.Ind105.stVal 564 MMXU1.MX.VAr.phsB.cVal.mag.f
512 GGIO1.ST.Ind106.stVal 565 MMXU1.MX.VAr.phsC.cVal.mag.f
513 GGIO1.ST.Ind107.stVal 566 MMXU1.MX.VA.phsA.cVal.mag.f
514 GGIO1.ST.Ind108.stVal 567 MMXU1.MX.VA.phsB.cVal.mag.f
515 GGIO1.ST.Ind109.stVal 568 MMXU1.MX.VA.phsC.cVal.mag.f
516 GGIO1.ST.Ind110.stVal 569 MMXU1.MX.PF.phsA.cVal.mag.f
517 GGIO1.ST.Ind111.stVal 570 MMXU1.MX.PF.phsB.cVal.mag.f
518 GGIO1.ST.Ind112.stVal 571 MMXU1.MX.PF.phsC.cVal.mag.f
519 GGIO1.ST.Ind113.stVal 572 MMXU2.MX.TotW.mag.f
520 GGIO1.ST.Ind114.stVal 573 MMXU2.MX.TotVAr.mag.f
521 GGIO1.ST.Ind115.stVal 574 MMXU2.MX.TotVA.mag.f
522 GGIO1.ST.Ind116.stVal 575 MMXU2.MX.TotPF.mag.f
523 GGIO1.ST.Ind117.stVal 576 MMXU2.MX.Hz.mag.f
524 GGIO1.ST.Ind118.stVal 577 MMXU2.MX.PPV.phsAB.cVal.mag.f
525 GGIO1.ST.Ind119.stVal 578 MMXU2.MX.PPV.phsAB.cVal.ang.f
526 GGIO1.ST.Ind120.stVal 579 MMXU2.MX.PPV.phsBC.cVal.mag.f
527 GGIO1.ST.Ind121.stVal 580 MMXU2.MX.PPV.phsBC.cVal.ang.f
528 GGIO1.ST.Ind122.stVal 581 MMXU2.MX.PPV.phsCA.cVal.mag.f
529 GGIO1.ST.Ind123.stVal 582 MMXU2.MX.PPV.phsCA.cVal.ang.f
530 GGIO1.ST.Ind124.stVal 583 MMXU2.MX.PhV.phsA.cVal.mag.f
531 GGIO1.ST.Ind125.stVal 584 MMXU2.MX.PhV.phsA.cVal.ang.f
532 GGIO1.ST.Ind126.stVal 585 MMXU2.MX.PhV.phsB.cVal.mag.f
533 GGIO1.ST.Ind127.stVal 586 MMXU2.MX.PhV.phsB.cVal.ang.f
534 GGIO1.ST.Ind128.stVal 587 MMXU2.MX.PhV.phsC.cVal.mag.f

B 612 MMXU3.MX.TotPF.mag.f 665 MMXU4.MX.A.phsB.cVal.mag.f

712 MMXU5.MX.VAr.phsB.cVal.mag.f 765 GGIO4.MX.AnIn9.mag.f
713 MMXU5.MX.VAr.phsC.cVal.mag.f 766 GGIO4.MX.AnIn10.mag.f
714 MMXU5.MX.VA.phsA.cVal.mag.f 767 GGIO4.MX.AnIn11.mag.f
715 MMXU5.MX.VA.phsB.cVal.mag.f 768 GGIO4.MX.AnIn12.mag.f
716 MMXU5.MX.VA.phsC.cVal.mag.f 769 GGIO4.MX.AnIn13.mag.f
717 MMXU5.MX.PF.phsA.cVal.mag.f 770 GGIO4.MX.AnIn14.mag.f
718 MMXU5.MX.PF.phsB.cVal.mag.f 771 GGIO4.MX.AnIn15.mag.f B
719 MMXU5.MX.PF.phsC.cVal.mag.f 772 GGIO4.MX.AnIn16.mag.f
720 MMXU6.MX.TotW.mag.f 773 GGIO4.MX.AnIn17.mag.f
721 MMXU6.MX.TotVAr.mag.f 774 GGIO4.MX.AnIn18.mag.f
722 MMXU6.MX.TotVA.mag.f 775 GGIO4.MX.AnIn19.mag.f
723 MMXU6.MX.TotPF.mag.f 776 GGIO4.MX.AnIn20.mag.f
724 MMXU6.MX.Hz.mag.f 777 GGIO4.MX.AnIn21.mag.f
725 MMXU6.MX.PPV.phsAB.cVal.mag.f 778 GGIO4.MX.AnIn22.mag.f
726 MMXU6.MX.PPV.phsAB.cVal.ang.f 779 GGIO4.MX.AnIn23.mag.f
727 MMXU6.MX.PPV.phsBC.cVal.mag.f 780 GGIO4.MX.AnIn24.mag.f
728 MMXU6.MX.PPV.phsBC.cVal.ang.f 781 GGIO4.MX.AnIn25.mag.f
729 MMXU6.MX.PPV.phsCA.cVal.mag.f 782 GGIO4.MX.AnIn26.mag.f
730 MMXU6.MX.PPV.phsCA.cVal.ang.f 783 GGIO4.MX.AnIn27.mag.f
731 MMXU6.MX.PhV.phsA.cVal.mag.f 784 GGIO4.MX.AnIn28.mag.f
732 MMXU6.MX.PhV.phsA.cVal.ang.f 785 GGIO4.MX.AnIn29.mag.f
733 MMXU6.MX.PhV.phsB.cVal.mag.f 786 GGIO4.MX.AnIn30.mag.f
734 MMXU6.MX.PhV.phsB.cVal.ang.f 787 GGIO4.MX.AnIn31.mag.f
735 MMXU6.MX.PhV.phsC.cVal.mag.f 788 GGIO4.MX.AnIn32.mag.f
736 MMXU6.MX.PhV.phsC.cVal.ang.f 789 XSWI1.ST.Loc.stVal
737 MMXU6.MX.A.phsA.cVal.mag.f 790 XSWI1.ST.Pos.stVal
738 MMXU6.MX.A.phsA.cVal.ang.f 791 XSWI2.ST.Loc.stVal
739 MMXU6.MX.A.phsB.cVal.mag.f 792 XSWI2.ST.Pos.stVal
740 MMXU6.MX.A.phsB.cVal.ang.f 793 XSWI3.ST.Loc.stVal
741 MMXU6.MX.A.phsC.cVal.mag.f 794 XSWI3.ST.Pos.stVal
742 MMXU6.MX.A.phsC.cVal.ang.f 795 XSWI4.ST.Loc.stVal
743 MMXU6.MX.A.neut.cVal.mag.f 796 XSWI4.ST.Pos.stVal
744 MMXU6.MX.A.neut.cVal.ang.f 797 XSWI5.ST.Loc.stVal
745 MMXU6.MX.W.phsA.cVal.mag.f 798 XSWI5.ST.Pos.stVal
746 MMXU6.MX.W.phsB.cVal.mag.f 799 XSWI6.ST.Loc.stVal
747 MMXU6.MX.W.phsC.cVal.mag.f 800 XSWI6.ST.Pos.stVal
748 MMXU6.MX.VAr.phsA.cVal.mag.f 801 XSWI7.ST.Loc.stVal
749 MMXU6.MX.VAr.phsB.cVal.mag.f 802 XSWI7.ST.Pos.stVal
750 MMXU6.MX.VAr.phsC.cVal.mag.f 803 XSWI8.ST.Loc.stVal
751 MMXU6.MX.VA.phsA.cVal.mag.f 804 XSWI8.ST.Pos.stVal
752 MMXU6.MX.VA.phsB.cVal.mag.f 805 XSWI9.ST.Loc.stVal
753 MMXU6.MX.VA.phsC.cVal.mag.f 806 XSWI9.ST.Pos.stVal
754 MMXU6.MX.PF.phsA.cVal.mag.f 807 XSWI10.ST.Loc.stVal
755 MMXU6.MX.PF.phsB.cVal.mag.f 808 XSWI10.ST.Pos.stVal
756 MMXU6.MX.PF.phsC.cVal.mag.f 809 XSWI11.ST.Loc.stVal
757 GGIO4.MX.AnIn1.mag.f 810 XSWI11.ST.Pos.stVal
758 GGIO4.MX.AnIn2.mag.f 811 XSWI12.ST.Loc.stVal

Enumeration IEC 61850 report dataset items Enumeration GOOSE dataset items
818 XSWI15.ST.Pos.stVal 17 GGIO1.ST.Ind9.q
819 XSWI16.ST.Loc.stVal 18 GGIO1.ST.Ind9.stVal
B 824 XSWI18.ST.Pos.stVal 23 GGIO1.ST.Ind12.q
837 XCBR1.ST.Loc.stVal 36 GGIO1.ST.Ind18.stVal
838 XCBR1.ST.Pos.stVal 37 GGIO1.ST.Ind19.q
49 GGIO1.ST.Ind25.q
F616
ENUMERATION: IEC 61850 GOOSE DATASET ITEMS
51 GGIO1.ST.Ind26.q
Enumeration GOOSE dataset items 52 GGIO1.ST.Ind26.stVal
0 None 53 GGIO1.ST.Ind27.q
1 GGIO1.ST.Ind1.q 54 GGIO1.ST.Ind27.stVal
2 GGIO1.ST.Ind1.stVal 55 GGIO1.ST.Ind28.q

Enumeration GOOSE dataset items Enumeration GOOSE dataset items

76 GGIO1.ST.Ind38.stVal 129 GGIO1.ST.Ind65.q B


B 182 GGIO1.ST.Ind91.stVal 235 GGIO1.ST.Ind118.q
204 GGIO1.ST.Ind102.stVal 257 MMXU1.MX.TotW.mag.f
205 GGIO1.ST.Ind103.q 258 MMXU1.MX.TotVAr.mag.f
206 GGIO1.ST.Ind103.stVal 259 MMXU1.MX.TotVA.mag.f
207 GGIO1.ST.Ind104.q 260 MMXU1.MX.TotPF.mag.f
208 GGIO1.ST.Ind104.stVal 261 MMXU1.MX.Hz.mag.f
209 GGIO1.ST.Ind105.q 262 MMXU1.MX.PPV.phsAB.cVal.mag.f
210 GGIO1.ST.Ind105.stVal 263 MMXU1.MX.PPV.phsAB.cVal.ang.f
211 GGIO1.ST.Ind106.q 264 MMXU1.MX.PPV.phsBC.cVal.mag.f
212 GGIO1.ST.Ind106.stVal 265 MMXU1.MX.PPV.phsBC.cVal.ang.f
213 GGIO1.ST.Ind107.q 266 MMXU1.MX.PPV.phsCA.cVal.mag.f
214 GGIO1.ST.Ind107.stVal 267 MMXU1.MX.PPV.phsCA.cVal.ang.f
215 GGIO1.ST.Ind108.q 268 MMXU1.MX.PhV.phsA.cVal.mag.f
216 GGIO1.ST.Ind108.stVal 269 MMXU1.MX.PhV.phsA.cVal.ang.f
217 GGIO1.ST.Ind109.q 270 MMXU1.MX.PhV.phsB.cVal.mag.f
218 GGIO1.ST.Ind109.stVal 271 MMXU1.MX.PhV.phsB.cVal.ang.f
219 GGIO1.ST.Ind110.q 272 MMXU1.MX.PhV.phsC.cVal.mag.f
220 GGIO1.ST.Ind110.stVal 273 MMXU1.MX.PhV.phsC.cVal.ang.f
221 GGIO1.ST.Ind111.q 274 MMXU1.MX.A.phsA.cVal.mag.f
222 GGIO1.ST.Ind111.stVal 275 MMXU1.MX.A.phsA.cVal.ang.f
223 GGIO1.ST.Ind112.q 276 MMXU1.MX.A.phsB.cVal.mag.f
224 GGIO1.ST.Ind112.stVal 277 MMXU1.MX.A.phsB.cVal.ang.f
225 GGIO1.ST.Ind113.q 278 MMXU1.MX.A.phsC.cVal.mag.f
226 GGIO1.ST.Ind113.stVal 279 MMXU1.MX.A.phsC.cVal.ang.f
227 GGIO1.ST.Ind114.q 280 MMXU1.MX.A.neut.cVal.mag.f
228 GGIO1.ST.Ind114.stVal 281 MMXU1.MX.A.neut.cVal.ang.f


288 MMXU1.MX.VA.phsA.cVal.mag.f 341 MMXU3.MX.PPV.phsCA.cVal.ang.f B


B 394 MMXU4.MX.W.phsB.cVal.mag.f 447 MMXU6.MX.PPV.phsAB.cVal.mag.f
426 MMXU5.MX.A.phsC.cVal.mag.f 479 GGIO4.MX.AnIn1.mag.f
427 MMXU5.MX.A.phsC.cVal.ang.f 480 GGIO4.MX.AnIn2.mag.f
428 MMXU5.MX.A.neut.cVal.mag.f 481 GGIO4.MX.AnIn3.mag.f
429 MMXU5.MX.A.neut.cVal.ang.f 482 GGIO4.MX.AnIn4.mag.f
430 MMXU5.MX.W.phsA.cVal.mag.f 483 GGIO4.MX.AnIn5.mag.f
431 MMXU5.MX.W.phsB.cVal.mag.f 484 GGIO4.MX.AnIn6.mag.f
432 MMXU5.MX.W.phsC.cVal.mag.f 485 GGIO4.MX.AnIn7.mag.f
433 MMXU5.MX.VAr.phsA.cVal.mag.f 486 GGIO4.MX.AnIn8.mag.f
434 MMXU5.MX.VAr.phsB.cVal.mag.f 487 GGIO4.MX.AnIn9.mag.f
435 MMXU5.MX.VAr.phsC.cVal.mag.f 488 GGIO4.MX.AnIn10.mag.f
436 MMXU5.MX.VA.phsA.cVal.mag.f 489 GGIO4.MX.AnIn11.mag.f
437 MMXU5.MX.VA.phsB.cVal.mag.f 490 GGIO4.MX.AnIn12.mag.f
438 MMXU5.MX.VA.phsC.cVal.mag.f 491 GGIO4.MX.AnIn13.mag.f
439 MMXU5.MX.PF.phsA.cVal.mag.f 492 GGIO4.MX.AnIn14.mag.f
440 MMXU5.MX.PF.phsB.cVal.mag.f 493 GGIO4.MX.AnIn15.mag.f


494 GGIO4.MX.AnIn16.mag.f 547 PDIF3.ST.Str.general
495 GGIO4.MX.AnIn17.mag.f 548 PDIF3.ST.Op.general
496 GGIO4.MX.AnIn18.mag.f 549 PDIF4.ST.Str.general
497 GGIO4.MX.AnIn19.mag.f 550 PDIF4.ST.Op.general
498 GGIO4.MX.AnIn20.mag.f 551 PDIS1.ST.Str.general
499 GGIO4.MX.AnIn21.mag.f 552 PDIS1.ST.Op.general
500 GGIO4.MX.AnIn22.mag.f 553 PDIS2.ST.Str.general B
511 GGIO5.ST.UIntIn1.q 564 PDIS7.ST.Op.general
512 GGIO5.ST.UIntIn1.stVal 565 PDIS8.ST.Str.general
518 GGIO5.ST.UIntIn4.stVal 571 PIOC1.ST.Str.general
519 GGIO5.ST.UIntIn5.q 572 PIOC1.ST.Op.general


B 606 PIOC18.ST.Op.general 659 PIOC45.ST.Str.general


710 PIOC70.ST.Op.general 763 PTOV1.ST.Str.general
711 PIOC71.ST.Str.general 764 PTOV1.ST.Op.general
712 PIOC71.ST.Op.general 765 PTOV2.ST.Str.general B
713 PIOC72.ST.Str.general 766 PTOV2.ST.Op.general
714 PIOC72.ST.Op.general 767 PTOV3.ST.Str.general


812 PTUV9.ST.Op.general 865 RBRF23.ST.OpEx.general
813 PTUV10.ST.Str.general 866 RBRF23.ST.OpIn.general
814 PTUV10.ST.Op.general 867 RBRF24.ST.OpEx.general
815 PTUV11.ST.Str.general 868 RBRF24.ST.OpIn.general
816 PTUV11.ST.Op.general 869 RFLO1.MX.FltDiskm.mag.f
817 PTUV12.ST.Str.general 870 RFLO2.MX.FltDiskm.mag.f
B 818 PTUV12.ST.Op.general 871 RFLO3.MX.FltDiskm.mag.f
819 PTUV13.ST.Str.general 872 RFLO4.MX.FltDiskm.mag.f
820 PTUV13.ST.Op.general 873 RFLO5.MX.FltDiskm.mag.f
821 RBRF1.ST.OpEx.general 874 RPSB1.ST.Str.general
822 RBRF1.ST.OpIn.general 875 RPSB1.ST.Op.general
823 RBRF2.ST.OpEx.general 876 RPSB1.ST.BlkZn.stVal


918 CSWI15.ST.Pos.stVal 969 XSWI11.ST.Loc.stVal
919 CSWI16.ST.Loc.stVal 970 XSWI11.ST.Pos.stVal
924 CSWI18.ST.Pos.stVal 975 XSWI14.ST.Loc.stVal B
946 CSWI29.ST.Pos.stVal 997 XCBR1.ST.Loc.stVal
947 CSWI30.ST.Loc.stVal 998 XCBR1.ST.Pos.stVal
948 CSWI30.ST.Pos.stVal 999 XCBR2.ST.Loc.stVal
949 XSWI1.ST.Loc.stVal 1000 XCBR2.ST.Pos.stVal
950 XSWI1.ST.Pos.stVal 1001 XCBR3.ST.Loc.stVal
958 XSWI5.ST.Pos.stVal
959 XSWI6.ST.Loc.stVal
F617
960 XSWI6.ST.Pos.stVal
ENUMERATION: LOGIN ROLES
961 XSWI7.ST.Loc.stVal
962 XSWI7.ST.Pos.stVal Enumeration Role
963 XSWI8.ST.Loc.stVal 0 None
964 XSWI8.ST.Pos.stVal 1 Administrator
965 XSWI9.ST.Loc.stVal 2 Supervisor
966 XSWI9.ST.Pos.stVal 3 Engineer
967 XSWI10.ST.Loc.stVal 4 Operator
968 XSWI10.ST.Pos.stVal 5 Factory

F618 F626
BITFIED: SECURITY STATUS INDICATOR ENUMERATION: NETWORK PORT FOR REMOTE DEVICE
Has been activated, whether the password has been set.
Enumeration Item
1 = Bit#0, Administrator password was set. The list is continued for 0 None
all other roles (Engineer = bit#2, Operator = bit#3, Observer =
1 Network Port 1
bit#3).
B
2 Network Port 2
3 Network Port 3
F619
ENUMERATION: RADIUS AUTHENTICATION METHOD
F627
0 = EAP-TTLS ENUMERATION: REDUNDANCY MODE
Enumeration Item
F621
0 None
ENUMERATION: MODBUS LOGIN ROLES
1 Failover
x
Enumeration Role 2 PRP

0 None
1 Administrator
F628
2 Supervisor ENUMERATION: SECURITY BYPASS ACCESS
3 Engineer
Disables security on local access, remote access, or both.
4 Operator
5 Observer Enumeration Item
0 Disabled
1 Local and Remote
F623
ENUMERATION: REAL-TIME CLOCK SYNCHRONIZING 2 Local
SOURCE CONFIGURATION 3 Remote
Enumeration Item
0 None F629
1 PP/IRIG-B/PTP/SNTP ENUMERATION: SCADA PROTOCOL
2 IRIG-B/PP/PTP/SNTP 0 = DNP 3.0, 1 = IEC 60870-5-104, 2 = IEC 60870-5-103
3 PP/PTP/IRIG-B/SNTP
F630
F624 ENUMERATION: IEC 103 ASDU TYPE
ENUMERATION: REAL-TIME CLOCK SYNCHRONZING 0 = 3, 1 = 9
SOURCE ACTUALS
Enumeration Item
F631
0 None ENUMERATION: VIRTUAL INPUTS FOR IEC 103
1 Port 1 PTP Clock
2 Port 2 PTP Clock Enumeration Item
3 Port 3 PTP Clock 0 OFF
4 IRIG-B 1 Virtual Input 1
5 SNTP 2 Virtual Input 2

3 Virtual Input 3
↓ ↓
F625 64 Virtual Input 64
ENUMERATION: PTP STATE
Enumeration Item
0 Disabled
1 No Signal
2 Calibrating
3 Synchronized
4 Synchronized (No PDelay)

APPENDIX C C.1 OVERVIEW
APPENDIX C IEC 61850 COMMUNICATIONSC.1OVERVIEW C.1.1 INTRODUCTION
The IEC 61850 standard is the result of electric utilities and vendors of electronic equipment to produce standardized com-
munications systems. IEC 61850 is a series of standards describing client/server and peer-to-peer communications, sub-
station design and configuration, testing, environmental and project standards. The complete set includes:
• IEC 61850-1: Introduction and overview
• IEC 61850-2: Glossary
• IEC 61850-3: General requirements
• IEC 61850-4: System and project management
• IEC 61850-5: Communications and requirements for functions and device models
•
•
IEC 61850-6: Configuration description language for communication in electrical substations related to IEDs
IEC 61850-7-1: Basic communication structure for substation and feeder equipment - Principles and models
C
• IEC 61850-7-2: Basic communication structure for substation and feeder equipment - Abstract communication service
interface (ACSI)
• IEC 61850-7-3: Basic communication structure for substation and feeder equipment – Common data classes
• IEC 61850-7-4: Basic communication structure for substation and feeder equipment – Compatible logical node classes
and data classes
• IEC 61850-8-1: Specific Communication Service Mapping (SCSM) – Mappings to MMS (ISO 9506-1 and ISO 9506-2)
and to ISO/IEC 8802-3
• IEC 61850-9-1: Specific Communication Service Mapping (SCSM) – Sampled values over serial unidirectional multi-
drop point to point link
• IEC 61850-9-2: Specific Communication Service Mapping (SCSM) – Sampled values over ISO/IEC 8802-3
• IEC 61850-10: Conformance testing
These documents can be obtained from the IEC (http://www.iec.ch). It is strongly recommended that all those involved with
any IEC 61850 implementation obtain this document set.
C.1.2 COMMUNICATION PROFILES
IEC 61850 specifies the use of the Manufacturing Message Specification (MMS) at the upper (application) layer for transfer
of real-time data. This protocol has been in existence for several of years and provides a set of services suitable for the
transfer of data within a substation LAN environment. Actual MMS protocol services are mapped to IEC 61850 abstract ser-
vices in IEC 61850-8-1.
The B30 relay supports IEC 61850 server services over TCP/IP. The TCP/IP profile requires the B30 to have an IP address
to establish communications. These addresses are located in the SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS 
NETWORK menu. It is possible to have up to five simultaneous connections (in addition to DNP and Modbus/TCP (non-IEC
61850) connections).
• Client/server: This is a connection-oriented type of communication. The connection is initiated by the client, and com-
munication activity is controlled by the client. IEC 61850 clients are often substation computers running HMI programs
or SOE logging software. Servers are usually substation equipment such as protection relays, meters, RTUs, trans-
former tap changers, or bay controllers.
• Peer-to-peer: This is a non-connection-oriented, high speed type of communication usually between substation equip-
ment such as protection relays. GSSE and GOOSE are methods of peer-to-peer communication.
• Substation configuration language (SCL): A substation configuration language is a number of files used to describe
the configuration of substation equipment. Each configured device has an IEC Capability Description (ICD) file. The
substation single line information is stored in a System Specification Description (SSD) file. The entire substation con-
figuration is stored in a Substation Configuration Description (SCD) file. The SCD file is the combination of the individ-
ual ICD files and the SSD file.
GE Multilin B30 Bus Differential System C-1

C.1 OVERVIEW APPENDIX C
C.1.3 FILE TRANSFER BY IEC 61850
The B30 supports file transfer by IEC 61850. The approach is as follows, using the SISCO AX-S4 61850 client software as
an example.
1. In the AX-S4 61850 Explorer window, click the Tools menu and access the SISCO File Transfer Utility.
2. Select the Remote AR Name from the drop-down list. Available files appear in the File Specification area on the right
side of the window.
3. With the Copy option active, select a file to transfer and click the Go button. The file is copied and displays in the
Local list on the left side of the window.
4. Repeat the process to transfer any other files.
Figure 0–1: FILE TRANSFER BY IEC 61850
C
C-2 B30 Bus Differential System GE Multilin

APPENDIX C C.2 SERVER DATA ORGANIZATION
C.2SERVER DATA ORGANIZATION C.2.1 OVERVIEW
IEC 61850 defines an object-oriented approach to data and services. An IEC 61850 physical device can contain one or
more logical device(s). Each logical device can contain many logical nodes. Each logical node can contain many data
objects. Each data object is composed of data attributes and data attribute components. Services are available at each
level for performing various functions, such as reading, writing, control commands, and reporting.
Each B30 IED represents one IEC 61850 physical device. The physical device contains one logical device, and the logical
device contains many logical nodes. The logical node LPHD1 contains information about the B30 IED physical device. The
logical node LLN0 contains information about the B30 IED logical device.
C.2.2 GGIO1: DIGITAL STATUS VALUES
The GGIO1 logical node is available in the B30 to provide access to as many 128 digital status points and associated time-
stamps and quality flags. The data content must be configured before the data can be used. GGIO1 provides digital status C
points for access by clients.
It is intended that clients use GGIO1 in order to access digital status values from the B30. Configuration settings are pro-
vided to allow the selection of the number of digital status indications available in GGIO1 (8 to 128), and to allow the choice
of the B30 FlexLogic operands that drive the status of the GGIO1 status indications. Clients can utilize the IEC 61850 buff-
ered and unbuffered reporting features available from GGIO1 in order to build sequence of events (SOE) logs and HMI dis-
play screens. Buffered reporting should generally be used for SOE logs since the buffering capability reduces the chances
of missing data state changes. Unbuffered reporting should generally be used for local status display.
C.2.3 GGIO2: DIGITAL CONTROL VALUES
The GGIO2 logical node is available to provide access to the B30 virtual inputs. Virtual inputs are single-point control
(binary) values that can be written by clients. They are generally used as control inputs. GGIO2 provides access to the vir-
tual inputs through the IEC 61850 standard control model (ctlModel) services:
• Status only.
• Direct control with normal security.
• SBO control with normal security.
Configuration settings are available to select the control model for each point. Each virtual input used through GGIO2
should have its VIRTUAL INPUT 1(64) FUNCTION setting programmed as “Enabled” and its corresponding GGIO2 CF SPSCO1(64)
CTLMODEL setting programmed to the appropriate control configuration.
C.2.4 GGIO3: DIGITAL STATUS AND ANALOG VALUES FROM GOOSE DATA
The GGIO3 logical node is available to provide access for clients to values received via configurable GOOSE messages.
The values of the digital status indications and analog values in GGIO3 originate in GOOSE messages sent from other
devices.
C.2.5 GGIO4: GENERIC ANALOG MEASURED VALUES
The GGIO4 logical node provides access to as many as 32 analog value points, as well as associated timestamps and
quality flags. The data content must be configured before the data can be used. GGIO4 provides analog values for access
by clients.
It is intended that clients use GGIO4 to access generic analog values from the B30. Configuration settings allow the selec-
tion of the number of analog values available in GGIO4 (4 to 32) and the choice of the FlexAnalog values that determine
the value of the GGIO4 analog inputs. Clients can utilize polling or the IEC 61850 unbuffered reporting feature available
from GGIO4 in order to obtain the analog values provided by GGIO4.

C.2 SERVER DATA ORGANIZATION APPENDIX C
C.2.6 MMXU: ANALOG MEASURED VALUES
A limited number of measured analog values are available through the MMXU logical nodes.
Each MMXU logical node provides data from a B30 current and voltage source. There is one MMXU available for each con-
figurable source (programmed in the SETTINGS  SYSTEM SETUP  SIGNAL SOURCES menu). MMXU1 provides data
from B30 source 1, and MMXU2 provides data from B30 source 2.
MMXU data is provided in two forms: instantaneous and deadband. The instantaneous values are updated every time a
read operation is performed by a client. The deadband values are calculated as described in IEC 61850 parts 7-1 and 7-3.
The selection of appropriate deadband settings for the B30 is described in chapter 5 of this manual.
IEC 61850 buffered and unbuffered reporting capability is available in all MMXU logical nodes. MMXUx logical nodes pro-
vide the following data for each source:
C •
•
MMXU1.MX.TotW: three-phase real power
MMXU1.MX.TotVAr: three-phase reactive power
• MMXU1.MX.TotVA: three-phase apparent power
• MMXU1.MX.TotPF: three-phase power factor
• MMXU1.MX.Hz: frequency
• MMXU1.MX.PPV.phsAB: phase AB voltage magnitude and angle
• MMXU1.MX.PPV.phsBC: phase BC voltage magnitude and angle
• MMXU1.MX.PPV.phsCA: Phase CA voltage magnitude and angle
• MMXU1.MX.PhV.phsA: phase AG voltage magnitude and angle
• MMXU1.MX.PhV.phsB: phase BG voltage magnitude and angle
• MMXU1.MX.PhV.phsC: phase CG voltage magnitude and angle
• MMXU1.MX.A.phsA: phase A current magnitude and angle
• MMXU1.MX.A.phsB: phase B current magnitude and angle
• MMXU1.MX.A.phsC: phase C current magnitude and angle
• MMXU1.MX.A.neut: ground current magnitude and angle
• MMXU1.MX.W.phsA: phase A real power
• MMXU1.MX.W.phsB: phase B real power
• MMXU1.MX.W.phsC: phase C real power
• MMXU1.MX.VAr.phsA: phase A reactive power
• MMXU1.MX.VAr.phsB: phase B reactive power
• MMXU1.MX.VAr.phsC: phase C reactive power
• MMXU1.MX.VA.phsA: phase A apparent power
• MMXU1.MX.VA.phsB: phase B apparent power
• MMXU1.MX.VA.phsC: phase C apparent power
• MMXU1.MX.PF.phsA: phase A power factor
• MMXU1.MX.PF.phsB: phase B power factor
• MMXU1.MX.PF.phsC: phase C power factor
C.2.7 PROTECTION AND OTHER LOGICAL NODES
The following list describes the protection elements for all UR-series relays. The B30 relay will contain a subset of protec-
tion elements from this list.
• PDIF: bus differential, transformer instantaneous differential, transformer percent differential, current differential

APPENDIX C C.2 SERVER DATA ORGANIZATION
• PDIS: phase distance, ground distance

• PIOC: phase instantaneous overcurrent, neutral instantaneous overcurrent, ground instantaneous overcurrent, nega-
tive-sequence instantaneous overcurrent.
• PTOC: phase time overcurrent, neutral time overcurrent, ground time overcurrent, negative-sequence time overcur-
rent, neutral directional overcurrent, negative-sequence directional overcurrent
• PTUV: phase undervoltage, auxiliary undervoltage, third harmonic neutral undervoltage
• PTOV: phase overvoltage, neutral overvoltage, auxiliary overvoltage, negative sequence overvoltage
• RBRF: breaker failure
• RREC: autoreclosure
• RPSB: power swing detection
• RFLO: fault locator C
• XCBR: breaker control
• XSWI: circuit switch
• CSWI: switch controller
The protection elements listed above contain start (pickup) and operate flags. For example, the start flag for PIOC1 is
PIOC1.ST.Str.general. The operate flag for PIOC1 is PIOC1.ST.Op.general. For the B30 protection elements, these flags
take their values from the pickup and operate FlexLogic operands for the corresponding element.
Some protection elements listed above contain directional start values. For example, the directional start value for PDIS1 is
PDIS1.ST.Str.dirGeneral. This value is built from the directional FlexLogic operands for the element.
The RFLO logical node contains the measurement of the distance to fault calculation in kilometers. This value originates in
the fault locator function.
The XCBR logical node is directly associated with the breaker control feature.
• XCBR1.ST.Loc: This is the state of the XCBR1 local/remote switch. A setting is provided to assign a FlexLogic operand
to determine the state. When local mode is true, IEC 61850 client commands will be rejected.
• XCBR1.ST.Opcnt: This is an operation counter as defined in IEC 61850. Command settings are provided to allow the
counter to be cleared.
• XCBR1.ST.Pos: This is the position of the breaker. The breaker control FlexLogic operands are used to determine this
state.
– Intermediate state (00) is indicated when the BREAKER 1 OPEN and BREAKER 1 CLOSED operands are both On.
– Off state (01) is indicated when the BREAKER 1 OPEN operand is On.
– On state (10) is indicated when the BREAKER 1 CLOSED operand is On.
– Bad state (11) is indicated when the BREAKER 1 OPEN and BREAKER 1 CLOSED operands are Off.
• XCBR1.ST.BlkOpn: This is the state of the block open command logic. When true, breaker open commands from IEC
61850 clients will be rejected.
• XCBR1.ST.BlkCls: This is the state of the block close command logic. When true, breaker close commands from IEC
61850 clients will be rejected.
• XCBR1.CO.Pos: This is where IEC 61850 clients can issue open or close commands to the breaker. SBO control with
normal security is the only supported IEC 61850 control model.
• XCBR1.CO.BlkOpn: This is where IEC 61850 clients can issue block open commands to the breaker. Direct control
with normal security is the only supported IEC 61850 control model.
• XCBR1.CO.BlkCls: This is where IEC 61850 clients can issue block close commands to the breaker. Direct control
with normal security is the only supported IEC 61850 control model.

C.3 SERVER FEATURES AND CONFIGURATION APPENDIX C
C.3SERVER FEATURES AND CONFIGURATION C.3.1 BUFFERED/UNBUFFERED REPORTING
IEC 61850 buffered and unbuffered reporting is provided in the GGIO1 logical nodes (for binary status values) and MMXU1
to MMXU6 (for analog measured values). Report settings can be configured using the EnerVista UR Setup software, sub-
station configurator software, or via an IEC 61850 client. The following items can be configured:
• TrgOps: Trigger options. The following bits are supported by the B30:
– Bit 1: data-change
– Bit 4: integrity
– Bit 5: general interrogation
• OptFlds: Option Fields. The following bits are supported by the B30:
C –
–
Bit 1: sequence-number
Bit 2: report-time-stamp
– Bit 3: reason-for-inclusion
– Bit 4: data-set-name
– Bit 5: data-reference
– Bit 6: buffer-overflow (for buffered reports only)
– Bit 7: entryID (for buffered reports only)
– Bit 8: conf-revision
– Bit 9: segmentation
• IntgPd: Integrity period.
• BufTm: Buffer time.
C.3.2 FILE TRANSFER
MMS file services are supported to allow transfer of oscillography, event record, or other files from a B30 relay.
C.3.3 TIMESTAMPS AND SCANNING
The timestamp values associated with all IEC 61850 data items represent the time of the last change of either the value or
quality flags of the data item. To accomplish this functionality, all IEC 61850 data items must be regularly scanned for data
changes, and the timestamp updated when a change is detected, regardless of the connection status of any IEC 61850 cli-
ents. For applications where there is no IEC 61850 client in use, the IEC 61850 SERVER SCANNING setting can be pro-
grammed as “Disabled”. If a client is in use, this setting should be programmed as “Enabled” to ensure the proper
generation of IEC 61850 timestamps.
C.3.4 LOGICAL DEVICE NAME
The logical device name is used to identify the IEC 61850 logical device that exists within the B30. This name is composed
of two parts: the IED name setting and the logical device instance. The complete logical device name is the combination of
the two character strings programmed in the IEDNAME and LD INST settings. The default values for these strings are “IED-
Name” and “LDInst”. These values should be changed to reflect a logical naming convention for all IEC 61850 logical
devices in the system.
C.3.5 LOCATION
The LPHD1 logical node contains a data attribute called location (LPHD1.DC.PhyNam.location). This is a character string
meant to describe the physical location of the B30. This attribute is programmed through the LOCATION setting and its
default value is “Location”. This value should be changed to describe the actual physical location of the B30.

APPENDIX C C.3 SERVER FEATURES AND CONFIGURATION
C.3.6 LOGICAL NODE NAME PREFIXES
IEC 61850 specifies that each logical node can have a name with a total length of 11 characters. The name is composed of:
• A five or six-character name prefix.
• A four-character standard name (for example, MMXU, GGIO, PIOC, etc.).
• A one or two-character instantiation index.
Complete names are of the form xxxxxxPIOC1, where the xxxxxx character string is configurable. Details regarding the
logical node naming rules are given in IEC 61850 parts 6 and 7-2. It is recommended that a consistent naming convention
be used for an entire substation project.
C.3.7 CONNECTION TIMING
A built-in TCP/IP connection timeout of two minutes is employed by the B30 to detect ‘dead’ connections. If there is no data
C
traffic on a TCP connection for greater than two minutes, the connection will be aborted by the B30. This frees up the con-
nection to be used by other clients. Therefore, when using IEC 61850 reporting, clients should configure report control
block items such that an integrity report will be issued at least every 2 minutes (120000 ms). This ensures that the B30 will
not abort the connection. If other MMS data is being polled on the same connection at least once every 2 minutes, this time-
out will not apply.
C.3.8 NON-IEC 61850 DATA
The B30 relay makes available a number of non-IEC 61850 data items. These data items can be accessed through the
“UR” MMS domain. IEC 61850 data can be accessed through the standard IEC 61850 logical device. To access the non-
IEC data items, the INCLUDE NON-IEC DATA setting must be “Enabled”.
C.3.9 COMMUNICATION SOFTWARE UTILITIES
The exact structure and values of the supported IEC 61850 logical nodes can be seen by connecting to a B30 relay with an
MMS browser, such as the “MMS Object Explorer and AXS4-MMS” DDE/OPC server from Sisco Inc.

C.4 GENERIC SUBSTATION EVENT SERVICES: GSSE AND GOOSE APPENDIX C
C.4GENERIC SUBSTATION EVENT SERVICES: GSSE AND GOOSE C.4.1 OVERVIEW
IEC 61850 specifies two types of peer-to-peer data transfer services: Generic Substation State Events (GSSE) and Generic
Object Oriented Substation Events (GOOSE). GSSE services are compatible with UCA 2.0 GOOSE. IEC 61850 GOOSE
services provide virtual LAN (VLAN) support, Ethernet priority tagging, and Ethertype Application ID configuration. The sup-
port for VLANs and priority tagging allows for the optimization of Ethernet network traffic. GOOSE messages can be given
a higher priority than standard Ethernet traffic, and they can be separated onto specific VLANs. Because of the additional
features of GOOSE services versus GSSE services, it is recommended that GOOSE be used wherever backwards com-
patibility with GSSE (or UCA 2.0 GOOSE) is not required.
Devices that transmit GSSE and/or GOOSE messages also function as servers. Each GSSE publisher contains a “GSSE
control block” to configure and control the transmission. Each GOOSE publisher contains a “GOOSE control block” to con-
figure and control the transmission. The transmission is also controlled via device settings. These settings can be seen in
the ICD and/or SCD files, or in the device configuration software or files.
C IEC 61850 recommends a default priority value of 4 for GOOSE. Ethernet traffic that does not contain a priority tag has a
default priority of 1. More details are specified in IEC 61850 part 8-1.
IEC 61850 recommends that the Ethertype Application ID number be configured according to the GOOSE source. In the
B30, the transmitted GOOSE Application ID number must match the configured receive Application ID number in the
receiver. A common number may be used for all GOOSE transmitters in a system. More details are specified in IEC 61850
part 8-1.
C.4.2 GSSE CONFIGURATION
IEC 61850 Generic Substation Status Event (GSSE) communication is compatible with UCA GOOSE communication.
GSSE messages contain a number of double point status data items. These items are transmitted in two pre-defined data
structures named DNA and UserSt. Each DNA and UserSt item is referred to as a ‘bit pair’. GSSE messages are transmit-
ted in response to state changes in any of the data points contained in the message. GSSE messages always contain the
same number of DNA and UserSt bit pairs. Depending the on the configuration, only some of these bit pairs may have val-
ues that are of interest to receiving devices.
The GSSE FUNCTION, GSSE ID, and GSSE DESTINATION MAC ADDRESS settings are used to configure GSSE transmission.
GSSE FUNCTION is set to “Enabled” to enable the transmission. If a valid multicast Ethernet MAC address is entered for the
GSSE DESTINATION MAC ADDRESS setting, this address will be used as the destination MAC address for GSSE messages. If
a valid multicast Ethernet MAC address is not entered (for example, 00 00 00 00 00 00), the B30 will use the source Ether-
net MAC address as the destination, with the multicast bit set.
C.4.3 FIXED GOOSE
The B30 supports two types of IEC 61850 Generic Object Oriented Substation Event (GOOSE) communication: fixed
GOOSE and configurable GOOSE. All GOOSE messages contain IEC 61850 data collected into a dataset. It is this dataset
that is transferred using GOOSE message services. The dataset transferred using the B30 fixed GOOSE is the same data
that is transferred using the GSSE feature; that is, the DNA and UserSt bit pairs. The FlexLogic operands that determine
the state of the DNA and UserSt bit pairs are configurable via settings, but the fixed GOOSE dataset always contains the
same DNA/UserSt data structure. Upgrading from GSSE to GOOSE services is simply a matter of enabling fixed GOOSE
and disabling GSSE. The remote inputs and outputs are configured in the same manner for both GSSE and fixed GOOSE.
It is recommended that the fixed GOOSE be used for implementations that require GOOSE data transfer between UR-
series IEDs. Configurable GOOSE may be used for implementations that require GOOSE data transfer between UR-series
IEDs and devices from other manufacturers.
C.4.4 CONFIGURABLE GOOSE
The configurable GOOSE feature allows for the configuration of the datasets to be transmitted or received from the B30.
The B30 supports the configuration of eight (8) transmission and reception datasets, allowing for the optimization of data
transfer between devices.

APPENDIX C C.4 GENERIC SUBSTATION EVENT SERVICES: GSSE AND GOOSE
Items programmed for dataset 1 and 2 will have changes in their status transmitted as soon as the change is detected.
Dataset 1 should be used for high-speed transmission of data that is required for applications such as transfer tripping,
blocking, and breaker fail initiate. At least one digital status value needs to be configured in dataset 1 to enable transmis-
sion of all data configured for dataset 1. Configuring analog data only to dataset 1 will not activate transmission.
Items programmed for datasets 3 through 8 will have changes in their status transmitted at a maximum rate of every
100 ms. Datasets 3 through 8 will regularly analyze each data item configured within them every 100 ms to identify if any
changes have been made. If any changes in the data items are detected, these changes will be transmitted through a
GOOSE message. If there are no changes detected during this 100 ms period, no GOOSE message will be sent.
For all datasets 1 through 8, the integrity GOOSE message will still continue to be sent at the pre-configured rate even if no
changes in the data items are detected.
The GOOSE functionality was enhanced to prevent the relay from flooding a communications network with GOOSE mes-
sages due to an oscillation being created that is triggering a message.
The B30 has the ability of detecting if a data item in one of the GOOSE datasets is erroneously oscillating. This can be C
caused by events such as errors in logic programming, inputs improperly being asserted and de-asserted, or failed station
components. If erroneously oscillation is detected, the B30 will stop sending GOOSE messages from the dataset for a min-
imum period of one second. Should the oscillation persist after the one second time-out period, the B30 will continue to
block transmission of the dataset. The B30 will assert the MAINTENANCE ALERT: GGIO Ind XXX oscill self-test error mes-
sage on the front panel display, where XXX denotes the data item detected as oscillating.
The configurable GOOSE feature is recommended for applications that require GOOSE data transfer between UR-series
IEDs and devices from other manufacturers. Fixed GOOSE is recommended for applications that require GOOSE data
transfer between UR-series IEDs.
IEC 61850 GOOSE messaging contains a number of configurable parameters, all of which must be correct to achieve the
successful transfer of data. It is critical that the configured datasets at the transmission and reception devices are an exact
match in terms of data structure, and that the GOOSE addresses and name strings match exactly. Manual configuration is
possible, but third-party substation configuration software may be used to automate the process. The EnerVista UR Set-
upsoftware can produce IEC 61850 ICD files and import IEC 61850 SCD files produced by a substation configurator (see
the IEC 61850 IED configuration information later in this appendix).
Use independent ports for IEC 61850 communication and take care when configuring the settings,
NOTICE else loss of protection or misoperation of the relay can result.
The following example illustrates the configuration required to transfer IEC 61850 data items between two devices. The
general steps required for transmission configuration are:
1. Configure the transmission dataset.
The general steps required for reception configuration are:
1. Configure the reception dataset.
This example shows how to configure the transmission and reception of three IEC 61850 data items: a single point status
value, its associated quality flags, and a floating point analog value.
The following procedure illustrates the transmission configuration.
1. Configure the transmission dataset by making the following changes in the PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATION 
IEC 61850 PROTOCOL  GSSE/GOOSE CONFIGURATION  TRANSMISSION  CONFIGURABLE GOOSE  CONFIGURABLE
GOOSE 1  CONFIG GSE 1 DATASET ITEMS settings menu:
The transmission dataset now contains a set of quality flags and a single point status Boolean value. The reception
dataset on the receiving device must exactly match this structure.

C.4 GENERIC SUBSTATION EVENT SERVICES: GSSE AND GOOSE APPENDIX C
2. Configure the GOOSE service settings by making the following changes in the PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATION
 IEC 61850 PROTOCOL  GSSE/GOOSE CONFIGURATION  TRANSMISSION  CONFIGURABLE GOOSE  CONFIGU-
RABLE GOOSE 1 settings menu:
– Set CONFIG GSE 1 FUNCTION to “Enabled”.

– Set CONFIG GSE 1 ID to an appropriate descriptive string (the default value is “GOOSEOut_1”).
– Set CONFIG GSE 1 DST MAC to a multicast address (for example, 01 00 00 12 34 56).
– Set the CONFIG GSE 1 VLAN PRIORITY; the default value of “4” is OK for this example.
– Set the CONFIG GSE 1 VLAN ID value; the default value is “0”, but some switches may require this value to be “1”.
– Set the CONFIG GSE 1 ETYPE APPID value. This setting represents the Ethertype application ID and must match the
configuration on the receiver (the default value is “0”).
C – Set the CONFIG GSE 1 CONFREV value. This value changes automatically as described in IEC 61850 part 7-2. For
this example it can be left at its default value.
3. Configure the data by making the following changes in the PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATION  IEC 61850 PROTO-
COL  GGIO1 STATUS CONFIGURATION settings menu:
– Set GGIO1 INDICATION 1 to a FlexLogic operand used to provide the status of GGIO1.ST.Ind1.stVal (for example, a
contact input, virtual input, a protection element status, etc.).
The B30 must be rebooted (control power removed and re-applied) before these settings take effect.
The following procedure illustrates the reception configuration.
1. Configure the reception dataset by making the following changes in the PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATION  IEC
61850 PROTOCOL  GSSE/GOOSE CONFIGURATION  RECEPTION  CONFIGURABLE GOOSE  CONFIGURABLE GOOSE
1  CONFIG GSE 1 DATASET ITEMS settings menu:
The reception dataset now contains a set of quality flags, a single point status Boolean value, and a floating point ana-
log value. This matches the transmission dataset configuration above.
2. Configure the GOOSE service settings by making the following changes in the INPUTS/OUTPUTS  REMOTE DEVICES
 REMOTE DEVICE 1 settings menu:
– Set REMOTE DEVICE 1 ID to match the GOOSE ID string for the transmitting device. Enter “GOOSEOut_1”.
– Set REMOTE DEVICE 1 ETYPE APPID to match the Ethertype application ID from the transmitting device. This is “0” in
the example above.
– Set the REMOTE DEVICE 1 DATASET value. This value represents the dataset number in use. Since we are using
configurable GOOSE 1 in this example, program this value as “GOOSEIn 1”.
3. Configure the data by making the following changes in the INPUTS/OUTPUTS  REMOTE INPUTS  REMOTE INPUT 1
settings menu:
– Set REMOTE IN 1 DEVICE to “GOOSEOut_1”.
– Set REMOTE IN 1 ITEM to “Dataset Item 2”. This assigns the value of the GGIO3.ST.Ind1.stVal single point status
item to remote input 1.
Remote input 1 can now be used in FlexLogic equations or other settings. The B30 must be rebooted (control power
removed and re-applied) before these settings take effect.
The value of remote input 1 (Boolean on or off) in the receiving device will be determined by the GGIO1.ST.Ind1.stVal value
in the sending device. The above settings will be automatically populated by the EnerVista UR Setup software when a com-
plete SCD file is created by third party substation configurator software.

APPENDIX C C.4 GENERIC SUBSTATION EVENT SERVICES: GSSE AND GOOSE
C.4.5 ETHERNET MAC ADDRESS FOR GSSE/GOOSE
Ethernet capable devices each contain a unique identifying address called a Media Access Control (MAC) address. This
address cannot be changed and is unique for each Ethernet device produced worldwide. The address is six bytes in length
and is usually represented as six hexadecimal values (for example, 00 A0 F4 01 02 03). It is used in all Ethernet frames as
the ‘source’ address of the frame. Each Ethernet frame also contains a destination address. The destination address can
be different for each Ethernet frame depending on the intended destination of the frame.
A special type of destination address called a multicast address is used when the Ethernet frame can be received by more
than one device. An Ethernet MAC address is multicast when the least significant bit of the first byte is set (for example, 01
00 00 00 00 00 is a multicast address).
GSSE and GOOSE messages must have multicast destination MAC addresses.
By default, the B30 is configured to use an automated multicast MAC scheme. If the B30 destination MAC address setting
is not a valid multicast address (that is, the least significant bit of the first byte is not set), the address used as the destina- C
tion MAC will be the same as the local MAC address, but with the multicast bit set. Thus, if the local MAC address is 00 A0
F4 01 02 03, then the destination MAC address will be 01 A0 F4 01 02 03.
C.4.6 GSSE ID AND GOOSE ID SETTINGS
GSSE messages contain an identifier string used by receiving devices to identify the sender of the message, defined in IEC
61850 part 8-1 as GsID. This is a programmable 65-character string. This string should be chosen to provide a descriptive
name of the originator of the GSSE message.
GOOSE messages contain an identifier string used by receiving devices to identify the sender of the message, defined in
IEC 61850 part 8-1 as GoID. This programmable 65-character string should be a descriptive name of the originator of the
GOOSE message. GOOSE messages also contain two additional character strings used for identification of the message:
DatSet - the name of the associated dataset, and GoCBRef - the reference (name) of the associated GOOSE control block.
These strings are automatically populated and interpreted by the B30; no settings are required.

C.5 IEC 61850 IMPLEMENTATION VIA ENERVISTA UR SETUP APPENDIX C
C.5IEC 61850 IMPLEMENTATION VIA ENERVISTA UR SETUP C.5.1 OVERVIEW
The B30 can be configured for IEC 61850 via the EnerVista UR Setup software as follows.
1. An ICD file is generated for the B30 by the EnerVista UR Setup software that describe the capabilities of the IED.
2. The ICD file is then imported into a system configurator along with other ICD files for other IEDs (from GE or other ven-
dors) for system configuration.
3. The result is saved to a SCD file, which is then imported back to EnerVista UR Setup to create one or more settings
file(s). The settings file(s) can then be used to update the relay(s) with the new configuration information.
The configuration process is illustrated below.
C
Creating ICD (GE Multilin)
IEC 61850 related Process of Process of Process of

IED (UR-series) configuration for the IED creating ICD creating ICD creating ICD
(GSSE/GOOSE, server, (vendor 2) (vendor 3) (vendor N)
OR
logical node prefixes,
Setting files EnerVista MMXU deadbands,
(.URS) UR Setup GGIO2 control, etc.)
ICD file 2 ICD file 3 ICD file N

ICD file 1
Import
System SSD file
specification System
data specification
tool System configurator
System configuration
(network, cross-communications,
IED setting modification, etc.)
Updating IED with new configuration (GE Multilin) SCD file
EnerVista UR Setup
Vendor-specific tool Vendor-specific tool Vendor-specific tool

URS 1 URS 2 URS X for updating new for updating new for updating new
configuration to IED configuration to IED configuration to IED
(vendor 2) (vendor 3) (vendor N)
Write settings Write settings file

file to device to other devices
Vendor relay 2 Vendor relay 3 Vendor relay N

UR relay 1 UR relay 2 UR relay X
Ethernet
842790A2.CDR
Figure C–1: IED CONFIGURATION PROCESS

The following acronyms and abbreviations are used in the procedures describing the IED configuration process for IEC
61850:
• BDA: Basic Data Attribute, that is not structured
• DAI: Instantiated Data Attribute
• DO: Data Object type or instance, depending on the context

APPENDIX C C.5 IEC 61850 IMPLEMENTATION VIA ENERVISTA UR SETUP
• DOI: Instantiated Data Object

• IED: Intelligent Electronic Device
• LDInst: Instantiated Logical Device
• LNInst: Instantiated Logical Node
• SCL: Substation Configuration Description Language. The configuration language is an application of the Extensible
Markup Language (XML) version 1.0.
• SDI: Instantiated Sub DATA; middle name part of a structured DATA name
• UR: GE Multilin Universal Relay series
• URI: Universal Resource Identifier
• URS: UR-series relay setting file
• XML: Extensible Markup Language C
The following SCL variants are also used:
• ICD: IED Capability Description
• CID: Configured IED Description
• SSD: System Specification Description
• SCD: Substation Configuration Description
The following IEC related tools are referenced in the procedures that describe the IED configuration process for IEC 61850:
• System configurator or Substation configurator: This is an IED independent system level tool that can import or
export configuration files defined by IEC 61850-6. It can import configuration files (ICD) from several IEDs for system
level engineering and is used to add system information shared by different IEDs. The system configuration generates
a substation related configuration file (SCD) which is fed back to the IED configurator (for example, EnerVista UR
Setup) for system related IED configuration. The system configurator should also be able to read a system specifica-
tion file (SSD) to use as base for starting system engineering, or to compare it with an engineered system for the same
substation.
• IED configurator: This is a vendor specific tool that can directly or indirectly generate an ICD file from the IED (for
example, from a settings file). It can also import a system SCL file (SCD) to set communication configuration parame-
ters (that is, required addresses, reception GOOSE datasets, IDs of incoming GOOSE datasets, etc.) for the IED. The
IED configurator functionality is implemented in the EnerVista UR Setup software.
C.5.2 CONFIGURING IEC 61850 SETTINGS
Before creating an ICD file, the user can customize the IEC 61850 related settings for the IED. For example, the IED name
and logical device instance can be specified to uniquely identify the IED within the substation, or transmission GOOSE
datasets created so that the system configurator can configure the cross-communication links to send GOOSE messages
from the IED. Once the IEC 61850 settings are configured, the ICD creation process will recognize the changes and gener-
ate an ICD file that contains the updated settings.
Some of the IED settings will be modified during they system configuration process. For example, a new IP address may be
assigned, line items in a Transmission GOOSE dataset may be added or deleted, or prefixes of some logical nodes may be
changed. While all new configurations will be mapped to the B30 settings file when importing an SCD file, all unchanged
settings will preserve the same values in the new settings file.
These settings can be configured either directly through the relay panel or through the EnerVista UR Setup software (pre-
ferred method). The full list of IEC 61850 related settings for are as follows:
• Network configuration: IP address, IP subnet mask, and default gateway IP address (access through the Settings >
Product Setup > Communications > Network menu tree in EnerVista UR Setup).
• Server configuration: IED name and logical device instance (access through the Settings > Product Setup > Com-
munications > IEC 61850 > Server Configuration menu tree in EnerVista UR Setup).
• Logical node prefixes, which includes prefixes for all logical nodes except LLN0 (access through the Settings > Prod-
uct Setup > Communications > IEC 61850 > Logical Node Prefixes menu tree in EnerVista UR Setup).

• MMXU deadbands, which includes deadbands for all available MMXUs. The number of MMXUs is related to the num-
ber of CT/VT modules in the relay. There are two MMXUs for each CT/VT module. For example, if a relay contains two
CT/VT modules, there will be four MMXUs available (access through the Settings > Product Setup > Communica-
tions > IEC 61850 > MMXU Deadbands menu tree in EnerVista UR Setup).
• GGIO1 status configuration, which includes the number of status points in GGIO1 as well as the potential internal map-
pings for each GGIO1 indication. However only the number of status points will be used in the ICD creation process
(access through the Settings > Product Setup > Communications > IEC 61850 > GGIO1 Status Configuration
menu tree in EnerVista UR Setup).
• GGIO2 control configuration, which includes ctlModels for all SPCSOs within GGIO2 (access through the Settings >
Product Setup > Communications > IEC 61850 > GGIO2 Control Configuration menu tree in EnerVista UR
Setup).
• Configurable transmission GOOSE, which includes eight configurable datasets that can be used for GOOSE transmis-
C sion. The GOOSE ID can be specified for each dataset (it must be unique within the IED as well as across the whole
substation), as well as the destination MAC address, VLAN priority, VLAN ID, ETYPE APPID, and the dataset items.
The selection of the dataset item is restricted by firmware version; for version 7.2x, only GGIO1.ST.Indx.stVal and
GGIO1.ST.Indx.q are valid selection (where x is between 1 to N, and N is determined by number of GGIO1 status
points). Although configurable transmission GOOSE can also be created and altered by some third-party system con-
figurators, we recommend configuring transmission GOOSE for GE Multilin IEDs before creating the ICD, and strictly
within EnerVista UR Setup software or the front panel display (access through the Settings > Product Setup > Com-
munications > IEC 61850 > GSSE/GOOSE Configuration > Transmission > Tx Configurable GOOSE menu tree
in EnerVista UR Setup).
• Configurable reception GOOSE, which includes eight configurable datasets that can be used for GOOSE reception.
However, unlike datasets for transmission, datasets for reception only contains dataset items, and they are usually cre-
ated automatically by process of importing the SCD file (access through the Settings > Product Setup > Communi-
cations > IEC 61850 > GSSE/GOOSE Configuration > Reception > Rx Configurable GOOSE menu tree in
EnerVista UR Setup).
• Remote devices configuration, which includes remote device ID (GOOSE ID or GoID of the incoming transmission
GOOSE dataset), ETYPE APPID (of the GSE communication block for the incoming transmission GOOSE), and
DATASET (which is the name of the associated reception GOOSE dataset). These settings are usually done automat-
ically by process of importing SCD file (access through the Settings > Inputs/Outputs > Remote Devices menu tree
in EnerVista UR Setup).
• Remote inputs configuration, which includes device (remote device ID) and item (which dataset item in the associated
reception GOOSE dataset to map) values. Only the items with cross-communication link created in SCD file should be
mapped. These configurations are usually done automatically by process of importing SCD file (access through the
Settings > Inputs/Outputs > Remote Inputs menu tree in EnerVista UR Setup).
C.5.3 ABOUT ICD FILES
The SCL language is based on XML, and its syntax definition is described as a W3C XML Schema. ICD is one type of SCL
file (which also includes SSD, CID and SCD files). The ICD file describes the capabilities of an IED and consists of four
major sections:
• Header
• Communication
• IEDs
• DataTypeTemplates

The root file structure of an ICD file is illustrated below.
SCL
Header (id, version, revision, toolID, nameStructure)
Communication
IED (name, type, manufacture, configVersion)
DataTypeTemplates
842795A1.CDR
Figure C–2: ICD FILE STRUCTURE, SCL (ROOT) NODE

The Header node identifies the ICD file and its version, and specifies options for the mapping of names to signals
The Communication node describes the direct communication connection possibilities between logical nodes by means of
C
logical buses (sub-networks) and IED access ports. The communication section is structured as follows.
Communication
SubNetwork (name)
ConnectedAP (iedName, apName)
Address
P (type)
Text
Other P elements
GSE (IdInst, cbName)
Address
P (type)
Text
Other GSE elements Other P elements

842796A1.CDR
Figure C–3: ICD FILE STRUCTURE, COMMUNICATIONS NODE

The SubNetwork node contains all access points which can (logically) communicate with the sub-network protocol and
without the intervening router. The ConnectedAP node describes the IED access point connected to this sub-network. The
Address node contains the address parameters of the access point. The GSE node provides the address element for stat-
ing the control block related address parameters, where IdInst is the instance identification of the logical device within the
IED on which the control block is located, and cbName is the name of the control block.
The IED node describes the (pre-)configuration of an IED: its access points, the logical devices, and logical nodes instanti-
ated on it. Furthermore, it defines the capabilities of an IED in terms of communication services offered and, together with
its LNType, instantiated data (DO) and its default or configuration values. There should be only one IED section in an ICD
since it only describes one IED.

IED (name, type, manufacture, configVersion)
Services
DynAssoication GetDataSetValue ReadWrite ConfLogControl (max)
GetDirectory SetDataSetValue TimerActivatedControl GSEDir
GetDateObjectDefinition DataSetDirectory ConfReportControl (max) GOOSE (max)
DataObjectDirectory ConfDataSet (max, maxAttributes) GetCBValues GSSE (max)
AccessPoint (name)
Server
C Authentication (none)
LDevice (inst)
LN0 (InType, InClass, inst)
DataSet (name)
FCDA (fc, doName, daName, IdInst, prefix, InClass, InInst)
Other FCDA elements
Other DataSet elements
ReportControl (name, datSet, intgPd, rptID, confRev, buffered)
TrgOps (dchg) OptFields (seqNum) RptEnabled
Other ReportControl elements
DOI (name)
SDI (name) DAI (name)

Val Text
Other DOI elements SDI (name)

DAI (name)
GSEControl (name, datSet, type, confRev, appID) Val Text
Other GSEControl elements
LN (InType, InClass, prefix, inst)
DataSet (name)
FCDA (IdInst, prefix, InClass, InInst, doName, fc)
Other FCDA elements
Other DataSet elements
ReportControl (name, datSet, intgPd, rptID, confRev, buffered)
TrgOps (dchg) OptFields (seqNum) RptEnabled
Other ReportControl elements
DOI (name)
SDI (name) DAI (name)

Val Text
Other DOI elements SDI (name)

DAI (name)
Val Text
Other LN elements
Other LDevice elements

842797A1.CDR
Figure C–4: ICD FILE STRUCTURE, IED NODE

The DataTypeTemplates node defines instantiable logical node types. A logical node type is an instantiable template of the
data of a logical node. A LnodeType is referenced each time that this instantiable type is needed with an IED. A logical
node type template is built from DATA (DO) elements, which again have a DO type, which is derived from the DATA classes
(CDC). DOs consist of attributes (DA) or of elements of already defined DO types (SDO). The attribute (DA) has a func-
tional constraint, and can either have a basic type, be an enumeration, or a structure of a DAType. The DAType is built from
BDA elements, defining the structure elements, which again can be BDA elements of have a base type such as DA.
DataTypeTemplates
LNodeType (id, InClass)
DO (name, type)
Other DO elements
Other LNodeType elements

C
DOType (id, cdc)
SDO (name, type) DA (name, fc, bType, type) Val Text
Other SDO elements Other DA elements
Other DOType elements
DAType (id)
BDA (name, bType, type)
Other BDA elements
Other DAType elements
EnumType (id)
EnumVal (ord) Text
Other EnumVal elements
Other EnumType elements

842798A1.CDR
Figure C–5: ICD FILE STRUCTURE, DATATYPETEMPLATES NODE

C.5.4 CREATING AN ICD FILE WITH ENERVISTA UR SETUP
An ICD file can be created directly from a connected B30 IED or from an offline B30 settings file with the EnerVista UR
Setup software using the following procedure:
1. Right-click the connected UR-series relay or settings file and select Create ICD File.
2. The EnerVista UR Setup will prompt to save the file. Select the file path and enter the name for the ICD file, then click
OK to generate the file.
The time to create an ICD file from the offline B30 settings file is typically much quicker than create an ICD file directly from
the relay.
C.5.5 ABOUT SCD FILES
System configuration is performed in the system configurator. While many vendors (including GE Multilin) are working their
own system configuration tools, there are some system configurators available in the market (for example, Siemens DIGSI
version 4.6 or above and ASE Visual SCL Beta 0.12).
Although the configuration tools vary from one vendor to another, the procedure is pretty much the same. First, a substation
project must be created, either as an empty template or with some system information by importing a system specification
file (SSD). Then, IEDs are added to the substation. Since each IED is represented by its associated ICD, the ICD files are
imported into the substation project, and the system configurator validates the ICD files during the importing process. If the
ICD files are successfully imported into the substation project, it may be necessary to perform some additional minor steps
to attach the IEDs to the substation (see the system configurator manual for details).
Once all IEDs are inserted into the substation, further configuration is possible, such as:
• Assigning network addresses to individual IEDs.
• Customizing the prefixes of logical nodes.
• Creating cross-communication links (configuring GOOSE messages to send from one IED to others).
When system configurations are complete, the results are saved to an SCD file, which contains not only the configuration
for each IED in the substation, but also the system configuration for the entire substation. Finally, the SCD file is passed
back to the IED configurator (vendor specific tool) to update the new configuration into the IED.
The SCD file consists of at least five major sections:

• Header.
• Substation.
• Communication.
• IED section (one or more).
• DataTypeTemplates.
The root file structure of an SCD file is illustrated below.
SCL
Header (id, version, revision, toolID, nameStructure)
C
Substation
Communication
IED Section (IED 1)
IED Section (IED 2)
Other IED Sections
DataTypeTemplates
842791A1.CDR
Figure C–6: SCD FILE STRUCTURE, SCL (ROOT) NODE

Like ICD files, the Header node identifies the SCD file and its version, and specifies options for the mapping of names to
signals.
The Substation node describes the substation parameters:
Substation
PowerSystemResource
EquipmentContainer Power Transformer
GeneralEquipment
EquipmentContainer
VoltageLevel Bay
Voltage
PowerSystemResource
Function SubFunction
GeneralEquipment
842792A1.CDR
Figure C–7: SCD FILE STRUCTURE, SUBSTATION NODE

The Communication node describes the direct communication connection possibilities between logical nodes by means of
logical buses (sub-networks) and IED access ports. The communication section is structured as follows.
Communication
SubNetwork (name)
ConnectedAP (IED 1)
Address
P (type)
Text
Other P elements
C GSE (IdInst, cbName)
Address
P (type)
Other GSE elements Text
Other P elements
ConnectedAP (IED 2)
Address
P (type)
Text
Other P elements
GSE (IdInst, cbName)
Address
P (type)
Text
Other P elements
Other GSE elements
Other ConnectedAP elements

842793A1.CDR
Figure C–8: SCD FILE STRUCTURE, COMMUNICATIONS NODE

The SubNetwork node contains all access points which can (logically) communicate with the sub-network protocol and
without the intervening router. The ConnectedAP node describes the IED access point connected to this sub-network. The
Address node contains the address parameters of the access point. The GSE node provides the address element for stat-
ing the control block related address parameters, where IdInst is the instance identification of the logical device within the
IED on which the control block is located, and cbName is the name of the control block.

The IED Section node describes the configuration of an IED.
IED Section (IED 1)
AccessPoint (name)
Server
Authentication (none)
LDevice (inst)
LN0 (InType, InClass, inst)
DataSet elements
ReportControl elements
C
DOI elements
Inputs
ExtRef (iedName, ldInst, prefix, lnClass, lnInst, doName, daName, intAddr)
Other ExtRef elements
GSEControl elements
842794A1.CDR
Figure C–9: SCD FILE STRUCTURE, IED NODE
C.5.6 IMPORTING AN SCD FILE WITH ENERVISTA UR SETUP
The following procedure describes how to update the B30 with the new configuration from an SCD file with the EnerVista
UR Setup software.
1. Right-click anywhere in the files panel and select the Import Contents From SCD File item.
2. Select the saved SCD file and click Open.

3. The software will open the SCD file and then prompt the user to save a UR-series settings file. Select a location and
name for the URS (UR-series relay settings) file.
If there is more than one GE Multilin IED defined in the SCD file, the software prompt the user to save a UR-series set-
tings file for each IED.
4. After the URS file is created, modify any settings (if required).
5. To update the relay with the new settings, right-click on the settings file in the settings tree and select the Write Set-
tings File to Device item.
6. The software will prompt for the target device. Select the target device from the list provided and click Send. The new
settings will be updated to the selected device.

APPENDIX C C.6 ACSI CONFORMANCE
C.6ACSI CONFORMANCE C.6.1 ACSI BASIC CONFORMANCE STATEMENT
SERVICES SERVER/ UR-FAMILY

PUBLISHER
CLIENT-SERVER ROLES
B11 Server side (of Two-party Application-Association) c1 Yes
B12 Client side (of Two-party Application-Association) ---
SCSMS SUPPORTED
B21 SCSM: IEC 61850-8-1 used Yes
B22 SCSM: IEC 61850-9-1 used
B23 SCSM: IEC 61850-9-2 used
B24 SCSM: other C
GENERIC SUBSTATION EVENT MODEL (GSE)
B31 Publisher side O Yes
B32 Subscriber side --- Yes
TRANSMISSION OF SAMPLED VALUE MODEL (SVC)
B41 Publisher side O
B42 Subscriber side ---
c1: shall be "M" if support for LOGICAL-DEVICE model has been declared
O: Optional
NOTE M: Mandatory
C.6.2 ACSI MODELS CONFORMANCE STATEMENT

PUBLISHER
IF SERVER SIDE (B11) SUPPORTED
M1 Logical device c2 Yes
M2 Logical node c3 Yes
M3 Data c4 Yes
M4 Data set c5 Yes
M5 Substitution O
M6 Setting group control O
REPORTING
M7 Buffered report control O Yes
M7-1 sequence-number
M7-2 report-time-stamp
M7-3 reason-for-inclusion
M7-4 data-set-name
M7-5 data-reference
M7-6 buffer-overflow
M7-7 entryID
M7-8 BufTm
M7-9 IntgPd
M7-10 GI
M8 Unbuffered report control O Yes
M8-1 sequence-number
M8-2 report-time-stamp
M8-3 reason-for-inclusion

C.6 ACSI CONFORMANCE APPENDIX C

PUBLISHER
M8-4 data-set-name
M8-5 data-reference
M8-6 BufTm
M8-7 IntgPd
M8-8 GI
Logging O
M9 Log control O
M9-1 IntgPd
M10 Log O
M11 Control M Yes
C IF GSE (B31/32) IS SUPPORTED
GOOSE O Yes
M12-1 entryID
M12-2 DataReflnc
M13 GSSE O Yes
IF SVC (B41/B42) IS SUPPORTED
M14 Multicast SVC O
M15 Unicast SVC O
M16 Time M Yes
M17 File transfer O Yes
c2: shall be "M" if support for LOGICAL-NODE model has been declared
c3: shall be "M" if support for DATA model has been declared
NOTE c4: shall be "M" if support for DATA-SET, Substitution, Report, Log Control, or Time models has been declared
c5: shall be "M" if support for Report, GSE, or SMV models has been declared
M: Mandatory
C.6.3 ACSI SERVICES CONFORMANCE STATEMENT
In the table below, the acronym AA refers to Application Associations (TP: Two Party / MC: Multicast). The c6 to c10 entries
are defined in the notes following the table.
SERVICES AA: TP/MC SERVER/ UR FAMILY

PUBLISHER
SERVER (CLAUSE 7)
S1 ServerDirectory TP M Yes
APPLICATION ASSOCIATION (CLAUSE 8)
S2 Associate TP M Yes
S3 Abort TP M Yes
S4 Release TP M Yes
LOGICAL DEVICE (CLAUSE 9)
S5 LogicalDeviceDirectory TP M Yes
LOGICAL NODE (CLAUSE 10)
S6 LogicalNodeDirectory TP M Yes
S7 GetAllDataValues TP M Yes
DATA (CLAUSE 11)
S8 GetDataValues TP M Yes
S9 SetDataValues TP O Yes
S10 GetDataDirectory TP M Yes
S11 GetDataDefinition TP M Yes

APPENDIX C C.6 ACSI CONFORMANCE

PUBLISHER
DATA SET (CLAUSE 12)
S12 GetDataSetValues TP M Yes
S13 SetDataSetValues TP O
S14 CreateDataSet TP O
S15 DeleteDataSet TP O
S16 GetDataSetDirectory TP O Yes
SETTING GROUP CONTROL (CLAUSE 16)
S18 SelectActiveSG TP O
S19 SelectEditSG TP O
S20 SetSGValues TP O
S21 ConfirmEditSGValues TP O C
S22 GetSGValues TP O
S23 GetSGCBValues TP O
REPORTING (CLAUSE 17)
BUFFERED REPORT CONTROL BLOCK (BRCB)
S24 Report TP c6 Yes
S24-1 data-change (dchg) Yes
S24-2 qchg-change (qchg)
S24-3 data-update (dupd)
S25 GetBRCBValues TP c6 Yes
S26 SetBRCBValues TP c6 Yes
UNBUFFERED REPORT CONTROL BLOCK (URCB)
S27 Report TP c6 Yes
S27-1 data-change (dchg) Yes
S27-2 qchg-change (qchg)
S27-3 data-update (dupd)
S28 GetURCBValues TP c6 Yes
S29 SetURCBValues TP c6 Yes
LOGGING (CLAUSE 17)
LOG CONTROL BLOCK
S30 GetLCBValues TP M
S31 SetLCBValues TP M
LOG
S32 QueryLogByTime TP M
S33 QueryLogByEntry TP M
S34 GetLogStatusValues TP M
GENERIC SUBSTATION EVENT MODEL (GSE) (CLAUSE 18, ANNEX C)
GOOSE-CONTROL-BLOCK (CLAUSE 18)
S35 SendGOOSEMessage MC c8 Yes
S36 GetReference TP c9
S37 GetGOOSEElementNumber TP c9
S38 GetGoCBValues TP O Yes
S39 SetGoCBValues TP O Yes
GSSE-CONTROL-BLOCK (ANNEX C)
S40 SendGSSEMessage MC c8 Yes
S41 GetReference TP c9
S42 GetGSSEElementNumber TP c9
S43 GetGsCBValues TP O Yes

C.6 ACSI CONFORMANCE APPENDIX C

PUBLISHER
S44 SetGsCBValues TP O Yes
TRANSMISSION OF SAMPLED VALUE MODEL (SVC) (CLAUSE 19)
MULTICAST SVC
S45 SendMSVMessage MC c10
S46 GetMSVCBValues TP O
S47 SetMSVCBValues TP O
UNICAST SVC
S48 SendUSVMessage MC c10
S49 GetUSVCBValues TP O
S50 SetUSVCBValues TP O
C CONTROL (CLAUSE 20)
S51 Select O Yes
S52 SelectWithValue TP O
S53 Cancel TP O Yes
S54 Operate TP M Yes
S55 Command-Termination TP O
S56 TimeActivated-Operate TP O
FILE TRANSFER (CLAUSE 23)
S57 GetFile TP M Yes
S58 SetFile TP O
S59 DeleteFile TP O
S60 GetFileAttributeValues TP M Yes
TIME (CLAUSE 5.5)
T1 Time resolution of internal clock 20
(nearest negative power of 2 in
seconds)
T2 Time accuracy of internal clock SNTP, IRIG-B
T3 Supported TimeStamp resolution 20
(nearest value of 2–n in seconds,
according to 6.1.2.9.3.2)
c6: shall declare support for at least one (BRCB or URCB)

c7: shall declare support for at least one (QueryLogByTime or QueryLogAfter)
NOTE c8: shall declare support for at least one (SendGOOSEMessage or SendGSSEMessage)
c9: shall declare support if TP association is available
c10: shall declare support for at least one (SendMSVMessage or SendUSVMessage)

APPENDIX C C.7 LOGICAL NODES
C.7LOGICAL NODES C.7.1 LOGICAL NODES TABLE
The UR-series of relays supports IEC 61850 logical nodes as indicated in the following table. Note that the actual instantia-
tion of each logical node is determined by the product order code. For example. the logical node “PDIS” (distance protec-
tion) is available only in the D60 Line Distance Relay.
Table C–1: IEC 61850 LOGICAL NODES (Sheet 1 of 4)

NODES UR-FAMILY
L: SYSTEM LOGICAL NODES
LPHD: Physical device information Yes
LLN0: Logical node zero Yes
LCCH: Physical communication channel supervision ---
LGOS: GOOSE subscription --- C
LSVS: Sampled value subscription ---
LTIM: Time management ---
LTMS: Time master supervision ---
LTRK: Service tracking ---
A: LOGICAL NODES FOR AUTOMATIC CONTROL
ANCR: Neutral current regulator ---
ARCO: Reactive power control ---
ATCC: Automatic tap changer controller ---
AVCO: Voltage control ---
C: LOGICAL NODES FOR CONTROL
CALH: Alarm handling ---
CCGR: Cooling group control ---
CILO: Interlocking ---
CPOW: Point-on-wave switching ---
CSWI: Switch controller Yes
CSYN: Synchronizer controller ---
F: LOGICAL NODES FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCKS
FCNT: Counter ---
FCSD: Curve shape description ---
FFIL: Generic filler ---
FLIM: Control function output limitation ---
FPID: PID regulator ---
FRMP: Ramp function ---
FSPT: Set-point control function ---
FXOT: Action at over threshold ---
FXUT: Action at under threshold ---
G: LOGICAL NODES FOR GENERIC REFERENCES
GAPC: Generic automatic process control ---
GGIO: Generic process I/O Yes
GLOG: Generic log ---
GSAL: Generic security application ---
I: LOGICAL NODES FOR INTERFACING AND ARCHIVING
IARC: Archiving ---
IHMI: Human machine interface ---
ISAF: Safety alarm function ---
ITCI: Telecontrol interface ---
ITMI: Telemonitoring interface ---

C.7 LOGICAL NODES APPENDIX C

NODES UR-FAMILY
ITPC: Teleprotection communication interfaces ---
K: LOGICAL NODES FOR MECHANICAL AND NON-ELECTRIC PRIMARY EQUIPMENT
KFAN: Fan ---
KFIL: Filter ---
KPMP: Pump ---
KTNK: Tank ---
KVLV: Valve control ---
M: LOGICAL NODES FOR METERING AND MEASUREMENT
MENV: Environmental information ---
C MFLK: Flicker measurement name

MHAI: Harmonics or interharmonics
---
---
MHAN: Non phase related harmonics or interharmonics ---
MHYD: Hydrological information ---
MMDC: DC measurement ---
MMET: Meteorological information ---
MMTN: Metering ---
MMTR: Metering ---
MMXN: Non-phase-related measurement Yes
MMXU: Measurement Yes
MSQI: Sequence and imbalance Yes
MSTA: Metering statistics ---
P: LOGICAL NODES FOR PROTECTION FUNCTIONS
PDIF: Differential Yes
PDIR: Direction comparison ---
PDIS: Distance Yes
PDOP: Directional overpower ---
PDUP: Directional underpower ---
PFRC: Rate of change of frequency ---
PHAR: Harmonic restraint ---
PHIZ: Ground detector ---
PIOC: Instantaneous overcurrent Yes
PMRI Motor restart inhibition ---
PMSS: Motor starting time supervision ---
POPF: Over power factor ---
PPAM: Phase angle measuring ---
PRTR: Rotor protection ---
PSCH: Protection scheme ---
PSDE: Sensitive directional earth fault ---
PTEF: Transient earth fault ---
PTOC: Time overcurrent Yes
PTOF: Overfrequency ---
PTOV: Overvoltage Yes
PTRC: Protection trip conditioning Yes
PTTR: Thermal overload ---
PTUC: Undercurrent ---
PTUF: Underfrequency ---
PTUV: Undervoltage Yes

APPENDIX C C.7 LOGICAL NODES

NODES UR-FAMILY
PUPF: Underpower factor ---
PVOC: Voltage controlled time overcurrent ---
PVPH: Volts per Hz ---
PZSU: Zero speed or underspeed ---
Q: LOGICAL NODES FOR POWER QUALITY EVENTS
QFVR: Frequency variation ---
QITR: Current transient ---
QIUB: Current unbalance variation ---
QVTR: Voltage transient ---
QVUB: Voltage unbalance variation
QVVR: Voltage variation
---
---
C
R: LOGICAL NODES FOR PROTECTION-RELATED FUNCTIONS
RADR: Disturbance recorder channel analogue ---
RBDR: Disturbance recorder channel binary ---
RBRF: Breaker failure ---
RDIR: Directional element ---
RDRE: Disturbance recorder function ---
RDRS: Disturbance record handling ---
RFLO: Fault locator Yes
RMXU: Differential measurements ---
RPSB: Power swing detection/blocking Yes
RREC: Autoreclosing Yes
RSYN: Synchronism-check or synchronizing ---
S: LOGICAL NODES FOR SENSORS AND MONITORING
SARC: Monitoring and diagnostics for arcs ---
SCBR: Circuit breaker supervision ---
SIMG: Insulation medium supervision (gas) ---
SIML: Insulation medium supervision (liquid) ---
SLTC: Tap changer supervision ---
SOPM: Supervision of operating mechanism ---
SPDC: Monitoring and diagnostics for partial discharges ---
SPTR: Power transformer supervision ---
SSWI: Circuit switch supervision ---
STMP: Temperature supervision ---
SVBR: Vibration supervision ---
T: LOGICAL NODES FOR INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS
TANG: Angle ---
TAXD: Axial displacement ---
TCTR: Current transformer ---
TDST: Distance ---
TFLW: Liquid flow ---
TFRQ: Frequency ---
TGSN: Generic sensor ---
THUM: Humidity ---
TLVL: Media level ---
TMGF: Magnetic field ---
TMVM: Movement sensor ---

C.7 LOGICAL NODES APPENDIX C

NODES UR-FAMILY
TPOS: Position indicator ---
TPRS: Pressure sensor ---
TRTN: Rotation transmitter ---
TSND: Sound pressure sensor ---
TTMP: Temperature sensor ---
TTNS: Mechanical tension ---
TVBR: Vibration sensor ---
TVTR: Voltage transformer ---
TWPH: Water acidity ---
C X: LOGICAL NODES FOR SWITCHGEAR

XCBR: Circuit breaker Yes
XSWI: Circuit switch Yes
Y: LOGICAL NODES FOR POWER TRANSFORMERS
YEFN: Earth fault neutralizer (Petersen coil) ---
YLTC: Tap changer ---
YPSH: Power shunt ---
YPTR: Power transformer ---
Z: LOGICAL NODES FOR FURTHER POWER SYSTEM EQUIPMENT
ZAXN: Auxiliary network ---
ZBAT: Battery ---
ZBSH: Bushing ---
ZCAB: Power cable ---
ZCAP: Capacitor bank ---
ZCON: Converter ---
ZGEN: Generator ---
ZGIL: Gas insulated line ---
ZLIN: Power overhead line ---
ZMOT: Motor ---
ZREA: Reactor ---
ZRES: Resistor ---
ZRRC: Rotating reactive component ---
ZSAR: Surge arrestor ---
ZSCR: Semi-conductor controlled rectifier ---
ZSMC: Synchronous machine ---
ZTCF: Thyristor controlled frequency converter ---
ZTRC: Thyristor controlled reactive component ---

APPENDIX D D.1 IEC 60870-5-103
APPENDIX D IEC 60870-5-103 COMMUNICATIONSD.1IEC 60870-5-103 D.1.1 OVERVIEW
IEC 60870-5-103 is defined as a companion standard for the informative element of the protection equipment. IEC 60870-
5-103 defines communication for a serial, unbalanced link only. Communication speeds are defined as either 9600 or
19200 baud.
This manual assumes basic knowledge of the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol and the standard IEC 60870 documents relating to
the protocol.
Standard IEC 60870 documents relating to IEC 60870-5-103:
• IEC 60870-5-1 Transmission frame formats
• IEC 60870-5-2 Link transmission procedures
• IEC 60870-5-3 General structure of application data
• IEC 60870-5-4 Definition and coding of application information elements
• IEC 60870-5-5 Basic application functions
• IEC 60870-5-6 Conformance testing guidelines
An IEC 60870-5-103 device is required to provide an interoperability table. Interoperability means that any required applica-
tion data in the device, which can be coded into an IEC 60870-5-103 data type, can be mapped into the IEC 60870-5-103
address space. This data is recognized by any IEC 60870-5-103 master.
D
D.1.2 FACTOR AND OFFSET CALCULATION TO TRANSMIT MEASURAND
The general formula for the transmitted value is Xt = a * X + b

where X is the measurand, a is the multiplication factor, b is the offset and Xt is the value transmitted.
The conditions for determining a and b, when the values exceed the range are:
4096 = a*Xmax + b (Xmax is the maximum value for the measurand)
-4095 =a*Xmin + b (Xmin is the minimum value for the measurand)
By solving the above system of equations for a and b, we find that:
a = 8191 / (Xmax - Xmin)
b = -4096 * (Xmax + Xmin) / (Xmax - Xmin)
So
Xt = 8191/(Xmax - Xmin)) * X - 4096 * (Xmax + Xmin) / (Xmax - Xmin)
We may further simplify the above formula for situations where:
1)
Xmin = -Xmax (positive and negative values) :
Xt = (8191/2*Xmax) * X
a = 4096/Xmax
b=0
2)
If Xmin = 0 (only positive values)
Xt = (8191/Xmax) * X - 4096
a = 2 * 4096/Xmax
b = -4096
To calculate Xmax, one needs to know the rated value for the specific type of measurand.
Xmax = 2.4 * Xrated
GE Multilin B30 Bus Differential System D-1

D.1 IEC 60870-5-103 APPENDIX D
D.1.3 INTEROPERABILITY DOCUMENT
The boxes indicate the following:  – used in standard direction;  – not used.
1. PHYSICAL LAYER
Electrical interface
 EIA RS-485
32 Number of loads for one protection equipment
Optical interface
 Glass fibre
 Plastic fibre
 F-SMA type connector
 BFOC/2.5 type connector
Transmission speed
 9600 bits/s
D  19200 bits/s
2. LINK LAYER
There are no choices for the link layer.
3. APPLICATION LAYER
Transmission mode for application data
Mode 1 (least significant octet first), as defined in 4.10 of IEC 60870-5-4, is used exclusively in this companion stan-
dard.
Common address of ASDU
 One COMMON ADDRESS OF ASDU (identical with station address)
 More than one COMMON ADDRESS OF ASDU
Selection of standard information numbers in monitor direction
System functions in monitor direction
INF Semantics
 <0> End of general interrogation
 <0> Time synchronization
 <2> Reset FCB
 <3> Reset CU
 <4> Start/restart
 <5> Power on
Status indications in monitor direction
INF Semantics
 <16> Auto-recloser active
 <17> Teleprotection active
 <18> Protection active
 <19> LED reset
 <20> Monitor direction blocked
 <21> Test mode
D-2 B30 Bus Differential System GE Multilin

 <22> Local parameter setting

 <23> Characteristic 1
 <27> Auxiliary input 1
Supervision indications in monitor direction
INF Semantics
 <32> Measurand supervision I
 <33> Measurand supervision V
 <35> Phase sequence supervision
 <36> Trip circuit supervision
D
 <37> I>> back-up operation
 <38> VT fuse failure
 <39> Teleprotection disturbed
 <46> Group warning
 <47> Group alarm
Earth fault indications in monitor direction
INF Semantics
 <48> Earth fault L1
 <51> Earth fault forward, meaning line
 <52> Earth fault reverse, meaning busbar
Fault indications in monitor direction
INF Semantics
 <64> Start/pick-up L1
 <67> Start/pick-up N
 <68> General trip
 <69> Trip L1
 <70> Trip L2
 <71> Trip L3
 <72> Trip I>> (back-up operation)
 <73> Fault location X in ohms
 <74> Fault forward/line

 <75> Fault reverse/busbar

 <76> Teleprotection signal transmitted
 <77> Teleprotection signal received
 <78> Zone 1
 <79> Zone 2
 <80> Zone 3
 <81> Zone 4
 <82> Zone 5
 <83> Zone 6
 <84> General start / pick-up
 <85> Breaker failure
 <86> Trip measuring system L1
D  <89> Trip measuring system E
 <90> Trip I>
 <91> Trip I>>
 <92> Trip IN>
 <93> Trip IN>>
Auto-reclosure indications in monitor direction
INF Semantics
 <128> CB ’on’ by AR
 <129> CB ’on’ by long-time AR
 <130> AR blocked
Measurands in monitor direction
INF Semantics
 <144> Measurand I
 <145> Measurands I, V
 <146> Measurands I, V, P, Q
 <147> Measurands IN, VEN
 <148> Measurands IL123, VL123, P, Q, f
Generic functions in monitor direction
INF Semantics
 <240> Read headings of all defined groups
 <241> Read values or attributes of all entries of one group
 <243> Read directory of a single entry
 <244> Read value or attribute of a single entry
 <245> End of general interrogation of generic data
 <249> Write entry with confirmation
 <250> Write entry with execution

 <251> Write entry aborted

Selection of standard information numbers in control direction
System functions in control direction
INF Semantics
 <0> Initiation of general interrogation
 <0> Time synchronization
General commands in control direction
INF Semantics
 <16> Auto-recloser on/off
 <17> Teleprotection on/off
 <18> Protection on/off
 <19> LED reset
 <23> Activate characteristic 1
D
Generic functions in control direction
INF Semantics
 <240> Read headings of all defined groups
 <241> Read values or attributes of all entries of one group
 <243> Read directory of a single entry
 <244> Read value or attribute of a single entry
 <245> General interrogation of generic data
 <248> Write entry
 <249> Write entry with confirmation
 <250> Write entry with execution
 <251> Write entry abort
Basic application functions
 Test mode
 Blocking of monitor direction
 Disturbance data
 Generic services
 Private data
Miscellaneous
MEASURAND MAX MVAL = TIMES RATED VALUE
1,2 OR 2,4
Current L1  
Current L2  
Current L3  
Voltage L1-E  

MEASURAND MAX MVAL = TIMES RATED VALUE

1,2 OR 2,4
Active power P  
Reactive power Q  
Frequency f  
Voltage L1-L2  

APPENDIX E E.1 IEC 60870-5-104
APPENDIX E IEC 60870-5-104 COMMUNICATIONSE.1IEC 60870-5-104 E.1.1 INTEROPERABILITY DOCUMENT
This document is adapted from the IEC 60870-5-104 standard. For this section the boxes indicate the following:  – used
in standard direction;  – not used;  – cannot be selected in IEC 60870-5-104 standard.
1. SYSTEM OR DEVICE:
 System Definition
 Controlling Station Definition (Master)
 Controlled Station Definition (Slave)
2. NETWORK CONFIGURATION:
 Point-to-Point  Multipoint
 Multiple Point-to-Point  Multipoint Star
3. PHYSICAL LAYER
Transmission Speed (control direction):
Unbalanced Interchange Unbalanced Interchange Balanced Interchange Circuit
Circuit V.24/V.28 Standard: Circuit V.24/V.28 Recommended X.24/X.27:
if >1200 bits/s:
 100 bits/sec.  2400 bits/sec.  2400 bits/sec.
 600 bits/sec.  19200 bits/sec.
 1200 bits/sec.  38400 bits/sec. E
 56000 bits/sec.
 64000 bits/sec.
Transmission Speed (monitor direction):
Unbalanced Interchange Unbalanced Interchange Balanced Interchange Circuit
Circuit V.24/V.28 Standard: Circuit V.24/V.28 Recommended X.24/X.27:
if >1200 bits/s:
 56000 bits/sec.
 64000 bits/sec.
4. LINK LAYER
Link Transmission Procedure: Address Field of the Link:
 Balanced Transmission  Not Present (Balanced Transmission Only)
 Unbalanced Transmission  One Octet
 Two Octets
 Structured
 Unstructured
Frame Length (maximum length, number of octets): Not selectable in companion IEC 60870-5-104 standard
GE Multilin B30 Bus Differential System E-1

E.1 IEC 60870-5-104 APPENDIX E
When using an unbalanced link layer, the following Application Service Data Unit (ASDU) types are returned in class 2
messages (low priority) with the indicated causes of transmission:
 The standard assignment of ASDUs to class 2 messages is used as follows:
 A special assignment of ASDUs to class 2 messages is used as follows:
5. APPLICATION LAYER
Transmission Mode for Application Data:
Mode 1 (least significant octet first), as defined in Clause 4.10 of IEC 60870-5-4, is used exclusively in this companion
standard.
Common Address of ASDU:
 One Octet
 Two Octets
Information Object Address:
 One Octet  Structured
 Two Octets  Unstructured
 Three Octets
Cause of Transmission:
 One Octet
E  Two Octets (with originator address). Originator address is set to zero if not used.
Maximum Length of APDU: 253 (the maximum length may be reduced by the system.
Selection of standard ASDUs:
For the following lists, the boxes indicate the following:  – used in standard direction;  – not used;  – cannot be
selected in IEC 60870-5-104 standard.
Process information in monitor direction
 <1> := Single-point information M_SP_NA_1
 <2> := Single-point information with time tag M_SP_TA_1
 <3> := Double-point information M_DP_NA_1
 <4> := Double-point information with time tag M_DP_TA_1
 <5> := Step position information M_ST_NA_1
 <6> := Step position information with time tag M_ST_TA_1
 <7> := Bitstring of 32 bits M_BO_NA_1
 <8> := Bitstring of 32 bits with time tag M_BO_TA_1
 <9> := Measured value, normalized value M_ME_NA_1
 <10> := Measured value, normalized value with time tag M_NE_TA_1
 <11> := Measured value, scaled value M_ME_NB_1
 <12> := Measured value, scaled value with time tag M_NE_TB_1
 <13> := Measured value, short floating point value M_ME_NC_1
 <14> := Measured value, short floating point value with time tag M_NE_TC_1
 <15> := Integrated totals M_IT_NA_1
 <16> := Integrated totals with time tag M_IT_TA_1
 <17> := Event of protection equipment with time tag M_EP_TA_1
 <18> := Packed start events of protection equipment with time tag M_EP_TB_1
 <19> := Packed output circuit information of protection equipment with time tag M_EP_TC_1
 <20> := Packed single-point information with status change detection M_SP_NA_1
E-2 B30 Bus Differential System GE Multilin

 <21> := Measured value, normalized value without quantity descriptor M_ME_ND_1
 <30> := Single-point information with time tag CP56Time2a M_SP_TB_1

 <31> := Double-point information with time tag CP56Time2a M_DP_TB_1
 <32> := Step position information with time tag CP56Time2a M_ST_TB_1
 <33> := Bitstring of 32 bits with time tag CP56Time2a M_BO_TB_1
 <34> := Measured value, normalized value with time tag CP56Time2a M_ME_TD_1
 <35> := Measured value, scaled value with time tag CP56Time2a M_ME_TE_1
 <36> := Measured value, short floating point value with time tag CP56Time2a M_ME_TF_1
 <37> := Integrated totals with time tag CP56Time2a M_IT_TB_1
 <38> := Event of protection equipment with time tag CP56Time2a M_EP_TD_1
 <39> := Packed start events of protection equipment with time tag CP56Time2a M_EP_TE_1
 <40> := Packed output circuit information of protection equipment with time tag CP56Time2a M_EP_TF_1
Either the ASDUs of the set <2>, <4>, <6>, <8>, <10>, <12>, <14>, <16>, <17>, <18>, and <19> or of the set
<30> to <40> are used.
Process information in control direction
 <45> := Single command C_SC_NA_1
 <46> := Double command C_DC_NA_1
 <47> := Regulating step command C_RC_NA_1
 <48> := Set point command, normalized value C_SE_NA_1
 <49> := Set point command, scaled value C_SE_NB_1 E
 <50> := Set point command, short floating point value C_SE_NC_1
 <51> := Bitstring of 32 bits C_BO_NA_1
 <58> := Single command with time tag CP56Time2a C_SC_TA_1

 <59> := Double command with time tag CP56Time2a C_DC_TA_1
 <60> := Regulating step command with time tag CP56Time2a C_RC_TA_1
 <61> := Set point command, normalized value with time tag CP56Time2a C_SE_TA_1
 <62> := Set point command, scaled value with time tag CP56Time2a C_SE_TB_1
 <63> := Set point command, short floating point value with time tag CP56Time2a C_SE_TC_1
 <64> := Bitstring of 32 bits with time tag CP56Time2a C_BO_TA_1
Either the ASDUs of the set <45> to <51> or of the set <58> to <64> are used.
System information in monitor direction
 <70> := End of initialization M_EI_NA_1
System information in control direction

 <100> := Interrogation command C_IC_NA_1
 <101> := Counter interrogation command C_CI_NA_1
 <102> := Read command C_RD_NA_1
 <103> := Clock synchronization command (see Clause 7.6 in standard) C_CS_NA_1
 <104> := Test command C_TS_NA_1
 <105> := Reset process command C_RP_NA_1
 <106> := Delay acquisition command C_CD_NA_1
 <107> := Test command with time tag CP56Time2a C_TS_TA_1

Parameter in control direction

 <110> := Parameter of measured value, normalized value PE_ME_NA_1
 <111> := Parameter of measured value, scaled value PE_ME_NB_1
 <112> := Parameter of measured value, short floating point value PE_ME_NC_1
 <113> := Parameter activation PE_AC_NA_1
File transfer
 <120> := File Ready F_FR_NA_1
 <121> := Section Ready F_SR_NA_1
 <122> := Call directory, select file, call file, call section F_SC_NA_1
 <123> := Last section, last segment F_LS_NA_1
 <124> := Ack file, ack section F_AF_NA_1
 <125> := Segment F_SG_NA_1
 <126> := Directory (blank or X, available only in monitor [standard] direction) C_CD_NA_1
Type identifier and cause of transmission assignments

(station-specific parameters)
In the following table:
•Shaded boxes are not required.
•Black boxes are not permitted in this companion standard.
E •Blank boxes indicate functions or ASDU not used.

•‘X’ if only used in the standard direction
TYPE IDENTIFICATION CAUSE OF TRANSMISSION
REQUEST BY GROUP <N> COUNTER REQ
UNKNOWN INFORMATION OBJECT ADDR

UNKNOWN COMMON ADDRESS OF ASDU
INTERROGATED BY GROUP <NUMBER>
RETURN INFO CAUSED BY LOCAL CMD
UNKNOWN CAUSE OF TRANSMISSION

UNKNOWN TYPE IDENTIFICATION
DEACTIVATION CONFIRMATION
ACTIVATION CONFIRMATION
ACTIVATION TERMINATION
REQUEST OR REQUESTED
BACKGROUND SCAN
PERIODIC, CYCLIC
FILE TRANSFER
SPONTANEOUS
DEACTIVATION
ACTIVATION
INITIALIZED
20 37
NO. MNEMONIC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 to to 44 45 46 47
36 41
<1> M_SP_NA_1 X X X X X
<2> M_SP_TA_1
<3> M_DP_NA_1
<4> M_DP_TA_1
<5> M_ST_NA_1
<6> M_ST_TA_1
<7> M_BO_NA_1
<8> M_BO_TA_1
<9> M_ME_NA_1



BACKGROUND SCAN
PERIODIC, CYCLIC
FILE TRANSFER
SPONTANEOUS
DEACTIVATION
ACTIVATION
INITIALIZED
20 37
NO. MNEMONIC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 to to 44 45 46 47
36 41
<10> M_ME_TA_1
<11> M_ME_NB_1
<12> M_ME_TB_1
<13> M_ME_NC_1 X X X X
<14> M_ME_TC_1
<15>
<16>
M_IT_NA_1
M_IT_TA_1
X X
E
<17> M_EP_TA_1
<18> M_EP_TB_1
<19> M_EP_TC_1
<20> M_PS_NA_1
<21> M_ME_ND_1
<30> M_SP_TB_1 X X X
<31> M_DP_TB_1
<32> M_ST_TB_1
<33> M_BO_TB_1
<34> M_ME_TD_1
<35> M_ME_TE_1
<36> M_ME_TF_1
<37> M_IT_TB_1 X X
<38> M_EP_TD_1
<39> M_EP_TE_1
<40> M_EP_TF_1
<45> C_SC_NA_1 X X X X X
<46> C_DC_NA_1
<47> C_RC_NA_1
<48> C_SE_NA_1
<49> C_SE_NB_1
<50> C_SE_NC_1
<51> C_BO_NA_1
<58> C_SC_TA_1 X X X X X
<59> C_DC_TA_1
<60> C_RC_TA_1



BACKGROUND SCAN
PERIODIC, CYCLIC
FILE TRANSFER
SPONTANEOUS
DEACTIVATION
ACTIVATION
INITIALIZED
20 37
NO. MNEMONIC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 to to 44 45 46 47
36 41
<61> C_SE_TA_1
<62> C_SE_TB_1
<63> C_SE_TC_1
<64> C_BO_TA_1
<70> M_EI_NA_1*) X
E <100>
<101>
C_IC_NA_1
C_CI_NA_1
X
X
X
X
X X X
X
<102> C_RD_NA_1 X
<103> C_CS_NA_1 X X X
<104> C_TS_NA_1
<105> C_RP_NA_1 X X
<106> C_CD_NA_1
<107> C_TS_TA_1
<110> P_ME_NA_1
<111> P_ME_NB_1
<112> P_ME_NC_1 X X X
<113> P_AC_NA_1
<120> F_FR_NA_1
<121> F_SR_NA_1
<122> F_SC_NA_1
<123> F_LS_NA_1
<124> F_AF_NA_1
<125> F_SG_NA_1
<126> F_DR_TA_1*)
6. BASIC APPLICATION FUNCTIONS

Station Initialization:
 Remote initialization
Cyclic Data Transmission:
 Cyclic data transmission
Read Procedure:
 Read procedure

Spontaneous Transmission:
 Spontaneous transmission
Double transmission of information objects with cause of transmission spontaneous:
The following type identifications may be transmitted in succession caused by a single status change of an information
object. The particular information object addresses for which double transmission is enabled are defined in a project-
specific list.
 Single point information: M_SP_NA_1, M_SP_TA_1, M_SP_TB_1, and M_PS_NA_1
 Double point information: M_DP_NA_1, M_DP_TA_1, and M_DP_TB_1
 Step position information: M_ST_NA_1, M_ST_TA_1, and M_ST_TB_1
 Bitstring of 32 bits: M_BO_NA_1, M_BO_TA_1, and M_BO_TB_1 (if defined for a specific project)
 Measured value, normalized value: M_ME_NA_1, M_ME_TA_1, M_ME_ND_1, and M_ME_TD_1
 Measured value, scaled value: M_ME_NB_1, M_ME_TB_1, and M_ME_TE_1
 Measured value, short floating point number: M_ME_NC_1, M_ME_TC_1, and M_ME_TF_1
Station interrogation:
 Global
 Group 1  Group 5  Group 9  Group 13
Clock synchronization:
E
 Clock synchronization (optional, see Clause 7.6)
Command transmission:
 Direct command transmission
 Direct setpoint command transmission
 Select and execute command
 Select and execute setpoint command
 C_SE ACTTERM used
 No additional definition
 Short pulse duration (duration determined by a system parameter in the outstation)
 Long pulse duration (duration determined by a system parameter in the outstation)
 Persistent output
 Supervision of maximum delay in command direction of commands and setpoint commands

Maximum allowable delay of commands and setpoint commands: 10 s
Transmission of integrated totals:
 Mode A: Local freeze with spontaneous transmission
 Mode B: Local freeze with counter interrogation
 Mode C: Freeze and transmit by counter-interrogation commands
 Mode D: Freeze by counter-interrogation command, frozen values reported simultaneously
 Counter read
 Counter freeze without reset

 Counter freeze with reset

 Counter reset
 General request counter

 Request counter group 1
Parameter loading:
 Threshold value
 Smoothing factor
 Low limit for transmission of measured values
 High limit for transmission of measured values
Parameter activation:
 Activation/deactivation of persistent cyclic or periodic transmission of the addressed object
Test procedure:
 Test procedure
File transfer:
E File transfer in monitor direction:

 Transparent file
 Transmission of disturbance data of protection equipment
 Transmission of sequences of events
 Transmission of sequences of recorded analog values
File transfer in control direction:
 Transparent file
Background scan:
 Background scan
Acquisition of transmission delay:
 Acquisition of transmission delay
Definition of time outs:

PARAMETER DEFAULT REMARKS SELECTED
VALUE VALUE
t0 30 s Timeout of connection establishment 120 s
t1 15 s Timeout of send or test APDUs 15 s
t2 10 s Timeout for acknowledgements in case of no data messages t2 < t1 10 s
t3 20 s Timeout for sending test frames in case of a long idle state 20 s
Maximum range of values for all time outs: 1 to 255 s, accuracy 1 s

Maximum number of outstanding I-format APDUs k and latest acknowledge APDUs (w):
PARAMETER DEFAULT REMARKS SELECTED
VALUE VALUE
k 12 APDUs Maximum difference receive sequence number to send state variable 12 APDUs
w 8 APDUs Latest acknowledge after receiving w I-format APDUs 8 APDUs

Maximum range of values k: 1 to 32767 (215 – 1) APDUs, accuracy 1 APDU

Maximum range of values w: 1 to 32767 APDUs, accuracy 1 APDU
Recommendation: w should not exceed two-thirds of k.
Portnumber:
PARAMETER VALUE REMARKS
Portnumber 2404 In all cases
RFC 2200 suite:

RFC 2200 is an official Internet Standard which describes the state of standardization of protocols used in the Internet
as determined by the Internet Architecture Board (IAB). It offers a broad spectrum of actual standards used in the Inter-
net. The suitable selection of documents from RFC 2200 defined in this standard for given projects has to be chosen
by the user of this standard.
 Ethernet 802.3
 Serial X.21 interface
 Other selection(s) from RFC 2200 (list below if selected)
E.1.2 IEC 60870-5-104 POINTS
The IEC 60870-5-104 data points are configured through the SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  DNP /
menu. See the Communications section of chapter 5 for details.
IEC104 POINT LISTS


APPENDIX F F.1 DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT
APPENDIX F DNP COMMUNICATIONSF.1DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT F.1.1 DNP V3.00 DEVICE PROFILE
The following table provides a ‘Device Profile Document’ in the standard format defined in the DNP 3.0 Subset Definitions
Document.
Table F–1: DNP V3.00 DEVICE PROFILE (Sheet 1 of 3)
(Also see the IMPLEMENTATION TABLE in the following section)
Vendor Name: General Electric Multilin
Device Name: UR Series Relay
Highest DNP Level Supported: Device Function:

For Requests: Level 2  Master
For Responses: Level 2  Slave
Notable objects, functions, and/or qualifiers supported in addition to the Highest DNP Levels Supported (the complete
list is described in the attached table):
Binary Inputs (Object 1)
Binary Input Changes (Object 2)
Binary Outputs (Object 10)
Control Relay Output Block (Object 12)
Binary Counters (Object 20)
Frozen Counters (Object 21)
Counter Change Event (Object 22)
Frozen Counter Event (Object 23)
Analog Inputs (Object 30)
Analog Input Changes (Object 32)
F
Analog Deadbands (Object 34)
Time and Date (Object 50)
File Transfer (Object 70)
Internal Indications (Object 80)
Maximum Data Link Frame Size (octets): Maximum Application Fragment Size (octets):
Transmitted: 292 Transmitted: configurable up to 2048
Received: 292 Received: 2048
Maximum Data Link Re-tries: Maximum Application Layer Re-tries:

 None  None
 Fixed at 3  Configurable
 Configurable
Requires Data Link Layer Confirmation:

 Never
 Always
 Sometimes
 Configurable
GE Multilin B30 Bus Differential System F-1

F.1 DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT APPENDIX F
Requires Application Layer Confirmation:

 Never
 Always
 When reporting Event Data
 When sending multi-fragment responses
 Sometimes
 Configurable
Timeouts while waiting for:

Data Link Confirm:  None  Fixed at ____  Variable  Configurable
Complete Appl. Fragment:  None  Fixed at ____  Variable  Configurable
Application Confirm:  None  Fixed at 10 s  Variable  Configurable
Complete Appl. Response:  None  Fixed at ____  Variable  Configurable
Others:
Transmission Delay: No intentional delay
Need Time Interval: Configurable (default = 24 hrs.)
Select/Operate Arm Timeout: 10 s
Binary input change scanning period: 8 times per power system cycle
Analog input change scanning period: 500 ms
Counter change scanning period: 500 ms
Frozen counter event scanning period: 500 ms
Unsolicited response notification delay: 100 ms
Unsolicited response retry delay configurable 0 to 60 sec.
Sends/Executes Control Operations:

F WRITE Binary Outputs  Never  Always  Sometimes  Configurable
SELECT/OPERATE  Never  Always  Sometimes  Configurable
DIRECT OPERATE  Never  Always  Sometimes  Configurable
DIRECT OPERATE – NO ACK  Never  Always  Sometimes  Configurable
Count > 1  Never  Always  Sometimes  Configurable

Pulse On  Never  Always  Sometimes  Configurable
Pulse Off  Never  Always  Sometimes  Configurable
Latch On  Never  Always  Sometimes  Configurable
Latch Off  Never  Always  Sometimes  Configurable
Queue  Never  Always  Sometimes  Configurable

Clear Queue  Never  Always  Sometimes  Configurable
Explanation of ‘Sometimes’: Object 12 points are mapped to UR Virtual Inputs. The persistence of Virtual Inputs is
determined by the VIRTUAL INPUT X TYPE settings. Both “Pulse On” and “Latch On” operations perform the same func-
tion in the UR; that is, the appropriate Virtual Input is put into the “On” state. If the Virtual Input is set to “Self-Reset”,
it will reset after one pass of FlexLogic. The On/Off times and Count value are ignored. “Pulse Off” and “Latch Off”
operations put the appropriate Virtual Input into the “Off” state. “Trip” and “Close” operations both put the appropriate
Virtual Input into the “On” state.
F-2 B30 Bus Differential System GE Multilin

Reports Binary Input Change Events when no Reports time-tagged Binary Input Change Events when no
specific variation requested: specific variation requested:
 Never  Never
 Only time-tagged  Binary Input Change With Time
 Only non-time-tagged  Binary Input Change With Relative Time
 Configurable  Configurable (attach explanation)
Sends Unsolicited Responses: Sends Static Data in Unsolicited Responses:

 Never  Never
 Configurable  When Device Restarts
 Only certain objects  When Status Flags Change
 Sometimes (attach explanation)
 ENABLE/DISABLE unsolicited Function No other options are permitted.
codes supported
Default Counter Object/Variation: Counters Roll Over at:

 No Counters Reported  No Counters Reported
 Configurable (attach explanation)  Configurable (attach explanation)
 Default Object: 20  16 Bits (Counter 8)
Default Variation: 1  32 Bits (Counters 0 to 7, 9)
 Point-by-point list attached  Other Value: _____
 Point-by-point list attached
Sends Multi-Fragment Responses:

 Yes
 No

F.1.2 IMPLEMENTATION TABLE
The following table identifies the variations, function codes, and qualifiers supported by the B30 in both request messages
and in response messages. For static (non-change-event) objects, requests sent with qualifiers 00, 01, 06, 07, or 08, will be
responded with qualifiers 00 or 01. Static object requests sent with qualifiers 17 or 28 will be responded with qualifiers 17 or
28. For change-event objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are always responded.
Table F–2: IMPLEMENTATION TABLE (Sheet 1 of 4)

OBJECT REQUEST RESPONSE
OBJECT VARIATION DESCRIPTION FUNCTION QUALIFIER FUNCTION QUALIFIER
NO. NO. CODES (DEC) CODES (HEX) CODES (DEC) CODES (HEX)
1 0 Binary Input (Variation 0 is used to request 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop)
default variation) 22 (assign class) 06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 (limited quantity)
17, 28 (index)
1 Binary Input 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
22 (assign class) 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index)
07, 08 (limited quantity) (see Note 2)
17, 28 (index)
2 Binary Input with Status 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
2 0 Binary Input Change (Variation 0 is used to 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all)
request default variation) 07, 08 (limited quantity)
1 Binary Input Change without Time 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
07, 08 (limited quantity) 130 (unsol. resp.)
2 Binary Input Change with Time 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response 17, 28 (index)
3 Binary Input Change with Relative Time 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all)
10 0 Binary Output Status (Variation 0 is used to 1 (read) 00, 01(start-stop)
request default variation) 06 (no range, or all)
F 07, 08 (limited quantity)

17, 28 (index)
2 Binary Output Status 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index)
17, 28 (index)
12 1 Control Relay Output Block 3 (select) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) echo of request
4 (operate) 07, 08 (limited quantity)
5 (direct op) 17, 28 (index)
6 (dir. op, noack)
20 0 Binary Counter 1 (read) 00, 01(start-stop)
(Variation 0 is used to request default 7 (freeze) 06(no range, or all)
variation) 8 (freeze noack) 07, 08(limited quantity)
9 (freeze clear) 17, 28(index)
10 (frz. cl. noack)
22 (assign class)
1 32-Bit Binary Counter 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
7 (freeze) 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index)
8 (freeze noack) 07, 08 (limited quantity) (see Note 2)
9 (freeze clear) 17, 28 (index)
10 (frz. cl. noack)
22 (assign class)
Note 1: A default variation refers to the variation responded when variation 0 is requested and/or in class 0, 1, 2, or 3 scans. The default varia-
tions for object types 1, 2, 20, 21, 22, 23, 30, and 32 are selected via relay settings. See the Communications section in Chapter 5 for
details. This optimizes the class 0 poll data size.
Note 2: For static (non-change-event) objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are only responded when a request is sent with qualifiers 17 or 28, respec-
tively. Otherwise, static object requests sent with qualifiers 00, 01, 06, 07, or 08, will be responded with qualifiers 00 or 01 (for change-
event objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are always responded.)
Note 3: Cold restarts are implemented the same as warm restarts – the B30 is not restarted, but the DNP process is restarted.


20 2 16-Bit Binary Counter 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
cont’d 7 (freeze) 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index)
10 (frz. cl. noack)
22 (assign class)
5 32-Bit Binary Counter without Flag 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
10 (frz. cl. noack)
22 (assign class)
6 16-Bit Binary Counter without Flag 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
10 (frz. cl. noack)
22 (assign class)
21 0 Frozen Counter 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop)
(Variation 0 is used to request default 22 (assign class) 06 (no range, or all)
variation) 07, 08 (limited quantity)
17, 28 (index)
1 32-Bit Frozen Counter 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
2 16-Bit Frozen Counter 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
9 32-Bit Frozen Counter without Flag 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
22 (assign class) 06 (no range, or all)
17, 28 (index)
(see Note 2) F
17, 28 (index)
10 16-Bit Frozen Counter without Flag 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
22 0 Counter Change Event (Variation 0 is used 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all)
to request default variation) 07, 08 (limited quantity)
1 32-Bit Counter Change Event 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
2 16-Bit Counter Change Event 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
5 32-Bit Counter Change Event with Time 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
6 16-Bit Counter Change Event with Time 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
23 0 Frozen Counter Event (Variation 0 is used 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all)
1 32-Bit Frozen Counter Event 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
2 16-Bit Frozen Counter Event 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)


23 5 32-Bit Frozen Counter Event with Time 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
cont’d 07, 08 (limited quantity) 130 (unsol. resp.)
6 16-Bit Frozen Counter Event with Time 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
30 0 Analog Input (Variation 0 is used to request 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop)
default variation) 22 (assign class) 06 (no range, or all)
17, 28 (index)
1 32-Bit Analog Input 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
2 16-Bit Analog Input 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
3 32-Bit Analog Input without Flag 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
4 16-Bit Analog Input without Flag 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
5 short floating point 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
22 (assign class) 06(no range, or all) 17, 28 (index)
07, 08(limited quantity) (see Note 2)
17, 28(index)
32 0 Analog Change Event (Variation 0 is used 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all)
1 32-Bit Analog Change Event without Time 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
F 2 16-Bit Analog Change Event without Time 1 (read)
06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
3 32-Bit Analog Change Event with Time 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
4 16-Bit Analog Change Event with Time 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
5 short floating point Analog Change Event 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
without Time 07, 08 (limited quantity) 130 (unsol. resp.)
7 short floating point Analog Change Event 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
with Time 07, 08 (limited quantity) 130 (unsol. resp.)
34 0 Analog Input Reporting Deadband 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop)
(Variation 0 is used to request default 06 (no range, or all)
variation) 07, 08 (limited quantity)
17, 28 (index)
1 16-bit Analog Input Reporting Deadband 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
(default – see Note 1) 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index)
17, 28 (index)
2 (write) 00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)


34 2 32-bit Analog Input Reporting Deadband 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
cont’d 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index)
17, 28 (index)
2 (write) 00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
3 Short floating point Analog Input Reporting 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
Deadband 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index)
17, 28 (index)
50 1 Time and Date 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
(default – see Note 1) 2 (write) 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index)
07 (limited qty=1) (see Note 2)
08 (limited quantity)
17, 28 (index)
52 2 Time Delay Fine 129 (response) 07 (limited quantity)
(quantity = 1)
60 0 Class 0, 1, 2, and 3 Data 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all)
20 (enable unsol)
21 (disable unsol)
22 (assign class)
1 Class 0 Data 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all)
22 (assign class)
2 Class 1 Data 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all)
3 Class 2 Data 20 (enable unsol) 07, 08 (limited quantity)
4 Class 3 Data 21 (disable unsol)
22 (assign class)
70 0 File event - any variation 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all)
22 (assign class) 06 (no range, or all)
2
3
File authentication
File command
29 (authenticate)
25 (open)
5b (free format)
5b (free format)
129 (response) 5b (free format) F
27 (delete)
4 File command status 26 (close) 5b (free format) 129 (response) 5b (free format)
30 (abort) 130 (unsol. resp.)
5 File transfer 1 (read) 5b (free format) 129 (response) 5b (free format)
2 (write) 130 (unsol. resp.)
6 File transfer status 129 (response) 5b (free format)
130 (unsol. resp.)
7 File descriptor 28 (get file info.) 5b (free format) 129 (response) 5b (free format)
130 (unsol. resp.)
80 1 Internal Indications 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
(index =7)
2 (write) 00 (start-stop)
(see Note 3) (index =7)
--- No Object (function code only) 13 (cold restart)
see Note 3
--- No Object (function code only) 14 (warm restart)
--- No Object (function code only) 23 (delay meas.)

F.2 DNP POINT LISTS APPENDIX F
F.2DNP POINT LISTS F.2.1 BINARY INPUT POINTS
The DNP binary input data points are configured through the PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  DNP / IEC104 POINT
LISTS  BINARY INPUT / MSP POINTS menu. See the Communications section of Chapter 5 for details. When a freeze func-
tion is performed on a binary counter point, the frozen value is available in the corresponding frozen counter point.
BINARY INPUT POINTS

Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 1
Change Event Object Number: 2
Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read), 22 (assign class)
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Input with status), Configurable
Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Input Change with Time), Configurable
Change Event Scan Rate: 8 times per power system cycle
Change Event Buffer Size: 500
Default Class for All Points: 1

APPENDIX F F.2 DNP POINT LISTS
F.2.2 BINARY AND CONTROL RELAY OUTPUT
Supported Control Relay Output Block fields: Pulse On, Pulse Off, Latch On, Latch Off, Paired Trip, Paired Close.
BINARY OUTPUT STATUS POINTS

Object Number: 10
Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read)
Default Variation reported when Variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Output Status)
CONTROL RELAY OUTPUT BLOCKS
Object Number: 12
Request Function Codes supported: 3 (select), 4 (operate), 5 (direct operate), 6 (direct operate, noack)
Table F–3: BINARY/CONTROL OUTPUTS Table F–3: BINARY/CONTROL OUTPUTS

POINT NAME/DESCRIPTION POINT NAME/DESCRIPTION
0 Virtual Input 1 32 Virtual Input 33
11
12
Virtual Input 12
Virtual Input 13
43
44
Virtual Input 44
Virtual Input 45
F

F.2.3 COUNTERS
The following table lists both Binary Counters (Object 20) and Frozen Counters (Object 21). When a freeze function is per-
formed on a Binary Counter point, the frozen value is available in the corresponding Frozen Counter point.
BINARY COUNTERS
Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read), 7 (freeze), 8 (freeze noack), 9 (freeze and clear),
10 (freeze and clear, noack), 22 (assign class)
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Binary Counter with Flag)
Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Counter Change Event without time)
Default Class for all points: 3
FROZEN COUNTERS
Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read)
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Frozen Counter with Flag)
Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Frozen Counter Event without time)
Default Class for all points: 3
F Table F–4: BINARY AND FROZEN COUNTERS

POINT NAME/DESCRIPTION
INDEX
0 Digital Counter 1
1 Digital Counter 2
2 Digital Counter 3
3 Digital Counter 4
4 Digital Counter 5
5 Digital Counter 6
6 Digital Counter 7
7 Digital Counter 8
8 Oscillography Trigger Count
9 Events Since Last Clear
A counter freeze command has no meaning for counters 8 and 9. B30 Digital Counter values are represented as 32-bit inte-
gers. The DNP 3.0 protocol defines counters to be unsigned integers. Care should be taken when interpreting negative
counter values.

APPENDIX F F.2 DNP POINT LISTS
F.2.4 ANALOG INPUTS
The DNP analog input data points are configured through the PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  DNP / IEC104 POINT
LISTS  ANALOG INPUT / MME POINTS menu. See the Communications section of Chapter 5 for details.
It is important to note that 16-bit and 32-bit variations of analog inputs are transmitted through DNP as signed numbers.
Even for analog input points that are not valid as negative values, the maximum positive representation is 32767 for 16-bit
values and 2147483647 for 32-bit values. This is a DNP requirement.
The deadbands for all Analog Input points are in the same units as the Analog Input quantity. For example, an Analog Input
quantity measured in volts has a corresponding deadband in units of volts. This is in conformance with DNP Technical Bul-
letin 9809-001: Analog Input Reporting Deadband. Relay settings are available to set default deadband values according to
data type. Deadbands for individual Analog Input Points can be set using DNP Object 34.

Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read), 2 (write, deadbands only), 22 (assign class)
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Analog Input)
Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (Analog Change Event without Time)
Change Event Scan Rate: defaults to 500 ms
Default Class for all Points: 2


APPENDIX G G.1 RADIUS SERVER CONFIGURATION
APPENDIX G RADIUS SERVERG.1 RADIUS SERVER CONFIGURATION G.1.1 RADIUS SERVER CONFIGURATION
The following procedure is an example of how to set up a simple RADIUS server. You install the RADIUS server software
on a separate computer. In this example, we use FreeRADIUS third-party software.
1. Download and install FreeRADIUS from www.freeradius.net as the RADIUS server. This is a Windows 32-bit installa-
tion that is known to work. If you try another third-party tool and it does not work, use the FreeRADIUS software from
freeradius.net.
2. Open the radius.conf file in the <Path_to_Radius>\etc\raddb folder, locate the "bind_address" field, and enter your
RADIUS server IP address. An example is
bind_address = 10.14.61.109
Text editor software that supports direct editing and saving of UNIX text encodings and line breaks, such as EditPad
Lite, is needed for this editing.
3. In the users.conf file in the <Path_to_Radius>\etc\raddb folder, add the following text to configure a user "Tester" with
an Administrator role.
Tester User-Password == "testpw"
GE-PDC-USER-Role = Administrator,
4. In the clients.conf file in the <Path_to_Radius>\etc\raddb folder, add the following text to define the UR as a RADIUS
client, where the client IP address is 10.0.0.2, the subnet mask is 255.255.255.0, the shared secret specified here is
also configured on the UR device for successful authentication, and the shortname is a short, optional alias that can be
used in place of the IP address.
client 10.0.0.2/24 {
secret = testing123
shortname = private-network-1
}
5. In the <Path_to_Radius>\etc\raddb folder, create a file called dictionary.ge and add the following content.
# ##########################################################
# GE VSAs
############################################################
VENDOR GE 2910
# Management authorization
BEGIN-VENDOR GE
# Role ID
G
ATTRIBUTE GE-UR-Role 1 integer
# GE-UR-ROLE values
VALUE GE-UR-Role Administrator 1
VALUE GE-UR-Role Supervisor 2
VALUE GE-UR-Role Engineer 3
VALUE GE-UR-Role Operator 4
VALUE GE-UR-Role Observer 5
END-VENDOR GE
#############################################################
6. In the dictionary file in the <Path_to_Radius>\etc\raddb folder, add the following line.
$INCLUDE dictionary.ge
For example, the file can look like the following:
$INCLUDE ../shareéfreeradius/dictionary
$INCLUDE dictionary.ge
7. For the first start, run the RADIUS server in debug mode to ensure that there are no compiling errors.
GE Multilin B30 Bus Differential System G-1

G.1 RADIUS SERVER CONFIGURATION APPENDIX G
<Path_to_Radius>/start_radiusd_debug.bat
8. Set up the RADIUS parameters on the UR as follows.
If logging in, select Device for the Authentication Type, and use Administrator for the User Name. The default pass-
word is "ChangeMe1#".
Access Settings > Product Setup > Security. Configure the IP address and ports for the RADIUS server. Leave the
GE vendor ID field at the default of 2910. Update the RADIUS shared secret as specified in the clients.conf file. Restart
the relay for the IP address and port changes to take effect.
9. Verify operation. Log in to the UR software as follows. In the login window, select Server as the Authentication Type,
enter the user name entered (for example user name Tester and password "testpw"). Check that the RADIUS server
log file shows the access with an "Access-Accept" entry.
Recall that if you tried another third-party tool and it did not work, you can use the FreeRADIUS software from freera-
dius.net.
G-2 B30 Bus Differential System GE Multilin

APPENDIX H H.1 CHANGE NOTES
APPENDIX H MISCELLANEOUSH.1CHANGE NOTES H.1.1 REVISION HISTORY
Table H–1: REVISION HISTORY

MANUAL P/N B30 REVISION RELEASE DATE ECO
1601-0109-B1 2.4x 08 September 2000 N/A
1601-0109-B2 2.4x 03 November 2000 URB-001
1601-0109-B3 2.6x 09 March 2001 URB-002
1601-0109-B4 2.8x 26 September 2001 URB-003
1601-0109-B5 2.9x 03 December 2001 URB-004
1601-0109-B6 2.6x 27 February 2004 URX-120
1601-0109-C1 3.0x 02 July 2002 URB-007
1601-0109-C2 3.1x 30 August 2002 URB-008
1601-0109-C3 3.0x 18 November 2002 URB-009
1601-0109-C4 3.1x 18 November 2002 URB-010
1601-0109-C5 3.0x 11 February 2003 URB-012
1601-0109-C6 3.1x 11 February 2003 URB-013
1601-0109-D1 3.2x 11 February 2003 URB-015
1601-0109-D2 3.2x 02 June 2003 URX-084
1601-0109-E1 3.3x 01 May 2003 URX-080
1601-0109-E2 3.3x 29 May 2003 URX-083
1601-0109-F1 3.4x 10 December 2003 URX-111
1601-0109-F2 3.4x 09 February 2004 URX-115
1601-0109-G1 4.0x 23 March 2004 URX-123
1601-0109-G2 4.0x 17 May 2004 URX-136
1601-0109-H1 4.2x 30 June 2004 URX-145
1601-0109-H2 4.2x 23 July 2004 URX-151
1601-0109-J1 4.4x 15 September 2004 URX-156
1601-0109-J2 4.4x 05 January 2005 URX-173
1601-0109-K1 4.6x 15 February 2005 URX-176
1601-0109-L1 4.8x 05 August 2005 URX-202
1601-0109-M1 4.9x 15 December 2005 URX-208
1601-0109-M2 4.9x 27 February 2006 URX-214
1601-0109-N1 5.0x 31 March 2006 URX-217
1601-0109-N2 5.0x 26 May 2006 URX-220
1601-0109-P1 5.2x 23 October 2006 URX-230
1601-0109-P2 5.2x 24 January 2007 URX-232
1601-0109-R1
1601-0109-R2
5.4x
5.4x
26 June 2007
31 August 2007
URX-242
URX-246
H
1601-0109-R3 5.4x 17 October 2007 URX-251
1601-0109-S1 5.5x 7 December 2007 URX-253
1601-0109-S2 5.5x 22 February 2008 URX-258
1601-0109-S3 5.5x 12 March 2008 URX-260
1601-0109-T1 5.6x 27 June 2008 08-0390
1601-0109-U1 5.7x 29 May 2009 09-0938
1601-0109-U2 5.7x 30 September 2009 09-1165
1601-0109-V1 5.8x 28 May 2010 09-1457
1601-0109-V2 5.8x 04 January 2011 11-2237
1601-0109-W1 5.9x 12 January 2011 11-2227
1601-0109-X1 6.0x 21 December 2011 11-2840
GE Multilin B30 Bus Differential System H-1

H.1 CHANGE NOTES APPENDIX H
Table H–1: REVISION HISTORY

MANUAL P/N B30 REVISION RELEASE DATE ECO
1601-0109-X2 6.0x 5 April 2012 12-3254
1601-0109-Y1 7.0x 30 September 2012 12-3529
1601-0109-Y2 7.0x 11 November 2012 12-3601
1601-0109-Z1 7.1x 30 March 2013 13-0126
1601-0109-AA1 7.2x 1 August 2013 13-0401
1601-0109-AA2 7.2x 31 December 2014 14-1732
1601-0109-AA3 7.2x 1 September 2015 15-2215
1601-0109-AA4 7.2x 15 April 2016 16-2786
1601-0109-AA5 7.2x 15 August 2017 17-3978
H.1.2 CHANGES TO THE B30 MANUAL
Table H–2: MAJOR UPDATES FOR B30 MANUAL REVISION AA5

PAGE PAGE CHANGE DESCRIPTION
(AA4) (AA5)
--- --- Update General revision
3-35 3-35 Update Updated RS422 and Fiber Interface Connection figure for the clock channels (from 7a and 7b to
1a and 1b)

(AA3) (AA4)
--- --- Update General revision, including updated branding from GE Digital Energy to GE Grid Solutions
--- --- Delete Deleted EAC logo from title page and deleted EAC certification from Approvals specifications
because document not translated into Russian

(AA2) (AA3)
--- --- Update General revision throughout document
--- --- Update Updated numbers of elements throughout document
--- --- Add Added EAC compliance information throughout, including logo on title page, rear panel, added
specifications, added life expectancy and decommissioning, added sections on Uninstall and
Clear Files and Data, Repairs, Storage, and Disposal
2-17 2-17 Add Added UR Signal Processing section
H 4-22 4-22 Delete Deleted Standard Faceplate section on how to customize LED and blank panels. Clear Lexan
front cover (part number 1501-0014) no longer being sold. Units with blank LED panels no longer
being sold.
5-120 5-120 Update Updated FlexLogic operands table
A- A- Update Updated FlexAnalog and FlexInteger tables

B- B- Update Updated Modbus memory map and F codes
Table H–5: MAJOR UPDATES FOR B30 MANUAL REVISION AA2 (Sheet 1 of 2)
(AA1) (AA2)
--- --- Update General revision throughout document
--- --- Update Updated references to digital inputs/outputs to contact inputs/outputs for consistency
H-2 B30 Bus Differential System GE Multilin

Table H–5: MAJOR UPDATES FOR B30 MANUAL REVISION AA2 (Sheet 2 of 2)
(AA1) (AA2)
3-8 3-8 Update Updated Figure 3-10 Typical Wiring Diagram to include delta and wye voltage input options
5-23 5-23 Add Added Syslog Format section

5-31 5-31 Add Added Far-End Fault Indication (FEFI) section
B- B- Update Updated Modbus memory map and F codes

H-7 H-7 Update Updated product warranty from 24 months to 10 years

(Z1) (AA1)
--- --- Add Added content for IEC 60870-5-103 throughout document
2- 2- Update Updated order codes

2- 2- Update Updated specifications
8- --- Delete Deleted chapter 8 on security, moving content to other chapters
--- 10- Add Added Maintenance chapter, moving content from other chapters and adding new instructions to
replace the battery
--- D- Add Added new appendix on IEC 60870-5-103 interoperability
Table H–7: MAJOR UPDATES FOR B30 MANUAL REVISION Z1

(Y3) (Z1)
--- --- Add Added CPU options U and V to order code tables in chapter 2, a note above Rear Terminal View
figure in chapter 3, and CPU Module Communications Wiring figure in chapter 3
--- --- Add Added Parallel Redundancy Protocol (PRP) to order code tables and specifications in chapter 2,
section 5.2.5d Settings > Product Setup > Communications > Network, section 6.3.1 Actual
Values > Status > PRP, and Appendix B Modbus table and F627 and F628 enumeration tables
1-1 1-1 Add Added General Cautions and Warnings to section 1.1.1
1-5 1-5 Update Revised section 1.3.1 on system requirements, including addition of support for Windows 7 and
Windows Server 2008
2-7 2-7 Update Updated several specifications
5-23 5-23 Add Added section 5.2.5e Routing

5-85 5-85 Update Updated Figures 5-23 and 5-24 Dual Breaker Control Scheme Logic, sheets 1 and 2
5-89
5-180
5-89
5-180
Update
Add
Updated Figure 5-25 Disconnect Switch Scheme Logic
Reinserted section 5.8.5c Remote Devices: ID of Device for Receiving GSSE/GOOSE Messages,
H
meaning the Settings > Input/Outputs > Remote Devices settings
Table H–8: MAJOR UPDATES FOR B30 MANUAL REVISION Y3

(Y2) (Y3)
-- xi Add Added battery disposal information as chapter 0
2-10 2-10 Update Updated Bus Differential Pickup Level specification from 2.000 to 6.000 pu
5-119 5-119 Update Updated Bus Differential Pickup Level specification from 2.000 to 6.000 pu in section 5.6.3 Bus
Differential

H.1 CHANGE NOTES APPENDIX H
Table H–9: MAJOR UPDATES FOR B30 MANUAL REVISION Y2

(Y1) (Y2)
All All Update Minor changes throughout document
All All Delete Deleted CPU options U and V
1-1 1-1 Update Updated Figure 1-1 Rear Nameplate
3-8 3-8 Update Updated Figure 3-10 Rear Terminal View
Table H–10: MAJOR UPDATES FOR B30 MANUAL REVISION Y1 (Sheet 1 of 2)

(X2) (Y1)
All All Delete Deleted content pertaining to Ethernet switch
Title Title Update Changed part numbers. Updated address and contact information.
1-1 1-1 Update Updated address and contact information
1-4 1-4 Delete Deleted section 1.2.4 Important UR Concepts
2-4 2-4 Add Added CPU options T, U, and V to order code table
2-4 2-4 Delete Deleted E, G, H, J, S from CPU options from order code tables. Deleted 9S, 2S, 2T from
replacement module order code tables and revised replacement modules to be T, U, V
2-15 2-15 Update Updated Ethernet fiber table in section 2.2.8 Communications
3-10 3-10 Update Updated Figure 3-12 Typical Wiring Diagram

3-23 3-23 Update Deleted references to COM 1 RS485 port in section 3.2.9 CPU Communication Ports. Revised
text and Figure 3-24 CPU Module Communications Wiring to include only modules T, U, V in
section 3.2.9a.
5-1 5-1 Update Updated the front panel main menu to include the CyberSentry security menu
5-14 5-14 Delete Deleted references to COM 1 RS485 port in section 5.2.4b Serial Ports
5-14 5-14 Update Update Communications main menu to remove the SNTP Protocol submenu
5-15 5-15 Add Added section 5.2.4c Ethernet Network Topology
5-15 5-15 Update Updated Networks section 5.2.4d to include all three Ethernet ports
5-15 5-15 Update Added 0 as valid number to section 5.2.4e Modbus Protocol section
5-38 5-38 Delete Deleted Local Time Offset, Daylight Savings Time, DST (start/stop for month/day/hour) from Real
Time Clock menu
5- 5-38 Add Added submenus Precision Time Protocol, SNTP Protocol, and Local Time and Synchronizing
Source settings to Real Time Clock menu
5- 5-38 Add Added new Precision Time Protocol (1588) menu and setting descriptions
5- 5- Update Updated Communication to Real Time Clock in SNTP protocol settings path. Moved SNTP
Protocol menu and settings descriptions to Real Time Clock subsection.
5-36 5- Delete Deleted section k) SNTP Protocol and the settings descriptions
H 5- 5-42 Add Added new section for Local Time menu settings and settings description
5- 5-49 Add Added new PTP Fail menu item to the User-Programmable Self Tests menu
5- 5- Add Added PTP Failure and CLOCK UNSYNCHRONIZED to Flexlogic Operands table
5- 5-108 Update Added row for DeltaTime to Table 5-: FlexElement Base Units
5-174 5-174 Delete Deleted section 5.8.5c Remote Devices: ID of Device for Receiving GSSE/GOOSE Messages,
meaning the Settings > Input/Outputs > Remote Devices settings
5- 5-192 Add Added new CyberSentry security section and main menu, local passwords, session settings,
restore defaults, and supervisory subsections to Chapter 5
6-1 6-1 Update Updated Actual Values main menu to include Real Time Clock Synchronization submenu
6- 6-7 Add Added new section for Real Time Clock synchronizing consisting of the menu of settings and the
setting descriptions
6- 6-10 Add Added new section 6.2.19 Remaining Connection Status
7- 7-1 Add Added Security command to the Commands main menu

Table H–10: MAJOR UPDATES FOR B30 MANUAL REVISION Y1 (Sheet 2 of 2)

(X2) (Y1)
7- 7-3 Add Added Reboot Relay command and description to the Relay Maintenance menu items
7- 7-5 Add Added Security menu and submenu commands and descriptions to the Command menu
7- 7-9 Add Added to Minor self-test error message **Bad PTP Signal**
8- 8-4 Add Added new section for CyberSentry software option with overview and security menu subsections
A- A- Add Added FlexAnalog item PTP–IRIG-B Delta to Table A-1: FlexAnalog Data Items
B-8 B-8 Update Updated Modbus memory map table to include port 0 for Modbus slave address, TCP, DNP,
HTTP, TFTP, MMS, and removed references to COM 1 RS485 port
C-23 C-23 Update Updated tables in sections C.6.3 ACSI Services Conformance Statement and C.7.1 Logical
Nodes Table

H.2 ABBREVIATIONS APPENDIX H
H.2ABBREVIATIONS H.2.1 STANDARD ABBREVIATIONS
A..................... Ampere FLA ................ Full Load Current

AC .................. Alternating Current FO .................. Fiber Optic
A/D ................. Analog to Digital FREQ ............. Frequency
AE .................. Accidental Energization, Application Entity FSK................ Frequency-Shift Keying
AMP ............... Ampere FTP ................ File Transfer Protocol
ANG ............... Angle FxE ................ FlexElement™
ANSI............... American National Standards Institute FWD............... Forward
AR .................. Automatic Reclosure
ASDU ............. Application-layer Service Data Unit G .................... Generator
ASYM ............. Asymmetry GE.................. General Electric
AUTO ............. Automatic GND............... Ground
AUX................ Auxiliary GNTR............. Generator
AVG ................ Average GOOSE.......... General Object Oriented Substation Event
GPS ............... Global Positioning System
BCS................ Best Clock Selector
BER................ Bit Error Rate HARM ............ Harmonic / Harmonics
BF................... Breaker Fail HCT ............... High Current Time
BFI.................. Breaker Failure Initiate HGF ............... High-Impedance Ground Fault (CT)
BKR................ Breaker HIZ ................. High-Impedance and Arcing Ground
BLK ................ Block HMI ................ Human-Machine Interface
BLKG.............. Blocking HTTP ............. Hyper Text Transfer Protocol
BNC................ Bayonet Neill-Concelman HYB ............... Hybrid
BPNT.............. Breakpoint of a characteristic
BRKR ............. Breaker I...................... Instantaneous
I_0.................. Zero Sequence current
CAP................ Capacitor I_1.................. Positive Sequence current
CC .................. Coupling Capacitor I_2.................. Negative Sequence current
CCVT ............. Coupling Capacitor Voltage Transformer IA ................... Phase A current
CFG................ Configure / Configurable IAB ................. Phase A minus B current
.CFG............... Filename extension for oscillography files IB ................... Phase B current
CHK................ Check IBC................. Phase B minus C current
CHNL ............. Channel IC ................... Phase C current
CLS ................ Close ICA................. Phase C minus A current
CLSD.............. Closed ID ................... Identification
CMND ............ Command IED................. Intelligent Electronic Device
CMPRSN........ Comparison IEC................. International Electrotechnical Commission
CO.................. Contact Output IEEE............... Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers
COM............... Communication IG ................... Ground (not residual) current
COMM............ Communications Igd.................. Differential Ground current
COMP ............ Compensated, Comparison IN ................... CT Residual Current (3Io) or Input
CONN............. Connection INC SEQ ........ Incomplete Sequence
CONT ............. Continuous, Contact INIT ................ Initiate
CO-ORD......... Coordination INST............... Instantaneous
CPU................ Central Processing Unit INV................. Inverse
CRC ............... Cyclic Redundancy Code I/O .................. Input/Output
CRT, CRNT .... Current IOC ................ Instantaneous Overcurrent
CSA................ Canadian Standards Association IOV................. Instantaneous Overvoltage
CT .................. Current Transformer IRIG ............... Inter-Range Instrumentation Group
CVT ................ Capacitive Voltage Transformer ISO................. International Standards Organization
IUV................. Instantaneous Undervoltage
D/A ................. Digital to Analog
DC (dc)........... Direct Current K0 .................. Zero Sequence Current Compensation
DD .................. Disturbance Detector kA................... kiloAmpere
DFLT .............. Default kV................... kiloVolt
DGNST........... Diagnostics
DI.................... Digital Input LED................ Light Emitting Diode
DIFF ............... Differential LEO................ Line End Open
H DIR ................. Directional

DISCREP ....... Discrepancy
DIST ............... Distance
LFT BLD ........ Left Blinder
LOOP............. Loopback
LPU................ Line Pickup
DMD ............... Demand LRA................ Locked-Rotor Current
DNP................ Distributed Network Protocol LTC ................ Load Tap-Changer
DPO ............... Dropout
DSP................ Digital Signal Processor M.................... Machine
dt .................... Rate of Change mA ................. MilliAmpere
DTT ................ Direct Transfer Trip MAG............... Magnitude
DUTT.............. Direct Under-reaching Transfer Trip MAN............... Manual / Manually
MAX ............... Maximum
ENCRMNT ..... Encroachment MIC ................ Model Implementation Conformance
EPRI............... Electric Power Research Institute MIN ................ Minimum, Minutes
.EVT ............... Filename extension for event recorder files MMI................ Man Machine Interface
EXT ................ Extension, External MMS .............. Manufacturing Message Specification
MRT ............... Minimum Response Time
F ..................... Field MSG............... Message
FAIL................ Failure MTA................ Maximum Torque Angle
FD .................. Fault Detector MTR ............... Motor
FDH................ Fault Detector high-set MVA ............... MegaVolt-Ampere (total 3-phase)
FDL ................ Fault Detector low-set MVA_A ........... MegaVolt-Ampere (phase A)

APPENDIX H H.2 ABBREVIATIONS
MVA_B ........... MegaVolt-Ampere (phase B) s ......................second

MVA_C ........... MegaVolt-Ampere (phase C) S .....................Sensitive
MVAR ............. MegaVar (total 3-phase) SAT .................CT Saturation
MVAR_A......... MegaVar (phase A) SBO ................Select Before Operate
MVAR_B......... MegaVar (phase B) SCADA ...........Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition
MVAR_C ........ MegaVar (phase C) SEC ................Secondary
MVARH .......... MegaVar-Hour SEL .................Select / Selector / Selection
MW................. MegaWatt (total 3-phase) SENS ..............Sensitive
MW_A ............ MegaWatt (phase A) SEQ ................Sequence
MW_B ............ MegaWatt (phase B) SFTP...............Secure Shell (SSH) File Transfer Protocol, Secure
MW_C ............ MegaWatt (phase C) File Transfer Protocol
MWH .............. MegaWatt-Hour SIR..................Source Impedance Ratio
SNTP ..............Simple Network Time Protocol
N..................... Neutral SRC ................Source
N/A, n/a .......... Not Applicable SSB.................Single Side Band
NEG ............... Negative SSEL...............Session Selector
NMPLT ........... Nameplate STATS.............Statistics
NOM............... Nominal SUPN..............Supervision
NTR................ Neutral SUPV ..............Supervise / Supervision
SV ...................Supervision, Service
O .................... Over SYNC..............Synchrocheck
OC, O/C ......... Overcurrent SYNCHCHK....Synchrocheck
O/P, Op........... Output
OP .................. Operate T......................Time, transformer
OPER ............. Operate TC ...................Thermal Capacity
OPERATG...... Operating TCP.................Transmission Control Protocol
O/S ................. Operating System TCU ................Thermal Capacity Used
OSI ................. Open Systems Interconnect TD MULT ........Time Dial Multiplier
OSB................ Out-of-Step Blocking TEMP..............Temperature
OUT................ Output TFTP...............Trivial File Transfer Protocol
OV .................. Overvoltage THD ................Total Harmonic Distortion
OVERFREQ ... Overfrequency TMR ................Timer
OVLD ............. Overload TOC ................Time Overcurrent
TOV ................Time Overvoltage
P..................... Phase TRANS............Transient
PC .................. Phase Comparison, Personal Computer TRANSF .........Transfer
PCNT ............. Percent TSEL...............Transport Selector
PF................... Power Factor (total 3-phase) TUC ................Time Undercurrent
PF_A .............. Power Factor (phase A) TUV.................Time Undervoltage
PF_B .............. Power Factor (phase B) TX (Tx)............Transmit, Transmitter
PF_C .............. Power Factor (phase C)
PFLL............... Phase and Frequency Lock Loop U .....................Under
PHS................ Phase UC...................Undercurrent
PICS............... Protocol Implementation & Conformance UCA ................Utility Communications Architecture
Statement UDP ................User Datagram Protocol
PKP ................ Pickup UL ...................Underwriters Laboratories
PLC ................ Power Line Carrier UNBAL............Unbalance
POS................ Positive UR...................Universal Relay
POTT.............. Permissive Over-reaching Transfer Trip URC ................Universal Recloser Control
PRESS ........... Pressure .URS ...............Filename extension for settings files
PRI ................. Primary UV...................Undervoltage
PROT ............. Protection
PSEL .............. Presentation Selector V/Hz ................Volts per Hertz
pu ................... Per Unit V_0 .................Zero Sequence voltage
PUIB............... Pickup Current Block V_1 .................Positive Sequence voltage
PUIT ............... Pickup Current Trip V_2 .................Negative Sequence voltage
PUSHBTN ...... Pushbutton VA ...................Phase A voltage
PUTT.............. Permissive Under-reaching Transfer Trip VAB.................Phase A to B voltage
PWM .............. Pulse Width Modulated VAG ................Phase A to Ground voltage
PWR............... Power VARH ..............Var-hour voltage
QUAD............. Quadrilateral
VB ...................Phase B voltage
VBA.................Phase B to A voltage H
VBG ................Phase B to Ground voltage
R..................... Rate, Reverse VC...................Phase C voltage
RCA................ Reach Characteristic Angle VCA ................Phase C to A voltage
REF ................ Reference VCG ................Phase C to Ground voltage
REM ............... Remote VF ...................Variable Frequency
REV................ Reverse VIBR ...............Vibration
RI.................... Reclose Initiate VT ...................Voltage Transformer
RIP ................. Reclose In Progress VTFF...............Voltage Transformer Fuse Failure
RGT BLD........ Right Blinder VTLOS ............Voltage Transformer Loss Of Signal
RMA ............... Return Materials Authorization
RMS ............... Root Mean Square WDG ...............Winding
ROCOF .......... Rate of Change of Frequency WH..................Watt-hour
ROD ............... Remote Open Detector w/ opt ..............With Option
RST ................ Reset WRT................With Respect To
RSTR ............. Restrained
RTD................ Resistance Temperature Detector X .....................Reactance
RTU................ Remote Terminal Unit XDUCER.........Transducer
RX (Rx) .......... Receive, Receiver XFMR..............Transformer

H.2 ABBREVIATIONS APPENDIX H
Z ..................... Impedance, Zone

APPENDIX H H.3 WARRANTY
H.3WARRANTY H.3.1 GE MULTILIN WARRANTY
For products shipped as of 1 October 2013, GE Grid Solutions warrants most of its GE manufactured products for 10 years.
For warranty details including any limitations and disclaimers, see the GE Grid Solutions Terms and Conditions at
https://www.gegridsolutions.com/multilin/warranty.htm
For products shipped before 1 October 2013, the standard 24-month warranty applies.

H.3 WARRANTY APPENDIX H

INDEX
Index
BREAKER CONTROL
Numerics control of 2 breakers ...................................................... 4-23
description ..................................................................... 4-22
10BASE-F dual breaker logic ............................................. 5-104, 5-105
interface ........................................................................ 3-41 FlexLogic operands ...................................................... 5-120
settings ......................................................................... 5-29 settings ....................................................................... 5-102
BREAKER FAILURE
description ................................................................... 5-158
determination ............................................................... 5-159
A FlexLogic operands ...................................................... 5-119
logic ............................................................................ 5-162
ABBREVIATIONS ...............................................................H-6
main path sequence ..................................................... 5-159
AC CURRENT INPUTS ................................... 2-22, 3-11, 5-97
Modbus registers .......................................................... B-44
AC VOLTAGE INPUTS .............................................2-22, 3-12
settings ............................................................ 5-157, 5-160
ACCESS VIOLATION MESSAGE ...................................... 1-14
specifications ................................................................. 2-20
ACTIVATING THE RELAY ........................................1-19, 4-26
BREAKER FLASHOVER
ACTIVE SETTING GROUP ............................................. 5-138
FlexLogic operands ...................................................... 5-119
ACTUAL VALUES
logic ............................................................................ 5-190
product information ........................................................ 6-21
status .............................................................................. 6-3
settings ....................................................................... 5-186
ALARM LEDs ................................................................... 5-75
specifications ................................................................. 2-20
ANSI DEVICE NUMBERS ................................................... 2-2
BREAKER-AND-A-HALF SCHEME ...................................... 5-6
APPLICATION EXAMPLES
BRIGHTNESS .................................................................. 5-24
breaker trip circuit integrity .......................................... 5-182
BUS DIFFERENTIAL
busbar ............................................................................ 9-1
actual values ................................................................. 6-14
contact inputs .............................................................. 5-196
characteristic ............................................................... 5-140
setting groups ............................................................... 9-12
slopes ............................................................................. 9-7
logic ............................................................................ 5-142
zoning ............................................................................. 9-3
Modbus registers ................................................. B-18, B-40
APPROVALS ................................................................... 2-28
settings ............................................................ 5-139, 5-141
ARCHITECTURE ........................................................... 5-117
specifications ................................................................. 2-19
ATTEMPT TO CONTACT RADIUS SERVER FAILED MESSAGE
theory of operation ........................................................... 8-1
7-9
BUS REPLICA MECHANISM ............................................... 8-2
AUDIT LIST OF PORT NUMBERS .................................... 5-29
BUS ZONE
AUTHENTICATION FAIL MESSAGE ................................... 7-9
actual values ................................................................. 6-14
AUXILIARY OVERVOLTAGE
settings ....................................................................... 5-116
FlexLogic operands ..................................................... 5-119
BUSBAR EXAMPLE ............................................................ 9-1
logic ............................................................................ 5-169
Modbus registers ........................................................... B-43
settings ....................................................................... 5-169
specifications ................................................................ 2-20 C
AUXILIARY VOLTAGE CHANNEL ..................................... 3-12
AUXILIARY VOLTAGE METERING ................................... 6-16 C37.94 COMMUNICATIONS ........................... 3-42, 3-44, 3-47
AWG WIRE SIZE ................................... 3-11, 3-36, 3-39, 3-41 C37.94SM COMMUNICATIONS ........................................ 3-45
CAPACITOR CONTROL
CAUTIONS ......................................................................... 1-1
B CE APPROVALS .............................................................. 2-28
CHANGES TO MANUAL .................................................... H-2
BANKS ............................................................. 5-6, 5-97, 5-98
CHANNEL TESTS ............................................................ 6-10
BATTERY
CHANNELS
disposal ........................................................................ 10-5
banks ................................................................... 5-97, 5-98
failure ............................................................................. 7-6
CIRCUIT MONITORING APPLICATIONS ......................... 5-181
replace .......................................................................... 10-3
CLEANING ....................................................................... 2-28
BATTERY FAILURE ........................................................... 7-6
CLEAR
BIASED DIFFERENTIAL CHARACTERISTIC ....................... 8-4
files and records ............................................................ 10-8
BINARY INPUT POINTS ..................................................... F-8
CLEAR RECORDS .................................................... 5-25, 7-2
BINARY OUTPUT POINTS ................................................. F-9
CLEAR RELAY RECORDS
BLOCK DIAGRAM .............................................................. 1-3
BLOCK SETTING ............................................................... 5-5
settings ......................................................................... 5-25
CLOCK
setting date and time ........................................................ 7-2
settings ......................................................................... 5-64
COMMANDS MENU ............................................................ 7-1
GE Multilin B30 Bus Differential System i

INDEX
COMMUNICATIONS CURRENT DIFFERENTIAL

10BASE-F ..................................................................... 5-29 Modbus registers ........................................................... B-18
connecting to the UR .............................................. 1-8, 1-15 CURRENT METERING
CRC-16 error checking .................................................... B-2 actual values ..................................................................6-15
DNP ....................................................................... 5-36, F-1 specifications .................................................................2-21
EGD .............................................................................. 5-57 CURVES
G.703 ............................................................................ 3-37 definite time ...................................................... 5-148, 5-165
HTTP ............................................................................ 5-55 FlexCurves ....................................................... 5-109, 5-148
IEC 60870-5-10 ............................................................. 5-59 I2T ............................................................................... 5-148
IEC 60870-5-104 protocol .............................................. 5-56 IAC .............................................................................. 5-147
IEC 61850 ................................................................... 5-201 IEC .............................................................................. 5-146
inter-relay communications ............................................. 2-25 IEEE ............................................................................ 5-144
Modbus .................................................. 5-34, 5-64, B-1, B-4 inverse time undervoltage ............................................. 5-165
Modbus registers ...........................................................B-29 types ........................................................................... 5-144
network ......................................................................... 5-29 CYBERSENTRY ...............................................................5-15
overview ........................................................................ 1-17 FlexLogic operands ...................................................... 5-119
RS232 ........................................................................... 3-28 system logs ....................................................................5-22
RS485 .................................................................. 3-30, 5-26
settings ..................... 5-29, 5-36, 5-41, 5-56, 5-57, 5-59, 5-64
specifications........................................................ 2-24, 2-25
UCA/MMS ................................................................... 5-203 D
web server..................................................................... 5-55
DATA FORMATS, MODBUS ............................................. B-73
COMPATIBILITY ................................................................ 1-3
DATA LOGGER
COMTRADE ...................................................................... B-7
via COMTRADE .............................................................. B-7
CONDUCTED RFI ............................................................ 2-27
DATE ................................................................................ 7-2
CONTACT INPUTS
DCMA INPUTS .................................................................6-18
actual values ................................................................... 6-3
Modbus registers .................................................. B-21, B-71
dry connections ............................................................. 3-19
settings ........................................................................ 5-213
specifications .................................................................2-22
Modbus registers ............................... B-15, B-19, B-57, B-59
DCMA OUTPUTS
settings ....................................................................... 5-195
description .....................................................................3-25
specifications................................................................. 2-22
thresholds ................................................................... 5-195
settings ........................................................................ 5-216
wet connections ............................................................. 3-19
specifications .................................................................2-24
CONTACT OUTPUTS
DECOMMISSION ..............................................................10-8
actual values ................................................................... 6-4
DEFINITE TIME CURVE ...................................... 5-148, 5-165
DELETE FILES AND RECORDS ........................................10-8
Modbus registers .........................................B-15, B-19, B-70
DESIGN ............................................................................ 1-3
settings ....................................................................... 5-198
DEVICE ID ..................................................................... 5-202
CONTROL ELEMENTS ................................................... 5-170
DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT .......................................... F-1
CONTROL POWER
DIELECTRIC STRENGTH .................................................3-10
description..................................................................... 3-11
DIFFERENTIAL
specifications................................................................. 2-24
application of settings ...................................................... 9-7
CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS
biased............................................................................. 8-4
bus ....................................... 2-19, 5-116, 5-139, 5-141, 6-14
Modbus registers ...........................................................B-64
restraining currents ......................................................... 8-5
settings ......................................................................... 5-76
DIGITAL COUNTERS
specifications................................................................. 2-21
actual values ................................................................... 6-6
COUNTERS
actual values ................................................................... 6-6
logic ............................................................................ 5-184
settings ....................................................................... 5-183
Modbus registers ................................ B-11, B-13, B-14, B-50
CRC ALARM .................................................................... 5-92
settings ........................................................................ 5-183
CRC-16 ALGORITHM ........................................................ B-2
DIGITAL ELEMENTS
CRITICAL FAILURE RELAY ..................................... 2-23, 3-10
application example ...................................................... 5-182
CSA APPROVAL .............................................................. 2-28
CT BANKS
logic ............................................................................ 5-181
settings ......................................................................... 5-97
CT INPUTS ...................................................... 3-12, 5-6, 5-97
settings ........................................................................ 5-180
CT RATIO MATCHING ....................................................... 8-3
DIGITAL OUTPUTS
CT TROUBLE
see entry for CONTACT OUTPUTS
DIMENSIONS ............................................................. 3-1, 3-2
logic ............................................................................ 5-191
DIRECT DEVICES
settings ....................................................................... 5-191
actual values ................................................................... 6-8
specifications................................................................. 2-19
CT WIRING ...................................................................... 3-12
settings ........................................................................ 5-205
CURRENT BANK ............................................................. 5-97
ii B30 Bus Differential System GE Multilin

INDEX
DIRECT I/O EQUIPMENT MISMATCH ERROR ....................................... 7-5

see also DIRECT INPUTS and DIRECT OUTPUTS ETHERNET
application example ........................................... 5-206, 5-207 actual values ................................................................... 6-6
configuration examples ........................ 5-86, 5-89, 5-92, 5-93 configuration .................................................................... 1-8
settings ............................................. 5-86, 5-92, 5-93, 5-205 Modbus registers .......................................................... B-16
DIRECT INPUTS quick connect ................................................................ 1-10
actual values ................................................................... 6-8 settings ......................................................................... 5-29
application example ........................................... 5-206, 5-207 EVENT CAUSE INDICATORS .................................. 4-15, 4-16
clearing counters ............................................................. 7-2 EVENT RECORDER
FlexLogic operands ..................................................... 5-123 actual values ................................................................. 6-19
Modbus registers ................................ B-15, B-23, B-64, B-65 clearing .................................................................. 5-25, 7-2
settings ....................................................................... 5-205 Modbus .......................................................................... B-8
specifications ................................................................ 2-22 Modbus registers .......................................................... B-21
DIRECT INPUTS/OUTPUTS specifications ................................................................. 2-21
error messages ............................................................... 7-7 via EnerVista software ..................................................... 4-2
DIRECT OUTPUTS EVENTS
application example ........................................... 5-206, 5-207 syslog ............................................................................ 5-23
clearing counters ............................................................. 7-2 EVENTS SETTING ............................................................. 5-5
Modbus registers ......................................... B-15, B-64, B-65 EXCEPTION RESPONSES ................................................ B-6
settings ....................................................................... 5-205
DIRECTIONAL PRINCIPLE ................................................ 8-7
DISCONNECT SWITCH
FlexLogic operands ..................................................... 5-122 F
logic ............................................................................ 5-108
F485 ................................................................................ 1-17
FACEPLATE ............................................................... 3-1, 3-2
settings ....................................................................... 5-106
FACEPLATE PANELS ...................................................... 4-13
DISPLAY ........................................................ 1-17, 4-22, 5-24
FACTORY DEFAULT RESET .............................................. 5-8
DISPOSAL ..................................................................... 10-11
FAR-END FAULT INDICATION ......................................... 5-30
DNA-1 BIT PAIR ............................................................ 5-204
FAST FORM-C RELAY ..................................................... 2-23
DNP COMMUNICATIONS
FAST TRANSIENT TESTING ............................................ 2-27
binary counters ............................................................. F-10
FAX NUMBER .................................................................... 1-2
binary input points ........................................................... F-8
FEATURES ........................................................................ 2-1
binary output points ......................................................... F-9
FIBER SIGNAL LOSS DETECTION ................................... 5-30
control relay output blocks ............................................... F-9
FILE TRANSFER BY IEC 61850 ......................................... C-2
device profile document ................................................... F-1
FILES
frozen counters ............................................................. F-10
delete ............................................................................ 10-8
implementation table ....................................................... F-4
FIRMWARE LOCK SELF-TEST ........................................... 7-9
FIRMWARE REVISION ..................................................... 6-21
settings ......................................................................... 5-36
FIRMWARE UPGRADES .................................................... 4-2
FLASH MEMORY ............................................................. 10-8
FLASH MESSAGES .......................................................... 5-24
E FLEX STATE PARAMETERS
actual values ............................................................ 6-6, 6-7
EGD PROTOCOL Modbus registers ................................................. B-19, B-45
actual values ................................................................... 6-9 settings ......................................................................... 5-83
Modbus registers ........................................................... B-44 specifications ................................................................. 2-20
settings ......................................................................... 5-57 FLEXANALOG ................................................................... A-1
ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE ....................................... 2-27 FLEXCURVES
ELEMENTS ....................................................................... 5-4 equation ...................................................................... 5-148
EMAIL ADDRESS FOR SUPPORT ...................................... 1-2 Modbus registers .......................................................... B-50
END OF LIFE ................................................................. 10-11 settings ....................................................................... 5-109
ENERVISTA UR SETUP specifications ................................................................. 2-20
creating a site list ............................................................ 4-1 table ............................................................................ 5-109
event recorder ................................................................. 4-2 FLEXCURVES™
firmware upgrades ........................................................... 4-2 Modbus registers .......................................................... B-34
installation ...................................................................... 1-5 FLEXELEMENTS
introduction ..................................................................... 4-1 actual values ................................................................. 6-17
oscillography ................................................................... 4-2 direction ...................................................................... 5-134
overview ......................................................................... 4-1 FlexLogic operands ...................................................... 5-121
requirements ................................................................... 1-5 hysteresis .................................................................... 5-134
EQUATIONS Modbus registers .......................................................... B-49
definite time curve ............................................. 5-148, 5-165 pickup ......................................................................... 5-134
FlexCurve ................................................................... 5-148 scheme logic ............................................................... 5-133
I²t curves ..................................................................... 5-148 settings .................................................. 5-132, 5-133, 5-136
IAC curves .................................................................. 5-147 specifications ................................................................. 2-20
IEC curves .................................................................. 5-146
IEEE curves ................................................................ 5-144
GE Multilin B30 Bus Differential System iii

INDEX
FLEXLOGIC GUARANTEE .................................................................... H-9

editing with EnerVista UR Setup ....................................... 4-2
equation editor ............................................................ 5-131
error messages ................................................................ 7-5
example ............................................................5-117, 5-126 H
example equation ........................................................ 5-173
HELP ................................................................................ 1-2
gate characteristics ...................................................... 5-125
HTTP PROTOCOL ............................................................5-55
locking to a serial number ................................................ 4-9
operands ...........................................................5-118, 5-119
operators ..................................................................... 5-125 I
rules ............................................................................ 5-125
security ........................................................................... 4-8 I2T CURVES .................................................................. 5-148
specifications................................................................. 2-20 IAC CURVES .................................................................. 5-147
timers .......................................................................... 5-131 IEC 60870-5-103
worksheet .................................................................... 5-127 settings ..........................................................................5-59
FLEXLOGIC EQUATION EDITOR ................................... 5-131 IEC 60870-5-103 PROTOCOL
FLEXLOGIC TIMERS interoperability document ................................................. D-1
Modbus registers ...........................................................B-37 IEC 60870-5-104 PROTOCOL
settings ....................................................................... 5-131 interoperability document ................................................. E-1
FLEXLOGIC™ settings ..........................................................................5-56
locking equation entries ................................................... 4-8 IEC 61850 GOOSE ANALOGS
FORCE CONTACT INPUTS ............................................ 5-220 settings ........................................................................ 5-211
FORCE CONTACT OUTPUTS ......................................... 5-221 IEC 61850 GOOSE UINTEGERS
FORCE TRIGGER ............................................................ 6-20 settings ........................................................................ 5-212
FORM-A RELAY IEC 61850 PROTOCOL
high impedance circuits .................................................. 3-14 device ID ..................................................................... 5-202
outputs ................................................................. 3-13, 3-14 DNA2 assignments ....................................................... 5-204
specifications................................................................. 2-23 error messages ............................................................... 7-8
FORM-C RELAY FILE TRANSFER ............................................................. C-2
outputs .......................................................................... 3-13 Modbus registers .... B-51, B-52, B-53, B-54, B-55, B-56, B-57,
specifications................................................................. 2-23 B-68
FREQUENCY METERING remote inputs ............................................................... 5-202
actual values ................................................................. 6-17 settings ..........................................................................5-41
Modbus registers ...........................................................B-17 UserSt-1 bit pair ........................................................... 5-204
settings ......................................................................... 5-99 IEC 870-5-103
specifications................................................................. 2-21 explained ........................................................................ 2-7
FREQUENCY RATE OF CHANGE IEC CURVES .................................................................. 5-146
Modbus registers ...........................................................B-16 IED SETUP ....................................................................... 1-5
FREQUENCY TRACKING ........................................ 5-99, 6-17 IEEE C37.94 COMMUNICATIONS ................... 3-42, 3-44, 3-47
FREQUENCY, NOMINAL .................................................. 5-98 IEEE CURVES ................................................................ 5-144
FUNCTION SETTING ......................................................... 5-4 IN SERVICE INDICATOR ...........................................1-19, 7-5
FUSE ............................................................................... 2-23 INCOMPATIBLE HARDWARE ERROR ................................ 7-5
Fuses not field-replaceable ............................................... 10-9 INPUTS
AC current ............................................................ 2-22, 5-97
AC voltage ............................................................ 2-22, 5-98
contact inputs .......................................... 2-22, 5-195, 5-220
G dcmA inputs .......................................................... 2-22, 3-25
direct inputs ...................................................................2-22
G.703 .................................................... 3-36, 3-37, 3-38, 3-41
IRIG-B .................................................................. 2-22, 3-31
G.703 WIRE SIZE ............................................................ 3-36
remote inputs ................................. 2-22, 5-201, 5-202, 5-203
GATEWAY ADDRESS ...................................................... 5-31
RTD inputs ............................................................ 2-22, 3-25
GE TYPE IAC CURVES .................................................. 5-147
virtual .......................................................................... 5-197
GROUND CURRENT METERING ...................................... 6-15
INSPECTION CHECKLIST ................................................. 1-2
GROUND IOC
INSTALLATION
FlexLogic™ operands .................................................. 5-121
communications .............................................................3-29
logic ............................................................................ 5-156
CT inputs .............................................................. 3-11, 3-12
settings ....................................................................... 5-155
RS485 ...........................................................................3-30
GROUND TIME OVERCURRENT
settings ..........................................................................5-95
see entry for GROUND TOC
INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT
GROUND TOC
see PHASE, GROUND, and NEUTRAL IOC entries
FlexLogic™ operands .................................................. 5-121
INTER-RELAY COMMUNICATIONS ..................................2-25
logic ............................................................................ 5-155
INTRODUCTION ................................................................ 1-3
INVERSE TIME UNDERVOLTAGE .................................. 5-166
settings ....................................................................... 5-154
IOC
specifications................................................................. 2-19
see PHASE, GROUND, and NEUTRAL IOC entries
GROUPED ELEMENTS .................................................. 5-138
GSSE ................................................ 5-202, 5-203, 5-204, 6-5
iv B30 Bus Differential System GE Multilin

INDEX
IP ADDRESS ................................................................... 5-29 MODBUS

enter on front panel ...............................................1-18, 4-22 data logger ..................................................................... B-7
gateway ........................................................................ 5-31 event recorder ................................................................ B-8
IRIG-B exception responses ....................................................... B-6
connection .................................................................... 3-31 execute operation ........................................................... B-5
error messages ............................................................... 7-7 flex state parameters ..................................................... 5-84
specifications ................................................................ 2-22 function code 03/04h ....................................................... B-4
function code 05h ........................................................... B-5
function code 06h ........................................................... B-5
function code 10h ........................................................... B-6
K introduction .................................................................... B-1
memory map data formats ............................................. B-73
KEYPAD ..................................................................1-18, 4-22
obtaining files ................................................................. B-7
oscillography .................................................................. B-7
read/write settings/actual values ...................................... B-4
L settings ................................................................ 5-34, 5-64
store multiple settings ..................................................... B-6
LAMPTEST ........................................................................ 7-3 store single setting .......................................................... B-5
LANGUAGE ..................................................................... 5-24 supported function codes ................................................ B-4
LASER MODULE ............................................................. 3-34 user map ..................................................... 5-64, B-15, B-34
LATCHING OUTPUTS MODEL INFORMATION .................................................... 6-21
application example ........................................... 5-199, 5-200 MODIFICATION FILE NUMBER ........................................ 6-21
error messages ............................................................... 7-8 MODULE FAILURE ERROR ......................................... 7-5, 7-6
settings ....................................................................... 5-198 MODULES
specifications ................................................................ 2-23 communications ............................................................. 3-29
LED INDICATORS ........................ 4-14, 4-15, 4-16, 4-17, 5-75 CT ................................................................................. 3-12
LED TEST CT/VT ..................................................................... 3-11, 5-6
FlexLogic operand ....................................................... 5-123 direct inputs/outputs ....................................................... 3-34
settings ......................................................................... 5-73 insertion ........................................................................ 10-1
specifications ................................................................ 2-21 order codes ................................................................... 2-14
LINK POWER BUDGET .................................................... 2-25 power supply ................................................................. 3-10
LOCAL SETTING AUTHORIZATION ................................... 4-2 transducer I/O ................................................................ 3-26
LOGIC GATES ............................................................... 5-125 VT ................................................................................. 3-12
LOGOUT USERS FORCEFULLY ........................................ 7-2 withdrawal ..................................................................... 10-1
LOGS, SYSTEM ............................................................... 5-22 MONITORING ELEMENTS .............................................. 5-185
LOST PASSWORD ............................................................ 5-8 MOUNTING ................................................................. 3-1, 3-2
M N
MAINTENANCE NAMEPLATE ...................................................................... 1-2
alert to replace battery ..................................................... 7-6 NEUTRAL INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT
battery .......................................................................... 10-3 see entry for NEUTRAL IOC
module replacement ...................................................... 10-1 NEUTRAL IOC
MAINTENANCE COMMANDS ............................................. 7-3 FlexLogic™ operands ................................................... 5-121
MANUFACTURING DATE ................................................. 6-21 logic ............................................................................ 5-154
MAXIMUM CT/VT WIRE SIZE ........................................... 3-11 settings ....................................................................... 5-153
MEMORY MAP DATA FORMATS ...................................... B-73 specifications ................................................................. 2-19
MENU HIERARCHY .................................................1-18, 4-24 NEUTRAL OVERVOLTAGE
MENU NAVIGATION ................................................1-18, 4-23 FlexLogic operands ...................................................... 5-121
METERING logic ............................................................................ 5-168
conventions ................................................................... 6-11 Modbus registers .......................................................... B-43
current .......................................................................... 2-21 settings ....................................................................... 5-168
frequency ...................................................................... 2-21 specifications ................................................................. 2-19
voltage .......................................................................... 2-21 NEUTRAL TIME OVERCURRENT
METERING CONVENTIONS ............................................. 6-12 see entry for NEUTRAL TOC
NEUTRAL TOC
FlexLogic™ operands ................................................... 5-121
logic ............................................................................ 5-153
settings ....................................................................... 5-152
specifications ................................................................. 2-19
NON-VOLATILE LATCHES
settings ....................................................................... 5-137
specifications ................................................................. 2-20
GE Multilin B30 Bus Differential System v

INDEX
PC SOFTWARE
O see entry for ENERVISTA UR SETUP
PERMISSIVE FUNCTIONS .............................................. 5-165
OBTAIN LIST OF PORT NUMBERS .................................. 5-29 PER-UNIT QUANTITY ........................................................ 5-4
ONE SHOTS .................................................................. 5-125 PHASE ANGLE METERING ..............................................6-11
OPERATING TEMPERATURE .......................................... 2-26 PHASE CURRENT METERING .........................................6-15
OPERATING TIMES ......................................................... 2-19 PHASE INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT
ORDER CODES ....................... 2-8, 2-10, 2-11, 2-13, 6-21, 7-3 see entry for PHASE IOC
ORDER CODES, UPDATING .............................................. 7-3 PHASE IOC
ORDERING .............................................. 2-8, 2-10, 2-11, 2-13 FlexLogic™ operands ................................................... 5-121
OSCILLATORY TRANSIENT TESTING ............................. 2-27 logic ............................................................................ 5-152
OSCILLOGRAPHY specifications .................................................................2-19
actual values ................................................................. 6-19 PHASE ROTATION ...........................................................5-98
clearing .................................................................. 5-25, 7-2 PHASE TIME OVERCURRENT
Modbus .......................................................................... B-7 see entry for PHASE TOC
Modbus registers ..................................................B-20, B-31 PHASE TOC
settings ......................................................................... 5-70 FlexLogic™ operands ................................................... 5-121
specifications................................................................. 2-21 logic ............................................................................ 5-150
via COMTRADE .............................................................. B-7 Modbus registers ........................................................... B-38
via EnerVista software ..................................................... 4-2 settings ........................................................................ 5-149
OUT OF SERVICE ...................................................... 2-3, 5-8 specifications .................................................................2-19
OUTPUT LOGIC ............................................................... 8-10 PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE
OUTPUTS FlexLogic operands ...................................................... 5-122
contact outputs ............................................................ 5-198 logic ............................................................................ 5-167
control power ................................................................. 2-24 Modbus registers ........................................................... B-41
critical failure relay ........................................................ 2-23 settings ........................................................................ 5-166
Fast Form-C relay .......................................................... 2-23 specifications .................................................................2-19
Form-A relay ................................................2-23, 3-13, 3-14 PHONE NUMBER FOR SUPPORT ..................................... 1-2
Form-C relay ........................................................ 2-23, 3-13 PORT NUMBER LIST ........................................................5-29
latching outputs .................................................. 2-23, 5-198 POWER SUPPLY
remote outputs ............................................................ 5-204 description .....................................................................3-10
virtual outputs .............................................................. 5-201 low range .......................................................................2-23
OVERCURRENT CURVE TYPES .................................... 5-144 removal to replace battery ..............................................10-3
OVERCURRENT CURVES specifications .................................................................2-23
definite time................................................................. 5-148 POWER SYSTEM
FlexCurves .................................................................. 5-148 Modbus registers ........................................................... B-34
I2T .............................................................................. 5-148 PREFERENCES
IAC ............................................................................. 5-147 Modbus registers ........................................................... B-28
IEC ............................................................................. 5-146 PROCESS BUS
IEEE ........................................................................... 5-144 order codes ....................................................................2-11
OVERVOLTAGE overview ........................................................................3-13
auxiliary ............................................................. 2-20, 5-169 PRODUCT INFORMATION ........................................ 6-21, B-9
neutral ................................................................ 2-19, 5-168 PRODUCT SETUP .....................................................5-8, 5-18
PRODUCTION TESTS ......................................................2-27
PROTECTION ELEMENTS ................................................. 5-4
PRP
P actual values ..................................................................6-11
explained .......................................................................5-30
PANEL CUTOUT ......................................................... 3-1, 3-2
settings ..........................................................................5-29
PARALLEL REDUNDANCY PROTOCOL
specifications .................................................................2-24
actual values ................................................................. 6-11
PU QUANTITY ................................................................... 5-4
explained....................................................................... 5-30
PUSHBUTTONS, USER-PROGRAMMABLE
settings ......................................................................... 5-29
see USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS
specifications................................................................. 2-24
PARITY ........................................................................... 5-26
PASSWORD SECURITY
FlexLogic operands ...................................................... 5-124 R
PASSWORDS
change does not take relay out of service .................. 2-3, 5-8 RADIUS server ......................................................... 5-16, G-1
changing ....................................................................... 4-27 REAL TIME CLOCK
for settings templates ....................................................... 4-5 Modbus registers ........................................................... B-31
lost password .................................................................. 5-8 settings ..........................................................................5-64
Modbus registers ..................................................B-18, B-28 REAR TERMINAL ASSIGNMENTS ..................................... 3-7
overview ........................................................................ 1-19 RECLOSER CURVES .......................................... 5-112, 5-148
reset to factory defaults ................................................... 5-8
security ........................................................................... 2-3
settings ........................................................................... 2-3
vi B30 Bus Differential System GE Multilin

INDEX
REDUNDANCY SAVING SETTING DOES NOT TAKE RELAY OUT OF SERVICE

PRP actual values ......................................................... 6-11 2-3, 5-8
PRP explained .............................................................. 5-30 SBO ................................................................................. 5-54
settings ......................................................................... 5-29 SECURITY ................................................................ 5-15, 8-6
specifications ................................................................ 2-24 delete files and records .................................................. 10-8
RELAY ACTIVATION ....................................................... 4-26 Forceful user logout ......................................................... 7-2
RELAY ARCHITECTURE ................................................ 5-117 SECURITY AUDIT LIST OF PORT NUMBER ..................... 5-29
RELAY MAINTENANCE ..................................................... 7-3 SELECT BEFORE OPERATE ............................................ 5-54
RELAY NAME .................................................................. 5-95 SELECTOR SWITCH
RELAY NOT PROGRAMMED ........................................... 1-19 actual values ................................................................... 6-6
REMOTE DEVICES application example ..................................................... 5-178
actual values ................................................................... 6-5 FlexLogic operands ...................................................... 5-122
device ID ..................................................................... 5-202 logic ............................................................................ 5-179
error messages ............................................................... 7-8 Modbus registers .......................................................... B-49
FlexLogic operands ..................................................... 5-124 settings ....................................................................... 5-174
Modbus registers .................................................. B-15, B-19 specifications ................................................................. 2-21
settings ....................................................................... 5-201 timing ............................................................... 5-177, 5-178
statistics ......................................................................... 6-5 Self-test errors ................................................................. 7-10
REMOTE DPS INPUTS SELF-TESTS
actual values ................................................................... 6-4 description ....................................................................... 7-4
settings ....................................................................... 5-203 error messages ......................................................... 7-5, 7-6
REMOTE INPUTS FlexLogic operands ...................................................... 5-124
actual values ................................................................... 6-3 Modbus registers ............................................................ B-9
FlexLogic operands ..................................................... 5-123 SERIAL NUMBER ............................................................. 6-21
Modbus registers .................................................. B-15, B-19 SERIAL PORTS
settings ....................................................................... 5-202 settings ......................................................................... 5-26
specifications ................................................................ 2-22 SERVER UNAVAILABLE SELF-TEST .................................. 7-9
REMOTE OUTPUTS SERVICE LIFE EXPECTED .............................................. 1-19
DNA-1 bit pair ............................................................. 5-204 SETTING GROUPS .......................... 5-122, 5-138, 5-172, B-40
Modbus registers .................................................. B-66, B-67 SETTING LOCK SELF-TEST ............................................... 7-9
UserSt-1 bit pair .......................................................... 5-204 SETTINGS
REMOTE SETTING AUTHORIZATION ................................ 4-2 change does not take relay out of service .................. 2-3, 5-8
REPAIR .................................................................... 10-9, H-9 SETTINGS FILE ................................................................. 4-1
REPLACEMENT MODULES .....................................2-14, 2-15 takes relay out of service when loaded ............................. 4-2
REQUIREMENTS FOR INSTALLATION .............................. 1-5 SETTINGS TEMPLATES
RESET TO FACTORY DEFAULTS ...................................... 5-8 description ....................................................................... 4-4
RESETTING ................................................. 5-8, 5-124, 5-204 editing ............................................................................. 4-4
to factory defaults ............................................................ 5-8 enabling .......................................................................... 4-4
RESTRAINING CURRENTS ............................................... 8-5 Modbus registers .......................................................... B-72
REVISION HISTORY ..........................................................H-1 password protection ......................................................... 4-5
RF IMMUNITY ................................................................. 2-27 removing ......................................................................... 4-7
RFI, CONDUCTED ........................................................... 2-27 viewing ............................................................................ 4-6
RMS CURRENT ............................................................... 2-21 SETTINGS, CHANGING ................................................... 4-25
RMS VOLTAGE ............................................................... 2-21 SIGNAL LOSS DETECTION FOR FIBER ........................... 5-30
RS232 SIGNAL SOURCES
configuration ................................................................... 1-9 description ....................................................................... 5-5
specifications ................................................................ 2-24 metering ........................................................................ 6-15
wiring ............................................................................ 3-28 SIGNAL TYPES .................................................................. 1-3
RS422 SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM .............................................. 2-1, 2-2
configuration ................................................................. 3-39 SITE LIST, CREATING ....................................................... 4-1
timing ............................................................................ 3-40 SNTP PROTOCOL
two-channel application ................................................. 3-39 accuracy ........................................................................ 2-24
with fiber interface ......................................................... 3-41 error messages ................................................................ 7-7
RS485 Modbus registers ................................................. B-30, B-31
description .................................................................... 3-30 settings ......................................................................... 5-68
specifications ................................................................ 2-24 SOFTWARE
RTD INPUTS installation ....................................................................... 1-5
actual values ................................................................. 6-18 see entry for ENERVISTA UR SETUP
Modbus registers .................................................. B-22, B-36 SOFTWARE ARCHITECTURE ............................................ 1-4
settings ....................................................................... 5-214 SOFTWARE, PC
specifications ................................................................ 2-22 see entry for EnerVista UR Setup
SOURCE FREQUENCY .................................................... 6-17
SOURCE TRANSFER SCHEMES .................................... 5-165
S
SATURATION DETECTOR ................................................. 8-8
GE Multilin B30 Bus Differential System vii

INDEX
SOURCES TRACEABILITY
description....................................................................... 5-5 data ...................................................................... 4-11, 4-12
example use of ............................................................ 5-100 overview ........................................................................4-10
metering ........................................................................ 6-15 rules ..............................................................................4-12
Modbus registers .........................................B-16, B-17, B-33 TRACKING FREQUENCY ....................................... 6-17, B-43
settings ......................................................................... 5-99 TRANSDUCER I/O
SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................ 2-19 actual values ..................................................................6-18
STANDARD ABBREVIATIONS ........................................... H-6 settings ............................................................. 5-213, 5-214
STATUS INDICATORS ............................................ 4-14, 4-16 specifications .................................................................2-22
STORAGE ..................................................................... 10-10 wiring .............................................................................3-26
STORAGE TEMPERATURE .............................................. 2-26 TRIP BUS
SUMMATOR FlexLogic operands ...................................................... 5-123
Modbus registers ...........................................................B-43 Modbus registers ........................................................... B-46
SUPPORT, TECHNICAL ..................................................... 1-2 settings ........................................................................ 5-170
SURGE IMMUNITY .......................................................... 2-27 TRIP LEDs .......................................................................5-75
SYMMETRICAL COMPONENTS METERING ..................... 6-12 TROUBLE INDICATOR ..............................................1-19, 7-4
SYNCHROCHECK TROUBLESHOOTING
actual values .......................................................... 6-9, 6-18 breaker not working ...................................................... 5-180
SYNCHROPHASORS setting not working ....................................................... 5-180
commands ....................................................................... 7-3 TROUBLESHOOTING ACCESS TO DEVICE ......................1-14
SYSLOG .......................................................................... 5-22
SYSTEM FREQUENCY .................................................... 5-98
SYSTEM LOGS ................................................................ 5-22
SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS ................................................. 1-5 U
SYSTEM SETUP .............................................................. 5-97
UL APPROVAL .................................................................2-28
UNABLE TO ACCESS DEVICE .........................................1-14
UNABLE TO PUT RELAY IN FLASH MODE ........................ 4-2
T UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS
commands .....................................................................5-25
TARGET MESSAGES ......................................................... 7-4 resetting ......................................................................... 7-2
TARGET SETTING ............................................................. 5-5 UNAUTHORIZED FIRMWARE ATTEMPT MESSAGE ........... 7-9
TARGETS MENU ............................................................... 7-4 UNAUTHORIZED SETTING WRITE MESSAGE ................... 7-9
TCP PORT NUMBER ........................................................ 5-55 UNDERVOLTAGE
TECHNICAL SUPPORT ...................................................... 1-2 phase ................................................................. 2-19, 5-166
TELEPROTECTION UNDERVOLTAGE CHARACTERISTICS ........................... 5-165
actual values ................................................................... 6-4 UNEXPECTED RESTART ERROR ..................................... 7-8
clearing counters ............................................................. 7-2 UNINSTALL ......................................................................10-8
FlexLogic operands ...................................................... 5-122 UNIT NOT PROGRAMMED ........................................5-95, 7-5
logic ............................................................................ 5-210 UNPACKING THE RELAY .................................................. 1-2
Modbus registers ...........................................................B-49 UNRETURNED MESSAGES ALARM .................................5-93
overview ...................................................................... 5-209 UPDATING ORDER CODE ................................................. 7-3
settings .................................................... 5-94, 5-209, 5-210 URPC
specifications................................................................. 2-22 see entry for ENERVISTA UR SETUP
TEMPERATURE MONITOR ..................................... 5-124, 7-8 USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS
TERMINALS ....................................................................... 3-7 example .........................................................................5-86
TESTING invoking and scrolling .....................................................5-84
force contact inputs ..................................................... 5-220 Modbus registers .................................................. B-28, B-34
force contact outputs ................................................... 5-221 settings ................................................................. 5-84, 5-86
lamp test ......................................................................... 7-3 specifications .................................................................2-21
self-test error messages ................................................... 7-4 USER-PROGRAMMABLE FAULT REPORT
THEORY OF OPERATION .................................................. 8-1 actual values ..................................................................6-19
THERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION clearing ...................................................................5-25, 7-2
Modbus registers ...........................................................B-42 Modbus registers ........................................................... B-20
settings ....................................................................... 5-192 settings ..........................................................................5-69
specifications................................................................. 2-20 USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDs
TIME ................................................................................. 7-2 defaults..........................................................................4-17
TIME OVERCURRENT description ............................................................ 4-15, 4-16
see PHASE, NEUTRAL, and GROUND TOC entries Modbus registers ........................................................... B-31
TIMERS ......................................................................... 5-131 settings ..........................................................................5-75
TOC specifications .................................................................2-20
ground ......................................................................... 5-155 USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS
neutral ......................................................................... 5-153 FlexLogic operands ...................................................... 5-124
phase .......................................................................... 5-149 Modbus registers .................................................. B-35, B-42
specifications................................................................. 2-19 settings ..........................................................................5-79
Torque for screws .............................................................. 3-8 specifications .................................................................2-21
viii B30 Bus Differential System GE Multilin

INDEX
USER-PROGRAMMABLE SELF TESTS VOLTAGE RESTRAINT CHARACTERISTIC ..................... 5-149

Modbus registers ........................................................... B-33 VT INPUTS ...................................................... 3-12, 5-6, 5-98
settings ......................................................................... 5-76 VT WIRING ...................................................................... 3-12
USERST-1 BIT PAIR ...................................................... 5-204 VTFF
see VT FUSE FAILURE
V
W
VIBRATION TESTING ...................................................... 2-27
VIRTUAL INPUTS WARNINGS ........................................................................ 1-1
actual values ................................................................... 6-3 WARRANTY ...................................................................... H-9
commands ...................................................................... 7-1 WEB SERVER PROTOCOL .............................................. 5-55
FlexLogic operands ..................................................... 5-123 WEBSITE ........................................................................... 1-2
logic ............................................................................ 5-197 WIRE SIZE
Modbus registers .................................................... B-9, B-59 CT/VT ............................................................................ 3-11
settings ....................................................................... 5-197 G.703 and fiber interface ................................................ 3-41
VIRTUAL OUTPUTS G.703 interface .............................................................. 3-36
actual values ................................................................... 6-5 RS422 and fiber interface ............................................... 3-41
FlexLogic operands ..................................................... 5-123 RS422 interface ............................................................. 3-39
Modbus registers ........................................................... B-60 WITHDRAWAL FROM OPERATION .................................. 10-8
settings ....................................................................... 5-201
VOLTAGE BANKS ........................................................... 5-98
VOLTAGE DEVIATIONS ................................................... 2-27
VOLTAGE ELEMENTS ................................................... 5-165 Z
VOLTAGE METERING
ZERO SEQUENCE CORE BALANCE ................................ 3-12
specifications ................................................................ 2-21
ZONING ............................................................................. 9-3
values ........................................................................... 6-16
GE Multilin B30 Bus Differential System ix

INDEX
x B30 Bus Differential System GE Multilin

B30 Bus Differential System: Grid Solutions

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

B30 Bus Differential System: Grid Solutions

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

B30 Bus Differential System: Grid Solutions

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GE

Grid Solutions Addendum

B30 Bus Differential System

B30 revision: 7.2x

Manual P/N: 1601-0109-AA5 (GEK-119551D)

1. GETTING STARTED 1.1 IMPORTANT PROCEDURES

2. PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.1 INTRODUCTION

3. HARDWARE 3.1 DESCRIPTION

GE Multilin B30 Bus Differential System iii

4. HUMAN INTERFACES 4.1 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE INTERFACE

5. SETTINGS 5.1 OVERVIEW

iv B30 Bus Differential System GE Multilin

5.2.15 DIRECT INPUTS AND OUTPUTS ................................................................... 5-86

GE Multilin B30 Bus Differential System v

6. ACTUAL VALUES 6.1 OVERVIEW

7. COMMANDS AND 7.1 COMMANDS

8. THEORY OF OPERATION 8.1 INTRODUCTION

vi B30 Bus Differential System GE Multilin

8.3 DIFFERENTIAL PRINCIPLE

9. APPLICATION OF 9.1 OVERVIEW

10. MAINTENANCE 10.1 MODULES

GE Multilin B30 Bus Differential System vii

A. FLEXANALOG AND A.1 PARAMETER LISTS

B. MODBUS B.1 MODBUS RTU PROTOCOL

C. IEC 61850 C.1 OVERVIEW

viii B30 Bus Differential System GE Multilin

C.5.5 ABOUT SCD FILES .........................................................................................C-18

D. IEC 60870-5-103 D.1 IEC 60870-5-103

E. IEC 60870-5-104 E.1 IEC 60870-5-104

F. DNP COMMUNICATIONS F.1 DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT

G. RADIUS SERVER G.1 RADIUS SERVER CONFIGURATION

H. MISCELLANEOUS H.1 CHANGE NOTES

GE Multilin B30 Bus Differential System ix

x B30 Bus Differential System GE Multilin

1 GETTING STARTED 1.1IMPORTANT PROCEDURES

GE Multilin B30 Bus Differential System 1-1

1.1.2 INSPECTION PROCEDURE

FIGURE 1–1: REAR NAMEPLATE (EXAMPLE)

1-2 B30 Bus Differential System GE Multilin

1.2UR OVERVIEW 1.2.1 INTRODUCTION TO THE UR

1.2.2 HARDWARE ARCHITECTURE

Input elements CPU module Output elements

FIGURE 1–2: UR BLOCK DIAGRAM

GE Multilin B30 Bus Differential System 1-3

1.2.3 SOFTWARE ARCHITECTURE

1-4 B30 Bus Differential System GE Multilin

1.3ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE 1.3.1 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

1.3.2 SOFTWARE INSTALLATION

FIGURE 1–3: ADDING A UR DEVICE IN LAUNCHPAD WINDOW

GE Multilin B30 Bus Differential System 1-5

FIGURE 1–4: IDENTIFYING THE UR DEVICE TYPE

FIGURE 1–5: UR DEVICE ADDED TO LAUNCHPAD WINDOW

1-6 B30 Bus Differential System GE Multilin

1.3.3 CONFIGURING THE B30 FOR SOFTWARE ACCESS

B) CONFIGURING SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS

FIGURE 1–6: CONFIGURING SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS

GE Multilin B30 Bus Differential System 1-7

C) CONFIGURING ETHERNET COMMUNICATIONS

FIGURE 1–7: CONFIGURING ETHERNET COMMUNICATIONS